BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 FROM THE 
 
 SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 1891 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PA 4461.S54 1885 
 
 Notes on Thucyditles, 
 
 3 1924 026 611 206 
 
PA 
 
 . i^ 
 
 ,n 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
s 
 'n 
 
 %^4--^^, f {Jri/ 
 
 
 KOTBS 
 
 THUCYDIDES 
 
 BOOKS I. II. AND III. 
 
^ 
 
 LONDOir : 
 GIIEEBT AND EITIN&TON, LTMITED, 
 ST. JOHN'S SQUAEa. 
 
NOTES 
 
 ON 
 
 THUCYDIDES 
 
 ORIGINAL AND COMPILED 
 
 JOHN G. SHEPPAKD, M.A. 
 
 Zaie Head Matter of KiddermiTister School 
 Formerly Fellow of Wadham College, Oxford 
 
 AlTD 
 
 LEWIS EVANS, M.A. 
 
 Zate Mead Master of Sandbach ScTiool 
 Formerly Fellow of Wadham College, Oxford 
 
 BOOKS I., II.. AND III. 
 
 NEW EDITION 
 
 LONDON 
 LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 
 
 1885 
 
A. v-xyy^/ 
 
ADYEETISEMENT. 
 
 SINCE tlie last edition of these Notes on Thucydides was pub- 
 lished, both the authors have died ; and the work which they 
 had ably begun must remain a fragment. 
 
 The publishers, feeling sure that annotations marked by so 
 much ability and learning will be acceptable to many students, 
 have determined on adding to the new edition of the Notes on 
 Books I. and II. such further portions of the commentary as the 
 authors were enabled to complete. These unfortunately do not 
 go beyond the third book ; but the notes to the first and second 
 books have had the benefit of their revision. 
 
 The authors' preface stands unaltered as it appeared in the 
 last edition. 
 
The original of tliis bool< is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 92402661 1 206 
 
PEEFACE. 
 
 THE present publication was suggested by Mr. Dawson Turner's 
 Notes on Herodotus, and is intended to supply those wants, 
 the existence of which the very large sale of that useful volume 
 seems to indicate. It is perhaps well to state thus much lest the 
 reader should misunderstand the character of the work, and be 
 induced to estimate it by a standard which it does not aiFect to 
 reach. It does not, for instance, deal in conjectural emendation, 
 it does not contain a digest of various readings, or anything like 
 an apparatus criticus for Thucydides, and it leaves untouched, or 
 only briefly notices, many matters which a perfect edition of an 
 historical writer ought to discuss. What it attempts is some- 
 thing more humble, but at the same time, we trust, not altogether 
 useless ; for it endeavours to furnish University Students with 
 that amount of information which their second examination may 
 be regarded as likely to require. What this amount exactly is, 
 cannot, under present circumstances, very easily be estimated. 
 The period usually devoted to the preparation for a Universtiy 
 degree, when compared with the immensely increased require- 
 ments of the various examinations, will, to the student at any 
 rate, appear but brief; and the arrangement of the relative 
 claims of different authors upon his time, is perhaps one of the 
 greatest difficulties with which he has to contend. If, for in- 
 stance, he desires to raise himself to the standard of philosophical 
 acquirement proposed by Mr. Pattison,* and of historical know- 
 ledge by Mr. Froude,f how is he to find leisure for that careful 
 and critical study of the classical authors which Prof. Conington J 
 has so truly described as the only useful way of practising such 
 study at all ? 
 
 We do not presume to answer a question which must in some 
 
 * Oxford Essays, 1855. t Ibid. J Inaugural Lecture. 
 
VUl PREFACE. 
 
 measure perplex those much more competent to enter upon it 
 than ourselves ; but we venture to say that thus much at any rate 
 IS clear. The very conditions of the case render the examination, 
 under such circumstances, of what commentators have written in 
 various languages upon the text of Thucydides, nothing less than 
 a physical impossibility. And yet, unless we are prepared to 
 surrender much of what hitherto has been included under the 
 idea of scholarship, an acquaintance to some extent with the 
 labours of the great scholars of this and other ages, and a prac- 
 tical imitation of their method, is surely necessary to any one 
 who aspires to be called by that once respected name. 
 
 One help towards overcoming the difficulty might perhaps be 
 found, if competent persons were to collect, within moderate 
 compass, so much matter bearing uppn the various works, or 
 portions of works, taken up for examination, as would affiard 
 a reasonable amount of incidental information, and at the 
 same time convey an adequate notion of the way in which 
 these subjects have been treated by the great masters of classical 
 criticism. 
 
 This accordingly is what we have tried to do here : imper- 
 fectly, perhaps, but to the best of a judgment tolerably instructed 
 by experience. If these notes do not contain much less than 
 what candidates for the second University examination will re- 
 quire, they may perhaps fairly deprecate criticism for not con- 
 taining more. 
 
 Persons who exercise their wit upon the pursuit of classical 
 studies, are fond of declaring that the chief duty of the editor of a 
 classical work consists in abusing his predecessors. Happily, to an 
 editor of Thucydides this is impossible. To pass over, for the sake 
 of brevity, though scarcely perhaps with justice, many early com- 
 mentators of great learning and varied meiit, the names of Poppo, 
 Arnold, Goller, Bloomfield, and Kriiger demand the sincerest 
 respect from any person whose lot it may be to labour in the same 
 field of knowledge. Poppo's great work is truly a monument of 
 erudition constructed with materials gathered from every possible 
 source ; Arnold's affords a treasure of historical and geographical 
 knowledge, and, though certainly deficient in the more strictly 
 critical portion, must ever remain an admirable specimen of sound 
 sense, good taste, and eloquent language. Goller has the German 
 fault of over-subtjety, and sometimes confuses himself as well as 
 
PREFACE. is 
 
 his readers ; but he has done much for Thucydides, and merits the 
 highest praise. High praise also must be assigned to the industry 
 of Dr. Bloomfield, whose laborious and voluminous edition is par- 
 ticularly valuable for its references to later Greek literature, and 
 the historical writers who have imitated Thucydides. It would be 
 no small merit in any writer to follow respectably where others of 
 such ability and learning have gone before him. But Kriiger 
 has done more than this, — much more. We cannot mention the 
 name of an author from whom we have learnt so much, without 
 declaring that his edition, in respect of acuteness, soundness of 
 judgment, and general accuracy, seems to us to occupy one of 
 the highest, if not the highest place among commentaries upon 
 Thucydides.* 
 
 Of translations we have consulted three : — Mr. Dale's ; a Ger- 
 man version, lately published by Engelmaun at Leipsic; and the last 
 French version, by M. Zevort (Paris, 1852). Mr. Dale's work is 
 too well known to require any notice from us. If we have men- 
 tioned it occasionally for the purpose of expressing difference of 
 opinion rather than agreement, this arises from the nature of our 
 relative offices, and not from any desire to disparage so able a per- 
 formance. The translation published by Engelmann — so far as 
 we are competent to form a judgment, embodying, as it does, so 
 much careful exposition — is even of a still higher character, and 
 deserves to be classed as one of the most successful among the 
 many successful attempts of the kind for which Germany is 
 distinguished. 
 
 M. Zevort has produced a readable version in a lively manner, 
 but what he himself states generally, is at any rate true of his own 
 language: ' Thucydide ne saurait etre traduit a proprement parler.' 
 The French idiom offers no counterpart to the massive dignity of 
 the Greek, and M. Zevort has himself so well appreciated the diffi- 
 culty of the style with which he has had to deal, that we shall, we 
 think, consult the interest of the student by referring him to the 
 able preface prefixed to his translation. 
 
 The learned Editor of Notes upon the Apostolical Epistles, Dr. 
 Peile, has kindly placed at our disposal a few remarks upon several 
 
 * The edition of the first two books, ty the late T. K. Arnold, seems so 
 entirely a work of the scissors, as not to require a separate mention. Even 
 where Mr. Arnold's own opinions are expressed, they appear much too hastily 
 formed. 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 difficult passages, written by him many years ago. Of these we 
 have made some use, and should have made still more, had it 
 not been from the hope that he may himself some day be induced 
 to give them to the world in a more expanded and complete 
 form. 
 
 These, then, are mainly the sources from which the following 
 notes, where they are not original, have been drawn. There are 
 of course others, such as Mr. G-rote's great work, Cramer's Greece, 
 the Fasti Hellenici, aud Mr. Jelf's edition of Kiihner, which it is 
 unnecessary to particularize. We hope that we have written with 
 care, but we know that many faults, both of omission and commis- 
 sion, must occur in a work of this nature, even when performed 
 by scholars very far more accurate and able than ourselves. To 
 any one who will kindly take the trouble to point out such errors 
 we shall feel sincerely grateful, for it is only by co-operation of this 
 sort, given, as we trust it would be received, in a right spirit, that 
 we can hope to effect anything truly and permanently useful. 
 
 ' Le moi est haissable,' says a distinguished Frenchman ;* and 
 therefore the occasional recurrence of the personal pronoun in the 
 following pages may to some persons be offensive. It will be found 
 in those portions of the work executed before I had the advantage 
 of any assistance from my present coadjutor, and in various scat- 
 tered remarks, which had long been in preparation. Upon the whole 
 it seemed a less evil than perpetual circumlocution; nor could I in 
 any other way have expressed my own judgment between conflict- 
 ing opinions with sufficient simplicity to be satisfactory to myself. 
 After all, quite as much presumption may be latent in a periphrasis 
 as in a personal pronoun, and the latter appears to keep up more 
 clearly that unity in the various elements of a commentary, which 
 it is hoped they may exhibit from having been moulded into form 
 by a single mind. 
 
 The notes to the first two books are here given in a separate 
 form. Those to the next two are far advanced, and will, I trust, 
 speedily follow. These will form a commentary upon that por- 
 tion of our author generally taken up by students as one subject 
 
 * M. Philartte Chasles, Etudes sur I'Antiqaite, p. ^, 
 
PREFACE. xi 
 
 for the second classical examination in the University of Oxford, 
 and for this object they are primarily designed; but they may 
 perhaps also be found suited to the use of the higher classes in 
 schools, for which purpose, indeed, they have been already em- 
 ployed. 
 
 I subjoin a short Appendix on the Aorist usage to which re- 
 ference is frequently made in the commentary; and some few 
 remarks upon a celebrated passage which qould not conveniently 
 be comprised within the limits of a note. 
 
 J. G. S. 
 
NOTES 
 
 ON 
 
 THUCYDIDES. 
 
 % 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Chaptee I. — (a.) QovKvSlSris. This simple statement of their mime and 
 style appears to have been adopted by the ancient historians to identify their 
 works. Cf. the preface of Herodotus. Kriig. adds HecatBBus (cited by De- 
 metrius TT. epfi. 2) and Ocellus (bei Klem. Al. vi. p. 741), cf. Dio. Chrys. 53, 
 p. 555. The formula recurs v. 26, where see note. In summing up the years 
 of the war, he simply uses his name. But when spoken of as General — iv. 
 104 — his full official style is given, and his Father's name appended. 
 (vv4ypa\fie. The compound verb implies the compilation and arrangement of 
 materials. So Sallust ' conscribere ' and ' componere.' Sail. ^is^. i. i. 
 ws iiro\4iJLT]<roLV. — How they carried it on — i.e. its details and method, and 
 therefore more than f>v iir., which some have suggested. Cf. t^ ctteito it ^iro- 
 Aefji-^dr] i^Tiyrja'ofiait V. 26, Jelf, § 899, 7. evdhs KadltTTa^evov — 
 
 as soon as it was set on foot, cf. Jelf, 530, 2. We must understand that he made 
 notes and collected documents from the very first. The regular composition 
 was the work of a later period — probably in part of his exile. MuUer {Sist. 
 Lit. Greece, p. 485) is of opinion that all he wrote at Scapte Hyle was ouly a 
 preliminary labour in the way of memoirs. He did not commence the actual 
 arrangement of particulars till after the end of the war, when he was again 
 residing in his own country. This is shown partly by the frequent references 
 to the duration, the issue, and the general connexion of the war, but especially 
 by tlie fact that the History was left unfinished. Cf. i. 13, 93 ; ii. 13, 65 ; 
 V. 26. ' He lived to complete six books entirely ; to the seventh, as some 
 think, his final touches are wanting ; the eighth is altogether unfinished.' Am. 
 See Appendix ii. iXirlffas. The intermediate sense of the word 
 
 signifying ' expectation.' No idea of hope can be implied here, or in such cases 
 as Soph. Ajax vv. 606, 795, Trach. 1 1 1 . The scholiast therefore was right in 
 his remark, ^ATTiVas, ov fi.6vov ^irl a.ya9^ aW* awXus 4ttX rp tov fitWovros ^K^dtrei 
 \4y€Tai. The Kol preceding 4\iri<Tas is generally supposed to involve a repeti- 
 tion of (vveypaiie. Kriig. renders, ' and after he had therefrom formed the 
 expectation.' a^io\oy^TaToy rSiv irpoy. This substitution of the 
 
 superlative for the comparative seems to take its rise from the anxiety of the 
 writer to say a thing more strongly than the common forms of speech allow. 
 It has place, therefore, where very strong emphasis is intended, and is cognate 
 to the idiom where two superlatives are coupled together, — e.g. vXttaTov 
 ix^i<rrr\s. Soph. Phil. v. 63 1 j ' Most Highest ' in our version of the Psalms. It is 
 very common in Greek. See /ueydrriiv tSv 5r/>i awr^t. i, 10. ivoiiaaTiraTaTiivirpW 
 
 B 
 
2 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 yiv6ft.fvay i. lo. fieylffrTj S^ tuv irph avTTJs yeyevriTatj i, 50. /jLeyKrrov 5^ twv 
 irplv KivSwov, vi. 13. See for instances Jelf, § t,o^, 3. But the idiom has a 
 deeper root than the peculiarity of any special language. Livy wrote, Bellum 
 maxime memorahile omnium qua unquam gesta sunt xxi. 1, and Tacitus, C<Bte' 
 rorum Britanuorum fugacissimi, Agrie, 36. Accordingly, too, we find in 
 Milton, ' Adam, the goodliest of his sons since born, the fairest of her daughters 
 Eve.' The importance of particularly noticing such a form of speech arises 
 from its application to the famous expression, TrparSroKos rris KTiffeuSf Col. i. 
 1 5, which on the same principle signifies, * born before all creation' 
 aKfidCovm 'tiff ay — 'were in a state ofmgourf or at the acme, or highest point 
 of their strength,' — implies slightly more than the final verb fjKjjia^ov. Cf. 
 4ppuvTo is rhv •7r6\ffj.ov ii. 8. a. Cf. note on a,vatiifiV7iffK6^^vos, Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 121. Bekker reads ^trav quasi ^laav ('weder Thukydideische 
 noch Attische' Krvig.) upon the strength of such phrases as Uvai is robs 
 TToKeiiovs. But Pop. rightly remarks, Thuc. would surely have written jjeirav 
 here as elsewhere. ipa u — the conditionalizing participle, equivalent, as 
 
 usual, when without the article, to 8ti iiipa, ' because he saw.' It should not 
 ue connected with TeKfjiaip6fievos, but with irt aKfii^opTes k.t.\. 
 Stavooviiivov — having it in (pT passing through) their minds — thinJcing of it, 
 Beference is made to Syracuse and the Dorian states of Sicily : perhaps also to 
 Argos. 
 
 (6.) Kivtiffis K.T.\. ' This was by far the greatest stir (or commotion) that 
 ever arose among the QreeTcs, and a very considerable portion of the barba^ 
 rians, or, so to speak, the greater part of manhind.' iis eiVcii' may also be 
 rendered ' propemodwm dixerim' 'I had almost said' Cf. Jelf, 864, 1, and 
 for TrA.eio'To;' avdpdnrav see Jelf 422, B. Kinfffis like our word 'movement' (cf. 
 the ' movement party ') seems to be applied by later writers at any rate to the 
 interna, rather than the external relations of a country. ' Thucyd. expressly 
 calls this war greater than the Persian, ch. 23, and no other war except the 
 Persian could within his knowledge enter into comparison with it.' Arn. 
 87), when added to a word, intensifies its meaning and directs attention to it. 
 Hence its use with superlatives. See oXiyois Sii, 'few indeed,' i. ^3. Jelf, 723, 1, 
 PapBdpuy. According to Poppo, the Thracians, the Macedonians, several of 
 the Epirot tribes, the Sicilians, and perhaps also the Persians. 
 iU€D€i rivt. The phrase signifies an appreciable and therefore considerable 
 part. Cf. ch. 23 c. So also the Latin ' aliquot.' to yap Trph 
 
 avTuv. Inasmuch as Thuc. contrasts (c. 3 and c. 12) ri irph rwv TfiaiKoiv 
 and TO |U6t4 t4 TpieiKd, Poppo considers that these words mean the wars 
 between the Trojan and Persian wars, as well as these two themselves, while 
 the iroAaidTepa refer to those before the Trojan war. eupeic — 'make 
 
 out.' On ASiivoTa, cf. infra, ch. 7 a. T€Kp,iipiov, Consult Arist. 
 
 Shet.i. 2, where it will be seen that rexn'fipLoii is the infallible proof (a posteriori) 
 as distinguished from anfiuof, the mere indication. £ v K.r.\, 
 
 The construction of the relative is not clear. Some, with Schaefer, repeat the 
 preposition ix, 'from the proofs, from which it happens that I feel confidence.' 
 This derives some support from a passage in Isoc. iii. 2, rauTo ix t&v ipyav 
 i.v Tts ohx ^TTOv ^ Tuv K6y(tiv T:tffrfvffeiiv. Others again, as Kriiger, consider 
 it a mere case of Attic attraction, uv for hs or o. 'From the proof s which it 
 
Chap. 2.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 3 
 
 occurs to me to credit,' — i. c. I am led to credit — (So Krug. ' Ich finde raich 
 veranlasst.') — upon carrying my investigations as far back as possible. This ia 
 simple and preferable. Cf. Herod, iv. 1 6, iirov rififis i/rpexfas ^irl /jLaxpiraToy 
 ohl t' iyev6ii€8a axoii i^iKetrSai. ov-iJ,eyd\a. Connect the two 
 
 words by a hyphen, so as to form a single term. ' I hold them to have been of 
 no importance.' The distinction in meaning between this collocation and con- 
 necting the negative with the verb (as Dale has done), is not in the present 
 passage great. But it is desirable to observe that Thuc. has a tendency to the 
 use of the ' particula infinitans,' as logicians call it, and that such compouna 
 negatives are not i-are. oiK-6yetSt(6iiTai', eh, '$. ob-6a\<i(ri7iot, ch. 7. ouk- 
 a(ripa\€ist ch. 6. 0V'Sid\vt7tVf ch. 137. is to; &Wa. 'Cseteris in 
 
 rebus ' (Betant. Iiex. Thuoyd.), all matters not included under TroAe/iovs. A 
 favourite formula. Cf. ch. 6, 72 and vii. 77, 2, Kari, rhy ISiov fiiou, koI h Tci 
 
 Chapter II. — (a.) ^aiverm with a participle expressed or understood, 
 is the Latin ' constat,' 'it is clea/r,' ' it is an established point,' and is to be dis- 
 tinguished by the younger student from Sonei, which states a matter of surmise 
 or opinion. (See ch. 3, ad init.) With the infinitive ^aiyerai is different 
 — it seems to be, not it evidently is. rivtay ael tr\ei6vwv — * by 
 
 some who, as it might happen, from time to time were more numerous.' The 
 idiom is of frequent recurrence, though more usually ael is placed between the 
 article and an adj. or part. 4nTroptas—' traffic by sea;' for traffic 
 
 by land must have been common, notwithstanding the fact of their communi- 
 cations being somewhat restricted by distrust. 'EXXiij. Herodotus 
 wrote T^r vvy 'EWdSos vp6Tepov Se UiXairyiris KaKevpiiinis, ii. 56. This Krug. 
 says is to be modified by what Thuoydides asserts in the following ch.— i. e. 
 Pelasgian was only the name of a predominant tribe. See Grote as referred to 
 ch. ili., note (b.). 
 
 ib.) v€ii.6iJ,€Voi TO airav iaov hirai^Tiv. 'Cultivating each their own land, 
 so far as to get a living off it,' — i. e. only cultivating it to such an extent as to 
 produce the necessaries of life, cf. Jelf, § 666. vf&ff6ai, ' to reap the use of,' 
 generally is connected with yiiv, but we have it with v6\iv ch. 74, and i/nrSpia 
 Kal ^EToAXo ch. 100. irtpiovfflav XP'^/^^'^"*' — ' stock,' an amount of mova- 
 ble property over and above what was required for daily use; this is the 
 force of irepl in similar words. Cf. itok rb ire'piTToy finoipoi'. yrjv 
 
 (pvTeiovTfs — referring more especially to vines and olives. The word, 
 Kriig. remarks, is the proper one to express planting in contradistinction to 
 apovv and aitdpnv, and yr; TreipevTeviievri (Horn. (pmaKla) is contrasted with 
 apdaifios und inr6pifios. SSr)\oy ov — ' it being uncertain.' (Cf. the same 
 
 phrase, viii. g6.) Matth. calls this the nom. absolute. Most grammarians are 
 now inclined, with Kriiger, to regard it as an accusative arising from the idea of 
 duration or extension of time. See Matth. § 564. Kost 131, v. 4. Jelf's 
 Kiihner, § 581, 700. oTeixicTMV Sjna ivTuv — and they being at 
 
 the same time toithout the defence of toalls, sc. avTuv, to be supplied, as often, 
 from the context. avayxaio v — ' necessary sustenance,' raro generis 
 
 communis est, Pop. ov xo^^'^^^ airavitrravTo — made no difficulty 
 
 in abandoning. 
 
 B 2 
 
4 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 (c.) fi vvv 0Eiriro\i'o KaKov/ifi>n. First called PyrrhsBa, afterwards 
 Hfflmonia. Kruger considers that Thucyd. was not thinking of these mytho- 
 logical names, but wrote under the impression that the Thessalians, like the 
 Hellenes, owing to their migratory habits, were long before they received a 
 collective appellation. Pop. remarks that these assertions are confirmed and 
 illustrated by the accounts of the movements of population given in MiiUer's 
 MinycB and Plass's Sistory of Ancient Oreece. Arcadia was to Greece what 
 Wales was to England, and Brittany to France : a rugged district, inhabited 
 by ii rugged race, which offered no temptation to foreign invasions. 
 
 {d.) ApeT^v — ' lonitatem, fertilitatem,' Pop. iptTli is simply 'excellence.' 
 The nature of the excellence is determined by the adjunct. See Aristotle, Ethic. 
 JSud. ii. I. It cannot surprise us that the word came to signify kot' ^oxh" 
 •moral excellence ' or 'virtue.' Notice the etymology among a martial people 
 from "Apns, as Virtus from ' Vir.' On the goodness of the soil, Kriig. refers to 
 Herod, vii; 129 ; Xen. Sell. vi. i, 11 ; Strab. ix. p. 430. rtffl. This 
 
 is in general understood to refer to particular individuals. Kriig., however, 
 understands it of tribes, or states, thinking this interp. necessitated by 
 4yyiyv6fievai itt. 4tz. It does not, however, seem unreasonable (T. K. A.) to 
 translate, 'growing up to a greater extent among particular persons' 
 
 (c.) T^v yovv 'Atti/c^i' — Attica accordingly, or at any rate, yovv is a 
 particularizing, and also corroborative particle. The 76 brings down the state- 
 ment to what follows by directing special attention to it, and the olv expresses 
 conformity with what precedes. Ci. al yovv &\Kai a-noiKiai, i. i^. ix rov 
 
 eir! TrKelnTov. This, by the Schol. and others, has been connected with ol<ra,v, 
 as though the latter were equivalent to eTvai. But it is better, with Am. and 
 Pop., to take the words per se, and make them a single adverbial expression 
 nearly equivalent to ^J apxvs—from a very long time back. For iic . . . oZaav 
 cf. Sict ofTitrxoScn", c. 7. Katroyiaiv. 'Attica was not considered, 
 
 even in ancient times, a fertile district ; its rocky surface is covered with a very 
 thin crust of earth.' Niebuhr, Vortrage ilber alle Lander- and Volkerkunde, 
 S. 92 (quoted by Engelman). It seems to have been a light gravelly or gritty 
 soil, 'tenuis argilla,' suitable for the olive. Virg. Georg. ii. 180, 212. Poppo 
 refers to DodweU, vol. ii. p. j, and Kruse's Sellas, ii. i. We may add Boeokh's 
 Fub. (Econ. Athens, p. 40. It was from these circumstances that agriculture 
 was so highly valued at Athens, Xen. (Econ. 4; Aris. Fol. vi. 4. 01 
 
 avTol. Goll. quotes from Wyttenbach, ' Locus communis in Attieornm 
 laudibus et orationibns quod atn6xBovis fuerint.' Hence the custom of wearing 
 violets (\aaT4(pavoi) and golden grasshoppers in their hair. Cf. infra. It will 
 be enough to refer the student to Plato's Menexenus, Aristoph. Vespee, 1071, 
 and the celebrated funeral orations by Demosthenes and Lysias. One of the 
 earliest indications of this feeling is perhaps to be found in the speech of the 
 Athenian, Herod, vii. 61, i, opx""'''''"''"' C^" eevos iropfX'^ii»E»'<". iiomoi 5e Uvth, 
 all iieTavdtrroi 'EWiivuv. Ka\ TapdSeiyfia rdSt k.t.K. The 
 
 enormous controversy which these words have occasioned is well known. 
 Perhaps we shall best enable the student to master it by placing the several 
 points of dispute before him. (i) What is the K6yos? (2) What is meant by 
 4sTa&\\a? (.^) What is the subject of auj7)ei>ai ? (4) What increase is implied 
 in aLij7)(J.>ai y '.Vith respect to the fir!.t there docs not seem uny rcusouahle 
 
Chap, 2.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 5 
 
 difficjilty. Thuc. had never asserted in express terms Sik rks /ieTomlas k.t.X. ; 
 but in the previous part of the chapter he had described the general insecurity 
 of property, and the lieravaariaen which resulted from it, and as a consequence 
 of them he added Si' oirb oSre fieysBcL iriAimi' Iffxvov oUre t?) &\\ti TrapaaKevrj . 
 This therefore must be considered as the K6yos repeated in the words Sii tos 
 fier. (2) h rh &K\a is sometimes rendered ' in all other respects,' as at the 
 close of ch. i. But ' other ' than what ? It is not easy to see. Nor had Thuc. 
 made any such assertion. What he said was, that the other parts of Greece did 
 not increase owing to their unsettled condition. It is better therefore, following 
 the second scholiast, to consider it as 'in its otTisr parts.' (3) Poppo once sug. 
 gested, and Haack adopts the idea, that riiv 'Attik^ic is the subject of av^TiBwai, 
 on account of the immigrations, Attica did not increase in other respects (wealth 
 and power) correspondingly with its population.' But it is impossible to force 
 this meaning from ifioiojs; and if it were, it is contrary to fact, and also con. 
 trary to the whole argument. For having represented throughout frequent change 
 of population as the great obstacle to progress, it would be absurd to confirm 
 his argument by asserting a similar want of progress where the population was 
 permanent. Other editors therefore supply t)]v 'EAAoSa as the subject of ou|7)- 
 Brivai — though the word has not been used, and can only be extracted from the 
 context. Or it is possible that avt,ri6nvtu maybe impersonal — in which case the 
 meaning would be the same — • that there was no similar increase elsewhere' 
 (4) While some suppose a general increase in material resources to be implied 
 in au^Tj^^yoi, others, as Peile, consider the increase as confined to population. 
 This he thinks established by ch. 1 2, where what in connexion with T]avxi.<'aiT<x 
 is described by au^7;ffT)yai, is afterwards expressed by OTroiKtos e^enefnre. The 
 whole will then run — And this which folloios is not the least proof of my state- 
 ment, that 'twas owing to its migrations (n. b. the reason placed in the promi- 
 nent part of the sentence) that Greece in its other pa/rts was not similarly in- 
 creased, for out of the rest of Greece, those who, Sfc. ydp, as elsewhere, intro- 
 duces the proof intended by T65e — as just below St}\oi Se fioi Kal T6Se Trph yap 
 Ttvv Tpu'iKMv. Peile quotes Arist. Av. 514, & Se 5€Lv6Tar6i^ y' iiTTiv airdvTuv . . . 
 d yap Zeis. I should myself rather prefer the impersonal usage of ci.vtT)drivai, 
 tor I think Thucyd. purposely means to speak rather vaguely of districts which 
 were not then styled Hellas at all, and in some cases perhaps not subsequently 
 included in it. We must add, that some editors, as Pop. and GoU., strike out 
 the Is, thus making ri &KXa. sc. t^j 'EWciSos the subject of aiil^-qSTivcu, and 
 giving exactly the same sense as above. This is neat and simple. And I think 
 we may urge in its favour that common formulae like is ra &\\a are apt to run 
 in the head of transcribers, and to slip from their pens when anything like them 
 occurs in the copy. Ulrich (quoted by Engelman and Kriiger) very ingeniously 
 reads lUtToiK^ireij for fLeroiitias is. The change in uncial letters would be in- 
 significant. And Plato's authority in three places (Apol. 40 ; Fhied. 1 1 7 ; 
 Laws, viii. 850 A), is cited for the word. fieBaiov. 'Understand ti (ef. 
 Kiihner, § 421 ; Jelf, 381) or rb ai/axwpeij' irap.'MT]v. (cf. Matth. § 568).' Pop. 
 Iiii(a ETi — ' still greater,' i.e. it was already greater than others simply from 
 its tranquillity, but became yet more so from the influx of foreigners. 
 iavlav. The term is used by a sort of Trp6\ri\l/is, for, as G511. remarks, the 
 
6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 conntry acqnircd the name from the settlement of these very Ionian colonists 
 in it (cf . ^eXevovyraf vi. 4). 
 
 Chaptee III.^o.) iffdevdav. Here, as in Herod, i. 143, Pausan.vii. 17, 
 'political inability,' resulting from the absence of irepiovaia xprz/^t^Twi'. Bloomf , 
 nph-trpirepoy, A not uncommon form of pleonasm, as may be seen by com- 
 paring (with Pop.) irpoiypa^a wparov i. 23 ; vpow^/jApavTes vpSrepov i. 29 j 
 vply trpoSidyvaiTe i. 'jS. SoKcT €?x*^ — 'C'*^ fTvai. Remark the varia- 
 
 tion from the indie, to the infinitive. 3ti is omitted before the indie, to give 
 vivacity to the narration. The passage quoted by Jelf, § 804, 6, from Thuc, 
 
 V. 37» yyoi/s '6tl SiacpBapTjtronevovs avroiis for Sta<j>dap'f]a'ovTai is not 
 
 exactly parallel, for there, as a long ellipse occurring between 'in and its verb, 
 an anacolonthon not unnaturally ensues. An exactly similar case to that in the 
 text is quoted by Pop. fr. Plato Laches. 184 B. 
 
 (fi.) rh fi4v — 'during the times before the Trojan war' The words are 
 used like rb airb TouSe, rit 7rc£\ai, and similar expressions. Pop. quotes rh trph 
 toiItoji', Dera. de Cor. § 188, (Edip. Col. v. 291. The whole question con- 
 cerning Hellen, and the meaning to be attached to the mythus, is too elaborate 
 to be discussed here. The student will do well to consult Grote Pref. to 
 History, and vol. i. p. 137, as well as the remarks with which vol. i. concludes. 
 See also Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 79. xal irivv ol/Se itvai — 'never 
 
 even to have had any existence at all.' In what follows. Pop. makes ont the 
 construction by supplying %Bvri, the phrase xar' edvri being taken adverbially, 
 so that it becomes kot" Itorj (tributim) &\\a re e$vj) xal rh TleXaayiKhv iBvos 
 TTop^X^"'^'"' I' ^"7 b^ questioned whether GSll. and Kriig. are not right in 
 regarding kixt' eOvn here, and Kofl' ^xdarovs a little below as virtually accusa- 
 tives and subjects of the verb. As examples of a similar accusative we have 
 'O Nixias KaTti, T6 ^6vri .... Koi ^ufnraffL TaSe irap€K€\eri€TO ; and again as a 
 nominative, dvOv^eTads ko0* cKairTous re «ol ^v/iiravres. iirayo^fvuv. 
 
 It is a common brachylogy to find the pronoun supplied to a genitive abso- 
 lute from a word in the sentence itself, or in that preceding it (Jelf, 894); 
 or when the gen. part, is wholly indefinite, the pronoun is without difiiculty 
 supplied by the mind, or the indef. words wpdy/iara, ivOpairoi, as Thue. i. 
 116, iirttyytxefyTaf (Jelf, 696, 3). The peculiarity of the present case is the 
 change of subject (romlirxvaii'Tiiiv, ' when they grew powerful, and people called 
 them in,' so. as the Britons Hengist and Horsa. The word appears to have 
 acquired a technical sense, for we find it ii. 68, v. 45, and in Herod, viii. 
 112. T7) 6fii\tcf /laWov — ' more from intercourse than from any regular 
 
 compact;' imWov enim s£Epe sieponit ut altera pars comparationis intelligenda 
 sit, viii. 81, 140. Pop. and ch. 5 a, 8 c. Othei-s, as Kriig., understand 'more 
 than informer times' It has been suggested also that liaWov may signify 
 ' magis, magisque,' ' indies sajpius,' or, as we say, ' more and more every 
 day.' oiratriv rjSiivaTO ^Ki'i/t^croi, so. "E^^.7)l'aJ KaXtioBat — could 
 
 not win its way to become the received name for all also. Thuc. repeats the same 
 phraseology, M ri fivBwSfs ^ki/6i/ik7)K((to, i. 21. Pop. cites an imitation by 
 Pausanias ii. 29, 3, iraa-w ^|ev(Ki)o-e, and also Tac. Ger. c. 2, 'Nationis nomen 
 non in nomen gentis evaluisse.' TeK^TjpioI— fr.TeK^u^pioi', a word of 
 
 Thucyd. own. Krijg. 
 
CnAP. 3.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 7 
 
 (0.) oi/SafJLOu Tohs ^i^travras uvd^aaev — Be. ''EA\r7i'as. Pop. But we 
 may simply say, 'has nowhere called them iy a collective name' Kriig. remarks 
 upon this that TlaviKKi\vii, II. ii. 530, is undoubtedly spurious. to!ij 
 
 ;H6t' 'AxiAA-ews. Cf. II. ii. 684, Oi S' elxoi" ^iBl-qv ^i' "EKKiSa, KaXKiyivaMa, 
 MvpfiLS6v€s 5' ^Ka\ew7o Kai"EWrives Kal'Axaioi. avaKa\€7. Bl. re- 
 
 marks the d^o here has an intensive force, as in avaireiBtiv, &c. With this Pop. 
 agrees, who renders it ' nominaiim,' ' honoris causd.' Undoubtedly this force of 
 the word arose from the primitive meaning of avi, ' over and over again,' as 
 such repetition would occur in encomiums. It is not impossible that the 
 primary meaning may be the true one here. Cf. Soph. Fhil. v. 800, and Plato, 
 Mep. 47 1 D — yiyufiiffKovres re koL avaKaKovtms ToDra Tct ov6ixaTa eavrovs, 
 dSe\(^ou.9, Trarepas, vhls — where the notion of repeated mention comes pro- 
 minently forward, ov fi^v ovSe ^ap&dpovs^^' neque veroharharos 
 qnidem.' Nor, moreover, did he either speak of ^dp^apoi, because not as yet had 
 even the Sellenes, I fancy, heen separated opinio one couniername, the repre- 
 sentative of a counter, or antagonistic notion, sc. * not Greeks.* All mankind 
 were distinguished into Greeks and barbarians-:- Plato, Politic, p. 262 D — and 
 the former were by nature, ipso facto, the enemies and masters of the latter. 
 See Dem. c. Mid. 14; Plato de Sep. v. p. 470 ; Isocrat. Fanath. c. 66, and 
 Ar. Pol. 1. i, 5, bib (paaiv ol iroiriraX $ap$dpo}y S' "EAAijras &pxeiv cIkSs. Eurip. 
 Iph. Aul. 1379. (The metaphor is derived from a counterpoise, or equivalent 
 in the balance.) avriiraKov seems rather out of its place in the 
 ■collocation, but this, as Kriig. remarks, may be justified by the emphasis which 
 it requires. It is no contradiction to this statement that Horn. II. ii. 867, calls 
 the Carians $ap$ap(i<t>apot, for there no national appellative is intended, — the 
 word only has its original reference to unintelligible speech. See Nitzsch. Od. 
 i. 180. See Niebubi-, vol. i. pp. 27, 28. 'Nations whose languages were more 
 nearly akin than Latin and Greek, would still speak so as not to be mutually 
 understood, and this is all Herodotus was thinking of. That there was an 
 essential affinity notwithstanding the difference, is probable from the ease with 
 which so many Pelasgic nations ripened into Hellenes, as well as from the exist- 
 ence of an element nearly akin to the Greek in the Latin language, the Pelasgic 
 origin of which seems unquestionable.' Compare ' Nomen Latinum,' ' Nomen 
 Italicum,' &c., with ec 6vofj.a. 
 
 (d.) Ol 5" olf as EKaffToi — K\7iB4vTes. After careful consideration of 
 all that has been written upon this difficult passage, I conclude that Thuc. 
 meant to say, ' The Hellenes received their name first of all by separate com- 
 munities,' — i. e. such as spoke an Hellenic dialect intelligible to one another, 
 were so called, wherever found; — subsequently all such were collectively em- 
 braced under one great distinctive appellation, sc. Hellenes. But during neither 
 of these periods did they enter upon any great common enterprise.' We must 
 translate : The several Sellenio communities then {oZv resuming what had been 
 said),^r*^ so called separately city by city (such, that is to say, as spoke a dialect 
 intelligible to each other), and afterwards collectively (sc. so called) did not, Sfc 
 I cannot agree with Peile that ol e/coo-Tot are tlie same with Kara -nixeis. The 
 01 eKaarot refer both to Karo Tr6\eLs and ol ^vfxiravTis {zzwhen they came to be 
 united), and the two latter expressions imply different periods rather than 
 different persons. Poppo's version is not very clear : 'Ii vera qui pro se quisque 
 
8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 et oppidatim, quotquot muttio se intelligebant, et omnes una postea Hellenes sunt 
 rocati.' On i>s UKatrroi, cf. Jelf, § 714, 2 c, § 870, 4, and on olv, Jelf, § 737, 3. 
 Kriig. says that to oi fxaiTToi must be supplied iKXiiB-iiaav, and that this is the 
 construction in all similar cases, and quotes i. 113, i, vii. 65 — 74> 3- 1° ^''^ 
 existing state of linguistic and ethnological science, it was not unnatural for 
 Thucydides, and Herodotus (i. 37) to imagine that the Pelasgicand Hellenic 
 were generically distinct dialects, and that consequently the races who spoke 
 ^hem were generically distinct also. The contrary is now known to be the 
 rase. Eead, as above, Niebuhr, vol. i. p. 27. d-Tparcfa!' may surely 
 
 be considered as a cognate accusative after ^vvT)\6oVf as frrpaT^ias i^TJKdov, c. 15, 
 without supposing, as some do, an ellipse of fls. See the instances quoted, 
 Jelf, § 558, I. w\eia is Attic Greek for irAcToc, as Eurip. Kerae. 
 
 258, ToD 0eoD Thdai (ppovuv, Bl. It seems to be analogous to XP^^^" XP?"'*'"' 
 ace. cognat. So TrAeltrTa xpij^^^af, v. 105. 0^170, &c. XP^*^^"*' ^^&* Translate, 
 * because hy this time tliey were making more use of the sea.' 
 
 Chapter IV. — (a.) Md'tos. Eead Grote, vol. i. ch. 12. ' Cretan Legends. 
 Minos and his Family,' Thirlwall, i. p. 144. itaXairaTos ^KT^traro — like 
 
 the Latin 'primus adeptus est' — 'mas the first person whom we hear of as having 
 acquired.' Kriig. says Thuoyd. preferred the form vaKaWaros, though most 
 MSS. here, and in i. 18, have TraKat6raTos. ''ZW'qviKyis, — TrpSrepov yap 
 
 Kapix); cKaXcTro, Schol. Kriig. refers to Pliny, S, If. iv. 11, to show 
 
 that the sea which washed the shores of Greece Proper was first called Grecian, 
 in distinction from the Macedonian Sea, by the Romans. Kapas 
 
 f^e\d(ras. Herod, (i. 171) appears to contradict this, by asserting that the 
 Carians or Leleges lived in the islands under the protection of Minos, and did 
 not pay tribute. But Thucyd. qualifies his own statement by 4<l>' iaov ifiivwro, 
 and we may suppose with Ai'U. that Minos treated the Carians very mildly, not 
 expelling them altogetlier from their homes, but allowing them to amalgamate 
 with his own settlers. The Dorian and Ionian colonies at a later period com- 
 pletely cleared the islands, sweeping away all vestiges of the ancient race and 
 their language. Isocrates ascribes this exploit to the Athenians, Panegyric, 
 c. 16, ras KuKAcESas v^ffouy, irepX &s iyeyovro iroWal irpayixareia.it Kara r^v Mti/uj 
 rov KpTjris ZwatmiaVy ravras rh re\fvra7ov vnh KapStv «aT€;^o/i€Vay, eK$a\6vTis 
 iKslvovs, ovK ^^iBt^ffaaOai ras X^P^^ iriXfifiuav, aWh. rovs /iti\iarra j8/ou rwv 
 'EW'flvwv Seofjievovs Kar(^Ki(rav els avras. r6 re XriffriKov — 'Piracy/ 
 
 in the abstract. Pop. and others have noticed that the re here, as elsewhere in 
 Thucyd., appends sentences to propositions already complete, more commonly 
 than in other writers. Yet even here the appended clause is a sort of epexegesis, 
 or carrying out of what precedes, the suppression of piracy being part of the 
 same act as the expulsion of the Carians — tr. 'and therein cleansed the sea of 
 piracy.' See on the whole question, ch. ix. ». rov levat. The in- 
 
 finitive with the article in the genitive to express the final cause nf an action. 
 See Jelf, § 492, who quotes Csesar de B. G. iv.. Naves dejiciendi operis a bar- 
 baris missie. The old grammars supposed an ellipse of eVeno, Matth. 540 — i. 
 Tr. /or the sake of his revenues coming in to him more freely. ' Sic et iireiir- 
 epxecOat et iff-rXelv,' Pop., and cf. ii. 17,, TrpotriAirruv. There is a similar use of 
 the Gen. in N. T. Cf. ^Tri<rTfr\Bi toC aTrty^o'Soi, Acts xv. 2o. 
 
Chap. 5.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 9 
 
 Chapter V.— (a.) /jLaWov — 'i.e. /iaWov 1) rpSrepov. Cf. v. 81; viii. 9,' 
 Pop. avTuii aSwaTiDTiriov. The negative here is a privative, 
 
 as in 01* fieydKa, eh. i, oiv^p oil fieyas, viii. 100. But * this privative force really 
 belongs to the original negative notion, as may be seen when these words are 
 resolved into their full form, as oi'Jjp it oli lue'yas iffrlv,' Jelf. § 738, 2. i. The 
 whole expression is what is called a ' Litotes,' i, e. a figure of speech where less 
 is said than is meant, and therefore, perhaps, as in Irony, more implied. In 
 such cases, the negative, instead of being prefixed to the noun, precedes its 
 article, or governing preposition. tois offflcveo-i Tpo((>TJj — 'support 
 
 for the needy.' Kriig. collects several passages where 6 offflevjjs means 'the 
 poor man,' as opposed to ' the rich.' Of these one is suificient, 3 t' a(T6ev})s S 
 w\oi5cri(5s Te, Eur. jSm^^. 433. Kara Kfi^as oiKovfi^vas. This may 
 
 either mean (i) that the towns were little better than villages, i. e. that they 
 consisted of straggling houses, constructed upon no regular plan, or (2) that 
 the towns actually consisted of an aggregate of villages, as indeed was the case 
 with Sparta in earlier, and Athens itself in later times, cf. ch. 10 a. This Pop. 
 thinks is confirmed by ch. x. ' Any society of men united together as one 
 Commonwealth under the same laws is called in Greek ■7r6\is. Thus a Tr6\is 
 may be a mere collection of huts in a forest ; or, like Lacedsemon itself, a 
 number of straggling houses unenclosed by walls,' Ai'n. rov $iov 
 
 rhv irKeX^rrov ^ttoiovvto — ' they were in thehabit of making the greater part 
 of their livelihood ;' the English idiom coincides with this use of iroiftaSai, which 
 is by no means uncommon. Kriig., compares hirh yeoipyias rhv &iov iroiiiffQai, 
 Xen. CBcon. vi. The younger scholar will observe that ;3(os is not fw^— animal 
 life — but social, and moral life, or, as here, the means of living, 
 oiffxiii'T)!' ^x"'"''" — 'not yet involving any shame,' 'carrying with it any 
 shame.' The phrases (pBSvov ex*"'> ^sch. Prom. 863, ^ojiu/>^i' exf"'> Pind. Isth. 
 V. 61, are similar, upon which Hermann {ad Tig. p. 753) remarks. In his 
 locutionibus omnibus ^x^'" retinet suam vim, sic ut notet — 'conjunatum quid 
 cum quo esse,' quoted by Kriig. Sia rh r]^ovT}v exov iv rep aurlKa, iv. 108 c, is 
 somewhat similar. 01 •jraA.atoi twv ttoitjtup — 'The old among 
 
 {i. e. of) the poets = the old poets.' See for the fact Od. iii. v. 71, where Nestor 
 asks the question of Telemachus. Symn. Apoll. v. 432. Indeed, the custom 
 belongs naturally to a rude state of society. Caesar, B. G. vi. 21, says of the 
 Germans, 'Latrocinia nuUam habent iufamiam, quse extra fines cujnsqne civi- 
 tatis fiunt.' Similar statements have been made concerning the North American 
 Indians and other savage tribes. Zevort instances the razzias of the African 
 Arabs, and we might refer to the Scotch ' harryings." Vide Lay of the Last 
 Minstrel, William of Deloraine, &o. Ka\as Well rendered by Bloomf, 
 
 ' handsomely,' in the sense of ' dexterously ;' as handsome is derived from the 
 low German 'handsaem,' 'handy.' He also aptly quotes Spenser (given in 
 Johnson's Diet.), ' under it he may convey any fit pillage that cometh handsomely 
 in his way.' The Schol. has eia-e$Sis, (piXavSpdwas ; Dale has ' cleverly ;' Engel- 
 man, *geschickt;' Zevort, 'Les pirates habiles.' Cf. rh ^eiKrairOai Ka\us 
 Xp^o'i/jLov, vi. 12 a. 
 
 (i.) ras iruo-Teij k.t.\. = epwT^ireij. Some (e.g. Bothe and Owen) have 
 very naively objected that it is not the poet who asks the question, as 
 though a, writer were not in such matters to be identified with the characters 
 
lO NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 of his work, — ' in the inquiries made from those who landed anywhere, always 
 putting the same question* or, in their questions . . . always asking. See Kara 
 TtitrTW, ch. 136; Jelf, § 583, 74. When in ch. 10 Thucyd. says "O;ur)/)oj 
 ir6Tro£r)Ke k.t.a. he does not mean that Homer made the Greelt fleet. 
 ei . . . citric — transition to the oratio recta. See Jelf, 886, d. Here ouk-oi'eiSi- 
 ^6vTii>v is to be taken as one word — making no reproach of it, cf. ch. i a. Kriig. 
 remarks that, owing to this close connexion, we have re-oliK, and not oBte. 
 4iriixe\€s — those whose business it might happen to he that they 
 should know — i.e. because their interest required it, BI. quotes ols ^TnueA.es 
 toDto eidfvai, Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 
 
 (c.) rif iroXoK? TpdiTij!. Most editors understand this of piracy and free- 
 booting. Kriig. observes that we have a reference to ttjs Tra\aias Xjia-reias 
 immediately afterwards, and that the words irnXai^ Tp6ir(f ve^ctsi are not very 
 appropriate for the description of a social habit, a mode of living. He therefore 
 believes the allusion to be to koto Kti/ias olKeXcrBat. AoKpobs — 
 
 'Axttpvai'as. Grote, vol. ii. p. 388, says, 'These were undoubtedly the most 
 backward members of the Hellenic aggregate. Though not absolutely without 
 a central town, they lived dispersed in villages, retiring, when attacked, to 
 inaccessible heights, perpetually armed, and in readiness for aggression and 
 plunder wherever they found an opportunity. There is no information respect- 
 ing them from the commencement of the historical period down to the Persian 
 war.* Thuc. i. 6; iii. 94. rh aiitipotpopelaQai — * The wearing 
 
 of weapons.* — i. e. continuously, and when engaged in peaceful occupations. Bl. 
 quotes from Dr. Clark — 'Among the Circassians the labours of the plough 
 become a warlike occupation, and the sower goes to cast his grain attended by 
 his sabre and his fusil.' 
 
 Chaptee VI. — (a.) i<riSripo^6pfi. Kriig. says that we have the act. 
 voice, and not the middle, as in last chapter, because ri "EWof cannot be con- 
 ceived of as wearing weapons /or itself; — 'for its personal protection.' 
 a(f>piiKTovs oiK^ceis — * domicilia non munita.' Sunt irrfAcis ar^ixtffToi. 
 Cf. vi. 85. Pop. There seem to be no historical grounds for supposing that 
 dwelling-houses ever were fenced. The position of Jw^Atj must be noticed. 
 • They made their daily way of living habitually with arms ' — ^vv^Bi] is what 
 Dr. Donaldson calls a tertiary predicate, Ch. Or. p. 200. This nomenclature 
 will be elsewhere discussed. Kriig. makes the whole equivalent to ^ 5(aiTo, %v 
 4woi^ffavTO tisff ivKoiv, ^vvi^e-ris ^v. This would make ^vrfiBn a simple predicate, 
 which does not seem to be what the author ea;ao% meant. Jelf, § 458, 2, seems 
 to express it more correctly. 'They made a habit of wearing arms in their 
 daily life.' (r7iiJ.eToi/ S' iffr) toCto t^s 'E\A. en oStw vefi6/iet'a. 
 
 ' These parts of Greece, by being so inhabited still, afford a proof Dale's ver- 
 sion — ' Those parts of Gheece which still live in this way, are a proof from 
 want of attention to the absence of the article before vfuSfifva, is incorrect. 
 4v Toij -wpuToi. An idiom much discussed. Jelf, § 444, a, considers toij as 
 an instance of the article used for (or rather retaining its original force of) the 
 demonstrative pronoun, and compares iiz toO, hence, irph -rov, before, &c. ; yet 
 translates not 'horum,' but 'omnium primi.' In § 139, 4, he seems to adopt 
 the explanation given below as that of Arnold. Matthiae, § 290, also says that 
 
CiiAP. 6.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II 
 
 the article appears to be used as a pronoun in the phrase ii) to7s, and draws two 
 couelusions, (i) that the formula h ro7s stands by itself, and is not to bo joined 
 with the superlative following ; (2) that Toir is neuter because the superlative 
 even in the fem. is sometimes used with it. He subjoins that hardly any 
 explanation of the phrase can be given to suit all passages, since usage hag 
 given to it a greater extension than it originally had. Arnold's explanation is 
 that of Hemsterh. ad Luc. t. i. p.' 1 70, i. e. in toij is to be coupled with the 
 dative superlative (understood) of the word which stands in the superlative and 
 nominative — e. g. iv toIs [irpfirois] irpwroi — ^Jirst among thejirsi,' i. e. the very 
 Urst. Kriig. and Madvig think that the participle was originally supplied, and 
 that when iv to!s came to be used adverbially the gender of the toij was no 
 longer considered. Kriig. accordingly interprets this passage 4v tois [nara- 
 B^^^vois~\ TTpwToi KaT^Qivro, Hermann noticing the idiom {ad Vig. p. 765) 
 explains, 4v ro7s roio6rois oStrtt /idKLfTTaToiovTos — *in iis quce f alia sunt maxime 
 talis.' Yet certainly in several places where the phrase occurs, a qualified, and 
 not an exaggerated superlative is required. Cf. iii. 17, 81 ; vii. 24, and Arnold 
 seems right in trauslating — ' among the first,' ' one of the first ' — ' but we suppose 
 not necessarily the verg first,' says Peile. We may doubt whether this be not 
 the very meaning to be assigned to iv roh irpiiTots as contradistinguished from 
 4v TOLS irpSnoi. avi^iiivri, as the Latin ' disoinctus,' refers primarily 
 
 to a loose method of wearing the dress, and is therefore applied to a lax and 
 luxurious mode of life — N.B. the position of the article with the noun, and cf. 
 supra ^t/i/^fl??. Kal ot trpeff^irepoL . . , ipopovvres. Difficulties 
 
 have been made concerning this passage, because a luxurious mode of living 
 was no reason why they should cease to wear linen tunics, but the contrary. 
 Thucyd. meant to say that the wearing of such tunics up to a late date was a 
 proof of the existence of greater luxury among the Athenians. For the short 
 period which had elapsed since the cessation of the practice was a proof of its 
 long continuance, and its long continuance was a proof of luxury. We may 
 join Sik rh a^podlatrov to 011 iroKiis xP^"'^ e'lreiS}) and tr., ' And the elder members 
 of the wealthy class among them, not till very lately (owing to their luxurious way 
 of living) left ofi^ wearing,' ^c. ov iroXus XP^^^^ eiretS^'must 
 
 he compared with ov iroWct ert] infiS-f}, at the close of the ch. and oi|/6 t' o(^* oZ 
 ch. 14, whence it is plain that the phrase was used parenthetically, and almost 
 adverbially, like our own * it's not long since,' * ifs no great while.' A writer, 
 speaking of us, might say, ' Their older men, not till very lately (owing to their 
 old-fashioned habits) left off wearing pigtails.' Kriig. takes Sia rh a^poS. in 
 close connexion with fopovvres, meaning, I suppose, 'and ifs no long time since 
 their old men left off wearing, from luxurious motives, linen tunics.' But this, 
 with the existing collocation, seems to me unnatural. abrols. Kriig. 
 
 well remarks that this is not the same thing here as avTuv. Am. excellently 
 expresses the diflerence in his version. It is not long since they saw their 
 elderly men leave off, S^c. upai&i'Kov. The exact nature of this 
 
 mode of dressing the hair seems to have puzzled the Scholiasts, who might 
 reasonably have been expected to know more about it than we. Some imagine 
 it to have consisted in rolling the hair from the temples round the head in the 
 shape of a crown. The verb ai/oSeruSoi, however, seems to indicate that the 
 hair was gathered up to the top of the head, and there fastened round a pin 
 
12 NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 made like a grasshopper, so forming a sort of horn — and Suidas indeed ex- 
 pressly says as much. V/inckelman admits that it must have been a bunch of 
 hair formed in some such way, and resembling a bunch of ivy berries. And the 
 etymology, KpafiiKos for Kopv/i^iXos, seems to indicate this. We cannot suppose 
 that it was nothing more than gathering the hair at the back of the head as 
 may be seen in the Greek statues, for this would be nothing distinctive or 
 remarkable. See Diet, of Gr. and Rom. Aatiq. for mode of dressing the hair, 
 under 'Coma.' The heads of Apollo and Niobe there given may illustrate a 
 KpaSiXos. Aristoph. refers to the custom. Nub. v. 984, JEquit. 1331, and Virgil, 
 Ciris, V. 127. Mitofell on Arist. Vesp. 230, supposes that the Athenians 
 imitated the Egyptiai ', who wore the chafer, their favourite symbol, in f 
 similar manner. The tustom, Kriig. adds, continued up to the battle o* 
 Marathon. Cf. Aihenceus, vi. 512, who quotes Heracleides Pontiens, 'AAoupy^ 
 u\v ykp iifjinifTxoi'ro i/iiiriat voikIkous 5' imehvvov x'TaJvas, Kopvfi&ousS' ayaSo^/xevot 
 ■rwv rptxwVy XP^^ovs Temyas irepl t?i fieTonrov Kai rhs Kifia^ i(popouy. Kal ourot 
 9i(rav ot roiovToi, ot t^v ^v Mapaduvt viK-fitravres y-dxriv. Like the violet crown, 
 it was intended to symbolize their indigenous origin — both the violet and the 
 grasshopper being regarded as the children of the earth. Bl. and GoU. assert 
 that wearing linen garments could not in itself constitute lu.\ury; and that 
 these must have been the ttoUiKoi mentioned by Athenajus xii. p. 512, and by 
 .ffllian, Var. His. iv. 22, ' emiroidered dresses,' probably borrowed from Egypt. 
 But Kriig. observes that tlieie was a 'luxus' even in wearing linen tunics, 
 which were very costly [Voss, .Mythol. Br. iii. p. 262, ff.], and such a .custom 
 would necessarily be considered effeminate, for we learn from Herod, [v. 87J 
 that these tunics were worn by the Athenian women. 4i>4pirei. 
 
 The old reading was eV epo-ei ; but the editors now universally give the former, 
 which is contained in several MSS.,/and is supported by analogy, as it is from 
 ivfpaai, old fut. of ivfipa. It also occurs in several later writers, as jElian, 
 Procopius, &c. See Bloomf. a<p' o5 Kal 'Itivav. 0. Miiller 
 
 (Dorians, § 26) says that, on the contrary, the Athenians borrowed the custom 
 from their Asiatic brethren. And Zevort (the French translator) pertinently 
 remarks, * II est peu probable, en effet, qu'^ une epoque oh les Athenieus 
 vivaient disperses dans les bourgades isolees, et livres anx travaux des champs, 
 ils eussent deji adopte un costume qui suppose tout k la fois beaucoup de loisir, 
 et des richesses que le commerce seul pouvait procurer.' See however on the 
 other side Bekker's Excursus on the subject in Charicles. 
 
 (e.) lierplf ^ffS^Ti. 'A sober style of dress, and suitable or conformable 
 to the present manners, the Lacedaemonians were the first to adopt, or, take into 
 •use.' This Muller coniirms at length. The Laconian himation was worn the 
 whole year through by the younger people, and even by the Laconizing party 
 at Athens. See vol. ii. p. 266. 01 ra fael^ai KexTTifievot. This 
 
 certainly seems to indicate that Thucyd. did not believe in the existence of 
 equality in property at Lacedaemon. Indeed the opinion respecting the re- 
 division of property by Lycurgus, and the banishment of gold and silver from 
 the state, rests upon the authority of Plutarch, and, as is well known, he is bv 
 no means trustworthy. The reader should by all means consult Grote [ii. 
 520 — 525] on the other side. 
 
 (d!.) iyviivdieri<ra:>. The story runs that Orslppus of Megara accidentally 
 
CuAP. 7.] NOTES ON THUOYDI0ES. 1 3 
 
 dropped his girdle in the race, and was consequently victorious. His example 
 was purposely followed by Acanthius the LacedEemoniau, and hence arose the 
 practice of running without girdles. But as these circumstances are supposed 
 to have occurred in the fifteenth Olympiad, it is evident that great latitude 
 must be allowed to the expression ou iroW^ Iti). Or we may adopt the hypo- 
 thesis of Boeckh \^Itiscrip. i. p. 555 — quoted by Pop.], that the runners in the 
 Diaulus immediately followed the example of Orsippus, but that the other 
 athletes, to whom the belt was no practical inconvenience, did not discard its 
 use until shortly before the time of Thucydides. Kriig. suggests that Thucyd. 
 is not spealting in reference to the Olympic, but to the other public games. 
 Miiller, in his Dorians, is wrong in saying that Thucydides is contradicted by 
 Plato, £ep. V. p. 452, for Plato does not assert that the Cretans were the first 
 to leave off their girdles, but simply that they were the first to commence 
 gymnastic exercises ; ijpxovTO twv yvfivaaiuv ■npuTov fjicv KpTJres, ^neiTa 5e 
 AaKfSaiij,6vtoi — and that jv/ivhs does not necessarily mean naked, see note in 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. xx. p. 204. The competitors in the Homeric 
 games wore girdles, Zi. iv. 685. is "rh <j>avfp6y. Poppo's exposi- 
 
 tion appears best, aTroSiii^Tes Kal ey rh (pavephi/ irpo^\66fT€s. Such a ' sensus 
 praegnans' of the participle is by no means uncommon — there is no design 
 implied in the expression. Kriig. has ' vor den Augen des Publikums,' which 
 
 comes to much the same thing. A^tto 'Some think that 
 
 AiVa is the dative from rh Xi?ra, gen. -aos, dat. -at, the 9 being by every day 
 pronunciation shortened to Ki-rra, and then e\aiov is the adj. of f\da, so that 
 Aiir' eKaiip is ' with olive oil,' but the quantity and the elision render this very 
 doubtful.' Jelf, § 113, 10. It looks much more like an ace. from Alifr, gen. 
 \iir6sf which may have existed as well as Kifi6s. Hence Xlnro/xat, and \6\iyUjUeVoy 
 'reoAtj anointed for the combat' and AEAijUfie'rat yiiaxiSj 'S. c. T. 380, 'eager 
 for the fray.' 8iafm/iaTa — ' belts across the body.' This may 
 
 throw some light on ciTipvoiv Sia/iTra^ 2^. V, v. 65. tvr iv oTs, .Telf, 
 
 §817,8. SSAa TiflcTai Kal k.t.A. Kriig. writes that the 
 
 construction ought to have been &6\uv rtdefievui^ sine ko(, for Thucydides does 
 not mean to tell us that the barbarians had games, but that they wore girdles 
 at them. This is true : yet there are many cases in which /cal is not a simple 
 copulative. We may express it in English — ' And even now the barbarians 
 have games where they wear the belt.' It was accounted immodest among 
 Orientals even for males to appear naked. Herod, i. 10. Plato, Sep, 
 v. 452 c. 
 
 (e.) dfLotirpoTTa. SiaiTtin^yof. This Jelf, § sS^i f- resolves into the 
 adverbial accusative like ficrpM f^f. Ion 632; oiS' aATjflij (atri, Plat. -Sep. 
 495 c. Kriig. connects ttoAAb with 6iiot6Tpowa, and explains upon the principle 
 of a cognate accusative, so that SiairuvTai iroAAeb BmiT^/^aro diaoiiTpona is 
 equivalent to troKKk Sian^iiara & Sianuyrai 6fioi6TpoiTd itmv. He compares 
 afT^TroAa rau/iax"" vii. 34, 5 — 71, 4. For the fact he refers to Herod, vi. 58. 
 
 ChAPTBB vii. — {a.) vKaliiaTipuv oprav. The plural agrees with a 
 noun understood, implying some indefinite notion. So in English we say, 
 'Things are looking better,' and so on. Render, therefore, 'When things hegan 
 to admit more of navigation,'— i.e. 'when navigation became more general,' 
 
14 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 said not of a particular case, but generally. Of. ir\atfuiTepa iyiviTo, ch. 8, and 
 oSivaTa ?iv, ch. I, which latter means that the subject comes under the category 
 of things impossible, and is thus more general and indefinite than the sing. 
 iSivaTov \ tri one of things impossible, rather than, in more positive terms, an 
 impossible thing. Tl\(i'inos, says Kriig., is from the Ionic Tr\iia as irAuitfa 
 i. 13, 4. Belcker has irXiliios, ' bnt Lobeck ad Fhryn, (writes T. K. A.), after 
 showing that TrAiii>ios occurs ^schin. de falsa Leg. p. 337, and Theophrast. Char. 
 iii. says, Si qua est igitur lectionum discrepantia Atticis utique prior scriptura 
 adserenda videtur.' ircpiovalas. This is of course in exact contrast 
 
 .to trepiovalaf xRVfJ^^^^^ oiiK ^x^^'^^^f ^^' *» which see. avro'is To'is 
 
 aiyttt\o7s — the beach itself- — i. e. the very beach. h-iriXtiti^avov — 
 
 ' cut them off from the main land,' sc, by a wall across the neck of the isthmus. 
 This implies the subsequent occupation of the ground. Cf. iv. 45. iv. 113. iv. 
 102. See the case of Potidtea and its walls, i. 56. e/cao-To — 'in 
 
 each several case,' ' relatum ad incolas, ut paulo post &vifKurij.4voi.' Pop. 
 6,vrta-xo''<""'—OT perhaps with Kriig. and Poppo's conjecture, the pros. part. 
 iu'Tlffxovffav. The construction I should compare with ix rov ivl ■nKi'iarov 
 oltTav, ch. 2, where see note. Tr. on account of the long continuance (or wide 
 prevalence) of piracy, ivr^xf "' is to hold out in the sense which we give to the 
 word as equivalent to continue. Cf. with Pop. ii. 64, vii. 71. Tlie reading of 
 many MSS., i. e. ai/Txrxovirai, is bad, though GoU. would fain defend it. For this 
 would imply that after long resistance to piracy, many ancient cities changed 
 their sites,— a fact of which there is no historical evidence whatever. On 
 piracy in general, see the stories with which Herod, commences his Sistory and 
 Herm. Pol. Antiq. § vi. 6, 7. efepov, in the sense of ' plundered,' does not often 
 appear without the accompanying xal ^70*/, like the Latin, *ferre et agere.* 
 aij-6a\d(T iTto I — like oit-fisyaKa, ch. i, to be taken as a single term. So we say 
 ' non-residents,' ' non-combatants.' * Who dwelt on the sea-side without being 
 seamen.' Hobbes. Kdru and &va as the prepositions kotA and ifh respectively 
 denote, ' down on the sea-coast ' and ' up the country.' Xenophon's Anabasis 
 is an instance familiar to every one. avifKuxiifvoi — ' situate up the 
 
 country.' There is no necessity to read ivtpKt(rii.4t>ai, for cities and their in- 
 habitants are frequently confused together in construction : vi. 88, 94 ; viii. 
 64. Pop. refers to ayoiKiie(rBat, ' emigrare in regione'm a mari remotam,' i. 58, 
 and viii. 31. 
 
 Chaptbe VIII. — (a.) Kapa koI ^oivixes. Concerning the Carians, cf. 
 ch. iv. and Herod, i. 171. On the occupation of Thasns by the Phoenicians, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 44; vi. 47 i also iv. 147 ; vi. 44. ^xiaav. Some MSS. 
 
 have ifienaav, which Kriig. in his note appears to prefer, though he prints ^xiirar 
 in the text. He compares ^K-naav tV 'iMiKiav iv. 6, ' dwelt in Sicily.' 
 AiiKov, See the account given, iii. 104. 6i)K!iv kvaipidfiaSiv. 
 
 BriKii is properly the ' grave,' that which contains the urn, or sarcophagus. But 
 the verb avaipew is not improperly used, as the earth would of necessity be taken 
 up and carried off. (Kriig.) Or we may say, ' tvhen the graves were taJcen up,' 
 meaning their contents. 6 rep iJ^ktu — • above half.' This is an 
 
 instance of the omission of the defining article in a very familiar expression, 
 such as, indeed, is common in our own language. We say, 'in town,' 'above 
 
Chap. 8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 5 
 
 bridge,' 'below bar,' and the like. The same whs the case in Greek with 
 iv nf\oirovi'ii<rtf, ch. 28; 'lirBfi.6s (of Corinth); Bao-iXtiJi (of Persia); n6\is, 
 'Aypos, ^TTovial. Kriig. defends the same expression, vwep T^iuffv tov &\\ov 
 (TTpoTeii^aTos, Xen. Anab. v. 10, where Schneider would insert the article. 
 Kiihner, Ch: Or. § 484, mentions several such words, ' which occur frequently 
 is common speech, aud are thus so generally in use, that even without the 
 article they can express a defined and individualized object.' Of. ch. 16. See 
 more in Schaefer's note, OS. T. v. 640. Add Kepas, ch. 48 b, and veKpois, ch. 
 54 b, and cf. 89 c, lOI b, 136 c. yi'aa'94vTes . . . |ui'Te9o/i»|U«'i'p. 
 
 This is generally interpreted with Pop., Agniti habitu armorum, sc. armatur&, 
 quippe qucB cum lis sepulta esset. ^vvTs6afifi4vri seems to me to stand almost 
 parenthetically, expressing the reason why they were able to examine them, 
 recognized from the garniture of their armour, inasmuch as it was found in the 
 grave with them, and from the mode of interment^ the same as that which they 
 now employ. Goll., with several MSS., has luPTeflo/i/ieVoi, which makes equally 
 good sense, /rom the fact of their being buried along with their arms. But the 
 two nom. plur. participles are in tliis case awkward, and it does not seem 
 certain that the custom was confined to the Carians. Vide Soph. Ajax, 1409. 
 For the peculiarities of the Cretan armour, see Herod, i. 171. They invented 
 ' crests ' {\6<j>ovs) : the interior double handle, or double hand for the shield 
 (^x^i'oy), which took the place of the old single strap (■nKaiiuu), and what may 
 almost be called armorial bearings — i. e. a^iieia, crests or devices drawn upon 
 the shield. The Schol. says the Phcenicians were recognized because they were 
 buried with their faces to the west. But Pop. argues this was no sufiicient 
 distinction, as other nations did the same thing — e. g. the Athenians. He refers 
 to Plutarch, Solon, x. ; iEl. Var. His. v. 14. 
 
 (b.) Karaa-ravros Si — The 5e is in apodosi 'inquam,'and (as often) resumes 
 the narrative from ch. 4. Kaxovpyoi — 'evil-doers,' sc. pirates. 
 
 Sreirfp. The Use oiirfp as a sufiix seems to indicate that especial stress is to 
 be laid on the word to which it is joined. 8s, who ; Swep, the very man who : 
 €(, if; eftrtp, if, as we may assume : Srf, when ; Sreirtp, just when, at the very 
 time when. See the note on flircp, ch. 59 b. ' The word is rare. See Hes. Theog. 
 291. Herod. V. 99; vi. 106' (T.K.A.) and JZ. iv. 259. tJh- H.TT\aiv. 
 
 Kriig. explains Kni/uEvoi xp^fafa. It would be better to point out to the tiro 
 how the termination in ais indicates the aatMzS. process of acquisition. Cf. the 
 same phrase, ch. 13. ficfiaiSrepoy ^kow — * dwelt with more stability ;' 
 
 this has reference to the /neTavauTiaeis before mentioned, ch. i. 
 ■rr\ov(rid}Tfpoi touTui/. In phrases of thissort the snbj ect, instead of being 
 compared with anything else, is compared with itself at another time or place. 
 All the grammars furnish abundant instances. See Matth. § 460, and Jelf, 
 § 782 g, where, however, instead of translating ScivciTaTos aauTov, ' when you so 
 entirely surpassed yourself it would be more accurate to say, ' when you were at 
 your best' — 'when you reached the highest point in cleverness you ever did 
 reach.' iipiifi^vot yip. These words convey the reason for the 
 
 statement ^ifiaihtpov iji/tow. Sov\iiav. Kriig. renders this word 
 
 ' TJntenowrfiglceii,' 'subordinate position,' for slavery, in the strict sense of 
 the term, was, he says, unknown to the most ancient Greeks; he refcra to 
 Athenaeus, vi. p. 264 [Tauchnitz, p. 77] ; Herod, vi. 137 ; Diet. Antiq^. 1034. 
 
1 6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 irpoffetroiovvT o — * tried to hring over to themselves,^ a word of which Thucjd. 
 is fond. See i. 57, and particularly the note on iii. ch. 47 a. 
 
 (c.) Kal in Toirtji T^ Tpifir^ — Krug. translates ' Verhdltnisse' — 'mutual 
 relations,' cL i. 97, ^v oHtf rpoTrqj KareVrT?, fiaWov — 'more than hereto- 
 
 fore.' See notes ch. 3 h, ' for perhaps their former relations, were not altogether 
 extinct,' Kriig. 
 
 Chapter IX. — 'K-^aiiiiivdiv . . . irpo^x"^ • * • ^^'^ iyuv-ayelpai. The 
 meaning obviously is, AgamemnoUyin my opinion, collected the armament, because 
 he surpassed his contemporaries in power, and not so much because he took with 
 him, &c. There is nothing more important for junior students to observe than 
 the distinction between the participle with and without the article. With the 
 article it is simply identified with the subject of the verb. Without the article 
 it expresses the cause or condition under which the verb is predicated of the 
 subject, and may be always given in English by introducing ' when,' ' because,' 
 * since,' * seeing that,' and the like, d ravTa irpd^as ATreflai'ey, * The man who did 
 this was hilled.' trpil^as ravra awedavev, * Se was hilled since he did this.' See 
 as parallel irpolixovTts, ch. 18, note b. Jelf s long remarks upon the participle, 
 § 681, may be read for illustrations. Kal vavriK^ re afia k.t.A. 
 
 Beiske proposed to substitute St for re, and thereby hangs the whole contro- 
 versy concerning the meaning and usage of the latter word. Dr. Peile has 
 devoted great pains to its elucidation [^Agam, App. C], and his conclusions 
 seem to me the most reasonable which I have met with upon the subject. It 
 will, however, be necessary for the student to study the dissertation for himself, 
 as it cannot be reproduced here in any abridgment which would be intelligible. 
 Let it suffice to quote one or two sentences in which he states results. 't« 
 serves to connect the several items which make up the detail of a poetic picture, 
 so that they impress the mind with the perception of but one continuous subject 
 or group.' ' t€ introduces a new term which is but an enlargement upon one 
 leading (former) term, or train of thought ' — ' in point of fact, it communicates 
 nothing more than the mind has already associated with something preceding 
 — it is an indication of some previous perception, and as long as the mind is 
 associating only a series of particulars included under the same general per- 
 ception, so long it expresses its thoughts by re . . . rt, hence its use as an affix 
 to the relative pronoun, and in such phrases as oTif $ re.' 1 will give one remark- 
 able case in order to fix this doctrine concerning re on the student's memory. 
 Soph. Aj. 1310, Tijs aris uirfpymcuKos, ^ toC o-ou S' bjialnovos Xe'yco. Here Her- 
 mann substitutes 7' for ff. But the line contains a sneer which Agam. properly 
 in iLj next line calls an oftrxiirToj \iyos j it means that he doubts whether she 
 might not be called wife to both — on behalf of your wife, or, must I say, your 
 brother's jointly — where -re blends the two men in the same relation to one 
 woman. The student may also be assisted in arriving at a conception of what 
 is meant by attention to such passages as the difficult one (ii. 62, ad finem), 
 tV "rihiiov v ^iveais ixvponepav Trapexerai, i\iriSi Te Tfaaov iriffTeiiei, where the 
 clause introduced by re does not contain a separate, additional idea, but is 
 rather the epexegesis of that expressed in the first. Tr. not— and also trust! 
 less to Bope, but, in that it trusts less to Sope, or, and withal trusts less to Mope, 
 The student should also read the remarks of Dr. Donaldson, who connects t» 
 
Chap. 9.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 7 
 
 ctymologically with Kfv. New Cratylus, §§ 149, 186, 195. Peile's version of 
 the present passage is, concurrently therewith (re a^ia) he became master, 
 &c. TvySdpfu, The authorities for this compact entered into by 
 
 the suitors of Helen to secure her to the one whom she might select, ar^ 
 Apollodorus, iii. 10, 9 ; Pausanias, iii. 20, 9. See also Eurip. Iph. Aul. 51 — 80; 
 Soph. Ajax, 1 100. Kriig. conjectures that the use of the name Peloponnesus 
 may have originated in the poetry of Tyrtseus, from whom he quotes the line, 
 ivp^tav Xie\oiros frjirov a<j>iK6iieBa. The whole fragment (Strabo, viii. J, p. 362) 
 may be seen in Grote. 
 
 (4.) XlfKoTTovvTiiTiiav may depend upon 01 SfSey/iim — 'those of the Felopon- 
 nesians that have received,' or it may follow aa^ia-ra-ra — ' the clearest accounts 
 of Feloponnesian affairs.' Arn. thinks that the absence of the article and the 
 use of Ue\oTrovpriiriiiiv for UcKoTromriaiaKSiv militate against the last. Neither ob- 
 jection is fatal, but both are strong enough together to make most editors prefer 
 the first interpretation. Poppo finally (ed. 2da) adheres to the last, influenced 
 by the imitations of Dio Cass. p. 8, <p(i(rtv ol ra a'a<ji€a'TaTa tuv ^a$iywif elS6Tes; 
 and Dion. Hal. Ant. Sam. p. 888, ot rh 'Pu/ialuv iraffCTaTa, ^|rjTeiK(!Tes. It may 
 be doubted whether this be a sound principle, for ' imitatores, servum pecus,' 
 are likely to imitate a peculiarity simply because it is one, without much inves- 
 tigation as to its origin. I incline to the opinion of Pop. (large edition), that 
 tA has been misplaced ; following, as it ought to do, the final to of (ra(pi(r7ara, 
 the transcriber made some confusion. iirrjXvTTiv ovra S/tas o-xe'" 
 
 —foreigner though he was, nevertheless had the naming of the country ; or, as 
 Goll. and A.im.,gave occasion to the naming of the country. This sense might be 
 thought to require iropao'xeri'. But the passages quoted by Goll. on ti,yavdKTT]<nv 
 ?XE', ii- 4', and by Arn. iii. 82, iv. i, Herod, v. loi, vi. 86, certainly show that 
 he is justified in saying that exeii' is sometimes 'JrajeAo&ereeow^affje^ra^JonejK,' 
 and hence * ansam da/re alicui rei.' Pop. has ' ohtinuisse hunc honorem, ut regio 
 cognomen ah eo acciperet' iiT7]\iiTT]v — fr. iwepxo/iat, i. e. from the 3rd 
 
 per. sing, of an old perf., as we have ^Xuais from the 2nd. .ffisch. Agam. 
 243. The form is unusual (but see Xen. (Econ. xi. 4, quoted by Kriig.), ewri\us 
 being the common nominative. ' On the general question (says T. K. A.) see 
 Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 70.' He urges that the testimony of Thucyd. is here of 
 little weight, because he is not stating his own convictions, but merely relating 
 what he heard from Peloponnesian antiquarians. iwevex^V"'^'- 
 
 Pop. has ' obtigisse,' 'fell to their lot ,-' so Kriig., ' zugef alien' which he rightly 
 remarks is unusual, ' accidisse ' being the more common force of the word. He 
 quotes, however, Herod, iv. 157, oh^iv trtpL xpv^'^^'^ fruvetpepero ; and Eurip. 
 Serae. gig, (rv/iipepeTai rh voWi to\\o7s ; and this is sufficient support. The 
 old rendering, ' were carried to a greater length by his posterity,' is untenable. 
 Mr. Eiddle, Terminalia, ii. says, 'the subject is Sivaniv. This power became by 
 subsequent additions still greciter.' in rp 'Attik^. This shows that 
 
 the name of Attica — 'A/tTiKij, the Sea-board— must have extended at this period 
 more widely than it afterwards did— at any rate as far as the Soironian rocks, 
 where, according to Euripides, Eurystheus was caught by lolaus, and not slain, 
 hut captured, KiWiaTov &Kpo6iiiiov. Seracleid. 860. At this period Megara 
 belonged to Attica, and may have shared in the name. The traditionary 
 accounts vai-y as to the captor of Eurystheus — Apollodorus, ii. 8, i, and Diod. 
 
 c 
 
J 3 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 iv. 57, siding wifcli Thucyd. ; and Pausanias, i. 44, 4, and Strabo, viii. p. 377 
 '.'79)' ™^*^ Euripides. Popp. The fact is of little importance, except so far as 
 it seems to illustrate the difficulty of obtaining trustworthy historical evidence 
 on these matters. The reader may iind an attempt to account for the divergence 
 of the legends by Pflugk. Eurip. fiisrao. p. 8. 'HpaKKeiSuy — withont 
 
 the article, as here and elsewhere, when patronymics are used as proper names. 
 Kriig. On the Heraeleids read Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. liiirpis. The 
 
 name of this sister of Atreus is variously given as Nicippe, Leucippe, Menippe, 
 and Amphibia. Ka-Th, r)) olKilov — * on the ground of relationshijp* 
 
 (pfiyovTa Thv iraTtpo — sc. Pelops. The legend has a double form. 
 According to one, Hippodamia, wife of Pelops, from hatred to her step-son, 
 induced her own children, Atreus and Thyestes, to slay him, and Atreus accord- 
 ingly iled to escape his father's vengeance. In the other, Pelops himself slays 
 Chrysippus, and Atreus ilies, dreading the same fate. For the Pelopidae, see 
 Grote, vol. i. ch. vii. ovKin— no longer came lack, or rather, 'crnne 
 
 hach no more* The phrase may he somewhat unusual, but there is no reason 
 to change it into ovk iirav(x'^P't<'^''> ^^ Kriig. has suggested. Indeed, he him- 
 self points out that it is defended by ovkstl aipufnv, i. 91, cf. 12 c. <p6^<p, 
 Jelf, § 607. XlepatiSav. Eurystheus was son of Sthenelus, and 
 grandson of Perseus. See Miiller's Dorians, i. ch. 3, and Grote, vol. i. ch. 4. 
 All the preceding paragraph, it must be admitted, is a specimen of exceedingly 
 confused narrative and inartificial composition. But it was written in the earliest 
 stage of prose writing. It is possible to re-arrange the whole as Kriig. has 
 done, and still to confess with him, that the great accumulation of participles 
 makes the new arrangement as bad as the old. The infinitives Tvyxiy^t" and 
 trapa^iiu depend upon Ktyovffi. 
 
 (c.) T^v (TTpaTclav. ' Pro hoc, et hie et alibi non raro apud Thucyd., ubi 
 erpeditionis bellicse notio requiritur, in MSS. aut omnibus aut plurimis a-Tpanliv 
 legatur.' Pop. The latter is found, moreover, in places in Aristophanes {e.g. 
 Acham. 251, 1143, Mq. 587), where the metre requires it. It does not, there- 
 fore, seem possible to retain the distinction of Ammonius and the grammarians, 
 ' trrpaTela ahstractum esse verbi ffrpaTeifiv, nomina in -10 esse concreta et col- 
 lectiva.' The truth is, perhaps, that in aU languages such expressions as ' the 
 expedition ' and ' the expeditionary army ' are wont to be confused. u 
 
 XopiTi, K.T.\. — ' not from favour so much asfromfear.' This is supposed to 
 be a tacit contradiction to x^P^^ Aroeldyffi <p4pQVTes, Od. v. 307. 7r\e2oy (in 
 Thuc. more commonly TrAeW) is synonymous with fiaWov, which occurs ii. 
 39, 3. Ki-iig. 
 
 (d.) ft Tip iKavhs TfKHT)piu(rat — ' if in ant/body's opinion he U sufficient 
 authority to ground an inference upon,' or 'competent to furnish sure evidence.' 
 That Thucyd. did not unhesitatingly follow him is clear from i. 10; ii. 41; vi. x. 
 Pop. On the omission of ^(TtI see Jelf 376, e. iv rov axiitrTpov r-^ 
 
 ■iT!ipaS6crei—i,e. in II. ii. 108. 'It was the custom with the ancients at that 
 early period, when writings were not yet distributed into books or chapters, 
 to make a division according to the prominent subjects anywhere treated 
 on. This was especially the case with Homer, portions of whose Iliad were 
 called by the names ri^os HarpiKKot, Ne/cuoiuavTefa, as is done here. Cf. Mark 
 xii. 26, ^irl TTJs fidrov: Rom. xi. J.' Bloomf. Cf. Miiller's Zit of Anc. Ghreeoe, 
 
Chap. IO.] NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. ig 
 
 50 — 52, and on the Rhapsodista, p. 32, 33. Grote on the Rhapsodists, &c., 
 vol. ii. ch. 21. 
 
 (f.) UoWrjffi vi\<roi<Tt. Miiller (JEgineUca,^. 24) points out that this 
 can only have reference to the Argolic Islands and those in the ^gean Sea 
 which lay round ahout, for Zacynthos, Dulichia and Paphos helonged to others. 
 ' Quales sunt Calauria, Hydrea, Tiparenus, Cecryphalea, fortasse iEgina, quau- 
 quam de hac dubitat Miiller.' Pop. 
 
 Chapter X. — {a.) fi4ii — without a corresponding Sc. The opposition is to 
 be found in § 4. Kriig. ^iKp6v — * an insignificant place/ The pre- 
 
 dicative adjective of the general notion in the neuter sing. See Jclf, § 381, and 
 the passages there quoted. Poppo says, ' non legitur hie geueralis sententia,' 
 and therefore understands Trt^Aitr/Ao. But if we say, * a poor sort of place/ we 
 surely do predicate a general notion. Mycense was destroyed by the Argives, 
 B.c 468, thirty-seven years before the Pelopounesian war. Strabo says that in 
 his time not a vestige remained of Mycense. Yet of the Gate of the Lions, and 
 the Treasury of Atreus, in a style so unlike the later Greek architecture, con- 
 siderable remains are yet to be seen, and will probably last as long as the 
 world. Arn. See the vignette in Thirlwall's Greece, small ed. i5 v. 
 
 Observe, not ef?; ; the fact is admitted to be true, but it is contended that the 
 fact affords no ground for supposing the expedition not to have been great — 
 ' And heeause Mycence was hvt an insignificant place, or, if any of the towns of' 
 that day now seem, to he of small account, one should not, talcing this as a sure 
 proof, disbelieve,' ^c. On fi^ with indicat. Soice7 see Jelf, § 749. 
 /iri yevecdai . . . . This is what has been called the redundant negative. 
 It owes its origin to the genius of the Greek language, which, where the pro- 
 minent idea in the speaker's mind is a negative, attaches a negative particle 
 to the predicate, whether another has preceded or no. Similar is the practice 
 of the uneducated with us, and with all nations. The best notice of the subject 
 is to be found in Buttmann's excellent edition of the Meidias, Appendix. See 
 also Jelf, §§ 747, 748, 750. KaTfx^' — 'obtinet' in Latin, from which 
 
 our word ' obtains ' — expressing that the report extends and dominates over a 
 certain extent. So Eurip. Bipp. 1464, ^riiiai Kar^xovcnv. Cf. 11 c. Pop. 
 refers to iii. 89, viii. 28 ; Kriig. to Valckn. on Eur. Hipp. 1465. 
 
 (J.) ft \ri<l>6eiTi, On el with the optative, expressing the most general 
 and indefinite form of hypothesis, see Jelf, § 855. KaTaaKevjjs toi 
 
 iSd<j>Ti. Arn. has a long note on the distinction between xaTaiTKev^ and napa- 
 oKevi], which amounts to this ; that the former is the stationary and permanent 
 stock — the ' fixtures,' as it were : the latter denotes, on the contrary, what is 
 movable and temporary — what can be prepared for an occasion. The former 
 would include the fortifications and public buildings of a city ; the latter, naval 
 and military armaments, &c. This seems correct as a general rule, though, 
 as he admits, passages occur which are difficult to reconcile with it, as koto- 
 <r/(eu)i ToC iroXeV""; ^"'- S- ^^ ^^ certainly used in i. 89 (which see), so as to 
 include the movable furniture of a household: compare ii. 38, 65; vi. 31, 
 from which it appears as though Pop. were right in calling it ' totam domiis 
 instruendse rationem,' so far as these passages are concerned. Kriig. says it 
 can here mean nothing but 'Anlage,'— or kti'itmoto, as the Schol. call them, 
 
 2 
 
20 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 ' fonndatioitt! He quotes Plut. Alcibiades, 36, r^y tuv tsixSiv Karaaxeirftv, h 
 KarftTKeiafftv iv &pi^Kri. Arnold quotes from Dodswell's Tour, ii. p. 303 — ^4, 
 language with respect to the ruins of Sparta, in exact accordance with Thucyd. 
 anticipations. T. K. A. appends from Wordsworth, p. 335, ' The only Hellenic 
 ruin of any note is a spacious theatre. The prophecy, therefore, of Thucyd. 
 lias been fully verified.' See as regards Athens, Grote, vol. vi. p. 24. 
 Trp6 s — ' in comparison with, from the notion of being placed alongside of.' Cf. 
 Jelf, § 638. rav irevre rij Sio /xotpas — ' two-ffths.' The prin- 
 
 ciple upon which the article is used in these cases seems to be that, when the 
 existence of any whole number is assumed, the existence of all its parts is 
 assumed also— they consequently become definite quantities and admit the 
 article. The second Lacedaemonian portion was Messenia, the national name 
 of which was almost disused. Kriig. quotes Xen. Bell. vi. z, 31. The remain, 
 ing portions were Arcadia, Argolis, and Elis. Some have supposed that Thucyd. 
 means two-fifths, physically and not politically speaking. iiyoiivrai — 
 
 properly said of a military leading in time of war, but, as Kriig. remarks, this 
 soon merges into a general and political one. From about 580 B.C. Sparta 
 acted as the recognized commander not only of the Peloponnese but of the whole 
 Greek name. The confederacy itself, however, was formed by the inhabitants 
 of that peninsula alone on fixed and regular laws ; whereas, the other Greeks 
 only annexed themselves to it temporarily. Miiller's Dorians, b. i. ch. 9. 
 TTiiXeios. The article has been supposed (see Arn.) to be absent upon the 
 principle mentioned in ch. 8, note (o), which see. But the cases are not parallel, 
 for it is not here the familiar expression employed by citizens for their city, as 
 in (Ed. Tyr. 630, fca^ol TiiXtms iifTeim. Therefore, either tr. with Kriig., 
 ' it being neither a city that has been compactly built, nor,' S^c, or regard viKsu's 
 as a gloss. It has been doubted whether ^uj/oiKitrflefo'Tis refers to the consolida- 
 tion of some separate demes, like that supposed to have been effected by 
 Theseus at Athens, or whether the words merely refer to the loose and straggling 
 way in which the town was built. There is no historical evidence to support 
 the first notion; and Kinh K^fias — ' village-fashion,' immediately following point 
 to the second. We know that there were four or five such K£/iai clustered 
 together, though not surrounded by a wall (as Bloomf. states them to have 
 been), at least before the .time of Alexander the Great. Their names were, 
 according to Miiller, Pitane, Messoa, Limnse, and Cynosura. ciKa^ccdai 
 
 depends upon olfiai above. Cf. Grote, vol. ii. p. 344. 'It was noticed that 
 Sparta, even in the days of her greatest power, was not (properly speaking) a 
 city, but a mere agglutination of five adjacent villages.' ipaveftis 
 
 i!i|/e<os — 'the appearance presented to the eye.' 
 
 (0.) iii|/eij — external appearance. Cf. Jelf, § 355, i. iJL^yiaTi\v 
 
 ruvirph aijrTJs. See note, ch. i. a. \enro^4v7]p — ' left behind by,' 
 
 i.e. inferior to. Kriig. quotes i. 144, 5, and TouTttij' ^l\os evepyerav oiiSevhs 
 A.efir6Ta£, Xen. Mem. ii. 4, 7- ^v — sc. •KoirifTiv, or, according to Pop., 
 
 irrpaTelai', implied in ^VToi/9a, which is equivalent to irepl Tain-q^ t^s aTpartias. 
 <c a 1 8 T 0? s — ' even in this way,' i. e. even accepting the naturally exaggerated 
 accoimt of Homer. ireiro(7)K€ — 'represented in his poem,' jast as 
 
 Plato has Pcuri\4as Kai SuvtifTTa? "OuTjpos TmrolriKe robs ev"AtSov rhv h.et xpivoy 
 Tinwpovuhovs, Oorgias, 525 E. x''^'""' I'-^.K. — ' consisting of 1200 
 
Chap. II.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21 
 
 The Schol. on IL. ii. says 1166, and Eastath. 1186. i,vSf>S>v. 
 
 By a similar idiom we say 'a ship of 1000 tons,' or 'of 100 guns.' Kriig. 
 quotes TrXoitt <rirov, referring to Lob. ad Phr^n.^ p. 262. 
 
 (d.) aireperai — 'rowed themselves,' or ' did their own rowing,' i. e. there 
 were no mariners distinct from the iighting-men. irpoirKtitrovs — 
 
 ' men at the oar.' 
 
 (e.) 01 iv re\ei — 'men in power,' the authorities. The same phrase 
 occurs ii. 10, 2, and a similar one, ili. 28, 01 iv tots irpiynairi, 'those in the 
 administration of affairs,' repeated by Theophrastus, eh. vi. p. loi, ed. Shep- 
 pard, licAAovTas. We might expect ^eAXtfvTtof, for certainly (as 
 
 Am. remarks) the word does not refer to the ireplvfai or ' supernumeraries ' 
 alone. Arn.'s explanation is that what precedes is equivalent to ircplveas iroWoin 
 juera ^(punf &y^iv, and that therefore (by a irphs rb tnjftaivSfieyoy) fieWovras 
 follows just as if he had so written it. Pop. says, ' ad omuem (iraecorum 
 exercitum speotant ; sed cum illi {ireplveas) hoc continentur aecusativos, ut 
 140, i., Thuc. collocavit ad quos usitatius alterum nomen opponeretur. Vide 
 iv. it8 ; viii. 63.' to; TrAoIa — * ^Aeir vessels.' KaTd<ppaKTa — 
 
 decked. ' Qua3 ab Arri. Anah. vii. 6, i, ■tre<ppayfi4vttt, a Latinis tectse vocantur.' 
 Pop. See ch. 14, and Sheppard's note on iirh tov KarairTptifiaTos, Theoph. p. 
 237. The Schoi. exflains o'iffatiiSa/ieva, ' with the hatches down.' Bl. 
 
 (f.) 5' oSv. The MSS. have yovv, but as the proper meaning of that 
 particle (cf. ch. 2, e) is inappropriate here, almost all editors adopt the above 
 correction of Bekker. rb /ifcrov iTKOirovvTi — to one regarding the 
 
 mean, striking an average, sc. between 50 and 120. This dative denotes the 
 person to whose estimate the matter is referred. Matth. § 388, gives instances. 
 Pop. refers to ri ^uBev aTrTop.4iiq>, ii. 49, 5. And, ' In universum aestimanti 
 plus apud peditem roboris.' Tac. Germ., c. 6. us &irh irdffTjs — 
 
 'considering that it was despatched Jrom all Greece' See Jelf, § 701 j Matthise, 
 §628. ov iroWol — i.e. 1,200 X 85= 102,000. 
 
 Chaptee XI. — (a.) ovx V oXty. too: '6a: 7] a^prip.. — 'Not so much the 
 want of men as the want of money' riji Tpoi(»i7!. The article 'vta- 
 
 ■^\e%, ' the necessary sustenance' TroAe^oOvTa ^toTevcsiv — 'would 
 
 be enabled to get its living while prosecuting the war.' A somewhat unusual way 
 of employing ySioreiJai, but not unparalleled, as is proved by Xen, Qiro^.iii. 2, 25, 
 ileta-uhoi cmii Tro\4ixou ^lOTiieii/. ^tteiSt) Se. Tlie 5e, tlicugh the 
 
 reading of the MSS., is awkward in its position, and therefore most editors, 
 including Kriig., read t€. He observes that Sh does certainly correspond some- 
 times to a previous re, but rarely, except in cases where what precedes the Si is 
 emphatically opposed to the former clause, as, for instance, here we might have 
 had a(piK6fieyoL Se. If we admit thus much, it seems unreasonable to demand 
 the exact collocation which logically expresses the antithesis, and we may 
 perhaps represent the Se by translating. Nay, even when they had now arrived 
 and won a battle (but that they did so win one is clear, for they would not other- 
 ivise have erected the fortifications of the naval camp, sc. because they could not 
 in the face of a victorious enemy), they manifestly, I say (Se in apodosi), did not 
 even thereupon employ their whole force, but, &,c. rh yhp epv/ia. The 
 
 article is used, for the poem of Homer rendered the existence of the entrench' 
 
22 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 ment known to all the Greek public. vphs yeupyiav. The Scbol., 
 
 from some unknown source, mentions Acamas and Antimaehus as engaged in 
 this cultivation. And, ' Diomedes, primis annis belli Trojani, riiv ©/j^'ktjv 
 ^yem/jyti, teste Eustath. <hJ 7^. p. 387.' Pop. \ri<miav — 'predatory 
 
 excursions.' Homer gives authority enough for this statement, II. i. 366, and 
 elsewhere. It will be remembered that the plot of the Ajax of Sophocles turns 
 upon the result of some such foray. 
 
 (ft.) ^ Kol fjiaWov — ' wherefore all the more.' Cf. i. 25,4 ; ii- z, 3 ; iv. 1, i, 
 Kriig. Ta iexa stt) — ' the ten years/ i. e. the famous ones of 
 
 the siege. $lt^ avre^xov — 'held out resisting force iy force,' or as 
 
 Krixg. has it, ' in the open Jield' ' in pitched battles.' r^ del irapoTu- 
 
 X<f''Ti. Krtig. prefers this to t^ Tiap6vTi, the other reading, I suppose because 
 it is still more vague, ' the portion that for the time being happened to be with 
 them' and though there be less authority for it in the MSS., the least common 
 word is also the least likely to have been substituted by a copyist. 
 h.v T!foaKo.&i^iii.ivoi. The %v is to be carried on to eTA.ov, for the participle 
 sine articulo would itself express the condition. Cf. cb. 9 a. And see the 
 matter discussed, iii. 82. 
 
 (c.) opojuao'TijToTa. Cf. i a. KaT€(rxi?K(iTos. Cf. 10 a. For 
 
 the general question regarding the Trojan war, the student will of course con- 
 sult Grote, vol. i., and Thirlwall, vol. i. 
 
 ChaPTEB XII. — (a.) eT( fisrai/iaTaTS re Kal KaT(pKi^eTO — 'was still 
 undergoing migrations of its inhabitants, and was in course of settlement.' He 
 means that it is not surprising that the Trojan expedition was of no great 
 magnitude, since, even subsequent to it, the same disturbing causes were at 
 work. BI. says the expression is one of poetic or Pindaric boldness. If so, we 
 ought, perhaps, to tr. fieraviiTTaTO, was shifting to and fro. Tiavxai^aaa. 
 
 An exemplification of the common grammatical rule that the nominative pre- 
 cedes the infinitive, where the subject of the infin. is the same as that of the 
 preceding finite verb — the accus. which three MSS. exhibit is thei'efore not 
 necessary. The |U^, according to Krvig. and Gdll., who quotes i. 141 ; iv. 126, 
 belongs to both. Tr. 'so as not, from enjoying rest, to be developed ' — i.e. did not 
 enjoy rest enough for development — and this mode of explanation will not be 
 necessary. ive6xi'.<'><'^. This word with its kindred (says Kriig.) 
 
 seems to have been banished from Attic prose. It is an old-fashioned Attic, 
 i. e. Ionic, word found in Herod., and it has been pointed out that Aristot. uses 
 it, fiirep avrhs (d &ehs) viox^ot, * queB nova ipse edit et designat,' Stepb. Thes. 
 Tr. here 'produced many revolutions.' atp' Zv — refers to crdaeis. 
 
 iKTrliTTOt/Tes ^KTi^ov — ' persons who were ejected proceeded to found the 
 cities,' sc. those which they were well known to have founded — their cities. The 
 yap which follows shows (as Popp. has seen) that the cities meant are those 
 founded by the Boeotians and Dorians, with others of contemporary date. 
 
 (4.) 'IXlov aXaxTiv. In the statement of epochs like this, the article does 
 not occur. Kriig. Cf. i. 23, 4; ii. a, i ; vi. 4, 3. ^{ "Apvris. This 
 
 was the Arne iu Thessaly. Kriig. and Lobeck assert that the name includ'es 
 the territory as well as the town. Homer mentions an Arne in Bceotia, II. ii. 
 507 (GoU.), which, according to this acnount, could not have been founded untU 
 
 \ \ 
 
Chap. 12.] NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. 23 
 
 sixty years afterwards. Heyne, ad locum, explains the discrepancy upon the 
 principle mentioned above that there was a district so called at the time of the 
 Trojan war, but that the town was not built before the arrival of the ^olians 
 from Thessaly. atroSaa 11.6s — ' a sprinlcling' The authority for the _■ 
 
 fast is to be found in the Homeric catalogue, II. ii. 494, and Miiller (fircho- 
 menus) supposes that it was merely in deference to Homer that Thucyd. records 
 it here. Yet he adds, that, with the exception of Orchomenus and Aspledon, 
 all Breotia was in their hands. As Thucyd. only speaks of an imoSaaids, it is 
 plain that he did not servilely follow the Homeric account. It is probable, 
 therefore, as Am. conjectures, that Thucyd. had other sources of information. 
 ' The Boeotians in the tradition are a wandering race, first driven by the Cad- 
 mseans into Thessaly, to the vale of Arne, which cannot have been so small as 
 it is depicted in our maps, and afterwards again expelled by the Thessalians 
 and returning into Bceotia. In this narrative we find the influence of the same 
 paralogism which so commonly comes before us in the history of the ancient 
 nations, that, viz. where two peoples of the same stock are found in different 
 localities, they are connected with each other by mutual migrations. If the 
 Boeotians and old Thessalians were of the same stock, according to one form of 
 the legend, the Boeotians would be represented as having wandered to Thessaly; 
 according to another, they would come out of Thessaly into Bceotia. I cannot 
 affirm that the Boeotians did not, in the Emathiau migration into Thessaly, pass 
 onward into Boootia. If, however, this was the case, I cannot conceive that 
 they had previously been driveu into Thessaly.' Niebuhr, Vor. lib. u,. Lander «. 
 VoVcerk. S. 1T3, f., quoted in Engelman's Germ, translation. AwpiTJs. 
 
 Upon the return of the Heracleids consult Arnold's note, MuUer's Dorians, 
 vol. i. ch. 2 ; Thirlwall, vol. i. ch. 7 ; Grote, vol. ii. ch. 18. 
 
 (e.) ouKeri aviiTT aiifvri — 'no longer subjected to evictions, or dislodge- 
 ments of its population.' i^eire/nirt — is a more suitable reading than 
 
 e|€7r6|Ui|'e, because the historian does not merely state the fact ; he means to 
 describe the action as continuous — • commenced the sending out of colonies.' 
 "lavas. Remark that the name of the inhabitants is used, and not that of 
 the country. rZv yriiriuTai/. ' Prseter Eubceam Cycladum incolas 
 
 intelligit velut Andrios, Tenios, Ceos, Naxios. Cf. vii. 57, Herod, viii. 46.' 
 Pop. 'IraKias. The truth of this will, of course, depend upon the 
 
 country included under the name. The student must consult Niebuhr, vol. i. 
 pp. 12 — 20, E. T. 'The Greeks,' he says, 'who regarded the Qilnotrians alone 
 as Italians, were long strangers to the wider extent in which the name was 
 applied within the country itself, and never used it so. . . . The region 
 which originally bore the name was, according to them, the peninsula hounded 
 by the isthmus, only twenty miles across, between the Scylletic and the Nape- 
 tine Gulf ... in other words it was the southernmost part of what was 
 afterwards called Bruttium.' Antiochus of Syracuse, to whom Aristotle refers 
 ■{Fol. vii. 10), in his own time drew a boundary for Italy ' by a line to Meta- 
 pontum from the river Laos, which, in after times, separated Lucania from 
 Bruttium.' ea-Tiv a X"?^"- He is speaking of the Ambraciots and 
 
 Anactorians, says the Schol. ' Adde Corcyram, Leucadem, SoUium, Corinthio- 
 rum eolonias. Vide i. 24, 30, 55 ; ii. 30, 80 ; Zacynthum AchsBornm, ii. 66.* 
 Poppo. 
 
24 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Chapteb XIII. — (a.) ir/KjTcpox 56 TJffav .... 0a(ri\e'iai. We must 
 not, liowever, suppose that the rvpavpiSes immediately succeeded these. Nearly 
 everywhere there was a transition state where all real power was possessed and 
 disputed among the members of an hereditary oligarchy. In passing from 
 this into a more democratical stage of social existence, the government very 
 generally fell into the hands of some ambitious individual — in most cases a 
 military chieftain. As long as he and his family retained it, they were ripamoi 
 properly so called ; but, as in the case of the Pisistratidse, it was frequently 
 wrested from them, and institutions more or less democratic succeeded. Head 
 Arnold's excellent essay. Appendix, vol. i. ; Thirlwall, voL i. ch. 6, pp. 187, 
 192; and Hermann's Gr. Anti^. §§ 54, 55, 56; Miiller's Dorians, vol. i. p. 176. 
 iirl pTiTols yepacr t — ' certain defined and specific rights and privileges* 
 ' yipas in genere omne praecipuum notat quod quis prae aliis habet, etiam 
 prsecipuum honorem aliquem.' Damn. Lex. Som. quoted by Bl. See on the 
 yepea ^aclKeia at Sparta, Herod, vi. 56 — 59 ; on iirl indicating a condition of 
 tenure, of. Jelf, § 634, 3, c. Head Arist. Politics, iii. 9, 10 : ^ Trep! tous ripaiiKobs 
 Xpipovs fia(ri\eia ^v eK6vTuv fjLfit, irrl 5e rttrt iipifffiefois ' (TTpaTTjyhs yhp ^v Kal 
 SttcaaT^is d $atTt\£vs, Kal twv trphs robs ©eoi/s Kvpios, See also Herod, vi. 56. 
 Kriig. remarks that M jntToIs is a settled formula. Cf. i. 122 ; Herod, v. 57; 
 Isocrat. 17, 19; Plato, Sympos. 213 A; BinivaTpiKalSs'foundedhi/ their fathers,' 
 cf. vii. 69, viii. 6; Isocrat. ix. 35. avnixovTo — held to, applied 
 
 themselves to. On the change from singular to plural, Kriig. refers to his own 
 note on Xen. Anab. i. 'J, 17, KCpiJs re Kal t] arpaTih Trap^Afle, Kal iyevovTO ^Xau 
 Tris Tti(ppov. 
 
 (h.) fueraxfipiiraL—lit. 'to take in hand,' rare in the active, though occur- 
 ring vi. 16, vii. 87. Kriig. adds iv. 18. Kal Sa/itots—i.e. 'as well 
 as for the Corinthians,' cf. Jelf, § 592, i. But, says Kriig., the vavs here men- 
 tioned were certainly not triremes, as Pliny asserts, iV. S. vii. 56, as these were 
 rnre before the Persian war. The Phocaeans had nothing but peuteconters 
 Her. i. 163. 
 
 {c) ii.a.\iaTa—'ungefdhr; 'nearly.' Krug. Philologers are divided about 
 the meaning of this word. ' Vehementer disceptatum est,' Pop., whose note 
 see. Prom the most careful and extended induction which I have been able to 
 make of its use in Thucydides, I should incline to the belief that the word is 
 employed, wherever an exact statement is impossible, to denote the very closest 
 approximation to it which the writer can make. It is therefore of necessity 
 sometimes to be rendered at the least, and sometimes at the most according to 
 the point of view from which the subject is contemplated ; and it is this appa- 
 rent contradiction which has so much perplexed commentators. See Peile's 
 note, ch. 18, who argues that the word means always 'at the least,' 'to the 
 full,' 'every whit.' Cf. Fasti Sellenici, p. 239, on the date. 4s rrj* 
 
 TiK(vTi\v— 'computed up to the close of this war.' The more usual form of 
 expression is with a dative, as in the next sentence Taiirp, and in the well- 
 known line, Kal t/s xP^""^ toio-S" ^o'tIi' ou|e\j)AufleSr ;' (E. T. 735 • Matth 
 § 388. 
 
 (d.) Nau/iox^a iraAoiTarr). See Herod, iii. 53. Refers to the expedition 
 undertaken by Periander to avenge the death of his sou Lycophron, who had 
 been banished to Corcyra, and murdered there. 
 
Chap. 14.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2$ 
 
 (e.) ail S-fi iroTi. 'The irore is to be referred to &el; the Sii has a slightly 
 intensive force.' Bl. ifxTrSpiov. Krug. refers to Arist. Fol. vii. 
 
 5, 5, where he is pointing out the most desirable site for a city. toTs 
 
 iroXaiois TroijjTats. Homer has a^veiiix re Kdpirflov, JZ. ii. 570. It does not, 
 however, appear certain that editors have a right to add, ' alluding, however, 
 solely to Homer,' any more than in ch. 5 b. iwKci 1(011. The active 
 
 here rests upon' the best MSS. authority, though elsewhere we almost always 
 meet with the middle. The act. is rather archaic and poetical (Hesiod, Op. et I). 
 632), and once or twice in this preface Thuc. seems to have affected such 
 expressions. afKpdnpa.. This must mean, 'bi/ sea as well as T>y 
 
 land' and so both Pop. and Krug. interpret it; others have imagined it to 
 imply, 'in the Mgcean and in the Corinthian gulf.' They compare i. 100, 112. 
 On the adverbial use of the word, cf. Matth. § 425, Jelf, § 579,6. The subject 
 of Ka.Qt)povy is 01 Kopli/Biot, as being the principal subject in the whole state- 
 ment, eirl Kvpov. Jelf, § 633, 2. 
 
 (y.) 'Itoo-ij'. The Phocseans, Her. i. 163; the Milesians, iii. 39; the in- 
 habitants of the islands, Herod, i. 27 (Krug.); Samians, e.g. and Chiaus. 
 vie OS. The Ionic, or old Attic gen., cf. &tyTtos, rifiia-eos. Thucyd. employs 
 both forms of the gen., for we have vlov, v. 16. UoXuKpar-fis. Cf. 
 
 iii. 104, and read Herod, iii. 39, et seq.; Grote, vol. iv. p. 321. 
 'PiiyeLav. See the account, iii. 104. This is mentioned here (Kriig. thinks) 
 because Thucyd. already was intending to introduce the circumstances there 
 recorded. 
 
 (g.) o'lKiCovTes. There is no article, and therefore the form of expression 
 itself points out, that some battle must be intended which was fought during 
 the actual process of colonizing the place. Arn. therefore is right in saying that 
 the sea-fight mentioned by Herod, i. t66, cannot be the one here meant, though 
 he is not quite so right in translating, * the FhoctBans who were founding 
 Massalia,' as if we had found 01 olni^ovTiS. This, however, does not affect his 
 statement that the real founders of Massalia were a body of Phocasans sent 
 forth fifty-five years before the reduction of the mother city by the Persians. 
 They were subsequently joined by the citizens then expelled from 'their homes, 
 and it is probably owing to this double settlement that so much chronological 
 confusion has occurred concerning the event. See the discrepancies in Poppo's 
 note. 
 
 Chapteb XIV. — (ffi.) Tiivr-r)Koiir6pois. Vessels with a single bank of 
 oars, twenty-five on each side. -nKoioLs fj.aKpots — long, light boats, 
 
 probably containing many men, and going at great speed. Bl. compares them 
 to the piratical barges of earlier times, and refers to Wachsmuth, Antlq. Gr. ii. i. 
 See Xen. Anab. v. i, 1. 
 
 (J.) ra M7)SiKa, rci, HipffiKo, — when used as epochs, denote the second 
 Persian war. Kriig. adds, the second determination of the date by reference to 
 Darius, is given by Thucydides in order to mention the third Persian war. We 
 must remark that Thucydides passes over the usurpation of thepseudo-Smerdis, 
 recorded by Herodotus. irepl.Si/ceA.ioc. These words, as Pop. 
 
 points out, may either mean 'in SiciliS, circumcirca,' i. e. 'in the different parts 
 or quarters of Sicily,' cf. vi. j, 6, or ' in Sicilia et finifeimS, Italia, • the parts 
 
26 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 round about Sicily.' Of. ii. 26. The ripavvot were Gelo and Hiero (Herod, 
 vii. 158), 'et prsBter eos sine dubio Theronem, Anaxilaum, alios.' Pop. 
 ^i TrA^ffot — upto, i.e. amounting to, u, large number. Kriig. cites Bergler 
 ou Aristoph. Ach. 686, is raxos "aUi, KfpKvpaiois i. 25, Herod, 
 
 vii. 68. 
 
 (c.) Miiller, in his .Sginetica, states a suspicion that the navy of iEgina 
 was purposely depreciated by Thucydides. Thirlwall, vol. ii p. 66, conjectures 
 that the Athenians had no insignificant fleet in the time of Pisistratus. 
 Pop. ei Tiyis &X\oi — sc. yoi/Ti/ci iKeKTTjPTo. The Thasians, foi 
 
 instance, or Lesbians. lb. Jelf, § 895, 2. Ppax^a- Kriig. inter- 
 
 prets small, 'trifling' as i. 141, etti fipax^'f irpofdcrei. Pop., too, lias ' 0paxea 
 = j[tiKp(£ uti. 130, 140J ii. 22.' oij/e re, acj>* ou — litQTAlly, the period 
 
 is recent, counting from which up to the present, i. e. if you take that event as an 
 epoch, and count from it to the present, you will find the time short. Of. o.<j> 
 oZ, ch. 18. The phrase must be taken 'en masse,' and the latter clause is not 
 in translating to be carried forward to the verb. Tr., therefore, 'tis no long 
 while ago since, or that Themistocles, Sfc. We may compare ou ttoKvs xp^'">s 
 iireiS^ . . . . ov TToWh ett; iir€LS-f]. Peile refers to the Latin * longo post 
 tempore,' and v. 26, eri; 5e es touto rh ^v^vavra iyei^ero rt^ iroKefitp ewTa Kal 
 e(Kon. It seems hypercritical to suppose with Kriig. a:<f' ov to be spurious. 
 Such familiar expressions indicating measure of time or space, will not always 
 stand strict logical analysis, as ^ij^oi KfiSey Sflcyjrcp Sjicei ((Ed. Col. 122I), 'to 
 go thence whence he came.' irpo(rSoKiixov ovto s — * ieing expected,' 
 
 as we say. Ci-'A-prifiiov 'iFpo(rZ6Kt^ov is r^v Kiirpoi/ ^Jvai. Herod, v. 108. The 
 sea-fight mentioned by Herodotus, vi. 88, between the iEginetans and Athenians, 
 occurred shoiily before the battle of Marathon, and it is natural to suppose 
 that Thuoyd. refers to the same here. But Pop. and others assume that toS 
 Pap$dpov must mean Xerxes, and not Darius, because, I suppose, the latter did 
 not conduct the expedition in person. They therefore consider the time here 
 specified to be that between the two Persian wars ('Die Worte bezeichnen 
 ofienbar die Zeit zwischen den beiden Per.ser Kriegen,' Engelman), and are 
 obliged to resort to an hypothesis (started by Miiller, .Xginetica) that another 
 jEginetan war broke out after the battle of Marathon. But this seems to me 
 to be founded on a misconception of rov Pap$dpov, which does not necessarily 
 mean the Persian Mng at all, but stands for the people, just as the Latins said 
 ' Romanus,' ' Pcenus,' and we say ' the Gaul,' or ' the Turk,' meaning by the 
 term the whole nation, and so precisely, ch. iS, 6 pdp^apos. ras 
 
 vavs — 'the well-known fleet.' iva'jfidxv<^<^^ — at Salamis. Sih 
 
 ■jrd(r7}s — sc. t7}s veus. Or we may consider it, with Kriig., an adverbial ex- 
 piession like airh Trpiirris, where /io7pa, or some such noun, has been suppressed, 
 
 Chaptee XV. — (a.) S/ius. Notwithstanding their insufiicient navies. 
 SiapKTJ. If the word difiers at all in signification from airapxiis, Kriig.'s 
 suggestion may be correct, that, viz. it indicates a country incapable of accom- 
 modating a gradually expanding population, whereas airapxiis has reference to 
 an inability to supply the wants of its existing inhabitants. Prom vi. 90 (sub 
 finem) they appear nearly identical in meaning ; but Sici may have the force of 
 'thoroughly,' 'throughout.' 
 
Chap. 1 6.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2/ 
 
 (J.) 3<roi Kal kyivovTo. This is one of those cases where the force of 
 the conjunction may (as Am. has well said) be expressed by an emphasis on the 
 auxiliary verb, ' as many as diA take place.' See ch. 97 and loj. The idiom 
 seems to class itself with those cases where wal introduces something to which 
 the attention is directed in contrast to what has preceded — the adversative Rai — 
 as in the phrase -ri xph k"' ^eyeic, concerning the right interpretation of which 
 scholars are not agreed. Hermann, e.g. explains, t( Kal xph f^eynv, 'non solum 
 quid , sed etiam an aliquid dicendum sit dubitat.' Klotz, on the contrary — ' Si 
 dico tI xph K"' XeVei", propria hoc qusero, quid sit dicendum, etiam si solum de 
 dieendo cogitemus.' I think Hermann is correct, and that the pln'ase means, 
 ' well, if one must speak, what are we to say ? ' where the speaking is introduced 
 in contradistinction to the more suitable silence. So t( Kal,poi\i(Tde, S vednepoi; 
 'what do you want P' said when the parties addressed ought not to want any- 
 thing ; so here the koX eyeuovro is in contrast with ouSels ^vvcaTq. 
 trpoira-xivTfs. Cobet conjectures TrpovxifTes, because he does not believe this 
 word can rightly mean — applying to them, i. e. giving attention to them. But 
 Kriig. quotes appositely, "Trpofre^x^ t^ /caret ddl^aaaav iroKeixtp, vii. 4, 5. 
 ittS'fifjtovs (TTpaT^las. It may serve as an instance of GoUer's hypercrlticism 
 and over-subtlety to mention that he would strike out the words woKii airh ttjs 
 cavTciy as tautological after ixS'liiiovs. Now this word, as is notorious, denotes 
 the simple idea 'abroad,' as i-mSiinovs would 'at home;' and of course it is 
 quite as possible to be at a great distance abroad, as at a small one — cf, eirl 
 e|o5oc skSt]hoi/ ii. 10, 'J'or a foreign ex'pedition' i. e. beyond the limits of their 
 own states. For the construction Kriig. compares rhv hphv ■n6\e{iov ifTTpdrevaaVf 
 i. 112; and Lobeck, AJax, 290. T. K. A. remarks it is an extension of the 
 strict cognate accusative 4^6Sovs i^ievai, ffrpaTeiav (TrpaTivitrQai, tr. * went out 
 on foreign expeditions.' Cf. Jelf, § 588, i. uirijKooi |ui/e(rTi^K€ffav. 
 
 Kemark the absence of the ai'ticle — 'associated themselves in a subordinate 
 position' sc. ol "EWrjves. avToi — 'themselves unaided,' sc. oy inr^Kooi. 
 
 aTrh ttJs Xa"ns — ' aquo jure^ ' ex mquo' Haack. We must, as in ch. 14, con- 
 sider the phrase adverbial from the ellipse of /iolpa!. Kriig. renders — 'in 
 relations of equality, independence of each other,' cf. iii. 40, toS airi) rris Xa-qs 
 ix^pov. 
 
 (e.) v6\efiov. Refer to Herod. T. 99. Thirlwall, i. p. 456. 'Bellumortum 
 est de Lelanto vel Lelantio campo. Vide Strab. x. p. 688.' Pop. ' Clavier 
 considers 800 B.C. as the date of the war for the Lelantie territory, mentioned 
 Herod. V. 99; Tbuo. i. 15; Aristot. Fol. iv. 32.' Hermann, F. A. of Greece, 
 §11,12. Sie'o-Tr; — Yit. stood apart — divided into the alliance. Kriig. 
 
 compares StsKpiBjiaav, i. 18. 
 
 Chaptee XVI. — (o.) iTreyivfTO. This verb would natm-ally govern both 
 HWoLs and ke! "laffi. The latter words, however, as Kriig. remarks, also link 
 themselves in construction to itreCTpdrevfre. It is in fact one of the anacoloutha 
 of Thucyd., who sometimes introduces a fresh clause with a new type of con- 
 struction, apparently forgetting that the previous clause is imperfect, if the 
 form into which it has been thrown be not followed out. Cf . v. 95, ov Toirovrov 
 jSAttTTTei ri ex^P" ifiSiv '6aop ^ <l>iKia (not flAoTTTei, but) aaSeveias it apaSeTyfia to?! 
 apxoii'ii'ois Srihoifieyoi'. This, with other idioms of the same sort, depends upon 
 
28 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 a prinoiple of the utmost importance for the right understanding of Greek 
 ttuthors, noticed by Mr. Shilleto in his edition of Demosthenes De Falsd Leg. — 
 viz. that the Greeks scarcely ever, where it is possible to avoid it, make a two- 
 fold statement alike in both clauses ; they vary the construction even to affecta- 
 tion. Express /cctl 'lain in English — ' and as their particular impediment to the 
 lonians, Cyrus and the Persian monarchy made a descent upon them.' 
 I^h ai^TiBTJvai. Great difSculties have been made about the absence of the 
 article rod. But, as Kriig. says, the simple infinitive follows, because KaXifiara 
 iireyeyeTo is e.\actly equivalent to lKa\vBri<ray, of. Jelf, § 668, 2. ivrhs 
 
 "AAuos. ' This side Halys' — as this expresses a familiar division by a familiar 
 boundary, the absence of the article may well be defended on the principle 
 mentioned above (chap. 8 a), though, as a general rule, Kriig. may be right in 
 saying, the Greeks to irora^hs prefix the proper name with the article, 6 ''A\vs 
 iroraii6s. See for the facts, Herod, i. 28. ^SauAcoo'c. The younger 
 
 student should compare ZovXaffit^evos voce medi^, ch. 18, and he will see that 
 the middle is avoided here, because reference is not made to the reflex effect of 
 the action upon the actor, or his interests, but simply to its effect upon the 
 sufferer, Kriig. also notices this — ' Hier nur das Leiden des Objects, nicht das 
 Interesse des Subjects zu bezeichnen ist.' Ka\ ras vijcrovs — sc. 
 
 iioihuMTf. Herodotus (i. 143, 151, 169) relates, that upon the submission of 
 the continental cities to Harpagus, the islands voluntarily gave themselves up. 
 But, adds Poppo, either the submission of the islands was simulated and 
 temporary, or Thuoydides overlooks this surrender, and is thinking of their 
 reduction beneath the Persian power, after the battle of Lade, at the close of 
 the Ionian revolt. See iii. 141. 
 
 Chapter XVII. (a.) t!> i(f kavrSiv. 'Their own interests' Pop. and 
 Kriig. • What concerned themselves.* Am. ' That which depends or rests upon 
 themselves.' Kiihn. Grr. Gr. 611. These of course amount to the same thing. 
 It is, however, possible to interpret with Peile — 'what was for their own time, 
 i.e. would last their own time.' Cf. i. 144, 3 ; v. 81, 2. es re rh 
 
 a Sin a. Kriig. understands this of personal security. It probably includes the 
 notion of luxury as well. Si' ha<^a\flas — ' talcing measures for 
 
 security.' Kriig. This scarcely seems accurate. The preposition Sia must, I 
 think, as usual denote, 'in a state of i.e. it indicates that the subject is passing 
 through some status. See what is said ch. 40 c, and the whole will mean — 
 ' Keeping as quiet as possilile,' allowing as few opportunities for change or 
 commotion as they could. On the administration of these Tipavvot see Her- 
 mann's Political Antiq. of (Greece, § 64. He adds in a note, ' Were the tyrants 
 generally warlike ? Thuc. i. 1 7 seems to deny it, but it is positively asserted 
 by Plat. Sep. viii. p. 566 E, and Aristot. Fol. v. g, 5.' ^kow. Arn. 
 
 remarks the verb does not merely signify ' they inhabited,' but ' they lived in and 
 conducted/ as in ii. 37, iii. 37" ^'^ Siowci;/ t^i/ ir6\iv — is, * to administer the 
 affairs of the city.' air' avTuv. Tlie preposition 'has a mixed 
 
 meaning, partly expressive of derivation, and partly of agency.' Arn. But as 
 the doer of an act is considered as the source from which it proceeds, both ideas 
 naturally coincide and are expressed by the same word. See, however, Matth. 
 § 573 ; Jo'f> § 623. c. «< (U^ ei. The use of ti ai) for, unless' ia 
 
Chap. i8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 29 
 
 readily explained by the ellipse of some predicate to be supplied from the rest 
 of the sentence. The second €i appears to me to belong to ti — i. e. ' si quid,' 
 and such also is the case with three instances which Jelf, § 860, 7, has cited as 
 , exhibiting a second ei in connexion with ei ij.ii. Pop. supplies after ei li)} ti t., 
 the words a.^t6\oyov ipyov ^irpaxSij, and says that the whole runs thus : ' Nisi 
 si quid adversus suos quique jinitimos memorid dignum fecerunt (quod certe 
 fecerunt SicilicB iyranni), nam (As) SicilicB tyranni' (Sfo. In ei fii} et ti, says 
 Bl., we have an Attic phrase for ei ij.ii 8,ti. fKicrrott — a sort of 
 
 ablative, corresponding with iir' avTSv, and depending upon eirpdxBri. 
 
 (S.) 01 7ip ^j" 2iicE\ici. The yap has reference, as frequently, not to an 
 expressed, but an implied assertion — 'but not all, for the Sicilian tyrants.' 
 This is more simple and natural than with Kriig. to refer it to et ri <raua &kovv, 
 &c. TTa.vrax6B(v — 'from causes operating on all sides.' See i. 124, 
 
 and iii. 53 e. KaTtixf^o ■ ■ ■ ctToA.fioTe'po eTvtti. There does not 
 
 seem to me any real difficulty here. Of course the words do not mean — ' was 
 prevented from being timid ;' but the two infinitives proleptically express the 
 result of KaTeix^To, and /t^re ... re are like the Latin 'neque . . . et' — Greece 
 was kept in check, so as both not to perform in confederacy any brilliant 
 (^avip6v) exploit, and to he in its separate communities somewhat defieieni in 
 enterprise. The absence of Sfrre is of no importance, cf. iii. 23 ; vi. 69. 
 
 Chaptee XVm. — (a.) €7r€i5j) 5e. 'The construction of this sentence is 
 throughout involved and irregular. Bl. ' Protasis primS, sententii alio modo 
 post parenthesin repetitur verbis /leri Se tV tS>v rvpdvvav KardXvaiv, et per 
 dupUcem particulam yap causam, et causae causam indicat.' GoU. 
 ■ripavvoi. 'The following tyrants are stated by ancient historians to have 
 been deposed by the Spartans : the Cypselidae of Corinth and Ambracia, the 
 former in Olymp. 49. 3 (584 B.C.), the latter probably somewhat later; the 
 Pisistratidaj in Athens, who were allied with the Thessalians in Olymp. 67. 3 
 (510 B.C.); their adherent, Lygdamis of Naxos, probably about the same time; 
 .fflschines of Sicyon, about the 6sth Olymp. (520 B.C.); Symmachus of Thasos, 
 Aulis of Phocis, and Aristogenes of Miletus, of whom we know only the names. 
 Tlie larger numbers were dethroned under the kings Anaxandrides and Ariston, 
 Cleomenes and Demaratus.' Miiller's Dorians, vol. i. p. 189. The deposition 
 of tyrants, as opposed to the principles of Dorian aristocratical government, was 
 evidently part of the fixed policy of Sparta, and upon these grounds we must 
 account for the great armament sent against Polycrates of Samos, which Herod, 
 iii. 54 represents as despatched to avenge the plunder of a cauldron and breast- 
 plate. ' It is easy to perceive,' says Muller, vol. i. p. 187, ' in the dynasties of 
 the Sicyonian, Corinthian, Epidanrian, and Megarian tyrants, a powerful coali- 
 tion against the supremacy of the Dorians, and the ancient principles of that 
 race, the more powerful as they knew how to render subservient to their own 
 ends the opinions which had lately arisen.' For a full understanding of the 
 subject, the student must read Miiller's Dorians, vol. i. cli. 7, 8. ^irl 
 
 voKi — 'to a great extent;' to be understood ZocaWy, says Kriig.; butEngelman 
 has ' grossen Theils.' ol irAcio-Toi Ka\ TiXev-raloi. 'The junior 
 
 student should observe that, in accordance with Granville Sharp's important 
 canon, the same persons are denoted by both participles. The canon in qnes- 
 
30 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 tion is : ' Wlien two or more assumable attributives ' (i. e. adjectives, participles, 
 or nouns denoting quality, relation, or condition) 'joined by a copulative or 
 copulatives are assumed of the same person or thing, before the first attributive 
 the article is inserted, before the remaining ones it is omitted.' On the theolo- 
 gical importance of the canon in such expressions as b 0eis koI Swrjjp q^uf, and 
 for ample illustration, consult Middleton on the Qreeh Article, pt. i. ch. 3. At 
 the same time it must be admitted that apparent exceptions to the canon are so 
 numerous as somewhat to shaJce implicit confidence in its correctness. The 
 matter is one which has not received as yet its full discussion. ' The important 
 question appears to me to be this — Are the existing violations of the rule to 
 be ascribed to the falsehood or inaccuracy of the grammatical principle npon 
 which it rests ? or is the principle metaphysically and grammatically correct ? 
 and are the violations of the rule owing to the looseness and rapidity of ordi- 
 nary discourse, which does not observe grammatical accuracy where the danger 
 of misapprehension is not a practical inconvenience ? In conversation we should 
 probably say, 'The man and horse,' without repeating the article; for there 
 could be no fear of our bearers identifying the two. But in grave and written 
 composition, should we say ' the warrior and statesman,' if we meant two dis- 
 tinct persons — Wellington, e.g. and Peel? I think not; and, therefore, in all 
 cases of serious composition, where confusion was possible, I believe that the 
 Greeks, far more accurate thinkers and writers than ourselves, adhered to the 
 principle of the canon. I have been led into these remarks from the assertion 
 of a scholar whose opinion is entitled to the highest respect, that 'upon a pinch 
 Granville Sharp's canon always fails.' As a general rule it certainly does fail, 
 but ' upon a pinch,' i. e. where its violation would occasion confusion of thought, 
 I myself believe that it does not fail.' Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 56, note on 
 Toifs oi^LKovix4vovs KoX &yavaKTovvTas — ' those who express their indignation at th6 
 injuries they are receiving.' I so expressed my opinion some time ago, and all 
 subsequent examination has confirmed my belief in its correctness. The reader 
 may, by way of illustration, compare with this passage, which means, the most 
 numerous, who were at the same time the last, 5 irpwros Kal TcAfVToios Spafjidv, 
 Much. Agam. 305. And, on the other hand, tuc 'n(\OTroyinnaiiav Ka\ 'ASrivaiuv, 
 i. I ; T&! iieylaTas ttol ^Xox'cTas I'oBs.i. lo; rris Sa^a/uffas Kal IlapizAou, iii. 33; 
 contrasted with 4v aitr^ rh afivveaQai Kal iraSeiv, i. e. the suffering encountered in 
 the OAit of repelling the enemy; 01 AaKcSaijit(i;'iot Kal 'Aeijxaioi, i. 18; rb /SpaSii 
 Kal fiiWov, i. 84; ri TrapavTixa. re Kaix,vpiT-t\s Kal is t\> liretra 8(!|a, ii. 64; rh 
 fiov\6fjt.iyoi' Kal li-KOTTTov, i. 90 — the suspicious purport of their policy, 
 lifri. Tiiv Krlffiji. The majority of MSS. have kt^o-ii/. For the latter it has 
 been urged that the Heracleids certainly did not build Sparta, but found it, 
 though a somewhat insignificant place, already inhabited by Acbseans (Miiller's 
 Dorians). On the other hand, Thucyd. himself, v. 16, says ire rh Trpmrop 
 AaxeSalfLoi/a KTi(ovT€s Tois Paa-tKeas KaBlaravTo ; and Isocrat. Fan. e. t6, calls 
 the Heracleids and Dorians oiKiffras ^irapTTjs. These passages have induced 
 most editors, and rightly too, to prefer KTifni/. Ampi4av. Pop. has 
 
 collected a large number of similar genitives in his note upon 'EperpieMV, ch. 
 ij c. Cf. Wunder on Soph. PA/i. V. igi. o-Tao-idirairo. This is said 
 
 of the period before Lycurgus, and, as Am. suggests, probably refers to the 
 jealousies between the reigning houses of Eurystbenes and Procles. See Herod. 
 
Chap. i8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 3 1 
 
 i. 65, vi. 52 ; Isoc. Panath. § 177 j Thirlwall, vol. i. p. 315. ?t7; 
 
 TeTpaK(io-io. The question concerning the age of Lycurgus i.i too long and 
 difficult for a note. Thuc. here makes it fall 804 B.C. ; since the Pelop. war 
 ended B.C. 404; Apollodorus, in 884 B.C.; Messenia was conquered, and the 
 war concluded by Theopompus, according to Isocrates, ahout 750 B.C. [Arn. 
 says the date ought to be 724 B.C.] ; and Theopompus was next but one in 
 descent to Charilaus, in whose reign Lycurgus made his reforms. See, however, 
 Clinton, F. S. p. 408 ; Miiller's Dorians, ch. 7, p. 154, who states, • We abso- 
 lutely find no account of him (Lycurgus) as an individual person.' Thirlwall, 
 vol. i. ch. 8 ; Grote, vol. ii. oh. 6. /i(i\i itt a. Peile, comparing many 
 
 passages, argues that niMara must mean ' at least,' ' every whit.' It is obvious 
 that he is right here, and in ch. 21, 54, 118, and others to which he refers. But 
 see ch. 13, note c. \i fiiXiaTa denotes the nearest obtainable approximation, 
 when it is the writer's intent to make the number as large as possible, it will 
 he ' at least,' and when »!ce tiersi!, ' at most.' is t^ji' Te\fvri\v — ■ 
 
 • computed lip to the close of this war,' and infra, es rivSe rhv TniAc/noc. Peile 
 refers to Theoc. i. 26, iroTa^eAlerai €ts Siio ttcAAos, not into, but as much as two 
 pails. So agidn, iii. 83, 107, is with a numeral, which, as in Theocrit., I 
 should render ' Mp to.' /xerii S4. This is Se in apodosi recalling 
 
 the statement with which the ch. commences after the interruption of a long 
 parenthesis. 
 
 (b.) T^ ^eyd\aj (TTtfA^. Note the article. ruv ^vfiTroXefitityavrtav. 
 Those who regard the aorist as any other past tense, must be puzzled by this 
 participle, as Pop. is, who remarks, ' non ut plerumque participinm aoristi dici- 
 tur, nam primum bellum Persicum non erat communiter gestum.' According 
 to our theory of the aorist, the form of the expression is exactly correct, indefi- 
 nite, and not indicative of any particular time. The confederated Greeks — 
 almost equivalent to tUv ^viiiiix""' '** confederate QreeTcs, cf. Appendix. 
 •jr^o^XovT is. See ch. 9, note a. 5ioj/or;0e;/T€s — ^ having formed 
 
 the idea.' The 5io denotes its passage through their thoughts. Cf . ch. 17 a. 
 dcacTKEuicirct/uEi'oi. The correlative to KaraiTKeud^oiMi. It is used in military 
 writers to denote the breaking up of » camp. See Xen. Anab. vi. 2, 5, and 
 here it must mean something similar, i. e. 'having packed up all their movable 
 furniture, and taken it with them' Si€ KpiBTicav — 'were separated 
 
 off into the parties of the A. and L.' Cf . ch. 15 b. Pop. appropriately quotes 
 'dissidere in Arminiura ac Segestem,' Tac. Ann. i. 55; so SieifjctKr) means 
 ' were manifestly seen to be the most powerful on the opposite sides.' Cf . iv. J i, 
 108; vi. 17. 
 
 (c.) oi^ai.xh'-''- is ^"^ Ionic word (Herod, vii. 145), not in use, says Kriig., 
 by the Attics. A distinction has been drawn that |i//x/iaxia denotes alliance in 
 subordination to some leader ; 6y.atxH-'"^ ^ league upon terms of equality. But 
 it is impossible to pronounce positively upon the correctness of this. For the 
 circumstances see ch. 102. yuera KivSivav — amid dangers, i. e. in 
 
 actual service. Kriig. compares i. 70, 5 ; ii. 42, 3 ; iii. 56, 3 ; vi. 31, i. Arn. 
 paraphrases well : ' Their field of exercise was not the parade, but the field of 
 battle.' Bl. quotes a similar description of the Boman military system. Joseph. 
 Bell. Jud.iVi. 5. i. 
 
32 jfOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Chaptee XIX. — (a.) riyovpTo — 'exercised their Tiye/iovla.' Matthise, 
 from a hasty consideration of this passage, was induced to believe that riye7<rSai 
 governed the accusative. It evidently stands here independently, and the 
 accusative depends upon exoJ'Tes. itriTTjSiius TroXireie iv — .* to live 
 
 under apolity accommodated to oligarchical interests.' It makes little difference 
 whether with Pop. we read TroKiTiiiiracri, or with Kriig., iroXiretJir.oua't, as there 
 is ample authority for either form of expression — the latter being rather more 
 direct and definite — how they shall, instead of, in order that they may. The 
 words are paralleled exactly by ovk iirtrriSeitiiS ix^^^t ^' ^2, i, and KaraffT-fiffeiv 
 is rh iiriT'f)Setoi', iv. 76, 4, and especially i. 144. The method and extent of the 
 Spartan fiye/iovla is set forth by Miiller, Dor. book i. ch. ix. § 2. The Spartan 
 supremacy was exercised in expeditions of the whole confederacy. A Spartan 
 king was generalissimo, with many of the privileges of the old Homeric chief- 
 tain. The Spartans before a war sent round to the subordinate states an order 
 to furnish part of a contingent, the maximum of which was always a determined 
 quantity previously fixed ; but they never (like their rivals) exacted a regular 
 annual contribution independent of circumstances. On the internal affairs, 
 laws, and institutions of the allied states, the confederacy had legally no influ- 
 ence. It was, says Miiller, the only confederacy which, in the flourishing times 
 of Greece, combined extensive powers with justice, and a respect for the in- 
 dependence of its weaker members. Trapa\a06vTes — that this 
 word does not imply a possession acquired by force or craft may be seen (inter 
 alia) from its use, ch. 9 c, r^y $a<n\elai> TrapaKaBttv. For the manner of 
 acquisition see i. 99,96. ri KpaTitrra must be connected as an 
 accusative with fivBriaav, cf. i. 6 d. And so to KpiTurra Trapaa-Keui^ea-Bai aT6\ov, 
 i. 31 a, and TO ipurra wpdrreiy, v. 9, 7. Kriig. These are apparently adverbial 
 usages. The ir is taken by some of the old editors with t4 xparuTTa, ' as excel- 
 lently as possible.' Bl. remarks that this sense is little appropriate, and prefers 
 to consider i>s as equivalent to irav, ' than when they once most flourished.' 
 ' This refers to the period a little before the conclusion of the thirty years' 
 treaty, when the Athenians were masters not only of the islands, and the Asiatic 
 Greek colonies, but had also united to their confederacy BtEOtia and Achaia on 
 the continent of Greece itself.' See ch. 108, iii, iij. Arn. The times of the 
 five years' truce (ch. 112) and the battle of Coronea (ch. 113). 
 6.Kpai!pviis is for a-Kfpmo, fr. ictpdvi'vui, and (piyris — 'freshfrom the fount,' 
 'pure,' 'unmingled' 'unimpaired.' Eurip. has k^cs o/tpai^i/eis, Hec. 533 ; but 
 Kriig. remarks that the word does not elsewhere occur in Attic prose. Tr. 
 than as (when) informer days they flourished most vigorously with their can- 
 federation unimpaired. aiTo7s. Grots has a note, vol. v. p. 356, in 
 which he contends that avroTs includes both the Lacedsemonians and Athenians; 
 because, as Thucyd. had not said that the Athenian empire at the beginning of 
 the Pelop. war had diminished in magnitude, the comparison between two 
 periods of it could not be clearly understood. The contrast, he says, is between 
 confederate Greece before the war, and bisected Greece in a state of war. I 
 cannot regard this as probable; oAtois plainly belongs to the second clause 
 introduced by 'ASriiiaTot Si opposed to the 01 /uex AaKtStttii6vioi; and, according 
 to Mr. Grote's interpretation, no satisfactory meaning can be assigned to t^s 
 (vniicx^a^ iKpaKtynvs, which is a natural expression for the Athenian league 
 
Chap. 20.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 33 
 
 while fresh and unimpaired by desertion, but, as it seems to me, would be very 
 improperly applied as an antithesis to the entire breaking up of the confederacy 
 against Persia. 
 
 Chaptee XX. — (o.) Ta fiiv odv. Most of the editors agree in observing 
 that the opposing clause is to be found in the next chapter, though some consider 
 it to be Ik Se tSk, k.t.A., and others, with Kriig., /cal i Trdketios outos. Very 
 much has been written about the Avords which follow. The difficulty seems to 
 be that, whereas the construction is complete with xo'^-^"'" ovra as the subject 
 of 7rto'T6U(rai, — ttoi'tI I|7)s nKfiripit^ are added, forming a sort of objective case 
 governed by the verb. To me these words seem an after-thought or qualifica- 
 tion. Thucydides was about to say the t^ -raXaii. are difficult to credit — but 
 while enunciating this, modifies it — 'yet not absolutely so, for on the whole they 
 are credible enough, but it is difficult to establish each consecutive linlc in the chain 
 of evidence.' He therefore says they are difficult to believe as established by 
 argument after argument consecutively, or, perhaps, taking TruTTcOirai more in- 
 dependently, dijfficultfor a man to become a believer in them upon an unbrolcen 
 chain of evidence — i. e. if a man does believe them, he must be satisfied with 
 finding some links In the chain less firmly established than others. That 
 vno-TeSiroi should be found where irKrTevSiji'ai might have been expected, is not 
 contrary to the genius of the Greek language. See the cases collected by 
 Matthias, § 535, and compare x"^"''^ Spjoi vii. 51, x"\^'''"'''^P<"'S f?'''" Tpoff- 
 voKeiiiiv vii. 51. Bl. cites Cicero De Or. i. 58, 'res difficiles perdiscere,' and 
 see particularly note on cS iroietv, ch. 132 h. Beiske and Wyttenbach con- 
 jecture iritrTacrai — 'difficult to confirm by a strictly consecutive chain of proof a 
 very obvious correction upon which most persons would hit, were the reading 
 of the text Inadmissible. Kampfer explains, 'quum cuivis testimonio forte 
 deinceps oblato credere difficile sit.' But (as T. K. A. rightly says) k^ris denotes 
 regular succession, not fortuitous occurrence. Pop. has, not very correctly I 
 think, ' res difficilis creditu, etiamsi ex ordine quodque testimonium ad rem com- 
 prohandam proferatur,' for where does etiamsi proferatur come from ? Kriig., 
 with ingenuity, reads irav t* — 'in each particular consecutively to believe fron^ 
 proof,' But I cannot help considering the expression an unnatural one, though 
 he supports it from vii. 29. I find that Peile's translation does not materially 
 differ from that given, and he aptly compares iii. 13, roiuiras %xovTis irpo^dffeis 
 Kol airias airecrTTjfiey, carets ^hy toTs aaovovai yvSivai us eiKSnes iSpdcrafiey — -clear 
 indeed {i. e. of such a nature that it is clear) /oj- tJwse who hear thhm to perceive 
 that we have done it — as parallel to the present case — x"'*-^"'"^ "'"'■" — being 
 difficult (i. e. of such a nature that it is difficult) to build one's belief of them 
 upon a complete chain of evidence. Bl. is, I think, quite wrong : ' Such I have 
 found to be the state of affairs in ancient times, however hardly it may find 
 credit, even when established on a regular chain of proofs' 
 
 (b.) 'Ae-nvalav -/ovv. Some doubt has been expressed as to the meaning 
 of the particle. It obviously is, according to its etymology (cf. ch. 2 e), ' Tliis 
 is evidenced, at any rate, by the case of the Athenians, if by nothing else.' 
 "iir. /cal 0eo-. K.T.A. The ovk laaatv cannot be connected with ^aav, for it ii 
 plainly impossible that the Athenians could have been ignorant of this fact. It 
 is better, therefore, with Kriig., to consider these words as purely parenthetical. 
 
 D 
 
34 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 iiroTOTTTia'avTeSj k.t.A. Saving had some suspicion tJtat on that dai/, and 
 Just as they were on the point of acting (lit. 'alongside of the matter,' vi. 57), u 
 disclosure had teen made hy one of their accomplices — or, having suspected that 
 some disclosure, Sfc. dpdtrai^Tds Tt Kai KtvSvvdetv. Compare 
 
 the note on eMyra-: rt KtvSvvtieiv, iii. 53. It is clear that the phrase means, 
 ' not to risk their lives for nothing,' ' not to run the peril without having first 
 done something to make it worth while.' The words are well explained by 
 Peile. * JBut wishing hefore they were seized, having done something, so and not 
 otherwise — if it must he so (or e'en), to run the risk of their lives' So in the 
 well-known prayer of Ajax — iv Se i/><ici Kal i\e<rirov — ' e'en hill us ' — * kill us if 
 you will.' Kriig. refers to the Kal before SiyuvTai, iv. 98, 2, which see, and cf. 
 inrip Tov ayadov Tilxa Tts Kal ro\fid anoOaveTi/, Romans V. 7- A^<oK6piov^ 
 
 ' The temple of the daughters of Leos, who, according to the tradition, had been 
 sacrificed by their father during a famine, as an offering for the lives of the 
 people. The temple stood in the Ceramicus within the walls.' Am. 
 
 (0.) A/nyjitTTe?;'. 'A rare Word,' Kriig. ' I have only met with it in Soph. 
 SZ. V. 482, and Aratns, Diosem. 115,' Bl. /iia ^-hipf Tpoa-riB^adai 
 
 — ' sese adjungere,' sc. to the party voting — it means therefore simply, ' to vote.' 
 This statement of Herod, vi. 57, to which this is supposed to refer, is somewhat 
 otfscure. He speaks of the two senior senators who, in the absence of the 
 kings, represented them, as Zvo ^-fitpovs ride/jieifovs, rplr-qv 5e t^v ktavrwv. Thu- 
 cydides eridently understood this (if he did refer to it) to mean — ' each giving 
 two votes (sc. as the monarch's representative), and then, severally, a third for 
 themselves' so that they would vote six times altogether. And so must we 
 understand it, though C. F. Hei-mann (P. A. O. § 25. 7), Heeren, and Miiller 
 consider that the words quoted do not imply with certainty that each king had 
 two votes — the latter, however, admitting that Herod, probably followed this, 
 the opinion generally received in Greece, vol. ii. p. 105, note. Arnold and 
 MuUer, Dorians (vol. ii. p. loj) state their belief that Thucyd. refers to Hel- 
 lanicus rather than Herodotus, whose work he can scarcely have read. If, says 
 Arn., Herod, i. 130 refers to the revolt of the Modes against Darius Nothus 
 A.o. 409, it may be questioned whether Thucyd. had ever seen his history, not- 
 withstanding the well-known story of his having heard it read at the Olympic 
 games. This seems correct enough, for the termination of Thucyd. exile dates 
 in the year 403 A.C, when probably the greater part of his work had been com- 
 posed. See ch. 23 i. Indeed Dahlmaun seems to have established this view, 
 cf. ch. 22 d. The second charge of inaccuracy here brought does not certainly 
 involve the assertion that there was no such place as Pitane, for Herod, (iii. 55) 
 expressly says that he had been there himself; but, as A. remarks, it denies 
 that the demus of Pitane was ever of sufficient importance to allow its in- 
 habitants to form part of the national army, as in the old Greek and Eoman 
 system the military divisions corresponded entirely with the civil ones. Not- 
 withstanding the denial of Thucyd., Miiller {Dorians, ii. p. 49) asserts that 
 ' Pitane was of sufficient importance to have its own gymnastic contests, and to 
 furnish a battalion of its own, called Pitanates.' This he considers confirmed 
 by the fact that Caracalla, in imitation of antiquity, composed a \6xos XliTaiiiTi)s 
 of Spartans (Herodiar, iv. 8), and that the Tarentines, who retained the memory 
 of the mother city more in their names of places than in their customs, had a, 
 
Chap. 21.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 35 
 
 division of theiv army which was called Pitanates. The lUptiroXoi niToi/Sroi are 
 mentioned upon a coin of Tarentum, Millinger, Plate i. n. 19. Sehweighauser 
 would reconcile both historians, by supposing that there was such a cohort 
 levied for the occasion at the battle of Platsea, and commanded by Amom- 
 pharetus ; but, as this was not perpetual, it had ceased to exist in the time of 
 Thucydides. This is, however, only that sort of hypothesis which any one can 
 make, and besides Thuc. boldly says — ov5' iyeveTO iri&iroTS, arakaintapos 
 
 — ' impainstaking.' Pop. compares (what is probably an imitation) ' vnlgi in- 
 diligentiam veri,' Tac. ffisi. iv. 49. eroifio — 'wTiat is ready to hand,' 
 
 ' the first account that presents itself,' 
 
 Chaptee XXI.— (ra.) ijxas. Notwithstanding the difficulty of coming to 
 any satisfactory conclusion about ancient matters. ToioEra — & 
 
 5 i ^ A. 6 V. Pop. seems to understand, • such as I have recounted! Kriig. makes 
 
 6 Si^Afloi/ the object of void^av, and roiama the predicate — ' what I have recounted 
 to he such' fid\i(TTa — 'as near as can he made out,' cf. 13 e. Tr. 
 OjnopToyoisc. voixi^av — ' would not he wrong in holding ;' so also join iriffTeiuv, 
 ' and in not being more inclined to helieve.' Kal couples TrurTeiai' to miii(wp. 
 koyoypicpoi. The prose writers, generally historians. Scholars confine the 
 words to the prose writers antecedent to Herodotus, such as Hecatseus of 
 Miletus, Charon of Lampsacus, Xanthus the Lydian, Pherecydes of Leros, and 
 HeRanicus of 'Mytilene. The student will find a more particular account, 
 Miiller, Sist. Gr. Lit. ch. xviii. p. 258, E. T. With oSre |we'eeiro/» of course 
 repeat Tnffnijfav. ^vvriBriiii. Perhaps, like our 'concoct,' implies 
 the notion of making up a fictitious story. Bl. cites Dem. p. 277, \6yovi 
 evirpotrd-irovs Kal fivdovs ffvvQeis; and in Latin componere mendada. 
 
 TT p Off ay. ijaKiri 8 eir. — 'with a view to what was more attractive to the ear, rather 
 than to truth.' This double comparative is common both in Greek and Latin, 
 when two qualities are assigned to the same subject, and it is supposed to 
 possess more of the first than the second. This is Jelf s explanation, § 782, f. 
 It appears to me that the presence of the second quality is only asserted by a 
 sort of euphemism, or politeness. In fact, it is gently implied that the subject 
 is rather deficient therein, e. g. Herod, iii. 65, i-iTol7i<ra raxirepa ^ <ro<piiTfpa, ' I 
 have acted with more precipitanci/ than wisdom,' implying there was very little 
 wisdom in the act at all. Madvig's explanation is similar to that of Jelf (Zai. 
 Gfr. § 307), ' A comparison of two qualities which are found in the same subject 
 in an unequal degree, is denoted either by the positive with " magis," or by two 
 comparatives.' ''iEmilii contio fuit verior quam gratior popolo ' (Liv. xxii. 38), 
 which seems to me equally open to the above remark. See e.g. 'la (rTpaT'i]yol 
 Theoves ij yScXTioves, Arist. Ach. loil. ane^fkiyxTa — 'which cannot 
 
 be submitted to the test,' or, as Arn. well gives it, ' which cannot be proved or dis- 
 proved.' fKeyx^'", it may be well to remind the non-logical reader, may imply 
 the establishment of a conclusion by indirect proof, as well as its direct refuta'- 
 tion. Consult the logical treatises of Arist. and his Rhetoric. Arn.'s version of 
 cttI t^ jtti/9. eKViV. is not so good — ' having taken their place among fables' See 
 note on i. 3 b, and trans. ' home won their way into mythus '—on kwiirTus as 
 equal to So-tc Sirnrra ^Ivai, see the long note and collection of passages, iii. 65, 
 ^lAfaS Kal ail iroke/J-ias. Compare also i. 140, Tcis ^v/ifophs ifiaBSis x^pA'a'^i 
 
 J> 2 
 
56 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, [Book I 
 
 (6.) iiyi\iriiJ.ivos, like the other participles, must be connected with 
 afiaprdyoi, ws iraKaik t7pat — 'for matters so antiquated/ i. a. * con^ 
 
 sidering they are antiquated ;' the ejyai is quite pleonastic, and belongs, as in 
 exaw elcoi, to an early state of the language. Indeed, most languages in such a 
 stage have a tendency to pleonastic usages of the verb ' to ie,' as may still be 
 seen in the conversation of the vulgar, cf. Jelf, § 869, 5. The words, of course, 
 modify airoxpi^vTus ; iis, in this case, is common enough. Cf. ouSe ad^ifaros ais 
 AaKeSalfiLOpa f'milv, iv. 84, ' a pretty good speaker for a Laeedmnionian.' Nume- 
 rous examples may be seen in Matth. § 628, 3. The Latins use ' ut ' in precisely 
 the same way. Cf. Frequentem cultoribus, ut inter montana populum, Liv. xxi. 
 34. S7j\wff€i. Tlie ellipse is to be filled up as in Herod, i. 174, 
 
 AiSiti St^Ao? kwvT^v ^ovffa, TrepippvTos (T. K. A.). Compare iii. 84, ij ai/dpuirda 
 ^vffis i^y)K(jo(Tsv aKpar^s opyrjs odtra. aiiTUf — sc. TtDv apxaiwf, 
 
 Vetera extollimus, recentium incuriosi,' Tac. Ann. ii. 78. 
 
 Chapter XXII. — (a.) The statement which follows, though apparently 
 clear enough, has been the subject of much controversy. Bloomf . declares that 
 the writer, in recording speeches, brings forward no sentiment but what wag 
 really spoken ; that the words only are in some cases changed, because it would 
 have been impossible to retain in the memory the exact expressions used on 
 each occasion; that due regard is always had to the characteristics of the 
 speaker, and that the intent of the writer was 'prsestare atque conservare 
 simulacrum eIoquentia3 virorum clarissimorum,' Livy, xlv. 25. But this is in- 
 consistent with the unmistakably Thucydidaean impress to be found in every- 
 epeech. Perhaps the most strongly marked attempt at imitation is to be found 
 in the speech of Sthenelaidas. But this was a very short and very notorious 
 speech, and must have been tolerably well known. Otherwise, Athenians, 
 Corinthians, Boeotians, Syracusans, and even Spartans; Pericles, Alcibiades, 
 and Nicias, so far as the mere form of expression goes, speak very much alike ; 
 and, indeed, there are certain cases where it is hardly probable that Thucydides 
 can have had much positive and accurate information whereon to construct his 
 written orations. * The speeches,' says Miiller, * often stand in a relation to 
 one another, which could not have been justified by existing circumstances. 
 Thus, the speech of the Corinthians, in i. 120, is a direct answer to the speech 
 of Archidamus in the Spartan assembly, and to that of Pericles at Athens, 
 though the Corinthians did not hear either of them.' Lit. Ana. Greece, p. 489. 
 On the other hand, we must not believe them to be pure fictions like those of 
 Livy, Tacitus, and Plutarch, and the majority of ancient historians. This ex- 
 treme opinion is adopted by the French translator : ' lis no sont qu'un cadre 
 adopte pour detacher du corps de I'ouvrage des evenements, des details de 
 mceurs que Thucydide a voulu mettre dans un plus grand jour.' Thucyd. 
 evidently obtained all the information available as to what was said, and what 
 there was occasion to say, and then placing hhnself in the position of the 
 speakers, he recounts it in his own words, as near to the imagined original as 
 he can. But, as has been said, he does not succeed in divesting himself of his 
 identity. Am. illustrates by what appears to me a very similar case — that, 
 viz. of Johnson, who reproduced elaborate parliamentary debates in the Gentle- 
 man's Magazine, with no other basis to go upon than the substance of the 
 
Chap. 22.] JfOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 37 
 
 debate faithfully reported. Probably these exercises contain most of the argu- 
 ments used at the time, yet every one would recognize them as the composition 
 of Johnson. Peile translates : But as the several speaJcers would have appeared 
 to me {^liol emphatic), had I been always present, to speak most to the purpose on 
 each point that came iefore them. This connects the tiv with ii6Kovv : but he 
 also, as Pop., suggests its being taken with el-ritii, which seems to me more 
 probable. ' As they appeared to me — when writing my history — likely to have 
 spoken, so as at the same time to speak most to the purpose.* See, for the col- 
 location, ii. 83, 89 ; iii. 42, 89. It means, in fact, only a set form of speech, as 
 distinguished from conversation. \6yif elTrov. This is in direct 
 
 antithesis to rci 5* epya riov TrpoLxB^vrtav — ^The speeches that were spoken' — as 
 opposed to ' the deeds which were done.' Pop. objects that this cannot be so, . 
 since it is not the pi. Xoyois. He accordingly supposes the noun to be added, in 
 order to form one of those verbal balances on which Lob., Faral. Gr. Or. ii. p. 
 523, has enlarged. But this seems hypercritical. jSTiebuhr remarks that the 
 speeches of Thucydides, and even those of Demosthenes, are not constructed 
 upon any artificial plan subordinated to the rules of rhetoric. But most persons 
 will agree with Kriig. in asserting that they are accommodated, on true psycho- 
 logical principles, to the circumstances under which they were delivered, and 
 could well afford to dispense with the pedantic rules of rhetorical arrangement. 
 Kriig., in my judgment correctly, renders ^ durch Hede,' hy means of speech. Cf, 
 ii. 46, 69. iy auT^ — sc. t^ noXciieTif. Kriig. cites aurcS, i. 69. It 
 
 may be of importance to the student to observe, that Thucyd. thus uses the 
 cases of this pronoun, i. e. without an immediate antecedent. Cf. iii. 84. 
 Sia/ivrjiioi'sOaai — ' remember throughout.' ixofievif — 'keeping as 
 
 close as possible to the general purport of what was really said {ttjs ^vnirdinis 
 means, ' taken as a whole ')t-so has it been set forth by me.' Or, as Kriig. has 
 it, ' So have I made them speak.' 
 
 (S.) irpax^ti'Twy. Connect as closely as possible with iv t$ iroXlixif, 
 Kriig. ; who judiciously remarks that rh vpaxS^vra is a term of very wide com- 
 pass indeed, embracing all sorts of transactions, and even speeches. Therefore 
 tA epya Twv irpaxG^VTUv is only a small part of TrpaxOhra, Others understand 
 it as the mere verbal balance to the clause, ASytp ehov. It seems to me to 
 imply, if we could so express it, ' the actuality of what was done,' ' the real acts 
 and results' That the expression is emphatic and intensive is the opinion of 
 Hermann on Soph. Trach.v. 229, who translates 'id, quod verh factum est.' 
 Compare, as an apt illustration, a passage cited by Bloomf. from Quintilian : 
 ' Historia scribitur non ad actum rei pugnamque prEcsentem, sed ad memoriam 
 posteritatis.' aWa, oXs. Tr. ' I thought myself bound only to set 
 
 forth partly that at which I my self was present, partly that which, sofa/r as was 
 practicable, I had with exactness informed myself of from others ' — lit. ' having 
 exactly informed,' ots is accordingly governed by irapriv; the construction 
 changes, and instead of Koi t iire^rjABov, we have k«1 eVeJeAfliu' irapa rav aXAav. 
 This way of accounting for the construction apparently arises from an un- 
 willingness to apply eVeleA^ii/ to ots TrapTJi/ avT6s. To me it does not seem so 
 entirely inappropriate — ' Carefully going over again all the particulars of matters 
 whereof I was myself an eye-witness.' 'It is supposed that Thucyd. served in 
 the first seven years of the war, for in the eighth he was appointed to command 
 
38 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 the Athenian fleet off the coast of Thrace.' T. K. A. from Owen. 
 i!vv6avi)j.evos (aira) = & iirvvBaii6ji,riv, Tav, the article, must be given, ' all 
 my other informants' 
 
 (c.) ihvoias % fivliiJiris ex"' — ^'^' iavT6i/, 'as each happened to he disponed 
 in respect of his recollection of the facts, or of Ms good-will to one of the two 
 parties' kKinlpuv is the objective gen., as ^AQjivaicav evvoi^, vii. 57. 
 
 For the gen. evmtas, denoting the respect in wliich the action of the verb is 
 taken, see Matth. § 367; Jelf, § 528 ; and the long note, Sheppard's Theophrastus, 
 ch. iii. p 77. 
 
 (d.) tI) fii] /ivSuSes. The junior student will observe that rh ob fivBaScs 
 would convey the direct and positive negation of the presence of a mythic ele- 
 ment — 'the fact that they contain no myths.' But rh /iii /iuflwSes is subjective, 
 and refers to the impression existing in the reader's mind — ' the fact that he 
 sees no myths in them,' cf. ch. 141 e. This I believe to be correct, but the 
 student may consult Jelf, § 745,5. Hcot Se $ov\inrovrai. This 
 
 passage has been characterized as ' very difficult ' by the editors, and has been 
 made the subject of special criticisms by Kriiger, Melhorn, Hermann, Osiander, 
 and others. Where Thucydides, in a somewhat complicated sentence, has 
 already employed words which would be subsequently suitable to express some- 
 thing else, sooner than fall into tautology, he avoids their repetition, without 
 supplying their place. In the present case, as it appears to me, either 
 IxiWivTuv or iaeaBai is thus made to do double duty. Before consulting any 
 commentator, I conceived the arrangement of the whole to be, '6troi 5e fiovK-ftixovTat 
 Tcav T6 y^vo^ivuiV rb catp^s <rK<miiv, koX tS>v fxe\\6i/T(iiv ttotc addis — /fori t5 
 'hvBpdnrnov — toiovtuv /col TvapaTrKfifriuv effetrdat [toiJtous] w0eAt/to Kplifsiv avTa 
 iipKoivrus e|€i [_i/J.oi'] — 'But they who shall he desirous to attain to the correct 
 view of past transactions, and of those likely at some future time {in all human 
 probability) to recur in such or similar shape, for these to regard what I have 
 written as useful, will be ample reward for me' Kara r'b aj/Optijiretoy is the after- 
 thought qualification, parenthetically introduced in our author's manner. Bl. 
 Cf. Herod, i. 86, ouSeV ri fiaWov is eaurov Aeyw;/, ^ is airav rh aydpuitr^'iov', and 
 Terent. Seaut. iii. 2. 40, ' Si quid hujus simile fortfe aliquando evenerit, ut sunt 
 Immana.' ri (Ta(pis — the clear and positive, as distinct from rh iivBaSes, the 
 obscure and mythical view. For toioOto koI irapaTrA^o-ia, cf. i. 143, and else- 
 where, with Te Kat, i. 140, viii. 78, Pop. Cf. 'Hsec atque talia.' apKoivTios 
 e|ei, Bl. observes, occurs again, ^sch. Choeph. v. 879, rifSe 5' apKowrms ^x^'- 
 I really do not know that examination of the numerous commentaries has much 
 modified my original view. Hermann understands thus : ' Satis e^-at factum, si 
 quivelres qucegestce sunt, accurate considerare, velubifutvra, ut fieri aolet,ean- 
 dem aut similemformam habebunt, utilem Judicare hunc librum voluerint' On 
 which Poppo remarks, /icWdyTwv tali ratione bis cogitari posse nobis non vide- 
 tur. The version in which he himself acquiesces is — ' Quicunque autem volent, 
 et ill iis qua evenerint, id, quod pro explorato habendum sit, considerare, et in iis 
 quce, ut sunt res humante, talia vel similia eventura sint, si utilia h<Be {sc. hanc 
 historiam) Judicent, satis erit factum ;' which, if I understand it, does not 
 Inaterially differ from what I have given. Krug. writes o-Koireii' again with 
 i}(pt\ifia, and understands nfWSvTuv a secpnd time, i. e. twi/ fitXxSvTuv, fieX- 
 i^ovrav T. Kd! jr. iamiai — me.ining, I suppose,/KiM™ events about to take place 
 
Chap. 23.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 39 
 
 in similar form. Sec. ^c. (which is at least very awkward), and understands 
 toiJtoii, not i\i.oi, after eJei — '/«r die wird es {das Werk) gewilgen,' for such 
 persons my work will be satisfactory. Wex, a late German writer, would com- 
 bine a<j)4\iit.a Kpheiv, and make tuv ii.e\\6i'Taiv — lireo-Sai a gen. case depending 
 upon it, translating ' niitzliche WinJce zur JBeurtheilung von JEreignissen ' — use- 
 ful hints for determining events ; bat I know of no such government for the 
 genitive. i.i>KoivTus ^x^'- So used again vi. loi. i. iEsch. ChoepJi, 
 
 879. KTrina is ad. These words have acquired a world-wide 
 
 celebrity in the sense of ' an everlasting possession.' It may perhaps disappoint 
 the student to hear that it is questionable whether they can bear such an inter- 
 pretation. MUller (Lit. Anc. Greece, p. 487) says — ' Thucydides for such per- 
 sons (sc. Siroi flouA^o-ocTai) bequeaths his book as a lasting study — something 
 to be kept by one ; — it does not mean an everlasting memorial or monument. 
 He opposes his work, which people were to keep by them, and read over and 
 over again, to a composition which was designed to gratify an audience on one 
 occasion only.' aytiviaixa means a sort of prize-essay, and has 
 
 reference to the ordinary musical, poetical, and rhetorical contests, in which 
 compositions possessing only an ephemeral and transitory interest were no 
 doubt often produced merely for the sake of an ^5r(5ei|is. Zevort, the last 
 French translator (1853), repeating a popular opinion, writes — ' Thucydide fait 
 ici allusion a Herodote, sans le nommer. II laisse rarement eohapper I'occasion 
 d'attaquer ce grand historien, dont le genie poetique et brillant contrastait aveo 
 I'esprit rigoureux et positif de Thucydide.* But Dahlmann, the biographer of 
 Herodotus, has shown that there is no ground whatever for Lucian's story 
 about Herodotus reciting his History at Olympia, and consequently very small 
 reason to suppose that Thucydides was acquainted with it (of. ch. 20 c). At any 
 rate these covert and disingenuous sneers at a great fellow-labourer in the field 
 of historical literature are but little consonant with a candid and noble mind, 
 such as was that of Thucydides. Quintilian had this passage in his eye when 
 he wrote his well-known description of history, x. i, 31 — 'Historia scribitur ad 
 narrandum, non ad probandum ; totumque opus, uon ad actum rei, pugnamque 
 prsesentem, sed ad memoriam posterltatis, et ingenii famam componitur.' 
 JuyKeiToi, as Kriig. remarks, stands to ^vvTiBivai in the light of a perf. pass. 
 So .3i]schin. i. 1 25, Tj^et Kol er^pos \6yos ris virh rov avrov trofta-Tov truyKeif/.eyos — 
 tr. ' it has been composed and is placed before you.' 
 
 Chapteb XXIII. — (a.) Returns to the subject fr. 21 b. Svo7i'. Phrynichus 
 has Sv€7f iirl fiSvrjs yeviKTJs Tiderai, ovy), 5e SortK^s, and Arn. seems inclined to 
 accept the rule. The MSS. vary greatly in this and other places between the 
 two. Bek. and Dind. adopt Sveiv; Pop., Goll., and Kriig., ivoiv. Consult 
 Poppo's note, from which it appears that Sueiv is not justly asserted by Bremi 
 (de Corona, § 173) to have been a favourite old Attic form of the genitive; that 
 it is of very dubious authority in the Tragoedians, and that it is only found 
 in the worst MSS. of Demosthenes, though most common in Plutarch and the 
 later writers. From all this, it looks like a modern form, introduced by thi 
 copyists, to whom it was familiar, into their transcripts of the older authors. 
 The Scholiast says the two naval battles were Artemislum and Salamis; the 
 two on land, Thermepylse and Plataea. KrUg. does not understand how these 
 
40 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 can be said to have decided the war, and therefore believes reference to be made 
 to the battles of Salamis and Platsea, and the double battle at Mycale. 
 
 (J.) iwh PapPdpav. None is recorded except Mycalessus, vii. 29, Kriig. 
 (rtpSiv is added, because, though iriXfts is the grammatical subject, 'AStii/oToi koI 
 niKoiTomiiffioi are really supplied by the mind. Thucyd. refers to Tlatsea, iii. 
 68, and Thyrea, iv. 57. Kriig. Poppo adds Mytilene, iii. Jo, but this was n 
 case of dismantling rather than of entire destruction. o'tK-firopas 
 
 li.eTe$a\oir. Potidffia, ii. 70; ^gina, ii. 27; Scione, v. 32; Thyrea, iv. S7; 
 Pop. o(<T€ — Kal. Poppo remarks upon Kai thus following oSre, 
 
 that the German idiom is similar, 'noch so viele Verbannnngen und Metzeleien.' 
 The Latins also, he says, after neque have not only aut and ve, but also que; 
 and upon the strength of this passage he contends for a wider application of 
 the idiom than that allowed by Matthia;, § 609. I had always referred this 
 oStc back to the previous one, and rendered the present clause as embraced 
 beneath the oSre, ' nor so much banishment and murder ;' and this, I now see, is 
 also Krug.'s view. olKi\Topas ^ucre^aXor. ^gina, ii. 27; 
 
 Potidsea, ii. 70 ; Scione, v. 82; Melos, v. 116. 5ia rb araaia^fiv. 
 
 'Ut CorcyrsB, iii. 69, 81 ; Megaris, iv. 74; Samos, viii. 21.' Pop. 
 
 {c.)i,Ko^ — 'hearsay,' or mere 'tradition,' as opposed to fact. Kriig. com- 
 pares Herod, iv. 16, rk KaTvirep&e tXeye dicop, <ph.s '\aai\Z6vas elvai roits raSra 
 \fyoPTas. ovK SiriirTa KarfffTTj — 'have not been incontrovertihly 
 
 established,' 2fi(rii.my. See ii. 8; iii. 87, 89; iv. 52; v. 45, 50; 
 
 viii. 6. Pop. iiretrxoy. 'Non occupabant, quae tamen explanatio 
 
 verbis, c. 50, nonnihil adjuvatur, sei pravalebant, ut Dion Cassius, p. 1140, iirl 
 irXfiovs 6 ffeKT/xhs ivelxe,' Pop. The truth seems to be that 4n4xto is ' to extend 
 over,' and that Time and Place are after it, as in many other cases, regarded as 
 identical in point of construction — the metaphysical basis at the bottom of both 
 ideas coinciding — but as we have 7^5 expressed here, I should not hesitate to 
 tr. ' extended over the greatest amount of country,' certainly not of the habitable 
 globe, as has been suggested. The trciffjuwi/ irepi, ' on the score of earthquakes^ 
 is, as Arn. says, exactly equivalent to oToV re aetafioi, and a nominative case. 
 iKKttxficts. A not uncommon change of construction. See for instance i. 52, 
 2, and supply with Pop. obK &Tri(rToi KOTeVrT^cai/, trap a K.r.K, — ■ 
 
 'placed alongside of i.e. 'compared with those recorded informer times' 
 aix/ioi. The ' siccitates ' of Caesar, Kriig. Itrri trap' oTs. Jclf, 
 
 § 817, 8, and eiul Kai a1, Jelf, § 817, 3. f/ oiix fi/tiara . . . . f) 
 
 Xoi/iiiSris via OS. Kriig. aptly illustrates this repetition of the article by 
 Plat. Qorg. 502 B. tX Se 5^ ; 7] trefiv^ oSttj Kal 6avfiaiTTij rj ttjs rpaytfiStas irolria-iu 
 We may add, t^v iirayyeXlav t^c rovrov ravrriv r^v KaX'fjv, and Midias, § 189, 
 t4s iwoppiiTovs — Tos roirov youis. See other cases, Matth. § 277. From a 
 comparison of these, it will, I think, appear that the article is doubled where 
 the writer means to dwell upon, and make a great deal of, the notion indicated 
 by the noun to which it is attached. /iepos ti. Tirones will remark 
 
 that ii.4pos TI is an appreciable and therefore considerable part, like 'aliquot' 
 in Latin. Cf. ii. 47 for the effect of the pestilence, and for the phrase of. iv. 30, 
 ii. 69, iii. 89, where see note. Peile quotes Juvenal, xii. no, 'Partem aliquanj 
 belli.' ^vveire6eTo — set u^on them, 01 fell upon them at once, pro- 
 
 perly said of a hostile assault. 
 
Chap. 24.] NOTES ON THUCYDTDES. 4I 
 
 (d.) \icravTes — sine articulo, in that they hroTce, or hy Ireaiing the thirty 
 years' truce. rpiaKovToireis. The same form occurs, i. 115; ii. 2. 
 
 TpiOKoj/TOiiTiSes, i. 87; TpiaKovTaeVeis, V. I a (cf. 5eKa6T7)j, v. 25) ; TKvrriKov- 
 ratTist V. 32; TTtvTTjKovToiTT]^^ V. 27. ICriipf. For the history, sen i. 115. 
 Eu^oias S\w(ri>', i_. II a. Trpo4ypa\f/a Tparov. Commentators com- 
 
 pare for the pleonasm, irpove/x^aVTes trp^T^pov, i. 29; ■jrp6Tepov irpoijaiceTTTo, 
 viii. 66; ee/iffatrav irpoKaTaXaj3<ij'T6S, iii. 112; irplv irpoSidyvuTe, i. 78. See, too, 
 Kriig. on Xen. Anab. 1. 4, 14. toD juj; fijTf/irai. On this genitive, 
 
 see Jelf, § 492. 2, and supra, ch. 4 a. irp6faciv is here 'ground,' 
 
 ' occasion ; ' airia is perhaps more properly ' an alleged cause,' but both are used 
 vAth adjectives that modify and exchange their meaning. Kriig. says that 
 Schoman on Isceus, p. 181, lias a note on the matter. What follows, Kriig. 
 explains as a mixture of two constructions, sc. tV oAJjfleiTTtiTijj/ Trp6(pa<nv tovs 
 ABTjvaiovs T]yovfjLat pieydKous yiyvop.ivovs, and tovs 'Adriyaious Tjyoufiai ij.syd\ovs 
 yiyvo/ifvovs aiiayKd<Tai €s rh ■KoXep.ttv. Pop. argues that as Tohs 'A.6-i)vaiov! 
 yiyovfxaL .... Srt [j.eydKoi yiyv6p.evoi ^vdyKcurav would be the ordinary idiom 
 of the Greek language, it is not strange to find the accusative with the infinitive 
 (jieyd\ovs yiyvoixemvs avayxdcrai) substituted for its equivalent the conjunction 
 ?Ti with the finite verb. At any rate, the junior student must not confound 
 yiyvofievovs with yeyiyiijp.4vovs ; the latter is, 'because they had become great,' the 
 former, ' because they were growing great,' denoting that the apprehensions of 
 the one party kept pace with the aggrandizement of the other. a^ave- 
 
 irrdTTjv \6ycp — 'least openly urged in words' is rh <\>avep6i> — 
 
 * brought forward into the public sight.' Compare is rh ^avep'hv airoZivTiS, ch. 
 6 C; translate 'openly alleged.' atriat iKarepioi' h.(p' Siv, Kriig. 
 
 says is for a'niai cup' ^v eKdrepoi — ' The causes in consequence of which either 
 paHy.' It seems quite as simple to trans, the causes alleged by either pa/rty, 
 owing to which they brolce the treaty and settled into the war. iKar^puv is here 
 a true genetic case, or genitive denoting the source from which the airlai were 
 generated. But see Jelf, § 483. 4. 
 
 Chaptee XXIV. — (a.) Thp'l6viop kSkttov. It appears from this passaie, 
 and from Herodotus, vi. 127, where Epidamnus is said to be on the Ionian 
 gulf, that this term included, in the fifth century before the Christian era, the 
 southern part of the Adriatic, as well as the sea between Italy and Greece 
 southward of tbe lapygian promontory, to which it was more properly applied. 
 It never seems, however, to have extended to the northern part of the Adriatic, 
 which was called 'Adrias,' a name applying properly, as Miiller thinks, to the 
 coast near the mouths of the Po, where tlie old city of Adria or Hatria was 
 situated. 'Adrias' in Herodotus, i. 163, and v. 9, is the country so called, and 
 not the sea. Miiller says that the earliest mention %vhich he has found of the 
 sea under this name occurs in Lysias, advers. Diogiton. p. 908. See Miiller, 
 Struslcer, Einleitung, iii. 4. The sea between Sicily and Greece is by Tlmcyd. 
 called the Sicilian Sea, iv. 24, 53; vi. 13. Yet even tliis was at a later period 
 called 'Adrias,' as appears not merely from tbe well-known passage in the 
 Acts, xxvii. 27, where its meaning has been disputed, but also from a similar 
 passage in the Life of Josephus, c. 3, where Josephus says that on his way from 
 Jerusalem to Rome he, too, was overtaken by a tempest, Kara ^eVov rir'ASpiav, 
 
42 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 and was piclied up by a ship of Gyrene, on her way to Puteoli.' Arn. 
 iairKeofTi. On this use of the dative of reference, see Jelf, § 599, i,"'j£e 
 should sat/, on your right hand as you sail in." Cf. v. 10, 6. Epidamnus was 
 subsequently called Dyrrachium ; hence its modem name of Durazzo. 
 icara 5j) rhv Tra\aihv vSiiuov. ' Qusenam fuerint jura, qua8 colonise originibns 
 suis debebant, non alienum erit panels hoe loco perstringere. Priuio igitur ii, 
 qui in coloniam mittebantur, armis et commeatu a civibus suis instruebantur de 
 publico, ut docet Libanius in argumento orationis Demosthenis, irepi tuv 4t/ 
 XeppovTjaifi. Prteterea publica iis diplomata debebantur, quae air o/ici a voca- 
 bant, teste Hyperide in orat. Deliaca apud Harpocrat. Sed quod prsecipuum 
 est, sacra patria colon! secum asportabant, ignemque sacrum e penetrali urbis 
 deproratum et aecensum ; quod docet Auctor Etymolog. in npurai'era : qui 
 qnidem ignis si casu exstinctus esset, ex Prytaneo conditorum accendi eum 
 oportebat. Moris quoque erat, ut coloniae quotaunis legates in majorem patriam 
 (sic Curtius, lib. 4, vertit, quara Graeci htjt p6tto\ii' dicunt) mitterent Diis 
 patriis sacra facturos, ut testantur Polybius, cap. 114, legationum, et Cevetius, 
 lib. 4. Solenne etiam erat, ut colonise ab originibus suis Pontifices acciperent, 
 ut constat ex Tlmcydide, i. 25, §4, et Scholiasts adeundem locum; quin etiam, 
 si aliquando coloni aliam coloniam aliquo deducere vellent, moris erat, ut ducem 
 a majore patria postularent, ut hoc in loco docet Thucyd. ; nam Corcyrffii coloni 
 erant Corinthiorum, ideoque Phalium ex Metropoli arcessebant, ut coloniaB 
 Epidamnum deducendse dux esset. Plura hie de re vide in Valesii notis ad 
 JExcerpta Folyhii^ p. 7. Suds. Add. Spanheim. Dissert, ix., de Usn et ^r<Bst. 
 Numism. p. 570, seqq.' Duk. There is little to be added to tliis note oi 
 Duker's except, perhaps, that the relation of a colony to a parent state was 
 considered analogous to that subsisting between children and parents, is yovevsn 
 vphs r€Kva., Polyb. xii. 10, 3 ; and that war between the two was revolting to 
 the natural instinct of the Greek mind. Let the student consult for more 
 particulars Hermann's Po^. Aniiq. § 73, 74, 75. The Si) here has some slight 
 approximation to that usage in which it is almost identical with 'S^flev, i. e. when 
 the writer does not personally vouch for his statement. Not that Thuo. means 
 to deny it ; he only means, ' as was set forth by the parties themselves.' Cf. 
 iii. 104, KaTct xpic^i" ^il Tiya, ' in accordance, as it was said, with a certain 
 oracle.* rwv d(^' *lipaK\4ovs, Grote, ii. p. 479. 
 
 (4.) (TTaffiiaavrts iv i\\'n\o is, more usually irptis. For the fact, see 
 Arist. Pol. V. 1, 6. &irh iroXiixov 4<^Qa.pi){Tay — * Were reduced to 
 
 the lowest ebb inconsequence of a war.' So both Pop. aud Krtig., and I think 
 correctly. Kriig. compares kif av ixmirTOVTiS, \. 12. GoU. takes airb in the 
 more unusual sense of ' after,' and Arn., notwithstanding his own note on a,(p' wv 
 i. 12, connects the aTri TToXeVou with o-Taa-idaayT^s. rris 7roX\TJs — 'the 
 
 greater part '— cf. riiv Paa-iKtcas 71)1' tV itoWtiv ii. 48. For other instances and 
 an account of the idiom see Matth. § 442, 2. 
 
 (c.) Ta TG\€VTa7a, * in der letzten Zeit,' Kriig.; i, e. ' at last — intheperiod 
 immediately preceding this war' — for a similar adverbial use of the words, cf. 
 iii. 65. Totis SumTuus, 'optimates,' — one of the recognized appella- 
 
 tions of the party opposed to the democracy. See more on the subject iii. 65, 
 note b. aiTi\86i'Tes. Haase has conjectured ^7r6\e^i/Tej, but thin 
 
Chap. 25.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 43 
 
 is unnecessary — tr. after their departure, or expulsion. i\rii(ovTo. 
 
 Imperf. denoting continued action. 
 
 {d) Toiis <f>iiyovTas. 'The exiles' — not in a past tense, because tlie 
 participle cum articulo almost becomes a substantive. Compare such cases 
 as 71 riKTovcra, 'the mother,' and the instances given in note iii. 14 b, tSii/ 
 SiajSaWocTwj/. twi/ ^apfidpuir Tr6\efiov. The objective genitive. 
 
 Kriig. cf. i. 32, 3; vi. 6, 3. Kaflefojueroi. Suppliants assumed a 
 
 sitting posture ; to raise them from it was equivalent to granting their prayer. 
 See the account of Cylon's party, i. 126, KaSi(ovinv iwl rhu 0aifihi/ Uerai .... 
 avaariiffavTes Se aiiToiis ol twv 'Adrit/aieoVj k.t.\. See also iii. 75, and the case of 
 Themistocles, i. 136. is rh 'HpaTov. On this constructio praegnans, 
 
 as it is called, for eKBSvres is rh 'Hpoioc iKaSi^ovTo, see Matthias, § 578. On the 
 government of ToCra, cf. Jelf, § 529, 1. 
 
 Chapter XXV. — (a.) B4a-9ai. Kriig. says the metaphor is from games 
 like chess and draughts, Plato, Rep. 604 c. Tr. were at a loss how to make any 
 satisfactory arrangement, or, disposition of the present state of affairs. 
 Tifiapia is nothing more than 0o-liBeia, help, assistance, as below, and eh. 38, 
 58, 69. Kriig., however, does not regard it as an ordinary Attic usage. 
 (I wapaSo'iei'. Jelf, § 886 d. The optative is used after an historical tense in 
 indirect interrogative sentences, when the question is to be represented as pro- 
 ceeding from some one else. 
 
 (i.) a(pa>v 'for iavruii in this sense is principally Ionic and Thucydidaean,' 
 Kriig., who appends a large nuiriber of parallel instances. 
 
 (c.) Kara, re a^ia Se Kai. See ch. 4 a <Svr^s &7rotKoi. The 
 
 colonization of Corcyra by the Bacchid Chersikrates, was a lateral branch of the 
 colonization of Syracuse. See Miiller's Dorians, i. § 119. otfre yap 
 
 K.T.\. As this is followed by no finite verb, we must class it among the ana- 
 coloutha so common to Thucydides, and supply Trapt]niKo\iv from the preceding 
 clause. Either Xhuc. intended to add another verb and forgot it, or imagined 
 that Trapnfi4\ovv would do duty for the remaining part of the sentence, not ob- 
 serving, as Am. remarks, that the insertion of y^p rendered this impossible. 
 vavriyvpeirt. The Olympian, Nemaean, &c., says the Scholiast. But this is 
 a specimen of their loose style of explanation. For how, as Kriig. observes, 
 could they possibly be in a position to refuse them the right of TrpoiSpla, e.g. at 
 the Isthmian games ? Reference must be made to some festivals common to 
 both countries; colonies sent Beaipohs to attend some of the festivals in the 
 mother country. KoptvBltp apSpl TrpoKarapx^l^^^oi. The exact 
 
 meaning of this has been much disputed. It must mainly depend upon the 
 sense assigned to KaTdpx^(^Bai. Kriig. quotes from Buttmann's Lexilogus a 
 twofold explanation, (i) The word denotes the initiatory consecration of a 
 victim for sacrifice. So we find it, Eurip. Ale. v. 74, where it denotes the act 
 of cutting off part of the hair on the victim's head by the sword of the person 
 ofiiciating. So Virgil : — 
 
 ' tempera f erro 
 Summa notant pecudum.' — JEn. xii. 171. 
 
 (2) It denotes the removal of a selected portion from a whole, as for instanco 
 
44 NOTES ON THTJCYDIDKS. [Book L 
 
 .first fruits, for the purpose of consecrating it. This we find Od. xiv. 427, 
 irai/Toeei' ipx^M""^ ixeXiu>v. Krug. therefore understands it ' imparting to a 
 Corinthian the first fruits of their sacrifice, or offering, in order that he may 
 burn it upon the altar.' Others, as Bloomf., take the dative as a Latin ahlative 
 —a usage which GoU. wrongly would hanish from Greek. Poppo says it is not 
 unusual in the poets, and quotes Bemh. St/nt. p. 104. Matthise, § 396. Add 
 Jelf, § 608, obs. 3, and render, beginning by a Corinthian man, i. e. by the 
 agency of one, regarding the person as an instrument, not any given Corinthian, 
 but probably the chief priest, who, as the Scholiast tells us, was sent from 
 parent states to colonies, and whose duty it was to commence the sacrifice by 
 pouring a cup of wine on the head of the victim, then to sprinkle it with the 
 sacrificial meal, and cut off the hairs from the forehead and throw them into the 
 fire. To this Pop. (who has changed his opinion) in ed. 2nd4, seems to incline, 
 translating 'per virum Corinthium facientes sacrorum initium.' He rejects his 
 old rendering ' in usum viri Corinthii' which indeed would seem more appro- 
 priate to the Homeric times ; for, afterwards, the first viands of the banquet 
 were offered to the gods. Besides, this, as relating to many occasions, would 
 rather require Kopty$tois avSpafft. Compare for the word Herod, iv. 60, Eurip. 
 Ale. V. 74, and Kardpx^o'Bai reoi/ Upwv, Dem. in Midiam, p. 552. GoU. places a 
 stop at Tai> Upuy, thereby making KopivSlif avSpl depend upon StSovTes rh 
 vofii(6fiet/a ylpa. Sxrinp ai &\\at airoLKiai, For these see 
 
 MUller's Dor. vol. i. eh. vi. § 7, 8. They were mainly Syracuse in Sicily, Chalcis 
 in iEtolia, Solium in Acarnania, Ambracia, Anactorium, Leucadia, Epidamnus, 
 and Apollonia, the whole forming 'a strong and continuous chain along the 
 coast.' irepKppoyovi/Tfs. Perhaps the notion of neglecting and 
 
 despising arises from the contemptuous survey of an object — the looking at it 
 on all sides round implied in wepl, I am not, however, so sure that is the 
 meaning in the passage cited by most editors — iepoParu koI irepitppopS rhy 
 ^Xwy, Arist. Jfub. v. 226 : elsewhere in this sense we find {nrfp(j>poi'eiV. The 
 Ko! before xpW^twi' is in connexion with the Kal before rp is wSXefiov Kriig., 
 like ' tum ' and ' cum.' dpLola. This is classed by Jelf among those 
 
 cases where the predicative substantive does not signify a person but a thing, 
 and is then frequently joined with » subj. of difierent gender, sometimes of 
 different number. A familiar instance is oix apirayfihi' riyi\aa.To -rh eXvai Iffa 
 0ew, Phil. ii. 6. See also Herod, vi. 100, Alax^^^ ^^^ "^^^ ''EptTpietay ri 
 irpHra, and similarly ix. 77. Perhaps Kriig. has overlooked these last instances 
 when he positively declares that Svres i/ioTa cannot possibly be connected. I 
 should still, however, be inclined with him to place a stop at xpivov, and con- 
 nect Syj/cijuei &vTts with Zwardynpoi, which seems amply sanctioned by ivvar^v 
 Siya/uv, vii. 6 ; li/ioia would then exhibit a sort of adverbial usage, and the 
 whole will mean — ' and at that period being as well in the power derived from 
 wealth, on a scale equal to the wealthiest Oreeks, as in their preparation for the 
 war, more powerful than the Corinthians.' irpo^x^'" depends upon 
 
 iTraipSfifvoL (Kriig.), as the particip. indicates pride and self-confidence. The 
 double gen. after Trpo€volK7](rtv is paralleled by vii. 34, S(i t^;' tov ayepiov ^iraffiv 
 aiiTup 4s rh 7re\a7os. Pop. See more cases, Matth. § 380; Lob. ad Soph. 
 Jjax,3og; Jelf, § S43- '""i valet etiam.' Pop. and so also 
 
 Krug. — ' schon wegen' It is generally admitted that the Phaeacians were the 
 
Chap. 26.] NOTES ON, THUCYDIDES. 45 
 
 predecessors of the CorcjTseans in the island, See the 6th book of the 
 Odyssey. It lias, however, been controverted. Pop. remarks that Thuc. does 
 not express his own opinion. f1ico<ri Ka\ iKaT6v. See Herod, vii. 
 
 168, where it appears that sixty vessels were but a part of their fleet. They 
 had eighty triremes in the time of Timotheus. Isocr. xv. 109. Kriig. 
 
 Chaptbb XXVI. — (a.) With respect to the subject of this ch. Grote oh- 
 serves : — ' Though the Korkyrseans, themselves democratically governed, migiit 
 have been expected to sympathize with these suppliants and their prayers, yet 
 their feeling was decidedly opposite, for it was the Epidamnian oligarchy who 
 were principally connected with Korkyra, from whence their forefathers had 
 emigrated, and where their family burial-places, as well as their kinsmen, were 
 still to be found.' Vol. vi. p. 69. (Tnfivov. Pop. remarks that 
 
 in the case of verbs of ' going ' and ' sending,' the imperfect frequently stands 
 where we might expect the aorist. He cites eirKtov, ch. 29 ; avfiyovro, ch. 48 ; 
 inticTTeWoy, vii. 20 ; oirs Trejuiroj/, vii. ig. These cases belong to the distinction 
 noticed, Jelf, 401, 3, 4. ' The aor. merely narrates the fact ; if the narrator 
 places himself, as it were, in the midst of the facts he relates, and tells them as 
 if he saw them with his own eyes, the imperfect is used.' Indeed, we find the 
 imperfect generally thus employed in the case of verbs, which, like those above, 
 denote a continuous action, occupying some time. Tr. ' thei/ proceeded to send.' 
 oiK-fiTopa here equivalent to ^■troinov, tt e ^p — * on foot'- — a. e. by land. 
 
 They afterwards went forward by sea to Apollonia, perhaps, as Bl. suggests, to 
 avoid the danger of passing through the territory' of the Taulantii. 
 'A.iroK\uviav. See Herod, ix. 92 ; Herm. P. A. (?., § 86. Se'ci rap 
 
 KepKvpaiav fiii KaKiuvTai inr' avrav — 'fromf ear of the Corinthians, lest 
 they be hindered ly them.' KuKiuvTm is in the subjunctive rather than optative 
 after iiropiiSTtaav, by a sort of extension of the principle irpb omiaTav iroieiK 
 (Ar. 'Mhet.), which is seen in the praesens historicum. Kriig. remarks that 
 particular prominence is given to the main idea in the sentence by this sort of 
 repetition, and cites from Xen. Hell. ii. 3, 18, i(pofiavvro tov @-npaii.ivi\v /lij 
 ffvppveL7j(rai^ Trphs avrhf ot iroAirai. 
 
 (b.) er^pif (7t6\(j!. 'Navibus 15, id quod ex § 4 coUigitur.' Pop. 
 jrar" iir'fipeLa.v. It was needless to dispute concerning the force of this word, 
 since it is fully explained by Arist., Shef. ii. 2, 6 ^Trjpeafajc ipalviTcii Kara- 
 ippove7v iOTi yap 6 iirTipeaa-iih! 4/i.TroSi<riJ.hs toTj jSouA.^irto'H', ovx '("a n aiirf, 
 &K\a Ua ft.il ixiivif. It is therefore ' vexatious and contumelious opposition for 
 the sake of opposition.' It is opposed as an exact antithetical notion to Trpbj 
 %dpn'. Arist. Fol. iii. 16, 7. Td(povs — sc. of their ancestors buried 
 
 in Corcyra. 
 
 (c.) ov5ey airwv (ntiiKovaav. avTav, says Kriig., is neuter, Cf. tovto 
 {jiraKoieiv, i. 140. But this seems to me to prove nothing. I should render, 
 ' obeyed them in no respect,' ' listened to them not a whit.' And so in Kriig.'s 
 own instance, '6pa eX rt (rod %y fuiWop inratcovoi 'XwKpa.T'ris, Plato, Loch. p. 
 200 c. aWi. 'No single word of Latin or English will express the 
 
 force of aAXa,' Bl. Other editors expunge it. Kriig. prints the whole clause 
 iXAa avToTs in brackets as a gloss. There is evidently some ellipse, such as. 
 
 Then the Corey raeans (no longer hesitate), but proceed to war.' xa) 
 
46 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 couples TTpoaXa^SvTes with ^erb, rwv tpvydSuv, Kriig, vpoffKaOe^Sfieyoi 
 
 — 'sitting down before' not exactly equivalent to troKiopKovvrfs, which denotes 
 active siege operations. Poppo remarks that the Corcyrseans did not commence 
 a regular siege until the Epidamnians had refused to listen to any proposals. 
 For the accusative after the participle, Pop. compares afixvhv ■Kpoai^ova"' hpmii.iv, 
 Eur. Sec. 935. ■npos'iTrov — gave notice, proclaimed. It is hardly 
 
 necessary to speak of dilogia or zeugma here. xPVcdffBai — treat 
 
 as enemies. The MSS. have the aor., hut most editors say the future xp^o-ecfiai 
 is required. The whole depends upon the question concerning the aor., dis- 
 cussed in Appendix i. itrS/iiS s — ' an, isthm-iis,' for Icre/nmSfs x^P'ov, 
 and therefore more easily cut off by an aTroTfix^trfiSs. Cf. ch. 7 a. The whole 
 is parenthetical. 
 
 Chaptbe XXVII. — (a.) &yyeKoi 3ti — Messengers to say that. A verbal 
 noun, with a verb's construction. airoiKiav ixiipvircrov — 'pro- 
 
 claimed, or gave notice of a colony to Spidamnus, that any one who liked might 
 go upon the principle of equal rights' ott. is the accusative after the verb, yet 
 iivtu follows the verb also. For a similar double construction, Kriig. refers to 
 i. 50, I. The article tj I should explain as above, 'upon the principle of In 
 the common formula, says Kriig., ifxaiif refers to quality, and iari to quantity, 
 the latter being the antithesis to the idea conveyed by ■ir\eovi^la. There is 
 some doubt as to the persons among whom the equality was to subsist. It 
 would not be necessary to specify that the colonists should be equal among 
 themselves, for this would seem to follow as a matter of course. This is, 
 however, Arnold's view. It appears, too, that equality with those at home 
 was a generally admitted principle, cf. ch. 34, iKireiaovTui M t^j iixoioi toTs 
 Xeiiro/Aevois eli/oi. As this, then, seems to have been a special case, equality with 
 the previous Epidamnian colonists is probably the thing meant. 4ee\oi 
 
 . . . . PoiKeTai. Remark the union of the two moods. The first supposes a 
 possible case, the second something following actually upon it. Should happen 
 not to be ready to start with the rest, and yet wishes to share in the colony, — i. e. 
 in the privileges just notified. The Corinthian drachma, like the .fflginetan, 
 was worth ten Attic oboli, whereas the Attic drachma was six oboli ; therefore, 
 fifty Cor. drachmae would be worth more than eighty-three Attic drachma;. 
 Head Bockh, book i. ch. 4; Mtiller, Dor. iii. 10, 12. /ifviiv Kriig. 
 
 makes to be dependent upon iK'/ipviriroy, gave notice that he might stop behind. 
 Those, however, who make the preceding ifVoi an epexegetical infinitive, con- 
 sider this as identical — i, e. expressing the result of the whole sentence. 
 KaTa$d\AoyTiS and KaraPdWuv — paid dawn the money; not a mere 
 deposit, but equivalent to ixrivovTi^. Kriig. quotes e!fico<ri TtiA.oi'Ta xplvas robs 
 Kopii/Blous KaTafioKelv, Flat. Themist. 24. KopivBlas. The Corinthian 
 
 drachma = ten Attic obols — i. e. nearly a shilling. 
 
 (4.) Hermann, F. A. G., § 34, observes that the relation of the Peloponnesian 
 States to Sparta was so little inconsistent with their political independence, 
 that many were at the same time heads of particular confederacies, as, for 
 instance, Elis. Xen. Mell. iii. i, 23. Those who were asked for support were 
 either members of the Peloponnesian confederacy, or colonies of Corinth. 
 IlaX^s in Cephallenia. Miiller remarks, 'Herodotus, ix. 28, docs not afford 
 
Chap. 28.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 47 
 
 any reason for supposing that Pale was a Corinthian colony ; yet both here and 
 in Thuc. i. 27, it appears as closely united with Corinth,' vol. i. p. 130, note. 
 Arguments respecting the origin of colonies are frequently drawn from coins. 
 But these are sometimes fallacious, for, as Muller says, ' Barbarous towns fre- 
 quently adopted the devices of the neighbouring Greek cities.' 
 ^vfnTpoiT4ii^eii>. The use of the future after verbs indicating wish or purpose 
 is common enough, as may be seen from Matthioe, § 506, and from Kriig.'s note, 
 who compares vi. 57. 2, and many other passages. lu such cases, the MSS. as 
 XpncdrrSai last ch., often exhibit the aorist. The reason of this falls within the 
 general discussion of the nature of that tense, vide Appendi.x. ' The act spolten 
 of is essentially future here, inasmuch as it is contingent upon the acts of the 
 other party,' Am. ; and see Jelf, § 405, i. 
 
 (e.) KopivBluy. Proper names are often joined to airis without an article, 
 Kriig. Here it is ' 0/ the Corinthians th&nselves' in contradistinction to allies. 
 In vi. 32, outSj' 'A6i]vaiav, which Kriig. renders ' Athener ohne Beimisehung 
 Anderer,' it is much the same. 
 
 Chapter XXVIII.— (a.) ois irapiXaPov. T. K. A. (after Owen) remarks 
 that probably the Corcyraeans began to be alarmed at the powerful confederacy 
 which was formed against them, and ' had recourse to the mediation of the 
 Lacedaemonians and Sycionians ;' qy. Sicyonians. et ri ivrnrai- 
 
 ovvTai. Understand ttis 'Ent^dfivov, if they on their part maTce any claim 
 to it. The directa oratio, and present tense, te impart liveliness to the narra- 
 tive. 5 1 /COS bovvai — as the Schol. explains it, ^TnTpei|/ai Btffo(rTT7pfy 
 ica! KpiBrivai, to snbmit the matter to the arhitration of a court, Kriig. cites i. 140, 
 SiKas Twif diatl>opuv aW-fjXois Si56vai, and the correlative koI Bexecdau Let the 
 junior student notice the distinction between these and ^aii^dveiy SIktiv, 'For 
 disputes between citizens of different states, there was an entirely free and eqiial 
 intercourse of justice. Commeroium juris dandi repetendique,' Miiller, Dor. i. 
 p. 202, who also remarks in reference to this case, ' Nor were disputes between 
 individual states brought before the congress of the allies, which, on account of 
 the preponderance of Sparta, would have endangered their liberty, but they 
 were commonly referred to the Delphian oracle, or to arbitrators chosen by 
 both states, Thuc. i. 28; v. 7g;' ibid. Sparta itself was sometimes chosen 
 arbitrator, as between EUs and Lepreum. See v. 31. 'Although,' says Grote, 
 ' the Korkyrseans had been unwarrantably harsh in rejecting the first supplica- 
 tion from Epidamnus, yet in their propositions made at Corinth, right and 
 equity were on their side.' Grote, vol. i. p, 73. KpaTsTv. Some 
 have interpreted this, ' to possess the colony,' but (cpoTcw often stands inde- 
 pendently, as in Soph. Ajax, v. 765, PovKov Kpareic fikv ^vv Oew S' oel KpaTiln; 
 cf. piKav, ch. 64 b, and this sense is more proper here, as the actual possession 
 of the colony was not the matter of dispute, but certain rights in connexion 
 with it. So, too, I see, says Krug., who renders ' olsiegen,' which, however, he 
 explains by ' die Kolonie haben.' Yet, in the instance which he quotes, Kprnilv 
 is independent — viz. rp ipvK^ Kparodaji atTtd^Taros rov fj.ij vtKriffat KareffTT]. Some 
 such word before the infin. as i\eyoy is, he says, understood. Tr. but to which- 
 soever party of the two it should he adjudged that the colony belonged, that these 
 should be victors, sc. in the arbitration. irepovs. Allusion is of 
 
48 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1, 
 
 course made to an alliance with the Athenians, who were aliens from the great 
 Dorian race and confederation. mj ov nerhn avrols "KmSa/iyoy— i 
 
 inasmuch as they would have them to know, that they (the Corinthians) had 
 nothing to do with Mpidamnus. This is in accordance with the well-known dis- 
 tinction made by Elmsley (Eurip. Serac. 693), and denied by Matthise (§ 568). 
 that, viz. the genitive absolute indicates a fact, the accus, absolute, some one's 
 impression about it, either acted upon tacitly, or expressed to others. 
 dika.s Soivai is of course equivalent, as the Scholiast explains, to ivirp^at 
 SiKaiTTvplf Kol KpiBTJvat. See the Lexicons. iri^A-ciriy. Such, in 
 
 exercising the function of arbitrators, were called sKKX-iirdi. ovk ftaii. 
 
 The note of Schweighauser quoted by T. K. A., points out the well-known fact 
 that this expression does not mean 'non sivit,' but rogavit, precatus est. It 
 indicates unwillingness on the part of the subject, but does not imply that this 
 feeling of unwillingness can be carried out by any exercise of his power. 
 Valckn. describes it as a milder way of saying ' vetavit.' To me it seems that 
 the peculiar meaning very much depends upon the peculiar force of the 101^ 
 perfect, Was not for letting, or allowing, for the real past tenses of the verb do 
 not appear to have this force, cf. ouSeVa in etaore TtapeXSiiv, ' did not after this 
 permit any one else to come forward,' vi. 41. With the present idiom compare 
 i. 126; iii. 48; Soph. Phil. v. 442. e 1 Se ^4 Here, as elsewhere, 
 
 ei 56 would more accord with our own idiom, for the ju)) does not negative the 
 preceding verb, but is to be taken as a general negation of what the former 
 clause implies or recommends. Translate, 'for if otherwise.' So the Germans, 
 ' widrigenfalls.' Kriig., in his Grammar, says ei Se /itJ) has become a sort of 
 fixed formula, and where a negative notion goes before, is still used to introduce 
 the contrary supposition, though this is of course affirmative. In the present 
 passage, oiiK liuv is this preceding negation, negatived by ei Se nil. We maj' 
 add as a familiar example, Luke iv. 26. erepovs — the Athenians, 
 
 T&v vvv ivTuv. The members of the Peloponnesian confederacy. iiaKKoi 
 is to be connected with iroielffBai, ' rather to make for themselves.' So Eriigi 
 But Poppo prefers Ircpous jicLWov, ' alios potius.' 
 
 (h.) a7ra7uff't — 'withdraw the forty ships,' ch. 26. irpirepot 
 
 K.T.\. — ' JBut before this were done, it was not fair that the others (sc. lEpidam- 
 nians) should he undergoing a siege, while themselves were going to law,* 
 avTovs — 'the Corcyrcsans and Corinthians' Goll. understands it of the 
 Corinthians alone, and T. K. A. agrees with him, ' for if the Corcyraeans are in- 
 cluded, they are engaged on both sides.' In this case we should have expected 
 (r(/>os, and the objection is absurd, for the CorcyrEeans must have heen included, 
 if the Corinthians were, else it would appear that the latter went to law with 
 themselves. eroTfioi Se efvai , . . fnroySas Se •noffja'afrBai, 
 
 At first sight it is obvious to expunge the second Se, which Pop. has accordingly 
 done, and rendered the whole 'paratos vero etiam sese esse hdc conditionefaeius 
 facere ut suo utrique loco maneant' Against this it may be urged, as Kriig. 
 has done, that no MSS. sanction the cancelling of Se', and that the words might 
 imply the existence of other proposed conditions of peace, besides that here 
 mentioned. Kriig. accordingly makes both eroTjiioi elvoi and airovths Sc Troi^o-ao-flm 
 dependent upon an iXe^ov, to be supplied from WTe'Aeyoy, and to this ixeyov we 
 may attach the force of iK4\euov. [See note on Sheppard's T/ieophrastut, in 
 
Chap. 29.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 4g 
 
 voce-l ' They professed to be ready to do so (se. Smcifeirfloi) also upon the con- 
 dition of both parties remaining as they were [status quo ante], and that they 
 would make a truce so long as the arbitration continued.' Am., who would also 
 retain the Se, attempts to explain it, as though cVoi/ioi ilpai Sttm ixivuv='eToiij.oi 
 elvai fiiveiv : but there is reason in the objection [T. K. A.] that although 'erotnoi, 
 fike many similar words (especially iKav6s), might well be followed by So-re, 
 yet the insertion of a/ifoTepovs as the subject of ehat renders that impossible 
 here. In other words, eVoi/ttJs elfii &(rTe.rovro irotuv is correct: tToifiSs dfti SicTe 
 4fi.e real ffe rovTo iroieTv is not so. Peile thinks the difficulty may be removed 
 * by construing eToi^oi ^Ivai in the same sense as i6e\etVf ' and that they were 
 ready also in the terms that (i.e. to agree that) both parties shall remain as 
 they were, and maTce a truce' — Sirre in fact extending over the whole sentence, 
 in which Se can by no means be spared.' For the usage of 'droiiios I would 
 compare Soph. Anfig. v. 264, ^juee 5* erotjuot Kal fiv^povs alptiv x^potv k.t.\. 
 
 Chameb XXIX. — (o.) TrK-fipfis — 'fully manned.' Kriig. remarks that 
 v\T]peis, vKTipovv, ir\rip<l>ii.aTa, were regular technical terms for the manning of 
 vessels either with marines or soldiers. ■irpoir€fi\fiavTes TipiTtpov. 
 
 This Is usually explained as a pleonasm ; but needlessly, for Trpo-ire/iirnv is the 
 common word, technically employed for the solemn conduct of a procession, 
 envoys, &c. Kriig. says the Trpo has a local not temporal force, and is found in 
 rpoUvai, vpospxecdai, meaning out, away (Germanic^ 'ent'). Cf. iii. lOO, i; 
 i. 29, 2; iv. 30, 3; 78, I J III, I. Sio-xiAfoij. We heard of 3000, 
 
 ch. 27. Probably no more could be got ready in time. The Scholiast's ex- 
 planation is, that through contempt of the Corcyrssans, 1000 were left behind. 
 Not a very likely thing. 
 
 (S.) (ei^ayres . . . iwiffKeviffavTes. Considerable doubt has been felt 
 as to what these two operations severally denote. The first, as applied to old 
 vessels, apparently not sea-worthy, must imply the most. Indeed the latter 
 probably refers merely to the smaller gear and tackling which every ship 
 required before ' coming out of dock,' as we should say ; iwia-nevd^iiv then would 
 correspond to ' rigging and fitting out.' Cf. vii. 24. The (ei^ayres has been 
 supposed to indicate the operation of ' undergirding ' with ropes, for the purpose 
 of holding the timbers together. That this was often done we know from Acts 
 xxvii. 17, Hor. Od. i. 14, 6, inter alia. And Arnold says that the operation 
 was found eSectual with the Russian ships taken in the Tagus in 1808. It was 
 done, Bloomf. shows, by ropes from poop to prow, and not across the middle of 
 the ship. But in this case should we not have had i7rofeu|o>'Tes ? It is much 
 more likely that reference is made to the binding and strengthening the old 
 ships by the introduction of fresh timbers, and the technical name for these 
 timbers seems to have been fuyiifioTa. With this agrees the explanation quoted 
 by Pop. from Gregorius, Cor. ad Hermogenem, iii., ri (ii^avTis -ras ttoAoiois voSt 
 oxtI tov ^vy^iiora Kparirnvres [Schol. Thuc. (vyii/iaTa airais ivOivTis] Ketrai. 
 ivyiimra 5e KaKouvTai to |u\o to omh tov roixov Trjs yeiis rphs rhy tripov 
 StaTelyovTct, to2xov — % (yyiifjiaTo, Tct ^v\a toi ifi$a?^6iieva Tois ffaviaiy, Sffxe 
 ffufeD|ai ris a-anSas -ras SiTipiHieras fffTiv Sre. "' 
 
 (c.) ?i4<f)diipa.v. Kriig. explains ajrAous ^TToiTjcrav. Hence the phrase means 
 disabled,' put 'hors de combat,' i. 54, no, ii. 2, 84. i/io\o7i?— 
 
50 . NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 ' terms of capitulation.' Cf. i. 98, ii. 107. irapaa-T'fiiraffSai — meaniLg 
 
 ' to make a person come and stand ieside ytm ' — naturally passes into the sense 
 of subdue, reduce. Pop. adds, ' Supple auTJ))/ ne Toij post Epidamn. ti'ansponen- 
 dum existimes, quae est suspieio Kniegeri.' ^ir^AuSas — 'the new 
 
 comers' called JeVoi in ch. 26. In the next chapter they are mentioned as ol 
 6\Aoi, who were murdered contrary to the terms of the capitulation. 
 SijaavTas exeiv — having bound to Jceep, i. e. 'to keep in bonds.' The idiom 
 is common enough ; the verb ex^iv denotes continuance down to the present 
 moment of the action denoted by the participle. See next ch. and ch. 38, 6. 
 Tvapa TTo\i. Mr. Riddle has an excellent note explaining the usages of vapi, 
 Terminalia ii. Tropi signifies juxtaposition, and with the accusative motion 
 terminating in juxtaposition. The ordinary meaning holds good here; the dif- 
 ficulty must be thrown upon the subject joined to it hrachylogically. ' They 
 conquered so as to attain to a great distance from their adversaries.' So vi. 37, 
 •jraph. Toaovrov yiyvtiiXKa, * I goto the length of thinking — or so far from the sup^ 
 position of my opponents as to thinlc,' vii. 'Ji, trap' b\iyov ^ SUtpevyov % airtfA- 
 KvvTo — ' as far as a little from escaping — as far as a little from perishing.' viii. 
 76, it6\is . . . ^ Trap' iKaxtirroy S^ ^K6e Th 'ABTjvaltuv Kpdros a<j}e\4(T6aif 'a city 
 which attained to a very little distance from taking away ;' and similarly iii. 39, 
 where see note on that disputed passage. 
 
 Chapteb XXX. — {a.) AevKt-ij.ii.ri. What the Italians call Cap. Bianco, 
 and the Greeks, retaining the old name, Lerkimo, or Alef kimo. The latter is, 
 however, according to Leake, eight miles to the northward, Poppo. It is ' a 
 low cape advancing into the Channel at Corfu.' aiy(jjia\iSiTois is only to be 
 understood of those captured in the sea-fight. 
 
 (6.) iir' oixov — 'homeward.' With the gen., «» the direction of sn ohieot; 
 with an acausat., quite up to an object. As the latter would he the motion put 
 into practice by an attacking enemy, iirX with an accusative is generally said to 
 denote hostile intent. Instances are innumerable. See Appendix i, 
 T^s yjis eTE/noj'. Partitive genitive, 'ravaged some of the land.' 
 
 (e.) ToB xpcvov rhf ■ir\e7irTor. Five or six months. The battle oc- 
 curred in the spring of 01. 86. 2, B.C. 434; Kriig. ; others, B.C. 435. 
 /uE'Xpi. The final iota is not elided before a vowel in Thucyd. Cf. Lob. ad 
 Phryn.^. 13. ■7repit6i'Ti rf e4pei. The reading of most MSS. is 
 
 irtpt6vTi T(j! fle'pei, which is usually rendered superante adhuc cestate. Arnold 
 objects that fl^psi ' is not used absolutely as if it were dipovs, hut expresses the 
 time at which the thing was done ; and TrepiSint r^ 04pei cannot signify reliqud 
 cestatis parte, as Haack and Poppo translate it, for then it should be either t# 
 TTipUnTi Tov Bipovs ov T^ 9e/)€i T^ TrepiSvTi.' This may be true ; but why may not 
 the words mean, summer still being left — i, e. some of it still remaining oror— 
 like portion of a stock not yet consumed ? Still Reiske's conjecture, TrepiUvri, 
 confirmed as it is by one good MS., and supported by Xen. Hellen. iii. 2. § 25, 
 , ttepiUvTi r§ ivtavTif, is preferable. But it must not be rendered, with the 
 Schol., when the summer came round — i. e. at the beginning of next snmmer. 
 The metaphor is taken from the act of describing a circle, which, as the 
 line comes round, is more and more nearly finished. Tr. as the summer was 
 draxeing in to a close, or, in the course of the summer. Pop. reads vepUrri, 
 
Chap. 31.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 5 1 
 
 but I cannot understand his proposed version, • astafe quum ilia (tota) reliqua 
 
 (d.) x^'M^*'"^ ^S») — 'when it was now winter.' Thuoyd. employs a two- 
 fold division of the year, x^'A"^'' ^^^ Bepos, the limits (if which were somewhat 
 undefined. But the x^'f-^" '""y be considered to have begun about the middlo 
 of autumn or the fall of the leaf, and to have lasted until the weather in early 
 spring was fit for military operations. See lib. ii. u. 1, yeypawTai 5e 4|7)s wi 
 cVatrra 4ylyveT0 Harcb Bepos Koi x^^P-^va, 
 
 Chaptee XXXI. — (a.) riv ivtavnly. As we interpret the preceding eh. 
 this year wUl be either B.C. 434 or 433, or, as Pop. says, from the summer of 
 4J4 to that of 433. opy^ <p4povTes. This seems to me analogous 
 
 to xa^ETcSj e<pepov. The dative opyrj is just such a dative as in the old language 
 passed into an adverb. (The junior student may be reminded that the adverbial 
 forms in -i; -ei -cos -01 are dative terminations.) Tr. hearing angrily tlie war 
 against the Corcgrceans — i. e. regarding it with wrathful and excited feelings. 
 The common xo^f tSs f4piiy — ' cegr^ferre,' would disincline me from believing 
 with Pop. that opyy ipfpovTes can mean animose, magna animi ardore et impetu, 
 administrantes. And it is more than doubtful that ir<{\€;uoi' ^iptiv can stand for 
 helium gerere. Bloom, is quite right in saying that irpoBvfLus fepeiv Thv irdXe- 
 Hov, Herod, ix. 18, is quite another thing. There the meaning is, zealously to 
 endure the labours of the war; and so too, ric iroXenov Sicvoo wto irpoSifMs otaeui, 
 Thuc. iv. 121. Compare for the sense assigned v. 80 b, ri re &\\a Bvfi^ e(pepoii. 
 
 (6.) Kol .... ija-ay yap k.t.\ fSo^ev. This parenthesis is more 
 
 in the style of Herodotus than our author; but Thucyd. repeats the same 
 formula, iii. Jo, iii. 107. Neither in this case, says Kriig., nor in that of aWh 
 yip, should we place a comma after the first word. tvi^irovioi would 
 
 naturally govern a dative, but signifying as it does ' members of the same con- 
 federacy,' it becomes virtually a substantive, and is constructed like one. So 
 some verbs change their original character and construction, cf. note on ii. 69, 
 ipyvpoKoyStri. eiplcrK€(rBai,'S.'B. mid. voice — ' procure for themselves,' 
 
 as i(reypd<jiavTo is 'got themselves enrolled,' cf.i. 33, 3. vpea-^evirititvoi. 
 
 Perhaps the force of the future is— 'with the intent of managing the matter by 
 an embassy' Pop. (larger edition) conjectures ■irpe<rBev6fieyoi. But, says Krug., 
 perhaps vpeirPeietrBai means the actual discharge of ambassadorial functions, as 
 <TTpariitaBai does \^th reference to those of a soldier, and iroAiT€i)c(rei« those of 
 a citizen. I suppose he means that the present would not be used unless to 
 describe ambassadors in discharge of some actual duty. Whereas here we have 
 merely the general mention of the office in which they appeared. oir' 
 
 airiiv eiplffKcffBat. By contrasting this with 4k aiiTTJs UtXoTTomiiffov at tl5» 
 beginning of the chapter, it will be seen that in such cases hrh denotes a muci 
 less intimate relation with the object spoken of than is implied by 4k. For 
 iirb is simply 'coming away from a. thing'— e/c property 'coming out of, and 
 being derived from it.' Hence the former is used where there is uncertainty, 
 the latter where there is non6, as in a somewhat curious passage, Eurip. 
 
 Mipp. v. 759. 6a 
 
 t) yap iir' an^oripuv, t) 
 Kpriffias iK yas hutropvis eirroTt^ 
 B 2 
 
52 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 which is translated—' vel enim ab utr^que parte, vel eerte e Creti profieiscens.' 
 Cf. notei. 128. 
 
 Chaptee XXXII.— (a.) iTpov4>n\on€vri!. It is perhaps hardly neces- 
 sary to consider that there is any zengma in the construction of this participle, 
 though it has a slightly different application to the two nouns — when neither 
 benefit nor alliance is previously owing to them, i.e. when they have done nothing 
 upon wliich to found a claim for a return of favours, or for alliance. Cf. Herod. 
 V. 82, T] ex^pv ri irpoo^eiAo/ieV?) is 'ABrivalovs. This example might perhaps 
 induce us to write the word without a crasis. But Kriig. shows that in Attic 
 Greek, the cases where crasis does not take place, are occasioned hy the fact 
 that the simple verb begins witl; an aspirate, as in irpoopav, wpo^a. 
 ludAicTTa flip and el Si /i5) denote, as usual, the best and most desirable 
 course, and what is next best — should maJce it appear that they ash what is even 
 expedient, hut failing this, that they ash at least what is not prejudicial. 
 ayaSiSd^at. The preposition conveys the notion of going bach. Hence in 
 such cases it seems to mean to explain from first principles — i. e. fully and satis- 
 factorily. x^P'-"- This of course maybe rendered two ways— ttai 
 they (the speakers) will retain a lasting sense of the obligation. In favour of 
 this it may be seid that 6|ou<rii/ in this case retains the same subject as Sc'oitoi. 
 Or again — that they (those addressed) will have the gratitude felt towards them 
 an everlasting possession. This seems to give a better and more usual sense to 
 p4$aiov, cf. iii. 37 b, note. 
 
 (i.) ^X"P" irope'fecrOoi — get these points clearly established for you— \.e. by 
 our explanations. This is one of the cases where the Germans, by the use of 
 the auxiliary verb lassen, come nearer to an exact expression of the force of the 
 middle voice than we can do. ferixtli^e k.t.X. Translate — 'now 
 
 it has come to pass that the self-same practice is both in respect of you (1. e. as it 
 must seem to you) so far as regards our request inconsistent, and as concerns our 
 own interest at the present crisis inexpedient.' The awkwardness arises from 
 the apparent tautology of irphs Onas and ej xP^^'"'' ^^^ there is a distinction 
 between the use of the prepositions, though a somewhat subtle one. They are 
 often found interchanged in MSS. A case occurs in Theophrastus [ch. ii. p. 
 64 ed. Sheppard] where I have quoted els ^tuKeas ws irphs trvfipLaxovs iwopeicTO, ■ 
 observing that here els seems to mean turning the eyes in the direction of the 
 object, while trphs gives a notion of some dependence placed upon, or aid expected 
 from it. In general terms we may say that els denotes the more vague and 
 abstract relation, vphs the more positive and practical connexion. I find that 
 Peile's notion coincides with this. He translates irphs v/ias, ' apud vos,' is 
 Xpeiav, quod attinet ad. He says is t'^vk6\iv — 'urbem versus' expresses motion 
 in the direction of, or towards the city, though the moving body may not 
 actually enter it. But irpis tV ■:r6\iv, ad urbem, can only mean motion con- 
 tinued up to the city. He also calls attention to St. John i. I. It is, I think, 
 dear, that itphs rhv Behv denotes a much more intimate relation than is Tin) 
 &f6v. . . . Cf. ch. 102, ^vimaxlav irphs aiiTois, See Soph. AJax, v. 1018, Trpki 
 ovShv es epiv 6v/j.o{inevos. 
 
 (c.) TvepiiffTTiKev tpatvofxevtj — 'has come round to approve itself,* op 
 • turned out evidently to be,' This seems antithetical to reTvxme &iin<t>opoy (tv). 
 
Chap. 33.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. ' 53 
 
 and this mny cause the construction with a participle of which Kiiig. says 
 he knows no other instance except the imitation in Dionysius Arch. vi. 43, 
 'Jreplso'TTiKey ij SoKovaa riixuv irptfpota ISi^ irphs l/carepoi/ fiepos air^xSeiav (ptpofievij. 
 But see note on ruxivTuiv, eh. 120. aaxppoaivi) denotes 'quietude,' 
 
 a retiring and modest spirit, as distinct from a forward and presuming one. It 
 IS, says Ivriig., hirpay^oaivri as distinct from iroKvirpay^oa-^vTj. 
 
 ((?.) Karh 116 vas. This is one of the formulEe where Kriig. thinks fwCpus 
 was originally supplied hy the mind. /leyas 6 icivSvvos. Prohahly 
 
 this is the danger to Athens herself, which they proceed to enlarge upon hy way, 
 of argument, ch. 33 and 36. vavi^axia". Kriig. says, 'as if viKay 
 
 followed,' and quotes rather a singular parallelism from Plato, Ap. 39, riiauplai' 
 vfiiv ^^uv troXh xo^eTTCtfTepav ^ o'lav ifxe aireKTtJyare. ;U^ fierh KUKlas, 
 
 56^115 Ss iiaWov a/iapriif. It is quite plain that to take these words in 
 the common grammatical way with ToX/iZiiev, makes nonsense. They have 
 therefore very generally heen connected with aTrpwyjioirvvi] only — ■ a quietude not 
 associated with anything vicious, hut rather originating in an error of judgment.' 
 This I always thought was to put a great strain upon the collocation. Surely 
 Thucyd. would have made some combination with the article, c. g. rji /x^ /neri 
 icaKtas airpayfio(rvv7i k.t.a. I have therefore ever translated the words as gene- 
 rally modifying the whole statement — ' And there is excuse for us, if in a case 
 where there was no ill intention, hut where we were rather influenced hy an error 
 of policy, we now venture to act in direct contradiction to our former quietude,' 
 or, we may say, 'without any sinister intention now, hut owing to a previous 
 error of judgment ,-' as however it was not their present, but their -previous con- 
 duct which was regarded with so much suspicion, I prefer the former. This, 
 which was certainly quite an independent view, is confirmed by Kriig., who has 
 — ' if we, not from malice, hut rather from a defective judgment ; adding that the 
 defective judgment is not connected with the present application for aid, but 
 with their previous isolation. Poppo's interpretation is slightly different. It is 
 reasonable for us to contradict our former practice, if we do it, not for any sinister 
 ohject, hut because wehaveheen deceived in our expectations,Tnak\ng S6^Tjsafxapria 
 equivalent to on S(!|t)j ^/tapTOjuei'. 
 
 Chaptee XXXIII. — (a.) n ^vvTvxia t^s rinerepas xp^^as- ' The con- 
 juncture of our request,' sc, with the existing circumstances. For ^vvrvxin 
 
 'Krug. refers to iii. 82, 2, 112, J; v. 11, 3; vi. 54, 1. Karafl^iireo-flf. 
 
 ' The old reading KardBricrde is, as Arn. says, barbarous. There can be but little 
 doubt that this trifling correction ought to be accepted, first because iroi-lia-ea-es 
 has gone before, and secondly because us &p catching the transcriber's eye might 
 so readily have made him hesitate about writing the future indicative. We 
 must understand the verb again with ms S//, so that the whole will be KwraSii- 
 (reirBe iis ttv /iaAio-TO xaTaBiiaSe — ' Ye will store up as much as you possibly can 
 
 f store up.' 
 
 ' (8.) Ti'j EuTrpaf/a aTtavtuT epa, ei. The absence of the conjunction ^ 
 is variously accounted for. Pop. refers to Matthia;, § 450, and Hermann ad 
 JBurip. -^l"- ''• ^9°' T^^ip a,vip\ Kaxhi/ fi.e'iCov, k/iapTcTi' -n-tcrrris a\6xou; where the 
 infinitive is as a genitive, sine articulo. The genitive of the pronoun is gene- 
 rally expressed as in Agam. v. 63, rl yap yvvcuKl Toirou <piyyos ijSioy ipaKtiv, 
 
54 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 SoSjja iriKas ivot^ai ; The present seems to me a somewhat similar case, rairiis 
 being implied. What could ie more rare good, fortune than if, Sfc, is of conrse 
 the regular way of speaking. But expressing ourselves less accurately we 
 might say, What piece of good fortune could ie more rare ! if the very power 
 presented itself, ^c., or, inverting the expression, ' If the very power which ^^ 
 wanted presented itself voluntarily, what piece of good fortune could he more 
 rareV is tows t!oWo)is api-ri\v — 'bringing with it in the eyes of 
 
 the world (apud popnlum) the repwtationfor courage.' Such is the force of oper^. 
 Cf. with Arn. ii. 45, and with Kriig. iii. 58, Soph. Fhil. v. 1420, and Kaxla, 
 iii, 61. [. (pepEiv is is, as Pop. remarks, properly perferre ad, but Tacitus has 
 ^ Fama in posteros' 'Rxii is noi ^\s renown reaching to posterity 1 irph 
 
 ToWStv ^pijfidTwy. Cf. Herod, i. 86, rhv ttf iyit Tratn Tvpdvyoitrt irpoerlfiTjffa 
 p.eyd\uv xpvf^'!^'^^^ is K6yovs i\0e7i/. 6\lyotsS-fi. Whether 5^ be 
 
 an intensified form of Se, or an abbreviated form of ijSr), cf. eh. i b, we arrive 
 at much the same meaning. In the first place, it indicates that the mind 
 pauses and dwells upon some point of contrast with what has gone before : in 
 the latter, it indicates that the mind has at last reached a point upon which 
 it may pause and dwell. It therefore gives emphasis and intensity to any 
 word with which it is combined. iroXXo! 5^ 'full many :' b\lyois S-fi, but fern 
 indeed! itapaylyvavrai — 'present themselves ief ore the persons to 
 
 whom they apply.' 
 
 (c.) 5i' '6vTrep. Here Si& with an accusative as occasionally, ttrowyi the 
 influence or agency of which. yv^tnjs afiaprdyt i — * he misses, errs 
 
 in Ms judgment.' 'A metaphor from archery,' Bloomf. and T. K. A. But if 
 this be true, yvii/nis is surely the object aimed at, not the instrument for reach- 
 ing it; the target, not the arrow, and, therefore, 'judgment' should not be 
 spoken of as the instrument in operation. It is rather ' he fails to hit upon a 
 right judgment.' On this use of yviiio), as' a right opinion,' cf. Soph. Ajax, v. 
 ifi^, roiruv yvfAifias irpo^iidffKfiV. tp60tp T(? v/Airiptp. The posses- 
 
 sive pronoun for the gen. of the personal, and here the objective genitive — 
 'fear of which you are the object,' so a little below is rijii u/ucTepav iirkx^ipTittai. 
 iro\efiri<reiovTat — 'an the "qui vive" for war.' Let the junior stud, notice 
 these verbs desiderative, formed from the first fut. act., by changing -ai into -eiw. 
 Cf. knaKKi^eifv, i. 95. 4; iii. 84. I ; irapaSdanfv, iv. 82. 2 ; ^uiiPd(retiv, viii. 56. 
 3 ; vaviMxhaeifv, viii. 79. 3, Pop. They correspond to the Lat. verbs in -urio, 
 formed from a supine. "npoKaTaKapi^dyoyTas. This seems to me 
 
 a military metaphor, seizing upon us as an advanced post from which to prose- 
 cute their attack against you. Such, at least, is the force of the word, Xen. 
 Anab. i. 10. 6, and ch. 57 c. ivolv <j>6daat apidpTuaiv — may not 
 
 fail in loth points at once, or, that they may make sure of securing one or other 
 of two things, either to damage us, or strengthen themselves. There is some awk- 
 wardness owing to the condensed form of the expression. Hermann {de ElUps. 
 p. 142) has expanded it, ^ -rov (pBdam rifias KaKoia-ai, tj rod crcpSs aliToiJS Peffaui- 
 caaSai. He compares Soph. Elect. 1320, ouk &k im7v fnxapToi/ k.t \. Poppo's 
 remark is ' Svo7v pendet ex aiidpTacrtf, et (tiBdaai proposituni est, quia ad utrum- 
 que incisum, ^ Kaitaia-ai J) ^i^aidnrauBai pertinet, atque adjunctum habet infini- 
 tivum ut iii. 82. Cf. Matt. § 553,' ;. e., not miss bothpoints, riz., to secure before- 
 hand the damaging, lJ'o. Kriig. takes it as we have done, audoTuxriS (jiBdffa Svoiv. 
 
Chap. 35.] ^^OTES ON THUCYDIDES. ^5^ 
 
 Similarly in rpiuv tZv HiylffTuv |u/i</)op£i/, a^vveffias ij naKaKlas, % i/iehelas, i. 1 22, 
 the use of the disjunctive conjanotion proves that Tpiwi/ must also be taken dis- 
 junctively, ' one of these three misfortunes.' There is a similar passage, Dem. 
 de Cor. § 1 66, x'opis S^ tovtuv Suoiv xPV'^if'Oiv ov Sia/j.apr'liffiirdai. Shilleto, ad 
 locum, rightly observes that it was a mistake of the earlier commentators to 
 propose the insertion of ivhs or Sarepov, and adds, in an affirmative sentence wo 
 must say, ' to fail in one of two things' but in a negative, not to fail in both 
 things obviously implies to succeed in one or the other. 
 
 Chaptek XXXIV. — (a.) fiaBeraaav. 'This form appears to have been 
 archaic, for it is often found in laws, as Demos. 21.8. 94, and iEsch. i. 12, 35. 
 It was not, however, rejected by the Attics, as may be seen from KoXacS'liTaurm, 
 Thuc. iii. 39, TrapaKafiPaveToxrav, Xen. Ci/r. vii. 2, 14, KpLviaOwaav, Sell. i. 9, 23, 
 and many others. It was avoided by the Tragffidians,' Kriig. ^Kwe/jL.- 
 
 vovrai. The nominative is, of course, ^TroiKoi, contained in airoifcfa. 
 
 (6.) 'iTpoK\T]64vTes — * challenged to decide the matter hy law' See ch. 28. 
 ^eTeASer;/ — tofolloviwp — go through with— prosecute, cf. rifiupiais fiSTiSfTer 
 Tovs aSiKovvTas, iv. 62. Kriig. quotes also rifiupia fieTf\6e7jf ToirovSf ^schtn, 
 i. 12, 35. TrapdyetrQat — led aside from the right path by trickery, 
 ix Tov eiBeos. These words seem to be opposed to airoTp, so as to signify 
 * whether they cloJce their object under any false pretence, or whether they prefer 
 their request directly.' So Arnold, after Heilman and Goller ; and Krug. seems 
 to coincide. But I cannot help thinking that this is negatived by the existence 
 of re after Seofiivois, which surely could not be employed to introducej as they 
 say, an idea antithetical to kirarri ; for, according to every view of re, it intro- 
 duces not what is antithetical, but what is epexegetioal to that which goes 
 before. I understand it to mean — and not forthwith at once (i. e. without reflec- 
 tion) render assistance to them for the ashing. Here the last clause Seo^eVois t6 
 K.T.A. is epexegetioal, as it more fully sets forth the nature and result of the 
 OTTKTT) mentioned in the first. Had the antithesis, for which Poppo and others 
 contend, existed in the words, surely we should have had St, and not re. See 
 the notes, ch. 4a; 25 c; iii. Ji d. /ut; vwovpyeTv are, says Bl., to 
 
 be taken as a single term, expressing a single idea, as ov (fnjfii, and therefore ov 
 is not required, as Poppo would insist. For this sense of ix tov ivBeos see Herod. 
 ii. 161 (quoted in Bl. note) airiiTTqaav iic ttjs iBeiJis, and iii. 127 ; ix. 37. 
 
 Chaptee XXXV. — (a.) rhs AaKe^aifiovluy (fnovSds — i. e. the thirty 
 years' truce (ef. i. 115). Eemark the objective genitive. 'Miiller (Dorians, i. 
 p. 214) says that the defensive treaty with Corcyra engaged in a war with its 
 mother country was, according to ancient Greek principles, wholly unlawful and 
 anjust.' T. K. A. Miiller says so of the war itself, not of a treaty with those 
 engaged in it, which is not precisely the same thing. His idea of the meaning 
 of the article referred to is, that ' states not included in the alliance may join 
 whichever side they please, by which means they come within the treaty, and 
 the alliance guarantees their safety. But if a state already at war with another 
 state, party to the treaty {fvavovSos) is assisted, a war of this description is like 
 one undertaken by the confederacy of the assisting state.' vpoKn- 
 
 uipTI s proffered, lit. put before you for your acceptance Portus tr. prceseniu 
 
56 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 eipriTaiyiip iv (rirovSais. ' For it has ieen laid down in the treaty , whatso- 
 ever Grecian state is not in alliance anywhere may hetalce itself to either of the 
 two leading parties it chooses.' The language is somewhat elliptical. Pop. ex- 
 pands it thus, ^leivoi iKBeiv Trap' ixelvovs. Trap' Sirorepovs Uv i^Bety. Tuy 
 Tr6\eaii 5JTij /irjSo/iioD Ju/ifiax«'— ape'ffKJjTai. The verb iperrKerrBai is 
 followed dative rei, e.g. i. 129, 3; ii. 68, 2, and occurs absolutely Sio t!) /iii 
 apeffKerrSai, v. 44; but does not take an infinitive after it. For (nroySois sine 
 articulo, see ch. 8 a. 
 
 (i.) elp^ovcn—' exclude,' according to Lobeck's rule (Ajax, 753), elpyu, 
 includo ; tfpya, excludo. T. K. A. has a profound remark. The pupil, as an 
 artificial help, may observe that when it signifies to exclude, the breathing is 
 turned out, but turned in when it signifies to imcZ«(ie. etra. This as 
 
 it stands is either a very singular asyndeton, equal to * quid enim,' what then ? 
 shall they, S;c., which, as Engelman says, is very suitable for the expression of 
 indignation, or it is an error for kSto, or we must, with Krtig., read ei re. lu 
 this ease the re couples the clause to the previous €1. " Tis hard indeed if these 
 shall he permitted, ^c, and if they shall regard it in the light of a wrong,' S^c. 
 rlBfirBai ti ev Tivi — ' to place a thing in the category of another.' 
 
 (c.) ovx 8irii)j KuKvral. 'It is generally considered a sufBcient account of 
 this idiom to say that it resembles the Latin * non modo,' for * non modo non.* 
 But this explanation of ' non modo ' has been shown by Mr. Long and others to 
 be incorrect. See Long on Ccesar. Bell. Gall. ii. 17, • quo non modo intrari, sed 
 ne perspici quidem posset.' The confusion, he says, arises from translating 
 ' non modo,' 'not only,' whereas it means ' not so much as,' and he renders the 
 words — ' into which there was not so much as a possibility of entering, nay not 
 even of seeing through them.' The best way of rendering the idiom seems to me 
 to be — ' not to speak of the first case.' And similar is the force of ovx '^'"'"^ iu 
 Greek : Sttmj is properly ' how,' i. e. it is ttus in its dependent form, the form 
 which irojs takes when it depends upon some verb, expressed or understood, and 
 therefore ovx ^"^"^ '^ ' I say not how,' Sfc, and we must translate such phrases 
 as the present accordingly. ' To say nothing of hindering them, you will even 
 permit,' SfC, ovx Sirws etpvyey, iAX' oitSe erpetrev — * to say nothing of running 
 away, he was not even frightened ; ' and similarly without a negative in the 
 second clause — ovx ^""ay rous iroAcjufous irp4^avTo ol "EWrives, aWa Kot ttjc 
 Xiitpav iKriKutrav, * To say nothing of routing the enemy, they also ravaged their 
 territory.' See note on the same idiom, iii. 42. TrpocrXafi^'iv Tr(pi6^e- 
 
 aBai. Kriig. rightly calls attention to the distinction between the infinitive 
 and participle with these verbs, cf. ii. 18. 3, TrepiiSeln hut);!' rijLnBt7ffav. The first 
 states the case as a conception, the second as a fact. ici*)Xv€tv rovs 
 
 lniTBo(p6povs. The conjecture /ii(r9o(()op(os is quite Mnnecessary ;' to put a stop 
 to the mercenaries,' means, of course, * to put a stop to levying them,' Kriig. 
 quotes — oiKOfpBdpov yap 6.vSpa KutKiiei yvv-f}. Eurip. jSZoJ. 67, 8. Kaff 
 
 tin &y 7rci(r0T]T e. * Poterant enim modice, poteraut clanculum, non aperte 
 nee magnis viribus CorcyrsBis opitulari.' Haaek. Perhaps the words are meant 
 to suggest the practicability of some clandestine aid. ^(ray. It is not 
 
 easy to see how Popp. can suppose the imp. capable of meaning, ' were and still 
 continue to he.' Some consider that Jirrav is inexplicable, and conjecture daiv. 
 Giill. rather strangely understands it as a sort of short caustic sneer, ' erant ? 
 
Chap. 36.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 57 
 
 nonne etiamnum sunt?' a very characteristic version. Kriig., after Kampf, 
 says the spealier refers to i. 33, and renders — ' are as we have seen ' — as we have 
 said, or, perhaps, 'were on the hypothesis of our argument.' Or might the im- 
 perfect here resemble the Eng. ' were,' for would Je ? tr. ' in which case our enemies 
 were the same,' cf. infra, c. 37 c, i^riv auroTs for ^Itji/ &!/ ouTois. Cf. the Lat. 
 erai — 'Tempus erat dapibus sodales.' Trfims— here ' the means of 
 
 producing or assuring good faith,' as in Arist. (Bhet.) it is ' the means of pro- 
 ducing conviction.' rovs ixeraffrivras. The Corcyrsans them, 
 selves, as Poppo says. But this does not much help the argument, for damage 
 done to them need not affect the Athenians : besides, in this ease we should 
 have anticipated some word denoting to punish, rather than y8Aiii|/ai. I suspect 
 an error. Engelman explains the argument thus. The capacity of the Spartans 
 to punish ns for joining you, is the surest guarantee for our remaining faithful to 
 your alliance : for if we fall off we are at once at their mercy. This is ingenious, 
 and may be correct. Kriig. I see has conjectured -ras lurairriiiravTas — i. e. 'you 
 if you reject us.' Ka\ vavriKTis k.t.\. Notice the collocation of the 
 article, equivalent to ^ fu/i/ioxfa, ^ SfSorai, vavrtK)] oSffa — ZiZofievri vavrtK"^ is, of 
 course, * being proffered in the shape of a naval one.' iav . . . ex^iv. 
 These infinitives are governed by Sia<j)4pei understood, Haack; by ^vij.<jiepfi, con- 
 tained in o^x V"^" '0 a^A-orpfttiffis, which is equivalent to oux ifiolus |u;iif>epei, 
 Arn. ; by KpaTLffrSv iffTi, latent in juaAiiTTa iiiv, Kriig. Burgess supposes Stl 
 has fallen cut before ct. 
 
 Chapteb XXXVI. — (a.) yvdirw ri /nee SeSibf aire v. Most annota tors 
 explain this passage, but there is no real difficulty. ' Let him understand that 
 this cautious fear of his, if backed by such strength as would accrue from our 
 alliance, is more likely to alarm the enemy ; while his confidence in his security 
 as a faithful -observer of the treaty, if he refuse to accept our alliance, being 
 powerless against his enemies in force is less likely to inspire them with alarm.' 
 ri SeSi^s is exactly equivalent to our participial substantive, and is therefore 
 well rendered by A., 'his being afraid.' Cf. rh opyi^6fxivov, ii. 59. 2; tJi dvfioi- 
 pamv, vii. 68. i. The gist of the passage lies in the fact that </)o;3i) (roc is made 
 the predicate of rfi SeSio's, a piece of false taste into which the fondness of Thuc. 
 for antithesis betrayed him. It would have been more worthy of the Sophists, 
 as Kriig. seems to suggest. This passage has been judiciously selected by Dr. 
 Donaldson to exhibit the difierence between the use of the participle as an 
 ivoixa and as a ^^jua. ' ^vjjupepovTa, TreidSfieyos, ix""' <!>o$r,a-ov, 5e|a/iecoi', oc, 
 iffxiovTas, and la6ij.ivov, are all predicates, the two futures being equivalent to 
 infinitive moods of the same tense, while t5 Se5ii»s and rh dapcrouy are subjects, 
 or equivalent to noun substantives;' Though Dr. Donaldson's nomenclature, 
 so far as regards the terms in which he expresses predication, is open to some 
 question, few things will better repay the labour of the younger student than 
 a careful perusal of New Cratylus, § 300 — 306. See note, ch. 49 d. 
 i.Si4aTipov. The active meaning of this, too, Kriig. ascribes to its antithetical 
 position. I certainly remember no similar instance, except that which he quotes, 
 aSees Se'or SeSieVai, Plato, Symp. 198 A. 
 
 (S.) ^ov^fviiJ-ivos. We must of course supply yi-ciSTti). iirov ov 
 
 jrap6yTtt — ' all but present.' Soia'La.tin,'tantumnon.' Kriig. quotes ii. 94. i. 
 
S8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 iv. 69. 3, V. 59. 5, viii. 26. I. jnf tS; jjnylnTav KaipSiv — 'is made a 
 
 friend, of, or an enemy in conjunction with the greatest opportunities ' — i. e. the 
 greatest opportunities for good or evil are involved in your decision to accept or 
 reject us. 
 
 (c.) T^s 'lTa\ias . . . irapiirKov KeTrai. The first is the objective 
 genitive, depending upon irapdirKov. With respect to irapdir\ou itself, cf. Shep- 
 pard's Theophrasius, ch. iii. note on Beirpov. 'Analysis shows that the genitive 
 expresses the antecedent notion from which any other notion may be conceived 
 to flow J that this antecedent notion may have reference, as to several other 
 things, so to locality or position ; that adverbs and adjectives conveying such a 
 notion take a genitive of that from which the notion arises — in reference to 
 which, that is to say, they do denote position or locality.' The note proceeds to 
 examine Thue. iii. 92 (which see), i. 26; Herod, vi. 116; (Edip. Tyr. v. 345; 
 HeraclidiB v. 214, &c. Cf. note on apxo^ SiaxuirOat, i. 75. But see also Donald- 
 son, 453 (bb). N.B. We have the compound, not the simple ttAoSj, as the Greeks 
 seldom ventured upon anything but coasting voyages. rh ivBevSeySC. 
 
 vavTiKSv — * to convoy our marine in this part of the world to those regions ;' as 
 ■Kapanfiinrew, ' to convoy,' is said of one who assists another in reaching his desti- 
 nation, so here it is metaphorically applied to a port which materially assists ves- 
 sels in the prosecution of their voyage. Ppaxvrdrq!. Kriig. translates, '5y 
 the following very brief summary which embraces the whole and every particular, 
 you may learn not to give us up to our enemy ;' and this seems to give the force 
 of the collocation. toTj ^ipLiraat k.t.\. is in apposition to Ppax^Tirif. 
 
 (d.) Tpla fiiv Syra. ' Eepete mente &y lidSone s. /xaSerf,' Pop., who sab- 
 joins, ' sed ne participium obstet non diseendi verum reputandi notione.' Yet 
 even then there is something extremely unnatural in the language. I have re- 
 garded it as an instance of the nominativus pendens — ' there being but three 
 navies,' then place no fuU stop (as Pop.) at KopipBmv; and read ToiTuti Si— if I 
 say of these, &c. Krug. supposes that the construction becomes ' anakoluthisch ' 
 from bringing the ii.\v and 5J into stronger contrast — or would read KepwBlai' 
 ad Tftjj'Se €( ... TCI SiJo : as in fractions, we have the article, for any given part 
 becomes definite. nXeloffi vavffl ra7s ^/xercpots — * with your jleet 
 
 more by ours ' — i. e. ' increased in number by the amount of vessels which we 
 bring.' I suppose Kriig. prefers this, for he explains it in his note as the dif- 
 ferential dative like iroAAijj and 6\iy<t>, and quotes to7s rotovrois kukoTs TtKeiu 
 KupirouTai, Plat. JJep. 579 C. In his text, however (first edition), he printed 
 i/itTipais, which I cannot help thinking the true reading — ' with your navy, 
 which will then be more numerous than theirs ;' or reading ri/i(T4pais — ' with our 
 united navy, which,' &c. 
 
 Chaptbe XXXVII. — (a.) Tlva a.<T<j>a\fffTfpov vpoeiirJTe — 'that you may , 
 he more certainly acquainted beforehand,' Am.; rather, 'more securely,' for 
 air<pa\ea-Tepoi' refers to security against making a slip, or being tripped up, and 
 d(ri|)aX6m;', St. Luc. i. 4, has a cognate sense. a^iu(rii', — xp^^""- In 
 
 the first, the idea of the right, or worthiness of those who ask to receive their 
 request, is prominent. Hence it nearly is ' claim.' In the second, the promi- 
 nent notion is necessity, it is accordingly 'ioant.' /i^ aKoylaTtes 
 airtia-TiaBe — 'not reject ihemi. without having a reason to give for it.' 1 cannot 
 
Chap. 37.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 59 
 
 accept T. K. A.'s note, • juj) a\oyl<rTais are to be taken together = non inconsulte,' 
 cf. ch. 21 a. 
 
 (6.) 1^0 0-1 S4. Krug. reads 5^, I suppose because what follows is not a 
 statement in any way contrasted with the preceding. S 4 ^atr 8 at — 
 
 •as a prseterite,' T. K. A. But I do not suppose Thuo. would have used tlio 
 same word in a future and prseterite sense within a few lines. Both have the 
 same genuine aorist sense, and refer to the yeweraZ^WMri^Ze of receiving alliance 
 at all. See Appendix. ^irl icaKovpyiif — ' for knavery/ ' mal-prac~ 
 
 Uces.' Cf. i. 102. i-jrl denoting the object, i. e. motive of an action, need not 
 have called for much elucidation. \\i)t.i>.axov — because the fewer to 
 
 share, the more booty to divide. oiSe fidprvpa. 'Legeoffre,' 
 
 Dobree. ' This is, I think, a true correction, and greatly improves the sense of 
 the passage,' Arn. I must venture to differ. Arn. did not soe that ouSi is, ' and 
 so not, and consequently/ not a witness either,' This at least is, I think, the mean- 
 ing, though the editors appear to overlook it. oBre TrapuKaAoCvTcj 
 ato'x^i'etrflai — not to he put to the Hush hy having to call others in — i. e. such 
 as would become witnesses of their knavery. It would be scarce worth while to 
 notice this, had not some (Pop.) supposed that Time, meant, ' to have to Hush 
 for the refection of their application ;' to which Owen and T. K. A. seem to in- 
 cline. avTdpKr] Qeffiv kg t^iivf)—' their city , lying in an independent 
 (i. e. requiring nothing from others)^05i^/o«, gives them the opportunity of being 
 rather judges in their own case of the damage they may have done to any one, 
 than that judges should he (as elsewhere) appointed hy mutual agreement.' Or 
 we may make it irapex^^ avroi/s yiyuecrOat SiKacrrds, ^ciKKov ^ Kark ^vvB-ftKas ttv 
 iy4vovTo, instead of having SiKatTT^! understood as the subject of ylyyecBai. In 
 this case, Karh ^vvd-fiKas will mesLn, judges, more than could have been the case 
 had they joined a league, according to the terms of such league. I had always in- 
 clined to this interpretation, and now see that Kriig. approves of it. Another 
 is adopted by Kampf, which was indeed given by GoU. in his first ed., i. e. kotA 
 ^vvB^iKa^ ylyvea-Sai are taken in close connexion, makes them rather judges, ^c. 
 than makes them enter into the confederation. Sio: rh k.t.K. — because, 
 with less going forth than all other men, they more than all others receive the rest 
 of the world into their harbour, putting in of necessity (or when compelled to put 
 in) from stress of weather. The force of the various participles (sine articulo) 
 is here very delicate, and may easily be wrongly given. 
 
 (c.) K&v Toirif K.T.A.. Several MSS. read kkI tovto, which also makes 
 good sense. But perhaps the other reading comes to the same thing — and 
 herein have they put forward their specious abstinence— i. e. and herein consists 
 their specious abstinence from alliance which they put forward as their defence, 
 not namely {i. e. it is this) that they may not be compelled to join others in injus- 
 tice, but that they may commit injustice all by themselves, and that wherein they 
 get the mastery they may openly employ violence, and where they escape detection 
 they may secretly take advantage, and in the event of appropriating anything may 
 not be put to the blush, sc. as there would be no allies to witness the fact, cf. 
 supra. I have used the words ' openly ' and ' secretly,' because I believe the 
 form of the expression implies them, ri euTrpeires ^(tttovBov is like rh htdpciymiov 
 KOfi.fTaiS€S, V. 68, and rh ^iviiBes Tfia-vxoy, vi. 34. Pop. oux '/"a k.t.A.. the form 
 cf expression is compressed, and this clause is to be taken in close connexion 
 
6o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 witli SffTToi'Soi' as its explanation — eV if, and ov exactly answer to each other, 
 and are another illustration of the fact that where the Greeks can alter the form 
 of the second expression, they will, cf. ch. i6 a. aXTjirriiTtpoi — 
 
 ' less within the power of others,' A. Jintqy.' grasp.' ^^V" — ef. supra, 
 
 «■ 35 *• 
 
 Chapteb XXXVIII.— (a.) atpKTTua-i — ' have stood aloof from all connexion 
 with us,' scarcely 'have revolted^' as D. See i. 25. 5ia T7avT6s — 
 
 'from first to last,' Kriig. has, ' not in this case only,' which seems the real 
 meaning. itcirf/icpBeiria-av. Kriig. remarks that this and similar 
 
 forms occur frequently in Xenophon, sometimes in the orators, never in the 
 dramatists. dav/id^etrSat — here, like the Latin 'mirari,' ' to be treated 
 
 with respect.' On this and similar uses of the word, see note, Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 72. 'Amid the various colonies planted from Corinth along 
 the coast of Epirus, the greater number acknowledged on her part an hegemony 
 or supremacy. What extent of real power and interference this acknowledg- 
 ment implied, in addition to the honorary dignity, we are not in a condition to 
 say.' Grote, vol. vi. p. 67. 
 
 (6.) ovV iTTiffTpaTivoiiiv iKTrpfirus k.t.\. On this much has been 
 written, more especially as there is abundant MSS. authority for iTrta-TpaTeioi/ieD 
 and evTrpeirus, If the words stand, I apprehend their meaning is, nor is it un- 
 becoming in us to attack them (as otherwise it would have been), seeing that it 
 is in no ordinary sort of way that we are being wronged. If our attacking them 
 is extraordinary, it is because our provocation has been extraordinary too. But 
 Thuc. has said this somewhat awkwardly. We do not assail them unbecomingly 
 (i. e. unbecoming, as we admit it under ordinary circumstances to be) without 
 also being in the act of suffering extraordinary wrong from them. Under ordi- 
 nary circumstances, of course, a mother city fosters and protects its colony. 
 Peile, who prefers the opt. ^TrKTrpareuotyuej', does not differ much in the general 
 sense. ' The opt.,' he says, 'naturally follows o!>k opSus air., and, like it, follows 
 S^Kov '6ri, and that we should not now be invading them, a thing that ought not 
 to be, were toe not also, ^c' Arnold's version, ' without having received, 4*c.,' 
 would require T]SiKTjfi4t'ot. Pop. simply has ^KTrpewus ut plerumque valet ' in~ 
 signiter.' Kriig. more accurately, ' nieht aif so ausserordentliche Weise,' We 
 attach them, not in so extraordinary a way iviihout, Sfc., explaining ' extra- 
 ordinary ' in so far as it was a war carried on by a mother against a colony. 
 Stephens prefers tinrpfwHs, supposing it equivaleut to fiirpoad-rws, ' with a good 
 face.' 4^ov(rla ttAovtov is well explained by Bl., The poiver, or 
 
 licence of wealth, — i. e. which enables men to gratify their appetites and passions. 
 Tacit. Agric, ' ex paterna fortune tantam licentiam usurpante.' 
 
 Chaptee XXXIX.— (o.) {Jr. This is obviously a case where tlie relative 
 is to be resolved into a demonstrative and conjunction — e. g. a\\& ra.{nnv. It 
 is governed by TrpoicaKoiiiivov. Arn. quotes ii. 72, 73, 74, irpoKaKiiTai, though 
 this is perhiips, as G. objects, not precisely the same thing as the construction 
 with a noun. Kriig. more appropriately, ras a-irovSas irpoKaKovvTai, Equit. v. 
 796. The student will do well to observe that tIv appertains to TrponaKov/ievov, 
 and that the other participles ' sine articulo ' are, as usual, only accessories 
 
Chap. 39.] NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. 6 1 
 
 as conditions to the predication, — ' the man who from a ground of vantage and 
 security challenges you to this.' KeyfLif ri — 'to say something to the 
 
 purpose' is the exact opposite to ouSJc Aeyeij, 'you talk absurdity' rhv 
 
 4s Xaov . . . KaOKTrdfTu. It is a question wliether ' the equality between 
 deeds and words,' or ' the equality between the persons themselves and their 
 opponents ' be meant. I incline to the former, from tlie fact that Thuc. is so 
 partial to this particular antithesis. Pop. considers that the introduction of 
 &IJioiws is a sufficient argument against this view. But may it not be the sort 
 of pleonasm not unusual in such familiar phrases ? 'Their acts all the same as 
 their words' because it was the acts more particularly that the speaker had in 
 his thoughts, and meant to say should correspond to (dtjiola elvcu) the words. 
 Every one laughs at the negro's saying, ' Csesar and Pompey are very like, but 
 specially Pompey,' yet there is a meaning at the bottom of it. The second re- 
 calls the first to recollection more than vice versa. Siayavi(e(r8ai. 
 Here again it is doubted whether a contest at law, or one by arms is meant. 
 Pop. decides in favour of the latter, and with reason, since it seems to be ex- 
 plained by ov irplv iroKiopKilv, 
 
 (J.) TifXv with the infinitive is usually employed in afiinnations ; it does, 
 however, occur in negations with the usage of a preposition, Thuc. i. 68 ; ii. S ; 
 vii. 50; Kriig. The difference between Trpiv iroKtopK^tv and irpiv eiroXtopKovv 
 rb x^P^oVf concerning which usages some discussion has taken place, appears 
 to me simply the difference between a general, or generic statement, and a 
 special one respecting a fact. The first Is, before besieging the place, before pro- 
 ceeding to such an act as besieging the places the second, before they besieged the 
 place, before they did this definite act of besieging the place. This principle is, 
 I believe, correct, and of wider application, cf. irpXv iafiaivnv, said of that which 
 never became a fact, ii. 67. Sia(p6povs ovras is connected of course 
 
 with (T^as, but Kriig. considers that oii Sia<j>6povs agreeing with i/ias would be 
 much more appropriate. 
 
 (e.) tiSt€ irpoo'i.ei'at — 'then to come for alliance.' It is said that reference 
 is made to the revolt of Samos, but the whole may be general and indefinite. 
 aTroyei'6fi.^voi — 'having had no part in their delinquencies.' Kriig. quotes 
 airojlyvfireai Trjs fidxris, S.eToi. ix. 6g. iyKK-n/iiruv K.r.\. Even 
 
 Bloomf. has in his last edition given up the authenticity of these words. We 
 may suppose them to have crept in from a summary of the arguments attached 
 in the margin, or to be, as Ar. suggests, a quotation from some other author 
 appended by the copyist in the way of illustration. Their antiquity is proved 
 by the imitation cited from Dio Cassius, xli. 30. It is difiicult to make anything 
 of /iiyav, which probably is corrupt. Kriig. connects afierSxas with outw— so 
 innocent. If the whole have any meaning, it must run thus, — iriXai 5c k.t.a. 
 No, but not without having long ago made you partners in their power, ought 
 they now to make you partners in its results; whereas, if their faults (the mattei-s 
 laid to their charge) are the only things in which you had no share, then (oBtu) 
 ought you not to share in the consequences. On Koiixia-avras, see Elms, ad Med. 
 V. 793. 'Koiv&a-ai et Kowiaaaeai diversa sunt, illud rem aliquam cum aliis com- 
 municare, hoe, rei alicujus particeps fieri significat.' He does not add. as he 
 might have done, that this diflference flows directly from the nature of the 
 middle voice, and may be illustrated by numberless other cases. Mr. Riddle 
 
62 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 (Terminalia ii.)interpi'etS|Uo'»'a>i' apart from the consequences, the offences sim- 
 ply, and quotes Soph. JSl. 153, oBtoi aoX /loiycf, tskvov, txos i(pdvTi Pporaii', and 
 Antig, 308, ovx v/jliv "AiStj^ fiovvos apic4frsi. 
 
 Chapter XL. — (o.) lpxil''i^''—'viecome'=:''meare come,' by the vbetorical 
 use of the present. T. K. A. But it seems to me there is a difference between 
 TlKOjxev and ipx^iiiSa., and that the latter means ' t/ou seeus now cominc/ forward.' 
 Such a scholar as Dr. Bloomfield ought not to write in so loose a style as he 
 does here. * epx6/j.e6a, present for praeterite, as often in tJ/cw, since, as every 
 one knows, it is because ^xa is derived from a preeterite, that it contains a 
 prajterite notion, or the notion of a completed action, ^/co) implying the result of 
 a {)reviou3 coming.' 
 
 (S.) ei ftpriTai, like 'si' with the indicative, assumes the hypothesis, if, as 
 must be admitted, it is specified. ^ovKerai is employed rather than 
 
 tv PoihriTat, owing to that tendency towards vivacity of narrative in the Greek 
 writers which induces them to employ the exact words of the persons or docu- 
 ment to which they refer. See 51 a. &AX* ^(ttis fi^ . . . clvt' 
 etpilvTis voiiicret. The difficulties which have been felt about this passage 
 will best be understood from the remarks of Peile and Arnold which follow. 
 The first says, I agree with Baver in thinking that the former /i^ is to be takm, 
 not with iTToiTTfpSiv, as most commentators have supposed, but with Sfirai, and 
 that not merely on account of the 3o-tij fiij iroi^ffa that follows, but because, in 
 fact, it cannot be taken otherwise ; since in the absolute predication, or in 
 Matthiie's words, the definite denial, of not fraudulently withdrawing himself 
 from another, ovk and not fiij would be required. "Oittis ^1) implying ' in every 
 case that a man shall not,' virtually expresses an excepted case ; and it is thus 
 that I understand the passage. ' The agreement does not extend 'to those who go 
 to the prejudice of one of the parties, hut is to be understood with this proviso 
 always, that a man is not fraudulently to separate himself from another, and so 
 require protection, provided also that to those who receive him, he shallnot,if they 
 are wise, occasion war in place of peace.' To this I should be inclined to reply 
 that SffTtj /t^ dnocTep&y is not n case of * absolute predication,' or * definite 
 denial ;' it suggests an hypothetical case, and does not describe a definite indi- 
 vidual. It means Hn the case of a man being found to do so,' and being in fact 
 equivalent to rf rir ^^, is therefore properly followed by /lij and not ou/c. Mat- 
 this's idea is, that where the relative refers to a definite person of whom some- 
 thing definite is denied, we have Strris oti, but when to indefinite persons con- 
 ceived of collectively by the mind, where it may be in fact rendered by siquis, 
 ItTTis /I'fl is required, cf. ch. 118. This is equivalent to the explanation above 
 given, and therefore forms no impediment to the more obvious way of taking the 
 passage. The treaty is framed, not for the benefit of those who betake themselves 
 to an alliance for the damage of others; but for such as, without depriving others 
 of the benefit of their aid, are in want of security; and for such as will not turn 
 peace into war to those who receive them, if they behave themselves, or assmning 
 that they act with discretion (cf. supra ci ei/JTjToi) sc. 01 Sejci^uei/oi. This somewhat 
 strange sense of iiroirrepav ourii/ 2iX\ov is amply supported by Kriiger's refer- 
 ences, vopii^iav &Tr6ca Uirierfev ■Kovi)(raiTO iOvti iravra airoompfitTeiv jSoiriXews, Xen. 
 Sell. iv. i, 41. (j>v\aK^v Xe^^ovfjcov rrjs Tr6\fa\ iTtoaTtpttv, Dem. xxiii. 3. I 
 
Chap. 41.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 63) 
 
 have ventured to give a version which seems to make el <r<iifpovov(rt intelligible. 
 Arnold, however (as I have hinted), Dale, and others, cannot understaind it, as 
 it occurs. ' There is a confusion in the expression, and the words ei cr<i!<j>povov(ri 
 have really nothing to do with the sentence as it is actually expressed, which 
 is suggested, as it were parenthetically, to the writer's mind, but which he did 
 not set down iu words. If written at length, it would thus run : — ' The benefit 
 of the treaty was intended for such only as should not involve those, who receive 
 them, in war, as, if you are wise,you will take care that these men do not involve 
 you,' A. Kriig., following the German translator, says, €i aacfipovomi belongs 
 to what follows. 
 
 (c.) aniveffBtti Toirovs. Kriig. makes ^;«aj sub. the subject of the verb, 
 and toiJtous object, 'punish these, not without involving you' Popp. and others 
 make toiStous the subject, and aixit/tcOcu the passive infin., which is more ob- 
 vious, though the passive occurs less often than the med. voice. 
 Sixaiol y' ioTTe. See Jelf, § 677. it,iv ye. Krvig. says, apparently 
 
 for ^kv ydp, as 76 at any rate generally stands to attract attention to some par- 
 ticular which illustrates or confirms what has gone before. T.. K. A. quotes a 
 good remark of Buttmann's on the distinction between the two phrases. ' Cum 
 quis uno argumento vel exemplo aliquid probat, potest hoc ut sufficiens adferre ; 
 quod fit particul^ yip ; potest etiam significare plura quidem posse desiderari. 
 Bed hoc unum satis grave esse, quod fit addito ye, " certe," "saltern,"' Midias, 
 p. 46. aj'oKOJX^ is tbe holding back of the hand, and not striking, 
 
 hence it meani a mere temporary truce. Kriig. remarks that except in Thuc. 
 it is rare in Attic prose. For Sid, 'ina state of,' see Jelf, § 627. i. 3, b, Arn. 
 thus states the rationale of the matter — ' 5i4 denotes the circumstances accom- 
 panying the action or situation spoken of j or, more generally, whatever is inter- 
 posed between the beginning or end of an action.' To me it seems that as 
 physically Sii would denote the course of the diameter of any spherical bodj' ; 
 so metaphysically it denotes what is as it were central to certain surrounding 
 drcumstances, which, so to speak, envelope it. So Arn.'s examples. SC Sx^ou 
 flyoi — 'to be enveloped by confusion;' 5i' a.(f<l>tt\ilas — 'to be enveloped in 
 security ; ' Si' exflpor yev4a6ai — ' to get into the middle of a quarrel ; ' and simi- 
 larly, Sitk /ioLxils epxeffSai, ii. II. 2, and cf. omnino, ch. 42 c, Sii KivSivuv. See 
 note 17 a. 
 
 (d.) ei XP^ ouToTj aiiiyeiv — 'on the question whether it be expedient to 
 aid them.' See supra, note on PoiXerai, ch. 27 a, and 40 b. (paveTr at 
 
 yap & K.T.K. ' There will be found quite as many among yonr allies who will 
 come over to us.' Jelf, §817,4. ahriv riva — every man for himself , 
 
 whoever he may be, cf. iv. 62 b; i. 43; and vi. 77* '^^'^ v6p.ov — you 
 
 will he laying down your law against your own selves, Sfc. iwl in this sense, as 
 in Dem. 52, I, e^* ^/aTi' avrois effeaSe rh eSos tovto KaTecTKevaKSres (quoted by 
 Kriig.) is the exact opposite to Trp6s, cum genitive, irphs tup ^x^"'"'" ^"'iRe -rhr 
 pS/iov riBiis. Eurip. Ale. ' It seemed established as practical international law, 
 that neither of these two great aggregate bodies should intermeddle with the 
 other, and that each should restrain or punish its own disobedient members.' 
 Orote, vol. vi. p. 66. 
 
 Chapteb XLI. — (a.) Ai/toitii^aTo — 'pleas of justice.' See Sheppard's 
 
64 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 TheojphrastuSt p. 199, note upon 5is TroKKa irapaXeXoiirori ruv diKaiojv — having 
 omitted many of the pleas which he might have urged. Kriig. quotes v. 97 ; vi, 
 79, 80, and other authors. The idea expressed by the words is evidently meant 
 to be contrasted with a^laxny x<if"Tos, which might he rendered — • a claim npon 
 your gratitude.' irphs t^ias — 'to urge in your presence/ 
 
 Sxrr' 4TtxPV<^^'"- The meaning of this word has been disputed. The only 
 passage with which a comparison has been made is ^k Se yuv)! Kdp.ri, aS iwixpeii- 
 fiei/ai [xdhtfTTa yvvaiKGS ravra Tolffi avSpdtri TroisOffi, Her. iii. 99, where the word 
 refers to familiar intercourse. We may, therefore, understand it here to imply, 
 *7ior on the other handJriends,so as to be on avery familiar footing with you^ 
 and this seems to me established by the sense of ' mutuality,' ' interchange,' 
 which has been proved to attach to M in composition. See note on i-nifiaxicr 
 ch. 44. Others have seen in the iiri, the idea of 'over andahove;' consequently 
 eTriXp^ffflm is with them ' ahuti — to malce an unfair use of you.' 
 
 (J.) veSiv yhp k.t.X. For the history see Herod, vi. 89. iirip 
 
 — ' Sefore' an uncommon usage. Kriig. It is ' beyond ' in reference to time, 
 taking the present as a stand-point — ' in times lying beyond the Persian inva- 
 Bion.' Kriig. prints it as a gloss. irphs Thv hlyivriTSiv ■K6\eiiOv. 
 
 See Herod, v. 85. ^iri/cparTjo-iy. A Thucydidsean word. Cf. 
 
 Lobeck's Fhrynichus, p. 351. That the Corinthian fleet had really no right to 
 arrogate the result to themselves, is remarked by Miiller, ^ginetica, p. 117. 
 Kriig. The American editor translates this word in a special note, ' victory,' 
 which is only worth observing, as it encourages a, sort of inaccuracy to which 
 the junior student is too prone. It is of course, as may be seen from its termi- 
 nation, the means of getting the better of, S^c. 
 
 (c.) airepioTTTot naph rh viKav — ' regardless of everything in comparison 
 with victory,' i. e. all other things when placed beside victory seem as nought. 
 This would be perhaps unnecessary to notice, had not Am. translated it — 'for 
 the sake of conquering,' and Bl. pra, or propter, for the sake of. Kriig. quotes 
 rov Kivt{)vov Kar^tppivTitre 'jrapk rh alaxp^v ri iirofie^vai. Plato, Apol. p. 28. 
 ^x' Kol TrpSTepov ix^P^^ ? — 'even supposing him to be formerly an enemy. 
 Krug. ingeniously remarks that irpSrepoi' gives to f the force of a prteterite. 
 GoU. compares the German • von jeher '—from an earlier period. t a 
 
 olxeTa k.t.\. — They dispose, or manage, worse, even their own affairs owing to 
 the excitement of the moment, i.e. the excitement naturally engendered by strife 
 with an enemy. D. has, less rightly I think — 'for the sake of their animosity 
 at the moment.' See vii. 70 j iii. 82; v. 32. 
 
 Chapteb XLII. — (a.) S>v ivSviiri94yTes, This verb (Kriig. remarks) 
 again governs the genitive, vi. 60, i, whereas the accus. most generally follows 
 it. The latter case denotes that the action of the verb simply operates upon its 
 object, as is the case with any other transitive ; in the former it is equivalent 
 to tppovTlC^iv, i. e, with the accus. it is tc ' consider,' with the genitive to ' con- 
 sider about' a thing. vfdiTfp6s tis, T. K. A. explains as equal to 
 ei t/s eVri mdrepos — 'each younger man;' rather say, and in the case of any 
 one that is younger, let him deem. a|iouTu) — attracted in number to 
 the nearest nominative. i,iiivic6ai — ' to requite,' here in a good 
 sense. Cf. iv. 63, 2. Am. and others explain the word at length, but there i» 
 
Chap. 44.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 65 
 
 no peculiarity which does not directly follow from the nature of the mid. voice, 
 which the student should elaborate for himself. ei iroAtju^irei — 
 
 'in case he shall go to war;' the most simple and naked form of stating the 
 hypothesis ; ^v iroKeix^ari, ' in the event of his going to war' seems to me to be 
 used, when reference is more particularly intended to the course of action then 
 to be pursued. See the remarks on ch. 120 c. 
 
 (i.) T(i T6 yap ^vfi^ipov iy ^ k.t.A. For expediency most follows upon 
 that course of conduct wherein a man maTces fewest mistakes ; or perhaps we 
 should say, ' commits the fewest errors ;' for Kriig. is apparently right in saying, 
 *i[aoTii\\schf am, toenigstenfehlt' rh fi4Wov, Not, I think, here, 
 
 'the future of the war' — i. e. the nature of its contingencies, though this might 
 be easily supported ; but, the ' coming of the war ' — i. e. whether it will come or 
 no. (pavfpav ^Stj k.t.X. This is of course in strong antithesis 
 
 to iv a<pat>e7 /ceiTOi — -' which is already iefore your eyes, and not a matter of the 
 future at all' ut^cA-etr — to take a little away from — i, e. in some 
 
 degree do away with. For the history, ef. i. 103. 
 
 (c.) Kaiphv exovtra — cf. Iffx^v exoy, c. 36 a, ' when possessing the (Quality of 
 opportuneness' — i. e. when seasonably timed — coming in season. rh 
 
 yap fii] ctSiKeti'. For to abstainfrom injuring one's equals is a safer source of 
 power, than to be so excited hy the prospect of immediate advantage, as to gra^sp 
 at aggrandizement surrounded hy perils. This I believe to be the general mean- 
 ing of the words. T(p ai/riKa ipavep^—' the advantage immediately 
 before your eyes ' — i. e. that of adding the Corcyrsean marine to your own. 
 5ta Ktif^vvoov ri ir\€oy exf' — is the taking more than our rights amidst 
 dangers, rh tTX. ex^"" ^^ opposed to the equally abstract notion, tIi liii aSiKe^y. 
 I cannot understand why T. K. A. should declare ' the article is used because a 
 particular unfair advantage is meant.' This is not true, and if it were, could 
 the article be absent had the advantage not been particular? Sih KivSifoiv 
 T. K. A. explains by ' through,' i. e. ' with dangers.' But see snpra, 0. 40 h; it 
 meaus such a taking, or possession, would be ' enveloped by dangers.' 
 
 ChAPTEE XLIII. — (a.) Trepfn-eirroKSTfs — having fallen into the circum- 
 stances under which we ourselves at Lacedtsmon proclaimed the principle, that 
 every man should have the chastising of his own allies — oXs is governed by the 
 participle : I do not think that Krug.'s proposition iv oh is necessary. 
 
 (i.) Tovrov iK^tvav K.r.A. iKiTmv is of course the predicate: 'this is 
 that opportunity ' — i. e. the sort of opportunity which people recognize to be the 
 one in which, &c. The Aristophanie tout' 4Ke7vov/i\\ at once occur to the reader 
 as parallel. rotavTu S4. For the corresponding lUeV, see the close 
 
 of the Corcyrsean! speech. 
 
 Chaptbb XLIV. — {a.) koI Sts. 'Etiam Sis advocate, convocatione,' indi- 
 cating, I suppose, something remarkable, though the same thing occurred iii. 36. 
 TTj iifv wpoTepif. It seems to be doubted whether these words agree with 
 nliepa or eKK-hrialtf. The former being more familiar, is perhaps more probable ; 
 but it is of little importance. tuTeyva crai'— used rather 'sensu 
 
 prfegnanti,' since the meaning is, • so altered their purpose as not to make ;' or, as 
 we say, ' changed their mends not to makes' equivarlent, therefore, to n-eTayv6vTes 
 
66 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 ^yvuirav. Cf. fierayvavai Tct -npo^eioyfiha, iii. 40. <T<pi7tv must 
 
 be connected with luixirXeii', for altliough Mattliiae supposed it to be governud 
 by IxiKevov, all the later grammarians (Rost, &o.} contend that K^Kevw (re iroierc 
 is the only legitimate construction. (u/i/iaxl"- — ^Ti/tax'o- That 
 
 these words were not, in common parlance, very positively opposed, seems 
 plain from the use of the first in the more special meaning of the second, v. 27, 
 vi. 19; and, as Pop. observes, ^ipifiaxos for iTrixovpos, c. 53, iii 70. It seems 
 evident that iirifiaxia is a defensive compact, implying the obligation to aid an 
 ally if invaded: (u/iiiax'a therefore, when opposed to it, must stand for 'offen- 
 sive alliance.' But the truth is, that the latter became a soi-t of Koii/hv Svofio, 
 and was used generically for any alliance. Dr. Donaldson, New Cratylus, § 1 74, 
 observes that the force of M in composition, where it denotes 'mutuality,' 
 ' interchange,* ' the running of one thing into another,' has not been sufficiently 
 noticed by Greek scholars. In this way, iiriiiaxia would mean ' an alliance/or 
 mutual defence.' He amply illustrates this meaning of the preposition by other 
 citations. The student should consult the section. Cf. ch. 41, iTrixpTi(^8ai, and 
 viii. 85, itra^tliOTepl^oi'Ta. &aTe Toiis aiiTovs k.t.A. Pop. remarks 
 
 that this formula passed into Latin usage ; at least he quotes ' eosdem amicos 
 atque inimicos (alibi hostes) habere.' Livy, xxix. 23, xxiv. 50, xxxvii. 1. Cf. 
 also iii. 75, iii. 10. 
 
 (i.) Kal Sis — of course for ovtus, 'even thus;' i.e. even though they were 
 to reject the proffered alliance. (vyKpoifiy a.\\ii\oi s^to wear 
 
 each other out hy mutual attrition, or conflict, as we say. Kriig. quotes ' hello 
 collidere,' Hor. JBp. i. ii. 7, and Pop. Isoc. Pan. c. 37; Dem. de Cor. § 19. 
 tpa ctffBfVfffTfpots oZffiv — 'that they might flnd the Corinthians .and the. 
 other naval powers more weak wJien they went to war with them, should any such 
 necessity arise.' The dat. are governed by KaSiarciyTai, and are in the predicate. 
 
 Chaptee XLV. — (a.) SeKa vavs. Probably quite enough for the purpose, 
 as Kriig. observes. It is not easy to see why Pericles should be suspected of 
 lukewarmness in the cause, as Bloom, (ed. prior) suggests. The story told by 
 Plutarch (Pericl. c. 29), that he meant to show contempt for the Corinthians 
 by the smallness of the number, implies an unmeaning act of impolicy, absurd 
 in so far-seeing a statesman. AaKiSai^6vios. Cimon, it seems, 
 
 had six sons, to three of whom he gave the names of the nations for whom he 
 acted as Proxenus, i. e. AoKeSaifiovioSf 'HKs'ios, and ©cttoAos. Aiirifios 
 
 the father, as Popp. supposes, of Strombichides, mentioned in the 8th book. 
 riiv ixflvav ti x'"?'"''- Bloomf. explains ej ti tSv x'^p'w ^"e'""", '^0 "J"? 
 of their places,' and remarks that such a separation of the article from its noun 
 by the governing word, or by another, though found 'chiefly m Ionic writers, ia 
 not unknown in Attic Greek, as i. 106, 4s toO x"?^"" iSidJTou. But in this case 
 Tov stands for rivos, and the instances are not parallel. With Kriig., I donbt 
 the admissibility of such a collocation in Thuc, and with him would read x^P^"' 
 — some place among the number of those belonging to them. It is impossible to 
 ace what T. K. A. means by declaring that Kriig. would read is tSiv iKuyov ti 
 X<iipiwy. The Schol. says Epidamnus is hinted at. outco — 'in this case.' 
 
 Chaptbe XliVI.- (i.) vpoaifxi^ay — ' drew near.' Hitti 5J 
 
Chap. 48.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 6-J 
 
 Xifi-^v K.T.X. A full discussion of the geographical difficulties here involved 
 would require too much space. The student may consult Bloomf., who has in- 
 corporated Col. Leake's valuable observations. The principal points made out^ 
 seem to be, that \i)i.t]v is a predicate, there is a hariowr, — i. e. a port called 
 Cheimerium, as well as the promontory ; that it is the object of the writer to 
 point out the locality of Cheimerium, though he does it awkwardly ; that Sv 
 ipThs means iroraiiHv, i. e, the rivers ; that Cheimerium is Cape Varlam ; but 
 that the Port Cheimerium is not, as was once thought, to be found in the Port 
 of Parga, but in the ruins discovered by Colonel Leake on the other side of the 
 promontory. Bloomf. translation best explains the passage : — ' Now there is a 
 port, and above it, removed from the sea, is a city called Ephyra, situated in 
 the Eleieatis of Thesprotia, alongside of which the Acherusian Lake disem- 
 bogues into the gulf, a lake deriving its name from the river Acheron, which 
 after running through Thesprotia, has its outlet into it. The river also'— I 
 suppose Thyamis, though Bl. omits the word — ' runs to seaward in a parallel 
 direction, dividing Thesprotia and Cestrine, between which rivers the promontory 
 Cheimerium juts out.' 'E(/)upT). This Ionic form instead of 'E(f/upa 
 
 is given in most texts, because the reading in the MSS. is '^ipipri, and in one 
 'E(pupr;. It appears that the grammarians declare this to be a word which 
 always retained the Ionic form. But since Strabo, Steph. Byzant., and others 
 employ "E^ipa, Popp. strongly suspects the reading The 'E(pipri of Homer is 
 of course Corinth, and Thuc. would not have borrowed the form from his 
 writings to apply it to this town, ^Iekti. Krijg. prints ^lri<ri 
 
 because of ii. 102, and iv. 103, but he admits that the best MSS. have eftiin. 
 dvexei — raises itself up, iv. 53, 3 ; vii. 34, 2. Kriig. Cf. Hermann on Soph. 
 <Edip. Col. 674. 
 
 Chaptee XL VII. — (a.) Sii^ora — 'The swine pastures ;' now St. Nicolo 
 di Sivota. According to Leake, they lie five or six miles S. of the mouth of the 
 Thyamis. 
 
 (b.) ZaKvvBiaiv. This seems at variance with what is said of the Corcy- 
 neans, c. 31. We must therefore suppose that they had made an application at 
 the same time as they sent an embassy to Athens, and were successful. Sue 
 Pop. in his larger edition. 4v rp ^tretpai — i. e. the mainland close by 
 
 the Sybota. tjj T}'!reipaj z= rij Kara KepKvpay ^irtiptp, for in the time of Thucydides 
 the word was not yet a proper name. Pop. See notes on iii. 54. The Chaonians 
 are principally the barbarians meant. 
 
 Chapteb XL VIII. — (o.) rpiavrificpuv a-irla — 'provisions for three days.' 
 Krug. compares ii. 23; iii. i ; vi. 345 and Xen. Sell. v. 3. 21. This sufficiently 
 proves how little the ancient triremes were calculated for anything like a long 
 voyage. ^s ivX vav/iaxiav. We have the dative, iii. 4, vi. 34, 
 
 but this is a case where small reliance can be placed upon MSS. The as, in 
 cases like this, seems to me to indicate adherence to a common practice, drew 
 up as ships are wont to do when going into action, or, at any rate, that the act 
 described by the verb is compared mth, and referred to a similar class of acts ; 
 even us h TiculSas $ovx6fi.evos cTpttTfveaBai, Xen. Anah. i. 1, 11, means 'such 
 an expedition as would be organized against the Pisidians.' T. K. A. explains 
 
 V 2 
 
68 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 thus : ' iis does not perceptibly weaken the certainty of their determinatioti = 
 with the purpose of engaging,' from which one does not gain much informa- 
 tion. tAcoi/tcs. Take this with KaBopua-i, while so sailing, catch 
 sight of. fi^Tfiipovs — in the open sea, i. e. not hugging the coast. 
 Though a fayourite with Thuc, it is not, as Krug. remarks, employed by Herod, 
 "or Xenopbon. 
 
 (b.) Tc'Ar;— here ' divisions,' or 'squadrons,' cf. ii. 8i. Of cavalry, ii. 22. 
 Kriig. rh Se &\\o k.t.\. — ' Along all the rest of the line thet/ 
 
 themselves tooTc place,' or ' extended,' cf. iii. 107. Pop. would rather say 'reli- 
 quum spatium ' than ' reliquam aciem,' because it appears from the next eh. that 
 the Corcyraeans also occupied portion of the right. We must not, then, under- 
 stand rh &\\o as entirely exclusive of the right division. eidwiiov 
 Kipas. Remark the absence of the article. This case comes under those where 
 the article is not applied to things sufficiently familiar and definite not to need 
 it,— as $acri\fis, 'ItrBuds, &c. See note, ch. 8 a. So we say ' right,' • left,' not 
 always 'the right,' 'the left.' 
 
 Chaptee XLIX. — (a.) rh a-nine'ta. The signal was a sort of flag raised 
 upon a mast or pole. The opposite term to denote the lowering of the signal in 
 order to put an end to the action, is KoTeo-Trdo-fli), i. 63, 2. The Macedonians 
 used !i crimson flag for the same purpose, Plut. Philop. 6. Similarly among 
 the Romans, Ammian. xxvii. 10, 9; Caesar de B. ff. ii. 20; Kriig. 
 K a pre pa — the regular term for an obstinately-contested combat, not found, 
 says Kriig., in Xenopbon. oiix ip-olas, sc. napTepa by a sort of 
 
 zeugma, twt so much by the science of the parties. Bl. version approved by 
 T. K. A., ' less excellent,' ' meritorious,' does not seem desirable. Kriig. says, 
 ' short for fiif 5e, Trt^o/xaxif.' 
 
 (b.) TrpotrfiiKoiev. Bekker prefers this to Trpoa^aKKoiev, which occurs in 
 the MSS. But it does not seem necessary to alter the present, ' when they happen 
 to lay alongside of one another,' i. e. in the nautical sense of * laying a ship 
 aboard of another.' The optative of course expresses ' indefinite frequency,' as 
 7ri€^oij'TO infra. a.Tre\vot/TO — * got clear.' KaTaffravris 
 
 iliixovTO. Bl. is right in saying, ' the sense is, maintained a pugna stataria,' 
 rather than D. in translating, ' they set to, and fought ;' it implies that they 
 formed into a regular set array, like a body of infantry. SicktAoi. 
 
 This evolution, Bl. seems to think, corresponds to the modern evolution of 
 ' breaking the line ' employed so successfully by Rodney and Nelson, and the 
 original suggestion of which has been so much controverted. The object of this 
 is to destroy a portion of the enemy's fleet, which is thus cut off from the rest. 
 But does not the plural here indicate a single manoBuvre often repeated, which 
 could not be the case with such breaking the line ? I should therefore be in- 
 clined to accept the original explanation, that, viz., it was a breaking through 
 the enemy's line, in order by a rapid turn backwards to smash the oars, or sides, 
 or stem of the opposing vessel, ii. 83, 89 ; vii. 36, ;o. Compare Livy's descrip- 
 tion quoted by Pop., ' Libero inter ordines discursu prtetervecti in puppim iin- 
 petum dabant,' xxxvii. 24. 
 
 (c.) SfSi6Tfs OL iTTpaTjiyoi. Had the construction proceeded smoothly, 
 we should have had iti 'ATxiical eijes still continued as nom. to ouk Jlpx<»'> but 01 
 
Chap. 50.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 6g 
 
 tTTparriyol is substituted, because they were tlie responsible parties in the 'Att. 
 vrjes, and the real causes of the delay. Krtig. places a stop at ^px"", thereby 
 making SfSUres ol aTpar. a sort of nom. pendens. Ti)ii iip6jil)itmv. 
 
 See i. 45. 
 
 ((?.) Tos tTKiivhs' 4p'l}fiovs. In this collocation, as in ry Si^ri airaia-rtfi, iv, 
 122, Ta7s vavtrl Koi<pais, vii. 37, rhv Kri-nov /x^yav, vii. 70, we have what Dr. 
 Donaldson calls secondary predication, and the whole is equivalent to — 'they 
 set fire to the tents, and the tents were empty.' The idiom is of course familiar to 
 every scholar ; but I have some doubt whether this mode of explaining it suffi- 
 ciently points out the fact that the adjective or participle so placed contains 
 the cause or condition of the whole predication : as Thv i,vSpa yf\d(ravTa ervire 
 is not — ' he struck the man, and the man was laughing ;' but, he struclc the man 
 because he laughed. Here I should render, ttey set fire to the tents as they found 
 them empty. D.'s ' iurnt the deserted tents' may be defended by the ambiguity 
 of the English idiom, but should not have been given in a version intended for 
 students, as it might mislead. See more on the subject, notes on i. 36 a; 
 iii. 57 a. epri/aos is iu Thuc. of two, and also of three terminations. 
 
 Si-iipTraa-ai'. BI. way of accounting for the force of the prep, is probably 
 correct. They searched through (81a) and carried off, ^piraffav, any articles ; as 
 infra, viii. 31 and 36. 
 
 (e.) oircf — 'from an originally smaller number,' i. e. no, see ch. 47, which 
 even united with the ten from Athens would not equal the Corinthian fleet of 
 150. See ch. 46. airpotjyao'ia-Tws. Said properly of an act which 
 
 required no Trp6fpa(rts to excuse it ; therefore it means more 'openly' and 'un- 
 hesitatingly.' \an-irpus, i^avtpus. Cf. n. ';,' clearly,' indisputably, 
 Kriig. cf. Xaimpi. vIkij, vii. 55. ipyov eXxc'o — 'set to viork' lit. 
 held himself to it, so in German, ' Otriff das WerTc eifrig an.' Sie- 
 KiKpiTo. There mas no longer any distinction between friend and foe. Bl. illus- 
 trates by St. James ii. 4 (Bl. ref. is wrong), ou SiexpidriTe iv iavroXs, where the 
 meaning obviously is — Maveyou not made invidious distinctions among your- 
 selves 1 €S toCto avd.yKTis — ' to such a pitch of necessity ^ ' eo 
 necessitatis.' Kriig. explains ' to such an inevitable collision' comparing h tovto 
 ai/dyKTjs 6 \6yos ^/cei. Plat. Thecst. 170 0. Compare is rovro ^vfi<popa.Sy iii. 59* 
 €s TOVTO 5vaTvxi<^s, vii. 86. The usage of li/ceVetrej/ in this impersonal way is 
 elsewhere, says Krug., confined to the meaning equivalent to |uce'/37;. There 
 seems little authority for ^vveneirov accepted by many editors. Pop. suggests 
 that irdfTa may be supplied to ^uyeVeirey from ouSeV. The Schol understands 
 Ta irpdyfiaTa. 
 
 Chapter L. — {a.) to a-Kdipri k.t.K. ' They did not attempt to lash fast 
 and tow after them the hulls of the vessels which they happened to sink,' The 
 opt. expresses the indefiniteness of the whole : the aorist is used because there 
 is no intention on the part of the writer to connote the exact time of the action 
 of the verb. Entertaining those views on the nature of the aorist, expressed 
 elsewhere, I do not attribute so much importance as others to the controversy 
 maintained between Madvig and Kriiger in their Greek Grammars, whether the 
 aor. optative in non-hypothetical relative clauses, be a prateritum, or no. 
 Krii". would naturally quote the present case in confirmation of his opinion 
 
70 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 that it is. A. directs attention to tlie fact that KaTatiireiav only implies a 
 partial sinking, or waterlogging of the ships. This is clear from Herod, viii. 
 90, and from the famous case of Arginusas, where some of the Athenian com- 
 manders after the action proposed rXun M t4j KaraSeSvKvias vavs, xal robs iit' 
 avTtav avdptiiTrovs, SieKtrKeovr e s is of course not used in the tech- 
 
 nical sense of SUkwKovs in last ch,, hut simply — ' sailing through,' i. e. the scene 
 of action. 
 
 (h.) "EXAijo-i K.T.X. With reference to the naval actions in the Persian 
 war — iieylffrri Tthv nph avTTJ^, Cf. i. i a. &no7ot seems strange for 6ir6Tepoi, but 
 perhaps it is meant to express the greatness of the confusion, rendering it im- 
 possihle that anything of the character of the vessels could be made out. 
 
 (d.) Kai oirai fffan Aonrai. The Kal has been very offensive to editors. 
 But Pop. explanation seems satisfactory : the irXii'i/wi are those which came sea- 
 worthy out of action ; but beside these, ten had never been in action at all, for 
 the Corcyrseans had 120 triremes, see ch. 25, and of these only no were em- 
 ployed in the battle. Engelman, thinking this 'very obscure,' proposes to 
 render Kai ' viz.,' so that irXiii>oi and Konrai should mean the same ships. This 
 use of Kal I cannot but consider very dubious. He supports it by rotoiTtay Kol 
 aKowriijtv afiapTTjfLoiTuv, Plato, Apol. p. 26 a, which he says is only used to 
 denote one class of a^apT^/taro. But I am not sure that it only denotes one 
 aspect of them ; and the word roioiiTor, owing to its collocation in such phrases 
 as Toiavra koI irapaTr\'f](ria, has a particular usage which renders it impossible 
 for us to quote the above phrase as any authority for such a use of /col in the 
 text. Of the other reference to iii. 26, to tc ':rp6Tepof TeTfirifieva Kal cf Ti 
 ^j8e)3Aa(rT^«6i /col Stro iv rots trplv ^iTfioXats irapeAeAeiiTTO, we can only say — 'Nil 
 agit exemplum quod litem lite resolvit.* 
 
 (e.) iviTTaitl^vta'T 0. * Etsi Graeci non iraiui/a sed naiava aSeiv dicunt, tamen 
 promiscufe Tra.iavi(a et iraiant^a usurpant.' Stanley ad JEsch. S. e. T. v. 274. 
 The MSS. here as elsewhere exhibit both. wpi/xvav, sc. eirl irpv/iivav 
 
 inpo^ovTO, rowed sternward. The object of this evolution sometimes, was to 
 gain space for returning to the charge, and sometimes, as here, to present the 
 least vulnerable part of the ship to the enemy. Cf. Herod, viii. 84. Thuc. 
 i. 51 ; iii. 78; vii. 36. Kriig. cf. the military phrase iirlTriia avax<->pe7i'. Xen. 
 Anah. v. 3, 31. oXi^oi ajiiveiv, 'too few to aid' Cf. 2, 61, b; 
 
 5, III b. This sort of comparative usage of the positive is not peculiar to 
 Greek. Thus we might ssc^—few for the purpose. Cf. 6\lyovs ehai rij trrpaTi^ 
 Tfj W^iSav (rvii$a\4eiv. Her. vi. 109, and again vii. 207. See Jelf, § 666. Matt. 
 §448. 
 
 Chapter LI. — (a.) liuWov 4k toO &(|)a»'oCs— 'more than to the Corin- 
 thians.' ^K ToD oiJjai'oCs— adverbially. Pop. quotes as similar cases from Thuc, 
 ix roS (/JovepoD, iv. 79, ix tov irpotfiamvs, iii. 43, and othei'S. iBaiiia(ov — 
 
 wondered at the Corinthians baching water, as we might say. See Jelf, § 495, 
 obs. 3. vijes iKf'ii'ai ^TriirAEoucrii'— as often, a transition to the 
 
 words actually used, 'yonder are ships sailing up to us.' See ch. 40 b. 
 ^vvetTK^TaC^ — 'darkness was closing in.' 
 
 (b.) ^TcAe lira is yixra. See note iii. 78, ended at night, i e. lasted up to 
 iiight and then ended, eh. 58 b. 'AvSoki'Stis. This is the well- 
 
Chap. 53.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 7 1 
 
 known Andocides the orator, who afterwards played so important a part in 
 reference to the mutilation of the Hermse. &pfit<TavTo,sc. at vfies, 
 
 ' Subjectum enlm mutatum ex medio apparet/ Pop. But I am not convinced 
 that the word cannot mean, ' brought their ships to moorings,' without any such 
 awkward change of suhject. at e^Koa-t vTJes anh rav 'ABrjvuVf 
 
 avTai. In this and some other passages of Thucydides, as iv. 9. 1, vi. 96. 3, 
 vii. 41. I, tlie article seems used in somewhat an anomalous manner. I fully 
 agree with Engelman that to alter the passages, as Kriig. would in this case, is 
 futile, for how can we account for their existence ? The correction of them, 
 which we find in some few MSS., is much more probahly owing to the hand of 
 the transcriber. It only remains, therefore, to conclude that Thucydides is 
 somewhat peculiar in his way of employing the article. Now if a writer were 
 to say, ' The ships from Athens, those, I mean, which Glaucon commanded,' no 
 one would express any surprise. But here we have ' these' instead of thos e.- 
 May not this, however, he ascribed to the same principle of composition upon 
 which, as above, we have a transition to the directa actio in vrj^s iKuvat k.t.X., 
 the narrator vividly entering into the action, and speaking from that stand- 
 point as it were ? ■ 
 
 Chapter LII. — (5.) ray fi€v vavs &pavres . . . vf^^x^-C^^' Here is a 
 slight anacolouthon, for either we ought to have read ras fjtXv vavs ^pav, iiffvxa^ov 
 5e, or niv should have been omitted, Pop. But Kriig. remarks that latv belongs 
 rather to the general thought than to any one of the separate ideas, and may 
 be supposed to connect itself with rov Se olfrtoSe vXov in the next section, vavs 
 &pavTfs is not so common as vavaly dpayres, but Kriig. cf. Herod, viii. 57, 
 aTralpavfft riis vias awi SaKa/uvos. The ships themselves were drawn up on 
 shore, therefore ayKvpas need not be substituted. iincncevit — 'the 
 
 means of refitting.' Pop. says, in the same way as TrepiTelx.Kris is the 'means of 
 fortifying,' but surely, in this latter case, it is the termination in -o-is, which 
 denotes the o^era<io»; so ?i\so viith aXaiins, ' the means of capturing,' Phil. 61. 
 €v x'^p'^V ip'hiJ-i'- The junior student should note the effect of the article's 
 being absent ; it conveys the reason why there was no l-winKtvii, but scarcely 
 say with D. 'in so deserted a place.' rov Tr\ov for rrfSf rov n\ov 
 
 Sttt). Cf. 1 . 68, Kriig. But see Jelf, § 496. 
 
 Chapteb LIII. — (a.) Ke\-f]Tiov, explained by the Schol. fiixphii nXotdpiov 
 airh iiiTa.(popas Tov KeKriTos 'Itcirov, $ eh aw^p ^iri/caflTjTai. As the Ke'\rjs was the 
 riding-horse (light horseman, says T. K. A.), the small light skiff containing 
 an individual was so named metaphorically. Kriig. cf. iv. 1 20 ; viii. 38 ; Herod. 
 yi;j. Q < &i/iv KTipvKeiov. ' This was a straight stick of wood 
 
 or of metal encircled around with two serpents, having their crests opposite to 
 each other, so as to bear the form of the letter *. Thus it answered to the 
 caduceus of Mercury. Sometimes, however, instead of serpents, it was encircled 
 by sprigs of olive, indicative of a desire for reconciliation,' Bloomf. ' Thus it 
 would be equivalent to our flag of truce, and the sending a message without it, 
 ■would be meant to imply that the Corinthians did not admit themselves to be 
 at war with Athens. irelpav Troi^a-aa-Bai — to try to find out what 
 
 their purpose was. Triix^^avT es, on the principle of ' qui facit per 
 
72 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 alium, facit per se,' the legates are regarded as the mouth-pieces of the prin- 
 cipals, from whom they come, cf. Si4^6iipi, ii. 69, ad fin. inroySas 
 
 KvofTes, may be much more emphatic, sine articulo, are breakers of treaties, 
 but, see ch. 48 b. 
 
 (S.) A.U6T6. This Bloomf. regards as a negligence of expression for Kveiv: 
 to me it seems a very natural anacolouthon, and quite in the manner of Thucyd, 
 ' and are breaking treaty too.' 
 
 (p.) Ti fiiv. Upon any explanation which I have seen the likv is misplaced, 
 for the (rTpaT6T!iiov is not contrasted with anything. It may be a mere 
 carelessness of expression, the writer's real intention being to contrast the 
 Coreyraeans and Athenians, or, as Kiiig. suggests, it may have crept into the 
 text from what has gone before. avf^i-qaev — 'called out to layhold 
 
 of and Mil them,' Kriig. Cf. Xen. Anab. i. 8. 12, KCpoj ifiia iynv rb (TTpoTcD^o. 
 
 Chaptee LIV.— (a.) Iv' of/iou.not ^tt" oIhoc. Therefore, 'homewards,' i.e. 
 in the direction of a point; with the accusative, right up to a point, as eh. 30 a; 
 hence I imagine its common signification of ' hostility,' which in some grammars 
 and lexicons is given as the primary one. 
 
 (S.) viKpoiis avfl\ovTo. See note, ch. 8 a. The absence of the article is 
 explicable upon the principle often noticed of its natural omission in the descrip> 
 tion of any familiar process, where the object of the verb's action is at once 
 intelligible without particular definition, — e.g. * weigh anchor,' 'shoulder arms,' 
 * furl eails,' and the like. So * to take up dead ' describes so natural and neces- 
 sary a process, that no article is required. Cf. iv. 4; iv. 54; v. 10; vii. S ; viii. 
 106. i^evexBeyra. The neuter, because the corpses were regarded 
 
 as without personality — mere things. Kriig. cf. oVo ii. 92, and Xen. Anab 
 i. a., 8. ffiiTTe Kal ravdyia k.t.X. This would of course, as in 
 
 the similar case on land, indicate that victory rested with them. 
 
 Chaptee LV. — (a.) iv Bepainia cTx*'*' — * treated them with cfreat courtesy 
 and attention.' Krug. cf. ii> aWtif ex^'v, v. 60; vii. 81. On the result, see 
 iii. 70' irpofnroffia-ftav — ' might brinff over to them.' On this some- 
 
 what peculiar word, see the note on iii. 47 a, and in Sheppard's Theophrasttts, 
 c. i., Trepl eipoivtia?. All the usages of the word appear to me directly deducible 
 from the primary meaning, to bring over to ; cf . Trpoa^iroiiiaaino, last chapter ; 
 ' took to themselves,' i. e. claimed. 
 
 (S.) vepiylyiifTai. A. taking the prepos. in a not unusual sense, cf. ch. 
 2 b, translates * thus overlived the war,' i. e. thus came out of the contest with the 
 Corinthians undestroyed. And I am not at all sure that he is wrong. Kriig., 
 however, and others, contend that it is 'got the upper hand.' Cf. ii. 65. The 
 connexion between ' superesse ' and ' superare ' shows how closely the ideas are 
 united. atpiatv — because logically 01 Kopfi/flioi is the subject of the 
 
 sentence. 4v c'TrovSaTs. Eemark the absence of the article, ' in a 
 
 time of treaty ;' sc. the thirty years' truce. But see chap. 54 b. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — (a.) Si d(t>opa — 'points of difference,' ot points in aispute; 
 nence ' causes of quarrel.' More frequent, says Kriig., in Thuc. than elsewhere. 
 Cf. i. 67, 68. ■apaacivTuv. This word, in the sense of ' luor/fciBy,' 
 
Chap. 57.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 73 
 
 'scheming,' may, as A. remarks, be compared with our own expression 'to 
 practise,' and ' practises.' See note on iii. 56. Krilg. remarks tliat it is most 
 common with Sttchs and an indicative, iii. 4, 70. TlaX\iivT]s — 
 
 formerly called Phlegra, now the Gate of Kassandhra (says Col. Leake). Be- 
 tween the Gulf of Therma and the Strymonic Gulf, the whole district called 
 Chalcidice juts out into the sea with three promontories, of which this lies most 
 to the west. Consult Grote vi. 90, 91, who remarks that the Athenian empire 
 was much more secure over the islands than over the seaports situated on the 
 continent, as the latter would have a much better chance of receiving aid from 
 some neighbour powerful by land. ^6pov uTroTeAeTs — 2. e. pay- 
 
 ing a fixed sum annually, instead of a contingent of ships. See ch. 29, and the 
 commentators on Arist. Vesp, 66g. rh is UaKKiivrii' Te<xos. 
 
 The effect of this would be to leave standing the fortifications towards the 
 mainland, but also to leave the town destitute of defence on the side where it 
 was accessible from the sea — i. v, from Athens. iiriBrnjiiovpyovs. 
 
 ' This term and Aa/xiovpySs was applied to the chief magistrates of the Pelopon- 
 nesians, expressive of their doing the service of the people.' See Livy, xxxii. 
 22, and Arist. Fol. iv. 4, p. 140. Asclepiades considers the prepos. superfluous. 
 GoU. understands it to mean 'extra magistrates sent as colleagues to the 
 Ariijuovpyoi.' Arn. It is possible 4irl may only have the sense of superintend- 
 ence, as in iirlfTKoiros. For the nature of the magistracy, cf. Jliiller, Dorians, 
 i. 2, 46, who, however, seems to interpret ' upper magistrates.' ' The words to 
 eV! ©paKTjs denote generally the towns in Chalkidike, places in the direction or 
 on the skirts of Thrace, rather than parts of Thrace itself.' Grote, vi. 90. Mr. 
 Shilleto makes it embrace Chalcidice, with its three projecting tongues of hind, 
 all the Hellenic colonies stretching eastward along the coast, and terminating 
 at some imknown point to the W. of the Hellespont. Its western boundary was 
 Macedonia, and it included several islands in the .fflgean, among which Thasos 
 was certainly one. Thucydides, or Grote, p. 10. 
 
 Chaptee LVII. — (a.) <pavepS>s Ziiipopoi — ' openly at variance.' 
 'IlepSiK/tas— the line of the Kings of Macedon, from their founder, Perdiccas, 
 may be seen Herod, viii. 139. They were reputed to be descended from 
 Temenus, that one of the Heracleida: who at the return of his family with the 
 Dorians, obtained possession of Argolis, and on the strength of this descent 
 they were allowed to be Greeks. Herod, v. 22. But the Macedonian people 
 were regarded at best as half-barbarians. Tbueyd. iv. 1 24, 1 26.' Arn. 
 MaKe56vav without the article, and means certain Macedonians on the sea- 
 coast ; see ii. 99, t^s xira MaxiSoptas. Perdiccas was to have reigned jointly 
 with bis brother Philip and his cousin Derdas, but attempted to deprive them 
 of their provinces. Besides these, says Pop., the brothers of Derdas, c. 59 ; 
 Pansanias, c. 61 ; and Augustus, son of Philip, are mentioned as rivals to Per- 
 diccas. iireiroKefiuro — 'had been made a foe of' 
 ivavTiavfjkivois — 'acting together in opposition to him.' The construction, 
 though unusual, verborum pugnaudi usu defenditur. Cf. Pint. Cleom. vii. 3. 
 irpoo-eiroitrTo. The preceding re would induce us to expect irpoo-iroioiJ/iecoi, 
 but it is quite in Thuc. manner to pass thus to the finite verb. Pop. cf . ii. 29 ; 
 iv. 4, 72. 
 
74 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 (5.) Sfiopa ivTa -rh x'^f^"- Many MSS. omit the ri, which most editors 
 enclose in brackets. If it stand, it must mean, I presume, ' If he could get pos- 
 session of the places, being as they were, close to Potidaa.' IVcko — 
 denoting the final cause, 'for the sake of 
 
 (o.) XaXKiScCo-i. According to Col. Leake (N. Greece, iii. 54), these 
 Chalcidseans occupied the whole of the great peninsula south of the Mount 
 Ehortiatzi, though Chalcidice itself was originally the name of a much smaller 
 district. When Xerxes was retreating from Greece, he left behind him Arta- 
 bazus ; the latter subdued Olynthus and placed it in the hands of the Cbalcidians- 
 Ever after, the Bottiaeans are found in close alliance with them, cf. ii. 79. 
 5r/)0KaTa\o/n3c£i'f IK— properly a military word, meaning, 'to anticipate the 
 enemy in occupying some position.' See ch. 33 c. 
 
 (rf.) atiTov — so. Perdiccas, cf. i. 59. /1€t' i,\Xav Se'/to. Eleven 
 
 generals are quite an unheard-of number, and, besides, many more than are 
 suitable for one thousand men, to say nothing of the five who follow, c. 61. 
 The very ingenious conjecture of Kriig., ^6t' fiXXwi/ S', ' with four others,' gets 
 over the diBicultv ; and they who know most about numerals in MSS. will 
 make least difficulty in accepting it. It is no valid defence of the old reading 
 to sa3' with Am., that Pericles was employed with nine colleagues in the Samian 
 war, c. 116, for Thnc. there only says that Pericles was one of the ten regular 
 (TTparTiyoi of the state, SeKarou avTov crrpaTtiyovvTos, and not that all ten were 
 on duty in the same expedition, and with the same force. The five mentioned, 
 i>. 61, would make the number exactly ten. 
 
 Chaptee LVIII. — (a.) iirpaaaov. Most editors agree with Pop. in mark- 
 ing this as spurious. If it be genuine, says Kriig., lKB6vTfs — iiri must be con- 
 sidered an anacolouthon of parenthetical character ; or after iireiS-l], we may add 
 with one MS. a Se. iK iroWov — * after a long time,' after much 
 
 negotiation. iiriax^TO. The majority of MSS. have uTreo-xoxTo, 
 
 which Kriig. in his notes appears to accept : for neuter plurals which stand for 
 persons, individual agents, sometimes follow the law of all plurals. Cf. note on 
 ch. 126; iii. 82; vii. 57. rh, rekii — ' the authorities.' Arn. has a 
 
 good note on the origin and various meanings of reXeo), as traced by Damn. Zex. 
 Homeric, and Wachsmuth. They seem to resolve themselves into the notion of 
 ' completing and perfecting,' bringing to a culminating point. Tiire 
 
 5^ — then at last, Karh rhy xaiphv rovTov — when they met with 
 
 this favourable crisis. The first, says Kriig., denotes only the time, the second, 
 the favourable conjunction of circumstances. 
 
 (i.) ravTTiv is the object, (jlIcoi r6\iv Icrxuphv the predicate, and is therefore 
 sine articulo. avoiKdroo-floi ^r 'OAuveoi' is not an uncommon, 
 
 though elliptical way of speaking—' to break up their establishments and settle 
 in Olynthus.' See nearly the same notion, Arist. Aves, 1 340, cf. ch. 51b. 
 rris yfis — this, says Kriig., depends upon irepi riiv Xi^u-nv B6k$tiv, wherewith 
 one may mentally supply t(. The Lake of Bolbe seems now to be called 
 Besicia. Henceforward Olynthus became the principal Chalcidsean city. It 
 was at a subsequent period taken by Philip II., its inhabitants sold for slaves, 
 and its walls razed to the ground. Bloomf., who considers that avci implies • up 
 the country,' shows that Olynthus was not, as represented in the maps, on the 
 
Chap. 6 1.] NOTES ON THUCYD IDES, 75 
 
 sea shore, but about five miles inland, in a N.E. direction. ^Saite 
 
 ve'/ieo-Sai — gave it to themtoinhabit, or occupy and cultivate, whether hy farm- 
 ing or grazing, and to receive the fruits thereof. Such is the full import of the 
 phrase. Bloomf. 
 
 Chaptee LIX. — (a.) ri ettI @p^Kris. See Grote as quoted above, c. 56. 
 KCLTaffravTiS 4iro\eixovv. Either, says Popp., ' quum pervenissent,* or * quum 
 consedissent.' I should prefer the latter, talcing the words ia a military sense — 
 * when they had established themselves there,' i. e. secured a base for their opera- 
 tions. &iia>6ev—from the upper, or, itiner country, 
 
 Chapteb LX. — (a.) Trepl T(y x'^P^V- Thucyd. uses both the dative and 
 gen. freely in this meaning. Dat. i. 67, 74, 119, &e. Gen. iii. 102, and with 
 <po$i7(Tdai, viii. 93. tous Travras, in all; the German idiom 'im 
 
 G-anzen' corresponds. 
 
 (J.) 'ApiiTTeuj. 'Apio-Tcaj appellatur, Herod, vii. 137. 'ASei- 
 
 fidyTov. Est Adeimantus, o 'n.Kiirov, Kopiv9ios (rrpaTT]y6s, de quo Herod, viii. 
 5. 59, 61, 94. Pop. eirtT^Seios — is *a fit and proper person for 
 
 anything;' hence it naturally slides into our meaning of 'proper,' except in 
 such cases as Xen. Anab. i., where it is 'jit and proper to he beaten;' here it de- 
 notes accordance in political sympathies, and is equivalent to ipiKos. Cf. i. 95 ; 
 ii. 49; viii. 47. 
 
 (c.) T^ara-apaKotrT^ — rsciTapdKovTa y}^4pais Sffrepoi' would have been more 
 usual, but we have rpiTT] ^/uepct lio-Tepoy, viii. 24, and so in Latin * tertio anno 
 post,' as well as ' tribus annis post.' Popp. We may add that Anglic^ — ' forty 
 days after,' and ' the fortieth day after,' are alike used. 
 
 Chaptee LXI. — (a.) it!nrap6vTas — 'had come up besides.' Kriig. cf . Xen. 
 ji»aJ. iii. 4, 30. iavriiv — sc. of Athenian citizens. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 (6.) avayKdiav — 'compulsory,' i.e. such as circumstances compelled them 
 to make. Cf. exactly the same use of necessarius, Liv. xxii. 2, ' necessarium 
 cublle,' and of avayKoios, i. go ; ii. 70- 
 
 (c.) airavicTTavTaL e/c Tr)s MaK^Sovias—'hreah up their encampment 
 for the purpose of leaving Macedonia.' So, says Poppo, the words must be taken, 
 as it is impossible that Bercea was not within the limits of Macedonia. The 
 town, it will be remembered, is honourably mentioned in the Act. Apost., and 
 is still called 'Veria.' iTTiarpi'^iavrfs — 'they made a turn bach' 
 
 — ' mare versus,' says Popp. ; ' gegen Osten,' Kriig. Both Arn. and Bloomf. 
 understand Thuc. to mean — ' they turned back again into the regular route 
 from Pydna to Potidaea, from which they had deviated in their attempt to sur- 
 prise Bercea.' Now, as the latter place lay in a westerly direction, and some- 
 what inland, such a turn must have brought their line of march toward the east 
 and the sea. All the explanations, therefore, come to much the same thing. 
 The student should, if anxious for further discussion, refer to Grote's elaborate 
 note, vol. vi. p. 95. But Pliigers in Cobet's Miscellany has pointed out from 
 .^schines, ii. 27, that there was a town called Srpe'iJ/a in this neighbourhood; 
 read therefore M Srpeif/av, which at once explains tov x"/"'"" — a brilliant cor- 
 rection. The Ko! before Treipiirat/Tes, which Popp. dislikes and Bloomf. would 
 
76 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 obliterate, ought I think to stand. It seems to me to resemble the <col in iXirovTis 
 Ti Kal Kivivviifiv, and such phrases, j^e^ not before having made an attempt upon 
 the place. Cf. ireipay raiv Teix''"', vii. I2, and T^sNiirofaj ireipSy, iv. 70. 
 X M p £ s — here not in its usual sense, but ' besides,' which meaning it appears to 
 derive from the notion of — ' without counting this or that.' Cf. with Kriig. ii. 
 13; iv. 97; iii. 17. i. Gigonis is described by the Schol. as "^ promontory 
 between Macedonia and Pallene. Leake places it near ' Apanormi promonto- 
 rium.' ePSo/iriKoyra, made up with the forty of Callias and the 
 
 thirty of Archestratus, c, 57. 
 
 Chapteb LXII.— (o.) wf>hs 'OxivBov. The majority of MSS. have vph 
 'O\iv9ov ; but the allies were not encamped in front of Olynthus ; nor yet, says 
 I'opp., close to Olynthus, irphs 'OAwfl^j, but under the walls of Potidsea, on the 
 side that looTced towards Olynthus, and this idea can only be expressed by vphs 
 ^OK^vQov. So iii. 21, irphs TWaraiaiv', iv. 31, irphs rov Ki^evos; iv. 130, ri "irphs 
 "ZKidivrii. €|qj T7)y IT (J\ fees — to prevent the men from straggling 
 
 into the town of Potidaea. Cf. iii. 6 ; v. 115; vi. 50. 
 
 (4.) €xo>'Ti. The junior student may remark a good instance of a not un- 
 common Trphs t}> tr7jfi.aLv6iJ.epov construction, i, e. because rod 'Apiffreus r] yvtep.!} 
 ^v is equivalent to eSo^e rip 'Apiffnt, the participle stands in the dative. In- 
 stimces are numerous. Popp. gives one from Homer, lib. xiv. 139 — 'Axl^A^os 
 oKohv KTjp yvB^t — depKofi€vcj). Tiy lff6fi$ . . . I|q) i(r6fiov. This 
 
 appears contradictory to the common usage of the article. It is to be explained, 
 I think, by supposing that in the second case Thuc. uses the expression as 
 employed in the common parlance of the locality, where the article would be 
 omitted, just upon the same principle as it was omitted before the Isthmus of 
 Corinth by the Southern Greeks (i. 108 ; ii. 9 ; iv. 42), and as it is omitted 
 before thoroughly familiar objects by ourselves. See note, ch. 8 a, and ch. 54 a. 
 Elsewhere, in this part of the narrative, Thuc. describes it as a stranger • cum 
 articulo.' Cf. veKpobs avei\ovTO. Cf. u. 54. cr^as. Aristeus and 
 
 his own troops. iroieii/ — to maJeethem to be — bring them between, 
 
 i. 109 c. MoKeSiivos — here an adjective. Poppo. Cf. "E\\7)j'es, 
 
 Xen. Anab. vi. 3, 26. 
 
 (0.) Tof/j VlaKiiivas liririas. This wbrd appears to be used adjectively 
 here and in c. 63, 01 MoKeS((ves Imriis. So also we have 01 "EAATji/es neKTaaTal, 
 Xen. Anab. vi. 5, 26, and such phrases as Titv"Y.WaSa. yKatrtrav. 
 
 Chapter LXIII. — (a.) diroT^pwire ZiaKivSuvfiffy x^^P^tras — in which 
 of the two directions he should run the risk of going. The subj. after ^nSpijffe is 
 given by Bekker for the future, — veiirei. It is remarked that x'l'P^"'''"' might 
 have been employed, or the word altogether omitted, as in vii. i ; viii. 47. 
 iis is iKixiarov x^P^"" — 'into as narrow a space as possible,' because the 
 denser the column, the more easily they would force their way through the 
 enemy. Popp. points out that x^P'o" stands for ' spatium," ii. 77, 78. The 
 transposition for h as i\dxi(rrov is to be noticed. See Matth. 6r. Or. § 461, 
 and cf. with G. iii. 46, 8ti iv /SpoxuTorp. $ i a. (r a a- 6 a i— force his 
 
 way into Fotidcea. xvf^'hv—^it.'theclawofabird.' Here the 
 
 ' mole/ or ' stone breakwater,' which, as Arn. points out, after being constructed 
 
OiiAP. 64.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. "JJ 
 
 just below the sea-wall of the ancient towns, in order to strengthen them, was 
 afterwards continued so as to narrow the entrance of the harbour. It projected 
 like a talou or claw, and hence its name. Aristeus could not enter the regular 
 gates of the town, as the Athenians had probably cut off the retreat, and in 
 passing along the mole he was exposed to missiles from the ships. S 1 4 
 
 is undoubtedly ' through the sea! as is easily intelligible from the position of 
 the mole. Others have rendered it prceter vel propter mare, which meaning 
 Popp. says only exists in the poets, Herod., and the ancient writers. But 
 see xl. u. 
 
 (b.) KaTtKjtavsi. We may either, says Pop., understand X'opfo'' or Ti. But 
 the neuter form of the predicate need not be tied down to any particular word. 
 We may translate — ' in sight,' which would imply that the places were recipro- 
 cally visible, which sense seems to be required here. Pop. refers to iiricpav^s, 
 said of Decelea, vii. 19, which is apparently taken in an active sense, 'latus late 
 prospectans,' Tac. Mist. iii. 60. Krug. has ' ein ubersichtlioher Raum ;' and cf. 
 TrriKuSis, vi. loi. iyt-yvfTo . . . ^p8n. The tenses vary, as the 
 
 sense requires — as soon as the battle began (of a continuous action), and the 
 standards were uplifted (of an act done once for all). Of. Karecnrao-flT) infra. 
 Vide Append, on Aorist. 810 -raxoas, Cf. xl. u. 
 
 (o.) viro(Tir6vSoiis—' under a truce,' the technical term. This was the 
 regular admission of defeat upon the part of those who requested the permission. 
 Cf. c. 54. aTTiBavov. The exceedingly interesting inscription upon 
 
 the Athenians who fell in this battle may still be seen in the British Museum, 
 where it was placed by Lord Elgin. It is engraved upon a small stone found in 
 the plain of the Academy, and is much mutilated. See Bockh's Restorations, 
 Corpus Inscript. i. p. 300, and Arnold's note. It forms part of the subject of an 
 interesting lecture by the Professor of Anc. History, Oxford. 
 
 Chapteb LXIV. — {a.) rb ix toC IcrBfiov reixos. Compare KAeapxos 
 Ka\ 01 e| 4Keivov, Xen. Anab. I. ii. 15. The preposition here is equivalent to a, 
 or ab, a parte, as in ' Pastor ab Amphryso,' and the whole means ' the wall on 
 the side of the Isthmus ' — i. e. the wall on the outer or northern side towards 
 Olynthus; as towards the close of the chapter, rh e/c t^j HaW^vris is iAe wall 
 on the side of Pallene — i. e. the south or inner wall. The same wall had been 
 called rb U XIuKTcIivtiv, but the difference arises from the different point of view 
 — 4k implying the wall, which the spectator sees when looking from Pallene {4k 
 TlaW-fivris) ; 4s, the wall which itself looks towards Pallene. It is clear, says 
 Arn., from Herod, viii. 129, that Potidsea occupied the whole space across the 
 neck of land from sea to sea, and that, consequently, the Athenians on one side 
 could not communicate with those on the other. airoTeiX'coi'Tes. 
 
 This is the technical term for a wall built for the purpose of cutting off commu- 
 nication from a place, and this is the sense conveyed by the preposition, cf, viii. 
 26, vii. 6. The imperfect 4<ppoipovv implies that they regularly garrisoned and 
 continued to guard it. 8ix«j »" adverbial predicate — in two different 
 
 directions — apart, Kriig., cf. vi. 100. i.Tiix'croi' must be consi- 
 
 dered as equivalent to ouk airorefx"'"'"'"'- 
 
 (6.) 'A<J)iJtioj. Kriig. remarks that this is an Ionic genitive like Tod(ios, 
 iv. 107, and KviBios, v. ijr. So even in Xenophon, Ag. ii. 18, we have Kpeuirios. 
 
78 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 The town was situated on the shore towards the E., near the present village of 
 Athyto, Leake iii. 156. ipininevos — lit. stwrting from, i. e. making 
 
 that his starting-place, or head-quarters— the regular military term, as in 
 Xenophon, passim. Cf. iii. 31, iv. 52 ; so also itpopus'ii' is the usual term for a 
 naval blockade. Cf. i. 116-142. a(U<foTepi»9ev refers to the two 
 
 walls on land, specified at the beginning of the chapter. vtKciv — 'to 
 
 be victors.' Engelman well remarks that this transmutation of a transitive into 
 an intransitive verb, is common to all languages. Cf. i\eu8epovi','to he liberators' 
 i. 69. 45iKoCfi€y, we are guilty, iii. So ' amare ' is ' fo be in love,' and trinlcen 
 in German, as * to drink ' in English, means 'to be a drunha/rd,' and ivixa is said 
 of the Olympic victor. 
 
 Chaptee LXV. — (o.) 4iroT€ixi<r6ef(r77s — /to! — ix""- Bemark the con- 
 nexion of a genitive absolute with a nominative by koi : the same takes place 
 with T£ Kol also. Popp. quotes similar examples, c. 67; iv. 29, 100, 124; v. 
 116; vi. 93. &Wo K.T,\. — or if anything else, contrary to expecta- 
 
 tion, turn up. Kriig. says, we should have anticipated iWoBti', but, as in the 
 version given, &\\o is more indefinite. Kriig, himself quotes v. 80, koI 6ir6ffa 
 4a\^Awi' 7ro\e/t^ fj it Ti &Wo ilxov. There is a question between the readings 
 irapa K6yov and iiap6.\oyov. Bl. argues, that as Thuc. uses the substantive irapd- 
 Koyos, it is unlikely that he would also employ the same word as an adjective 
 masculine. rh iir\ tovtois — * that which was to follow next upon 
 
 these things ' — t. e. the next steps to be taken. to e|w0€V — ' what 
 
 was to be expected from abroad.' Poppo says the expression equals ra e|», but 
 tills seems iraccurate, as the above translation is meant to show. 
 
 (b.) -rh &\\a. This construction may be regarded as a sort of extension of 
 the cognate accusative : so Kriig., who considers it equivalent to Tr6K(piov iroA«- 
 Ijti'tv. Tr. ' he both took part in the other operations of the war.' 
 SepiivXluv. This gen. has been considered as dependent both upon Tr6\ft and 
 TroWois. Perhaps the last is more probable, as the Athenians have not lately 
 been named. At v. 18, we find them in subjection to Athens. The place was 
 situated in Sitbonia, Herod, vii. 122, and-is now called ^tb 'Opp.vKia, according 
 to Leake, iii. 153. is riiv Ile\oir6vv7iaov iirptitrffit — a common 
 
 form of condensation, cf. c. 51, on eTcAei/Ta 4s viKTa. Popp. also compares 
 ic€\e6eiu 4s t^v AaKeSalfwva, iv. 108, (npariay 4wayy4W€iv 4s roiis a-vfifLdxovs, 
 vii. 117, Sir j; — for this, Sirus has been conjectured, because the 
 
 latter is universally the word employed bj Thuc. after Trpiaaiiv. But there is 
 no reason in grammar, nor in the nature of things, why we should not also 
 employ Sirp. And Krug. observes that we have Urtf Tp6n<e, iv. 128, and iroitii' 
 Sttj, vi. 93. ' Bottice, or Bottica, denotes the new country of the Bottiseans, to 
 the east of Potidsea and the Gulf of Therma, where they had settled after they 
 had been driven out of their old country by the Macedonians [Thuc. ii. 99]. 
 But Bottiaea denotes their old country, situated much more to the westward, 
 between the rivers Axius and Lydias, of which Herod, speaks, vii. 123, 127. 
 In the Thracian invasion, Sitalces overran Bottica, but never penetrated as far 
 as Bottiaea, ii. 99, 100, loi.' Arnold. 
 
 Chaptbe IiXVL — (a.) irooirey. The irphs refers to the pi-eviously-men- 
 
Chap, ej."] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 79 
 
 tiuneu causes of quarrel about Corcyra. ^vyefi^iiyei. The form 
 
 ^v^ptitTm for lu^^^ffM occurs, says Bl., also in Die Cassius, 186, 62. 1247, 53, 
 o 7r(i\€/tos ^vvf^^dyei. In all probability it is a direct imitation of this. Eriig. 
 cf. d n-(i\e/xas Ktne^p6rfii, Arist. ^q. 644. avaKiax^ — a graphic term, 
 
 'a holding back ;' sometimes also employed of a temporary suspension of hos- 
 tilities, is (01 — ' on their own account,' i.e. as Popp. explains, per se, 
 " non consultis soeiis,' 
 
 Chaptee LXVII. — (a.) 4i>6yTav — SeSi(jTes. Cf. c. 55 a. irepl 
 
 T^ Xa>p ill! — as we, ' being alarmed about the place,' See with the dative, i. 6, 
 andii.5. aTrovSds. See c. 53 a. 
 
 (i.) ivriyov — egged on, OT urged on the war. Kpiipa Kriig. 
 
 connects with Trp((rPev6fifi'0i, whereas Hermann, ad Elect, v. 1059, and most 
 others, attach it to ivrjyoy. His words are ' Particulae /aev — Se interdum ad ea 
 tantum ipsa, quae opposita inter se sunt, referuntur, manente constructione 
 participii.' Kriig. 's method avoids this difficulty, but is less obvious. Arnold 
 believes that ras a-jrovSas must refer to the thirty years' truce, and indeed, when 
 the word occurs thus with the article, this peace is commonly meant. It has 
 been objected by Muller, ^ginetica, p. 180, and GoUer, that this cannot be so, 
 as jEgina had been reduced by Athens before the commencement of the thirty 
 years' peace (cf. i. 108), and he thinks that reference is made to the general 
 compact, entered into by the Greeks after Plataea. Cf. ii. 72, iii. 68. Kriig. 
 adheres to the former opinion, conjecturing that in some way or other provision 
 had been made in the thirty years' peace by the Lacedaemonians for the avTo- 
 yo/jiia of .i)gina. See similar provisions for the Olynthians and others in the 
 peace of Nicias, v. i8j and of the same opinion is Arnold. Grote, vol. vi. 
 p. 104, is undecided. 'Miiller's opinion,' he says, 'might seem to be counte- 
 nanced by the allusion to iEgina in the speech of the Thebans, iii. 64 ; but on 
 tlie other hand, if we consult i. 115, it will appear possible that the wording of 
 the thirty years' truce may have been general, as kirodovvat 5e 'AOtjvaiovs Sea 
 ?X''i"''i n€\o7ro WTio-icoy ; at any rate, the JUginetans may have pretended that by 
 the same rule as Athens gave up Nisea, Pegse, &c., she ought also to renounce 
 Mginsi. However, we must recollect that the one plea does not exclude the 
 other: the iEginetans may have taken advantage of hath in enforcing their 
 prayer for interference. This seems to have been the idea of the Schol.' 
 
 (c.) Kal eT Tis rt &\Ko — ' and any of the allies that had any other wrong 
 to complain of,' Jelf, § 45, 3. -ris &KKos, the proposed alteration, is inferior to 
 the original reading, for any other injury is the prominent part of the idea, 
 Thv ilaBira. The ordinary assembly, consisting of all Spartan citizens who 
 had attained to the age of thirty years, Arn. Popp. points out that it is called 
 ^ 4KK\i]aia ruv AaKeSatfLoylaiu, c. 87, and rb irKTJdos avrStv, c. 72. It is so called, 
 probably, to distinguish it from t] luKpk iKK\7i<Tia, which was composed only of 
 the Spartiate Peers, or 'O/uoioi, to the exclusion of the Lacedemonians. See 
 on the subject of these assemblies, Miiller's Dor. vol. ii. ch. 5, and the remarks 
 of Grote, vol. vi. p. 105. Remark the usage of ttoUu in iroi^trapTes, so like that of 
 our own verb tomaie. Cf. i. 139, iv. 118. Kii^ivav eipyeaBai. 
 
 This celebrated decree, which inflicted so much distress upon the Athenians, is 
 much harped upon by Aristophanes. The student should refer to the Achar. 
 
8o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 vv. 477, 729, 752, 758. The Schol. on Manoe, v. 273, preserves the terms of the 
 decree, Meyapeas /x^r* ayopas, liiyre BaXdtrtnj^, /x-fir' ijireipov /^erexe**'. See also 
 Plut. nt. Peril, u. 29. 
 
 Chapter LXVIII. — (a.) t i ir i itt iJ y. TAe reliability, if there were such 9 
 word, in default of which render good faith, loyaute; it means the trustworthi- 
 ness of their conduct in all the relations of internal policy and private life. Cf . 
 Ti imrriiv t?i a\i\9eias. Soph. Track, v. 398, cf. Jelf, § 436, 7. otti- 
 
 (TTor epovs — less inclined to suspicion, or, 'less ready to ielieveuswhen we say, 
 activo sensu, less ready to believe,' ef. iv. 17, viii. 66. is -rois 
 
 &\\ovs. This is generally connected with oKurTOTepovs — ' less suspicious towards 
 all the rest of the world, in the event of our saying anything against them,' Others 
 give a different force to Is -rohs &.\\ous — more incredulous towards the rest of us, 
 if we have anything to say. Both are possible. To the first it has been objected 
 that the Corinthians were going to accuse the Athenians alone. But this is 
 surely futile, for the general form in which the expression is couched is pre- 
 cisely what we should have anticipated in a rhetorical statement. Nor is 
 Poppo's assertion that Tohs &\\ovs (in the second method of taking the words) 
 caunot include the Corinthians, because iinfts is subsequently distinguished 
 from Toij ^vfifiiixo"' roiaSc, anything more than a hypercriticism ; for of course 
 it is possible for them sometimes to identify themselves with the rest, and 
 sometimes not. His own way of taking the words is to connect them with 
 XeyiofitK — 'if toe have anything to say against the rest.' But here the first given 
 objection would apply, and Popp. seems sensible of it, for he conjectures tovs 
 'Mtivalovs — and surely in this case we should have had &K\ovs sine articulo. 
 The i^v Ti \iyuufv is a sort of euphemistic expression with which Kinig. well 
 compares Ar. Ach. 579, (vyyi/ii/iTiv ?xf> " vtux^s iiv ehif ti /ca(rTtti/iuXi£/j»)v. 
 aa(i>po<Tivriv — ' moderation.' See an explanation of what is meant by the word, 
 u. 84, § 2. i/ioPta — cf. Sheppard's Theophrait. ch. ix. p. 115. 
 
 (b.) t);>' fidOttciv iwoieire is said to be identical with iixaMvere, but 
 there is, I think, always some shade of difference between the simple verb, and 
 the cognate noun with Troie'm. The latter seems to dwell more upon the action 
 expressed by the verb : tr. tooh the trouble to inform yourselves. Twy 
 
 \iy6vr(t>v K.r.\. Am. has a very long note, following Pop. ed. maj., wherein 
 he says that the gen. A.€7iii/Tiuj' depends upon the latter part of the sentence, and 
 that Qis \4yovtTi is exactly equivalent to rb Aeyeic, the gen., expi'essing that con- 
 nexion of the subject spoken of with the verb which is expressed in English by 
 the prep. ' in.' But it has always seemed to me much more simple to make the 
 gen. governed by iirevoeTn, and is X€7ot/(ri one of those recurrences to the 
 directa oratio so common — ' you suspected the speakers and (declared) that they 
 are speaking for their private interest.' Sii(popa slightly differs 
 
 from its use in the last ch., where it was 'points of difference;' here it is, 
 ' points which make a difference.' See note on iSl<f ti out^; Siacpepei, iii. 42, 
 iv rip ipTp — actually involved in the evil ; this is the primary force of the 
 preposition, as may be seen in such phrases as ip.$aTei(iv iraTplSos, Sophocles, 
 0. T. 825. Pop. renders it apud, coram. 
 
 (c.) hipavils — ' if they were committing this wrong in a corner,' 
 oliK ilSiai. Dat. commodi, ' as to persons ignorant of the fact,' cf. ii. 36 ; iv. 
 
Chap. 69.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 81 
 
 59. Note the absence of the article. irohf/i.-lia-ovra.i for iroAe/UTjSV'x'Tai, 
 
 Poppo. This is one of the cases which will illustrate the way in which a 
 middle sense passes into something like a passive one. See the observa- 
 tions, iii. 40, and Jelf, § 364, and transl. bring war upon themselves, viii. 43, 
 and Sia7roA6;u^(r6(r0oij vii. 14. 
 
 ((Z.) ov yh.p &v—'for otherwise they would not,' supply with Poppo, ei jkJ) 
 •Kpo-napeffKiva(r^ivoL ^(Tav 4s irdK^liov. iiroKa^6vT€s, This is ex- 
 
 plained by the Scholiast SeJtJ/terai, and by Thom. Mag. wpoKaPivm, but I have 
 little doubt but that Stephanus was right in thinking that imh contained the 
 sense, clam, et per insidias, an opinion which has been repeated by several 
 editors. Cf. with Kriig. i. 121, 143. airoxpv<'Bat. A. interprets 
 
 this, * to give you the full benefit of your dominion in Thrace' and it is certain 
 that such a use of airh may be supported. But this does not seem to me called 
 for by the sense. It is better to take the old interpretation, ' to avail yourself 
 of,' ' to reap the benefit of.' GoU. compares oTrof^i', i. 2, and Kriig. vi. 17; vii. 
 42. So, says Popp., the Latins used abuti, liberi uti. rb i^^v, which 
 
 might have been t] fiiv, referring to KipKvpa, is attracted to x^P^""- 
 
 Chapteb LXIX. — (a.) KparOvai. A somewhat poetic and rhetorical word, 
 cf. iii. 18, 82. On the subject compare c. 90 and 107. Krug. btto- 
 
 (TTfpovvTes — active voice upon the principle of 'Qui facit per alium facit per 
 se,' as is explained in the next section. 
 
 (S.) eX-irsp tt.T.A. Arn. quotes with approval Hermann's dictum, ' tiirep 
 SoKu (Toi, dicimus ei de quo non certo scimus quid ei placeat, aut de quo id 
 nescire simulamus,' and renders, ' if he maJces a pretension of being the deliverer 
 of Greece, we cannot say whether he does make it, but if he does.' This I believe 
 to be wrong, (hep, as its form imports (cf. S<nrep, ch. 8 b, and Donaldson, 
 W. Crat. § 1 78), will be found upon a careful induction, more especially in the 
 philosophers, always to assume the hypothesis which it makes ; sometimes, it is 
 true, only temporarily and for the sake of argument, but still always to assume 
 it, especially if they carry off the honour of being tlie liberators of Greece, as I 
 suppose you think you do. I was induced to examine the question, owing to 
 an assertion in a note by the learned editor of the Agamemnon (Peile), adv. 29, 
 • rfircp is used when the proposition is doubtful.' But after the largest induc- 
 tion which I have been enabled to make, I find that direp always assumes the 
 hypothesis either from its intrinsic truth, or simply for the sake of argument ; 
 and it is from cases of the last sort that the notion of its doubtfulness arises. 
 Numerous instances of this will present themselves to the reader throughout 
 Thucydides. But it is still more important to truce the usage in strictly argu- 
 mentative writers like Aristotle. It will be found that he is perpetually stating 
 his principles in a delicate way by iXinp, while his mere S(i|ai are introduced 
 by ei. The real state of a disputed fact, he, for the purpose of avoiding dogma- 
 tism, continually introduces by aA\* eJirep — e. g. Men do not wish for the good 
 of an inanimate object, except so far forth as may be desirable for themselves, 
 yeXoLQV T9) oKvip ^ov\€(r6ai rayaQd, oAA' etirep ffdi^etrdaL PovKerat aUrdv, 'Iva avrhs 
 exv- Here elfirep obviously and necessarily assumes the supposition contained in 
 fiovKerai. See again ^iA. Jfici. lib. vii. c. 7, x. 3. To go through the instances 
 which I have selected would be tedious ; but even in the very case quoted by 
 
 a 
 
82 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Peile, ad loc, tiir^p ri ■/ imX t^j a.\v9eias trBiPos, (Ed. T. v. 369, the 'vis veri- 
 tatis ' is assumed as a foundation for what follows. A long note will perhaps 
 be pardoned, as the matter is of great importance from the use of the word 
 in arguments, and Dean Stanley, I perceive, in his valuable work on the 
 Corinthians, has again reproduced the assertion about its being a particle of 
 uncertainty. The error arises from contrasting it solely with e? -yf, which 
 assumes the same hypothesis in a more emphatic, and, so to speak, deictic and 
 lively way. Peile himself has elsewhere said, ' K the original notion of irepl be 
 connected with that of its derivative, repi<r<T6s excess, we shall be led, consider- 
 ing TTcp as a kindred particle, to the same interpretation, riiiroy Trep — this much, 
 and more ; Jull as much.' Aga/m. v. 141. oltwffts — nearly as d|/w/xa. 
 
 Kriig. cf. i. 138, ii. 2, iii. 37. <p4peTai I believe to be a metaphor 
 
 from the games; as we say, 'hear off the prize.' See. Soph. Eleetra, 969, ot<rei, 
 and 1086, i^epeii'. Ot\ieTs tv. ' ostentatiously set forth ;' cf. prae se ferunt. If 
 a|(ft)(ns be taken active sensu, thenwe musttr. ^ si virtutem palam sihi vindicate 
 as Popp. ; but this is not so good ; for, as Kriig. indicates, cf. ii. i r, with ii. 60, 
 and iii. 53. oi yap SpuvTes. The doers, the active party, or it 
 
 may be possible to supply SSiica to the participle from &SiKov/ie0a, and tr. ' the 
 wrong-doers' Either is preferable to disconnecting 01 and Spams, and making 
 the first here a demonstrative pronoun, as it sometimes is before 5e'. Tr. there- 
 fore, /or the wrong-doers are coming against persons who have not yet made up 
 their mind, with their own measures already taken, and not merely threatening; 
 rather than,yor they already acting, are coming against, Sfc. fieWtiffis 
 
 denotes u. menacing attitude; as A. explains, holding up the stick, but never 
 striking. Cf. iv. 136. 
 
 (c.) Ka( — 'a not unfrequent use of koJ, by which it is nearly equivalent to 
 i\\i, immo, the literal sense being ' and now,' as in Arist. Fac. 402, itoi aoi 
 <pp6.(T(D Ti-Trpa.yfjLa.Siivhv KoX ^i-iya,' 'Stl. KttT* oKiyoif — step iy step, 
 
 creeping on. Kriig. well compares kot' oXlyov ri vpuTov i/ivirrTovaa, Plat. 
 TimtBUS, S5, d. rh apaladriroy — 'your insensihility,' 'your want 
 
 of perception of what is going on about you.' Kriig. remarks that the word is 
 not used by Thucyd. in so contemptuous a sense as by Demosthenes. Cf. i. 82, 
 vi. 86. This seems true of the later writers. See an examination of the character, 
 Sheppard's 2%eojpira«<)M, ch. X. /ie\A.<)<rei. Cf. supra, ». 
 
 (rf.) innpaXils — ' safe men ;' lit. * such as cannot be tripped up in wrestling.* 
 Cf. ippovilv yap ol Tax^'is oOk iicrtpa\i7s, (Edip. Tyr. 617. Stv refers of 
 
 course to ijitis, and must be resolved into its constituents — ' though, as it now 
 seems, what was said of you transcended the reality.' In Thuc. the perpetuul 
 antithesis between K6yos and ipyov must be rendered sometimes in one way, and 
 sometimes in another : mv has been taken for the neuter — the common report 
 about which things ; but I cannot believe this to be right. Trpoairoj'T^iroi 
 
 — ' before the preparations made by you suitably encountered^ or rather, ' antici- 
 pated him on the way.' The infinitive, says Popp., stands after Trp6Tfpov <(, as 
 commonly as after irplv. Cf. note, ch. 39 b, and vi. 58, and Jelf. So after 
 iartpov jf.vi. 4. nal e's Tii^as . . . HaTaaTTtuai. Popp. tr. JfeWunffi 
 
 casus stibire. The meaning of the whole is, undoubtedly, to expose yourselves to 
 the influence of accidenthy struggling against your enemies when they have become 
 more powerful, and not before — i. e. by delaying the struggle until they are so. Cf.. 
 
Chap. 70.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 83 
 
 ^Trl Tas a<j>aj/e7s ^Knlias KaBlffravTcu, v. 103. auric Trepl aiT§ (r(paK4vTa 
 
 metaphor from shipwreck, that he was the rock upon which he himself made ship- 
 wreck — i.e. his own errors were for the most part the cause of his failure. Com- 
 pare vi. 33, irepl <r(pi(riv outoTs t^ v\elai irTatuffiv, and Herod, ix. loi, mt) vepl 
 MapSopii/i TTTaiari ii 'EAAaj. 
 
 (e.) at ififTspai e\irlSes. The pronoun stands, as often, for the oJ;'ecij»e 
 genitive — the hopes of which you are the oiject ; cf. eh. 33; Jelf, § 652, 6. 
 Ttvds. Reference is made, perhaps, to the Thasians (i. 101), the Eubceaus 
 (i. 114), certainly to the Potidssatans (i. 58), Popp. oiVia — is 
 
 ' charge' in general, here, a 'friendly remonstrance.' xaTTiyopia 
 
 has a more special and forensic sense — an accusation at law. 
 
 Chapter LXX. — (a.) &^toi — it is our desert — we may claim. rwv 5ia- 
 
 <\tep6vT(iiif. Cf. note, c. 68 b.; tr. as ^ttup6pt)3v — ' the interests which are at stake 
 being great : ' the SiocJje'poi'Tas which follows is, ' differing in character.' Some 
 commentators, indeed, suppose that the psendo rHv SiatpepSvray meant the same 
 thing. oiovs u/iiv must be taken in close connexion with 6 ayiiv iffrau 
 
 Cf. infra. 
 
 (b.) ojcis iit IV OT) a ai is' quick at devi^ng novelties ;' the ^irl in composition 
 denotes something over and above what has been before : from the h^its is 
 derived by zeugma another adjective, which governs ad^^iv. ' The meaning of 
 o^eis, sharp, when applied to the latter half of the sentence, is in the nature 
 of a sarcasm,' Grote, vol. vi. p. 1 10. GoUer's idea of understanding Ixavol in- 
 stead of o^ets, is, I think, quite unnecessary. iiriyvuvai has reference to 
 firivofiaai, and the preposition has the same force, to devise fresh measures. 
 i^iKitrOai — ' to follou) out.' ' A meaning,' says Kriig., ' and construction which 
 I am unable elsewhere to find.' vapa Sivaiay ToXixrirai — daring 
 beyond their power. The words which follow I understand to mean, ' ventun- 
 some beyond what their sober judgment sanctions' and are explained by the anti- 
 thetical clause, Tris yvw^'ris firiSh rots ^e^aiois irKrTevtratt to have no conjidence 
 even in such schemes as their Judgment sa/nctions, cf. Jelf, 442 a. Many other 
 translations have been suggested ; but I have little doubt as to the correctness 
 of the above. rb 5e viierepoy — it is your way, or your characteristic, 
 to perform what falls short of your power — i. e. not to effect all you are able to 
 effect. Livy seems to refer to this (as BL observes) : ' Atheniensium populum 
 fama est celerem et supra vires audacem esse ad conandum ; Lacedajmoniorum 
 cunctatorem, et vix in ea quibus fidit ingredientem,' xlv. 23. 
 
 (c.) fi.€\\TiT(i5, airoSriiinTal, ivSmxor aTovs. All these words are of 
 peeuUar significance ; on the first, see sup. c. 6g b. ; the second means, ' roomers 
 abroad;' the third, 'stay at homes' airoSTiiulv and ivSri^e'ii' were nsed at 
 Athens to express our. ideas ' at home ' and ' abroad.' i^ipxovrai — 
 
 'follow out their advantages to the utmost,' Popp. tr. longissimiprogrediuntwr. 
 Si verba explicanda essent longissimi victoriam perseguuntur, ex tribus pessimis 
 membranis scribendum esset iTrelfpxovrai. The translation I have given is not 
 to be restricted to actual pursuit of an enemy. airovaiq. Kriig. remarks that 
 this does not refer merely to military campaigns. i.yawiiTTova-ti'. This 
 
 verb denotes the action of a man who throws himself back from his task in phy- 
 sical exhaustion or despondency. Arn. says it is a strange mistake of Athenaus to 
 
 a 2 
 
84 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 suppose tliat its primary meaning is mental discouragement, for in all languages 
 terms expressive of mental operations are borrowed from those of the body. Tins 
 is quite true ; but it seems a no less strange mistake of his own to derive the 
 notion 'dispirited' from 'the movement of a rower who throws himself back 
 to give force to his stroke.' Neither does Athenseus loc. cit. say so much, but 
 ewlx^iuxfl! ea-TLv ohv aeviieTv. ^ti Be to?f ffti/tairiy k.t *. The 
 
 antithesis here expressed is, though somewhat difficult to translate, easy 
 uuongh to understand. ' They are as reckless of their persons as if they did 
 not belong to them, when fighting for their country, but they are most thorough 
 masters of their intellect, and employ all its powers in her service ' — i. e. hns- 
 banding iiU its resources, and allowing none other the advantage of them. The 
 orators seem to have admired the sentiment, for it has been imitated by Iso- 
 crates. Panegyric, p. 58, and Lysias, Orat.funeb. p. 87. See Am. and Kriig. 
 Some have regarded oiKeioTaTp as if it belonged to n6\ei — ' most entirely the 
 property of their country ;' but if the antithetical word afAoTpiardTois has refer- 
 ence to the subject of the verb, this must also. 
 
 (d.) ^fKeaa-m. This is Poppo's and Bekker's reading from most MSS. 
 He quotes Soph. Track, v. 506, i^riKeov &eB\' ayiivmii. Krug. has ^irtf- 
 (Kduxriv. oKiya . . .TrpilavTis, The construction seems to be, 
 
 qyovvTai rvx^'tv trpd^avTiS 6\iya irphs Tct fj.eWoj/ra. They think they have 
 chanced to effect hut little as compared with what they will hereafter effect. ' Ac- 
 cording to Matthiae, the participle -irpafyivris stands for the infin. Trpa^ai, as 
 dependent upon TiyovvTCU.' Bl., who tr., whatever they so pursue as to gain, iliey 
 esteem trifling compared -with what they may chance in future to attain to. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 68.?. Peile believes ' the corroct version of this difficult passage to be. 
 And whatever indeed having projected, they shall not have followed out, thep 
 reckon (tlieir own to lose, i.e.) an casual loss of their own property; hut 
 'Whatever having followed up they shall have acquired, (they reckon) a trifle when 
 compared with what they were to have succeeded in effecting,' as if in the lust 
 clause it had been vphs & ifuKKov rvx^iv irpd^avres. Cf. iii. 20, «al efieWov, ot 
 jxiv Tivfs aixapT^ireff&ai, ol Se irKslovs rf6^e(rdai rov a\T)dovs KoytCfiov. iii. 22, 
 Kal f^fWov SdxTfiv K.T.\. iTr\4\pwffav ttiv xp^^^^- The true aorist, 
 
 denoting an act not restrictea to any special time, past, present, or fiiture, 
 which we somewhat clumsily express by a present. They supply the deficiency, 
 i. e., are wont to supply. See Appendix ii. uv &v yi/wtrtv. The whole 
 
 may be tovtuv &v t.v ^^v iirix^ipijo'iv iroieia-dat yvuffiv, or rovruv & ttv yvSiffiv. 
 Kriig. prefers the last. iirix^h't"^" k.t.K. — because they imme- 
 
 diately set themselves about attempting whatever they havemade up theirminds 
 about, — i. e., make their attempt an immediate one. Kriig. cf. iirixeipiittiS rciv 
 'EiriiroXtiJi', vii. 43. ' The attempt upon Epipolffi.' 
 
 (e.) fiox^ovaiv, as our word toil, or sometimes moil, is somewhat poetic, 
 and as Kriig. remarks, scarcely used in Attic prose ; but it seems to have a 
 peculiar appropriateness here with aiSivos, cf. Horn. Od. JE. 202, cf. ii. 39. In 
 speeches Xenophon frequently employs it. Here it governs toCto. Cf. Eur. Set . 
 v. 59, t( pioxSf'is toSto ; KTaffBai. Note the present, ' being always 
 
 in the act of acquiring.* kopriiv — Think nothing else a holiday, than 
 
 the doing what the occasion requires. There seems some tacit reference to the 
 practice of the Lacedaemonians, who, as on the occasion of Marathon, would not 
 
Chap. 71.] MOTES ON THUCYDIDES. S5 
 
 go forth upon even the most necessai-y expedition during the time of a festival. 
 On this account, I think Eeislie's interpretation of the word, delicias, voluptatem, 
 is incorrect; and Dio Cassius probably overlooked the allusion when he sub- 
 stituted the fvSaiiioviav in the imitated passage, xxxviii. 37. Cf. Mailer's Dor., 
 book ii. Tre<pvK4vai. 'To have been born," to have been brought 
 
 into the world.' Cf. Xen. Mem. ii. i, 9: /SovXa/tcVovs TroAAi vpdy/iaTa tx"" 
 ouToiis T€ kal &\\ois Trapexf'"- 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) Tairris fiivroi k.t.X. This and the following 
 sentence are confessedly difiSoult. I will first mention what I myself imagine 
 to be the meaning, and which I now find to be nearly that given by Bloomf. : 
 • And yet when such a State as this stands, as it were, in battle array against 
 you, Lacedcemonians, ye continue (Sm) to procrastinate ; and thinlc not that 
 peace endures longest for those men, who go not indeed beyond what is Just in the 
 matter of armamient, yet plainly show that their resolution is, if they be wronged, 
 not to permit it ; but-ye hold fair dealing to consist in doing no violence to others, 
 while yfi prevent injury to yourselves by repelling it when attempted.* The second 
 clause of the sentence would naturally have commenced with oXtaBi S4, and con- 
 tained some other opinion concerning the nature of a durable peace, ascribed to 
 the Lacedaemonians. But with that love of variety which we have so often 
 remarked (cf. ch. 38 c), as characteristic of Greek composition, the antithetical 
 clause is cast into a new form, ttj irapao-Keup I have translated ' armament,' 
 for want of a single word which better expresses its meaning ; but it must be 
 understood to include all acts and measures which might awaken the jealousy 
 of a neighbouring government. Bl. says, ' I must still adhere to my opinion 
 that Tp irapao'Keu^ means in vittB institutione.' rh Xffoy viiure — lit. 'ye allot 
 or deal out the equitable, — i. e., equity.' The translation given to it is therefore 
 quite as tenable as Aru.'s, to deal justly, or Donaldson's, ' ye lead a life of 
 easy indifference^ or Poppo's, ' mquitatem colitis.' aii.vv6ti.ivoi can scarce mean 
 ' suffering harm, by attempting to defend yourselves ; ' for by no code is self- 
 defence considered as inconsistent with justice ; and again, it is going much too 
 far to say that the Laeedsemonians would not defend themselves, which in this 
 case the orator would imply. fiKiiimaeai, says Donaldson {N. C. §454), is 
 
 a certain degree of harm or mischance, a hindrance or accidental harm ; (this I 
 have pointed out with examples in a note upon Much. Ag. v. 119. Terminalia 
 ii.) never an injury of that kind which can cause resentment. The present 
 passage has, he thinks, been misinterpreted by all commentators. His own 
 version is, — ' It is not your opinion that those persons enjoy peace the longest, who 
 while they act justly, show they have made up their minds not to submit to injury, 
 hut you observe the rule of non-interference, — i. e., you are strictly neutral or im- 
 partial, on the principle of not hurting others, and of avoiding the inconveniences 
 to which reprisals would subject you.' 
 
 (i.) apx""'^*""'"' B^^'^fy corresponding to 'old-fashioned.' 
 TTohs aiiTOvs — when compared with them. A very natural ellipse for irpir to 
 iTTiTiiSiifiaTa avrav. In a similar manner, t6X'"JS stands for fio-Trep Texvijs 
 061 Tci iniyiyv6iifva Kparu. Bl. is scarce right in saying with respect to the 
 government of rexvvs ' supply 5ii5i or 7rep£.' The ' additions ' here of course are 
 the improvements made from time to thue. Illustrations will occur to every 
 
86 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [BooE I. 
 
 one. Cf. Xen. i. 6, 38. iiriTexviiirfais. The lirX has the same 
 
 force as in iTiyvavcu, ch. 70 b, which see ; but as the word tcxvi) has been 
 used, iTrmx"^"^"^' '*ys Popp., 'exquisite positum est.' The word occurs, 
 Herod, ii. z, 1 19. Grote gives the sense correctly, but somewhat too magnilo- 
 quently for a Spartan, ' multiplicity of active obligations requires multiplicitjf 
 and novelty of contrivance' 
 
 (c.) /M^xpt TovSe. Jjetyour procrasiination be limited by iAis; gothusfar, 
 and no farther. The words nexpi and &xp' I believe sometimes signify, not 
 simply up to a certain point in time or space, but coincident or co-extensive with 
 a certain amount of time or space. krepav rivh. ^vfifxaxiav Tpe^tjre. 
 
 This probably refers to the Argives, who were ever ready to take advantage of 
 any opportunity to establish a counter-influence to Sparta in the Peninsula. 
 
 {d.) $€(01/ ruv dpKianf. * The Gods who were called upon to witness the oaths' 
 Expressed by Livy — Fcederum arbitros ac testes. Liv. xxi. 10. Poppo. 
 Twv ai(r6ai/ofj.4v(i}Vy i.e., atffdijtrLv ^x^""^^^) tppovlfiwf. This makes the expres- 
 sion the exact antithesis to dvaio-G^Twc, and we may render it, men of feeling 
 and intelligence. Popp. refers to v. 26, and Xen. Mem. iv. 1, i. Otherwise — 
 ' of these men who witness the act,' under whose cognizance it comes, as the oaths 
 came under the cognizance of the gods. ipiiixlav — deserted, and 
 
 t\iQV&fovQ defenceless position. Kriig. cf. iii. 67. ^aia — 'holyinthe. 
 
 sight of gods ' — from which we may infer the strength of the religious feeling 
 connected with the idea of race. i^riyi'iiTOai. The notion is, ' Do 
 
 not let the power and glory of Peloponnesus degenerate under your headship.' 
 Popp. explains the construction i\d<r<ra, = to fio-re iKaaaa (hat ; others say 
 that the double accusative is occasioned by the elliptical way of speaking, TriP 
 TlfKoizSvvrnfov iKdtrtrw KaraarTjaai i^riyovfievovs. To me it seems explicable by 
 prolepsis. On the verb ^lijye'o/uai in this sense and construction, cf. i. 76, 95 ; 
 vi. 85, and L. and S. Lexicon. On the Spartan riye/xovla, see Grote, p. 396, 
 note, and i. 38, and vii. 55. 
 
 Chapter LXXII. — (o.) ruv 'AOtivaluv. This genitive must be referred to 
 ■irpe<T$iia, but the whole sentence is, as ^rn. remarks, an instance of iiTegular 
 construction, known to most Greek authors, and particularly to Thucydides. 
 When the subject of the discourse is suddenly altered, the new subject is 
 brought forward into the most prominent place in the new sentence without 
 much regard to the necessities of the construction, which often is changed by 
 an anacolouthon, and the subject left independent of any government. This is 
 most common where, as in Herodotus, the reason of the predication is introduced 
 by ydp, before the writer gives us the predicate itself. See Jelf, § 786, 6. 
 The introduction of koI before &s ■^trBovTo renders this passage more confused 
 than usual, and I confess it seems to me very like the work of a copyist, who 
 did not perceive that Trpecrffeia could form the subject — by repetition — of 
 jjaBovTO. In this suspicion I perceive that Kriig. concurs. Arn. cites, by way 
 of illustration, i. 115; vii. 48; viii. 30, which the student will do well to consult. 
 So also Herod, iv. 149, 6 Se Traij ou yap f<(n) 01 avii.Tr\cv(reaSai, TOLyapaiv €(pn 
 'ainhv KaraKil^eiv i'iv iv KilKOtiri. iv. 100, Ttuv 5e irai/ yap ^v ri TrXijeos iKTairiov, 
 ovK iSfKoi/To TQiis K6yous. Ix. 109, rp St Kaitas yap eSee TravoiKlii yeiiiaSai, 
 fhf T^ Sepiji. hiroKoyiiaontvovs. This accusative must be con- 
 
Chap. 73.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 87 
 
 Eidered to depend upon the verbal adjective vaptrriTia. On the construction 
 Bee Jelf, § 318. Matthiee, § 447. Goll. accounts for the fact that these verbals 
 govern accusatives, on the principle that they tacitly contain the notion xp^t or 
 Set, and cites Mattbise, § 447, 4. Cf. ofre fxurdaipopiiTfov e?r) &\\ovs % tovs 
 iTTpaTeuo/iecouSiViii. 65. ire pi Travris — ' concerning the general question;' 
 
 the construction is varied by the infinitive SiiKHirai, which is admissible after 
 verbs of motion. Popp. ^v irK^iovi, sc, XP^^V* opposed to rax^wy, 
 
 cf. i. 121. Kriig. 
 
 (S.) iK Tuv \6ywv — ^K from its proper notion, which is that of the MiaieWaZ 
 cause— in the metaphysical sense of the word — passes into a cognate one of 
 after, or arising from, regarding the antecedent events as in some degree the 
 cause of those which follow. We may therefore translate — 'Arising out of,' 
 i.e. 'In consequence of what had, teen said.' to7s AaKeSaLfiovioLS as 
 
 distinguished from rh TrKrjBos avTuv probably refers to the Ephors. 
 ef Ti /i^, a transposition for ei iiAi ri. So ei /x^ Kai, for el Kal fii}, ii. 11 ; vi. 60. 
 Popp. Kriig. would strike out ti and make airoKuAiei intransitive. The verb is 
 so in this book, 144-2 : oijre eKelvo KoiK^ei ev rais (rTrofSaTs oUre T6de. 
 e-TTievai — adire, accedere, -TrapeA^etv, ad dicendum prodire. But, as Popp. ob- 
 serves, the distinction is not always kept up, cf. i. r 19. 
 
 Chaptee LXXIII. — {a.) irpea-peva-n. This word is censured by Dion. Hal. 
 as too poetical, but the truth is that ■!rpe<rPela is ' embassy,' just as we might 
 say the 'English embassy' at Pai-is; and irpeff^evais is 'the fact of coming 
 upon an embassy.' Kara^o^v receives the same censure from the 
 
 critic, but it is very graphic and suitable to the speaker. ' The outcry against 
 tis,' cf. viii. 83, 87. See also ch. 67, Hal KaTefi6av ruv 'Mjivalav. 
 SiKatrra'ts vfj.7v — 'yo« as our Judges.' ^ctSiws — 'easily,' and, 
 
 therefore, lightly, cf. i. 80; vi. 9. 
 
 (b.) rh. irdiiu TraKcLid. The old mythical legends about Theseus, the 
 Amazons, &c., which were a stock topic. Kriig. refers to Isocrates, v. 42, 
 Dem. xxii. 15, Xenophon, Tlepl npocr. iv. 16. &v. This gen. depends 
 
 Upon liipTvpes. Popp. explains a/coal X6yav as equivalent to axovaSevTei 
 \6yoi — the hearsay of tradition. i^is is, ' the personal observation 
 
 of those who are to hear us speak.' el ical . . . ■Kpo&aWoiJ.evois — • 
 
 'Although it be somewhat irksome to us to be for ever bringing this subject for- 
 ward.' Thus Arn. after Haack and Popp. I think correctly; but Kriig. 
 adopts the other explanation, even though it be somewhat disagreeable to you to 
 have this ever put before you. On the force of the prepos. in Si' ox>^ov, cf. 
 17 a. eKiv^vveieTo. Either rh, ^ridiKa is the subject, or it is 
 
 impersonal. ?s rod epyov — sc. ttjs ^ipeXlas may, I think, be 
 
 rendered ' the practical benefit,' in contradistinction to toS \6yov ; but Popp. and 
 Goll. understand, ' of the actual doing of the good,' which makes the antithesis 
 less effective ; ttjs ciipeKias, ' the benefit of the reputation, if any there be.' 
 ti Ti (ii^eXet . . . TrapaiT^crewr is explained by the Schol. eVe/cos toC alrelv 
 trvyyi'tiiiriy,for the sake of deprecation, to which, namely, they would not con- 
 descend. 
 
 (c.) Mapaeai't. The word had become so familiar, that its use is .almost 
 adverbial,— i. e., without ev before it. Cf. with Kriig. Dem. xviii. 208, Plato, 
 
88 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Menexenus, 240. Yet Tliuoyd. sometimes employs the preposition, as i. 18, 
 ii. 34, cf. AeXi/xjij, eh. 143. Aristopli. always omits it. irpoKiviv- 
 
 vfvaai — 'to have borne the brunt of the danger.' The same expression occurs 
 in the far-famed oath of Demosthenes: omiaTiv has TiiiipreTe oh /ili robs eV 
 KapaBcivnrpoKU'Sui'eiiravTas. ^"X^ — hindered, prevented. The use 
 
 of the simple verb in this sense is not so common, yet Kriig. gives abundant 
 instances. Xen, Anab. iii. 5, 11, ^ affKbs e^ei ivo 6,v^pas tov f^h KaraSvvaif 
 and Herod, iii. 79, vh^ ine\6ov(ra ^(rx^> &c. Add ibid. v. loi. 
 oSu ;'aTai' tiy Svrav. This is a very clear case of the usage of hv with a par- 
 ticiple. Cf. Matth. 597, 6, and Jelf, 429, 4. It may be resolved into Sirep 
 el iycviTo, aSvvaroi hi/ ?iaav oi TliKo-Kovviitrioi. dfioias — 'equal to 
 
 what it was before.' Cf. ii. 80, b trepiirKovs ^troiro tifiotos. This seems to me 
 correct, nor can I understand why Bl. should consider this sense so very 
 feeble, that it should be jiecessary to give the unusual force of ' an unequal 
 match for the GreeTcs ' to the words. This is inconsistent with ou/c ?ti, and we 
 should have had auriiriKov. He did not consider before this that he was 
 equally matched with the Greeks, he imagined that he was immensely superior 
 to them. He now saw that this superiority no longer existed, and therefore 
 abandoned the enterprise. 
 
 Chapteb I/XXIV. — (a.) 4if Tats vavffi — in their ships, — i.e., depended 
 upon them. Cf. Jelf upon ^v, § 622. 5i)Ku9ivros — 'whenithad 
 
 been clearly shown.' So a.yye\64vros and similar phrases are used occasionally. 
 Jelf, § 696. is auTif — 'to it,' in general reference to the circum- 
 
 stances described by the introductory words. It is important to notice this 
 use of the pronoun in reference to the discussion concerning the genuineness of 
 iii. 84, where see the long note, and cf. 22 a. 4s ras Terpa- 
 
 KOffias — * to make up the four hundred.' Speaking in round numbers, for as 
 we learn from Herodotus, the exact amount was 378. Great difficulties have 
 been made about this, because Demosthenes, de Cor. 238, the poet ^schylus, 
 and Nepos, who copied from them, call the fleet 300 only. But it is plain that 
 poets and actors, when engaged in proclaiming the glories of Athens before 
 Athenians, would diminish the number of the fleet as much as possible — ' the 
 fewer ships, the greater share of honour.' Therefore, they took the hundreds 
 below instead of above the odd numbers. Here, however, the estimate is 
 naturally more exact, though still the speakers make an exaggeration in their 
 own favour, for Herod, makes the Athen. quota 180 (viii. 44), but see also 
 viii. 61 ; and Died. Sic. (Ixv. j8) gives it as 200. It is to be observed that 
 Isocrates, Fan. c. 31, more accurately describes the Athenian contingent as 
 'more than double' that of the others, rpiiipus inrXacias /lei/ ^ jipmavTis 01 
 &\Koi. But this cannot surely justify Didot's interpretation, -rav Svo fioipuv, 
 the half. Popp. seems to incline to it, but it is quite contrary to the practice 
 of Thucyd. in giving numbers, and to the general idiom of the language. 
 airiiir a-r OS— ' the principal cause of fighting inthe strait,' sc. Salamis. GSU. 
 points out that this construction of alnos with the infinitive without the article 
 ToD, is the ordinary one. See i. 25, 33, 75, 133 ; Xenoph. Sellenie. vii. 5, § 17. 
 Kriig. adds other instances, cf. Matt. 542. in^^aare. See an 
 
 account of these honours, Herod, viii. 124, and Plutarch, Vita Them., 17. 
 
Chap. 75.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 89 
 
 Popp. and GSU. read auTol from some good MSS. for aurci;', • You yourselves 
 
 (6.) Zia^6eipavTei. It has been said that we might rather have expected 
 the mid. voice, since the Schol. interprets Sta(p6iipai iatravTss. But the active 
 represents the sacrifice as more personal, as it were, 'mth our oum hands 
 destroyed.' 
 
 (c.) TovTov — i. e.j TQv (o(pe\et(r6at, riis ovk oUffTis — 'which was 
 
 now no more' So in ii. 44, twv ovk 6vto)V, 'those who are no more' — i.e. 
 'the dead.' Similarly Herod.: Trepl ouSe/uiij; irarpiSos, viii. 57. What, there- 
 fore, is meant by ttjs (ircJAewy) ^v ^pax^if ^Air/St oijtTTjs? The '•K6Xts' says 
 Popp., must be either the fleet, or the citizens embarked in it ; or reference 
 may be made to its future restitution. This I prefer, and interpret with Kriig. 
 'for the restitution of which there was hut a very slight ground of hope.' 
 Th fifpos, when thus specified, means ' aliquanlum,' ' tooTc our full share.' Cf. 
 i. 127, ii. 67, and .Telf, § 579, 6, cf. ch. 23 c. liriig. tr. ' unsern Kraften uach,' 
 ' to the best of our power,' quoting Dem. xix. 82, SiiOrjKas rh fiipos ai. tI fifpos 
 is more usual, and Bl. would substitute it; but rh is here for the personal 
 pronoun, cf. 22 c. 
 
 Chaptee LXXV.- — (a.) &p' &(iol iirnev. I subscribe to the remark of 
 Kriig., that Spa in itself neither implies afiirmation nor negation, and 
 I may perhaps be permitted to refer the reader to a disquisition of my 
 own on the word in the Class. Museenm. The context, and the speaker's 
 intonation, make the difference in the muaning. Here with Popp. render 
 ' nonne digni sumus' and consider the subsequent \x)] to form part of the 
 verb ZmKiiaBai, so that, so far as this passage is concerned, no question 
 need be made on the distinction between Spa ^i) and Spa ovk, ' do we not 
 deserve not to he under quite so much odium in the eyes of the Greeks ?' 
 yviifjLTjs ^vviffeais. There is some difficulty about the two genitives. 
 Each has been rejected by editors, but the latter is probably added in 
 reference to ^vvsriiTa.Toi' in the last ch, and as Am. remarks, we have 
 yv^liris afidpTjifia, ii. 63. Why, then, not say 'the perspicacity of our 
 Judgment,' as well as 'an error of judgment!' apXTJs — sc. eVettei/. 
 
 Matth. § 368, Jelf, § 499; or with Bl. nndei'stand that SiuKeTirBai k.t.\. 
 is equivalent to (fidoveiodai, and takes its syntax. Or SiaKcT(r6ai may itself 
 take a genitive, in accordance with the general notion implied by this case 
 respectively to verbs indicating position. See note 36 c. 
 
 tS vtr6\onra tov ^ap^apov — 'what yet remained to he done against the 
 Persian' So iii. 10, ri uTrtJAonra Totv ipyiav. 
 
 (6.) Trpoayaye7v. As vi. i8 and i. 44, Popp., and Toij"EAA?jj'as h roffavrriv 
 sviropiav Trpo-^yay^v, Isocrat. iv. 37. Kriig. tr. ive were compelled by the very 
 nature of the case to advance it to this, its present pitch of greatness. 
 Seovs K.T.\. If these motives he meant to be taken in the order of time, this 
 will signify 'fear of Persia.' But /laAio-ra fiev points to the order of intensity; 
 it therefore signifies, yisar of the revolted allies, cf. infra. aTrotTTaifruv 
 
 KaTefTTpafifieyuv—' andivhen now some revolfers had been reduced to subjec- 
 tion.' Remark the two participles taken together. Kriig. cf. ii. 5, t&v (tipruy 
 ixo/iii/au/, and iv. 38, vii. 75. irSm S4, kt.K. 'Now no odium is 
 
go NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 entertained against any mautfor making the best disposition he can of his inter- 
 ests, in respect of matters involving the greatest risks.' Kriig. would erase 
 KivSivuv, but from what goes before, we see that the perils of the Athenian 
 Empire were the prominent argument in the speaker's mind (waAiirTa ^ei/ vwh 
 Seaus), and this allusion to them in summing up is natural. Popp. compares 
 the Homeric phrase, ov i>€fi,((rriT6v. Thueyd. repeats the word, vi. 83, vairiv 
 iveirlipeupov. Bl. adds vii. 77, viii. 50. Soph. Traoh. 1033, cf. for eZ T/9£<r9ai 
 iv. 59, TO, IfSto e5 diaQai. 
 
 Chapter LXXVI.— (o.) ^lijyeTcrfle. Cf. eh. 19 and eh. 71, ad finem. 
 Sio Traj/Tiir — through the whole war, up to the time of the final operations. 
 ffKpaTWS — vigorously, 'with a tight rein.' Cf. Soph. Antig., v. 715, and 
 Theocritus, xxv. 266, where the original physical sense is found from which the 
 present metaplior comes. 
 
 (6.) inh Toil di/SpoiTrefou — removed from, <iway from, and so contrary to 
 the common practice of mankind. The Athenians maintain and improve upon 
 the same doctrine to the Melians, v. 105. SiSofi.^i'riu. It should always 
 
 be remembered that the present participle stands also for the imperfect. Tr. 
 'proffered' tov toiovtov — such a practice, or such conduct as this, 
 
 i. e., the acceptance of power, and its maintenance by all practicable means. 
 v^lv SoKovvTfs. See ch. 95. t^ StKaloi K6y<^ — the argument 
 
 about justice, or the plea of justice, 
 
 (c.) raparvxi". On the neuter nora. part, absolute, ef. JeH, 700, 2 a. The 
 same word is used again, v. 60. With others, says Kriig., iraphv is more usual, 
 rp &v0puTrela ^vtrei. "KriXg. trans], the inclination of men. I should rather 
 render <pia-is — the natural character, or disposition of humanity — ' human na- 
 ture,' as we say. Bl. quotes, for similar usages of xpriaaiievoi, i. 130, hpyr) 
 XpTJtr.; vii. 30, irdBet XP-'t ^^* IS» eiri6u^fais XP- biKaiinpoi ^ KarA 
 
 T^c inrdpxovtrav diva^iv, lAtevaWy, more just than accorded with the scaU 
 of our existing power — i.e., more ju.H than we had any necessity to be, if toe 
 looked at our power. On this sense of Kara, according to the grade of, see Jelf, 
 § 629. TTipiiiTTri — 'has come round to be.' Arn. adds. This word generally 
 
 denotes a new and unexpected result, as in ch. 32, 120, and vi. 24. But some- 
 times simply what has happened, or befallen, as vii. 70. Cf . ch. 28 b. 
 
 Chapter LXXVII. — (a.) iKaffvovixivoi — * taking up an inferior position' 
 i. e., not taking such high ground with their dependents as they might have 
 done. They need not have had the trials at all, but might have decided the 
 points in dispute by their sovereign power. Arnold cites Thueyd. iv. 64, ofiS 
 icrov UKb^ TitraaaBai; and Demosth. cont. Dionysiod. p. 1287, ed. Reiske, T]fxeh 
 ixkv TaDTtt (Tuvex'^poujuei', ovk d.yvoovpres rh ^K t^s ^vyypa(pris SiKatov, a\A' ^yoiJ- 
 fiivoi ^itv ^KaTTovtrOai T( Kal cvyxapeli/ fitrTe jU^ SoKf7v <pi\6SiKoi flvai. The posi- 
 tion of Ka\ — yap — Kal is somewhat unusual. Kal yap, says Kriig., is ofteuer con- 
 nected with Kal following, than Kal simply, but not then witli a word intervening. 
 But Gall, remarks, that the words Kal yhp are not, ns generally, in this case to 
 be combined into a single expression ; the Kal is to be referred to the Kal follow- 
 ing in the sense of ' both,' ' and ; ' the one clause contains the cause of the other, 
 and is well explained liy GoU., ' etsi enim apud nos judicia constituimus, tamen 
 
Chap. "J"]:] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. gi 
 
 litigiosi esse videmur.' Kriig. supposes that the Kal here can mean also, even, 
 and quotes Arist. Mcclez. v. 603, K^Kr^traTo 7^^ iih. tovto, for this was even the 
 reason, the very reason, that, ^c. Cf. also Mance, v. 735. (pi\oSi/ce?j/. 
 
 Of the litigiousness of the Athenians the Vespts of Arist. forms the best 
 illustration. Cf. Aves, v. 40. ^vfil3oKalats. These suits, called 
 
 SiKat airh ^vfi06\uv, were grounded upon contracts existing between persons 
 who belonged to the several states comprised under the Athenian dominion, and 
 the necessity of trying them at Athens, owing to the expense and delay thereby 
 incurred, was one of the greatest grievances to which her allies were subjected. 
 The orator here tries to gloss it over, by making allusion only to such as Athe- 
 nian citizens were themselves engaged in. Cf. Sheppard's Theophrast%ts, note 
 on Tuvs ^4yovs, p. 73 ; GoUer in hoc loco ; Schoman de Comitiis. 
 
 (6.) oi Se — * while they,' sc. our dependent allies. irapa. ri fi)) 
 
 oTe<rflat XP^*''** — -'contrary to what they think they oughts The negative must 
 be taken in close connexion with the verb, as in the case of <pi\)ii; Kriig., who 
 also proposes to read tt^ for )>A), Cf. Matth. § 534. yi/iifiri, says Bl., is 
 
 any decision at latv ; and so, too, Kriig. j but they do not cite any instance. I 
 do not, therefore, think it improbable that it here has the more ordinary sense 
 oi a public resolution, vote, decree, or proposal. Cf. Herod, iii. 80, and ©e^ui- 
 trroKKiovs yvdfXT}, ch. 90. We may regard rov iv8eovs opposed to rod irx4ovos, 
 and supply aTepio-ii/iepoi ; hut this is needless, for it can be governed by 
 ^a\eTrus (pepetv, as we see by x'^^^'^ws (l}ep€iv ahriy, 2. 64 d, 
 
 (c.) awb roil Iffov. Is this the masculine or neuter gender ? GoU., Poppo, 
 and others seem to have decided that it is the former, ' a man's equal.' But 
 the whole usus loquendi, in Thuc. at any rate, seems to point the other way. 
 See ovK airh rod Xaov, i. 143, airh rwv S/jlolqiv ^Kaffa-ovfievos, viii. 89, atrh rov laov 
 Siii\avi/Tes, iii. 1 1, atrb rov tcrov 8€ iiri6vTes, iii. 84. Other passages might be 
 cited from other writers, as Eurip. Phaen. v. 541. I should therefore translate, 
 ' men are more angry at being wronged by law than by open violence ; for the one 
 looks like being over-reached on a footing of equality, the other like compulsion by 
 a superior force.' This Bl. calls an kKpi^oXoyla, or over minute distinction ; to 
 me it appears plain and forcible enough. Cf. for the sentiment, iv. 86, and 
 Arist. Rh. i. 1 1 . 9. 
 
 (d.) KaBexSvTi^—' after having overthrown us.' Cf . i. 4. Sp|aiT6 — 
 
 'were to assume dominion.' Kriig. compares irirti^ovrei iis Zeis /i^fiwor' Hp^^ier 
 Beiiy, JEsch. Prom. v. 203. rh ruicTepav Sios — ' the fear of which we are 
 
 the objects.' Objective gen. expressed by pronoun. Cf note on ch. 69 e. 
 ffTTEp K.T.X. — 'if your policy is going to be such as you evinced symptoms of its 
 being, when ye headed for a short time the confederacy against the Persian.' 
 i/MiKTa — sc. v6futm, i. e., 'institutions which do not amalgamatewith those of the 
 rest of Greece.' On this meaning of dp-iKra, Bloomf aptly quotes Jisch. Ag. 
 312, olfim $oriv ifiiKTOV 4v Tr6\fi irpiirciv — u|or t' S\ei</>t{ t' e^x^'"' touti^ Kvrei, 
 Stxoa-TaTovvT &v, oil (piXif Trpoaevvinois ; and Kriig. (p'lKois t' S/iiKTiSs eVri Kai 
 irairp irri\fi, Eurip. Stobceus, 10, 7. See, for the well known fact, i. 144, 124, 
 ii. M. In what follows, allusion is perhaps made to Pausanias. The same ob- 
 servation was made by Aristotle and Isocrates, Panath. ch. 82. ols. 
 This is one of the passages quoted to prove that vofil^ei governs a dative. Cf. 
 ii. 38, iii. 82. See note upon this last passage. I am not satisfied that the 
 
92 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 preseut one proves anything, for we may easily supply XP^"'^"'' ^^^ tli^t 
 yoij.l(eii/ is constructed with an infinitive is, as Krug. says, plain even from 
 SttAo all mtilCovffiii (x^tv, Herod, vii. 85, and cf. Thuc. ii. 15. If any one 
 prefers the former construction, vo/ii^fi must be rendered ' attaches a value to.' 
 
 Chaptee LXXVIII. — (a.) ov — supply $ov\(viiiei/oi. Trpo<r6^<rflf. 
 
 Bring upon yourselves. So i. 144, KivSii>ovs Trpo<rTt6e<r6ai. Kriig. quotes ouSEi; 
 irdf^^njtr' iSia irpotrSetrBai Kaudf Eurip. Ser. 147. rhv irapd,\oyo^ 
 
 Used by Thuc. only as a substantive, but see ii. 61, 85, iil. 16, vii. 28, Kriig. 
 
 (S.) ircpuo-TOO-flai. See note upon wepietrTii, eh. 76, ad iinem — ' w/ien pro- 
 longed, is wont to bring things round to the influence of accidents — to the award 
 of chance/ Kriig.; cf. i. 69. airexotiev—from which one of us is no 
 
 further removed — i. e. further exempt — than the other. &iroT4p(as 
 
 eiTToi — in which of the two ways it will turnout. Cf. with Popp. eh. 82, KaBir. 
 Xup'fiffft. iv a5^\9J KivSvveieraif means ' the danger isrunwhile ii 
 
 is as yet uncertain.' On the impersonal use of the verb, cf. ch. 73. 
 ^St; is to be taken in connexion with KaKowaBovvres, when now they have got 
 into difficulty they address themselves to deliberation — or rather to discussion, sc. 
 diplomatic. Cf. vK^tXTov a^dixevos \6ywv, Alcestis, v. 967. 
 
 ((?.) dpuvres — sc. ^v rySe afiapric^iivTas. avQaiperos — ' of our 
 
 own free choice' i. e., before we have been compelled to modify it by the course of 
 events. triroj/Sfij — sine articulo, noifio Jrea^^reafy; cf. ch. 67. 5^/cj;. 
 
 For in the thirty years' treaty (}. 115) this provision had been made; cf. i. 140. 
 Aueo-floi, the midd. voice, <o have our differences arranged. Cf. i. 145. 
 ci 5e iiii. This is the reading of twelve good MSS. and Popp. Bekker ami 
 the other editors take the common reading, fj, which has precisely the same 
 meaning in some passages. Kriig. quotes Soph. i'Aj7. 1341 ; Lysins, xxv. 14; 
 Dem. ii. 8 ; and Stallbaum, Plat. Uep. v. 463 d. i>i;>r)7TJo-fl€ — ideau 
 
 est quod npo^iyriiTdf, Goll. Am. says they do not express the same part of the 
 same idea: the first expresses precedence; the second, the nearness of the 
 leader. Kriig. refers to the Lexicon Flat. There is an ellipsis of 6Siv, 
 
 Chaptek LXXIX. — (a.) Kartt a(^as avrovs. What is sometimes ex- 
 pressed by Koff iavTois, as iv. 38, vi. 13. All strangers were ordered to with- 
 draw ; i. «., the allies who had come to the conference. The great assembly ol 
 the Spartans, we thus see, decided upon questions of peace and war. 
 
 (J.) ^irl rh airb l<j>fpov — 'fended to the same point.' Kriig. rightly ex- 
 emplifies this by the use of the verb in 6Shs (pepn. There is a similar use otfero, 
 ' In novii fert animus.' Ovid. Metam. v. i. Bl. quotes Herod, viii. 100, irKiov 
 e(pepe r) yvii/JLii narepyiffaaOai riiv 'EAAaSa. 'ApxiSa/j-as, i. e., the 
 
 Second. He succeeded his grandfather Leotychides, as his father Zeuxidamus 
 had previously died. 
 
 Chapteb LXXX. — (a.) to is iv rp aurp T]XiKia Spa. The simplest ex- 
 planation is to supply ifiirelpovs SuTas. Others not so correctly have interpreted 
 — and I see among you those of the same time of life as myself. tiko 
 
 takes in any of this class indefinitely — • a man.' Remark the studied variety 
 produced by the transition from iireioin to vajiiaavTa. See ch. 38 c. 
 
Chap. 8i.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 93 
 
 cra<pp6i'a!S — without extravagance, or exaggeration. 4icKoyl(oiTo — 
 
 compute it to the full, i. e., with all its chances, &c. 
 
 (b.) vapS/ioios — ' of the same description,' i.e., military rather than naval. 
 Compare Aristotle, IRhet. i. 4, 4, ai'a7Katoj' el^ivat rai hwdn^is irSrepov 
 Sfjtoiat ^ av6noiat. Arn, The Koi which stands before affruyelTovas does not, as 
 sometimes happens, so much introduce a new idea, as a part of the original one. 
 Popp, compares v. 112, 2, airh tuv avdpdntov Kal AaKtSaifiotfiajv, vi. 20, 3; 
 vii. 68, I. 4<l>' exacra. The neuter is employed because the idea is 
 
 general, including their towns, &c. koI Vttttois Kai SjrXoir Kal Sx^V- 
 
 The equites, the heavy-armed infantry, and the remaining population which 
 served as rowers or light-armed infantry. There is no necessity to say that 
 Sx^V is ' put for light-armed troops,' an assertion which Bl. combats, cf. vi. j 7, 
 ox^^ois ^vfifilxTois, mixed populations. evi ye. Jelf, 735, 5. 
 
 Bockh computes the whole at about 500,000, whereof 180,000 belonged to the 
 town and harbour. Niebuhr, Tbrtrag. iiber alte Lander- u. Tollcerlc., p. 108, 
 expresses an opinion that the general estimate among the ancient writers of 
 Athenian population, especially of the number of slaves, was much too high. 
 
 (c.) p.i\r)T^(Xop.^v. Kriig. supplies rh vaurtK6v from ra.'is vavaiv, comparing 
 i. 121. But the word may stand independently, like our own verb ' to practise ;' 
 thus we have toJis Tof (Jtos fjuKiTuvTas, ' the archers practising.' Xen. Jlell. iii. 
 4, i6. So also, though less certainly, ii. 86, ixtXerUvTes Kal Trapea-Kevairiihoi 
 r7]y vavpi-axiav, 1. 64 b. XP^^°^ iyetrrai — * Time will intervene,' i.e., 
 
 'that will take time,* as we say. t^ Kotvtp — ' The public treasury.' 
 
 The phrase is not unusual. Herod, vii. 144, Ste 'ASTjcaioim yevofiivav 
 XP^/J-i^TQiy fxeydXatf iv T<p Koiift^. Cf. Arist. Fol. ii. 7, 6. ^epo/te;/, 
 
 for the more usual compound ia<l>ipoiifi'. 
 
 Chapter LXXXI. — (a.) t$ ir\i\Bei — population. Itti^oituvt^s. 
 
 The verb (poirda is a frequentative, hence (poiTay is said of ' attending school,' 
 and also of ' courting,' as the suitor regularly visits his mistress. We may 
 therefore translate, * hg maTcing frequent, or regular, incursions' 
 iird^ovTai. ' They will bring in from abroad.' Pop. quotes (titos iiraKTSs, vi. 
 20. Kriig. TTcJj'Ta i-naxri, vii. 28. I would add. Soph. Trach. 258. (Ed. Col. 
 1522. Ajax, 1275. There is therefore no necessity for Popp. to remark, 
 ' nsitatius h^c vi eadycaOat.' On the fact compare ii. 38. 
 
 (J.) $\a}p6iiiBa. Passive, says Krug., as vi. 64. It is rather one of those 
 cases already (ch. 68 c, Jelf, 562, 3) noticed where the reflexive force of the 
 middle runs into a passive sense. 'We shall do ourselves more damage than we 
 shall do to them.' See note i. 68 c; i. 81 b, andii. 87. to. irKiiw — 'onthema- 
 jority of matters' 4v roiTtp. D. has translated, 'and in such a time' nxii 
 T. K. A. quotes Bothe's ' interea.' But why should it not be, ' in this case,' 
 or, contingency, i.e., that expressed by the previous words? iraue^fferai. 
 
 ' This form without the a is found also ii. 77 ; v. 91, 100 ; vi. 59.' Popp. 
 <\)povi)p.aTi. I regard this as a causal dative. T. K. A. renders, the Athenians 
 with their usual magnanimity. I should prefer to say — owing to their high 
 spirit, such I think being the real force of the word. Theologically the 
 (ppimilitt ffapxbs is the spirit of pride naturally inhering in man's heart. Ou 
 M^Tc omitted, cf. .lelf, § 77=, 3, and on tjipSi: ib. 603, 2. 
 
94 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book L 
 
 bov\€v<rai — *he the slaves of their land' i. e., be so servilely attached to their 
 property as not to sacrifice it to the common good. We may also connect 
 ^QvK^vffai (ppov4\fiaTt — 'slaves inspirit.' KaTairKfiyrivaL — VA.'tohe 
 
 struck down' i. e., to be dismayed, and paralyzed by the war. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXII. — (a.) oh y^^v oliSe. These particles are often thus 
 employed in qualifying a previous statement. The oi generally denies, the 
 ovSf particularizes, as Hoogeven says, 'not that either I mean to recommend.' 
 avaitrOTiTas lias doubtless reference to tlierb orafo-eiiTov, charged against them 
 by the Corinthians. The word denotes dulness of the natural perceptions, 
 ' want of feeling,' and is metaphorically applied to indifference to the wrongs of 
 the allies. See the analysis of characters connected with this element, viii. — xv. 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus. Karafupap. The Sch. explains iKeyxf". 
 
 lxi]B' iis f'TTiTpe^pofiev. GoU. interpretation is, * nor to let them see that we do 
 not mean to notice their conduct.' But it is the direct antithetical expression to 
 TToKtfiov, thus constructed upon the principle of variety, cf. 38 c. The meaning 
 therefore is, 'neither too plainly indicating that we shall go to war,' nor do the 
 opposite thing, i. e., permit them to go on as they are doing, ^v aSiKwffijf ovk 
 iitnpi^ovaiv. Xen. Bist. ii. 4, II. Cf. Jelf, § 804, 4. 
 
 (6.) ^vnfidxoiv ■npoo'ayuy^ — to this is opposed subsequently to ainiav 
 iKiropi(iiii(Sa ; with respect to the latter word, it may be doubted what force 
 should be attached to the prep. iK. It may either imply ' full, complete prepa- 
 ration,' or, as Kriig. says, it may have reference to the difficulties out of which 
 they had to extricate themselves. He compares i. 125; vi. 83. We may add 
 the similar use of the Latin ' expedio.' ' Expediunt per acuta belli,' Horace. 
 aiiTuv, Jelf, § 504. aviTci^Bovov of course implies after it a word 
 
 which stands as antecedent to the relative Sffoi. There is nothing invidious in 
 the enlisting of foreign allies hy all such as, ^c, cf. Jelf, § 817, 7. 
 
 (c.) Ka\ ^vo Koi TpiSiv. l}wo, or it may he three years. On this adversative 
 Ka.1, cf. 80 b. fiv 5o(cp — ' in the event of its appearing desirable,' 
 
 cf. 42 a, 120 c. Connect this with 1/ue;/ iir' avrovs, 'ne<ppayfi4vou 
 
 ' Better fenced and secured;' the metaphor seems to be taken from a fortified 
 camp. vTTotrTifialpovTas. Note the force of the preposition, jm»^ 
 
 indications of. So Aristotle, S(h, iv. 2, KaBdirep ruSvofia viroffrifj.aii'ti. 
 
 (d.) fi^ ykp K.r.K. 'Look not upon their land as anything else than a 
 hostage or pledge for you to hold.' Bloomf . well compares a similar declaration 
 of policy, Livy, v. 42. ' Non omnia concremari tecta ut piguus ad flectendos 
 hostium animos haberent.' ou;^ ^traov — ' all the more in proportion 
 
 as.' iwiyoiav—' the casting away of all hope, recklessness, 
 
 despair,' " better reading than awdyvoiav. Archidamus throughout urges the 
 principle that we ought to build a bridge for a flying enemy. 
 aKjiTTTOTipovs cx'"' — Actue them more impracticable to deal with. 
 
 (e.) Tois iyxxitiaaiv iirtix^evrts. Pop. expresses a doubt as to the 
 genuineness of these words. T. K. A. is particular in pointing out that toii 
 iyxXiiiatri must not be taken with i-Kiixeei/rfs. Yet it seems to me much the 
 simplest way to do so— 'having been egged on, excited to premature action, by ths 
 charges which our allies have brought.' Where is the impropriety in sense or 
 construction P Trpi^oniv. Arnold. Ertig. Trpi\m)i.ev. Vulgo. Fopp. 
 
Chap. 84.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 95 
 
 Bekker. This of course involves the well-known question whether the canon 
 of Daives be correct, which asserts that Siruj //.ii cannot be joined with the sub- 
 junctive aorist except in the passive voice. No intelligible reason can be given 
 for the dogma. All that can be said is, that the future is the more lively and 
 graphic form, as approaching more nearly to the oratio directa, and is therefore 
 almost universally used by the Attic writers. I should therefore retain it where 
 there was any MSS. authority in its favour. The later copyists, in their frigid 
 attempts at correctness, even invented subjunctives in cases where they had 
 no real existence, e. g., \i)aaai, Siiaaxri, &c. Therefore, as Am. remarks, the 
 mere number of the MSS. which give irpd^aiiitv ought not to force it upon us. 
 aXax^ov Kol SiroptSTepoc. The comparison is generally supposed to be with 
 the Athenians, but it may be with their own previous condition. tup 
 
 iSlmv — ^for, as the Schol. remarks, the private interests of Corinth were not 
 necessarily shared by all Peloponnesus. (iirpeiras BiaBai — to settle in 
 
 siich a Wat/ that both parties may have specious reasons for concluding it, i. e,, 
 as a salve to their vanity, cf. ch. 21 a, and iii. 65 b. x^P^"'"- The 
 
 simple verb, says Kriig., does not occur in the future indicative active save in 
 this place. The middle future, x"?^""/^"'' ^ always found. Yet in the com- 
 pounds, as he shows by abundant instances, the active form, x^P'^"'"' '^ more 
 common. 
 
 Chaptbe LXXXIII. — (a.) xp^M^^o f tp'"''''*'- Remark that there should 
 be a comma before XP'^/^"'^"' '"^ order that we may translate ' iique tributa 
 ferentes' for the orator evidently means to contrast them with their own allies, 
 who paid no such contribution. ohx SirAo?!' k.t.A. — ' depends not 
 
 so much upon arms as upon money,' i. e., its result would not be determined so 
 much by the iirst, as by the second. Si' t/)v. It may be right to 
 
 say with Kriig. that 5io with the genitive denotes tlie instrument or means, 
 with the accusative the occasion [Veranlassung] of an act, but obviously the 
 two frequently run into each other. ' How oft the sight of means to do ill 
 deeds. Makes ill deeds done!' and but little distinction can be made in our 
 version of them. Kriig. cf. &i>9pti>jros av^dverai Sick rh iaOieiv koX nivav, Plat. 
 Ph(Bd. 96 0. It may be. here, ' it is only through the opportunity afforded by 
 which that arms do any good.' &\\ais re Kal here stands simply with 
 
 a noun. Kriig. quotes iroXXa i,v tij exoi, iiWiaj re Kol jiiirup, iliTiiv, Plat. Crit. 
 50 B. 
 
 (b.) T03V airo^aiv^vruv rT}s alrias. Remark the present participle, 
 and for explanation, see ch. 24 d. aWia is employed in an intermediate sense — 
 • the responsibility of the consequences.' iir' d/x^iJTcpa — 'for either 
 
 result,' i.e., good or bad, cf. ii. n ; iv. 17. oStoi rather unusual 
 
 in the first person — ' we who stand in this position.' 
 
 .Chapteb LXXXIV.— (a.) ri jSpaSu Ko! rb fiiWov—'Of the slowness and 
 procrastination, which is theprincipal thing they bring againstus, he not ashamed.' 
 If the rb be omitted before fueWoy, it is a case of Granville Sharp's canon. See 
 note 18 a. According to Kriig. the gen. tiixuv is governed by S, 'the quality 
 of ours which they most find fault with.' Ho quotes, in illustration, Plato 
 Legg. 685 A, -ri. ii.en<^6iiiiios ouraic \4yeis; but cf. Jelf, on ^fVipocToi, § 495. 
 
g6 NOTES ON THPCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Kal a/ia. Kriig. remarks that the second reason here introduced by xal, is 
 reiiUy to be gathered by inference from the statement, and is not found in tlie 
 btatcmcnt itself. The wisdom of their usual cautious policy may be inferred 
 from the greatness and glory to which, under it, their city had attained. 
 
 (i.) Sunarai tovto ftvai. We must understand tovto as a repetition of 
 rh jSpaSu k.t.X. Sfiiarai is here, as in some other places, amounts to, is equiva- 
 lent to, a wise moderation. Twv . . . ^TToTpvv6vTuv, Thc genltivc 
 depends upon riSoi^ — the pleasure me receive from those who urge us on into 
 danger contrcury to our own convictions. aveirelcrBTiiiey — 'are we 
 ever brought over to tlteir views,' remark the true indefinite predication of the 
 aorist. The force of the prep, is the same as in a.iiaiiii.!rKeiv. 
 
 (c.) t6 ixiv in K.T.A. The argument is a sort of sorites. ' Good discipline 
 (ri eiKoajiov) produces a sense of shame [alSdi] ; a sense of shame produces a 
 manly spirit {(Infiuxla), and a manly spirit produces martial excellence (ri 
 5roA6|uiK(ii').' We see that oiSij is employed as the equivalent of oiirx>iiTj. The 
 expression irXeiffToy /terexf is repeated, iii. 83, rh ei/tjdes, o5 rh yevvaiov irKiiaTov 
 fifT^xfi, either, verg largely partakes, ox, forms a very large ingredient. See 
 note there. The speaker proceeds to show that t!> eiKoiriiop produces practical 
 wisdom also — inasmuch as we are brought up with too little pretence to learning 
 to despise the laws of our country (on afioBia as an intellectual habit, cf. Shep- 
 pard's Theophrastus, p. 115, and note on iii. 37), and with too much severe self- 
 control and modesty to disobey them. After ■Kaitiv6ii€voi Popp. supplies (o&r«s 
 Slump) jU7) virepopav. Kriig. prefers to understand olol re. Most readers will 
 call to mind rh rSiv t/Sfi-ajit vo^dyrepov Qtir^lv eXvai, tout* iirriv % 4y tois itraivovfievois 
 v6p.Qis AirayopeueTat, Ai'. Rhet. i. 15. ^py<P ^ire|tecoi. Poppo doubts 
 
 whether iropao-Kci/As is to be understood after the verb, which will then be taken 
 in the sense of ' exequi,' or whether, with GoU., we are to supply rhv K6yov, i. «., 
 tA A.fx^ei'To eis yLfji^iv Ttav irapauK^vwi/ ruv iroXefiiuv; in which case he says we 
 must render ^irefieVai by persegui. Both, though intelligible, seem to me 
 somewliat obscure explanations. Possibly the whole may mean, after criti- 
 cizing speciously the preparations of the enemy, not to prosecute the war against 
 them in any corresponding scale; iwe^Uvai avTo7s,to assail them; i,vofioiws, not 
 on a scale corresponding to our affected superiority, Gf. Ipyp 4ire^4pxfT'"t 
 i. 120; iv. J. va/ii^ay TtapavX-rialovs. Our view of this passage 
 
 depends upon the method in which vapairKiiaious is to be constructed. If with 
 Ar I., GoU., Bl., we connect it with Kal, as similis atque, the words mean. We 
 are taught to hold the plans of our neighbours to be very like the ordinary acci- 
 dents of war, that is to say, quite undejinable by any process of reason. For my 
 own part, I believe that Thuc. would have admitted the policy of our enemies- 
 to be quite a fair subject for rational conjecture, inasmuch as it is sure to be 
 founded upon certain common and unvarying principles of human nature. See 
 his sentiments upon the point, iii. 82, and infra, ito\i re Siafepeif ou Su vo/jki^ur 
 6,v6puTrotf avGpojirov, a sentiment introduced by t6 as if contained b}' the pre- 
 ceding, not by S4, as if contrasted with it. I therefor prefer the other inter- 
 pretation (Pop.), }Fe are taught to believe that the schemes and policy of our 
 neighbours are very like our own, and that the accidents of war are matters quite 
 undejinable by reason. There can be no objection founded upon the fact that 
 irapawKrjcrtous is not followed by a dative, for we have such phrases as toioCto 
 
Chap. 86.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 97 
 
 Kol vapaTr\ii(na. To the other ohjection, that in this case we should have /iij 
 and not ov, I should reply by translating as above, making, in fact, ov — K6yij> — 
 SiaipcTas one logical term, equivalent to iSiaiperas. Mr. Grote's version. We 
 think the capacity of neighbouring states is much on a par, does not appear to me 
 to cast much additional light upon the passage. ae\ Si. We always 
 
 practically malce prepa/ration against our opponents on the assumption that their 
 schemes are good. We do not calculate on errors, and false moves on their 
 part, ^f eK^lvuv^dependent onihem. iv toTs avay- 
 
 Kaiordrois. Goll. renders 'in usu rerum, et omnino in agendo magis quamin 
 eloquentid.' Grote, 'in the severest trials,' and so Kriig., quoting 6 ftij SapeU 
 ivSpuTTos ov iraiSeiieTai. Am., in what is most needful, wherein he is followed 
 by Dale. But has the word ever this meaning ? It is possible also that some 
 allusion is intended to the strictness of the Spartan discipline (^jrin-ocoj Str/tTjirir, 
 2> 39 b), where the soldier was obliged to put up with the merest necessaries 
 of life, the minimum with which they could do, cf. ch. 90 c. 
 
 Chapteb LXXXV. — (o.) /J. e\ eras— institutions, T. K. A. Eather 'habits,' 
 or more literally, 'practices,' Cf. 80 c. a(f}e\ovuei/oi — 'to mvr benefit' 
 
 exo/a€i' — 'maintain.' eTepuv. Strictly speaking, we should have 
 
 had ^ erepois. . Kriig. quotes ii. Jl, vi. i. Sia l^x'!"'. The 
 
 Sclioliast explains 5i' ^f exofiev Io-x'lh'. Cf. 83 a. ^y ^pax^'i ^opicp 
 
 TjfxEpas — 'in the brief space of a day i' i. p., the brief space of time which a day 
 comprises. Cf. 'Horse momento,' Hor. Sat. i. i. 4. 
 
 (c.) Sixas SoDcai. As in c. 28 — to submit the matter to arbitration. 
 SiSfi^To, The present or imperfect participle is of course, 'the man who 
 proffers arbitration.' 
 
 (d.) efs Tmv e^6pav. On the ephors, see the excellent information 
 amassed by C. F. Herman. Pol. Antiquities, § 44, English transl., and Grote. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXVI. — (o.) iJiev here not followed by 5e, expresses a contrast 
 to the actual deeds of the Athenians, which the speaker does not specify. 
 ov yivdiffHu) — ' I do not understand,' Dale. But it is not cognovi, so much as 
 cognosco — I cannot malce out; 1 shall not enterupon the consideration of : he 
 means he is not going to give himself the trouble of studying it. On the con- 
 trary, T. K. A., after Bloomf., makes yiviisKa mean much more than ' under- 
 stand ;' according to their view it contains the additional notion of ' approve.' 
 
 (b.) Ka\ rSre (ij/J-ey) Kal vvv iff/jey. An ellipse common enough in all 
 languages. ol S 4. Here we must consider Se, as it not unf requently 
 
 is, a causal particle — 'for their suffering wrong is no longer a matter of the 
 future.' On this pronominal 01 5€, cf. Jelf, § 768, 3. ovS\ Zim. 
 
 Koirea. Tr. nor must we decide matters by lawsuits and debate, seeing that it 
 is not in word that we are wronged. Popp. remarks that the accusative aiiTois 
 $\avrofJi4yovs is not governed by SiaKpiT^a, ' nee ob addita /col aiirohs per (Tx^y.a 
 Sict ii4aov explicari possit;' but that it is to be constructed like airo^oyTjiro/ieVoui, 
 ch. 72. It agrees, therefore, with ^/uas, understood. But cf. Jelf on itapa- 
 Soreo, § 383. 
 
 (c.) )caTaTpoBi5(5|Uey. The preposition exerts a force which must not be 
 overlooked. Tr. ' betray to utter ruin;' this meanina; it of course acquires from 
 
 H 
 
98 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I, 
 
 the notion of down from the top — 'ruit alto a culmine Troja.' iwia/ifi. 
 
 TTphs Tobs ctSiKoSi/Tas. Some doubt has been expressed about the right con- 
 struction of these words. Popp. hesitates about the preposition ; Kriig. asserts 
 that ^iricVai is rarely constructed with a simple accusative. But the text is 
 confirmed by iv. 92, trphs rohs /x^ afivvo^ivovs iiriSyreSj and ii. 65. Otherwise 
 a dative is more usual. 
 
 Chapteb LXXXVII. — (a.) iTri\firi<pi(u — 'to put to the vote' should be 
 noticed by the junior student, and distinguished from \fni<fil(oixai, ' to vote.' Its 
 usual construction is with an accusative of the person, or a dative ; here (Kriig. 
 conjectures) Thuc. wrote 4s ixKXritriav, to avoid a double accusative, for ToiaDra 
 also depends upon the same verb. He would now strike out es, quoting 
 €TTi\\n](f>l(eii' Tovs •trap6vTaSt ^ISLtOy GorffiaSy ^J^ A. Spfiija-ai. In this 
 
 place transitive, as i. 127, ii. 20. The act of Sthenelaidas was probably 
 grounded upon the assumption, that many of those who had raised their voice 
 for peace, would not dare to vote for it openly. tfiTJfov iirayaryfTv is presently 
 employed in a similar sense. St^j /i^ SoKoda-iv, On /*^ with indie 
 
 cf. .lelf, § 743, I. 
 
 (h.) ava(rr7}Tw 4s . . . x^P^°^ — ^I/ei him rise up and go to that place.* Tliis 
 is what is called the ' usus prasgnans,' which is not uncommon with verbs which 
 imply motion of some kind or other. Kriig. quotes vii. 49, viii. 45. See note, 
 63 b. The idiom is less common in Latin, but Popp. has produced 'exsurgere 
 foras,' from Plautus, Mil. Qlor. ii. i , 3. It seems from this that the members 
 of the Lacedajmonian assembly were seated. Haack supposes that this was an 
 imitation of the Homeric practice, where the heroes seated themselves upon the 
 ground like the American Indians. 
 
 (c ) Tot's |u/i/xaxovJ — sc. the legates from their allies, who had previously 
 been ordered to withdraw. iroiavraL — pres. 'commence operations* 
 
 {d.) j^pTifiaTitravTes — 'having transacted the business.' This, it appears, 
 was especially a diplomatic word. Kriig. refers to v. 5, 61, and vi. 62. Bloomf. 
 has remarked its frequent use among all the regular imitators of Thucyd. Hero- 
 dotus (he says) would have used the middle voice; and the writers of the middle 
 Attic irpayixuTeietrdai. SiayvdjfjLt}, for Siiyvuais, is peculiar to 
 
 Thuc. Schol., ' diw'sjon of opinion.' 4v t$ erei k.t.K. This, says 
 
 Kriig., is for is rh eroy irpoK€xwp7;wuiw^ koI 4y t<^ erei uvtuv. The TrpoKe^wpi?- 
 Kuittn/ seems added as a sort of afterthought — those many years having already 
 (lapsed. This would be Olymp. Ixxxvii. 1, or B.C. 432. For the to Eu^SoikiC, 
 lOL' ch. 1 14. See also ch. 23. 
 
 Ckaptbb LXXXVIII. — (a.) ToXE^ijTta — ' that they must go to mar.' The 
 pi. in such cases as I have said seems to me a shade more general and indefinite 
 tlian the singular — that ii was a case for war, a casus belli. It might be worth 
 while to examine in this view the instances quoted by Kriig., 7ro\eM7)T6'a, vi. 50J 
 iiTix^LpriTfa, i. 118 ; TrAeuffTeo, vi. 35 ; avBexTea, i. 98; TropiTi)Tea, i. 72; iropa- 
 Sore'a and SiaxptTea, i. 86. SuvtiBuitiv. I quote T. K. A., ' of the commence- 
 ment of a state attained to = should arrive at greater power.' Thus every pos- 
 sible shade of meaning is at one time or another assigned to the aorist. How 
 much more simple is it to adhere to the plain interpretation of the tense. There 
 conJd be no reason why the Spartans should fear the coramencemf nt, any more 
 
Chap. 89.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 99 
 
 than the progress and consummation, of the Athenian power, even were theru 
 anything in the notion of an aorist to convey such an intimation. What they 
 feared was the fact itself, no m.atter when it happened, or was liliely to happen. 
 Consequently the aorist was the right tense, from its nature. Vide Appendix. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXIX. — (a.) We have here an episode relating to the fifty 
 years (in round numbers) between the second. Persian and the Peloponnesiau 
 war. The student should refer to Herod, ix. 114, with wliicli the present 
 episode is connected. fihSoii iv\ to; ■n-pdynaTa k.t.K. This is inter- 
 
 preted (i.) were hrought to the circumstances under which they prospered ; and 
 (ii.) were induced to adopt that means of administering their affairs under which 
 they prospered. From the Thucydidean usage ofirpdircru and its cognate words, 
 the latter seems preferable. Kriig. cites &^iov ivBvfiriBrii'at o'iqi Tp6TTif epxaPTai 
 4wl TCI TrpiyfiaTtt, Antiph. vi. 20. ^TraSii MrjSoi. Krtig. refers to 
 
 an historical tract of his own, discussing more especially the chronology of 
 this period, but I have not had an opportunity of reading it. Arnold points 
 out that the historical student, after finishing Herod., should proceed to the 
 perusal of the present episode, ch. 89—117, and then take up eh. 24 — 88, sub- 
 sequently carrying on the narrative from ch. 118. The digression about 
 Pausanias and Themistocles, 128—138, synchronizes with 95—98 of the general 
 sketch. Ae&jTux*^'?^" This king was the grandfather of Archidamus 
 
 the Second. After the campaign of Mycale he was sent to reduce the Persian 
 party in Thessaly and Northern Greece, but having been suspected of receiving 
 bribes from the Aleuadee, he was recalled to Sparta, condemned, and banished. 
 He died at Tegea, B.C. 469. rav iv Mvicd\ri — those who fought at 
 
 Mycale. Kriig. quotes rohs iv KapaOui/i, ii. 34, iii. 113, and Arist. -E'g'. 355, 
 Kaffa\$dffoi roils ^v H^Ktp crrpaTTryovs, and more peculiarly still, MiAriciSrji/ rhy 
 MapaB^m, to which Arist. Thesm. 806 is similar. 
 
 (S.) ^Sr). Even before Mycale. See Herod, ix. 114. M-liSaii> 
 
 4^6ifTa)v — sc. avT-fiVf while still in the occupation of the Persians. Kriig. sup- 
 plies many similar phrases. 
 
 (c.) rh Koivif . . . aiiToTs. This sort of dative is simply accounted for 
 by the common principle of the dative, which makes it the case expressing the 
 .more remote object in reference to which the action of the verb takes place. 
 This conception of the dative seems to have been but imperfectly reahzed by 
 the compilers of our common grammars, if we may judge by the mass of rules 
 collected with respect to the usage of this case. ' Quid mihi dlsus asit.' in 
 principle does not differ from Do tibi librum. oBc vnl, ..cevro. The 
 
 iSiv must in strictness be taken with the preceding SieKoni^ovro. The use of 
 '6-irou here, says Kriig., would be ambiguous. '6Biv for iKiWef birov may be ac- 
 counted for by considering that SSev does in efi'ect hold a place among relatives. 
 See Matth. § 473 ; we may also cf. Jelf, § 822, 6. Trcezen and Salamis are the 
 places meant, and also iEgina. See Her. v. 5. -rra^Sas ical yvpaTxas 
 
 wives and children. Eemark the absence of the article, aud cf. ch. 8 a, 48 b. 
 
 0^.^701. According to Herod, ix. 13, says Kriig., Mardonius had left notliing. 
 at all standing behind him. But this is a way of speaking suitable to the seuii- 
 poetic character of Herod, style and narrative ; and cannot be accepted against 
 the circumstantial statement of our author. 
 
 H 2 
 
lOO NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Chapteb XC. — (a.) rh jxeKKov — 'what was going to happen.' 
 il\Sov ir pi a Pit If — for Sio vpeirPeias, upon the principle of Qui faeit per alinm 
 ■facit per se.' Popp. quotes ^sch. coni, CtesipTi. § 95, 'A.if>iKViiTai yap irpbt 
 i/ias ovk4ti Si' ayy4\aiy, a\\' aliT6s. The dative irpeir;8efo[ is not as Bl. says for 
 4s irpfirPiiav, but denotes the modus, or manner, of their coming, as is the proper 
 usage of the dative. ra /iey answered immediately by t^ Se Tr\4otf, 
 
 pLTITe. Kriig., considering that according to grammatical principles we should 
 have had oUre, explains the deviation from the rule by the fact that the notion 
 of * prevention ' is implied. T6\p.av y^vo fidvrjy — ' the valour that 
 
 was exhibited.' Such phrases point out the true force of 7i7rO|Uai, denoting 
 existence as the result of a process as distinct from elixl. Cf. avSpdi' ayaSmii 
 fpyf yem/jLeftcv, ii. 35, and the long note on this matter, Sheppard's Theo- 
 phrastus, p. 102. 
 
 (6.) { u y e 1 ffT ^ K e 1 — 'held together,' and consequently were standing. Supply 
 TO Tfixv from TEix'C"''. Others with the Schol. understand irepi^oXos. 
 rh Pov\6u€vov Kal vvotttov. Bothj say tlie commentators, belong to t^s 
 yvdii-ns. This is true, but it seems to me that in accordance with the principle 
 of Granville Sharp's canon, both are to be combined into a single idea — the 
 suspicious purport, or hearing of their policy, cf. 18 a. For the neuter parti- 
 ciple followed by a genitive, cf. ii. 59; iii. 10; viii. 68. ovk hv 
 eX"'"'''"' "^ above, tiv 6pa>vTes, may easily be resolved into the equivalent form 
 with the finite verb = ovk hv ex^^ See Jelf, § 429, 4, and § 697. 
 avax'^'PV^'^^ T6 Kal aipopfi-fiv. * Distinguo ai'ox^pT?^'"', locum, praBsidium quo 
 reciperent sese, atpop/xitv unde eruniperent.' Both conditions might be fulfilled 
 by one place. T. K. A. well explains atpop/iiii' by the modern military term, 
 ' base of operations.* With regard to the general construction of the sentence 
 Kriig. is right in connecting is Se, as well as Sijhovvns, with 7)|iouy — in that they 
 alleged the Persian world would not by this means have, &c. 
 
 (c.) f-exp' roaovTov eus — ' up to so long a time as,' i\t. until. Thesewords, 
 says Kriig., would not easily elsewhere be found in combination. He however 
 quotes Plato, jRep. 471 B, fi^xpt tovtou, p-expt ou. &p(e<rtv. This 
 
 is Bekker's conjecture. The MSS. have atpoKTw, which is ' dum erigerent' 
 during the time they were raising ; but perhaps fi-^xpt touovtov, as A. says, in 
 this case would not have been so proper as travra xp^^^^- I have some doubt, 
 wliether p-ixP' roaovrov may not be the exact equivalent of this very phrase, 
 if fiexpt may mean, as I believe it sometimes does, not up to a certain pointy 
 but coincident in extent or duration with something that follows. In this case 
 we must render 'just during so much time as they were raising,' cf. ch. 71 c. 
 The other expression, eus hv &pw(TLv, is of course donee erexissent — 'until they 
 should have raised.' Si<ni . . . v^ovs — So as to fight from the least 
 
 possible elevation which would be sii^cient, i. e. they raised the wall to the 
 minimum height necessary for defence, and soon as ever they reached this, 
 delayed no longer. Concerning avayKaioraTov, cf. ch. 84, ad finem, (and cf. 
 Livy's 'necessarium cubile.') Si; /*o(rioii. ' We are not to under- 
 
 stand that temples are here included, for that the religious spirit of the Greeks 
 would forbid. [Acts svii. 42.] Among the public buildings we may include 
 the Mausolea and otlier tombs. So jGsoh., p. 87, 31, and Diodorus.' Bloomf. 
 ^ffToi— certainly, as T. K. A. says, a recurrence to the directa oratio, but not 
 
Chap. 9T.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lOI 
 
 therefore to be translated as he translates, from whence there might he, which 
 done not indicate the transition. raWa — Tafcei. Kriig. considers 
 
 this is a case of the ' doubled article,' and refers to his own grammar, 59, 9, 2, 
 whe,-e it is laid down, that after 6 £\\as, when another notion occurs which is 
 regarded in the light of a substantive, it always takes the article. To me it 
 seems more simple to take one phrase as the epexegesis of the other — the other 
 matters, i. e. what was to he done there, cf. note 23 c, and 108 b. This T. K. A. 
 denies, but he seems to contradict himself — if there be not a misprint. 
 
 ((i.) TO.S apx<is. 'The authorities,' i. e. the to, ev t4\^l ovra. 
 Siij-ye, sc. rill xj)6vov. This is the explanation given by Stephanus in the 
 Thesaurus. Trpov^aai^^ro — continued to malce excuses. 
 
 8 Ti oiiK iTrepx^TUi. There is some difference of opinion concerning the view 
 to be taken of '6 ri in collocations of this sort. ri, says Arn., is * quod ;' and 
 would best be translated into English, ' When auy one asked him about Ms 
 not coming, lit. as to that he came not, before the government.' This nearly 
 agrees with Madvig's view, who classes the idiom with those where 3ti denotes 
 a circuinstance or relation which takes place, and of which something is said — 
 e. g. TO ixiv ^AAa opdus ^koucos, Srt Se Koi ifj.e otet elireiv rovro, Tcap'^iKOvaas. 
 Plato, Frotag., where he translates 3ti, but as to the circumstance that. Com- 
 pare some very similar remarks of his concerning q^uod, Latin Grammar, 
 § 398, b. R. 2. We might illustrate by Hor. JSp. i. vii. 94, Quod te per 
 Genium, dextramque, Deosque Penates Obsecro et obtestor, where Orelli ob- 
 serves, ' Est relativura infinitum Si6ti propter quod.' Kiihner (Jelf, § 849, 3) 
 says, ' The relative on, quod, refers to a demonstrative in the principal clause, 
 expressed or supplied, as tovtc^, Stk rovro, 4k rovrou, &c.' Other Grammarians 
 consider ians to resemble Siruu, Hiras, &c. ; that is to say, the adverbial and 
 pronominal forms of questions used in the indirecta oratio, are framed from 
 those of the directa oratio by the relative prefix 6, which is indeed the symbol 
 of their connexion with what goes before. Thus ttus is answered by Sirais, and 
 on the same principle rls by 'dims. So on this principle r\ ovk iirepxerai, bcr 
 comes in the indirecta oratio, ijpero avriv, '6 ri ovk iivipxoiro, or inepx^rat. 
 
 Chapteb XCI. — (a.) rav 6,\\av a<piKvovfjL4vaiv. Poppo would read 
 Tivuv, and he, with others, greatly disapproves of rwv &Wuv. To me the diffi- 
 culty does not seem insuperable. I had always supposed the words rav aWaic 
 to be simply exclusive of Themistocles — ' W7i.en every one else came and told 
 them, i. e., when every one else who came, told them.' Mr. Dale has I see hit upon 
 nearly the same words in his version, and I believe we are right. For certainly 
 I have observed other cases where &K\os occurs even ' cum articulo,' and not 
 less strangely than here, e. g., rwv TroMrwv koI tSov &\\oiv ^evwif. Plat. Gorgias, 
 473 0, and again avrov koI ruv &\\ajif oiKeiwi', 840 D ; see also Eurip. Merac, 
 644; Ar. Equites, 905. Kriig. says that ot &K\oi often occurs where We 
 should have expected to find &\\oi, because the article only implies — the others 
 who have any connexion with the matter in hand — ' the only other persons to be 
 considered.' Xaii^av^i, i. e. ri riZxos, understood from Teix'Cfai. 
 
 (J.) icol TtKov — had even arrived, i. e. in reference to the long-existing ex- 
 pectation of their coming. 'Affpiivixos—' commanded the ship 
 stationed at Thermopylae, to communicate between Leonidas and the fleet 
 
102 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 stiitioned at Artemis.' T. K. A. See Herod, viii. 21. d-ir6Tf 
 
 aKoi(reiau. 1 Ciinnot understand the doctrine that (as T. K. A. has it) this 
 phraseology represents the aor. subjunct. of direct narration witli &v, and is to 
 be translated — ' when they should have heard.' Why should not the simple 
 optative retain its ordinary indefinite meaning — ' when the ZiacedtEmoniann came 
 to hear of it, whenever that might he V cf. twi/ v^Siv fes Kvra^vffito.v, ch. 50. See 
 Jelf, § 844 a. 
 
 (c.) iyravBa 8^. Popp. note is 'post partic. ut ii. 58, est turn vera. Sail. 
 Jug. c. 7 1, turn demum, ihi vero ; similia apud Liv. j cf . Sanp. ad 2^en. Mem. iii. 
 5, 8.' The truth is that, in tliis common phrase, 5?; exerts its usual force, i. e, 
 it adds intensity to the moaning of tlie word to which it forms an adjunct — 
 hereupon then, o» if derived from ^St) denotes that the mind has at last reached 
 a point on which to pause — upon this at last. Cf. ih in connexion with relatives, 
 superlatives, &c. See note ch. i b. iis Trphf k.t.x. Popp. says, 
 
 * Consecutio verborum Iieec est rh Koiniif levai ws Trphs StayiyvdaKotfTas, k.t.\' 
 Trans. — *io come to them for the future as to men capable of discriminating.' 
 Remark the variation between the singular and plural numbers, as though 
 Theuiistocles sometimes spoke in his own person, and sometimes in that of his 
 colleagues. 
 
 {d.) /i^ airb avritraiXov irapatTKfVTJs. I think the obvious sense of these 
 words is—' where the means of military defence are not equal among the 
 parties, it is impossible that fair and equal counsels can be contributed to the 
 common interest.' Themistocles purposely, I should imagine, couched the 
 maxim in general terms, and left it to the Spartans to make what particular ap- 
 plication of it they pleased. It is not therefore needful to convey this particular 
 application in the words of our translation, nor indeed do I hold that it would 
 be correct. The Schol. and Poppo suppose that Themistocles insinuates — 
 in case of invasion, if Athens is without a wall, she might be more inclined to 
 counsel submission to an enemy than the better defended members of the con- 
 federacy. Kriig. explains, that they could not enforce their opinions with the 
 same authority as more strongly protected states. This is true, but as this 
 would be a contingency by no meaus displeasing to Sparta, we must be careful 
 not to regard it as an argument addressed to her, but as a general assertion. 
 With respect to the phrase is rh Kotvhv jSouAeuetrflat, Poppo well cf. ' in com- 
 mune consulere,' Terent. J.nd. iii. 16. i.Tr6, 'starting from,' as we might say. 
 Kriig. quotes a very similar usage from Plutarch : t^s 'EWoSos apx^'" uwdp^fi 
 fiifiaiias CLTrh T7]\iKavTris Suva/uecus, Pgrrh. 14. 
 
 Chapter XCII. — (a.) ouSc yap, here equivalent to feat yap ov. 
 Ku\ifiri — 'a Thucydidean word, cf. iv. 27, 62, and imitated by Herodian 
 viii. 1, 6.' Kriig. yvdji-qs irapaiveaei — ' a recommendation of policy.' The 
 particles 5^ and 5^0€z/ are, as is well known, frequently employed when the 
 writer is giving what is the sentiment or statement of another, and not his own. 
 Sue Jelf, § 762, 2 a. The idiom seems to me to have arisen from an ironical 
 emphasis. It is generally employed in cases where the writer himself distrusts 
 the statement to which it is affixed, and is evidently meant to mark out this 
 statement with, us I have said, somewhat of irony. But from this usage it may 
 pass into the simple index of language for which the author does not hold him- 
 
Chap. 93] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, I03 
 
 self responsible. rl} Koivif. No editor lias determined whether 
 
 this is to be taken, as the Sohol. says, for iirep toS koivov, or whether it is 
 governed by the verbal notion contained in irapaivfirn — 'a recomtnendaiion 
 addressed to the State' a/xapTavorres. This use of the present 
 
 participle seems to me akin to those noticed, cli. 24 d, and 83 b, where see 
 what has been said. Kriig. says that this verb, and aSixa also, virtually have 
 a past signification, cf. i. 38. He quotes a^aprAvtav ^T}fiiu6T)<riTai, Xen. Mem. 
 iii. 9, 12. afCTTiKXiiTas — 'unquestioned.' Sch. ovSev iyxXijOevTes, 
 
 and L. and S. 'unilamed.' There seems no ground for making it active, as 
 T. K. A. 
 
 Chapiek XCIII. — (a.) SiiAri . , . iffnv Stl — for the more usual construc- 
 tion with a participle. But perhaps a slight difference of meaning is implied. 
 Shows in its very appearance ; carries in its appearance, u, proof thai it was. 
 But see Jelf, § 677, 804, 2. vTrSKeivTai. Apparently a technical 
 
 term, for Bl. quotes Xen. Sipp. i, 2, /j.^ viroKeLfievwy o'lwv 5e? rui/ d^/j.e\iuv — 
 tr. • the foundations are laid of stones of all sorts and sizes.' 
 ^vvetpyafffL^vav — ' so hewn as to Jit into each other.' Kriig. cf. |u»'yKo5o;UT;^ero(, 
 i. 93. 4yieaTa\eya is translated by L. and S. (from the Scholiast's 
 
 €7KOTii)Ko5o|U^9i7(ray) — ' to build in.' But it seems to me that the idea of syste- 
 matic building is precisely the one which Thuc. meant to reject. Ko.TaXiyu is 
 simply to collect, and the whole word implies, I think — ' were pieJced up and 
 hastily put in.' The fact is confirmed by Col. Leake, who saw whole courses of 
 masonry formed of broken portions of Doric columns, and composite blocks of 
 Doric entablature. Topogr. of Athens, vol. i. p. 312. The eipyaanemi \lBoi were 
 from these very entablatures, sculptured in rilievo. This seems to have been 
 overlooked by the English trans., who has merely — ' wrought stones.' 
 KifovvTis. This looks almost like a reference to the proverb irdyra XiBov 
 Kiiii7v — ' to leave no atone unturned.' 
 
 (b.) vnrtpKTo avTOv. 'A commencement had been made of it,' Kriig., cf. 
 x€7rouTai, i. 6. ^irl, cum genitivo, 'in the time of.' The construc- 
 
 tion apx^y 'ABrjualots 5p|ai is, says Pop., equivalent to ipxovTa trap' 'ABrivatots 
 elcai. There is more diflSculty about kut' 4viavT6p, which, according to analogy, 
 should mean, year by yea/r, yearly. Poppo's notion is, I think, most probable, 
 that, viz., it is so connected with apxn^ ?s as to be almost equivalent to apxh 
 (car' iviavrhv oZaa. I should therefore translate, held the annual office of 
 Archon, i.e. archon eponymus. What this year was is disputed. Bockli, 
 who has published a learned dissertation, de Archontibus pseudeponymis, fixes 
 upon Olymp. Ixxi. 4, i. e. B.c; 493. Krug., in his Studia Mistor. et Philol., 
 maintains, on the contrary, that the year was 01. Ixxiv. 3, i.e. B.C. 482. 
 Clinton argues for B.C. 481, with whom Dr. Thirlwall coincides, having aban- 
 doned Kriig.'s view. See Appendix v. vol. ii.. Hist. Oreece, all of which should 
 indeed be read as bearing upon this subject. Mr. Grote has a notion of his 
 own that Thuc. meant, ' during the year when Themistooles was strategus ' 
 (vol. V. p. 338, note), but I cannot see how he supports it. \i)i€pas 
 
 rpiTs. Pop. refers to Pausanias, and the Schol. Arist. JPax, 144, from whom 
 we learn that the two were called rhp Kavedpou \iu4va and rii 'AcppoStirwp. 
 Hesychius supplies Zea as the name of the third. Kapp, de re navali Athen, 
 
104 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 iuteiprets the above-mentioned Schol. so as to substitute Ileipaia kot' 6|oxV 
 for T& 'A(ppoSl<Tiov, auTo(^u€7y, ht, of spontaneous ^rowth^ natural, 
 
 fif-ya Tpo<p4p€iy. The inSnitive mny have for its subject, avroiis vavriKoit 
 •yiyevTIfiemvs, in which case tr. the fact of their having become a naval people 
 would greatly contribute to the acquisition of power : or its subject may be ri 
 Xcp'ov, in which case tr. t/mt the place would greatly aid them, when they had 
 once become a naval people, in the acquisition of power. Kriig. aptly cites Eorip. 
 Med. 1090 : 
 
 Ka'i tprifii $poTwy olnve^ elatv 
 
 irdfinat/ &nGipot fj.T]S' itpireuaay 
 
 ToTSay, irpoipepeiy eis eyTU^^oi/ 
 
 Tw;/ yeivafieywy. . . 
 
 eliBvs, as explained by the Schol. &iia t$ (rvii$ov\iv<rai. Arnold thinks 'im> 
 mediately after the departure of the Persians.' Goll.'s idea that it means ' statim 
 postquam archon factus est/ is negatived by what follows, cf. note upon 4Te\4(r6Tj. 
 r^v apx'h", generally considered to mean'tteir dominioM,' but 
 Kinig. would rather refer it to virTJpKro. ^P^^y — * ihe commencement of 
 
 the building.' He, with his colleagues, erected a Hermes with this inscription — 
 'Ap^dfxevoi TTpwTOi reixiC^LV rbi/ 5* au46T]Kav. Kriig. Mist. Phil. Stud. p. 23. 
 
 (c.) Kal ^KoS6iiri<Tay. This description has caused some difficulty. The 
 exposition of Mr. Grote seems to convey the general opinion. • Two carts, meet- 
 ing one another, brought stones, which were laid together right and left on the 
 other side of each, and thus formed two primary parallel walls, between which 
 the interior space (of course at least as broad as the joint breadth of the two 
 carts) was filled up, not with rubble in the usual manner of the Greeks, but con- 
 structed throughout the whole thickness of squared stones, cramped together 
 with metal. The result was a solid wall, probably not less than fourteen or 
 fifteen feet thick, since it was intended to carry so very unusual a height,' 
 vol. v. p. 339. And so Thirlwall. ' The wall was of a breadth which allowed 
 two wagons to pass each other, and this space was entirely filled with hewn 
 stones, exactly fitted together within, and consolidated upon the outside with 
 iron clamps and molten lead.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] T. K. A. wonders why 
 Thuc. should tell us that they kept bringing the stones to the wall in different 
 directions, and suggests that some of the stones were imported, and therefore 
 came up from the port. I do not see that Thuc. does tell us anything of the 
 sort. I suppose a cart, after having discharged its load, would not unnaturally 
 return for another, and might meet a laden cart by the way. We need make 
 no difiiculty about eTrrryov, for this does not imply that the carts went on the 
 top of the wall, but that they brought their load up to the place where it was 
 to be deposited; as may be seen from iwdyfty rh imriiSeia, vii. 60. The 
 Schol. explanation ivavrlai, trvye^evyfi^yai : and Bothe's conjecture, ivdpjioti 
 lashed side iy side, are not to be thought of; this is clear even from Aristopb, 
 Aves, 1 124, a passage evidently referring to this very building ; 
 
 fitrr* &!/ . . . , ivavriat Su' Hp/jLare, 
 
 'Iwiroii' vir6vTo>v, pLtyeSos o(rov & Sovpios, 
 
 {jtrh Tov irXaTous ti.y TrapeKaaaWriv. [1048, ed. Bothe.] 
 
 SfSepievoi. ' Clamped together with iron and lead,' i. e. the iron clamps wore 
 
Chap. 94-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 105 
 
 fastened into the stones with melted lead. 87rcf> vvv in. We may 
 
 remark that the doubt expressed by recent editors concerning the razing of the 
 walls by Lysander, which has originated in these words, is without foundation ; 
 for they can only refer to the period at which they were written, and this may 
 have been at any time before the conclusion of the war. Cf. ap(,ifievos evBvs 
 kadurraiievov, i. i. For the more usual iv To/ifj, Kriig. reads with one MS. 
 ^vTofif. The first I should render, ' made angular in the lieioing^ i. e. cut in 
 an angular form, so that the meaning would but slightly differ from Kriig. 'g 
 instrumental diitive, which, however, would make iyydii^iot z= to T^rpdycavou 
 For this he produces the authority of Josephus, p. 108, 21. But Josephus 
 may have been imitating this passage under a misapprehension. Am. cf. 
 ii. 76, airb ttJs TOjUijs — 'from the jjoint where the stones had been cut.' GoU. 
 has ' locis quibus incisi sunt.' X**^'! — fragments made in 
 
 quarrying and squaring stone, which were used by the ancients to fill up the 
 interior of thick walls. Pliny, xxxvi. 22. Vitruv. ii. 8. Comment, on Mor. 
 Od. iii. I, 35. JEn. iv. 711. In this case X'^^'l "'^^ mixed with plenty of 
 clay — for this is meant by 7n7A.(Js, or cZay -mortar. Bl. Th Se iJi^os. 
 
 The height of the wall was finished to as near as may he half what he intended, 
 i. e. Strre Tj/ticru iivai oh SiepoeiTo. So too, I see, Mr. Grote. This I cannot but 
 believe to be correct, though Thirlwall explains — 'had intended before this com- 
 pletion of his plan.' [Vol. ii. p. 406.] aipiCTTdval e?rij3ouAas — 
 A rather unusual use of the verb, which the Schol. explains by airoTpoTrijv 
 voLeTv. Several MSS. have e-inj3oA.as, i. e. ^TridetrsLs, * assaults,' which looks 
 more natural. tuu axp^torcLTcav, i. c. rwv -rp^tT^vTartav KaX twv 
 veMToTwc. See ii. 6. Kriig. adds iii. 78. Xen. Anai, v. 2, 4. 
 
 (d.) irpofTeKeiTo. Sch. rhf vovv irpotreTxe — he laid most stress upon the 
 ships, being far-sighted enough to perceive. inix^fy^ft'^^- ^ — ' were prO' 
 
 eided with a wall.' For understanding the full force of KareaKevd^oi'To, refer 
 to ch. 10, KaracTKev^. 
 
 Chaptek XCIV. — (a.) Uavffaplas Se. This Se refers the narrative back to 
 ch. 87. For KAeiJ|a/3/)OTos, cf. Herod, vii. 71. ^CTre/Mitidri. In the 
 
 spring of the year, 478 B.C., i. e. one year after the battle of Plataja under 
 Aristides and Cimon. Diodorus, says Grote, makes the Pcloponuesian ships 
 fifty ; but his statement is not to be accepted in opposition to Thucydides. 
 iv TfjSe Tp riyefiovia. Stephens, GoU. and Kriig. connect these words with 
 the following chapter. Arnold retains them in this, because he believes that 
 Thucyd. means to express that Byzantium was taken during the term of 
 Pausanias' command, though certainly towards the end of it. This would 
 place the recall of Pausanias in B.C. 378 ; and as Dorcis, his successor, never 
 succeeded in securing the allegi&nce of the allied Greeks, Mr. Fynes Clinton 
 assumes the year e.g. 377 to have been the true commencement of the Athe- 
 nian dominion. According to this view, the building of the walls, the capture 
 of Byzantium, and the recall of Pausanias all occurred E.o. 378. Mr. Grote, 
 generally assenting to Clinton's view, adds, ' Pausanias' command, however, 
 need not be restricted to one year, as Mr. Clinton maintains, for the words of 
 Thucyd., iv Tf/Se ttj r)yeiiovicf, imply nothing as to annual duration, and 
 designate merely the 'hegemony which preceded that of Athens.' See note, 
 vol. v. p. 4 IS. 
 
]06 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Chapter XC v.— (a.) kotA rh ^vyyevis. Because the lonians^ who had 
 bceu expelled from Peloponnesus, took refuge in Attica previous to their mi- 
 gration to the Asiatic coast. See on the Ionic migration Arnold's note upon 
 this passage, and a very full account, Hermann's Fol. Ant. of Greece, sections 
 77, 78. Orote, vol. iii. ch. 13. Thirlwall, i. p. 295. airoZs. 
 
 Of the Athenians, as is obvious from the context, though (rfla-tv might rather 
 have been iinticipated. Kriig. compares v. 32 ; vi. 35 ; vii. 17 ; viii. 46. 
 &8iKia Kar-qy op tiro avTov — 'much wrongdoing was laid to his charge.' Kriig, 
 is unacquainted with the phrase KaTtiyopov/iai tiSiiclaii. ^ trrpaTiiyia — 
 
 * than a military comviand.* To read ri (TTpaTijyia with Poppo in order to 
 obtain a subject, appears to me to destroy the force of the language. Kriig, 
 aptly cites apttnoKpan-ia p.aWov if ^airiKiia vo^taBi](Terai. Herodian, v. I, 4. 
 
 (6.) auTt^, for tlie more strictly correct avT6v — 'it happened to him to be 
 summoned.' T. K. A. says, 'as both events have reference to Pausanias, 
 aiirhs is placed under the government of ^uve^rj.' fLeTard^aa-dat, 
 
 The prep, denotes as usual ' change,' and the whole is correctly given by Dale — 
 went over and ranged themselves upon the side of the Athenians, 
 evdvvdtj. The Schol. explains evdvvas SeSwKe zeal KareSiKilffOT] : lit. he suffered 
 judicial condemnation. The evOivt) was the examination (at Athens) into the 
 way in which a magistrate had discharged his office in order to see whether he 
 had acted correctly {iv6us). The meaning here therefore is clear. On tqjc 
 cud-^i/dt], cf. Jelf, § 501. Remark how the aorist merely denotes the fact,, 
 while his partial and incomplete acquittal is expressed by a transition to the 
 present aTroAtierai : the fi^ before aSiKelv is in accordance with the usual Greek 
 idiom, which affixes the negation to the part of the notion negatived in the 
 speaker's mind ; Poppo has produced a. somewhat uncommon imitation from 
 tlic Latin language, * Liberatur Milo non eo consilio profectus esse ut insi- 
 diaretur,' Cic. joro Mil. 18. 47. 
 
 (c.) x^^P^^^ ytyvtovrai. Not simply as Bl. would have it, comparative 
 for positive, but * should deteriorate.' That such was the fact with the Spartans, 
 owing to a reaction against their severe domestic discipline, is notorious. See 
 Pint. Arist. c. 23. Aristotle notices the fact, and gives the same reason for 
 it, tftrep iveX^ov — which they saw to he the case in Pausanias. 
 
 Miiller (^Dorians, i. p. 204) considers that the unwillingness of the Spartans to 
 send more commanders to Asia, lay deeper than any annoyance at the defection 
 of the Ionian Greeks. They deemed it inexpedient to aim at the mastery of 
 the sea, or run the hazard of breaking up the Spartan institutions by attempts 
 at foreign conquest. iKavo^is. See what the Athenians themselves' 
 
 say, i. 76 ; and for a Lacedaemonian witness, Xen. Sell, vi. 5, 34. Kriig. 
 ^ttittiSe/ous, properly fit. Kriig. explains <pl\ovs, but it rather means 'in a 
 way that suitetl them.' 
 
 Chapteb XCVI. — (a.) navffaviov ii,T:Toi. Objective genitive. 
 'EWrivoTa/ilai. So called because they received and then disbursed the con- 
 tributions of all the Hellenic confederacy. These contributions were originally 
 deposited at Delos, and then removed to Athens. Boeckh {Fublio Econ. Ath. 
 ii. p. 236), from some inscriptions, concludes that they were ten in number, and 
 that, like the tieasurers of the gods, they were chosen by lot, out of the Pcnta- 
 
Chap. 97-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lO/ 
 
 posiomedimiii, and that they did not enter upon their office at the beginning of 
 the year, hut after the Panathentea. Tliey (iSexoi/ro) received, but did not 
 colled the tribute. The word (p6pos became so odious, that at Olymp. u. 
 <rvi/Ta^is was substituted for it. Delos was selected for these |i5j'o5o(, or 
 ' councils,' ' meetings of commissioners.' Subsequently they were called 
 ffuvedpoi. Bekker, Anec. p. 302. Isocrates, viii. 29. For fuller iuformatiou 
 see Herm. Fol. Antiquities, § 56. Boeckh, Public Scon. Athens, p. 236, Eng. 
 trans. The Hellenotamiai were not (says A.) reappointed after the establish- 
 ment of the democracy by Thrasybulus. 
 
 Chapter XCVII. — (a.) airh koivZv. This ctTrb has, as Kriig. remarks, the 
 force of the German von. It indicates in a less intimate way than ^k the 
 source from which any action proceeds. For examples cf. L. and S. and Jelf's 
 Grammar, vac. a.w6, ^TTTJKdov, prosecuted, or executed. 
 
 irpoffTu^x""'"''''"' is explained by the Schohast ^/iTroSiXoi'Tas; perhaps it is 
 rather more general — tvho in eadh particular case came into contact or collision 
 with them. Kriig. quotes Xen. Cyr. vi. 3. 2, 01 Trpoarvyxi^'Vovrts tuv apx^vTuv 
 4Tr€fii\ovTOf and Dem. 25, 96, 6 irpoarvx^J^ aei Tifj-uptiadai. 
 
 (b.) 67pai)/ct . . . eTroiriffdiiriv. As perfects, says T. K. A. Why not as 
 aorists I am unable to determine. The fact that Thueyd. had so written is 
 all that he wishes to convey. The time of writing is of no importance, 
 eKjSoA.^, a digression, called in later Greek writers irap€K$ci(TLS. 
 fK\iires, omitted, left out, only imitated by Arrian. X'^'P^"" seems to 
 
 be here used as a sort of diminutive for the ordinary t6ttos, i. e. locus, topic, 
 (col %^a.To. This KaX is one of those which, as Am. observes, may best be 
 rendered by an emphasis upon the auxiliary verb — 'did touch upon.' It seems 
 in this and similar eases to imply, ' for all that,' ' notwithstanding what I have 
 said,' cf. ch. 20 a. ro'is xptJ^otJ — 'The chronology," and in later 
 
 writers. The reference is to the Athis, or History of Attica, which Hellanicus 
 composed in four books at least. He was a native of Mytilene (see i. 21) — 
 Aulus Gell. makes him come from Miletus — a contemporary of Herodotus — - 
 t. e. twelve years older, and sixty-five years of age when the Peloponnesian 
 war began. See Miiller's History of Oreeh Literature, ch. xviii. 7. 
 e X e * here, as elsewhere, nearly irap^x^^' ^^^ G611. on i. 9. Its subject is either t^ 
 Xupiov, or as Pop. and Kriig. suggest, Tavra from what precedes, cf. Jelf, § 898, 
 3, tr., it involves, or gives opportunity for the settingforth. Herod, i. 1 . Mr. Grote, 
 after observing that the period from B.C. 477 to B.C. 405 is sometimes incor- 
 rectly described as the Athenian Empire, and that no one word will express the 
 character of their ascendency during these years, proceeds to direct attention 
 to this portion of the work of Thueyd. as indicating the imperceptible tr.ansitioa 
 from an riyfjiovia to an apxh. ' The transition from the Athenian Hegemony 
 to the Athenian Empire was doubtless gradual, so that no one could determine 
 precisely where the former ends and the latter begins ; but it had been consum- 
 mated before the thirty years' truce, which was concluded fourteen years before 
 the Peloponnesian war, and it was in fact the substantial cause of that war.' 
 Grote, vol. v. pp. 395 — 6, where see also the long note on the rjye/i.oi'ia, as con- 
 trasted with apxv- ^^ o'^f i'p6Trq:. The prep, conveys somewhat 
 more meaning than the simple dative. Bremi, to whom Poppo refers, says 
 
I08 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 upon Lys., p. 69, TIipl Stjk. iv Toirtf t$ rpSirif ^<r0a & fit TerijuwpTi/itVoj, est cum 
 prepositione, quod nos diceremus, qua ratione iimixi, fidentes, tr., under what 
 circumstances it became established, cf. i. 8, ad fin. 
 
 Chaptee XCVIII.— (a.) 'Hi6va. 'On the site of this city, subsequently 
 the port of Amphipolis, ef. iv. 102. The words ti M STpvu^vi are added to 
 distinguish it from a Mendsean colony, and perhaps from a third Eion 
 mentioned by Eustathius.' Popp. M-fiSwp ix^"''''""- Herod. Tii. 107. 
 
 The event occurred, Olymp. Ixxv., 4, and Olymp. Ixxvi. Kriig. The capture 
 of Scyros occurred in the latter year. Grote has, I think, successfully shown, 
 that these three events could have formed but a small portion of the operations 
 carried on against the Persians, from e.g. 477 to B.C. 466. See Herod, vii. 
 106, 107. Nothing but years of active training could have enabled the 
 Athenians to acquire their remarkable ascendency in nautical skill, and their 
 various other advantages, and to the same prolonged and continuous labours 
 must be ascribed the disgust of the Ionian confederates, vol. v. p. 403. 
 
 (b.) irphs 5e Kap\v{rTiovs. Nothing is known of this. ^iroAe- 
 
 fi7t<rav. 'That this happened during the time of Themistocles* flight into Asia, 
 we learn from ch. 137, and before tlie battle of Eurymedon, ch. 100. But as 
 the date of this battle is itself undetermined, Clinton and Wachsmuth place the 
 siege of Naxos E c. 466, but Kriig. in the year E.o. 473,' Popp. 
 irap€trT'fj(Tavro — lit. 'made thcTH come and stand beside them,' is not express as 
 to the means employed to compel a surrender. That the place was carried by 
 assault seems (as Bl. has seen) implied by the words of Aristophanes, fels o-auriii' 
 Kara rod reixovs Stc S^ y' t] Nc£$os ioi\aif Vesp, 355. iSovKdidrj* 
 
 Prom what precedes, we see that this word is not so strong as avSpavoSiCfirBai ; 
 indeed, Kriig. says it is simply opposed to airiyotios, as is the case in Xen. 
 Sellenic. iv. 8, § i, z. 
 
 Chapter XCIX. — (a.) e/cSciai — 'arrears.' This is evidently so to be 
 translated, as the passages adduced by Popp. prove. Zon. et Suidas, cKSeia, rj 
 K€KpeuffiJ.4v7] XoLirds. ai Twf tpofwv iK^eiai sunt Polybio Ta Trpotroi^eiXcJ^ei'a tuv 
 6fjLO\oyq64i^7uv XP'?/**TW. Livio, reliquum pecunia3 ex eo quod pepigerant, 
 xviii. 37. The term in the Latin jurists is reZig'wa^io. XftwoffTpaTiov 
 
 — refusal, or omission of military service. The word had a technical applica- 
 tion in the Athenian law, as indicating a particular civil offence. In the case 
 of a ypatp^ XenToaTpariov, actual desertion seems to have b"p^ implied. The 
 penalty upon conviction was a fine, and complete disfranchisement of the 
 offender and his descendants. iirpaircov, as the compound verb, 
 
 iKirp(i(T(rai — ^mere very strict and exacting. To.Xanrupi'iv. This and 
 
 the cognate substantive TaKamapia denote regular and prolonged devotion to 
 labour. Wachsmuth, vol. ii. § 53, is justified in saying, 'The lonians and their 
 Greek neighbours were too much debased by sensual pleasures to prefer freedom, 
 at the price of toil and privation, to servitude which insured them the enjoy- 
 ment of luxury.' See their conduct as described by Herod, vi. 1 2. 
 Tas avayKas — 'the compulsory measures which they did employ,' said in the 
 first instance of tortures applied to extort confession. I cannot agree with 
 Popp. that there is any allusion to military engines and besieged towns cf. iv. 
 87. and Dem. ii. 29; Isocrates, iv. 81. 
 
Chap. 100.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I09 
 
 (i.) iv TiSov^ &p xoyTfi- Tliis may be considered equivalent to 7)5ers ^1/ Tp 
 ^PXV — agreeable in their government ; but sucb a use of fiSovrj must be admitted 
 to be unusual ; compare, however, our use of the expression ' in favour.' Kriig, 
 proposes to make &pxoi'Tes ^aav equivalent to ^px""! * predicate modified by 
 the phrase iv riSoinj, ' no longer ruled to the satisfaction of their allies' The use 
 of the participle with fifj-i for the finite verb is, I think, common in the Greek 
 Test., and may be found. elsewhere. S/iotas — is iv apxv M^toi rhv 
 
 Tlaanravlai', Sehol. p^Siov ■fiv. This perhaps may mean, they made 
 
 light of it, just as Juvenal uses 'facilis,' — Quels facile asdem conducere, &c. 
 iii. 31. 
 
 (c.) air6Kvqffiv, we might almost render ' shirking ,' — * t'^ying to get off".' 
 irii^ayTQ — ' they made the arrangement for themselves,' voce media. The accu- 
 sative rb LKvovfievov aviXaifia, not as Bl., * what the expense comes to,' but the 
 expense coming to, or devolving on them, may be regarded as placed in explana- 
 tory apposition to ret xp^/^'"'"- Popp. suggests another way of taking the 
 words, sc. ;^p^juaTa ira^avro ( So-Te) tpepew Th Ikv. a.voiX. ; but this does not seem 
 necessary. This sense of iKveojxai is found in Herod, vi. 65, 84, 86, ix. 26 ; and 
 Kriig. also cites Ar. Pol. iv. i, i, idv tls /^^ rijy Ikvov^^vtis iiriOvfiri firiff e'letos 
 K.T.A. &Triipoi. The common reading is 6,TTOpoi, but many of the 
 
 best MSS. read Sn-eipoi, which is adopted by Bekker, Poppo, and Goll. I think 
 they are right, for iiropoi is rather tautological, and at any rate much more 
 likely to have been substituted for ^irnpot than vice vers^. &irsipoL implies that 
 they were destitute of that experience which the practical service they had 
 declined alone could give. 
 
 Chapter C. — (a.) ris irao-as 4s [ras'J Staxoalat. There is much varia- 
 tion in MSS. and among editors concerning the article before the numeral. 
 The reading appears to me to depend upon the historical fact whether the 
 Persian fleet at Eurymedou consisted of more than 200 ships or not. Later 
 writers state the number as much higher, but they vary so among themselves, 
 and exhibit so much tendency to exaggeration, that their authority is not worth 
 much. Besides, what became of the remaining vessels not destroyed by Ciraon ? 
 Prom the necessity of the case, and indeed conformably to the usual practice, 
 the I'erslans, we may be sure, ran all their ships on shore, so that their whole 
 force might be concentrated to repel the inevitable attack of their enemy ; and 
 how, in this case, could ang of the vessels have escaped the victors ? I should 
 therefore tr. the whole of them, up to their full count of 200 —i. e. the whole 200 
 of them. Other ways of accounting for the article seem to me futile. Mr. 
 Grote has, I see, taken a view similar to the above, vol. y. p. 419, note. 
 Xp6i'if va-Tepoi/. B.C. 465, or, according to Kriig., B.C. 467. toS 
 
 fierdWov. According to Herod, the gold mine brought in 80 talents yearly 
 to the Thasians. See vi. 46-48, vii. 18 ; and read Bockh, Public JB. of A. book 
 iii. ch. 20. Thucyd. had an interest in it, through his wife, and resided at 
 Scapte-Hyle during his banishment. For an historic parallel, see Grote'a 
 note, ibid. 
 
 (i.) "Eyyeo ilois. ' On the Strymon, about three miles higher up than Eion, 
 near the spot where the river narrows itself again out of a broad expanse of the 
 nature of a lake, was situated the Edonian town or settlement called Nine 
 
no NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Ways, a little above the bridge which here served as an important communica- 
 tioa for all the people of the interior,' Grote, v. p. 421. On the Edonians, cf. 
 Herod, v. 124, vii. no, 114, ix. 75, and 'HSai/U ala Msch.. Persw, 487. 
 |i/|U7r(ivTBj'. Their destruction is ascribed to the Edonians alone by other 
 writers. ICriig. would therefore accept Valla's conjecture, ^i/iiravTes, i. e. the 
 colonists; or, with Heilman, read ^uffTdnTav. Arn. considers it natural that 
 all the Thracian tribes should combine to destroy a colony attempting to settle 
 itself in such an advantageous position as Amphipolis, especially as they had 
 already defeated a similar attempt by Aristagoras of Miletus, Herod, v. 126. 
 Histiajus, he might have added, had been similarly unsuccessful, Grote, vi. 
 p. 16. ApdBriirKos, according to Leake, is the modern 'Drama.' This occurred 
 B.C. 467 — 464. 
 
 Chapter CI. — (a.) fi^x^^^- Commentators are puzzled, as only one battle 
 is mentioned. I regard it as the indefinite use of the plural, ' hostilities.' See 
 note on iii. 65 . inreirxovro Kpvtpa, Upon this, Grote takes occa- 
 
 sion to remark, ' The first intent of unprovoked and even treacherous hostility 
 — the germ of the future Peloponnesian war — is conceived and reduced to an 
 engagement by Sparta,' V. p. 423. EtAaires IlepioiKoi. The student 
 
 must consult upon these, Arn. '3 excellent note on this chapter; Muller's J)o- 
 rians, book iii. ch. 2, 3 ; Hermann's Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 19, 24, 28, 48 ; and 
 Grote. Tov ffeiiTfLov. The article, because it was the worst ever 
 
 known in Greece, Olymp. ci. It laid the whole of Sparta in ruins, save five 
 houses, and it is said, broke ofi^ a peak from Mount Taygetus, which rolled into 
 the river Eurotas. The Spartans regarded it as a judgment sent by Neptune 
 for the murder of some revolted Helots who had taken sanctuary in his temple 
 at Taenarum. See Grote, v. p. 428. is 'iB^iniv airiffTTtaav. Re- 
 
 mark the contracted form of the expression, as in 65 b, 87 b. Kriig. quotes 
 AiroffTas ets MiJtrous, Xen. Andb, i. 6, 7. The remarkable expression of Ari- 
 stotle {Pol. ii. 6, 2) concerning the Helots is quoted by Kriig., Sia-irep y^p 4<pi- 
 Spfvovres to?s arvxrifJiafft SiaTeAouffii'. 
 
 (J.) t((te — here, BS often,' the toell-lenown time.' &daioi S4. Here 
 
 the narrative is resumed. tc^x"^ '""1 yavs — without the article, as 
 
 in the quotation of legal formulas, items in an account, and such familiar matters. 
 See note, ch. 8 a; cf. inter alia ch. 108, iii. 117. Kn8eA<ivT€j. lu 
 
 this case, as generally, the participle sine articulo expresses the conditioning of 
 the predication. This is clearly shown by the present example, since it stands 
 for ^(/)' ^— SffTE. Cf. i. 108, iii. 115, 117. Ta|o/necoi. Ct i-rd^ai'To, 
 
 ch. 99. 8cro fSei Kriig. supposes to mean arrears and the payment 
 
 of the expenses of the war. 
 
 Chaptbb CII. — (a.) i/j.riKii'fTo. Two battles are mentioned by Herod, 
 ix. 35. iWovs. 'The .ffiginetans, ii. 27; Platffians, iii. 54; Manti- 
 
 najans, Xen. Mell. v. 2, 3,' Popp. 9i\eov. Olymp. Ixxix. j, or B.C. 464, 
 
 ovK oXlyc/i. With 4000 hoplites, Arist., Lysist., Kriig. Teixofox^'"'- 
 
 So in the case of Platsea, Herod, ix. 70. Cf. Thuc. ii. 75, vii. 79. tovtov. 
 
 We must supply toC Teixo/w'X"''- Popp. refers to ttjj Swd/iews ivSfa, ch. 77. 
 '"Ei-SeS iipaly(TO quasi Ttk irpdyfiartt ray 'ABrivaiuv est dicendi genus imper- 
 
Chap. I03-J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. Ill 
 
 sonale,' Popp. ' When there was shown to he a defideney in this respect.' 
 ■ro\LopKlas, without the article, as it turned out a long siege. Kriig. quotes 
 Polyb, i. 17, 9, Tro\topKias xpo^^^ov TcpotpaivofK^vtis. 0la yh.p tiv e1\ov — 
 
 otherwise, had not this deticiency existed, they would have captured theplace Tjy 
 storm. 
 
 (6.) ^avepi, opposed to a.l-i\Ko>s iJx^ovTo, ch. 93, Popp. /it?) ti connects itself 
 with Ssiaain-es, though the cognate notion koI a\\o<j>i\ovs S,fia riyriffdfievoi inter- 
 venes. Kriig. refers to PHugk on Burip. Herac. 227, and Lobeck, Ajax, p. 268. 
 rb ToA^Tjpin' Kal t\v yewT. —' the enterprising and revolutionary spirit.' 
 Cf. ii. 87. aWotpiXovs. The never-extinguished animosity betweeu 
 
 the Dorian and Ionian race is justly considered as one of the real causes of the 
 Peloponnesian war. Clinton {Fasti Sell. ann. 464 — 461 B.C.), following Plu- 
 tarch, has recognized two Lacedseoionian requests to Athens, and two e.\pedi- 
 tions to Sparta, both under Cimon, one B.C. 464, just after the earthquake, a 
 second B.C. 461. Mr. Grote's arguments for a single expedition (vol. v. pp. 
 430, 431, note) appear to me conclusive. The earthquake took place at the 
 time of the siege of Thasos, for it was the earthquake which prevented the 
 Lacedaemonians from acceding to the request of the Thasians for an invasion of 
 Attica; but Cimon commanded at Thasos, and consequently could not have 
 led an auxiliary force at that time into Laconia. Next, Thucydides miist have 
 mentioned two expeditions had he heard of them ; nor is it probable that 
 Sparta, the first military power in Greece, should have been ail at once reduced 
 to such helplessness as to owe her safety to foreign intervention. The gross 
 exaggerations of the comic poet, Lysistrat. v. 1 138, deceived Plutarch. 
 
 (c.) ovK 6 7rl Ta $e\Tiovi — ' not for the best of motives,' as Vie shoald say. 
 Cf. Trpuavoi-rtiTis M x^^P""' Theoph. Uepl Eipuvflas, or, in this place perhaps, 
 not for the more honourable reason of the two — i.e. Sn oiiS^yirpoirSeovTai avTwp 
 6T1. 'Apjitas. On the Argives and their policy, consult Thirlwall, 
 
 ii. p. 424, and Grote, v. 429. "Argos, neutral during the Persian invasion, 
 had now recovered the effects of that destructive defeat suffered about thirty 
 years before from the Spartan King Cleomenes.' « irl tij! MljSto. The 
 
 dative is unusual, but quite legitimate, for it denotes the ' object ' against which 
 the treaty was directed. Kariartj. The verb agrees with the nearest nomi- 
 native, as is not unusual. Kriig.. quotes from Herodotus Ittitoi t€ koI i.v^p 
 Terayfieyos, 8, 98- 
 
 Chaptee cm. — (a.) Sexdrif. Krug. would read S', i. c. TerdpTif. Dio- 
 dorus also, however, says 10. i<f>' ^ i^latrtp — * on condition thai 
 
 they shall emigrate.' See Jelf. 
 
 (b.) kot' Ixflos ^8i) Ti AaKeSai/ioviai' — 'the animosity which they had 
 by this time begun to entertain towards the Lacedcemonians.' The objective 
 genitive, as ch. 96, pTuros, and ri 'KB-rtvaiav ex^os, ii. 1 1. Of. iv. i, vii. 57. 
 KartpKiO-av is — settled into, or, as we should say, in — an elliptical way of 
 speaking that has often been noticed, cf. supra 100 a, and with eV for is, v. 35. 
 The same words occur vi. 7. NatiTrawTo;/. The modern Lepanto, a 
 
 town which commanded the Sinus Corinthiacus. Subsequent events showed 
 the perspicacity of the Athenians in selecting this spot in which to locate an 
 enemy to Lacedsemon. Cf. ii. 90. Kriig.'s date for this event is B.C. 462. 
 
XI2 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book T. 
 
 (o.) irpoaex^ P'n'"^"- 0" t^i's brief notice of a most important event, see 
 Grote, vol. v. p. 435. ' This was an acquisition of signal value to the Athe. 
 nians, since it both opened to them the whole range of territory across the outer 
 Isthmus of Corinth to the interior of the Orissaean Gulf, on which the Megarian 
 port of Pegae was situated, and placed them in possession of the passes of Mount 
 Geraneia, so that they could arrest the march of a Peloponnesian army over 
 the Isthmus, and protect Attica from invasion. It was, moreover, of great 
 importance in its effects upon Grecian politics; it was counted as a wrong by 
 Lacedaemon, gave deadly offence to the Corinthians, and lighted up the flames 
 of war between them and Athens ; their allies, the Epidaurians and JCginetans, 
 taking their part.' Hence the exceeding indignation which, as we know from 
 poets and historians, was felt at Athens when Megara once more reverted to 
 the Peloponnesian alliance. See infra, ch. 114; Arist. Ach. v. 460, 648. Tha 
 date is very uncertain : Miill. says B.C. 458 ; Wachsmuth, B.C. 457 : Manso, B.C. 
 464; Grote, B.C. 461 or 460. Ni'o-aiav. This place was eighteen stadia 
 
 from Megara, and even in Strabo's time (9, p. 391) connected with it by long, 
 walls. ' These " long walls," though afterwards copied in other places and upon 
 a larger scale, were at that juncture an ingenious invention for the purpose of 
 extending the maritime arm of Athens to an inland city,' Grote, v. p. 437. 
 They doubtless gave the idea, and formed the encouragement for undertaking 
 tlie more gigantic scheme of connecting Athens with its ports of Pirajus and 
 Phalerum. Ka-Tetx""- Cohibebant, kept them close, restricted, consequently, 
 harassed. o.irh rov^i — it was mainly from this that the excessive 
 
 (or violent) animosity of the Corinthians against the Athenians originated. As- 
 ToCSe, according to the general rule, would not refer to what precedes, Kriig. 
 understands i.nh roCSe xp^vov. But the above rule is not without exceptions. ■ 
 
 Chaptee civ. — (a.) aTria-riiirev. Kriig. assigns all the events mentioned 
 in this chapter to the year B.C. 460, ix Mapeia!. This place stood, 
 
 according to Kiepert's map, on the inland shore, to the S.W. of the great lake 
 of Mareotis. Inaros thus commencing his insurrection on the western extremity 
 of the Delta of the Nile, gradually advanced towards the east. Diodorus 
 says the insurrection began B.C. 361, which agrees with Kriig.'s chronology. 
 ^ipov. This small island lay off the mouth of the harbour of Alexandria, and 
 from the lighthouse there erected, all similar beacons have received the name. 
 'Aprajepfoi/. This form of spelling is most consonant with the analogy of 
 aep^tis, and the Hebrew form of the name. See Donaldson, New Cratylus, 
 p. igs, yst Bekker, following some few MSS., reads 'hpTa(,6p^ov. 
 
 (6.) An inscription preserved in the Louvre contains the name of those 
 Atlienian citizens who in one single year perished for their country in Cyprus, 
 in Egypt, in Phcenicia, among the Haliensians, at .ffigina, and in Megara. 
 Nothing could more forcibly indicate the extent of the Athenian empire, and 
 their military activity. Bbckh, in his great work {Corjp. Inscrip.), assumes 
 that the year intended is not the natural, but the civil year ; i. e. Olymp. 
 Ixxx. 3, or from summer B.C. 459 to summer B.C. 458. This he infers from tho 
 fact that the battles mentioned by Thuc. as having been fought in the Megarid, 
 would not otherwise be included in the given year. But Arn. remarks that 
 preliminary skirmishes must have taken place, and that the men may have been 
 
Chap. 1 050 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II3 
 
 slaiu in some of these. 'The funeral ceremonies,' he adds, 'in honour of thoso 
 who had fallen in the first year of the Peloponnesian war iVere performed in tlio 
 winter, i. e. at the close of the natural, and in the middle of the civil, year.' 
 vauffl SiaKofflais. According to Isocrates 200 ti'iremes were lost in Egypt, 
 viii. 86. Diodorus says 300, xiii. 25. More than 200 vessels, Time. ch. no. 
 Ki'ug. at/aTr\^v(ravTes. Remark the force of the preposition, as in 
 
 avdBaiTis, KpaTouvres k.t.\, Kriig. refers to Ctesias, Peme. c. 32, and 
 
 Diodorus ii. 74, who speak of a great battle, in which the viceroy Achasmenes, 
 brother of Artaxerxes, fell by the hand of luaros (cf. Her. vii. 7). According 
 to Herod, (iii. 12) 100,000 men perished. AevKhv Tetxos. Am. 
 
 says : ' The white castle of Memphis was the headquarters of the Persian force 
 in Egypt, amounting, native and tributary, to 120,000 men (Herod, ii. 30, 
 iii. 91). According to the Scholiast it received this name because built of stone, 
 whereas the other two fortified places were brick. On tm 5iio /j.fpai', cf. ch. 10 
 and 74. Uepaiiy Kal M^So);/. So described, though they had 
 
 some time before coalesced into one single state. It is remarkable that the 
 ancient appellation, ol Mf/5oi, was generally retained, though the Periians wei e 
 the dominant race. Cf. MtjSikJis U6\i//.os, MriSi^nv, MijSiiT/iiJs, &c., and eVel 
 aTparhi/ &M<!e M^StuK, ch. 132, as well as the well-known epitaph upon the 
 brother of JEschylus. 
 
 Chapter CV. — {a.) 'AXiSs. The name 'AA-iels belonged both to the place 
 and people. They were probably a race of poor fishermen, perioeci to the Dorian 
 Argives, who had forced them down to the extremity of the Argolic peninsula. 
 Probably, as Grote conjectures, it was upon this occasion that the Athenians 
 made themselves masters of Troezen, which we subsequently find in their posses- 
 sion without knowing how it came to be so. The war, though it is not distinctly 
 so said by Thucyd., doubtless arose from the jealousy felt by Corinth at the 
 accession ofMegara to the Athenian alliance. KiKpvifiaKiia. 
 
 According to Leake, the modern Kyra, one of the small islands which lie 
 between Epidaurus and jEgina. This action was not decisive, but ' in the great 
 naval battle which ensued off the island of iBgina, the superiority of the new 
 nautical tactics acquired by twenty years' practice of the Athenians since the 
 Persian war over the old Hellenic ships and seamen, was demonstrated by a 
 victory most complete and decisive. . . . The maritime power of .ffigina was 
 irrecoverably ruined,' Grote, vol. v. p. 438 (part ii. ch. 45). 
 
 (J.) AewKpdrovs. Colleague of Aristides in the battle of Platasa. Plutarch, 
 Arist. c. 20, Popp. Wachsmuth, Sell. Alt. i, 582 § (German edition) speaks 
 highly of these men. ' Between the political parties of this age, far from being 
 anything like demagogues, and yet not decidedly opposed to Pericles and the 
 Demus, for the most part inspired only with the thought to rival each other in 
 great exploits, there stand forth from the darkness which shrouds the frag- 
 mentary historical traditions of the time, the great outlines of those stout war- 
 riors Myronides, Tolmides, and Leocrates.' Myronides, he goes on to say, won 
 the admiration of his contemporaries and posterity (ay^p eV dperp eoti^of(i/*ei'oj, 
 Diod. xi. 89) by his expeditions, undertaken to advance the popular cause, into 
 Bceotia, Phocis, and Thessaly. Leocrates was colleague to Aristides at Platasa, 
 and commanded in the war with iEgina, B.C. 457. Tolmides was more distin- 
 
 I 
 
1 14 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 pnished for daring than prudence. Dnring the banishment of Cimon he con- 
 ducted successively several expeditions for Pericles. After Cimon's death lie 
 led the Athenian army into Bceotia, and fell at Coroneia. irpi-repov belongs 
 to ^iriKoipouj (foroj), Kriig. rh &Kpa rris Vtpavtias. Krug. 
 
 reads Vspavias. The high ridge of land stretching across the Isthmus from 
 Corinth to Megara, so called from its resemblance to a crane's neck. On 
 its importance as a military position, cf. supra. See Wachsmuth, Eng. transl. 
 v,)l. i. Appendix iii. 
 
 (0.) rSiv iK rris ir<iAews viroKolirav. T. K. A. tr., 'those who mere left 
 hehind in the city' a version not strictly accurate; it is — of those who could he 
 furnished from the city^ i.e such as were left there, oi irpeff^vTaroif 
 
 i. c. those above the age of compulsory military service, which reached from 
 puberty up to sixty. 01 vniraTOi. Does this refer to those not yet 
 
 old enough to be Trep'nro\oi, a sort of mobilized militia, in which all young Athe- 
 nians from eighteen to twenty were obliged to serve ? Poppo thinks not. 
 auTol eKarepoi. Kriig. quotes v. 41, vii. 34, either side thought themselves not 
 to have had the worst of it. Compare ids avrovs sKardpovs a^tovv ctKaj', vii. 34, 
 and Herod, ix. 26, sBiKaieov ai/rol eKirepoi ex^^v "rh erepop Kepas Zfiois — 'though 
 both sides claimed the victory.' KaKi^ifityoi, 'This indignation 
 
 of their own old men is hisrhly characteristic of Grecian manners,' Grote. 
 ^viJi0a,\6vT(s, The conflict is said byDiodorus to have taken place ^v rfj \eyo- 
 fidvri Ktp.Qf\ia, 
 
 Chapteb CVI. — (a.) Trpocr^iatrBev. Kriig. conjectures irpo/Smo-flc'i', 'forced 
 forward,' because he considers it difficult to understand ri x^P^°^ after the par- 
 ticiple, and irphs demands something of the sort. Pop. fills up irphs rb itr^KStlii 
 is K.r.\., and comj„ares irpoaavayKti^etv, iv. 78, vii. 18. x^P^°^ — 
 
 here what we call a ' close,' though, as in the New Testament, it often means 
 'a farm,' and may mean so here. iaiTnaeu — it must be remembered 
 
 is quite a common military term, used to denote 11 body of men throwing them- 
 selves into a position. Quite similar to the present 'Mse is ii. 4, iairi-nTovaiv is 
 olKTifia. TrepicTpyov — i,e. says Poppo, ^ erux^v ov ipvy^a irfpitipyov 
 
 avT6, hut, as Kriig. remarks, if we connect eruxt ireptelpyof, the i would be 
 unnecessary. dpyov — if we retain the old distinction between these 
 
 words, flpyov, ' incluserunt,' would perhaps be more proper. Kari 
 
 Trp6<ru>Trov refers to the front entrance of the 'close,' by which the fugitives had 
 gone in. /tax e'A.euo-ai' — most probably by the use of slings. 
 
 ouToij — such a dative as is often found, and may be perhaps included under 
 the general head of dativus commodi. Cf. ch. 89, § 3. 
 
 Chapteb CVII. — (a.) fip^avTo oiKoSo/ieTv. ^Ye have an infinitive after 
 ipXtaSuL, when the notion is in intention, not in act; the participle, oIkoSo. 
 IxovvTis, when it is actually begun. See Jelf, § 688, obs. rh ixaicpi 
 
 rflxv ic.T.X, The diflSculties concerning these walls will be noticed in their 
 proper place, ii. 13. In the present passage Thucyd. speaks of the Phaleric 
 wall, and that to the Pirseeus, as ra fiaKph rftxv : the intermedi.ate wall, rh 5ia 
 /ifc-ou, is included by implication. Kriig. assigns the ijp^avTo to B.C. 459. 
 Aapias, ri/p ^rjrpiiiroA.K'. It is certainly common enough to use the name of 
 
Chap. 107.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. II5 
 
 a people for their country, as ' ^quos,' ' Sequanos,' by Livy, and ' le Milanais,' 
 by French historians (cf. eh. iii.). Here it is rather more remarkable, as the 
 singular stands in direct apposition. So AajpirjSf tj fj.'f)rp6iro\i^ tSsv AaKe^aif/.ofiwi't 
 iii. 92. Doris is here a TplwoKis, not, as usually described, a T€Tpairo\ir, i. e, 
 Pindas is omitted. But there seems to have been some uncertainty about the 
 point, for Pliny (iv. 13) makes it a TrePTawoMs, and the Schol. on Pind. PytA. i. 
 121, an elttTToAij. $a(ri\4as of course belongs to n\fi<TTodva.KTos, 
 
 so also i. 114, Kriig. Pausanias, properly speaking, was never king of Lacedse- 
 mon, but guardian to Pleistarcbus, cf. ch. 132. Nicomedes was his younger 
 brother, and also ' guardian ' to Pleistoanax. On the objects of this expedition, 
 see Grote, vol. v. p. 443. ' It was soon seen that this was only a part of the 
 objects of Sparta, and that her main purpose, under instigation of the Corin- 
 thians, was to arrest the aggrandizement of Athens. ... To strengthen 
 Thebes, and to render her ascendency effective over the Boeotian cities, was the 
 best way of providing a neighbour at once powerful and hostile to the Athe- 
 nians.' MuUer fixes the expedition at B.C. 457, Kriig. in the spring B.C. 458. 
 
 (p.) ejueWor. A good instance of the usage of this verb, were ready to pre- 
 vent, them, were sure to 'prevent them. The editors he^itate about the future, 
 and most of them print KtoAii[<r]fiJ', and ejuKXov Spa X^ii^ietv, Soph. Phil. 
 1084 — 5. Kriig. thinks that the infinitive future with ftiwa is used of inten- 
 tions, implied probabilities^ &c. I would compare sfieWov &pa iraitreiy 7ro0' 
 ifias rod Ki{a| (Ar. Sance, 261), ' I thought I would stop your K6al.' 
 ael e(f/povpeiTO, i.e. since the events described in the latter part of ch. 
 105. rh Se ti, and in some degree too, Kriig. cf. i. 118 ; vii. 
 
 48. For iirriyov, which means, ' were for bringing them in' BI. would read 
 ivriyov, 'were egging them on' needlessly, I should imagine, for Thucyd. means 
 to describe the schemes of a traitorous party at Athens who were for bringing 
 the Spartans in, and arresting the progress of the Long Walls, and iir6,yea6a.L 
 bears this meaning passim. See, with Poppo, the active, also ii. 85 (^ir^ye) ; 
 viii. 46 ; iv. 79 (^vviTrdysiv). Upon the circumstance, see Plutarch, Vit. 
 Cimon. c. 17, and Pericles, 10, Grote, vol. v. p. 441. oIkoSoimov- 
 
 ixfva. admits of literal rendering in the English idxota.— hinder, or rather stop 
 the long walls being built. 
 
 (c.) i^oi]6fi(Tav — 'came up to the rescue against them.' Poppo has a long 
 note upon the usage of this word. All the perplexity attending it will be 
 removed if we remember that po-nOea is really PoriShs w, i. e. dfu. See the 
 question fully discussed in . Sheppard's Theophrastus,-g. 58, and add to the 
 instances there given a very clear one, is trav reKovvTi (not T6\oi'<;'Ta) irpoJeVei, 
 Be my Froxenus. On the same principle I have always maintained SiapiiiriuTa 
 Tovfi.hi' ifip-a, CEdip. Col. [083, (which Linwood says, 'vix intelligi potest,') to 
 mean, having witnessed with my own eyes ; because Bemp-hiraffa = Oeaphs oZaa. 
 vaviriixd, i.e. all capable of bearing arms. Pop. refers to Clinton, Fast. 
 SeKe». p. 417. The number of hoplites when the war began was 29,000. See 
 ;;_ ,, Sirri SiehBioffiv. This is said to be the ' conjunctivus deli- 
 
 berativus,' which occurs even after past tenses, cf. ii. 52; iii. 112; v. 65. 
 The explanation seems to me to rest upon the same ground as the perpetual 
 recurrence from the directa to the indirecta oratio. The mood, i. e. mode of 
 thought, is employed under which the question presented itself to the party 
 
 I 2 
 
I ID KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lBooe I. 
 
 for the time being, and by this means greater vividness is given to the niirra- 
 tion, to be at a loss to know hy what means they must pass through, 
 Kara rh ^v^fiax^i^^f — ' in accordance with the terms of the alliance ' Kriig. 
 cf. ii. 22 ; iii. 3 ; iv.3; v. 6. /leTt'o-Tijirai', of. i. 130 ; ii. 67, Kiiig-, 
 
 wlio refers concerning the faithlessness of the Thessalians to Bornel, Proltyg. 
 ad Dem. p. 8g, a worli which I have not seen. 
 
 Chaptbe CVIII.— (ffl.) Taviypa r^s Boiarias. This collocation is of 
 frequent occurrence. See ii. 2, UKaTaiav rijs Boturias ; ii. 25, yie6u>v7]V rijs 
 AaHui'iKJis, and more particularly Arn.'s note on iii. 105. The town was built 
 upon a rugged eminence upon the north banlc of the Asopus, near its junction 
 with the Thermodon. Plato, Menexenus, p. 242, speaks of it as a drawn 
 battle, bat this is only a rhetorical flourish, and cannot Invalidate the honest 
 testimony of Thucydides. It was, however, so little decisive that the Pelo- 
 ponneslans obtained no advantage beyond the opportunity of an undisturbed 
 retreat over the ridge of Geraneia (Grote, v. 441). Most chronologers, in- 
 cluding Clinton, place the battle in B.C. 457. Kriig. makes it, as Diodonis 
 has it, one year earlier. The latter speaks of two battles, but there is no 
 ground for supposing him to be correct. SivSpoToiii\(ravm, a rare 
 
 word. Cutting down the fruit and timber-trees implied ravages of other 
 kinds. The Schol. therefore explains TTjr -yriv Ti/iOPTes. Poppo quotes Livy, 
 V. 24. 'IffdfjLoVj sine articulo, cf. ch. 62. aTrTJXQoVf 
 
 after having made a truce for four months, says Diodorus, xi. 80. 
 SevTfpa Kol c^Tjitoo-T^, B.C.456 (Clinton, p. 255). The extreme precision of 
 the date marks, says Grote, the strong impression which it made upon the 
 Athenian mind. 
 
 (5.) Oivo<pvTois. Scbleiermacher, on the passage in the Menexenus^ sup- 
 poses this name to denote some spot famous for its vines — ' The vineyards.' 
 So, too, BI. But localities often derive their names from such attributes : the 
 descriptive term becoming appellative (cf. tous 'Peirous, ii. 19) ; and from the 
 absence of the article Kriig. believes this to be the case in the present instance. 
 IT e p 1 er\ V — lit. ' stripped the wall from around it' Cf . toS &\Xov irtpiiifnjfitmv, 
 iii. II. Bl., I know not on what ground, interprets, 'dismantled by removing 
 the battlements of the wall, and lowering it to a height practicable to be scaled 
 by an invading force.' €Karhv SvSpas— 'Praeerant Locris nobiles 
 
 ex centum familiis, quorum nobilitas ex majoribus mulieribus deducebatur, 
 cf. Polyb. xii. 5,' GoU. One individual, therefore, was probably selected from 
 each of these. t^ nlxv • • • rh eavTav ra /laKpa. See 90 c. When 
 
 the writer dwells upon an idea, reproducing it under various forms, for the 
 purpose of more clearly identifying it, the defining article is naturally repeated 
 in each definition. See Ar. Nuhes, 764, tV KlBov rairifv, t^v Ka\i]v, ri/f 
 Siaipavri. Jelf, § 459, 5, thus explains the idiom : ' When two or more attri- 
 butives are joined with a substantive, each of which has a peculiar force, the 
 article is used with each. This is more rare where the attributives follow 
 the substantive.' i>iioK6yT\aav, after a siege of nine months. 
 
 ' The reduction of this once powerful maritime city marked Athens as mistress 
 of the sea, on the Peloponnesian coast, not less than on the jEgean * Grote. 
 Kriig. dates B.C. 458, Miiller, B.C. 457. 
 
Chap. 109.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDKS. II7 
 
 (e.) TTfpicA.iii'Te J k.t.\. I agree with Kriig., against some other com- 
 mentators, that these participles cannot, in this place, denote the condition under 
 which the surrender was made. They denote circumstance rather than condi- 
 tion — when they had, pulled doion their walls, &c. ; cf. a7ro5<ii'T6S Nio-aiai/ . . . 
 tTTOfScis iTToi^a-avTo, ch. 115. repiewK^va-aii — with fifty triremes 
 
 and 4000 hoplites (Diod. xi. 84). iEsch. ii. 75, p. 38, names only 1000, as 
 the remainder were volunteers ; but perhaps there is some confusion with 
 ch. 113. Krug. rh ViJipiov. Gythium. XoA/c(5a. 
 
 A city of jEtolia, at the foot of Mount Chalcis, and near the mouth of the 
 Eveuus; it is now called BapitroB^a. The Corinthians were at this time 
 occupying the city, just as they had Molycrium for a colony in Locris (iii. 102), 
 and Sollium in Aoamania (ii. 30). Diodorns informs us that Naupactus was cap- 
 tured at the same time by the Athenians. Poppo. iv airo^dariL t^j yfjs. 
 A sort of objective genitive, ' in a disembarkation in their country,' Jelf , § 464. 
 
 Chapter CIX. — (o.) The narration is resumed from eh. I04. 
 (5 €01. On this word, to which Plato has given such a world-wide celebrity, 
 Kriig. remarks, ' Excepting Plato, the Attic writers seldom use this word ; it 
 is indeed almost unknown to their prose, yet Thucyd. employs it thirteen 
 times ; in the sense of Q-estalt—form or shape —anly once, vi. 4, 6 ; elsewhere it 
 stands for Weise — way, manner or mode.' To this I can scarcely subscribe; as 
 ^orm, i. e. mental form, form, conceived hy the mind, is its original meaning, so 
 I believe it may in most places be translated, e. g. here — * many forms of 
 warfare / ii. 19, iraa-av lS4av iretpdtravTe^, having tried every conceivable form of 
 attach; iii. 8j, Trao'a iSea Qavdrov, death in every form (' Plurima mortis 
 imago,' Virgil); ch. 83, Tracra ISea KaKOTpoirtas, vice in every shape; and so iii. 
 98, 112. In iv, 55 we have vapa r^v virdpxovcrav ibeav ttJs irapatrKev'qs, con- 
 trary to the form luhich their warliJce preparations usually toolc — or, an unusual 
 type of warfare ; vi. 4, SpeiravoeiSes tV iSeai/ rb x'^P^or, the place was scythe- 
 like inform, or shape ; vii. 29, precisely as iii. 81. Similarly in the Attic poets, 
 kripav '^iMvav ISeay, Ar. jRan. 382, another type of poetry ; and ^t>cs, 993, t(j 
 ISea Bov\'fitiaTos ; what is the form of your plan ? what shape is it going to 
 take ? By keeping this, its true meaning, in view, we shall, I think, be better 
 enabled to understand why Plato selected the word to express the eternal type 
 or form of which all perishable things were the antitypes. The interest of the 
 ■word, the authority of Kriig., and the explanations given in some instinoes by 
 Ij. and S. Lexicon, e. g. ' manner,' must excuse this long notice. 
 
 (i.) irpoux^p€*-~sc. T^ irpdy/jLara, cf. ch. 74» ^^ finem. 
 &KKa s— otherwise, i. e. another way than the right one, uselessly, in vain, 
 cf. ii. 18; iv. 36; vii. 42. Ueyi^aCos may be the individual 
 
 mentioned Herod, vii. 97 as holding a command in the fleet. Meydfiv^os was 
 one of the generals of Xerxes ; he also commanded at Eurymedou, and must 
 therefore have been a person of some experience, see Herod, vii. 82, and 143. 
 Zt^TTi/poj was the man through whose self-mutilation Darius obtained posses- 
 sion of Babylon, Herod, iii. 160. &vhpa nipa'nv. ' o'o the Normans, 
 after the conquest, to their Christian name, added " Norman " as a surname,' Bl. 
 A distinction from 'Mede' might be intended if we accept the parallelism, 
 but the addition of &vbpa to the national appellative is common with all Greek 
 
1 1 8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Boos I. 
 
 writeis. |Uct4 (TTpanas ttoW^s. Diodorus, ii. 77> says with 300 
 
 ships and 300,000 mcu. Ctesias, Persic. 3^, makes the number 200,000, but 
 adds the troops, amounting to 300,000, which remained in Egypt. 
 f-dxn 4KpdTTiiTf. We may estimate the rhetorical exaggeration and inac- 
 curacy of the later Attic writers, from the fact that Diodorus denies this 
 victory. Tlpo<runriTtSa. An island formed by two branches of the 
 
 Nile, or, as Bl. thinks, by the Nile and a deep canal, Herod, ii. 41. 
 
 (c.) ff fi^va^ — other MSS. /ijji/as €|. Kriig. ^t1 tov ^ijpoS 
 
 ^■jroirjae — ' il les mitct sec' — 'he leftthemhigh and dry.' Popp. cf. ivoielvTivh 
 ^ata, e|a) 0e\uv ; cf. also Xen. Anab. i. 10, 9; v. ■£, 11. ^iretpoVj pre- 
 
 dicate with ^TTotiirre, ' dry land.' Bl. says, ' I know no other example of eirofijire 
 for tSriKf,' but cf. iirolniam 'Adriva!oi>, ii. 29, ' made an Athenian,' and &yos nplv- 
 avTos, ch. 135. Sia$lis taken with irefp ; unnecessary, says Kriig. j 
 
 cf. TreJ^p x^^P^^°^^^^i ^^' 24. 
 
 Chaptee ex. — (a.) 5roA6/i^(rocTo— by a sort of hypallage agrees with 
 irpo7|UaTo, instead of 'hSiivalwv. The exact six years are much disputed. 
 Clinton makes them commence B.C. 455, of. ch. 104. 4 <r <i 8 r) <r av. 
 
 Here again Diodorus betrays his exaggeration, by saying that the Persians 
 allowed the Athenians to return home unmolested, from admiration of their 
 valour. But why in that case, as Bl. remarks, should they have adopted the 
 dangerous and difficult route to Gyrene ? For Icrdiyiaav is, cf. sup. loi a, 65 b. 
 'AfivpraTos. Not the Amyrtseus who, B.C. 414, i.e. forty years after this time, 
 revolted from Darius Nothus, and was succeeded by four successive kings, till 
 the Persians regained their ascendency under Ochus, sixty years afterwards. 
 The man here mentioned was reduced to submission, according to Herod , 
 though his son Pausiris was permitted to reign over the fen district, Herod, ii. 
 40; iii. 15 — Tois e\eiri, Herod, ii. 137, 140. They were situated between the 
 Canopio and Tanitic mouths of the Nile, and formed most of what was called 
 the Delta. Compare the stand made in the marshes of Ely by the English 
 after the Norman invasion ; and cf. .£sch. Persm, 39, 'EAEio^ciTai, yooi;' eptrai 
 Aetyol, ir\rj66! t" aviptBfiot. 
 
 (J.) iK Ta)V 'AOrivalav. Bekker conjectures 'AflTjcSi', but cf. with Kriig. ir. 
 97. The reading of the text seems to me better than tlie conjecture, for it only 
 specifies— ;/rowi the proportion contributed by the Athenians. |u/ijuaxfSos. 
 rAe oHied/orce, a substantive, as in ii. 80 J v. 36. Poppo. taxov — made 
 
 the shore, came to land ; cf. uiri vvKra 5^ ax^vres, iii. 91 . iffxov, Kareaxo^) irpotr- 
 iaxov are, as Duk. remarks, all properly nautical words, and the simple form 
 iaxa, irx^<r», eo-x"", is generally found with a dative or the preposition h ; cf. 
 ii. 25; iii. 29, 33, 34; vii. i. 'Insolentia sunt verba,' vii. 35. Poppo. 
 Karh. Th Vlevii\i!iov Kfpas. The fifth mouth of the Nile, reckoning from the 
 most westerly one. It entered the sea near the town of Mendes, Herod, ii. 17 ; 
 cf. Pindar, Frag. 89, effx^Toj' NtfXou Ktpas, Engelman supposes that the use 
 of Kepas may be a relic of the ancient symbolism wliich represented rivers 
 under the typo of a bull ; cf. ' tauriformis Aufidus,' Hor., and the remarks of 
 Arnold upon the broken horn of the Achelous, which was converted into a 
 cornu copise. ovk eliSTfi, i. e. the crews, understood from Tft-fipas, 
 
 ii. S^, 91 ; vi. 53 ; viii. 101 Poppo. 
 
CHA5. 112.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lirj 
 
 Chapter CXI.— (a.) Baa-tKias. Certainly not king of all Thessaly, as 
 is plain from W. 78. Popp. therefore suggests that he was Tagus. But there 
 were several of these dominant families in Thessaly — the Aleuadae, for instance 
 — who are styled kings by Herod, vii. 6, and appear to have ruled at Larissa. 
 But, as might be expected, history casts but little light upon these early 
 Thessalian rulers. Orestes was, according to Wachsmuth, uncle of Antiochus, 
 and member of a dynasty connected with the Aleuadae and Scopadse, which 
 had its seat at Pharsalus. The date of the expedition is very variously given : 
 Arn., B.C. 454 ; Diodorus — mixing it up with those against the Phocians and 
 Locrians— after (Enophyta, B.C. 457; Krug. agrees with Am., adding, 'in the 
 spring;' Clinton, B.C. 455. it apa.\afi6vTes— after taking up the 
 
 Saeolian. and Fhocian contingents. Kriig., who cf. the same word infra, and 
 vii. 20. iaa firi TrpoUvres. Popp. rightly fills up the ellipse, 
 
 Sffa Kpa.n'iv iSvyavTo jUt; Trpo'i6vT^s — * all they could make themselves masters of 
 without stirring far from camp ,-' cf. iv. 16, <pv\aa-(retir t)]v prja-ov '6<ra fiii iirofial- 
 vovras. Kriig. adds, offov fii) x^P"'' taf"'"!', (Ed. Tgr. 346. '6irKav^ 
 
 the place where their arms were piled, and consequently equivalent to e castri^ 
 (Popp.), but see the note on iii. 1. &TrpaKTos— 'without effecting 
 
 anything.' In Tbuc, says Kriig., always active. 
 
 (S.) /iCT^ S€ TauTo — i.e. in all probability the following year, e.g. 453. 
 Kriig. says in the same year. tcis Xlv^ytis. See ch. 103. 
 
 vavs — fifty, according to Diodorus, xi. 85; a hundred, according to Plutarch, 
 iPericles, 19, Kriig. rolls Trpocfj-l^aifras. Those who came into conflict 
 
 with them. The less veracious Diodorus declares that the Sicyonians came out 
 vai/drtp-ii. Stair\eu(ravT€S ire^a;', to be taken together — having 
 
 sailed across^ probably to Naupactus. OividZas, a name from the 
 
 wine made in the district. In S. Acarnania, on the right bank of the Achelbus, 
 Leake supposes that it is identical with Trikardho, or Trikardhocastro, a large 
 modern city. This, says Poppo, is one of those states which is always In- 
 , dicated by the name of its inhabitants. Cf. ii. 102, iii. 94, iv. 77. Such, too, 
 is the case with Leontini. From these we must distinguish such names as Veil 
 and Gabii, wliich always stand for cities. Cf. note on ch. 107 a. 
 
 Chapteb CXII. — (a.) SiaXnrivTav Ituv rpiUv. The five years' truce, 
 therefore, according to the general computation, commenced B.C. 450; accord- 
 ing to Kriig., summer B.C. 451. Grote points out that the truce was probably 
 concluded by the influence of Cimon, who was anxious to carry out the opera- 
 tions against Persia; while, on the other hand, Pericles would not be sorry to 
 see his rival removed from Athens (vol. j. p. 453). iroA.eVo" eo'xi"'- 
 
 Elmsley refers to this passage in his note on Jiurip. Heracleid. 924, ' eaxe" 
 S' Sfipis. In his locis o'xei'' idem fere valet ac TraviracrBa:, quo sensu ssepe adhi- 
 bentur fcrxe et crx^'s. ■ • Noster locus fateor ab his paulo diversus est. Quamvis 
 enim bene Grseca sit locutio taxe tov vroXeVou, cessavit a bello, non ideo tamen 
 constat Grajcos dixisse eirx*" <* ■^it^^p-os, cessavit belhim.' Bl. says, for aitiffxov, 
 there being an ellipse of eaurous, Matth. § 353. 3. Cf. Jelf, § 517. 
 'Auvpraiov. See ch. 1 10. We see from this that in the former chapter Thuc, 
 was anticipating the regular course of his narrative. p.£Taw4p.Tro)/Tos, 
 
 ' HiT<i.-K4iJ.Trti.v — accersere, usually the middle utTcnviiaiaBm,' T. K. A. The 
 
120 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I, 
 
 difference I believe to be that media voce the word signifies to send for as 
 something of our own, to send for as a right, or a command; in the active, 
 simply to send for as a request. Kir toy in the south-east of 
 
 Cyprus, the birth-place of Zeno and ApoUodoms. Klfiavos. It is 
 
 not clear whether of disease or from a wound. See Grote, vol. v. p. 455. 
 
 (h.) vTTep — * off' Salamis,' according to our nautical nomenclature. Lit. hang* 
 ing over, because vessels seen from the land are fieretapot, or apparently sus- 
 pended upon the line of the horizon (Milton, JPar. Zost, ii. 636). Cf. i. 137, 
 viii. 95. aua. Not to be considered, says Grote, as implying that 
 
 the battle, like that of Euvymedon, was a double one on the same day, 
 vaAiv. There is some awkwardness about the position of the word. I believe, 
 however, that it is only a slightly irregular usage for 01 iraMv ixdovaai — as we 
 might say, the ships from Eggft hack agaiui Popp. says, * supple o7rex^/"J*^«''j 
 ut dicitur ai/ax^puv irdKii/, iii. 5, et aTTTJ^dov irtixtv, iv. 72;' Goll. 0/ iv hiyiintp 
 vri^s e| Al-yviTTOu iKBovffai, which I cannot think correct. wSXefiov 
 
 icTTpdreuffav. A cognate accusative after a neuter verb, as if it had been 
 •TTpaTetav eaTpdreuffav. Popp. cf. ' Bellum militabitur,' Hor. Epod. i. 23, and 
 such phrases as iruo-Teis ^patTav, i. 5, aurapKij B^aiV KfiaQai, i. 37, Jelf, § 564. 
 rap^Sotrav AeXcfois. Because, as Arn. remarks, the noble Delphian families 
 were of Doric origin. add is — in their turn, denoting some action 
 
 strongly contrasted with, or opposed to, that which has been last mentioned. 
 The Phocians, according to Muller (Dorians, i. p. 262), had no real claim to 
 the management of the Delphian Oracle. ' There was a native nobility whose 
 influence over the oracle was very considerable (Eurip. Ion, 418)— so great 
 that they may have been considered to be the actual managers of it.' Bockh 
 (Public Hcon. p. 601, note) writes, 'The temple of Delphi was, according to the 
 agreement of the Greeks, an independent sacred possession, the chief manage- 
 ment of which was exclusively vested in the council of Amphietyons, and the 
 sacred assembly at Delphi; but the Phocinns were always putting iti claims for 
 the direction of this temple, which they affirmed to belong to them, and that . 
 they had even once been in possession of it (Diod. xvi. 33), an assertion which 
 they also strengthened with the authority of Homer (II. ii. 518); and these 
 claims, according to Diodorus (xvi. 29), were brought forward in Olymp. cvi. 
 2, and assisted by the countenance of Sparta.' See also Grote (iv. p. 85)- 
 T. Iv. A., following the American editor, has confused the references in this 
 place. Refer to ch. 118, iii. 121, and v. 18. 
 
 Chapter CXIII. — (a.) The operations of Athens against the Persians are 
 here concluded. With this is connected the famous controversy concerning 
 tl)e peace of Callias or Cimon, supposed to have been made at this time with the 
 Great King. Its conditions are represented to have been so unfavourable to 
 Persia, that the whole story is not unjustly suspected of having originated in 
 the rhetorical extravagance of the later Athenian panegyrists. The Persians 
 Were to abandon the military occupation of Asia Minor within three days' 
 journey on foot, or one on horseback, of the coast; or, according to another 
 (iccount, they were not to pass the Ilalys to the west, or the mouth of the Bos- 
 porus, and tlie Chelidonian islands. All Asiatic Greeks were to bo left undis- 
 turbed and untaxed. Dahlinan in his Forschungen has devoted a separate 
 
Chap. 113.] NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. 121 
 
 essay to the subject, in which the above view ia maintained. He is followed 
 by Thirlwall (vol. ii. p. 473—4), who argues that the entire silence of Thuoy- 
 dides, the vague and contradictory statements of later writers, the obvious 
 unconsciousness of the Persian court that it had ever resigned its dominion 
 over the Asiatic Greeks, and the absence of all reference to any such treaty in 
 subsequent negotiations between the same parties, abundantly prove that no 
 peace of the sort was ever made. On the other hand, Mr. Grote is less inclined to 
 regard it as a fable ; he considers that some foundation for the story must have 
 existed in the circumstances of the time. It is impossible to give all his argu- 
 ments (see vol. V. p. 456 — 62). The point upon which he dwells most is, that 
 such a convention would only have been a recognition of the state of things 
 which really existed after Cimon's death. As such, it might easily have been 
 omitted by Thucydides, who lived in the actual fulness of Athenian empire, 
 because it would seem to him simply a matter of course, and because he was 
 striving to condense his narrative. But Isocrates and later rhetoricians, in 
 their anxiety to amplify the past glories of Athens, indulged in absurd exagge- 
 rations upon the matter, and have thus naturally thrown discredit upon it. 
 Demosthenes speaks in very positive terms of the existence of such a peace, e5 
 olS' Hrt rhv\6yoi' tovtov aKT^/ctJare, KaAAmi/ rhv 'linroviKov rairriv t^p virh ndvrwv 
 6pv\ovii4vT)v elp'fjv'riv irpeff^edaavra K.r.\. — De Falsa Leg. § 311. 
 iyyevoixivov. iyyiyv^adai is intercedere, as iv. ill, viii. 9, Herod, v. 92, 
 Kriig. He also connects juera ravra with iyyeifOfj.4vov, ^when an interval of time 
 after this had expired' It is possible also, of course, to take it with ^o-TpaTeuo-af, 
 which is perhaps simpler, and is preferred by Popp., who compares ch. 114 
 and iiS. Toiv <pevy6yTup — ' the parti/ of the exiles ' — ^. e. those who 
 
 had been expelled after (Enophyta. iffrpdrevaav. B.C. 447, Kriig. 
 
 B.C. 446. ws sKdarois. Supply eo'T/)aT6i;(ro»' — * with the contingent 
 
 as eacli severally had to furnish them' 
 
 (ft.) kv Kopwveia. The name is variously given : ^z/ 'AAmprfiy, says Pausa- 
 nias, I. xxvii. 6 ; ii) AepaSelif, Xen. Mem. III. v. 4. Isocrates, tte/j! (eiyovs, agrees 
 with Thucyd., as do Plato (Alcibiades) and Diodorus, Popp. The truth is, thnt 
 all the localities were very close together, and the battle may have extended 
 over them, as in the case of Mont St. Jean and Waterloo, the Tchernaya and 
 Traktir Bridge. Upon this, the first great blow to the Athenian ascendency, 
 followed by so many disasters, see Grote, vol. v. p. 466. Aok poi. 
 
 The Opuntian Locrians, says the Schol. As they had been subjugated with 
 the Boeotians, cf. 108, they doubtless rebelled with them. ttjs outtji 
 
 yvilj.ll 5 — ' of the same way of thinTcing ; ' i. e. the same purpose to revolt. Cf. 
 for the construction, Jelf, § 518,1. Tois /lec Zii(pBtipav. Amongst 
 
 them, Tolmides himself. 
 
 (c.) 01 SaXoi irdvTes. Both Arn. and Popp. interpret this to mean the 
 Loerian and Phocian exiles, with perhaps those from Euboea. But Kriig. con- 
 siders that ot &\Xoi can only be BoiuTot — KaT€\B6i'Te! does not, he says, belong 
 
 to 01 &\\oi and the sense is. The Boeotian exiles upon their return home, and all 
 
 the other Boeotians, became independent again, i. e. with all the other Boeotians. 
 
 Cf. iii. 63; iv. 92. Heilman, the German translator, took .this viewj so, too. 
 
 Dale, and the last German translator (Engelman) : ' Die Verbannten der Booter 
 
 . . als auch die iibrigen alle,' &c. Grote's remark is just, that probably, as 
 
122 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book J. 
 
 was the case with the Lacedsemonians at Pyloa, the captured Athenians be- 
 longed to the best families in the state; otherwise they would not have con- 
 sented to such unfavourable terms to recover them. 
 
 Chaptee OXIV.— (a.) Eii/Soio aire'cTTr). B.C. 445. Krvig. B.C. 446. 
 SiaffePriKOTos aiiT^, The construction is thus varied, for the purpose of more 
 clearly marking the time. After Pericles had already got across, news was 
 brought to Aim, Nttraiav. See above, ch. 103. MuUer, Dorians, 
 
 ii. 171, gives a short account of Megarian politics. After the democratic 
 revolution which had united the place to Athens, the nobles returned, con- 
 quered the people in battle, restored an oligarchy, and filled all public offices 
 with persons who had fought against the people. This return probably caused 
 the revolt. See note on ch. 103. 
 
 (i.) &piSi^e. Sch. is ri @ptdcrwv veSioi'. Cf. ii. ch. 19. A well-known 
 battle ground, as appears from Herod, ix. 7. Leake fixes the locality on the 
 Sandafaro, or Eleusinlan Cephisus, about three miles above Eleusis. On Pleisto- 
 anax, cf. supra, ch. 107. rh irXeoj/— as is rh ir\eiov, ii. 21. 
 
 aTrtX''P'n<^'"'- Because it was thought that Pleist. xp^i"""'' Teio'flTJi'oi rriy 
 avaxf^pyi<rLv, ii. 31. It was Pericles, says Plutarch, who bribed him. Grote 
 supposes they were too weak in force to venture further. Kart- 
 
 fTTpdi^avTo iraffav. Therefore it was hitherto in part unsubdued, Kriig. See 
 Aristoph. Nubes, 213. Karea-TfjaavTo — settled by convention. 
 
 The Latins said botli 'pactione constituerunt ' and ' composuerurit,' Pop. Cf. iii. 
 35. 'EcTtatas. Tbe Athenian settlers subsequently received this 
 
 name, and were also called 'npeTrai, as the place, says the Scholiast, was after- 
 wards called 'ilpeoj. Plutarch, Pericles, c. 23, ascribes this treatment to the 
 fact that the HestiaBans had put to death the crew of au Athenian trireme. The 
 Athenians would gladly avail themselves of any such pretext to establish in the 
 island a military post upon which they could rely. 
 
 Chapteb CXV. — (a.) (rirovSds. The famous thirty years' truce. In the 
 spring, B.C. 445. See Grote. 'Axaioc. A question is raised which 
 
 it is by no means ea-sy to determine positively, whether the province of that 
 name be meant, or some town in the occupation of the Lacedsemonians. Autho- 
 rities are pretty equally divided. Manso, Goller, Poppo, and Kriiger decide 
 against the province, principally : (1) because no mention has been made by 
 Thucyd. of the acquisition of it by Athens; (2) because 'Axafai' is coupled both 
 here and in iv. 21 with other towns; and in the last passage the demand of 
 Cleon from the Lacedsemonians, anoSovvat 'Axo-'tav, seems very inappropriate 
 language as applied to a country not regularly in thmr possession. On the 
 other hand, Mr. Grote (v. 475) has no doubt that the province is meant, for in 
 ch. Ill we find that 'the Athenians had acquired Achaia as an independent 
 ally.' Arnold, from the political circumstances of Achaia, shows that it must 
 have been alienated from Lacedsemon, and therefore believes it to be meant iu 
 this place. Bloomfield also entirely coincides, quoting Aristides, i. 157, irav 
 rh 'Axmi'Kiii'. Thirlwall raises no doubt, but assumes that Thucyd. speaks of the 
 country. Eugelman, the last German editor, follows on the same side, and 
 explama &i7:o5oi;j'ai (iv. 21) as a sort of zeugma applied to both the province and 
 
Chap. 115.] NOTES ON THUCYDIUES. I23 
 
 the towns in the same sentence. I cannot pretend to decide between such dis- 
 putants, but would remarlc that when Mr. Grote speaks of ' acquiring Achaia 
 as an independent ally,' he builds a large superstructure upon the words irapa- 
 \a^6vTiS 'Axalotis (ch. ill), which can only mean having taken with them certain 
 AchcBans. It seems strange too that Thucydides should have omitted to give 
 an account of this acquisition by Athens, for we must remember it would have 
 been directly connected with his main sulflect, and he is elsewhere very particu- 
 lar in specifying alliances. To speak of such an important territory precisely 
 in the same rapid way as of some small Spartan garrisons, ravra yhp tlxov 
 TlfKoTrowTialav, is not explained to my mind by saying that the Spartans con- 
 sidered all within Peloponnese as their property — certainly they could not con- 
 sider it so in the same way ; and on similar grounds I should doubt whether in 
 grave proposals for a peace hroSovvai would be applied to an allied country, 
 because it had been used of a garrisoned town. No argument can he grounded 
 upon airoSoSvai, to restore^ because it is said of all claims. See the long note, 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, ch. xviii. p. 176. It is perhaps right to add that 
 Miiller, who in the first edition of his Dorians expressed a belief that some small 
 town of the Megarid was intended, appears in the second to have changed his mind. 
 Kriig. conjectures that 'A\ia5o (ii. 56) may have been originally in the text. 
 
 (6.) cKToi erei. In the beginning of spring, B.C. 440, Kriig. Pop. says 
 B.C. 441, as he places in B.C. 440 the expedition of Pericles mentioned in the 
 next ch. KaT€$6ap — made an outcry against the Samians ; the word 
 
 implies accnsation, cf. i. 73, v. 45. t^v iro\LTeiav. At that time 
 
 an aristocratical one, Kriig. 
 
 (c.) rwv Se 'Xafxiuv — ^ffav yap tlv^s. On the construction cf. Jelf, 
 § 786. 6. ^d/nov. This island appears to have been the most power- 
 
 ful of all the allies of Athens, paying, like Chios and Lesbos, no tribute money, 
 but furnishing ships and men. That Pericles undertook the war at the inter- 
 cession of Aspasia, who was a native of Miletus, is a mere scandal, Grote, vi. 
 pp. 34, 35. Tcoy ^afxitav depends upon rivh. See i. 72. 1, Kriig. 
 
 Refer to note. toTs SmaTariTois — the most powerful members of the aristo- 
 cratical party. The term ^v/i/xaxlav only applies to Pissuthnes, Kriig. 
 itriKoipovs — probably ' mercenaries,' as the word generally implies. 
 iir av-effToffav. Kriig. contrasts airSffTaffiS with iiravda rains. The iirst is 
 simply revolt, the second is insurrection, implying, I imagine, an armed assault 
 upon the opposite party. tuv TrXeliXTaiv. Kriig. observes that 
 
 Valla has not translated these words, but that if genuine we must suppose that 
 some of the democratical party made themselves masters of a stronghold, and 
 maintained themselves there. roiis 6,pxovTas. Not mihtary only, but the 
 civil offiuers left behind by Pericles as e-wiixKOTvoi or (pixaxes. See Bockh, Public 
 Hcon. of Athens. Krug. See Xen. de Rep. Athen. i. 14, t8, and Grote, vi. 
 4^ 8. tr(pla-iv, i.e. rols ^a/ilois, so <r(ptts in a relative clause, iii. 3, Kriig. 
 
 BvCdyTioi. See ch. 96. Byzantium came under Athenian dominion when the 
 conduct of Pausanias at that place induced the Lacedasmonians to resign the 
 command of the confederacy against Persia. But as it still retained its Doric 
 institutions and character, it seems to have taken the earliest opportunity of 
 freeing itself from Ionian domination. It was, however, compelled to submit 
 again at the fall of Siunos, cf. 117. 
 
124 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I, 
 
 Chaptee CXVI. — (a.) rais kKxalieKa. The i6 wliich remainecl, after sub- 
 tracting the 44 mentioned from 60. Cf. at ilnoai, infra. When any definite 
 part of a fixed number is specified the article is used. irefiayyiK- 
 
 Kovaai $o7]0eiv — carrying round, in all directions the message to come up 
 to aid. The infinitive stands here as in the passages quoted by Kriig. ii. 10, ii. 
 80, iv. 8, V. 54, and, as in the above version, agrees witli the English idiom. 
 SiKuTov auTov. Of these nine others the poet Sophocles was one. 
 fTTpaTicitriSes — transports' They were heavy and not fit for manoeuvres, con- 
 sequently they were rarely, if ever, employed in action. ffTparniiTas &yovaai robs 
 jueA-Aocray Tre^ojuaxer;/, says the Schol. See vi. 43, and Xen. Sellen. i. i, 36. 
 Kriig. remarks that the combination of two datives, as in this place, is not 
 unusual, i. 81, ii. 92, iv. 11 ; even three are found, iv. 129. 
 
 (b.) rpiffl Telxf(r'. Mr. Grote says ' a triple wall.' A twofold wall, one 
 to keep in the besieged, and another to keep off a relieving force, is conceivable. 
 But three walls of circumvallation seem absurd ; neither can I call to mind any 
 similar case. Kriig. is induced to suppose that three walls, one on each side 
 of the town, except the sea-side, are indicated. I scarcely think that Thucyd. 
 would have called such a nfpiTiixttris * three walls.' As t6?xos is sometimes ' a 
 fort,' might not the rpiirl rdxKn refer to three detached forts, built in com- 
 manding positions, and so connected by lines as to serve the purpose of a 
 blockade ? I see Bloomf. in his last edition suggests the same thing, and adds, 
 what certainly is some confirmation, that the Scholiast's explanation is riixi- 
 ff/iaat, 
 
 (c.) airh Toitf ^(popfjiovtTuy — * as a detachment ^rom the blockading squad- 
 ron.' I do not see why the use of the preposition should have been thought so 
 singular. iirl Kavvov Kal Kaoias. To Caunus, as the spot where he 
 
 expected to meet the enemy, but also towards Caria generally, because he did 
 not know where he might fall in with them. Arn. Kriig. quotes cmh toS 
 Boi/S<!f)oi> Kal TTJs %a\afuvos, iii. 51. /to! is not here disjunctive, and Pop. well 
 remarks — non opus fuit scribi Kal ttjs &\\-qs Kapias. See ' Chrysippus et Stoici,' 
 Cio. Tusc. iv. 5, 9, where Davis has selected several examples; II. xix. 63, °Ek- 
 r opt fief Kal Tpaiiri; iii. 33; iv. 36; vii. 65. 4ffayye\dei/T tijy. This appears 
 to agree with the genitive of the following noun, instead of standing in the gen. 
 sing, absolute — ' w/ien they were reported,' not ' mhen it was reported that they.' 
 Jelf, § 696. 3, quotes this passage, apparently classifying it under those where 
 ■wpdypiaTa or some indefinite word is understood. He illustrates by the Latin 
 *cognito' for 'postquam cognitum erat.' See St}\u}64vtos, i. 74. 
 ^aifia-irat vrjes — a JPhaenician fleet, Mr. Grote, assuming the truth of the 
 convention of Callias (see last eh.) supposes that Pissuthnes had never any in- 
 tention of violating it by really bringing up these ships (vi. 37). ^ir' 
 ttiiTois — ' to their assistance,' i. e. the Samians; had the Athenians been meant, 
 ^irl (Tc^os, 'against themselves^ would have been used. As Kriig. remarks, we 
 should rather have anticipated izap a\no6s, or Trpbs auroiis, but eVl surely may 
 be supported. Kriig. says, nothing hinders us from connecting aurouswith the 
 Athenians, as iaayyiKSifTuy represents the tense of the finite verb ; and it is 
 possible that he may be right. iir\ ris *. to fetch the Phoenicians. 
 Stesagoras was a Samian. 
 
CniP. I17.J JSfOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 12$ 
 
 Chaptek CXVII. — (a.) iv roirip — during the absence of Pericles. 
 a<i>pa.KTif. ^\'hen a fleet was for any length of time drawn up on shore, it was, 
 as may be seen from many instances, protected by a palisade or (TTovpw/ta. Cf. 
 vi. 66, vii. 25. Tiiis precaution appears in the present instance to have been 
 neglected, the Athenians thinking it enough to keep some ' look-out ships' (toj 
 vpQ(pv\aKi5as) moored at a little distance seaward. When these were captured 
 by the sudden onset of the enemy, the Athenians were compelled to launch the 
 ships on shore in detachments as they best could, and were thus easily beaten in 
 detail. It was in a somewhat similar manner that they lost the great battle of 
 ^gospotami. Kemark the present participle ocTavoyo/neVas — as they were 
 launched to meet them. 
 
 {b.) @ovKvStSov. I think we must understand Thucydides, son of Melesias, 
 the successor of Cimou at tlie head of the oligarchical party, and the rival of 
 Pericles, even though his return from ostracism has not been mentioned. 
 Grote, vi. 38, says there is no evidence on either side, by which we may deter- 
 mine whether it were he or no, and favours the idea that a third Thucyd. is 
 meant. The negative evidence that nothing is said to mark his distinction 
 from the leading man of Athens, though he bore the same name, is, I think, 
 evidence enough to prevent us from imagining a third Thucydides. For a 
 very good account of him, see Grote, vi. 20. 
 
 (c.) ^Spax^'"" — ' insignificant,' Kviig. ; probably so, but the notion is derived 
 fi-om the fact that they were only able to maintain it for a short time. 
 6ixo\oyi<f, on terms, i. e. they did not surrender at discretion. 
 Ka9eAii»T6s— 8(iyT6s — TrapaddvTes. These participles, as general, 'sine arti- 
 culo,' conditionate the finite verb with wliicli they are connected, i. a. these are 
 tile conditions upon which they irpo^rext^p'jo'ac. tk ava\ai64t'Ta — 
 
 'the expenses of the siege.' These have been variously estimated: 1000 
 talents, according to Isocrates (15, iii), 1200 says Corn. Nepos {Timoih.). 
 But these writers were sure to exaggerate. On the other hand, the 200 men- 
 tioned by Diodorus (xii. 28) is evidently under the truth. Diodorus, as Kriig. 
 says, most probably wrote 2000. Kara ;^p<ivouj — the distributive 
 
 use of Kara — ' at stated times.' Cf. kot& ttSk^is, ch. 119, and the like, Kara Kw/xas, 
 II, Jelf, § 355. I, and 629. Prom the narrative here given, Mr. Grote draws 
 several inferences in favour of the Athenian administration of their empire. 
 None of the dependent allies except Byzantium joined in the revolt. Therefore 
 they could not have been much oppressed. It is more than doubtful whether 
 the Athenians renewed the democracy. Therefore they did not force this 
 form of government in cases where the natural tendency of the parties ran the 
 other way. The conduct of Athens to other dependencies, e. g. Melos, might 
 perhaps induce us to suppose that there was something in the great power of 
 Samos, and the particular position of affairs, which rendered a mild policy in 
 this case preferable. The student must remember that when in this war 
 Samos applied to Sparta for aid, the Corinthians prevented the latter from 
 stirring, by maintaining the principle that every state had a right to punish its 
 own recusant dependencies. Hence the extreme exasperation felt by the 
 Corinthians against the Athenians, for violating this same principle in the 
 affair of Coreyra and Epidamnus. See the Corinthian Speech, ch. 40. 
 
126 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book L 
 
 Chaptee CXVIII. — (a.) ou tto\Ko'!s irtcnv. The history now proceeds 
 from ch. 88. The Corcyraean quarrel began B.C. 436, and the thirty years' 
 truce was concluded B.C. 445. Therefore the KepKvpa'iKa took place about four 
 years after the reduction of Samos. See ch. 24-55. On the affair of Potidsea, 
 see ch. 56 — 66. eV eretri Tivr-fiKovTa fj-dKiffra. At the utmost, 
 
 says Dobree, from the departure of Xerxes, Olymp. Ixxv. 1, in the autumn, to 
 the Lacedemonian invasion, Ixxxvli. i, not more than forty-nine years can be 
 computed. From the night attack on Plataea, the first overt act of the war, 
 there are only forty-eight. Popp. rejoins, that the war is dated from the irrup- 
 tion of the Thebans into Platsea, see ii. i, and that the qualifying expression 
 MolAiiTTo is used. This I consider quite sufficient justification of the language 
 of Thucydides, more especially as Cicero (quoted by Kriig.) translated laaMiTTa 
 hy fere (Ad Attic, vii. 11. 2). Tlie present instance seems to me fatal to the 
 theory elaborately maintained by Peile, that fiiKurTa always means to the full. 
 Refer to note upon the word, ch. 13 c. iyKpaTea-repan, as iyxpaTus 
 
 is used in ch. 76. ^irl fieya Svvd/^eus. As iirl p.4ya itrx^oSj 11. 97. 
 
 See Jelf, § 442 b. The idiom rather belongs to the Epic and Ionic forms of 
 speech. 
 
 (6.) 4-ir\ Ppaxi, to a slight extent. I do not think that Dale is right in 
 following Bloomf., who interprets for a short time. Neither do I consider 
 T. K. A.'s in a slight degree, an accurate rendering of the preposition. Kriig.'s 
 quotation bears me out, t^s &,pniplas iirl fipaxit Kti/ijdelffrjs. Dion, trepl Suytf., 
 14, p. 162. rb TrKeof tov xp^^o^- Popp. remarks that rb/' irXeoi-a, or 
 
 irh-ea ToS xp^""" is 'magis Thucydideum.' Nostrum tamen non falsum. This 
 is corroborated by Kriig. from Th Tr\4ov rov xwp£oy, iv. 4. ix^ TaxeTs. 
 
 On this unusual juj) Poppo remarks, ' Adnotandum /i^, quod apud^oWJcipiwra 
 causale rarius legitur in scriptis Atticorum, velnt Demosth. u. Bceot. de nom. 
 § 35, ssepius apud communis dialecti scriptores.' Kriig. agrees so far as to 
 say that ouk is positively required by Surts, except that in this case the influ- 
 ence of the infinitive justifies ,u:r) — an explanation which itself requires to be 
 explained. The broad distinction between the two negatives is, that ov simply 
 and directly denies a fact or proposition, while /uj) denies in reference to some 
 conception foi-med by the mind of facts or propositions : it is entirely subjec- 
 tive, and expresses negation in the conceptions of the mind, not non-existence 
 in nature. If ov Tax^^s he, ' not quick/ i. c. slow as an absolute reality, /i^ 
 TOx«'s is. ' not conceived of under the category of quick ' — those with whom the 
 notion of ' quick ' was never connected. For practical purposes, in collocations 
 like this the difference of meaning is trivial and not easily expressed. See 
 note on fi^ eir* ayaOip, ii. 17, and 22 d. oik ^ lots. Tiie Helot war. 
 
 See ch. loi. Miiller {Dor.) thinks that a war with the Arcadians is meant. 
 But considering the antagonism between the two nations, I do not believe 
 oUelois would in such a case be used, whatever might be the claims of Sparta 
 to a hogemonia in Peloponnesus. ttjs ^vfiixax^f^s. Abstractum 
 
 pro concreto. ffa<j>us ppero — * was manifestly on the rise.' This very 
 
 candid and positive statement of Thucydides should be borne in mind by the 
 historical student, for the perusal of Mr. Grote's great work has a natural 
 tendency to obscure or obliterate the fact which it asserts. The ingenious 
 
Chap. 120.] NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 12/ 
 
 pleading of Mr. Grote would almost persuade us that Athens could never have 
 been culpable in her relations with Lacedsemon. 
 
 (e.) ovKiTt afaa-x^rhv iirotovvTo — 'considered itto he a thingno longer 
 to be put up with.' Soii. 21. fTrtx^ipv-rea.—' athing to be attempted.' 
 
 See note, ch. 88. el iroXc/ioutriy . . . eo-rai. See Jelf, § 691. The 
 
 question is transferred to the direct form, as addressed to the god ; so in the 
 next chapter, ei ^ph TroXf/ifTv. In the answer of the god, Bloomf. conceives 
 tliat the usual oracular ambiguity is latent in Tro\e/io5o-i, which is universal, and 
 might be applied to either party. It may be so ; yet, as Kriig. remarks, there 
 is no real ground for supposing that the oracle had a doable nieaniug. It 
 certainly was universally believed to favour the Laceda3monians. Cf. toO Stoi 
 Xpri<rai'Tos koI avrov inro^xoiieyov ^vWTitf/eirSai, i. 1 23, and similarly, il. 54 ; and 
 Kriig. adds Plut. de Or. Fyth. 19. Grote, from the iis Ae^erai, considers that 
 Thucyd. was sceptical as to tlie fact of its ever having been given. 
 &lieivov. A sort of cant phrase with oracles, cf. rb IleXairyiKiy S.pyoi' Hiiuvov. 
 Bloomf. refers to the common &s koX &.ixeivoi/, and Hesiod, 0pp. ii. 368, ixtiS" 
 ctKLvr^TMcrt Kadi^etVy oif yap ^fieivov. &K\'r]Tos. Popp. quotes Hor. 
 
 Od. ii. 18, ad finem, ' Hie . . . vocatus atque non vooatus audit.' The Lacedae- 
 monians considered the plague at Athens as exhibiting the fulfilment of the 
 god's promise. See ii. 54. 
 
 Chaptee CXIX. — {a.) aZBis refers back to tte conferences mentioned ch. 
 87. %ei\6ivT is . . . HOTe ffiri<t>iiTair9ai. Similar instances are cited by 
 
 Kriig. : ouk eireidovro ilxne ^x^^^°-^' ^^^ ^iii- 4S> ^SiSoo'ttec HxTTe S6fTa irua'ai. 
 Matthias, Or. Gfr. § 629 c. expresses himself unable to satisfy his own mind 
 whether any, and what difierence, subsists between Scrre with an infinitive and 
 indicative. The former appears to me to be employed when the result might, 
 upon general principles, be anticipated as likely, and when, supposing that it 
 did follow, it might be accounted for a priori. With the indicative, on the con- 
 trary, SxTTe denotes, as a positive truth, that the result did follow ; it points to 
 a matter of fact, and is quite independent of all a priori considerations. In ii. 
 4, both occur in close connexion, Strre SiKpBetpovTo iroWoiytSO that many actually 
 perished, a positive fact; and again, e/c^eitre ras irvKas tlitm fi^ e|o5oi/ elvai, 
 * shut the gates, so as to allow of no egress/ a general result following naturally 
 from the previous act. So I had been accustomed to teach, long before I had 
 the advantage of seeing Mr. Shilleto's able paper upon this, idiom, where a 
 similar doctrine appears to be laid down, but with very different precision and 
 accuracy. I shall consult the advantage of the student by referring him to 
 Mr. Shilleto's edition of Pemosth. Be Falsa Legatione, Appendix B. 
 Ka\ rSre /col TeK^vraloi, coming forward last upon thisoccasion, aswellas 
 upon the previous one (see i. 67, ad finem), in order to sum up, and urge with 
 greater force, all the complaints against Athens. 
 
 Chapteb CXX.— (a.) ovK fey en. As they had done before. See ch. 68. 
 iis ov — as though they had not, implying that now they have. No difficulty 
 need be made about this, for the yap in xph T^P' immediately following, does 
 not give the reason for the foregoing statement, but, as often happens, for an- 
 other implied by or involved in it. Translate, ' [We say blame] /or those who 
 
128 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [JiooK 1. 
 
 are leaders oughty while administering their own affairs fairly [/. e. without a 
 grasping spirit towards tlieir neighbours], to he before others in attending to the 
 general interests, just as they are among others selected out of all to receive the 
 highest honours^ This is what I have always thought the right interpretation, 
 though ^v fiAAots is generally interpreted, according to the exposition of tlie 
 Scholiast, in other things — i. e. Iv irpoeSpiif koX tois roiolnots. Kriig. agrees 
 with the version I have given ; for i^ Xaou he compares the conduct attributed 
 to the Athenians, iv. 6i, 4, ivKioveKT ttv ; but the idea of 'fair dealing to 
 others' is the essential one coutaiued in rb Xffov. 
 
 (J.) evi\Wiyriaav — have had dealings with. The word contains the notion 
 of barter and exchange. See L. and S. Lexicon. iv iripcf — in the highway of 
 intercourse. The Schol. explains nopov xaXe't to ifiTipia. Corinth, from its situa- 
 tion between two seas, was eminently such an €fj.Tr6pioVy and is doubtless hinted 
 at here. So several cities are said to be iv ir6p(pt vi. 48. KaraKo- 
 
 futSiiv — a conveyance of goods for exportation down to (he coast, as is evident 
 from the elements of which the word is composed. avrlKri^is — 
 
 the receiving of others in exchange. KaKovs Kpiras — had.judges, 
 
 because careless and uninterested. Bloomf. cf. trovrip^ ;^p^o-eTat Kpn-^, Eurip. 
 JSlect. ^'j^. irpoolvTo. So read Kriig. and Poppo. Bekker prints 
 
 from some MSS. Trpoiivro, and Arn. follows him from deference to his judg- 
 ment. It is certain that the forms in -oivro are pronounced by the gramma- 
 rians to be peculiarly Attic, but for this very reason Bekker believes them to 
 hiue been frequently substituted for others by copyists. Such he imagines to 
 liave been the case here. On such a point, without great special experience, it 
 is impossible to pronounce. 
 
 (c.) 61 ,1*1) iSiKolvTo — for tjv ii.il dSi/cuvTai say both Popp. and Kriig., not, 
 however, I presume, without a distinction of meaning. This distinction 
 between ijv /ii) cum subjunctivo, and ei jiii cum optative, is frequently misun- 
 derstood. It is not, for instance, quite correct to say, that the former contem- 
 plates the realization of the hypothesis positively and certainly, the latter 
 vaguely and dubiously. The event expressed by the verb which follows fir 
 may be less probable than that expressed by the optative after el, but tho 
 former puts an alternative which experience will soon decide, or is likely soon 
 to decide, or perhaps has decided, one way or other; the latter expresses a 
 less positive opinion as to the arrival of such an opportunity for decision ; ef. 
 ii. 5, ef Ttva Ka^ouv . . . fiv Sipa riixoiai Tives iQayptifiivoi. The first case was 
 quite uncertain — if they should have the lucJc to catch any ; the second supposition 
 must have been tested in the course of the night, as the &pa shows — if, as theii 
 had reason to anticipate, any had been captured. Here T. K. A. asserts that 
 the mixture of the obliqua and directa oratio is quite enough to account for tho 
 change. The optative, therefore, is often employed by a sort of euphemism 
 for the setting forth of disagreeable or unwelcome alternatives, and the state- 
 ment of questions which are not in themselves pleasant to entertain; cf. el 
 avTl(Txoiev, next ch. Again, as here, upon the same principle, generalized 
 statements about undefined persons require el with the optative ; but where 
 the statement concerns definite, known persons, and an alternative to which it 
 is thought they will be subjected, t]v with the subjunctive is employed. See 
 (Ed. Col. 1442, for an instance, ijv juj) aSiKuvrai, in the event of their not 
 
Chap. 12 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 29 
 
 being injured; el nil aSmoivro, supposing it should come to pass they are not 
 lyured. i^ u iv. The preposition denotes here, as often, out of, 
 
 I. e. after a state of peace, &c. trafiaaxiv, as ir«pex">'S sometimes 
 
 used impersonally ; the neuter participle, like those of other impersonals, stands 
 ra the nom. absolute—' when good opportunity offers.' Kriig. quotes KaWoi 
 KoXus ye trwippovelv wape^xe aoi, Eurip. Meet. 1080, cf. v. 14, 60, 63. 
 TlS6/j.ei/oi'. We mightexpect the plural after ai/Sfiiiv a-wfpivcav — kyaBav. But 
 it comes to the same thing, for the singular iin6nevov\% as indefinite as the ante- 
 cedent plural: so in English, it is the part of good men, and it is a good man's 
 part. For the change from o^afliDi' to oSi/cou/ieVouj, cf. Jelf, 675 a. aSiKcV- 
 o-floi — 'to he the subject of wrong,' or o5iK<a, just as i Cor. vi. 7, Siari o&x* 
 tiaWov aSMe7a6e ; Popp. cf. TroKtopKe7(r0ai, iii. 52. 
 
 (d.) el Tia-vxa.(^oi. Note the force of the present, ' if he continues in a state 
 of apathy.' euTu^i^ irXeovA^u v — in the present case very much the 
 
 same as TrXeavtKTaiv, except that the termination in -afyi modifies the way in 
 which the notion is predicated — is induced by success to exhibit too high preten- 
 sions. See Dem. Il7t 5* ^""ecSi? irKeovd^eiv 4irexetpovp Kal irepa tov fierpiou to 
 Ka9effTiiK6Ta iictvovy. airltTTtfi — which is not deserving of trust. 
 
 KaKus yvuaSevra — baMy judged measures. TvxfivTav — because their 
 
 opponents chanced to he still worse advised. So we must tr., if with Bekker, 
 Poppo, and Goller, we read the genitive tvxSvtoiv. This will, then, form one 
 of the rare instances where rvyxavw occurs without a participle. See i. 32 c. 
 No one very clear case is found; but cf. Soph. Ajax, 9: ei'Sai/ yip afrip 
 S.pTi ruyxivei, which may be explained away by the occurrence of a participle 
 in the next line. Cf. also JSlectra, 46, 113 rfome MSS. read tuxi^cto, which 
 Goll. prefers to retain. en irXeu. Omissum est verbum substan- 
 
 tivum. Popp. TreptetTTT] — have come round to be. See note on 
 
 Tiepie<TTi]Kei; ch. 32. op-oia. ttj irlirTei. This is the common 
 
 reading, retained by Bekker, though both Popp. and Kriig. adopt Reiske's 
 emendation Sfioic^. I should tr. : * jFor no man in actual performance carries out 
 things upon the same scale, as that on which he speculates upon them in his 
 sanguine hopes [lit. confidence'^ for we indulge our fancies in security, but in the 
 midst of apprehensions we fail in the execution,' — i. e. so long as we are in a 
 state of security, we may frame what visionary schemes we please, but the 
 dangers which attend their realization disable our powers by the apprehensions 
 which they excite. The other (purely conjectural) reading, iiixoia, would be, 
 * no man lays his schemes, and proceeds practically to execute them with equal con- 
 fidence' — lit. 'his confidence equal.' The meaning does not seem to me suffi- 
 ciently improved to warrant the alteration. The objection urged by Dale, that 
 Tj iricTTei ought to be answered by -rip epyip, is, I think, obviated by con- 
 sidering the nature of the latter noun and Its use in Thucyd., where it is 
 so familiar as almost to assume an adverbial character. Indeed, we ourselves 
 say ' in practice,' instead of ' in his practice.' Cf. Jelf, 752, 2. Cf. in xaip^, 
 at the proper time, next chapter. 
 
 Chaptee CXXI.— (a.) iSiKoiiieyoi. Sine articulo; therefore expresses 
 cause or condition, because we are suffering nrong. iyeipo/iey^ 
 
 ' walce up the toar.' Rather poetical : but it is not unnatural that an orator 
 
I30 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 should employ strong and Homeric language upon this point. Cf. ^yi'pf Se 
 <pv\oiriv a'uii]v, II. xi. 213. Xenophon and Polybius imitated Thucyd., as may 
 be seen in the citations of Bl. and Kriig. to irapayye\\6fjLeva. 
 
 This is the technical military term for passing the word of command along (iropa) 
 the ranks. See inter alia Xen. Anab. i. 8. 3. Most commentators, &c., trans- 
 late as though it were ret irapayyihSfina, losing the force of the present, which 
 is worth notice. For they do not boast of mere subordination, but of that 
 aptitude and training which enables soldiers in action to catch the word of 
 coniniand as it is given, and act accordingly. 
 
 (i.) iv i^(\ipo^s. Delphi must therefore have passed away from the 
 Phooians (cf. ch. 112), and have fallen again under Lacedasmonian in- 
 fluence, hdveiffiia TToi'titTiiiJ.ivot — * having effected a loan.' Tlie 
 temples were the banks and capitalists of antiquity. All the provisions for 
 securing repayment of one of these loans from a temple, were almost as elaborate 
 as those of modern times- Cf. ii. 13. uTroAaSeTy. In uTrb is con- 
 tained the idea, secretly cir furtively withdraw. wv7}Tij. Kriig. 
 doubts whether this is to be interpreted gekauft, i.e. purchased, mercenary, 
 or kiiuflich, i.e. purchasable. Probably the orator meant that the ambiguity 
 of the word should suggest the connexion between the two ideas. 
 
 (e.) aXitrKovTai — cf. ch. 32. The perfect usage of the present. Metaphor 
 from capturing a besieged town. If it were not that the phrase has degene- 
 rated into slang, we might translate, they are sacked. At any rate, it means, 
 it is all over with them. el avria-xotev. See note on el fi^ aStKo7i/To, 
 
 last ch. 5^ irov — Z suppose one may assume ; I presume. The 
 
 speaker enunciates a paiticle of absolute certainty, 5^, and then qualifies it by 
 one of uncertainty, irov, as if he had said, Tf^itk the utmost certainty, — at least, I 
 suppose we may say so, KaBaipeT eov — must he put down Q.it. pulled 
 
 down) by our practice. I cannot see why D. should translate may be attained 
 by us. The Attic usage is surely all the other way. Cf. XP^""! KaBaipe! iravTa, 
 iEsch. Sum. 286, and /xo^pa rhy tpvaavra Kade7\€, Ajax, 517. See also, in a 
 sense plainly derivative from this, t!i Miyapiuv ■^■qtpuTiia KaBaipeiv, infra, ch. 
 140. And Engelmanhas rightly, ' dwrcA Uebung bewaltigen,' a,-aA.7ieyort, 'nous 
 enli'verons par le travail.' 
 
 (d.) xp^iiiOTo. In refutation of the words of Archidamus, c. 80. Popp. 
 Ij auTo— without any immediate word to which it refers. Important, as I 
 have more than once observed, cf. 22 a, in reference to iii. 84. ovk 
 
 anepova IV — 'shall not faint' ot fail. The notion is that a fiiinting person 
 ceases to spealc. In this sense imCmov is more common. It will be observed 
 that in this sentence ov twice follows ei, whereas according to the usual rules 
 of the language jii) would be required. The phrase Setvhv ei is, however, a 
 peculiar one, and really amounts to a positive affirmation — no doubt is at any 
 rate implied, and therefore ei loses in a great measure its grammatical force. 
 ' It would be hard that while their allies won't be found wanting ' (not ' if they 
 won't,' implying doubt), ' we shall not,' &c. The reasons which excuse the first 
 oh, are of course valid in respect of the second. Indeed after the sentence 
 had once assumed the direc,t form, p.i) would have been improper. Kriig., I 
 think, if I understand him aright, agrees with this view. ' ei,' says he, ' is ex- 
 tinguished, because, as ipa shows, an independent question expressive of indig- 
 
Chap. 122.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I3I 
 
 nation is introducerl — tiiius ov Sawanriaofxev.' He quotes Lysias, xii. 36, 
 ovKovy Suvhv et robs fJLev (rTpaTTjyobs Bavdn^ i^TifildiffaTe^ tovtovs 5e 5^ . , . oi/K 
 Spa xp^ Ko\a.Ce<reai : where also we might render— J« it not hard that you 
 should have punished, &c. Buttmann, in speaking of the passage (quoted by 
 T. K. A.), says the first ou is used because a positive and notorious fact is as- 
 sumed ; in the second clause the construction passes into the form of a question 
 implying surprise and conveying reproof. otiK &pa Soirai'^iTO/tev — 
 
 * shall not, as it seems to be inferred^ contribute our money.' avrd, 
 
 sc. xP'hfio-Tay cf. note supra. avTo7s tovtois — by this very money of 
 
 our own, which, like the eagle's pinion ia the Ai$v<rTiKhs \6yos, would be used 
 against us for our own destruction. Arnold surely is wrong in tr., ' in that very 
 part in which we are most sensitive ;' viz. our property. 
 
 Chapter CXXII. — (a.) 63ol TroAeVou — ' ways and meansfor carrying on the 
 war.' So Tacitus — 'belli vias/ An. ii. 5. aTrSaraais — much con- 
 
 troversy has been wasted, whether or no this word can have an active sense, 
 e.g. withdrawal. I believe it cannot, but it surely comes to the same thing. 
 The speakers say, 'revolt of allies,' m general terms, not thinking it necessary 
 to specify how such revolt was to be brought about. It might be by their 
 intrigues or by the inclination of the parties concerned. At any rate, war 
 would give an opportunity for it, and it would, in either case, be equally dis- 
 astrous to Athens. e'lriTcix"''/'"''- The construction of fortified 
 positions either in, or close to, an enemy's territory, which may be used as ii 
 ' point d'appui,' or basis for predatory and other operations against them. It 
 has been observed that this is an anticipation. The Peloponnesians never 
 thought of such a thing until Alcibiades put it into their heads. Then, how- 
 ever, they carried out the suggestion by fortifying Deceleia. See also ch. 142, 
 note. ^t1 ^nroTs, specified, andtherehie definite, fixed rules ; cf. 
 iirl p-riro^s yepafft, ch. i^, avrhs atp' avrov — 'forms Us schemes 
 itself from itself to suit the emergencies as they arise.' rh Traparvy- 
 ydvov — 'pro re natd,' the occasion as it presents itself. 4v ^ — se. 
 iroKeiup. eiopyliTtos — ' without losing his temper.' If we read aurii' 
 with Am. and Kriig., it is perhaps best to connect it with 6pyi(reils, so that the 
 two expressions exactly balance : he who deals with it in good temper, and he who 
 puts himself in a passion about it. ttt a i € ; — ' stumbles,' meets with an over- 
 throw. Bekker has accepted Dobree's conjecture, -nepl aWSv, stumbles over 
 himself — is the cause of his own failure. But in vi. 33, we have vepX a-ipiiriv 
 airols irra.icaKTiv, and in i. 69, mtpX aurm (T^aAeWct, where Arn. quotes /xj; irspi 
 KapSovitp ■uTo.lari tj 'Ewds, Herod, ix. 101. We should, therefore, expect the 
 dative here. 
 
 (J.) kotA tJau' — 'state by state separately,' or rather, 'against each state 
 separately.' ei iii)~-ifwe do not all collectively and severally. 
 
 Every member of the confederacy must individually exhibit its zeal ; it will 
 not do to have some active, and some lukewarm. &yriKpvs Sov- 
 
 X€iay. We have v &vnKpvs iKevBipia, viii. 64, downright freedom; but per- 
 haps T. K. A. is right in remarking that the absence of the article should 
 make a difference in our rendering : iv.' slavery outright," slavery staring us in 
 the face.' iySoici<rerjvai. According to the etymology the word must 
 
 K 2 
 
132 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 signify ' to he in a state of halting' or * wavering between two opinions;' tr. ' it is 
 disgraceful to Felo'ponnesus that two opinions should ever he expressed about it.' 
 I do not like Arn.'s version, * that the very name of slavery should he pronounced 
 as within possihility applicable to it' nor D/s, * to be even mentioned as contin- 
 gent,' cf. i. 36; vi. 91. Krug. remarks tbat the word is not used by Attic 
 writers. rvpavvoy tt6Xiv — suffer a despot city (or, a usurping city) to 
 
 }e set up in Oreece Upon the suppression of 'tyrants' in Greece by the 
 Lacedaemonians, see ch. 18, and the note there. 
 
 (e.) ovK ifffifv — we know not how such conduct gets rid of three of the most 
 calamitous things that can befall a man — or, clears itself from labouring under 
 one of the three greatest evils which can befall — want of sense, want of spirit, or 
 want of care, ov yiip S^ — 'for surely ye do not escape these charges 
 
 by talcing refuge in that which has damaged far more persons than anything 
 else, contempt of your enemy, we mean, which from the ruin it has inflicted upon 
 numbers, has come to he called by a name expressing the very opposite, contemp' 
 tible want of sense.' ^ ataxia is generally translated 'cowardice,' but 
 
 surely this is strong language applied to Spartans ; it is rather ' want of energy 
 and exertion.' It is impossible in our language to express properly the play upon 
 the words KaratppdvTia-is and atppoaivti. Dr. Donaldson {New Cratylus, p. 184), 
 has observed that the present passage proves the simple a as well as ava to 
 be a direct opposition to xari. I have translated the passage as I have always 
 understood it. Bat it ought to be mentioned that another view of it is accepted 
 by T. K. A. and Dale : ' For you assuredly had not escaped these wlien you 
 heiook yourself to that contempt which has injured so very many,' &c. This, I 
 consider, contains too direct a charge against the Lacedsemonians, whom they 
 wished to conciliate; and, secondly, the Laceda;monians bad not so much 
 despised the growing power of Athens, as overlooked it from oititTTia. and 
 a/xadia. See ch. 68 ; and on i(ppo<rmri, Jelf, § 475 a. 
 
 Chaptee CXXIII. — (a.) toTs iropoSiri fioTiBovvras — 'comingto the aid of 
 things as they are,' * making the best of Cf. Livy : • Quae fortuna coegisset ita 
 fieri, eandem cogere tueri factum' (xxiii. 35). The iwl in the following 
 verb implies the bestowal of additional pains and trouble. Kriig. considers puK- 
 \6vTan' with e-rniTa suspicious. It is not necessary for the sense, but helps the 
 antithesis of sound; and he himself quotes rb ecrai ov too i-nena tov /i4Woyros 
 (I'lato, Farm. 141 e). toj apercij. Both Popp. and Kriig. give the 
 
 same meaning as to aperfi, ch. 33, «. e.' existimatio virtutis,' 'your character for 
 valour.' Cf. the Latin use of laus, laudes, for honores, e.g.' pro laude merentis,' 
 Hor. Up. I. vii., and so, indeed, honours, in English. 
 
 fl Upa — ' if peradventure.' iKr-hBii. Though KTao;xai be deponent, 
 
 this aorist is passive ; so is &<^tiv from ottto/xoi. Tr. ' it is not right to lose in 
 the day of abundance, what has been won in tlie time of difficulty.' Kara 
 
 iro\Aa — 'on many scores.' u(pe\i(}, a sort of instrumental dative — 
 
 from the benefit thereby accruing to them.' The weakening of the Athenian 
 power would free them from oppression and in many cases from tribute. 
 TrapajSf /Soo-flai— '<o have been transgressed.' Kriig. points out that the perf. 
 pass, from /3e/8a/iai occurs in other compounds — ^v/ifiePiirBai, viii. 98, and di/o- 
 ^i&aixivos, Xen. Sipparch. i, 4 ; the aor. ^u;Uj3a9^TOi, iv. 30, and ira^oe^yai, 
 Xen. Ilepl 'Iirir. iii. 4. Elsewhere the form is not found in Attic writers. 
 
Chap. 125.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I33 
 
 Chaptee CXXIV. — (a.) iirapxav. D. tr. 'since on every ground you have 
 good reason for going to war.' But I am suvprieed tliat he has not. seen how 
 iirdpxov has direct reference to inipxova-t, c. 122— ' since you have excellent re- 
 sources coming in on all sides for war.' Cf. ii. 62 : Inrapxov yt tintv, ' at least 
 when you had the resource.' elirep — 'if^ as we must assume s' cf. supra 
 
 69 b. It is natural to conjecture toutA for toCto, as I had myself done without 
 seeing that Reiske and Goll. bad done the same, but the latter now allows, and 
 I believe with truth, that ravra is right. Am. well explains : 'We advise this 
 war for the interest of the whole confederacy, and it is for their interest, if it 
 be admitted as most certain, that this measure is alike for the benefit of states, 
 and of the individuals who reside in them.' Both ravra and riSe refer to iroXt- 
 fierc. So says Popp. c. 143, ' ravra et riSe de eadem re dieuntur.' 
 ov irpdrtpov — 'the opposite of which was formerly the case.' oS refers to the 
 whole clause. See, for the fact, v. g, vi. 77, vii. j, viii. 25, Popp. 
 fi€Tf\8e7v Tiiv l\ev6eplav — 'to ensue the freedom of the rest,' as in the 
 E. V. of the New Test., ' seek peace, and ensue it.' The Germane similarly 
 say, ' noGhgehen der Freiheit.' 
 
 (5.) ovKCTi Ij/Sexerat — it is no longer admissible— if is no longer a possible 
 case. Cf. ch. 140,142. aip'ixd at— impersona},' that things have come to a strait.' 
 Cf. fj o'lav reKevriiv a<l>7KT0, vii. 75. Sii trXclovos, sc. XP^""" — 'lasting 
 
 a longer time.' iK TroKe/Mov . . , acp' Tjirvx^cts. The different use of 
 
 the prepositions is well seen here — €k arising out of, aud therefore following 
 from; awh from a regard to. 4k is ever the material cause ; in oTrb the causal 
 notion comes from the primary local one — thai mhich comes away from an object. 
 T^f KaBea-TijKVLa v — the usurping (or despot) city that has been set up in Greece, 
 eiri^to the detriment of. Ziavo^7fyBai, sc. &pxitv—on this 
 
 use of Sirre, denoting the natural consequence of what precedes, cf. supra 
 76 c. 
 
 Chaptee CXXV. — (a.) a(f>' atrdvTuv. Kriig. remarks that such a use of 
 the preposition is rare with aKoveiv though not with fiav6dv€iv — ' heard from the 
 lips of all.' There is nothing strange in the omission of the article before 
 •yviipLTiP, it belongs to the class of cases already noticed (cf. 8 a), and may be 
 illustrated by such expressions as ' show cause,' &c., in our own language. 
 rh ir\TJ9os — 'the majority;' for, as A. remarks, it is said, v. 30, Kipiov elvai 
 S Ti tiv ri ttXtjOos tS)v ^v^fid-xoif ^7i<piir7}Tai. deSoyfj.4vov — used abso- 
 
 lutely, as the more familiar cases of SS^av, 'irapacrx<l>', &o. This wonld be scarce 
 worth noticing had not some copyists introduced SeSoyfj.€vov into the MSS. Cf* 
 with Kriig. elptifxifov, i. 140 and elsewhere, yeypa^fi^vov, v. 56, irpotTTeray;j.fyoi' 
 in Plato, and Jelf, 700. 2 a. 'oncos Si k.t.\. This I believe refers 
 
 to ft^ eTvai (i€\\ri(Tti>, i. e. notwithstanding the resolution to make no delay in the 
 settlement of the 'necessary preliminaries, not indeed a tvhole year (one cannot say 
 a year), but something less teas consumed. This was my own impression of the 
 meaning, but the editions with which I was familiar, A. and Popp., gave the 
 sense as the Eng. trans. D. does: 'A year, however, did not pass while they 
 were settling all that was necessary ;' hut I cannot think that Thuc. would speak 
 of a year as a short time for the purpose. Ki-iig. seems to adopt the first inter- 
 pretation, and so does the last German trans. (Engelman) : ' zwar icein Jahr, 
 aber doch nicht viel weniger.' 
 
1 34 A'OTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Chaptbe CXXVI. — (ffi.) 71V nil Ti laaKoitraai. Cf. I20 o. 
 rh &yos T^s Bfov — ' the ahominationof the goddess,' i.e. — as it might mean in 
 our own language — ' the thing which the goddess abominated' iXaivnv is 
 
 the regular technical term for the expulsion of persons {Ivayets) so situated. 
 See CEdip. Tgr. ^S. KiKav k.t.\. The simple and lucid way 
 
 in which Thucyd. has given this narrative, and its difference from his usual 
 sterner style (rh tpo^ephf KtiWos) struck the grammarians so much that they said 
 of it Ae'ojj' 4y4\a(re. See Grote, iii. io8. The date of the victory of Cylon 
 in the Diaulus, according to Corsini, Diss. Ag. p. 171 (Kriig.) was Olymp. 
 XXXV. tLvftXiv. The regular word for the answer of the oracle. 
 
 iTrR\K9iv. Several, and I believe the better, MSS. have itrT]K6ov. This involves 
 the question concerning the real nature of the principle upon which the Greeks 
 combine a neuter plural with a verb singular. T believe it to be this : Neuters, 
 whatever may be their plurality in mere number, do not contain the notion of 
 separate individuality and agency ; they are embraced by the mind ' en masse' 
 as a single whole. As they thus exhibit but a single operation or action, th^ 
 verb denoting this action is put in the singular number. This accords with the 
 view taken by Coleridge, Tab. Talk, ii. 61, vir. that neuters may possess 
 multeity but not plurality. From this he deduces the conclusion that neuters 
 plural beingmerelyoJ/sc<i,haveno proper «Mi;ec^^or»iornominative. Dr. Donald- 
 son supports the same theory, regarding all such neuters as properly accusative 
 eases, and the verb with which they are connected as impersonal in usage. 
 ' Apud GrsBcos neutra pluralia {i. e. accusativi, nam genus neutrum nominativo 
 caret) verbo singulari apponuntur, ut to fua rpExf 1, i. e. curritnr quoad animalia.' 
 Upon the same principle, it is plain, as is here laid down, that there is no neuter 
 nominative singular. It may be true, as Coleridge says, that neuters have 
 'objectivity' alone, yet I can scarcely admit that, because neuters do not pos- 
 sess a conscious metaphysical subjectivity, they cannot be made the subjects of 
 a grammatical proposition. The same mental tendency which, in all languages, 
 ascribes masculine and feminine *nomina' to things without life, and ra &^l/vxa 
 efi\f/vxa \4yfi Sih Trjs nfTa<popus (Ar. Shet. iii. 11. 3), might well be supposed to 
 sanction the subject-form, or nominative, as applied to a neuter noun. But neuter 
 plurals are sometimes followed by verbs plural, when the idea which they express, 
 and which forms the subject of the verb, may easily be divided in thought into 
 separate individualities and agencies, a case by no means so universal as Arn. 
 imngines. Thus ra ^eSa rpexa — * living creatures run,' regarding them as a 
 single logical class ; but we might have ri ftoa Tp4xov(riii — ' the creatures are 
 running,' if the writer m''ant to describe several separate animals as doing so. 
 Here reference may be intcfmied to the various ayaves of which the Olympia 
 consisted. At any rate this principle appears to me to explain the only 
 passages in which, so far as I remember, Thucyd. in this way couples «. neuter 
 plural to a plural verb : e.g. ii. 8, iroA.\ck \iyia iXiyovTo : here the diversity of 
 meaning or expression in the \iym, or, at any rate, their entire independence 
 of ouch other, is conveyed by the plural ; v. 26, k^tpoTipots afiapriifiara 4y4vovTo, 
 the separate and distinct erroi-s ascribed to either party would naturally 
 not fall under a single conception expressed by a singular verb. At v. 75, 
 KapvEio iriyxavov Si/ra is a case which exactly resembles the present one. 
 In vi. 62, iytvovTo rf/coffi Kol (Karbv -riKavTa, the plural indicates tlin 
 
Chap. 1 26.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 1 35 
 
 6cveral sums which together made up {iyevovTo, ' amounted to '), the total. See 
 also Jelf, § 385. KaT4\afi(. Aecoi'ding to Herodotus (v. 71) he 
 
 made tne atterapt without succeeding. is ^Tri rvpavviSL — 'as they 
 
 would do who tvere striving to establish a tyranny ;' cf. Jelf, § 634, 3 a. 
 t: irpotT'fitety — ' had some peculiar reference to himself (or appropriateness io 
 himself) as an Olympic victor.' €ti KoreKjijcre — any further, i. e. his 
 
 comprehension of the oracle's meaning went no further. Kriig. says, however, 
 Ka.Tiv6t\(T( is, 'considered,' but cf. xarevSritre, eh. T38 b. On '0A.i(jii7ria vrntKri- 
 kAti, cf. Jelf, § 459. 5 ; Monk on Alcest. v.; and on us iirl, § 626. 1, on iirl 
 Tupavi/iSi, § 634. 3, and ^Tri ^Tifxv&v Oiu/v, § 633. 3 a. 
 
 (6.) Aida-ia. ' Jovia M6i\ix(o" crebra apud veteres mentio,' Duker. Nor 
 was his worship confined to Athens alone, nor indeed the name to Zeus. As 
 it was celebrated irci.v5ijfiel, and without the walls, there would naturally be an 
 excellent opportunity for the execution of Cylon's plan. iroWoi — 
 
 many of them not victims, hut sacrificial offerings, such as were common in the 
 country. These, as he goes on to explain, were cakes made in the shape of 
 animals, and offered by persons too poor to possess or purchase the animals 
 themselves — ire/A/iaro ets ^watv fjt.op<pas Tervnap-eva, Schol. Cf. Herod, on the 
 Egyptians, ii. 47. 
 
 (c.) iiriyLyifop.4vov — 'accruing,' 'being added to what went before.' 
 ai/TOKpdropa-t — ' with full powers.' Arn.refersto Hevm. JPol. Antiq. Greece, 
 § 103, who says that it is impossible to ascertain the manner in which, at this 
 period, the ruling houses (yeV?;) exercised their privileges. The insurrection, 
 however, without doubt was only a consequence of their sanguinary enactments, 
 and, thongh they succeeded in overpowering Cylon, the perfidy with which they 
 acted precipitated their fall. Herod., it will be remembered, v. 71. 3, speaks 
 of the vpvrdyiis Tav vavKpipav, o'lirep ivep^ov Tcire rhs 'ABiivas, as tlie persons 
 concerned in these dealings with Cylon. They perhaps were the executive 
 power acting under the authority of the arohons. Engelman's ed. supposes that 
 they formed a sort of college among themselves. Bahr, ad locum Herod., Wachs- 
 muth, § 436, Bockh {Public Ec. of Athens), Schoman De Comitiis, xii xiii., all 
 treat of this difficult question. The younger student may refer to the Diet. 
 Antiq., Grote, and Thirlwall. t cSt e. Because the power of the 
 
 archons was limited by Solon. (pKaupas—i.e. KaKi>s, or, as vulgarly 
 
 would be said, ' scurvily.' Poppo remarks that Tliuc. elsewhere always says 
 <t>a,v\os, but never <pai\ois. Upon such matters nothing can decide but the 
 'usus' of the time, with which truly rests the ' arbitrium, jus, et norma 
 loquendi.' 
 
 id.) ar/aa-riiirayTiS — 'raised them up from their suppliant position.' As 
 Kriig. says, this is the regular word for inducing persons to quit a sanctuary or 
 asylum, cf. ch. 128, 136. eTriTerpa^Me'""' tJ)'' (pvAaffi", cf. 'in- 
 
 scripti nomina regum,' Virg. Eel. iii. 106; ' Suspensi loculos,' Hor. Sat. i. 
 T/i. 17^. airoBviicrKOVTas — ' on the point of death.' 4Trl 
 
 rwv ,r€p:vmv—' at the altar of the venerable goddesses: See Arist.:Bj«Ji. 1311, 
 KaBriaeai p.01 Soke? . . . >! tuv ffepyay BiCv. This temple, says the Scholiast, 
 lay between the town and the Areopagus. Join, with Popp., eV roXs ^apols to 
 SiaxprifBai; the latter word may be rendered—' dealt with,' 'despatched.' 
 iMT-fiptoi. Tobs a/MapTdmyras eh Totis iKeVcts oMtij/jious e<pa<ricop. Sch. ou 
 
136 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 lEquites, 445, ^k tuv oLKirripiui' ai tpTjtit yeyovevai tuv rijs Beov. 
 
 viTTfpov, i. e. when recalled by Cleisthenes. Kriig. airwv refers 
 
 to the Alcmaeonids. 
 
 Chaptee CXXVII. — (a.) 8?8ei' — an unusual position for the word, which 
 always, as Kriig. remarks, in Thucyd.,/oMoMi« the alleged cause. The later 
 writers however prefixed it. TrpuTov — ' potissimum,' 'mainly.' 
 
 irpoffex^t^^vov avTtf, This is an inversion of the way in which we should 
 state the idea, i. e. an English writer would say, attached to him. 
 rh. dflri ruv 'AdTjvatuv — 'matters from the Athenians/ i.e. their demands 
 from the Athenians. rb /iepos. The article here has caused much em- 
 
 barrassment. It is generally said to be used with a tacit reference to rb &\ov. 
 It seems to me to add strength to the expression, being more emphatic than 
 ti.epos per se, * aliquantum' 'in an appreciable degree,' meaning that a definite, 
 an ascertainable amount of the responsibility rested with him. Might we not, 
 as before (23 c.) read ti fifpos, which of course would be 'aliquantum ? ' 
 iyati — ' leading,' as we say, a leading man in the state, cf. ii. 65. On the 
 alleged causes, supposed to influence Pericles in the support of the war, such as 
 the wishes of Aspasia, &c., see Grote, vol. vi. p. 131. 
 
 Chaptee CXXVIII. — (a.) awh Tatvdpov — which came upon them from 
 Tanarus. kclX (r<pla-Ly aiiTols. The Kal belongs to the whole 
 
 sentence — 'for which reason also they hold that the great earthquake visited 
 them.' Kriig. cf. i. 130; ii. 21. With respect to the fact, ef. ch. 101, 
 
 (S.) Xa\KiotKov — 'Pallas of the brazen chapel.' Probably, as Am. suggests, 
 the walls were lined with plates of brass, like our wood panelling. The editors 
 refer to Pausanias iii. 17, 3 ; cf. Livy xxxv. 36 : ' .ffitoli circa Chalcicecon 
 (Minervae est templum sereum) congregatl caeduntur.' Sir W. Gell, Argolis, 
 p. 30, speaks of the bronze nails in the treasury of Atreus which must have 
 been used to fasten the metal to the walls. iner aireiiipSsls — ' sent 
 
 after,' i. e, judicially summoned, B.C. 478. 'Ep^iovtSa — Sermione, 
 
 a city of the Lacedeemonian confederacy. -npay^ara irpaffaeiv — 
 
 ' to carry on an intrigue.' The infinitive irpdcrffetv depends upon cupiKveTTat, 
 and in this case the English idiom approaches the Greek more nearly than the 
 Latin. Kriig. aptly cf. ij.av6d.vew ^Koyav, (Edip. Tyr. 12; and i. 72, viii. 
 29. It is perhaps needless to remark with Kriig. that Svcu here means — 
 'toithout authority from the Lacedcemonians.' He of. ii. 7a, iv. 78, viii. 5. 
 iwex^^PV^^"- Some good MSS. exhibit ivex^hv^c — ' took in hand.' 
 Tb TrpuTov — i.e. before his recall. The digression containing the reasons for 
 this recall extends to the close of ch. 130. KoreflfTO — 'stored tip a.s a deposit,' 
 cf. i. 33. tJ TrpoTfpcf irapova-la- — ' on his first approach thither,' 
 
 not ' prsesentii,' Bl. But it is not easy to see why. I should tr. • on the first 
 occasion of his being there,' and such is the force of the word, Soph. Elect. 540, 
 and Eur. Sec. 227. Jelf classifies this as a local dative, denoting the 
 
 place where the action of the verb occurs. See § 605. irpoo-^Kovres 
 
 * connexions of the king,' ' qffines,' the participle almost becoming a noun, 
 lu-y-yej/els — 'relatives by consanguinity' though sometimes used generically of 
 those who were not so. Cf. with Popp. Cic, pro Sext. Mosc. § 96, ' propinqui 
 
Chap. 1 29.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 37 
 
 cognatique;' CiEsar, Bell. Gall. i. 11, 'neceasarii et consanguinei ;' Tae. Mist. 
 "i- 34. 'propinqui adSnesque.' ot is omitted, or enclosed in 
 
 brackets, by the best editors. ToyyuKov. Gongylus, says T. K. A., 
 
 quoting an American edition, settled in Mysia after the death of Pausanias, 
 where the king gave hiin several towns. Xenophon, on his arrival in Mysia 
 with the Cyreaus, found his widow still living, E.o. 399. 
 
 (e.) So pi e\<iv—' the captives of his spear.' A poetic, and probably archaic, 
 phrase retained from the language of an early period. yviiiinii 
 
 woiovfiai—' I purpose,' ' I am intending.' Note the present tense. This change 
 from the third person to the tirst is not now uncommon in the epistolary effusions 
 of the uneducated. In Greek it seems to have been less vulgar ; cf. Xen. Sell. v. 
 I. ,?I : 'ApTo^e'plijs j8o(ri\€fij voni^ft Sixaiov . . . roirots iyi> woKefi'fiaui. The de- 
 monstrative ToitrSe is used in reference to the time when the king would receive 
 the letter — ' these prisoners before ^ou.' tre dfjeV/cei. Elsewhere, 
 
 says Popp., Thucyd. always connects a dative with this verb in the active 
 voice. He has also used the passive apea-xea-Bal Tivt, ch. 129 and ii. 68. 
 Aristoph. Plut. v. 353. roiis \6yous — 'what we shall have to say.' 
 
 Chaptee OXXIX.— (o.) 'ApToiSafos. Most probably the same so often 
 mentioned by Herodotus, cf. vii. 66; viii. 126. -riiy re Aaa-KuXTrtv 
 
 K.T.A. This satrapy was so called from a small town on the river Rhyndaous ; 
 it comprehended the cities of Bithynia and Paphlagonia, from the shores of the 
 Hellespont along those of the Euxine. This was, says Am., the province of 
 which Pharuabazus was afterwards satrap. He cf. Herod, iii. 90 ; Xen. Sell. iv. 
 I, § 15. The particle re, says Ki-iig., stands here as though avrfTreTldct did not 
 follow. Similar anacoloutha are found iii. 36, 2 ; vii. 14, 2. 
 
 (b.) avreneTldet — 'entrusted to his care as an answer.' This verb contains 
 within it, by a sort of zeugma, the government of irpdtro'Giv a little further 
 on. TTii' a-<ppayTSa — 'the royal signet.' The Schol. explains, ^ 
 
 ffippoyis Tov Tlepcrwy $aai\e(us e7x6, Karh fJLev rtvas r^v ^aatXeas etK^yay wari 5e 
 TLvas r)]v Kupuu tov nptoTou $a(/i\4ws avTUVj KaroL Se Ttifas rhv Aapctov 'imrov, St' 
 tf xp^l^ariffavTa igairiXevirfv, In this case probably the seal impression on the 
 letter is meant. Popp. of. Xen. Sist. GfriBC. vii. i. 39. 
 
 (fl.) Toiv avSpay. The objective gen. after eutpyeir/a. The word /ceTrai, as 
 well as some of its cognates, graphically denotes ' lying up in store.' 
 avdypainos. The common word in such cases, because probably the name 
 was written up upon some pillar and exposed to public; view. The passage of 
 Herod., to which all editors refer, is the best commentary. HXaKos fiiepyirns 
 fiatrtKeos ayeypd<p7}' 01 Se evepydral $aa-i\4os opoffdyyai KaKiovrai HepffifTTif viii. 85. 
 Kriig. refers to Xenophon, Xlepl TLpocr. iii. 11. KSKoiKva-eai. 
 
 ' Cogita Ti &y ijiol iwia-xyfi,' Popp. The perfect imperative implies something 
 different from the present. The latter would mean — do not allow any impedi- 
 ment to be offered, lit. let it not be in a state of hindrance ; but the first is, do not 
 allow any impediment which has been offered to prevent it ; lit. let it not have 
 been hindered. I make this remark because erroneous explanations have been 
 given. apyipou. Pausanias was said to have received Joo talents 
 
 in gold. fweiiif/a, past tense in reference to the time of the receipt 
 
 of the letter. So too always the Latins ' dabam.' The younger student must 
 
138 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 notice this, as we always make the time of our own writing the standard of 
 tense. Is anything indicated by this difference between the ancient and modem 
 practice ? 
 
 Chapteb CXXX. — (a.) ri ypdiiiiara. As the Latin litercB, 'a letter.' 
 i^lte/ia is a verbal substantive with passive meaning, and takes a verbal con- 
 Btruction, being followed by vir6. Kriig. cf. vi. 15, and apx4 ii. 65, ti^^, Xen. 
 Cyrop. iii. 3, 2, and ddfaros, Plat. Sep. 620 A. Ka6i<rTTiic6T i, 
 
 for the more usual /cafleffTwri, cf. i. 98, Eur. Sel. 438, &c. Kriig. 
 (TKEuos Wr/StKis. Kriig. doubts whether this refers to the caftan, KanSvs, 
 which he imagines would have been described by <rToA^. See his note, Xen, 
 Anab, i. 2, 27. 
 
 (J.) Tpdirefav. Just as we say he kept an expensive table, so here the word 
 does not mean merely the thing itself, but the luxurious living. Remark the 
 raid, voice exercising its force in TrapeTtOiTO. /caTcx^^" t^j' Sidvotav — 
 
 'keep under (conceal) his intention/ ^pax^<^^ — ' trifling ,' as 
 
 often. yvdiiri'iitohR connected with e/ieXXe — 'was in purpose about to 
 
 do/ i.e, was purposed to do, Su(nrp6(roSos. This adjective 
 
 graphically expresses the pride of a tyrant who would admit no one to his 
 presence — 'difficult of access/ Kriig. cf. Xen. Agesil. ix. 2, and hvffTrpiffno^, 
 Iph. in Aul. 345. Tj opy^ — here evidently in the general sense. 
 
 So our word ' temper' has a general sense, and a special acceptation as ' anger,' 
 cf. ch. 140. As might have been anticipated, the former meaning is found 
 more frequently in an earlier stage of the language, e.g. SieweipaTo avTimv 
 T?js av^pvYaQitis KoX rrjs 0/17^9, Her. vi. 128, and i. 73, opy^v ovk &Kpos. Kriig. 
 quotes Simonides, apud Stobaeum, 73. 61. So also Krif^veffcri xoSoipois elf/ceAos 
 opyfii>, Hes. Op. 302. Accordingly we have the word in the plural to denote 
 tempers, ' animi affectum/ iii. 82 and viii. 83. Elsewhere it is scarcely found 
 (among later writers at any rate) in this sense. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXI. — («.) T^ irpHirov — 'as well the first time.' See 
 ch.9^. 4KTro\iopKy\Qfis. Here the preposition denotes the com- 
 
 pletion of the act, and therefore the word is equivalent to rp voKiopKltf 
 iKS\i\Bils. Tpais as an adjective. So 'EAAcis, vi. 62, 'laj, iv. 61, 
 
 Ilepff^s, i. 138, Kriig. irpdtraiav 4cnjyyeK\iro — ■' was announced as 
 
 intriguing ;' cf. iii. 16, iv. 25. ffKVTd\Tjv. See L. and S. Jjex., or 
 
 Smith, Dictionarg of Antiquities. It has always seemed to me a rude expedient, 
 for by trying staves of difl'ereut thickness, surely an enemy into whose hands 
 the despatch had fallen might easily find out the key to the writing. Probably 
 there was some mechanism connected with the staff which none of the accounts 
 describe, and a secret cypher also. The Schol. sensibly remarks, ei Se tis 
 iXiroi, KoX TTUis eTxei/ <S Tla,v<TaAas t))v ffKvrdKriv, hddpa T7}s TrtJ^eojj i^e\d<iiif ; &t]t4ov 
 8ti anh TTjs np^rris tTTparriyiai elx^ T^v fTKvTaKTji/. tov K-fipvKos /i^ 
 
 Kiiireffdai. This does not, I think, mean, ' never to be out of the herald's sight,' 
 but not to stag behind him — to accompany him to Sparta. airoAefireo-flai is, as 
 Kriig. remarks, more common in this sense. ^o-t^tttei vttS. The 
 
 neuter with a passive force has the passive construction. Jclf, § 359, 3. 
 
 (d.) rhv jSairiAe'o. He was, more properly speaking, e?riTpo7ros or regent, 
 
Chap. 132.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 39 
 
 cf . next chapter, though in this capacity he acted for the l;ing— rifiV exoi'Ta. 
 Arist. calls him king, vii. 13. 13. Stawpa^a.ii.eya9 i^rjKee—' he got 
 
 out by settling the affair, compromising it with the magistrates' So I think the 
 prep. Sia signifies; the simple irpa^aiifvos would be, bg scheming, or in- 
 triguing. KaBidTtiatv K.r.K. — 'surrenders himself to take his 
 trial.' irepl aurbv ^Xeyx^'""* somewhat unusual phrase, but, as 
 Popp. remarks, it is proved to be genuine by c. 135, is elipiirKov 4x tUv vepl 
 llav<rai'[ay 4\ey)^uj/. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXII. — (a.) &y ^Ti^mpoOcTO — ' on the strength of which they 
 mere to punish.' Peile cf. Herod, vii. 139, t^v a<p^Kiriv rav reix^wv ... 06 
 Surauat irv64(T0at t}t(s fie ^v — 'of what use walls were' (or should have been). 
 a.vf\fii6 s— first-cousin. Cleombrotus, father of Pausanias, and Leonidas, father 
 of Pleistarchus, were brothers, sons of Anaxandridas by his first wife. 
 Cleomenes was also his son by his second wife. See the story, Herod, v. 41, 
 viii. 11. ^leSeSiT^TTjTo — 'departed inhis habits of lining from the 
 
 national institutions,' which would, in accordance with the spirit of the Spartan 
 constitution, be regarded as a grave offence. Bl. quotes several instances where 
 later historians have adopted the word. I do not remember its use elsewhere 
 among earlier writers. Notice the double augment, which Kriig. amply illus- 
 trates by other cases, chiefly from the orators. -rhv rplnoSa. This 
 was a golden tripod, supported by a triple-headed serpent in bronze. The history 
 of this tripod is curious, and may be seen. Gibbon, Decline and Fall, vol. iii. 
 ch. 17. Dr. Turner, who examined it in the year 1853 in Constantinople, where 
 it stands in the Hippodrome, states that it is in excellent preservation, but that 
 the drawing of it in the Dictionary of G]c. and M. Antiquities is not accurate. 
 See Herod, ix. 81. rb iAeyelov T6Se — ' this elegiac distich.' 
 i^iK^Xa^av — erased, lit. beat out, because the erasure was probably effected by 
 hammering the surface of the brass. If we are to believe the Athenian author 
 of the oration Karct. Neaipas (§ 97), the Lacedaemonians did not do this of their 
 own free-will, but because they were cited by the Platseans before the 
 Amphictyons. According to the same authority, they were fined 1000 talents, 
 which, when we consider their position in Greece, their services in the war, and 
 the silence of Thucyd., is, as it seems to me, enough to throw discredit on the 
 whole story. Diodorus (xi. 33) supplies the improved distich, — 
 
 'EWdSos eiipvx&pov (TcaTTJpes rrfcS' ayeO-qKav, 
 AovKo<T^vi\s tTrvyepas pvffafxevoi Tr6\Las. 
 
 Ka\ TovTO — i. e. the previously -mentioned inscription. 
 
 {b.) yetirepSi' Ti wo leiv-^' to adopt any violent measure.' It may also have 
 reference to the unprecedented nature of such an act, just as the usual force of 
 the phrase contains a mixed notion of revolution and violence. 
 iy-flKea-Toi/. D. tr. 'an extreme measure.' It is so, because the word means 
 irreparable, irremediable, like the infliction of capital punishment, which can- 
 not be recalled, TTttrTdTaTos. It is by no means necessary to 
 resort to the expedient of making this word passive, ' cui ille fidem maximi 
 habebat.' Whatever was the conduct of this man after the discovery of his 
 master's treachery, it may have most thoroughly deserved the epithet previously. 
 
140 NOTES OK THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 Upon irplv in the sense 'until,' cf. Jelf, § 848, 3. aviip 'A.pifl\ios. 
 
 Argilus was in the peninsula of Chalcidice. irapairoiTjcra/ac^'oj 
 
 irippaylSa — 'having counterfeited the seal,' a not unusual force of the prep, in 
 composition, the idea of falsity flowing from the general notion of, beside the 
 true thing, amisi,. L. and S. I/cx. well compare the force of the particle ner in 
 German compounds, e,g. ' verschwQren.* See the instances collected by Blomf. 
 on the word irapi{(r7)/toj', ^sch. ^^. 754. avrhv 4yyeypaiiii.4voi' 
 
 KTiivetv — he found himself written down therein, to hill. Notwithstanding the 
 difficulties made about this passage, it appears to me no more strange than 
 many others, where an active infinitive is intvodnced to which a subject must 
 be supplied, instead of a passive infinitive with the old subject, as the idiom of 
 our own language would have required; e.g. (to take the first instance which 
 presents itself), -napexovres 7]fj.as avroiis eS ttou7v, where an Englishman would 
 have written e5 voi€?tr9ai (Xen. Anab. ii. 3. 2:). Every now and then, the idiom 
 seems more than usually awkward, and the editors are inclined to make a change 
 in the text. Thus, in the converse case, Soph. (Ed. Col. 1488, ti 5' fee fleAois rb 
 wiffThi' i/iipvuat ippfvi ; it naturally occurs to every reader to substitute 4iJ.(pv<rttt. 
 Yet there is no MS. authority for the alteration, and I should hesitate to make 
 it. Cf. Bavfidjai, ch. 138 c. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXXII. — -(a.) auTi^Koot — ' to hear with their own ears.' Such 
 positive assurance was necessary in dealing with so powerful an individual. 
 kirh irapaffKevTJs — 'ex composito,' 'from a previously concerted plan.' 
 tTKrivTiffaii4vov K.r.K. — 'having raised a temporary hovel divided into two 
 apartments by a thin partition,' Thirlwall. To understand this, we must suppose 
 that the right of sanctuary extended to the T4p.(vos, or ' sacred precinct ' sur- 
 rounding the temple. Suppliants would, either from choice or necessity, very 
 frequently take up their abode there instead of within the walls of the temple 
 itself. Twv (t6?) 4tpipav. This rt has been the subject of extended 
 
 controversy. Haack, Popp., and GoU. place it within brackets, and Hartung, 
 in his work on particles, would expunge it altogether. On the other hand. 
 Am. and Peile retain it, explaining its usage according to their peculiar views. 
 For these, refer to the note on 'A.yap.4^iva>v re, i. 9. In this place, Arn. says, 
 T€ signifies no more than also, moreover, in which sense Se occurs, and re 
 again, ii. 63, vi. 17, vii. 20; and being merely a remnant of the ancient 
 verbiage of the language may be rendered, ' in which he concealed, moreover, 
 some of the ephori,' Peile (Appendix, Agamem, p. 383) explains, 're shows that 
 both the clauses, twi' 4(p6pa)v 4vt6s rtpas e/cpui^e, koI Tiavffaviov , , , tKereias, are 
 alike to be connected with ds tJi/, so that we might translate ' into which he in- 
 troduced some of the ephors, and hid them within, and Pausanias also {into 
 which also Pausanias") having come to him and asked him the reason of talcing 
 sanctuary,' As in the same Appendix (p. 382) the principle is laid down 
 that * Te is altogether retrospective, and herein to be distinguished from Kai, 
 which is always anticipative,' I should myself have imagined that re had not 
 so much relation to the fact that Pausanias also came into the hut, which is 
 subsequently stated, as to the fact that Argilius was already there, implied in 
 the narration, and that he introduced the ephors, as well as himself, to hear 
 the conversation of Pausanias — ' within tvhich he concealed some of the ephori 
 
Chap. 134.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I4I 
 
 too,' ov the ephors vnthal. See also Jelf, § 756, obs. iropo/SaAoiTo. 
 
 Ine Schol. explanation is irapa^iXus KaTTjyop'ljirfie ^ iTriirTus StaKOfTiiTeie, It is 
 l>robably the Homeric usage, oi^v i/jiitv iitixh" rapa$aK\6iievos TroKefitCfi", and 
 Kiviiyif must be sn^flieA, ' exposed him to risi:.' TrpoTijUTjflefr). The 
 
 word certainly appears to me to contain somewhat of irony. So too Krug., 
 who tr. • had the distinguished honour,' &c.; we might say, 'preferred to death.' 
 T, K. A. says it may be simply rendered, * thought worthy of being put to death,' 
 and quotes ^ttit^Seiov, Xen. Anah. ii. 3, 11. But as that word means jfii, and 
 the context there implies plainly, 'Jit to be beaten,' I do not see the parallelism. 
 ovK iavTos. The common usage of these words, note, ch. 28, and cf. L.and S. 
 Lexicon. iriffriv. Krug., after Bauer, tr. Verbiirgung, bail ov 
 
 security (if he would rise and quit the sanctuary). See note d, ch. 126, on 
 dcriiTTOO-is. On the distinction between Uphv and TtfUfvos, which are, however, 
 often used synonymously, see Arn. rifievos (i. e. reiiviixivos) = Diis separatus 
 ager, including the consecrated ground, and all the land of which the usufruct 
 was devoted to the temple. Upiv seems to e-xpress all the actual buildings, as 
 well the (TToal and dwellings of the priests, as the sacred edifice itself. Thua 
 the Iphv is said to be eV reiueyei' in Herod, ii. 11 3. pa.'bs is the great central shi'iue 
 where the deity himself was supposed to dwell, and where his statue stood. 
 There were, however, smaller vaol, like the side chapels in Roman Catholic 
 cathedrals. ra irpaaad^eva — 'the transactions then actually goin^ 
 
 on,' i. c. with Xerxes, 
 
 Chapter CXXXIV. — (3.) eTroiovpro. The true imperfect, describing an 
 action never completed — 'were for arresting,' cf. iairivSovro, iii. 24, and with 
 Arn., ifiiadovTO Trap' ovk ^kSlS6vtos, Herod, i. 68. er rij fiSy — 'in 
 
 the street,' a not uncommon use of the word, especially in N. T. 
 k^tLVil — 'secret,' 'unseen by the rest,' 'irpoKaTa<pvy€7v — * anticipated 
 
 ihem in taking refuge.' 
 
 (b.) olficTj^a. Either a chamber attached to the temple itself, or a small 
 house in the sacred precinct. ivSov ivra — 'when they knew that he 
 
 was housed.' iphov is one of those adverbs which must be regarded as formed 
 from the accusative. They denote, as I have endeavoured to express, not a 
 simplv local position as the dative, but motion terminating at a place, 
 a-Ko\a^6vTes slaw — ' havi-ng shut him up within j' in this phrase, as in the 
 following one, aiT(jiKod6fji'riaai' ras dvpas (with Krug. cf. rots SSoiis oi.TTotKo5ofj.7Jo'ai,\'n, 
 73), barricaded the doors, the preposition indicates the cutting off all communica- 
 tion from without. Similar is its usage in airoTeix^CiB and its cognates. See i. 64 a. 
 
 (c.) Siairep e?x"'- T^e general import of this phrase \s, forthwith, e.g. 
 iii. 30. It is not, however, improbable that here the primary notion may be 
 
 intended 'just as he was,' i. e. in the piteous state into which he had fallen. 
 
 Bl. well supports this sense by Herod, i. 24, ^ii|/ai fjnv is Th' 66.\a<r(riw iuurSv, 
 Sxrirep f^x^' '''^'' ''V "''^"V '"^V> where the concluding words explain So-Trep elxe. 
 rhv Kaiidav. Strabo explains inr^Aaioi' ti. Its etymology implies a natural 
 cleft in the earth, such as those which arise from volcanic agency. Similar 
 was the BcSpoepoi' of which we hear at Athens. ^/iiBaWei;/. Krug. 
 
 governs by ifufWriaav, supplying the word a second time to iidOeaav. 
 rUtjffioy irou • in the neighbourhood of the Ceadas,' as may be understood from 
 
142 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 fierevfyKeTv oZncp aTredave, Knig, This is, I think, correct, and the transac- 
 tion, notwithstanding all the difficulties made about it, seems tolerably clear. 
 The Delphian god, indignant that a Spartan monarch, and a suppliant of his 
 own, shonld lie in so ignominious a locality, desires that he should be removed, 
 and buried where he died. He is accordingly entombed, ^c t^ irpoTc^eyio-^aTi, 
 which, I apprehend, must mean some edifice at the front part of the re/iei'oi 
 — the entrance, or, in scriptural language, the going in. I believe Am. is right 
 in comparing it to the gateway of the ' close ' at Peterborough or Salisbury ; but 
 he asserts too strongly that no burial could have taken place within the sacred 
 precincts; this Thirlwall shows from the case of Euchldas, Flat. Sist. 20. 
 Probably the T-poTeiiePitr/xa was chosen as a sort of compromise between their 
 own scruples and the command of the God. That it was a building of some 
 sort, and generally a decorated one, seems clear from Clem. Alex. Feedag. iii. 2 
 (quoted by Bl.), Karct robs Atyvirritcy nSfffiovSy ots vaol koX trponv\aia irap' 
 ouTOis Kol TrporefifvliTfiaTa ^-fiiTKriTai. The ffT7i\ai probably were a double 
 column, with the appearance of the tables on which the Commandments are 
 engraved in churches, Bl. avSptdvras. Two images or statues of 
 
 Pausanias. They were seen by his namesake in the Chalcioecus. See iii. 17. 7. 
 Cf. Died. xi. 45, Popp. The death of Pausanias occurred 01. 76f, or B.C. 
 473, Kriig. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXV. — (a.) Hyos KplvavTos — ' having determined it to he a 
 pollution' Bc. auTii. The noun stands as a sort of predicate, as in the case airhv 
 iiruiijtTiv *A6T]vaiov, cf. 109, t. ^vvcn^TtwvTo — * implicated him in the 
 
 charge.' A very raie word, says BL, which I have only found elsewhere. Plot. 
 Feric. 06s (rvviwriTmvro tov MtjSkt/uoS. This digression concerning Themistocles 
 continues to ch. 13S inclusively, and may be justified partly by its connexion with 
 the affair of Pausanias, and partly by the important influence which Themistocles 
 exercised upon Grecian politics. Roscher, a German writer {Clio, i. p. 359), 
 thinks that these four digressions of Thucyd. on Theseus, Cylon, the Peisistni- 
 tidffi, and Themistocles, are intended to represent the four principal epochs of 
 Greek history before his time. Probably he had no such artificial notion, and 
 tliere is no reason to suppose that he would have hesitated to say so if he had 
 meant it. iXiyxo-'v. This is explained by Plut. Them. 23, iwiaraKal 
 
 Tives &feupe6€7ffai, Kal ypdfjLfiara irtpi roinoiv els uiro^iav ivi^aXov rhv ®eixt(XT0K\4a. 
 QXTTpaxKTiifvoi. Circiter B.c.476, Kriig.; BO. 471, Clinton and Grote. 
 
 Chaptek CXXXVI. — (a.) alirSv, sc. rail' KfpKvpalai', implied in KipKvpav 
 by the figure irphs rh ariimty6fievov, Jelf, § 379 c. ciepycrris. 
 
 Either, as Plutarch says, by his friendly mediation in a dispute with Corinth 
 about the Leuoadian peninsula, whereby Corcyra obtained the object she con- 
 tended for ; or, as the Schol. says, by dissuading the Greeks from proclaiming 
 as public enemies those states (including Corcyra) which had refused to co- 
 operate in repelling the Persian invasion. ^X^"' avrhv S(rT6 ott- 
 ^X 8 € (T fl a 1 — ' to Jceep him so as to become odious to' — i. e. to Tceep him, and so give 
 offence to. For the construction of ScSicccii, Kriig. quotes iiiiUirav ^aaaviirSfii/m, 
 Lys. xiii. 27. "r^v ^ncipov—sc. Thesprotia. 
 
 (J.) TTpQfTTfrayiifvtov — 'those to whom the dutg had been assigned.' Cf. v. 
 
Chap. 136.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I43 
 
 75 <^n<i viii. 23, kuto. ttvutiv — * according as they learnt hy inquiry where 
 he was gone' — i. e. tliey regulated their pursuit by the information which they 
 received concerning his movements. Cf. iriaTus, ch. 5, and cf. Jelf, § 802, i, 
 and 831, 2. Kara Tt &vopov. The editors generally understand, 
 
 m a great strait, supposing that ti bears the same force as in the expression t\ 
 ji-ipos, ' aliquantum,' ' a considerable portion.' This Is, I think, very doubtful, 
 and no examples are given. Thiersch accordingly, and apparently Kriig., 
 would read rb dwopov, — i. e. in his difficulty. But may we not suppose that» 
 like Charles Edward after CuUoden, he passed through many hairbreadth 
 escapes, and that ti indicates this? — 'in one of Ids perils.' Mo\oar<Tai', 
 
 Their territory was but small, since, according to Scylax, it only contained fifty 
 stades of sea-board, though broader inland. KaraXva-at. I do not 
 
 think that Arn. and others are right in saying that tV ^Sii/ is to be understood. 
 The word is borrowed from Eastern, or at any rate primitive travelling, where 
 the party, always a sort of caravan, broke up for the night to lodge in a khan 
 or caravanserai ; and the reference is to unsaddling and unloading the animals, 
 &c. Cf. Hom. Od. iv. 28, KaTa\vcrofj.ev uKsas ^inrovs. The word and its 
 cognates are common . After PUitaea was razed to the ground, they made there 
 a Karaytjiyiov SiaKotrioiv iroSaty -navra-^fi tti5«\iy otK'fjfJ.ara exoc, iii. 68. The 
 analogous Latin word was ' dcversorium.' Trjs yvi'aiK6s. Pint, 
 
 says her name was Phthia. aipStv. Because, says Kriig., yw^ is 
 
 the principal subject in the writer's thought, though not grammatically so. 
 Knflefco-Soi. 'So I have given, for Thuc. uses KaBi^nv, but never KaSi^etrBai.' 
 Kriig. f (Tt ia — because, being the shrine of the household gods, and the 
 
 cliief seat of domestic life, it was regarded by the ancients with special venera- 
 tion. Cf. Grote, v. 384. StjAoi 8s iffriv. Here we have the 
 simple relative in a dependent clause, where, according to the genius of the 
 Greek language, we should anticipate a dependent interrogative Sittij. ' Optimfe 
 Graece dicitur oiSd ue 8s el, novi te, qui sis; minus bene vero ovk otSd ire, is tt. 
 Eectius StTTis eT, vel etiam t/s cI.' Elms. Med. 1086. Kriig., however, pro- 
 duces instances of &s after a negative. Her. ii. 121; Eur. BeZ. 818. In ch. 
 137, we have the more regular (ppa^et '6inis iari, cf. Jelf, § 877, 4- 
 ouK a(io7, as in the parallel case of oS (pi\iu, the negative passes on to tha 
 following infinitive. Kriig. cf. ii. 89, iii. 44. avrflirev. 'An 
 application to the Atlienians from Admetus for help, was rejected by the advice 
 of Thcmistocles.' Sintenis, Plut. Them. 24. Kriig. aaBeveaTcpos. 
 One MS. exhibits this as a correction for aa-BeveiTTepov, and it must surely be 
 right. The intention of Them, evidently was to work upon the generosity of 
 Admetus, by representing himself, who once was stronger, as now the weaker 
 of the two, and therefore an unfit object for his enmity. The genitive — by one 
 far weaker than he — would suggest an idea of the weakness of Admetus, which, 
 however true, was not likely to have been urged by one seeking for his protec- 
 tion ajgainst a powerful enemy. I am therefore surprised to see that T. K. A., 
 after Popp., retains aaBei/effrepov, airh tov taov — 'on afooting of 
 equality.' Cf. i. 77, ii. 89. cTi/oi is governed, as Popp. points out, by 
 \iy€i, implied in aliot. 
 
 ((,.) xp*'05 riv6s — 'had opposed him in the matter of a request' or private 
 interest. Some editors supply a preposition, but Kriig. has shown that iviwri- 
 
144 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booz I. 
 
 ovcrSai governs a pronitive, from Xen. Anai. vii. 6, S : Spa fiii Kal ri/uv ivavnd- 
 (Terat t^s iirayayris. See Jelf, § 531. He adds that rh belongs to <T<i(e(r6at, 
 for the human body and its members are mentioned frequently without the 
 article. Plat. Sep. 461 A. This is upon the principle, already explained, of 
 familiarity with the subject spoken of, and is, I think, preferable to the arbitrary 
 supposition of Popp. and GoUer, that the phrase is for is rh rh <rS>fui adi^eaSai, 
 with the second article elided for euphony. We too say ' body and goods,' and 
 of. the German phrase 'mit Blut und Gut.' In addition to the words men- 
 tioned, ch. 8 a, cf. ffTToi/Sis \veiv passim, and Tai|)OS iroieiadat ii. 2, 4. 
 (liyiarov — i.e. among the Molossians. All editors quote Pint. Themist. 24: 
 TauTij*' fieyiffTTjv KaX /jtSjfTjif (rx^Sbv avavTippriTov 7]yovfievuv iKetriav ruv Vlo\o(r(ricv. 
 
 Chaptee CXXXVII.— (a) T^v eTepay BdAaffaav. The .ffigean. 
 IT e ^}7 — Jy land. 'A\f^iySpov. Tenth king of Macedon. 
 
 KctTa(^4p£Tai — 'carrieddowr h^ the force of the tempest.' Cf.iv. 120, and note, 
 Sheppard's yAeopAr. Pref. p. li. Na|oy. Refer to ch. 98. t^» 
 
 a.(r(pdK€tav — * the safety required* We should perhaps write, 'fhe only means 
 of safety consisted in' he. y-ixpi irKovs yevTjTai — ' till a favourable 
 
 time for sailing arise,' for such is the meaning of irKovs. So Xen. Anab. v. 9, 
 33 : oil aipiov, iav ttAous jJ (on the usage of uexP' with a verb, cf. Jelf, § 
 841, 5), afa^6iJ.€voiy where sec Kriig.'s note. o.TrofivfifTea'Bai 
 
 X o p ( »' — ' would remember it to him with fitting gratitude.' Popp. quotes Eur. 
 Ale. 299 : vvv TwvS' air6fivrjaat x'^P**'- Kriig., however, conjectures that Tbuc. 
 wrote awofieny^aea-Sai, for the future in the text is not Attic. 
 
 (i.) a.Troaa\fi(ras. The verb seems to \mp\y lying out from the land in the 
 open sea. Cf. iii. 7 a, and lA^T^tlipovs aizotraXevetv, Dem. 1. 22. Kriig,, I see, 
 quotes Dem. 1. 22 (1213,-24), avayKcuov ^y iir' ayKvpas airofra\ev€iv r^y vvktcl 
 fjierifipovs. The translation of Nepos is, ' in salo navem tenuit in ancoris.' 
 iSepdirivfff. Portus' version is ' liberaliter prosequi.' Dale's simply ' rewarded.' 
 But in the many passages where Thucydides uses the word, something of con- 
 tinuous action is ever implied. UTf {e'/teiTO- — cf. u7re{e8e»TO i. 89. It 
 was said that property of his to the amount of one hundred talents was con- 
 fiscated at Athens. vtaiTTi. According to Kriig.'s computation, 
 Olymp. 765, B.C. 473, but the date is generally given B.C. 465 or 466. He 
 also cf. KcaiTT! ^x""^" '"■ 30- See Thiersch, Gr. § 289. 
 
 (0.) iSiiKov 71 ypa(pii. The question concerning the real authorship of this 
 letter is, I imagine, the same as that respecting the speeches, which s-je ch. 
 22 a, though the term ^S^Aou certainly does look as if Thue. professed to quote 
 the very words. Remark that Hti here introduces the oratio recta. Cf. v. 10 ; 
 viii. 53; and Jelf , § 802,6. iv r^ acrtpaKet . . . i-jr iKivSitftp, 
 
 This is the common idiom of the neuter adjective with an article standing for a 
 substantive. But it is rather varied, inasmuch as we have two adjectives with 
 one article, which, in accordance with Granville Sharp's canon (ch. 18 a), refer 
 to the same subject ; tr. ' in that state of things which was secure for me, but 
 perilous for him-.' Popp. remarks, 'potuit quidem scribi 4v rif a.(T(paXit fiir 
 iyd,' but this would have required a repetition of the article in the second 
 clause. Ttihiv ^ — by a sort of inversion, say the editors, for 
 
 ijiri\iv. But see i, 82, ii. 18. ypiiias. This stands thus, because 
 
Chap. 138.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 14S 
 
 iS'llKou 71 ypaipii must be considered equivalent to iTtiaTtiKfti 6 ©ejuiittokX^i. 
 Popp. Thucydides as frequently falls into an anacoluthon, and writes as if he 
 thoaght his sentence had been cast into a form different from that which he 
 really gave to it. rrjs a.vax<'P'flireas. The question is, does this 
 
 refer to the message sent hefore the battle of Salamis, informing the king of 
 the pretended intention of the Greeks to escape j or to the message «ent after 
 the battle, warning him to retreat without delay ? The first message, if ever 
 sent, must surely from its disastrous issue have rendered the sender an object 
 of suspicion; neither under such circumstances could Themistocles have de- 
 clared himself in a state of security {iv t^ airfaKet) while the king was in a 
 state of peril. The message after the battle must therefore be meant by these 
 words; yet Herod, (viii. no) clearly states that this message was sent from 
 Andros, and not from Salamis. Still, I would rather suppose with Am. that 
 Thucyd. is here guilty of slight oversight, than refer the words to the first 
 message with Popp. and Haack. Thirlwall, vol. ii. p. 430, agrees with 
 Am. TTpoa-eirotijiraTo — ' tooJc to himself .' r^v ov- 
 
 Si(i\v(Ttv. The negative particle so combines with tbe noun as to make one 
 negative term. See the note on oit-fisydXa, ch. I, and cf. r} ov-inpiTeixitrts iii. 
 95, 7) ovK-i^ovaia. V. 50, and Jelf, § 745, 5. aijv <j!i\iav — for the 
 
 objective genitive cf. ch. 33, note. 
 
 Chaptbb CXXXVIII.— (a.) ^Kt'AeuE. This, though the reading of the 
 best MSS., is scarcely defensible, for it is difiicult to see how any sense can be 
 given to e/te'Xeue, which would justify such a variation of tense. This is not so 
 with the other cases where an imperfect is coupled to an aorist, e. ^. in Hero- 
 dotus, for there the liveliness of the narration accounts for the imperfect, the 
 subject of the verb being vividly brought forward, and 'represented as engaged in 
 action. But, as Arn. remarks, this would be altogether out of place in the 
 very calm and sober style of Thucydides. I should therefore prefer reading 
 4Ke\€v(rc, but if the imperfect stands, tr. ' the hing was surprised at his scheme 
 (what passed through his thoughts) and proceeded to hid him' &c. 
 iffa iiSivaro Kixrev6ri(Te — 'mastered as much of the language as he could.' Bl. 
 says this is a very infrequent use of KaTavoiu. I do not myself see that it is 
 unusual to employ the word for such an exercise of the intellect as that implied 
 here ; cf. ch. 126, note a. The exaggeration of the later writers is well illus- 
 trated by the extravagant proficiency in the Persian tongue ascribed by Nepos 
 to Themistocles. 'AXelacSpou. Successor of Amyntas the first, 
 
 father and predecessor of Perdiccas. 
 
 (S.) ToS 'EWriyiKoS. A species of attraction, says Popp., for Kai t^v 
 e'AiriSa 'hv imsTiBei auTijJ, SoiiX&'rriv -rh 'EWiivm6v. Kriig. makes SouXi4(reii' 
 depend upon iXiriSa, i. e, vTrcridet avT^ tov ^EWTjvtKov 4\7riSa SouXojo'eij'. Cf. 
 Jelf, § 898 b, who classes this under ' contracted sentences :' — 'When an infinitive 
 or particle stands in the same sentence with some other verbum infinitum, the 
 substantive which properly depends upon the infin. or part, is frequently made 
 to depend upon the verbum finitum, so that it is in the case required 
 thereby.' ^tJAnrra 5i k.t.\. — ' but especially from his wisdom 
 
 which he had established by giving proof;' lit., /rom the by-giving-of-proof- 
 established reputation for wisdom. 
 
 X 
 
I46 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book L 
 
 (c.) PcffaiiTUTa S^. The particle strengthens the superlative, cf. ch. 
 23 b ; tr, ' one who most indisputally exhibited strength of natural genius' 
 tia<pep6vTa)S ti. The ri here as often is ' aliquantum,' — 'in no small degree 
 more than any other man remarkably deserving to receive admiration' For 
 6av)i,i,aai active in6n., see ch. 132, note b ; Jelf, § 667, 3. is avTi — 'with 
 
 refweMca <o if,' though ^uircojj has gone before J cf. 2za. o6t€ 
 
 irpo/xadiiy k.t.A. — 'loithoui having acquired anything by previous studies to con- 
 tribute to it, nor by subsequent studies to add to it ;' this administration was the 
 fruit of natural genius, not formed by previous or increased by subsequent 
 study. Tuv re iiapaxpriiia k.t.X. — ' of what immediate expediency 
 
 required, when the opportunity for counsel was most brief, he was of all men the 
 ablest jndge; and of future events the best conjecturer, with the most far-reaching 
 view of what was going to happen.' This seems to me the best way of taking 
 the sentence, because it best preserves the balance of the clauses, after which 
 Thuc. was ever straining, though occasionally at the expense of a false or im- 
 perfect antithesis. Krug. makes rav iieW6iiTaiv dependent upon M Trhilarov ; 
 but if Thuc. meant Tan trapaxpw"' to be governed by KpaTurros yvd/iuv, I am 
 nearly sure that he also meant riatf fjieW6vTuv to be governed by ^pitrros 
 eiKacTT^s. The noun fiKaari}! is very unusual, and I have therefore rendered it 
 by one which is unusual also; but why either should be so, is not easy to 
 explain. 
 
 (d.) fier^ x^'P*^ ^X°* — 'happen to have in hand,' lit. between his hands. 
 Kriig. of. Herod, vii. i5. iv x^P"^" ^X^' means the same thing, and is of more 
 frequent occurrence. i^7]yi)(ra.ff6at — ' to interpret,' an 4^T]y7}Ti]s was 
 
 one who went over words first, which were subsequently repeated by his 
 hearers. The connexion with the primary meaning of 'leading the way,' and 
 the tertiary one of ' expounding,' are obvious, and may be easily illustrated by 
 consulting L. and S. Xca:. i» Doce. KpTvai iKavSis ovk Att^AAo/cto — 
 
 ' he was not without the power to pass a competent judgment on.' ovk dirijWoKTo, 
 like ouK ivtv, ' non sine,' and many other such phrases, is not the less positive, 
 though purposely qualified in form ; Kplvat, a common-sense judgment, was 
 always, says Am., distinguished by the Greeks from full theoretical or practical 
 knowledge. It was obviously shared by a much larger mass of men, and upon 
 this principle, he adds, the people at large were competent judges of the conduct 
 of their magistrates. See ii. 40, ^toi Kpfvo/uei' ye k.t.X. )ueA6T7/j 
 
 PpaxuTijTi. Am. tr. ' with acquired learning thus scanty,' his meaning probably 
 is correct, but the words might mislead the younger student, as the lit. tr. is, 
 with scantiness or brevity of practice, where ^eX^Tij, I think, refers to the 
 preparation usually made by public speakers ; so ' exercitatio,' Cic. de Off. i. 
 18. ouTOiTxeSiafeiy ri iiov-ra — 'to extemporize {devise at a 
 
 moments notice) what was wanted.' 
 
 (e.) voaiiiras. The collocation is peculiar and emphatic, "twas by disease 
 that he died,' because the contrary had been reported; cf. Plut. Them. 31, and 
 Arist. Eq. 83. As early as the time of the latter, the story was prevalent that 
 he died from drinking bull's blood at a sacrifice, or perhaps a poison so called. 
 Cic. Brutus, 0. 11, rightly ascribes the legend to a desire 'mortem (ejus) tragic^ 
 et rhetoric^ omare.' Ulayvqalat aiv Uprov. The predicate 
 
 IS fipToc, as in those cases already noticed, ch. 109, 134, The practice of 
 
Chap. 139.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 147 
 
 assigning certain cities to particular persons, or rather the taxes which these 
 cities paid, is one well known, and, as Bl. observes, dates from remote antiquity, 
 vestiges of it being found in Homer, where Agamemnon pffers to Achilles, aa 
 the price of reconciliation, seven cities, each possessing some peculiar excellence, 
 cf. Herod, ii. 98, Xen. Anah. i. 49. Athenaeus, 534. d, records the cities assigned 
 to Alcibiades, whenever he went abroad, for his tent, &c. ' The custom,' Bl. 
 writes, 'continues to the present times in the east, Athens having been 
 assigned to the Sultana for pin-money, and Jerusalem to the concubines for a 
 similar use.' Mr. Grote says, ' I doubt Dr. A.'s statements about the land-tax 
 rent. I do not think it was a tenth or fifth of the produce of the soil in 
 these districts which was granted to Themistocles, but the portion of regal 
 revenue or tribute levied in them. The Persian kings did not take the trouble 
 to assess and collect the tribute; they probably left that to the inhabitants 
 themselves, provided the sum total were duly paid.' Hist. Gr. iv. 386. 
 avT ou governed by otrrS, not ol irpoa^KovTes. ov yap ^^rjv explains the 
 
 reason of Kp^tpa 'Adiji-alav. The law is mentioned by Xen. Mell, i. vii. 22 : 
 Kara TovTov rhv vdfxov — '6s itniv ^itX to7s UpotrvKois Kal npoSirais . , . ;u^ TocpTJvat 
 
 Thaptee CXXXIX. — (a.) AaKeSaip.6yioi. The narrative is resumed from 
 ch. 126. irpovK^yov — 'warned them' (or publiclj/ declared io them). 
 
 On the affair of Megara cf. ch. 67. iiriKaKovyres t^v iirepyaffiay — 
 
 * laying to their charge the cultivation of the sacred land, and of that which was un- 
 enclosed.' The noun seems nearly equivalent to the simple ipyania, though there 
 may be some latent force in the preposition ; perhaps — ' extending their cultiva- 
 tion over.' On the construction, cf. Jelf, § 568. I certainly agree with GoU. 
 (cf. ch. 18 a) that the article t^s before ioplffrov implies that the land described 
 by it is distinct from ttjs lepas yr/s. GoU. may be wrong in supposing that the 
 latter was dedicated to the Eleusinian goddesses, for the distance would certainly 
 be great, but it may have been dedicated in some other way. The a6pi<iTos was 
 probably so left from a political rather than o, religious object, since the con- 
 flicting claims of individuals. If any were allowed to appropriate border land, 
 would be very likely to involve their respective states in warfai-e. Am. remarks, 
 that on similar common land the Israelites fed their ilocks without disturbance, 
 but when they wanted a piece of ground for a burial-place (a permanent pos- 
 session), a regular sale on the part of the people in occupation was necessary. 
 acSpairdSoiv. It has been supposed that allusion is made to the slaves of 
 Aspasia; cf. Arist. ^cAar. 525. rav a.<pi(rTaii.4i/aiy. Remark 
 
 the present participle, which implies a process going on — ' the slaves as they iept 
 absconding.' 
 
 (h.) tS>v Te\evTaiotv — 'ambassadors with an ultimatum/ as we shoula 
 say^ r^y elp4)VT]V elyut — 'the peace to continue' or it may be, 'they 
 
 wish for the existence of the feace' ' which all desire,' or ' is the subject of nego- 
 tiation,' or something similar, implied, yvd/icis iTToiovvTo. Kriig. 
 well gives the general sense, 'to lay matters before a person for deliberation,' 
 and so D., 'proposed the subject for consideration.' We may however remark 
 that the words lit. mean, 'proposed to themselves judgments' i. e. the formation 
 of judgments : then subsequently yiyv6iumt reus yvdiiMis is, ' coming to be in 
 
 I 2 
 
148 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 their judgments' The younger studeut will notice how well this illustrates 
 the distinction hetween yiyv6fiepot and ovres ; the former denotes the process 
 of forming the opinion, the latter only states that persons are of such an 
 opinion. T. K. A. has yiyviiievot, deciding; prop. 'becoming, ranging them- 
 selves/ from which I do not see what is to be learnt. iir" 
 a/ifdrepa — 'for both views of the case,' i.e. for and against. The whole 
 phraseology is certainly very intelligible, but Bl. remarks that he only knows 
 one other example, and that an evident imitation of the present passage, Dio 
 Cass., p. 65, i'jr' h.p^&TifttL rais yvt^/^ais yev6/j.€yau SttoI — ' once for all,' 
 cf. fiiral 6iiii<rKoviTi, Od, xii. 22, and 'semel' in Latin; Bentl. Hor. Sat. ii. 8, 24; 
 Jude V. 3 ; Hebrews ix. 27. \tyeiv xal irp a irireii' denotes oratorical 
 and administrative ability. Niebuhr, Vortrag. iiber alte Oesch. ii. 13, remarks 
 that it was only in the time of Pericles that war and the forum had a real con- 
 nexion. The old statesmen were of necessity generals, and vice versA. But Demos- 
 thenes saw no real service in the field ; while on the other hand Iphicrates was 
 a most ineffective speaker in the ecclesia, and Chabrios did not speak at all. 
 
 Chaptee CXL. — (a.) ^xo^ai — 'hold to,' from the physical image of a 
 thing or person clinging to an object : cf. Eur. Sec. 402, fmota Kicrahs Spv6s, 
 SiTMS TTJffS' c|o/^ai, cf. viii. 81, Jelf, § 536. From this notion of holding on 
 to that which is beside you comes the somewhat singular adverbial use of 
 ix^li-evov, 'next in order,' cf. e'xfiAtefoi' t^s 'PoStJTTTjs, ii. g6, and Aristotie passim. 
 Cf. ' conditoris Seleuci retinens," Tac. Ann. vi. 42. <>pyv — ' excitement of 
 
 feeling,' ' temper,' cf. ch. 130 b. — ' men are not persuaded to undertake a war, and 
 actually engage in it, in exactly the same temper,' i. e. do not prosecute it witli 
 the same zeal and excitement which they showed when first induced to engagre 
 in it. On wpiaaovTas, cf. Jelf, § 752, I. irphs 5e Tas k.t.X.—' but that 
 
 just as circumstances change, they change their notions also.' tcls ^vfitpopds — 
 /jucB aceiderint — plainly takes in both good and evil accidents, as CEdip. Tyr. 
 44, and elsewhere. 6/11010 koI irapair\^irio — ' similar and coming 
 
 very near to what I advised before.' tohs apaireiBofiifous — 'those 
 
 who allow themselves to be persuaded.' to7s Koivfi S6ia(Tiv ^oriBfii) 
 
 K.T.X. — ' to come to the rescue of the common resolves,' i. e. when there is any difii- 
 culty in carrying them out, or when their policy is assailed — ' or neither (i. e. not 
 either), should you even succeed, to claim a share in the wisdom which devised 
 them.' 
 
 (b.) ivSexerai, as in ch. 124 b. — 't?ie incidents to which circumstances give 
 rise are wont to take a course which can be as little determined (afiaBus, not to be 
 mastered by study) as the schemes of men.' I do not like to translate, as all the 
 editors do, ^v/ujiopas by results, for the notion of a fixed result is the one most 
 entirely foreign to the word, yet it is difficult to do without it ; a! ^uixipopal rav 
 irpayixiruv are the ' indeterminate incidents which may be expected to occur in 
 a course of human transactions.* The question is, what does yhp give the reason 
 for ? Goll. supposes that it contains the reason why those who rashly change 
 their mind, even should things turn out well, ought not to claim for themselves 
 the praise of prudence. But it is more consonant with the general course of 
 the argument, and the tone of thought, to say, as Poppo, that yi.p gives the 
 reason why even well-planned schemes sometimes fail of meeting with a sue- 
 
Chap. 1 41.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 49 
 
 cessful issue. That this refers rather to what is understood than expressed, 
 will not be any difficulty to one familiar with the style of Thuoydides. 
 Si6TT€p Kal — 'which if the reason too why tve are wont to lay at Fortunes door 
 all that ohances to fall out contrary to calculation.' aiTiarBai may not 
 
 have the sjrave sense of accuse, as Bl. remarks, still I hold that it in some 
 measure partakes of such a sense; just as we are always saying 'to blame 
 Fortune.' 
 
 (c.) Slxas StS6i'ai Kal SexetrSai. The usual terms to denote a legal 
 settlement, though, as Popp. points out, it is clear, from ch. 28 and v. 79, that 
 arbitration by some friendly city, if other means failed, is included in the for- 
 mula, ^x^'" ^ exoiiev. A clear recognition in ancient diplomacy of 
 the principle of • uti possidetis,' or ' status quo ante.' See also iv. 65. 
 Kal iiriTdtrtToyTss — 'and now they come forward in the character offersons 
 dictating' &c. Bl. quotes Traadii^voi ^Tr^Tao-o-e, give your orders when you are our 
 master, but not before (Theoo. Id. xv. 90). iirtp is, according to Popp., the 
 object of 5rp ix""'^'''^ — ' which they especially hold forth as a pretext,' and this 
 certainly seems most natural, the construction being that sort of attraction found 
 in such sentences as b aviip iy olrrfla '6ti ^A.flej'. Kriig. denies that such attrac- 
 tion is found before a particle which denotes a condition, as el here, and therefore 
 makes cfwep the subject of KaOaipeOcl-q. M'jS' if vp.7v aurots inro\iirrjffde 
 — 'nor leave hehind in your own minds a reproach,' i. e. nor allow any feeling of 
 self-reproach to linger in your minds. 
 
 (d.) rh Ppax^ t i rovro — 'this little trifle, as they call it, involves the 
 whole confirmation and test of your purpose' or 'carries with it the whole con- 
 firming and testing of your resolution.' We seem to have here a sort of Hffrepov 
 ■Trpinpuy, as the graiiimiirians call it, inasmuch as the ' confirmation ' must follow 
 the ' testing,' and not vice vers^. This is, I think, more correct than to say, 
 with BL, that ' fie^aluatv Kol ireTpav is an hendiadys to signify proof or trial.' 
 iiriTax^'h^^'^^^ — *'^' toCto intraxSTifreTai v^lv. Our own ordinary idiom coin- 
 c;<Jes — ' ye willhe ordered some greater thing.' Cf.ii.7; on&Wo ti, Jelf, § 545. 
 a and 548 e. aTrttrxupifftijuej'Oi — ' having met it with decided refusal.' 
 
 The airiJ, I apprehend, exerts the same force as in a.Tr6i\>a(ns, when logically 
 opposed to Kardipaa-is, where, as it is well known, the prep, denotes the separa- 
 tion in thought of the subject from the predicate. We may mention, in pass- 
 ing, that, from not knowing this, some editors have strangely erred in their 
 interpretation of /ifn<poii4vav hy Kara(paiitv, (Ed. Tyr. 503. Compare airofi. 
 (TKOvTd, ib. 484. 0"^^ ToO taov k.t.X. — 'to treat you more upon a 
 
 ground of equality ;' i- e. to come here as eqnals, and not as entitled to dictate 
 (iiriTdo'o'ovTes). Editions vary about KaTacT-ficaire and KaTaffTi^(reT€, of which 
 the formei', which has also most MS. authority, is adopted by Bekker, Bl., and 
 Kriig., the latter by Goll. and Poppo. The common reading, Karaar'fiffriTe, 
 which would be a soloecism, seems to point to Karao-T^iraiTe, of which Bl. re- 
 marlis, 'it may be rendered "planum ipsis efficietis," as infra, ii. 42, tV 
 ev\oyiai> (fiavepai' KadlSTas.' 
 
 Chaptee CXLI.— (a.) aiT6Sev. D. tr. 'henceforth;' Pop. and Kriig., 'on 
 xse grounds.' I should rather be inclined to render, 'forthwith,' ' at once,' ' on 
 •,e spot,' as more consentaneous with the etymology and common use of the word. 
 
150 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book r. 
 
 !ini/o^6i)T€ — 'make up your minds,' usually constructed with an infinitive. 
 But that it should here be also followed by el^ovrts is defensible upon the ground 
 that it follows the analogy of yiyvaxTKO), ivOvfiovfiai k.tA. Kriig. quotes tppov- 
 ri^ai, Eur. Sec. 256, fiTj yiyvtixTKon^ ^f^oi, oi rovs <l}i\ov7 ^Xdnroyrfs ou ippoyri- 
 ((Te. In this case, however, I regard fixiirTovTss as agreeing with the subject 
 of the verb in the usual way : *zoAo, when you injurey our friends, take no thought 
 upon the matter.' Kriig. seems to forget that tppovri^w has an intransitive force, 
 and properly means, 'to be in a state of anxiety.' Surarai — 
 
 ' amounts to the same enslavement' On this use of ^{jvafiat, of. L. and S. Lex. 
 and iii. 46. Sikoioxtis. A Thucyd. word, according to Dion, iii. 
 
 82, iv. 86. Kriig. translates ' a claim,' because originally supposed to be founded 
 on justice. ofiotav. I agree with Kriig. that controversy is here 
 
 unnecessary. The word must be masculine. irph SIktis — 'before an 
 
 affempt at Judicial arrangement.' iirnaffirop.ivri — 'coming in the 
 
 shape of a command.' 
 
 (b.) rh. 5€ Tov troKf^ov k.t.\. — 'with respect to what is required for 
 carrying on thewar, and the resources of both parties, that we shall not find our 
 means the feebler,! would that you should feel assured, by hearing them in detail.' 
 A very inteUigible and pardonable inaccuracy of expression, for no confusion can 
 arise, though aaOeveffrepa is grammatically referred to tup eKarepots vwapx^vruv. 
 nvTovpyoi — * living by their own labour.' We must remember that at Athens 
 all manual labour and artisan's work was performed by slaves. In Sparta, 
 agriculture was probably the office of the Helots. Am. has an instructive note, 
 in which he refers to Xen. (Economic, v. 4, rovs /xev aurovpyous Sia twc x^'P^** 
 yv^vd^ovira (71 yrj) laxvv avTo7s TrpoariBTiai, ' The number of slaves in Laconia,' 
 he adds, ' was a striking exception to the rest of Peloponnesus. Herod, vi. 137, 
 viii. 137 ; Athen. vi. 83; Juv. Sat. xiv. 168.' He also makes an apposite re- 
 ference to the ancient Roman republican heroes, who, as is well known, tilled 
 their own land. See on the subject, Ar. Pol. ii. 8, 9. /Spaxe'a'? — 'for a brief 
 time' ^TTitpepeiv — sc, Tro\e^ous. Their poverty was the cause why they 
 
 made no wars, and the making no wars was the cause of their inexperience, 
 
 (c.) irXripovvTes. We must, with Pop. and Kriig., again supply woWaKis 
 iKirefiTreiv Svvavrat. iirh twv avrStv — n. b. not axnStv, but here ra aitrav, 
 
 their own property. Arnold (quoted by K.) says, that elsewhere Thnc. prefers 
 arperepuv — which seems true, ii. 20. irepiovtrlai — 'stock laid by,' i.e. 
 
 that which is over and above our daily wants. See ch. 2 b. Pericles doubtless 
 meant that the treasures of the Acropolis and their other surplus stores should 
 recur to the recollection of his hearers. /3faioi da^opai — 'compulsory 
 
 contributions.' Cf. ch. 121. avex'>v(Tiv — uphold, Cf. Soph. ^y. 212. 
 
 (d.) ffiaiia{Ti ^ xP'hh^o-^t — ' in person than in purse' rb ii^v irLCtT^v. 
 
 Tlie Schol. tells us to place a comma at p.iii, and to explain t!) rau aatpLiTav, 
 (which seems right,) 'having confidence about the one that it may even escape the 
 peril, but not feeling security about the other (lit. the other secure) that it will not 
 ere thai he spent ;' lit. ' that they shall not spend it before ' they get out of the 
 danger. 
 
 (e.) 11^ Trphs 6/iolav. The junior student will remark that we have ij.ii here 
 instead of ovk, on account of the hypothetical nature of the clause, if it be not 
 an homogeneous one. Cf. to liij nvBaii^s, eh. 22 d, and Jelf, § 904. 3. 
 
Chap. 142.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 151 
 
 Srav — 'since;' but, says Krug., the ' Zeitbegriff,' i. e. the 'notion of time,' hus 
 not vanished. This is well illustrated by onr own word when, which often 
 retains pai-t of the temporal notion, even when signifying ' since.' 
 liire . . . re, as often, 'nee . . . et.' The negative affects both clauses. 
 '^ov\evTijpitf) — 'council-board (or chamber).' This is again a tacit contrast 
 with the state of things among the Athenians, who had a centralized admi- 
 nistration, and were not compelled to consult their allies when occasions for 
 action arose. rh i<l>' iavT6i'. This is the reading of the best and 
 
 most numerous MSS., and is well supported by Kriig. from Person, Burip. 
 Orest. T338, trddrjd'' tffov ye roh-n-' cjue, and ri ^iri trcfias elvat, iv. 28. Tr. 
 ' what concerns himself personally.' A few MSS. read t!) e<()' iavTuv, with which 
 we may of. i. 17, Tb ^<(>' iavrSni. But then there is no 'inaaTos in that passage. 
 (_/.) ipBe'ipai. The verb here, as often, denotes an extravagant and useless 
 expenditure. XP^^^^'- ^vviSvTes — ' being loner in coming together.' 
 
 ev ppax^^ f'-opi^ — so. xpii''""') understood from xp^"""- This, the common and 
 obvious way of taking the passage, is, I think, better than Kriig.'s, who supplies 
 Trjs ^vv6Sov fr. ivviSfTss. The antithesis is between the length of the time spent 
 in getting the council together, and the very short time during which at best 
 they can deliberate ; to this is appended another antithetical notion, i. e. the 
 greater amount of time which they spend upon their own interests. But does 
 Tiy Tr\4ovi mean, the greater part of that time which they have for deliberation ; 
 or, the greater part of their time during which they are unable to deliberate ? 
 TTOtpi T^jx eauToO a[i.i\tia,v. Am. cleverly adduces the English vulgarism, 
 along of his own neglect — i. e. owing to his own neglect. The cases are probably 
 parallel, though we still require an explanation of the way in which this causal 
 force of the prep, arises. It may be that the idea of close proximity implies that 
 of dependence. Am. quotes Dem. Phil, i, p. 43, obSe yap oStos Trapa t^v airov 
 pdifotv ToffovTov €Tr7)i^TiTai, to which add i Cor. xii. TJ, 16. Cf. L. and 
 S. Lex., and note on irapa iroXii, ch. 29 c. Cf. Jelf, § 67, iii. 3 c. 
 inep eavTov. It certainly seems to me that, according to the sense, &\\os 
 becomes the principal subject, and that therefore we may tr. that others as well 
 care to look out for their own interest. If, however, it be necessary to refer 
 iavTov to the strict grammatical subject, we must, with Kriig., tr. in suo loco, 
 ' in his stead' ficre tw avrep K.r.\. — ' owing to this same notion 
 
 (i. e. of personal interest) entertained individually by all.' The iSi'ct is intro- 
 duced because, though all do it, they do it each separately for their private in- 
 terest. To iUi} is opposed aBp6ov, ' collectively ruined.' 
 
 Chaptbe CXLII. — (o.) tieytarov S4 — 'but what is of most importance.' 
 Kriig. cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 7 : Trpurov Kal fiiyiCTov ol Qeuv '6pKoi ri^ms KwXvovfTiv, 
 See Jelf, 580, 4 axoK^^-^padiais, Sehol. ; (Bgri, Kriig. So we say, 
 
 ' I should be slow to do it.' And Shakspeare, ' I'll trust by leisure him who 
 mocks me once.' Kai\iaovTai. Kriig. considers this the only instance 
 
 where the fut. med. of this verb stands for a passive. Upon the general question 
 of such futures, see i. 68, c. Tr. * they will bring difficulties upon themselves.' 
 ov aeveroi — 'the opportunities of war wait for no man,' in the sense of the 
 proverb about 'time and tide.' Cf. Arist. Ach. 1620, and Jelf, § 364 a. 
 ueyiTol Beoi, ' the gods ■»«•« long suffering .' The orators probably imitated thia 
 
152 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book I. 
 
 usage ill such passages as those quoted by Kriig., e.g. Dem. iv. 37, 01 tSiv irpay- 
 lidrav Kaipol ov fxevouaiv. oiSe — ne quidem. Thuc. seems to refer to the 
 
 threat of the Corinthians, iTmeixit^p-hs Tp X'^Pf' ^^' l'2-2. It is possible that a 
 report of their proposed scheme may have reached Pericles j or Thuc. may be 
 merely answering iiimself. r^v fihv y^P x**^^^^*' k.t.A. The diffi. 
 
 culty here does not, I think, so much arise as Arn. supposes, from not seeing 
 that v6\iv is the ace. after ■!rapairKevd<ra<rBai, as from failing to perceive that it 
 stands in apposition to, and is an epexegesis of, the primary predicate riji' 
 iiriTelx"^"'. Tr. 'for the former (sc. iwirelx""") U w hard even in peace to es- 
 tablish in the shape of an equally matched city,' i. e. a city which shall be an 
 equal match for Athens. Kriig. suggests that iwiTelx'triv may be the subject of 
 TrapaiTKiviaairOat; in this case tr. ' that any process of fortification could ever 
 establish/ &c. ffjrov S-ti — 'surely then we may assume/ &c, 
 
 ai'TeiriTcTcix<<r/i^''o'>'- Most editors assert that here the passive stands for 
 the middle, and that very unusually. I do not see why the participle should 
 not be a regular passive — when we on our part have been well fortified in their 
 territory, i. e. in the possession of well-fortified places. So our military writers 
 might say — well entrenched in the place. This is sui-ely confirmed by ireixicBTi- 
 aav, ch. 93 d. ' Thueyd. is here distinguishing between two sorts of iitiTcixiffis, 
 the one by founding a city (iiroiKl^en', vii. 27) in the neighbonrhood of Athens, 
 strong enough to be a check upon her power (iii. 9), the other by erecting forts 
 in Attica as strongholds,' Arn. Of the former, Megara, founded by the Dorians 
 as a check on Athens, is an instance; as also is Heracleia, of. iii. 92. The 
 latter scheme was carried out by the fortification of Deceleia. <t>o$Tf 
 
 BTJyai — 'to be afraid of T. K. A. says its usual meaning is to fear. As 
 ^opiia is to terrify, a little consideration will show the cause of the varieties of 
 meaning found in the active and passive voices. 
 
 (i.) (ppoipiov — ' a fortified place,' as opposed to it6\iv amliraKov. 
 avToixoXiais — ' by the facilities which it would afford for desertion.' See vii. 
 27. The slaves are principally referred to. Similar complaints are found in 
 Aristophanes. ^iriTcix'f"" '* governed by the following inf. KuKxmv — 
 
 'prevent us from constructing an 4iriT€lxt(r/^ti against them ' — cf. Jelf, § 664, 
 v\4ov ykp K.T.\. Though it is sufficiently obvious, most editors point out 
 that Tov Karh, 77)1/ depends upon ipivetplas, and 4fnreiplas upon irXeov — * we have 
 more experience of land service from our serving on board ship, titan they 
 have experience in nautical matters from their service on land.' 
 
 (p.) oiiSi yap ufit7s — 'for neither have you, though practising it ever since 
 the period directly following the Median invasion, as yet brought it to perfec- 
 tion.' iaaijievoi. Passivo sensu. Cf. supra, (a.) Ci. ^mt. Iph. Aul, 
 331, ovyX Seivd; rhv ^/ibi/ oiKeif oIkov qvk idffop.ai ; For the fact, see i. 80, 121. 
 
 (d.) iv Tiy pu\] fitKfTuvTi. This is a good instance of the extension to the 
 participle of that idiom which makes a neuter adjective with an article equiva- 
 lent to a noun. Owing to the use of participial substantives in our language we 
 can easily translate such phrases — owing to their not practising. See iii, 48, 
 if T^ Toi^Se a^tovpn, an(i Jelf, 4^6 y. rh Sh vavrtKhv K.r.\. — 'for 
 
 nautical skill is as much the work of art as anything else, and does not admit of 
 being practised as a mere bye-work when occasion happens, nay, it rather admits 
 of nothing else being engaged in as a bye-work beside itself ' — &a-wep Koi HWa is 
 
CUAP. 143.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 53 
 
 said to be identical with trrrep &\\o. Perhaps it is a little less strong. 
 iropep7o»— awork done alongside of , or contemporaneouslywith, another (Qev. 
 Nebensache). Cf. eV irapepyif, vi. 69; yiyyetrdai is governed by inSix^Tui 
 eubaud. 
 
 Chaptee CXLIII. — (a.) Ae\<j>o75. The adverbial dative is not uncommon, 
 as in the case of MapaBavi, but AeK<l>o!s without if is seldom found. Perhaps 
 the position of 'OXviiiriacriv occasioned and justifies it. vwo\a^€7v—' olam 
 
 suhdncere.' See ch. 121. TiJSe— as the Schol. explains, for the full sentence, 
 rb a.i'TnroL\ovs fiiias avTobs jueri tup ixerolKi^v ehai avroTs. Cf. Eur. Ale. 506. 
 nvPe pi/riT as— 'native Athenian citizens for steersmen,' ^AutjotmoTeim-poTtsince 
 in ancient vessels of war even than in our own, for the success of the various 
 manoeuvres employed in action must have materially depended upon their 
 management. iinipeirla. is the 'abstractum pro conoreto,' the 
 
 remainder of our crews; or, as we might say, 'the manning of our vessels.' 
 Krug. thinks the word is exclusive of the iiri$dTai. In its narrowest sense it 
 would, as its etymology imports, be confined to the oarsmen. 
 
 (S.) ^Tri Tif KivSvvcf — 'to iAejV rj»4,' as we use the preposition in such phrases 
 as — to their discredit, i. e. importing the result to which any action tends. Or 
 it may be — ' over and above the risk.' I prefer either of these to the interpretation 
 of the edd. 'in face of the danger,' D., and similarly 'hei der Qefahr' Kriig.; 
 'oh impendens perieulum,' or ' ut periculum adeant/ Pop. {pe/ryeiv. 
 
 The word importing banishment is used, for most of these men would naturally 
 belong to the subject states of Athens, and so be subject to sentence of out- 
 lawry. /ieTCL TTJs ^ffaovos i\iriSos — ' siding with t?ie inferior 
 hope,' i. e. with the party whose hope of success was inferior. ovk 
 awh rov tirov — ' other advantages not upon an equal scale,* i.e. ir^on a very 
 much greater scale than the enemy. See these enumerated, ii, 13, ijy t €. 
 Cf. Ar. JiancB, 1463, Krug. ovk4ti 4k rov d/xolov — 'it will be no 
 longer the same thing.' Cf. with Kriig. ii. 44, iii. 32, iv. 10. anax^i-. 
 So all the MSS. but one, which has a/iaxi. Cf. Blomf ad P. V. Gloss, v. 216, 
 and Ellendt, iea;. &^A. voce ai/OTc/. Kar' ijweipoi'. This refers to 
 their possessions in Asia Minor and Thrace. 
 
 (c.) ei yhp ij/iiv. So we, 'if we were,' an ordinary employment of the im- 
 perfect in hypothetical propositions. tovtov — i.e. the being islanders. 
 StavoriBevTai — 'having disposed ourselves in thought,' i.e. having brought 
 ourselves to the state of mind. Cf. ch. 18 b. oIkIixs — without the article, 
 liecause, says Kriig., only some houses were in a position to be taken. But 
 may it not fall under the head of ' familiar mention,' as in the phrase ' house 
 and home 1 ' Cf . Matt. xix. 29, koI -aas Scttis a(prJKii' ohtas k.t.X., and in the next 
 ch. ayopa Kol AijueVi xpV<^Sai. '66ev iffxion^v — 'the source of our 
 strength,' i. e. in men, ships, and money. 
 
 (d.) T]ffvx^f^ovfft — 'they will not keep quiet,' i.e. there will be a revolu- 
 tionary movement. Kriig. says, after Popp., * treu bleiben,' remain true to our 
 allegiance, which is not the special aspect of the idea presented by the word. 
 o\6<t>vp(Tis — 'make our wail;' properly applied to the lamentation of females, 
 and here, therefore, the word insinuates an argument against the effeminate 
 cowardice of such a course. oikimj' — cf. supra, last note. For the 
 
154 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. LBoo^; I. 
 
 sentiment, cf. vii. 77, 7. airoiis Sr]u(rai. These words should be 
 
 tii]^en together^ burn with your own hands. Tovrwv ye eVe/co — 
 
 *^or the matter of theses' or ^for the sake of these at any rate.^ 
 
 Chapter CXLIV. — (a,) es ^Air^Sa — 'tending to a hope' 'that go to maJce 
 vp a hope' cf. ^s aTrtJSei^tj/, ii. 13. ^BeXtjre, Popp. cf. iv. 104, ii. 
 
 94, ^ou\iir0ai ixii, &e. It has been sapposed that the words exhibit an inver- 
 sion for fiii 464\nTe, but I prefer to tr. 'if you consent to forbear making 
 fresh acquisitions of dominion while engaged in warfare.' The junior student 
 will do well to notice, as in ch. 139, how strongly this passage confirms the 
 distinction between iiXa and $oi\oiiai, for here i84\riTe, so far from denoting 
 u wish^ implies a constraint put upon the natural wish. The Schol. explains 
 alvlTTerai ^tKeKlav Kal 'lra\iav Ijs 4-jre6vfjLovv KpaTTJtrai. The account of the 
 fatal expedition to Sicily (books vi. and vii.) is the best commentary on the 
 words, and an entire confirmation of the policy of Pericles, a policy Aristo- 
 phanes has so succinctly expressed : — 
 
 T^v yrjv orav vofd(Tann t))V twv troXefiitcf 
 
 iripov 5e ras vaus, airopiav Se rhv irSpoy, 
 
 Rante, 1463 — 65 (ed. Bergk). 
 
 irpoirrffleirSai — 'bring uponyour own heads additional perils.' wefi^Tjfiai, 
 'like Sf'Soi/ca, often has the meaning of a present. So iv. 114, vi. 34, Plat. 
 Crat. 403 b.' So T. K. A. after Kriig. But it is perhaps as well to indicate 
 a shade of difference in the meaning. Tr. 'what I have been and am afraid of 
 is,' &c. ras oiK^ias. The possessive adjective, accompanied by a 
 
 genitive denoting possession — a very emphatic formula. Editors quote ras 
 ISias aifTchv TrpoffdSoys, Dem. 
 
 (b.) ^v iiAAfiu \6yu). Cf. ii. 13, and 61. M67ap€as, an accusa- 
 
 tive (as below tAs Tr6\^is), stands, because the primary notion in the speaker*s 
 mind, even before 8ti. It is, therefore, to be rendered. And as regards the 
 Megarians. ^evnKa(rlas. Arnold assigns two motives for the existence 
 
 of these ^ei/7j\afrlai or * alien acts' at Sparta — first, to preserve intact the Dorian 
 type of chai'actcr and principles ; second, to prevent the formation, within the 
 bosom of the stiite, of a wealthy and mercantile alien body. The junior student 
 should consult Miiller, JDor. 11, p. 4, note. MuUer remarks that ^evriXacria. was 
 only practised against tribes of different usages, particularly lonians and Athe- 
 nians. Philosophers, such as Anacharsis the Scythian, were willingly ad- 
 mitted ; other persons were excluded ; there were fixed regulations concerning 
 the time and manner of admitting foreigners, and hence the earlier writers, 
 Thucydides and Xenophon, speak of lei/TjAao-foi in the plural number. See for 
 further information the authorities collected by C. F. Hermann, Fol. Antiq. Gr. 
 § 28, I. KaKiU L. Hermann understands ti as the subject of this verb, 
 
 making ^«etfo and rtJSe accusatives after it. But it is simpler with the majority 
 of editors to suppose that kuKvcl is here impersonal — tr. 'for there is nothing in 
 the treaty to prevent either one or the other' — and Kriig. supports this view bv 
 quoting Ar. Aoes, 463, hv SiafidTTetv oii KuKvei. sxofT^s — i. c. in the 
 
 capacity of allies. ^trimtra^ieQa. refers to the thirty years* 
 
Chap. 146.] NOTES ON THTJCYDIDES. 155 
 
 truce. airoSSiffi K.T.\. Tt. ' when ihei/ also grant to their allies 
 
 not to he independent after a fashion which suits themselves, the Lacedcemonians ;' 
 implying that the boasted independence of the allies of Spuria was nominal 
 rather than real, for that as a matter of fact they were compelled to accommodate 
 their institutions to the Spartan taste. See i. 19, kot' oKiyafx^av 5€ <r(j>l<ni> 
 airols iiriT-qdeius Sirojy ToXircvataffi, and cf. i. 76? v. 81, 82. abro^s 
 
 cKtiiTToiy, sc. WKoiwrriy ' permit each of them severally' Kriig. would read aiiTuis 
 fKaarovs, hut I think unnecessarily. iOfXo/iey — cf. supr. this ch. 
 
 note a. &p^ofay, a.pxofi4vovs. Why are the voices varied ? 
 
 Perhaps the first may mean, we will not commence the war ; the second, if they 
 tahe upon themselves to 'make war, if they allow themselves to he led into a war. 
 T. K. A. writes, ' Kriig. makes Sp;t6(79o: ttoA. = to commence hostilities with 
 the intention of prosecuting them vigorously.' I cannot see the rationale of 
 tliis, nor do I think Krug. says so, for his expression is, * Wenn sie sich in 
 den Krieq einlassen' an expression which is the proper German equivalent for 
 the middle voice, and much more nearly agrees with what I had given as the 
 meaning, quite independently of what others have written. 
 
 (c.) 5ex£t'iti«^« — sc. 7ro\6/A€ti'. ^ffffov iyKeicofxei'ous — * toe shall 
 
 find the enemy likely to he less vigorous (or urgent) in their assault upon us,' 
 vepiyiyvovrai — ' come round as results .' Cf. supra, ch. 32 c. Kriig. cf. ii. 39, 
 and Dera. 3. \2, tovtou ^6vov Trepiyiyfeadai ft^WovTo?. The lit. meaning of the 
 word has reference to .what remains over and above, after any action. Cf. 
 ■veptova-ioiv, ch. 2 b, and 141 c. The infinitive eiSeVai must he again supplied 
 after KtySurwy. 
 
 (d.) 01 YoCy warepes — ' our sires at any rate.' On the illustrative and in- 
 ferential force of the compound ye-ody^ cf. supra ch. 2 e. dp/xitifievoi 
 — *not starting from such great resources.' T. K. A. quotes with approbation 
 from an American ed. this remark, * oomlnifvoi happily expresses the eagerness 
 and ardour with which Pericles represents their Grecian ancestors as rushing 
 to battle.' But, in the first place, dpfid/ievoi here applies primarily to them- 
 selves, and not to their ancestors; and, secondly, the word in such collocations 
 comes to be quite a technical one (cf. Xen. Anah. passim), and is used in cases 
 where no such eagerness, &c., can be connoted by it. yr^i^ri k.t.\. — 
 ' by policy more than by luck, and with greater courage than power,' the datives 
 are instrumental, Jelf, 603. 4 s raSe — ' up to the present pitch.' Popp. cf. 
 vi. 18, €j rdSi ^pav avrd. We must explain airci grammatically by ra iTriipxofTo. 
 \e /it €0-9 01 — 'left behind,' i.e. in the race of glory. Cf. \etwo/j.eyriy ray yvy, 
 i. 10. 
 
 Chaptee CXLV. — (a.) ouSex K€\€v6iJ.eyot ■rrofi\(T nv—' that they would 
 do nothing upon compulsion (or dictation).' Bl. quotes imitations from Dion. 
 Hal. iirX Xtrri ko! i^oi'ei. See note upon eVl rij tart koI dfiolcf, supra, 
 
 ch. 27 a. 0UIC6T1 eirpfirySEuoi'To. For, as Popp. reminds us, 
 
 Melesippus, mentioned ii. 12, was only a herald. 
 
 Chapteb CXLVI.— (a.) Al t i a i—' crimina,' charges which they brought 
 against each other, cf. aWlat, ch. 23, in fiu. niii<f>apal—' differences,' 
 
 causes of quarrel. aKripixrais fie v—' without, indeed, as yet employ - 
 
156 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book 1. 
 
 ing heralds (whose services were required in all transactions after an open 
 declaration of war), hut not without feelings of distrust.' Bl. quotes ' Bellam 
 indictum, tacitss inducise quietum auimum tenuere,' Liv. ii. 18. 
 iiyx^"^^! properly'o confbunding,' heace' ahreaJcing up,' 'a rupture.' Kriig. 
 appositely quotes Plat. Hep. 379 E, tV "^^^ SpKuv Kal airov^wv avyxvffiv ijy 6 
 TlipSapos ffwcx^ft where the word aptly denotes the confusion caused by the 
 treachery of Fandarus. It occurs agaiu v. 26. 
 
CMiP. 2,] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I57 
 
 BOOK 11. 
 
 Chaptee I.— 'ApxEToi. The war began, strictly speaking, according to 
 Thucydides' view, with the attack on Pliitffia, in the month Munychion, B.C. 
 431. the thirty years' truce having been made in the same month, B.o. 445. 
 The revolt of Potidtea took place about Midsummer, B.o. 432. Clinton. 
 Apxerai 6 Trii\6/ios ivBevSe ^Stj seems to have passed into a proverbial expres- 
 sion. Cf. Lucian, Fseudomant. § 8, ii. 215, ed. Hemsterh. Aul. Gellius, 
 Noet. Att. xvii. xxi. 16, says, 'cceptum est circa annum fer6 post conditam 
 Bomam, trecentesimum vicesimum tertium.' axripyKrel. Cf. lib. 
 
 i. 146, where he uses the form aicijpiKTus. For the termination re/ or rl, see 
 Kriiger ad loo., and Jelf, § 324/3. Kruger reads rd with Hudson and 
 Duker, and says only one bad MS. has rl. GoUer has rl, and Jelf says, ' when 
 the T does not belong to the root, as in the ease of verbal adjectives, e.g. 
 aicKavTi and axKava-Ti, aicuriri, &e., the ending of the modal adverb is in /.' 
 Bauer thinks the termination in an is the more forcible, as implying an im- 
 placable and internecine war — ttiJAemos aK-hpvKTos. In time of actual war those 
 who passed the borders took a herald with them. This was not necessary now, 
 but their intercourse was restricted and mistrustful. Grote, vi. 151. 
 KaTaiTTdvTes — ' when once engaged in the war.' Cf. e. g, 13, 65, 75, 78, not. ad 
 i. I, iii. 6g, and Jelf, 530, 2. K. compares i. 49, /, KaTaa-rdpTes e/uixovTo. 
 KuTci Ofpos Kal x^'i"™"'!- Grote (vi. 153) considers that the bisection 
 of the Thucydidean year into Bepos and x^'P-^" 's marked by the equinoxes ; 
 and that consequently his summer and winter are each half a year, comparing 
 V. 20, ii/pTjCei e| Tifiia^ias sKarepov rov efiavTou t^p Zvi/afXLV exovros k.t.K. 
 But H. Stephens had already remarked that this did not necessarily imply an 
 equal division, ' sed ut tota aestas sit una dimidia pars, tota hyems sit altera ;' 
 e4pos therefore will be 'the season for military operations.' It is plain from 
 Csesar, B. G. ii. 2, that sestas had the same modified signification in Latin. 
 Poppo and Kruger consider that the winter began witli the month Majmacterion, 
 and ended with Elaphebolion, leaving eight months for active warfare. 
 
 Chaptek II. — yap refers to ^px^Tai in chap. i. K. and P. r^ dh •jre/xTTTtp 
 leal StKdra!. Cf. Xen. JSellen. ii. 3. 10, where he gives the names of all the 
 ephori eponymi of Sparta for the first twenty-eight years of the war. 
 al rpiaKoyToireis (rirov^al. Cf. ad i. 115. XpvaiSos. Cf. iv. 133. 
 
 This was the priestess through whose carelessness the Herajum was accidentally 
 burnt, in the ninth year of the war. These priestesses of the Argive Juno were 
 called ■^pccriSer. UpaiJi.4vns k.t.K. — ' in the forty-eighth year of her 
 
 consecration.' ^tj Sio fiTJras &pxovTOS — ' having still two months 
 
 to he archon.' It appears from Ideler and others that the Athenian archons 
 entered on their office in the commencement of the month Hecatombaeon. If 
 so and the reading be correct (and we ought not rather to read 5' for Sio, i. e. 
 four months instead of two), the attack on Plata:a was made towards the closf 
 
158 NOTES ON THUClfDIUES. [Book II. 
 
 of March, B.C. 431, i. e. in the vaonth Munychion. Kriiger would carry it back to 
 Jannury, TrpoffTroiTJcrai — ' adjungere' P. ^to make over (i.e. 
 
 restore) to the S(EOtian league.' Cf, i. 55, r^y KepKvpav TrpoffTroffuretav, 
 afia TJpi hpxoii^v (p Cf, Jelf, 699, 2. BoiwTapxovyres. Cf. iv, 
 
 92, V. 37. The Bceotarchs appear to have been thirteen in number, two of 
 whom were chosen from Thebes. They were the military heads of the Bceotian 
 confederacy, chosen by the different states. When engaged in military service 
 they formed a council of war, the president being one of the two Theban 
 Bax)tarchs, who commanded alternately. Cf. Smith, Diet, of Ant. s. v. 
 irepi wpuToy u-nvov. Cf. for this measurement of time. Soph. Aj. 278. 
 8t' Evpu^axo" ToC A.eoiiTiaSov. Herodotus, vii. 233, mentions Leontiades 
 as commanding the Boeotians at Thermopylae. He was the 'arch traitor' who 
 went over to Xerxes, and received the royal brand. Sti iaoiro o 
 
 ir(i\e/toi. For the optative in the oratio obliqua, see Jelf, 885, 3. ttJj' 
 
 XlKaraiav. See separate note at end of present chapter. in 
 
 iv elpTjpri, and moreover during the time of a religious festival. Cf. iii. 56, 
 in the apology of the Platseans, iv (rirovdcus Kal irpoa-eri Upofnivi(}. Cf. Duker 
 ad loc, where however Upofx-qvla cannot be equivalent to vovfjLT]via, as we hear 
 c. 4, that this happened T6\euTwcTos rod pL7]v6s. irpoKaQ- 
 
 €uri\Kvlas — 'set to defend thecity.' So Trpo(pv\d(rcretv, c. 93, and *pro castris 
 aciem instruere,' Caes. S. G. i. Qt^nvoi 4s r^v ayopav ri SirXa. 
 
 Cf. Grote vi. 153, who clearly shows that Dr. Arnold has mistaken the sense of 
 these words. It is quite evident that no soldiers under the circumstances of 
 the Thebans, making a hostile attack in the night-time upon a garrisoned town, 
 would think of ' piling their arms,' any more than Proxenus (in the well-known 
 passage Xen. Anab. i. 5. 13) would have thought of giving such an order to 
 his men in their critical position between the troops of Clearchus and Menon, 
 or Hippocrates to his, when the enemy were actually in sight before the battle 
 of Delium (Thuc. iv. 93, cf. vii. 3; Xen. Anab. iv. 3. 17). In the passage 
 viii. 93, dffifvoi rk 8?rAa ^iKKK7i(rtafrav, Dr. Arnold's rendering may possibly be 
 the right one. But Hudson's interpretation is far better, ' armis instruct! et 
 ordine collocati, concionem habuerunt, imminebat enim hostis.' The latter gives 
 the four meanings very clearly : 
 
 1. pro TaTTfiv et Tdmtrdai, 
 
 2. pro o-TpaTOlrcSeiSecflot. 
 
 3. pro castra munire. 
 
 4. pro troKiopKe^u. Cf. viii. 25. 
 
 In most cases it may be explained by 'armati consistere,' to maintais. 
 rank, resting the spear and shield upon the ground ; and in this case means 
 little more than our 'ground arms.' Cf. Xen. Sell. ii. 4. 12, where the 
 soldiers of Thrasybulus rest their shields, but retain the rest of their arms, 
 so 16, § S- ^> where compare the story of David and Saul, i Sam. xxvi. 12. 
 ipyov exetr^ai — ' set about their work at once.' ivetnev. 
 
 The technical word; therefore found without the substantive. Cf. Arist. 
 Ach. II, d 5' ivcmey eiaay', & Qeoyvi, riy xop^"- kot4 xi 
 
 virpta Tav irdvTav BoitnTuiy. After the death of the mythic Xanthus 
 in his single combat with Melanthua (cf. Grote, ii. p. 22), the monarchical 
 form of government was exchanged for a republican constitution, founded on a 
 
Chap. 2.] l^TOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 150 
 
 mixture of aristocratic and democratic principles (b.c. 1126, Heeren) ; tlie 
 former shown in the appointment of eleven annual magistrates called 
 Boeotarchs, who presided over the military as well as civil departments ; the 
 latter in the establishment of four councils (^ovXai), which were possessed in 
 fact of the sovereign authority, all measures of importance being submitted to 
 them (as Thuc. says, a'lmp airav rh Kvpos exovcri). Tradesmen and artisans were 
 allowed no share in public affairs, unless they had abstained for ten years from 
 carrying on their employments. Heeren thinks these Pov\al were held in tlie 
 four districts into which Bceotia was divided (p. 147). The general assembly 
 was held in the temple of Itonian Minerva, near Coroneia (Paus. ix. ;^4). It 
 was in fact a political confederacy under the presidency of Thebes. The 
 greater cities which had smaller towns dependent upon them, seem to have been 
 originally fourteen, the names of which are variously given. The religious 
 festival of the whole league was called Pamboeotia. Cf. Smith's Qeog. Diet. 
 art. BcEOtia; Cramer, vol. ii. pp. 191, 238; Heeren's Manual, pp. 146 sq. 
 Por the constitution of the several Bouhal, see Smith's Diet. art. Boeotarchs. 
 tl; Tis PoiXerai k.t.\. Cf. iii. 62, 66, iv. 118. rifleirffai irap' 
 
 avTovs Th. HirKa. Cf. iv. 68, rhv Bov\6fjL^vov ievai Msyapfwy fxera 'AdTjvaiwv 
 
 riiv nxaraia;/ (cf. supra for place in text) — Flatcea or I'latace {Homer 
 uses the singular form, II. ii. 504; (&s eyiKas elney d itoitjt^!, Strab. ix. 2, 
 p. 266,) as does Thucydides generally, though sometimes the plural, as 
 c. 7 a, 10; Herodotus the plural usually, as does Diodorus and Demosthenes) 
 was situated on a spur of Mt. Cithseron, from which the Asopus takes its 
 rise, which river separated its territory from that of Thebes; at the distance 
 of about seventy stadia from Thebes (c. 5 a), the same from Tbespiae, about 
 a hundred from the border town of CEuoe, and 250 from Athens. The 
 Platseans had early separated themselves from the Boeotian league, considering 
 that their own interests were at variance with this political union, and had 
 put themselves under the protection of Athens, about 93 years before the 
 date of their surrender (lib. iii. c. 68), i. e. B.C. 519 (Clinton in an.). They 
 had at first offered themselves to the Lacedsemouiaus and Cleomeiies, but 
 were advised by them to ally themselves with Athens (iii. 55 ; Herod, vi. 
 108). In return for the good service done for them by tlie Athenians, 
 the Platseans furnished a thousand soldiers for Marathon, and manned some 
 of the Athenian vessels which fought at Artemisium. They fought most 
 bravely at the battle of Platsea, and were publicly thanked by Fausanias and 
 the .confederate Greeks for their gallant conduct. But they afterwards 
 incurred the hatred of the Lacedaemonians, and especially of their kings, by 
 causing the boastful inscription of Fausanias on the tripod offered at Delphi 
 to be altered (Herod, ix. 81, Demosth. in Sear. \},1ii). Platsea was burnt by 
 the army of Xer.xes, but restored by the assistance of the Athenians. After 
 their surrender to the Laccdsemonians in the fifth year of the war, B.C. 427, 
 the town was razed to the ground, with the exception of one building con- 
 structed from the ruins, which they used for the reception of travellers ((car- 
 ay&yiov, iii. 68). After the peace of Antalcidas, the town was rebuilt, and the 
 inhabitants restored, in consequence of the measures of Agesilaus with the 
 Thebans, B.C. 386 (Pans. Boot. '\.; Xen. Sell. v. i. 33,). But in the archontatc 
 
l6o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 of Asteius, B.C. 373, the Thebans, suspecting that the Platasans had been 
 privy to the seizure of the Cadmeia by the Lacedsemonians under Phoebidas 
 nine years before, got possession of the town by stratagem, and once more 
 demolished it (Pans. Smot. i.). After the destruction of Thebes by Alexander, 
 B.O. 33S, the confederates decided on rebuilding Plataea; but this design does 
 not seem to have been carried into effect till the time of Cassander (Pans. 
 Saeot. iii.) who also rebuilt Thebes. Diesearchus, who died about B.C. 285, 
 mentions the town as existing in his time. Traces of the walls, consisting of 
 very considerable masses, evenly hewn and well built, may be seen near the 
 village of Koclcla. (The N.W. angle seemingly was the portion restored.) 
 They are on the steep and rugged slopes which fall from the heights of Cithaeron 
 into the valley on the north. Cf. Wordsworth's Cfreece, p. 182. 
 
 Chaptee III. — Idipav — 'they could not see.' iveurfpi^ov — 
 
 'offered no violence.' Cf 16./, firiSiv yeiirepov iroicic, i. 133. b. For the usual 
 meaning, cf. u. 73. Cf. iii. 66. it. ^aSla^ Kpar^irai. Usually 
 
 with Si/, as c. 70, but cf. our own idiom, 'they thought to get the better of them.' 
 oh PovKofievif fjv. The dative expressing reference to (Jelf, § 599. 3; 
 Matth. p. 621). Cf. Sail. Jug. 4, 'uti militibus aequatus cum imperatora 
 labos volentibus esset,' and Tacit. Agric. xviii. 'quibus helium volentibns 
 eriit.' ^irixe<p7!T6a. For the plural form of the verbal adjective; 
 
 cf. not. ad i. 88. ZiopvffaovT^s. See Grote, vi. 155, and the 
 
 letter of M. Marrast. avrX retxovs jf, anacoluthon. Cf. Matth, p. 519; Stop. 
 v. Arnold ad loc. ; hence the toix^P^X"' (Arist. San. 773); Plut. 204 (cf. 
 165); Xen. Mem. i. a. 62 ; Plat. Leg. viii. p. 353. (ptiAi{|- 
 
 avTfS — 'having watched their opportunity while it ioas yet night (pv barely 
 the break of day).' (poPfpiirepoi. Qy. transitive or intransitive ? 
 
 Arnold takes the former view, the etymologic. Magn. the latter, as also 
 Suidas, Photius, Poppo, Kruger, GoUer. Cf. Soph. (B. T. 153, Eur. Iph. A. 
 620, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 19. The same double meaning attaches to our English 
 adjective 'fearful,' and the Latin ' forraidolosus ;' cf. Tac. Ann. i. 62, and Sail. 
 Cat. § 7. Either sense would be admissible, the subject being clearly changed. 
 iinriipias. The causal genitive, Jelf, § 481. ifiTreipovs, as always 
 
 in this collocation, the predicate — ' having for their pursuers (or, to pursue 
 them), persons well acquainted with the bye-ways, so that,' &c. 
 
 Cbapieb IV. — ^vviiiTpiipovro — 'formed into close order.' Cf. Herod, ix. 
 18. 4v cf^ifftv avTols. Cf. Jelf, § 622. The local meaning of iv, 
 
 the notion of being in a number or crowd. Kepa/iu. Plural idea 
 
 conveyed by the singular noun, as c. KaKd/itp for KaXdfion, so ■ir\lvSos, &iJLire\os, 
 K. Kax^lf 'T- *6> ^^'> ""■P'^ist !"•) of- Judges ix. 53, the death of Abimelech; 
 and Pans. I. xiii. 7, the death of Pyrrhus, King of Epirus. ueroC. 
 
 Cf. c. 5. BiA VVRT65 — 'the whole night through.' Cf. Xen. Anab. 
 
 IV. vi. 22. T^KiVTuvTos ToV fj.Tjv6s. Cf. Grotc, vi. 153. 
 
 ToO fiii iic^eiyeiv. Infin. with article used to express the result viewed as 
 the cause (Jelf, § 491. 3 ; Matth. § S4o). Cf, 22, ixxKncrlav ouk ^7ro(€i , . . 
 rov fi^ ipyf , . . i^a/mpreli', and ii. 32, IreixiffST) , , , toB firi Xjiffrtis ^KTrXeovras 
 KaKovpyili/, Stffre Bif(l}$eipoyTo, The action or ^oci primarily 
 
Chap. 5.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. i6l 
 
 fepi-esentefl by the indicative, its other character of a result not being lost 
 tight of (Jelf, § 863. c). o-Tupam'tti— the iron point at the bottom 
 
 of the spoar by which it was stucl: into the ground. The dimin. of 'a-ripai 
 (Xen. Sell. iv. ii. 19). Cf. ffrcJpfluf, L. and S ; Smith's Diet, of Aat. s. v. 
 llasta. Called also eavpar'fip, Horn. II. x. 153; Herod, vii. 41. Cf. I Sam. 
 ixvi. 12, the story of David removing Saul's spear. This point of the javelin 
 was used in place of the peg by wliich the bar of the gate was usually held 
 fast. The peg was termed fiiXams, the instrument by which it was removed 
 ^aKavarypa. Cf. Arist. Vesp. 200, cum Schol.; Thesm. 423; art. Pessulus,' 
 Rich's Dictionary. pdXavos = /idyyavoy, Schol. (cf. Schol. ad Arist. Vesp. 155) ; 
 V. lidvSaKos ($aKavdypa, cf. Xen. Sell. V. ii. 39). P. compares the Homeric 
 ix^iv' II- x'i. 12 1> Odyss. xxi. 47. On the subject of bolts, see Bekker's Qallus, 
 P- 282. 01 vKiiovs, i.e. of those who threw themselves from 
 
 the wall, for 180 out of 300 were taken prisoners. \aS6vTfs /tal' 
 
 Siaxif^avTis. Hendiadys. rh Se irXcTiTTov . . . €cnriTrTov(riy. 
 
 The idea of several subjects included in the word of number (Matth. § 302). 
 iwTiKpvs. Cf. i. 122, viii. 64, .Ssch. Choeph. 190, Plat. lEuthyd. p. 215. For 
 the difference of meaning and quantity between h.vTiKpb and AvTixpys cf. 
 Ruhnken, ad Tim. Lex. Plat, in v. There seems to be in this passage 
 Clearly the meaning of 'straight through,' as well as of 'right onward,' as 
 noticed by T. K. A., who appears from his note to have been un-aware of the 
 distinction between the two adverbs drawn by ancient as well as by modern 
 grammarians. e^re KaTaKavfTovtriv. The indicative representing 
 
 the fact as actually existing or happening, and as something independent of the 
 thought and conception of the speaker, ' utrum eos concremarent an aliud quid 
 illis facerent,' Matth. 507. I, but many MSS. have the subj.; Bekker retains 
 the ind. XP^*''"'^^"' ^ ''"' ^*' ^oiKuVTat. Cf iv. 69, vii. 85;' 
 
 Xen. Sell. II. iv. 37. Jc. 
 
 Chaptee V. — e 5 c I — ' who should have arrived according to previous arrange- 
 ment.' rris vvkt6s. The temporal genitive, the moment of time in 
 which an action talces place being conceived of as a necessary condition of the 
 action, and therefore antecedent to it (Jelf, § 523. i). tX ti 6po — 
 * if, as was not an impossible contingency.' Cf. u. la. 87. S^o — 
 ^having received tidings withal.' 'A(Tanr6^. The Asopus, formed by 
 the confluence of several small streams (one of which rises near the town of 
 Platsea itself, and another near Thespise), flows in an easterly direction through 
 Bceotia; in part of its course forming the boundary between the Platsean and 
 Thehan districts (cf Herod, vi. 108), passing through a plain called Parasopia, 
 then through a rocky ravine into the plain of Tanagra, and falling into the 
 Euripns in the territory of Attica, near Oropus. In the upper part of its 
 course it is called Vuriemi, in the lower Turiendi. It was on its banks that 
 the battle of Platsea was fought (Herod, ix. 51). Cf. Leake's Northern Greece, 
 ii. pp. 326, 424 sq. 4ppvri. Cf Demosth. n. NecBr. p. 1379, ^^''"> 
 uses the very words. (On the discrepancy in the statements of Demosth. 
 and Thucydides, v. Grote, vi. 158.) The river is still subject to these floods 
 or freshes. Mr. Hawkins, in a letter to Dr. Clarke (ii. § 3), says that the 
 Asopus is in winter a muddy torrent, and for eight months of the year wholly 
 
1 62 NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. [Book IU 
 
 dry. KaratTKevii. Cf. not. ad i. lo. 6; ii. 14. 16, 17. 65. 97; 
 
 iii. 68. The word here evidently implies all the farm buildings, stock, &c., as 
 in ii. 14, where perhaps it may he limited to their movable property (Grote, 
 vi. 173). For the general idea, of. Herod, i. 17, on the invasion of Miletus 
 hyAlyattes. iirdpx^"' AvtI ruv tvSop — ' should serve as hostages 
 
 for those within the cityj or, as something which they might exchange for such as 
 were prisoners' ef rtva \d0oiev . , * fjv &pa tiSx^ci. Forthe 
 
 oratio obliqua followed by the oratio recta, v. Matthiae, § 524- 6. Jelf. § 854. 1. 
 ei Sh fi-fj — * otherwise/ So ii. 71, crparevaai fir}Seya irore olSIkq/s iir' oyrous, €* 
 Si li.i\, a/iiiveiv robs Trap6vTas. The negative sentence is often followed by ei Si 
 B.\ for ci Si, this form being commonly used to express the contrary of the former 
 conditional sentence. Of. Herod, vi. 56 ; Xen. Cyr. III. i. 35 ; Plat. Bip. M. 
 p. 285 ; Jelf, § 860. s ; and not. ad i. 28. iwo/jLitrat — 'confirmed it ly 
 
 an oath.' ix ^ oiv rris yjis — ' at all events.' The attack upon Plataea 
 
 was considered unjust even by the Spartans themselves (cf. vii. 18, and Grote, 
 vi. p. 149 sq.), but the murder of the Theban prisoners by the Plataeans was 
 still more atrocious. In spite of the impartial statement of Thucydides, few 
 persons can doubt that the oath was given or at least implied, and that with 
 this belief the Thebans retired. Cf. iii. 66. But the act was highly impolitic as 
 well as grossly unjust. It was 'a blunder as well as a crime,' v. Grote, p. 160. 
 TLi pi liaxos. Herodotus (vii. 233) mentions this fact when speaking of his 
 father's treachery. Cf. supra, ch. 2. evBis. Cf. c. 67. 4. 
 
 TTpoSiS6vTes. N.B. yait.pres., because the attempt was not successful = 0! 
 iTTayay6it.ivoi, 
 
 ChAPTEB VI. — vedsTepop. Ct.c. 3, iveunepi^or. irplr Sy. 
 
 Jelf, § 848. The difference between irplf and vp\v ft* seems to be in the 
 latter marking that the action of the temporal clause is viewed as something 
 which will probably take place = ihv fi^, irplv alone leaves it uncertain. 
 Te0f 7)K((tci fXfv. Optative in oratione obliqua (Matth. § 529. 2). 
 aXpnoriTovs. Of. Poppo ad i. ^3. So c. 78. h. 1. t5 axpfioy -rur aySpirar, 
 ' The old men and sick, with the women and children,' Grote. 
 
 Chaptee VII. — {a.)\aiJiirpS>i — ' in a glaring manner ' Cf. i. 49. P. 
 i>5 iro\efiii(rovT(!. Cf. Jelf, § 690, 2; Matth. p. 991. Trpeff0ela> 
 
 Topi Pain\ea — i.e. both parties, Athenians and Lacedsemonians. P. and K. 
 The Lacedaemonians depended on Pharnaces to convey theirs to the king 
 cf. c. 67. ' A remarkable evidence,' Grote observes, • of melancholy revolution 
 in Grecian affairs, when that potentate whom the common arm of Greece had 
 so hardly repulsed a few years before was now invoked to bring the Phoenician 
 fleet again into the iEgean for the purpose of crushing Athens' (vi. 167). For 
 the fate of these ambassadors, descendants of Sperthias and Bulls, see c. 67 ; 
 Herod, vii. 137. (vfifiaxiSas iroioifievot. N.B. pres. and im- 
 
 perfect part. — ' endeavouring to win over.' 
 
 (b.) vphs Toiy avTov i>irapxo^ffo.is — ' in addition to the ^A^^ already in 
 the Peloponnesus' says Kriiger ; ' to those in Italy and Sicily,' says Hermann ; ' in 
 addition to their allied cities in Oreece,' T.K. A., and this seems to be Thirlwall's, 
 view : ' Her allies in this quarter (Italy and Sicily) engaged to furnish her with 
 
Chap. 8.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 163 
 
 pioney and ships, which it was calculated would amount to no less than 500' 
 (iii. 1 20). Grote apparently inclines to Kriiger's view : ' The Lacednemonians 
 resolved to make up the naval force already existing among themselves and 
 their allies to an aggregate of 500 triremes, chiefly by the aid of the friendly 
 Dorian cities on the Italian and Sicilian coasts ' (vi. 167). Diodorus (xii. 41) 
 says the Italians and Sicilians were to send 200 ships, but it does not seem to 
 have been actually done. iKofieyoLS. Cf. Jelf, § 589, ,^. K. cf. iii. 63. 
 
 P. explains eKeaSai as equivalent to <^poi'f7v rd rivos. We say, to talce part, to 
 take up a side. i-mroLx^ttiav. Here is another difficulty ; what is 
 
 tlie nominative to ^ir. ? If we had vriis, the construction would be simple and 
 regular. (Cf. Cses. B. &., ' naves iis imperatie sunt.') But Lobeck and all the 
 commentators agree that vavs is alwaj'S accusative and never nominative. 
 Poppo therefore would read iveTaxBri, (which in fact must be supplied before 
 iroiixd^eu/,) from the Vienna MS. Cf. n. ad i. 141. d. Jelf, § 898, 2, considers 
 it as a sort of attraction, the subject of the dependent being transferred to the 
 principal clause, in which it stands as the object. But, after all, is it so certain 
 that favs cannot in Attic Greek stand as a nominative ? If it cannot, probably 
 some transcriber, not knowing the fact, substituted it for riJEs, imagining that 
 he was removing an lonicism from the text. &,pyipiov I>i\t6v — 
 
 • a specified sum,' cf. c. 70, and iv. 69. ' The highest amount which each state 
 would be called on to supply was fixed once for all. The supplies in money 
 and stores were also regularly appointed, so that an army with all its equip- 
 ments could be collected by a single summons.' — Miill. Dor. i. 198. Thirhvall 
 says, 'If Sparta determined the amount of the contributions required by 
 extraordinary occasions, she was obliged carefully to adjust it to the ability of 
 each community' (iii. 119). Cf. Wachsmuth, ii. 144. iii§ vitt A 
 
 greater number would imply a hostile intention. Cf. iii. 71, vi. 52. 
 
 (c.) e'l^Tafoc = iSoKliJ.a(ov. Schol. Cf. vi. 97. juSWoj' — 
 
 ' diligentius,' F. KepKvpav. P. ad i. 44. KsipoA. Cf. c. 9, 68. 
 
 ZixvvBov. Cf. i. 47, ii. 9. The Zacynthians were allies of Corcyra before. 
 61 tfij- Cf. Jelf, § 885. 2, Matth. p. 907. ire'pi^ Cf. vi. 90. 
 
 icaraiToXiiiiaovTis. Jelf, § 681. 6, participle used for the infinitive, re- 
 ferring to the present conviction with regard to something future. Karaw. (cf. 
 iv. i) = debellarej 'bello infestare,' P. 
 
 ChapteeVIII. — (a.)'0\iyov iiriii6ovv ovSiv. P. compares Liv.xxix. I, 
 'Nihil parvum agitabat animo.' eppavro — ' ad helium cupidkfere- 
 
 lantwr; GoU. (cf. Horn. II. xi. 50; Odys. xxiv. 68; Callim. S. Bel. 175; 
 Appian, B. C. ii. 30), so vii. 7, is rSWa ito\v iirtppatno. Hence'Eppioiro = the 
 Lat. Vale (Acts xxiii. 30). P. translates it ' totis viribus incumbebant.' 
 i.px6)i.evoi. A general reflection, which the U in the apod, applies to the 
 special case. avTi\afi.$dyovTat. So oi/Te'xo>Tai, vii. 66. Cf.Plat. 
 
 irotag. pp. 275, 314, Bekker, and c. 62 — 'set vigorously to work.' 
 re(iTr|s = Woi. SoTj\iiila. Abstract for concrete. Cf. 20, 21. 
 BTreiptos. The Schol. quotes the proverb, yKvKvs airiipif TT6\efias. 
 ^erecapos — 'woundup to the full pitch ofwarlilce excitement,' Grote. Cf. ii. 
 II, ^ yap 'EWhi irSffo Jir^prai. Poppo compares the Latin phrases arrectum, 
 ciectum, oxpectatione suspensum esse. ^vviovcruv — 'coming into 
 
 U 2 
 
^64 NOTES ON THUCl'DIDES. [Book it 
 
 dovjlicl t' 6 5 imlimiiit, Herod, i. 202, ai yvanai ^vvfinaaav — 'tha opiniom 
 clashed.' 
 
 (i.) Kiyia. The difference between Aif'j'io and xpi"'/'"'' seems to be this — 
 Xpyiofii^ (Th. xpttWf XP"""^^**) ^^ ^^ answer returned to one who consults an 
 oracle; yiyiov uny ominous saying, whether given by a God unconsulted, or a 
 loothsayer. ' Weissagungen,' K. Cf. lib. viii. i ; for the xpTi(TnoK6yoi, see 
 Aristoph. .4» 960 sq. h. 1. c, xxi. ArfKos ixiviiBii k.t.A. Cf. i. 
 
 13; Arist. Acharn. 12; Schol. Call. H. Del. 11; Schol. Virg. .<E». iii. 77, 
 with Heyne's Excursus. There is a difficulty here, as Herodotus, vi. 98, men- 
 tions an earthquake in Delos B.C. 490. Wass thinks this is the one to which 
 rhucydides refers, ohiyif itpb tovtuv being taken in a loose sense (just as nuper 
 in Latin has the same vague meaning). Pliny (Hist. N. iv. 12) and Seneca 
 (N. Q. vi. 26) speak of only two earthquakes at Delos. See Thirlwall, iii. 
 124. n. who quotes Voss, Mythol. Forach. Some suppose that Herodotus 
 merely quoted a report of the Delians, iis %\iyov ol A^Xioi, and that his earth-- 
 quake never did take place. Muller (Dor. i. 312, Germ, ed.) supposes 
 Thucydides had never seen the passage in Herodotus. Cf. ad i. 20 ; Cramer's 
 Anc. Greece, s. v. Delos. avf^TiTflro. The prep, exerts its force of 
 
 iackt hence * altius indagabantur,' ava^-qTiiaBai = tvuBiv ^TiTeifrSai. So ayaa-Ko- 
 "wuv, avaTtfiaff aj/adT^paf, apaKpiveiVf Abresch. ap. Gottleb. 
 
 (c.) fi ei/coio iraph Tro\b iiroiei. Cf. Dion. ilv. p. 427, Iv. p. 851, who 
 copies this passage. So Appian, B. C. i. 82, ^ eiivoia rStv avZptev 4s robs {nrdirovs 
 Topck TToAi' lnoltt, which seems to confirm the reading iiroUi, which K. and Baver 
 prefer to Airjlci, Cf. ■npoavoirtffaLj u. 3, •noioifxevoi, c. 7, * adjungebat homines,*' 
 
 • won over,' B. For the feeling entertained by the subject-allies towards Athens 
 see Grote, vi. 44, and Wachsmuth's Hist. Antiq. ii. 98. For irapa iroKb see' 
 Jelf, § 637, iii. 3. f. See note, i. 29. c. TpoenrSvTuv — 'set forth as 
 their plea (iro6(pa(ns) for going to war.' For the grammatical construction, see 
 Jelf, § 710 b, the gen. abs. implying the notion of cause, instead of agreeing with' 
 the subject of the verb, or some object thereof. Cf Theopb. Ch. r. )i.iicpo(pAoT, 
 4\€v8epov(ny. Cf. c. 72. a. 'As chief of the Peloponncsian confederacy, 
 Sparta presented the majestic and winning aspect of the champion of liberty' 
 against Athenian tyranny a:nd ambition.' — Thirlw. iii. 120. epparo — 
 
 • was fully set ' — ' had all its energies strung up.' IStdrris, Cf . c. 67, where 
 we find PoUis, an Argive, fitting out a privateer. (vpeirLKa/xfiivdv, 
 The middle is the more common form, K. ^ fji^ rts avrhi 
 irap^iTTai. Thuc. repeats the idea, iv. 14, K^KaXvaBat iSSxei fKa<nos ^ fx-f] nvt 
 KoX aurbs ipytp iraprtv. The perfect ksk. denotes the certainty of the result. K 
 op7f fix"''- Cf. c. 65, Tiv XlipmXia, iv opyrj fix""' '>"'! 18, iv Totairr] opyij i 
 (TTparhs rhv 'ApxiSafiov elx^^t the form with the prep, being more common. So 
 5i' ipyrjs ex"''« Sick fiixvs, c. 1 1 ; Siti inrouS^s, Sih (piXlas, via-rears, TtoKip.ov, 5io 
 SiKijs, Soph. Ant. 742. K. cf. Pint. Ale. 18. 
 
 Chaptke IX. — (a.) A OK. {i5^|Uoxoi. 'Within the isthmus her allies in- 
 cluded all the states of Peloponnesus, except Achaia and Argos: hence the 
 great contest now beginning was not improperly called the Feloponnesian war.' 
 — ThirUv. iii. 119. 'Apytiuv, Cf. Diod. xii. 42; Wachsmuth's 
 
 JI. A. ii. 106, seq. 
 
Chap. IO.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDKS. llS^ 
 
 (h.) *a)K5s. Cf. i: 112. u. Had the Phocians passed over to the Lace- 
 dceuaouiiin interest since tliis event, or must we with P. suspect some error f 
 Probably the former; as we find them afterwards decidetUy joining the 
 XacediEmonians. Cf. iv. 89, ii8, v. 64. AoKpoi. i. e. Opuntii. 
 
 'A|UirpoKia>TOi. Cf. c. 68. twirea! Si 'Boiarol. Cf.o. 12, c. 
 
 (c.) 'A0nvatav Se. Aristophanes {Vesp. 707) sajs the Athenian empire 
 comprehended a thousand cities, but some allowance must doubtless be made 
 for poetic exaggeration. Her subjects were more opulent than the allies of 
 Sparta, and she disposed of their revenues at pleasure. Xioi, AcV^ioi. 
 
 At that time the only free islands. NauTrti/cToj. Cf. i. 103. 
 
 ^^Kapvavtov. All but (Eniadse, c. 102, aei ttotc iroKipiovs ovras /jl6vov^ 'Ak. 
 Kapla. Cf. c. 69. TCI ^jrl 0p^'K7)s. Cf. ad i, 56, and c. 29; Xen. 
 
 Sell. II. ii. 5 ; Grote, vi. p. 90. The Thraceward allies included I'otidae.'i, 
 Chaloidice, Bottisea and probably Thasos. The neighbouring inland territory 
 was held by Perdikkas. For the early connexion between Athens and Thrace, v. 
 Herod, vi. 39. Hegesipyle, wife of Miltiades, was daughter of a Thracian king. 
 Cf. Wachsmuth, ii. pp. 39 and 94. 'Some of the possessions of Thasos on tlie 
 Thracian coast had fallen into the power of the Persians, and required to be de- 
 livered from the Persian governors by whom they were occupied. We may infer 
 from the expeditions to Eion and Daton that this was chiefly effected by the 
 A.thenianSt who, upon pretext of compensating themselves for their exertions, 
 retained possession of these places.' See Mr. Shilleto's pamphlet, Thtio/fdidet 
 or Cfrote, i. 10, note. M^Xow koI 0i^pas. Colonies of the Minyai, 
 
 from Lacedsemon. P. Cf. Thirl wall, i. 277. 
 
 Chaptee X. — («.) TOiis ir6\e(ri — i.e. KariL ir6\its, as ewaiTTOi, below. 
 i<r^a\oOvTes. Cf. vii. 28, v. 14. They were forty days absent from home. 
 Cf. c. 51. €To7fia yiyvoiro — * as they severally got things 
 
 ready' Cf. Matth. p. 899. The iterative optative is here referred to the several 
 States, each in its turn. ra Siio /te'fn;- Cf. K. adi. 74. a. ' Tmo-thirds 
 
 of all the population capable of hearing arms.' ii. iz.CTh acpirtpov ixepos. i\. 
 47, ol ^vfifjiaxot tA Svo fi^pri Sitrirep Kal rb irpwroy. ill. 15- CsBS, S. C. i. 82, 
 Grote, vi. 168, explains it as 'two-thirds of a certain assumed rating, for 
 which the city was held liable in the books of the confederacy. So that the 
 Boeotians and others who furnished cavalry were not constrained to send two- 
 thirds of their entire force of hoplites.' 
 
 (i.) 'Apx'Sowos (i. 79, ii'V Iwerij Kal trdippuiv), the second of his name, 
 and eighteenth king of the Proelide branch, succeeded on the deposition of his 
 grandfather Leotychides, Zeuxidamus having died before his father. Cf. 
 Herod, vi. 71 ; Paus. iii. 7. 8. He married Lampito, daughter of Leotychidea 
 by a second marriage. He led the first three expeditions into Attica, in the 
 years B.C. 4,1:, 430, 428, and died about B.C. 427, as in the following year hi» 
 son Agis invaded Attica. Plutarch {Cimon, e. xvi.) mentions the fourth year of 
 his reign as coincident with the earthquake at Sparta. Clinton fixes his ac- 
 cession therefore at B.C. 469. Pans. I.e. briefly mentions the chief transactions 
 of his reign. His presence ,of mind saved Sparta at the time of the earthquake, 
 and his whole life justifies the character that Thucydides gives him for intelli- 
 gence and teiuperaiicc. His d#atb wiu as great a loss to Sparta, as that of 
 
l66 NOTES ON THCrCYDlDES. [Book II. 
 
 Pericles to Athens. He left a daughter, Cynisca, the first woman who ever 
 carried off an Olympic victory. The first ten years of the war are said to have 
 been called from him 'ApxiSiixios viKe/ios (v. Harpocration, s. v. and AiKeKeixhs 
 ■r6\eiios). To6 s iv ■r(\ei = if apxv> P- Cf. ad i. lO. e, 58. a, iii. 
 
 36, vi. 88; Xen. ^»ai. ii.; Herod.ix. 106. oL^ioKoyuTaTovs irape'ivai 
 
 — 'most of consideration so that they should be present,' i. e. those who had the 
 greatest right to he present. K. says Jiry/toAeVaj irapitvai, ' having summoned to 
 he present/ would be without example; he would therefore read napaiviiy. 
 Keislc. suggests trapidy, 
 
 Chaptee XI. — (a.) SiTf ipoi. Cf. K. ad i. 80. a. 
 
 (i.) i-rrjpTai — 'is up at the sound of,' 'up in arms,' as c. 8, /lETt'apos ^v. Cf. 
 Liv. ii. 54, xxi. 20, vpotrexet Trjy yv^fiiiv — ' attendit quo tandem res 
 
 sit evasura.' G. eHvoiav Ix"""'- Cf. &i e. S, ' having a strong 
 
 feeling in our favour, which induces them to hope we shall succeed in our enter- 
 prise, and therefore is anxiously watching the result.' This is surely better tlian 
 the other interpretation, * that we are doing what we purpose, through hatred of 
 the Athenians' Kriiger compares Plat. Sep. 608 A, tZvoi iff6fi€6a ^avTJvai 
 avr^v uis fieKriirrTif. Thuc. iii. 83, v. 40. 4niifoovfi.ei'. So iwtporjtrat 
 
 ojers, i. 70. Tr\-iiSei. So ' multitudo' in Caesar. ' With superiority of 
 
 force.' Cf. ch. 89. a, i. 125. u. Plutarch (Pericles, c. xxxili.) says 60,000 men. 
 The Scholiast on Soph. (Ed. Col. 694, says 100,000. Cf. Tliirl wall, iii. p. 117. 
 a<r<f>(i\eia fiij tiv iXBiiv. Cf. iii. 39, irap^ffx^v &kvov fi)i iKBiiv es to Zuva.. 
 
 (c.) TO Tuv TToKiiiwv — ' Icllorum cvcntus, rcs lelliccB,' P. So c. 80. q. v. Tck 
 TTJs opyTJs = opyf]. Soph. (E. T. 977, to ttjs tvxvs. ^| 6\(yov, Cf. c, 
 
 89. In its usual sense in Thucyd., ' on a sudden,' ' at short notice,' K. 
 yvii/iri = ippoyiifiaTi, i. 81. ' Geist und Muth,' K., but Bl. translates it by 
 'consiliis' (?). See ch. i. 130. b, from which it appears that it refers to tho 
 state of the will or purpose — 'with resolute will, hut cautious action.' 
 
 (d.) ouTw. Connect with oSiivoToi', K. ' Not so weak as their enemies would 
 wish us to believe,' Arnold. Cf. the Latin phrases — ' haud ita magnus,' ' hand 
 ita pridem* 
 
 (e.) ifiiiaffi. Cf. i. 82. Horn. II. xiii. 99, Oav^a t($5' 6<j)6aX^oi(TLV 6pci>fi.ai. 
 iv TqJ irapavrlKa—' all are angry to see themselves with their owneyes, andat 
 the present moment svffering some unusual injury.* Poppo. T. K. A. considers 
 ipSy a loosely appended explanatory infinitive. StjAcj. Grote, 
 
 vi. 169. ' All men exposed to any unusual indignity become incensed, and act 
 more under passion than under calculation, token it is actually brought under 
 their eyes.' Ti)v lauTuv. Supply Spou/iEVrjx. JeU; § 895, c. 
 
 (/•) S6^av — 'glory or shame, as the result may be.' ' Ruhm oder Schande,' K, 
 iir' i.i).(p6Tfpa. Jclf, 635. 3. b„ 'both ways,' i.e. whether the issue be glorious 
 or disastrous. Reisk. explains it, ' whether they come out to fight or not.' 
 Sttj; iv ris j'lyTJTai. Jelf, § 838. 2. K6fr^Lov ^ ei/KOfffiia, euTolio. 
 
 P. Cf. Herod, vii. 104. o(4us Sex"'/'* "oi. Combining tlie 
 
 meaning of each word, ' quick to hear, and prompt to obey your orders.' A tech- 
 nical expression, K. says. vi. 34. d, o^tus vMetrOai. 
 
 Chapteis XII.— (a.) 5ia\i5cros — ' having dissolved.' We have the middle 
 
Chap. 13.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 167 
 
 form below, fireiS)) (nfWe Sia\iJ(rco'9ai — ' when he was about to part from his 
 contiuc^ors * = a</>£ff'Ta(rflai, Schol. ^iri ri Koivdi/ = TareA?^, rets a/ixas — 
 
 'to the authorities,' i.e. 'to a public hearing.' Cf. K. ad i. 90, who explains it 
 by ' die Eegierung.' 
 
 (6.) veviK-nKu'ia. Simply implies tbat Pericles' proposition was carried, 
 not that any contrary vote was proposed. i^effrpaTevfj.eywi', 'now that the 
 XjacedcBmonians had taken the field' irpXy aKovffat. The aoW^^ 
 
 infinitive — 'without a hearing.' The phrase is observable in connexion with 
 Matth. i. 25, cws uS ^tck6. 
 
 (c.) eJrf, TjSe t) Tjfiepa K.r.K. The ort simply introduces the saying of 
 Melesippus, as in Herodotus, passim, Hudson compares Virg. ^n. iv. 169, 
 
 Hie dies primus lethi primusque malorum 
 Causa fuit. 
 
 Aristophanes had this passage also in view in the Fax, 435, according to the 
 Sclioliast, 
 
 '^'EWriffiv &p^a.i iratri iroWwv KayaBuiV. 
 
 Gott. compares Horn. v. 63 ; Xen. Sell. 11. ii. 23 ; Valckenar ad Herod, v, 
 
 97; Sail. Jkj'. wi Se aiJ>(KETo K.r.X. Observe the change of 
 
 subject. Tois litTrias — cf, ad c, 9. b. — 'the whole of their 
 cavalry' 
 
 Chaptee XIII. — («.) ^vWiyoiiivoip is riv ia6ix6v. The preposition 
 is refers to a verb of tnotion, connected with a verb of rest, when previous 
 motion is implied. So in Latin, ' abdo me in Italiam.' So aSpotieiv, ^iDiayeipitv, 
 aKl^eiy, is. See notes, i. 51, b. 65. b. <rTparr\y6s — ' minister of war.' 
 
 Niebuhr compares the re-election of Pericles year after year to that of Lorenzo 
 the Magnificent at Florence year after year to the post of Gonfaloniere, Cf. c, 
 65, SeKBTos ouT(fj, Cf, Hom, JZ, X. 495, 
 
 rhv TpiffKaideKaToy fieKiijSea Bvpibu ain]vpa, 
 
 u^ ToWdKis — 'ne forte,' properly, 'as often happens.' It has this force after 
 fl, i^f'fi'flf'lfa fi'^t TrapaKiiTTi Kal pih BTjaxTr] — ' pass bg without 
 
 injuring.' Justin (iii, 7) says it was actually done. Cf. Tae. Hist. v. 23, 
 ' Sicut Cerialis agros villasque Civilis intactos, notd arte ducum, siuebat.' So 
 Coriolanus. Fabius's lands were spared by Hannibal (Liv, ii. 39, xxii. 
 23). G, tA &yri iAaivfiy. Cf. i. 127. ^i- &pa /lii 
 
 Srjdffaiirtv . . . a^ittTiv — 'in the possible event of their not ravaging.' Upa 
 implies that there existed some ground for such an inference. See also Jelf, 
 § 887. i. Matth. § 529. oiKi'os. Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 
 
 Sict xcpis Exe'", A metaphor from driving, ' io AffiKe weW ire Aa«(i,' Matth. 
 
 §580- . . . 
 
 (J.) Ttt Se ToWa Tou iroKe/iOv yviijxri k.t.X. — ' that superiority m war 
 as a general rule is the result of skill and superabundance of resources' 
 
 (c.) TrpoatSvrav i^aKoaiav raKivTuv k.t.X. — 'since the average {iitl t5 
 TTo\i) yearlyrevenue amounted to,' &c. The original amount levied was 460 talents, 
 B.C. 477, Thuc. i. 96, The money was paid to the Hellenotamiae at Delos, which' 
 
.l68 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 was then the treasnry, raiuetov. The treastire was removetl from Delos to Athen» 
 during the lifetime, and with the concurrence, of Aristides, who had adjusted 
 the original levy (C. Nep. in vit. 3). Waehsmuth supposes this to have been 
 done B.C. 461, 01. 79. 4. Pericles was appointed the superintendent (v. Diod. 
 xii. 38), as at his instigation, or that of the Samians, the treasury was removed ; 
 ' and by a despotic decree, passed apparently at his suggestion, the amount was 
 raised to 600 talents. Towards the close of the reign of Philip it was raised to 
 J 200 talents; and the management of it was entrusted to the orator Lycurgns, 
 who, like Pericles, defrayed out of it the expenses of restoring and improving 
 the public buildings. Grote considers these 600 talents to be equal to about 
 i38,cooZ. (cf. Diod. xii. 40). Svfu t^s SaAtji irpoa6Sou—i.e.<t>6poi, 
 
 tc'Atj, irevTriKoarii, ri^u^^ara, the lierolKiov, or 'tax on resident aliens,' the 
 revenues from the mines at Laureium (for which see Boeckh's dissertation at 
 the end of his Pub. JEcon., Grote v. 71 sq.). Cf. Xen. Anab. vii. 1.27. 
 t4 yap TAeTffTo . . . fiipia iyevero. The buildings erected or restored by 
 Cimon and Pericles might easily have cost this sum. Cimon built the temple 
 of Theseus, the Dionysiac theatre, the stoiE and gymnasium, and embellished 
 the academy, the agora, and other parts of the city, though this Plutarch says 
 he did at his own expense. Pericles completed the fortifications left unfinished 
 by Cimon, rebuilt many temples and buildings which the Persians had de. 
 stroyed, and erected the temple of Eleusis, the Parthenon, and the Propylsea. 
 The last building was one of the noblest in Greece ; it was five years in erecting, 
 and cost 2012 talents = 460,000/. (v. Harpocrat. in voc). The whole was ot 
 Pentelic marble, and the size of the blocks was enormous (v. Paus. i, 22, 4 ; 
 Aristoph. Equit. 1326). It was commenced in the archonship of Euthymenes — 
 the architect was Mnesicles (v. Smith's Oeog. Diet. art. Athense; Miiller'a 
 Anc. Art, § 109. 5; Wordsworth's Greece, p. 136). is UorlSatay. 
 
 From ii. 70. b. we learn that they had then spent 2000 talents on the siege, and from 
 iii. 17, that 3000 hoplites were engaged in the blockade, each of whom received 
 two drachmaa a-day. apyvplov iirttriifiov — ^ argenium signaium' 
 
 Coined money, as opposed to bullion, apyipiov 6.ui)p.ov (vi. 8), aurum infcctumi 
 and aurum factum^ in CKiiti, kvaSi\piaTa oytiA^tara, &c. The first stamper of 
 Grecian coins is said to have been Phcidon the Argive. The oldest Greek 
 coins to which a date can be unhesitatingly assigned, are the silver medals 
 of Alexander the First of Macedon, minted about the year of the battle of 
 Marathon (v. Cardwell, on Coins, Lect. v. p. no; Wordsworth's Greece, 
 p. 187). 
 
 (d.) iepk tTKeitj — * sacred utensils used in public processions and games.' Of 
 these spectacles Pericles was very fond, as one great engine of political power 
 (v. Pint, in vit. xi. : itel /xev riva 64av -KavTjyvpiKijv ^ ea-Tiafriv ^ Trouiri]v elrot fxrj- 
 Xavifiefos iv Sirrci). These sacred vessels (Trop.ire'ia) were kept in the Pom- 
 peium, a building near the Piraic gate, and probably chosen for this purpose 
 as the most suitable place near the road to the Piraeeus. Cf. Paus. Att. i. 2 ; 
 Harpocrat. in v. ■nopi.wiia, Demosthenes, c-. Androt. p. 6 1 5. Pnusanias says some 
 of these processions were annual, others at longer intervals. Leake and Miiller 
 suppose the Panathensea are alluded to ; Forchhammer, the Elensinian festival. 
 ■rhe orator Lycurgus is said to have furnished vases and other ornaments 
 and dresses for the Panathenaic processions, Cf. Paus, Att, i. 29 ; Plut. vit 
 
Chap. 13.] NOTES ON THUCyDIDES. 169 
 
 Lyeurg. CKvXa K-riSiKd. The Scholiast mentions the silver-footed 
 
 throne of Xerxes, and the golden acinaces of Mardonius, which appears to 
 have been worth 3000 darics. (Dem. adv. Timoc. p. 741.) Cf. Herod, viii. 
 90, iEsch. Ters. 466. For the grammatical construction o{ toXiIi'tuv, see Jelf, 
 T'So. b. rion HWuv ifpaiv. The commentators differ as t) 
 
 whether tliese words refer to sacred vessels, or to temples. Arnold main- 
 tains that tliey can onli/ mean the latter. Bloomf. and Poppo extend the sense, 
 and Kriiger clearly shows from Xenophon (Sell. i. 7. 23), Appian (ii. p. 613), 
 and Isocrates (viii. 126), that the sense need not be restricted. 
 i^eipycovTai — ^ if th^y should he absolutely excluded 'from all revenue arising 
 from these things — tribute, offerings, &o. aurijs t^j fleoO. 
 
 This was the famous chryselephantine statue of Athena, executed by the hand 
 of Phidias himself. It was twenty-six cubits, or nearly forty feet, high. Schol. 
 ad Arist. Pac. 588. Pliilochorus recltons the movable drapery at four talents 
 more than Thucydides, and by some the weight is placed even at fifty (Diod. 
 xii. 40, where Wesseling considers Philochorus' statement to be the most pro- 
 bable, the others using round nmnbers). For a full account of the statue, see 
 Miiller's Ancient Art, § 113; Smitli's Oeog. Diet. art. Athense, and Diet, of 
 Siogr. s. V. Phidias, iii. 250; Cramer, v. 2, p. 330, Plin. S. N. xxxvi. § 5. 18, 
 Sillig. The statue was finished and dedicated B.C. 438. 
 (TTaffjuiiy. See Jelf, § 578. 
 
 (e.) xP^^^^^ airetpdov — 'aurum coctum,* 'refined gold* {Theog, 449, 
 Herod, i. 50). Opposed to wliite gold, \ivKhs xpy^^^i i- "• alloyed with silver ; 
 fr. fy^a, coquo ; cf. Butt. Irr, V. p. 1 14. Cramer calculates the value of this gold 
 at more than 150,000^. sterling of our money, ii. p. 297. Poppo considers it equal 
 to ten times the value of silver. Cf. Bockh, F. CEc. i. p. 479 and 23, Grote vi, 
 p. 163, Lachares appropriated the gold (Pans. i. xxv. 5). 
 TfpioipETix may refer either to the statue or the^oW, 'capable of having the 
 gold detached' or ' capable of being detached.' Bl. and T. K. A. prefer the 
 latter, Poppo and Kriig. the former sense. XP^M""''- The 
 
 causal dative. tuv Trap' iiraX^iv — ' the men who manned the ram- 
 
 parts' sing, for plur., ' the line of battlements,' or rather the termination implies 
 the plural, just as we might say the ' coping ' for the line of ' coping-stones.' Cf, 
 ^vKaaiv, ch. 14. a.; Horn. It. xil. 381 ; Blomf. ad jEsch. S. c. Theb. 30, Ag. 
 372 ; Arist. .4eA. 72, jrapi t7]V iTra,\i,\.v iv ipopvT^ KaTcutei/ievos ; Herod, ix. 7; 
 Thuc. iv. 115, vli. 28. 4<tii\a<rirov — 'were on garrison duty.' 
 
 Cf.) fifTo'tKav. Only the richest resident aliens, probably the iVoTeXeis, 
 served as SirX'irai. They mostly served on board ship, (See Poppo, who quotes 
 Bockh's Inscrip. i. p. 306 ) Cf. c. 31. h. 1.; 1. 143 ; iii. 16. Tliese IcroTfKfU 
 ranked after the Trp6^ivoi, needed no vpoardTris, and paid no /leToiKiav. L. and 
 S. Cf. Clinton, J. B". ii. 389. ■ tov 4-a\riptKoO relxovs. 
 
 The Phaleric or Southern wall (as the Peiraic was sometimes called the 
 Northern wall. Plat. Bep. iv. p. 440) formed one of the legs {cniiK'r], Diod. 
 Sic. xiv. ; so WeyaptKb. o-kcAt), Arist. Lysist. 1 1 70), or as the Latin writers call 
 them, the arms (brachia, Liv. xxxi. 26) of the Piraicus. It ran nearly due 
 south to Phalerum, consequently not parallel to the other two. By auroO tov 
 .KiKhou, Thuc. means the circuit . of the walls of the .istu itself. The part 
 guarded was forty-three stadia; the space between the long wall and the 
 
I/O NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Plialei'ic was left undefended. Col. Leake says the outer or Piraiu wall alone 
 needed guarding, that being the only direction by which an enemy could ad- 
 vance. To the S. and E. of Athens there was no passage but by a circuitous 
 and difficult pass between the city and Mount Hymettus. The two long walls 
 ran in a S.W. direction to Piraeeus, parallel to, and at a distance of 550 feet 
 f lOin, each other. The whole subject of these names is exceedingly compli- 
 cated ; perhaps from a misconception of a passage in Harpocration (s. v. Sii 
 fiitrou Telxovi). It seems, after a careful examination of the diiferent passages, 
 that the following statement may reconcile the conflicting opinions. The two 
 original walls were the PiraYc and Phaleric, called respectively rh fiipeiov and 
 rh viriov Tf'ixos. These were commenced during the exile of Cimon, B.C. 457, 
 and completed the following year. Having thus far succeeded in carrying his 
 plans, Pericles, some time between this date and the commencement of the 
 Peloponnesian war, urged the Athenians to build the intervening wall. 
 Socrates we know (Plat. Oorg. p. 455) was present at the assembly when he 
 pressed his scheme. The object was to render the communication between the 
 city and Piraeeus quite secure. This intervening wall was called t4 Sia iiiirov 
 Tuxos, and in reference to this the Piraio wall was called ri i^uBiv. But very 
 frequently in later times the term of v6tii>v reixos originally applied to tho 
 Fhaleric, was given indiscriminately to this intermediate wall from its relative 
 position to the Pirdic. After the erection of this intermediate wall, the Phaleric 
 was suffered to fall into decay, as we hear of the destruction of two long walls 
 by the Lacedsemonians (Xen. Sell. ii. 2), and Conon after the battle of Cnidus 
 probably restored but two. Their foundations may still be traced in many 
 parts. Cf. Cramer, ii. pp. 311, 12. 347; Smith's &eog. Diet. art. Athenae ; 
 Leake's Topogr. p. 351, and Forchhammer's essay, quoted by Smith; Clinton, 
 F. S. ii. 394. ToO 7re/)ieff€ff0ai — * that they would outlast the 
 
 war,' Hobbes. 
 
 Chapter XIV. — (a.) KoroiTKeu^. Cf. ad i. 10, ii. 5; Isocr. Areop. c. 20. 
 Ka6atpoDj/Tes T^j/ ^vKutxiv — ^taking down and carrying into the city {for 
 iffiKOfjii^ovTo refers to this also) the wooden framework and weather-hoarding of 
 their houses' Part of the ravaging an enemy's land consisted iu the destruction 
 of these buildings. Cf. Herod, i. 1 7, who, speaking of Alyattes' invasion of the 
 Milesian territory, says, oiK^juara ret inX ruv aypuv otiTs KaTe$aWff, oUts 
 fve-nifinp-q, oCre $vpas aireVira. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 2. 16, ret airh tuv oIkiuv 
 {v\a, and vii. 4. 1. EfijSoioi'. Cf. i. 23. 114. toj 
 
 ¥-i](Tovs T^y iTTiKiifiivas. Atalanta (which they afterwards fortified as a 
 garrison, 0. xxxii. a), the PetaUa3, ^gina, Macris, &c. avaaraais 
 
 (what precedes), ^cToi/do-Totris, ii. xvi., ' a breaking up of their establishments and 
 removing elsewhere' so vii. 75 ; an unusual sense, copied by Dion Cass, and 
 Appian. B. Its usual application in Herodotus is to the removal of the iuhabi- 
 tiiuts of a conquered city to the country of their victors, and their replacement 
 by settlers sent from their own country, as in the case of iEgina by the Athe- 
 nians, Samaria by Shalmanezcr, &c. Cf. Herod, i. 177, vii. 118, ix. 106, &c. 
 
 Chapter XV —(o.) kTipav ixaWov. For fi erfpois. Cf. K. ad i. 85. b. 
 tiiffTi S' riu7y ii.a\Koi' irepiiii'. KOTci w6\(is. Strabo, ix. 609, enumerates 
 
Chap. 15-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDKS. I71 
 
 twelve. rrpvTayeTa — 'town halls.' The irpura^roi/ was the mark of a 
 
 distinct state or independent civil community. The common altar-fire was 
 here (hence derived by some from irvphs Taii^iai'), and stood in the same relation 
 to the national as the iaria to the domestic home (Liv. xli. 20, 'penetrale 
 nrbis;' Thirlwall's Chreeee, iii. 122). 
 
 {b.) 'EA.euo-fi'ioi. Cf. Platon. Menex. p. 339; Pint. vit. Thes. p. 49. 
 i&a<7lKiviri — 'came to the throne' lit. 'became Icing' Cf. Herod, ii. i. 
 fiera ToC {uietoS. Cf. Poppo. ' WhotopoUtioalsagacity addedgreatpower.' 
 Cf. Dion. Hal, Ant. p. 82, fxtrh, tov SpaiXTiipiov Kal ^vv€t6s. tA 
 
 PouKevT'fipta. The centres of municipal government, town councils, so to speak, 
 though of course the analogy is imperfect. veiio/xevovs 
 
 (v. ad i. 58, ii. 27) — ' continuing to possess and occupy/, and reap the fruits,' roiii 
 Kapvotis iptpeiv. The union effected Tjy Theseus had no relation to residence, 
 but merely incorpor.ition into one poUtical body, Athens being made the 
 supreme seat of government. Cf . Wordsworth's Oreece, p. 99. 
 iuyTehovvTav. Strangely explained by Dr. Arnold as — 'contributing to it.' 
 It surely refers to ' forming one portion of a political union or state by paying 
 joint taxes to it.' So Kruger, 'staatlichen Genossenschaft.' Cf. iv. 76. 
 iuyolxta,. Hudson considers this festival to be equivalent to the nerolKta, 
 celebrated on the loth day of Hecatombaeon. [Or perhaps we may say more 
 correctly that what in Thucydides' time was called iumUta was called in Plu- 
 tarch's days fierolKio.. Pint, in vit, Thes. xxiv. I.J It was originally distinct 
 from, but afterwards Identical with, the Pauathensea. 
 
 (0.) Sri/j.oTe\rj. K. Cf. Bockh, i. 228. STi/ioTeXrj, that for which tha 
 v6kis furnishes the victims; SrjfioTmd, for which the Srifios (or Srjiioi). 
 'OAu/iTTi'ou. The Olympeiuni was one of the most ancient buildings in Athens, 
 and was said to have been founded by Deucalion (Pans. Attic. I. xviii. 8). 
 Peisistratus raised a magnificent structure on the site of the old building, but 
 did not live to finish it. After the expulsion of Hippias it remained untouched 
 for 400 years; the prejudices against the Peisistratidse, as Mure observes, 
 probably operating against its completion. Antiochus Epiphanes contemplated 
 its completion, but it was eventually finished by Hadrian, who was present at 
 its dedication. (Spartian, in mt. Sadr.) It contained a chryselephantine statue 
 of Jupiter. Its site is still indicated by sixteen gigantic Corinthian columns of 
 white marble, to the S.E. of the Acropolis, near the right bauk of the Ilissus. 
 They are the largest columns now standing in Europe. [See the authorities in 
 Cramer, ii. 324, and Smith, Geog. Diet. art. Athense, 289.] Cf. Wordsworth's 
 Greece, p. 159. XliBiov (cf. vi. 54) stood near the Olympeium. Cf. Cramer, 
 ii. p. 326. Vtis. Surnamed KoupoT/xi^os. Hudson, iv liifjuvats. 
 
 Limnae was a district south of the Acropolis. Cramer considers this temple 
 identical with the Leneum (ii. 326). Cf. Harpocrat. in v.; Arist. San. 2i8. 
 The Dionysiae theatre stood close to it (Leake, Topogr. p. 54). Poppo quotes 
 Schneider Be Me Scenicd, p. 44. 'Ai' fl e imjp 1 Sc (. This festival (distinct 
 
 from the Leuiea and rural Dionysia, Bockh and Wacbsmuth) was celebrated on 
 the nth, 12th, and 13th of Anthesterion. The 12th (01 X'^^'d '"^^ t^e principal 
 day (Wachsm. ii. 234 sq. and 286), Cf, Demosth. c. Necer. p. 1371 ; Schneider, 
 n. s. ; Clinton, ii. 332; Donaldson's Gk. Theat. p. 132. 
 
 (d.) Kp'ijvrf , , , 'I,vv€aKpoiv(f. Hudson considers that the epithet ivviaic. 
 
17? NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book IL 
 
 is not to be taken literally, but as equivalent to iroXvKpoiv^ (as Cratinus ap. 
 Tzetz. chil. viii. 184, calls it), as Virgil says of Timavus, which has but seven 
 inouths, 'unde per ora novem' {^n. i. 245). So Schol. ad Avist. JEquit. 533, 
 SuifKiKpovpoi' trT6iia. Harpocrat. s. v. ivviaK. and \ovTpo(p6pos, where see 
 Valesius' note; Paus. i. xiv. i.; Plin. S. N. iv. 7, and Bekker's Charicles, ii. 
 460. This fonntain of Callirrhoe was the only spring water used for drinking 
 by the Athenians, all the rest being too salt and brackish for that purpose. A 
 fountain near this spot still retains the name of Kalliroi, and Col. Leake say.s it 
 is still resorted to as the only spot in the neighbourhood furnishing sweet water 
 ( Topog. p. 47). The natural sources were covered by some kind of building, and 
 fitted with nine pipes, by the Peisistratidfe. Enneacrunos was therefore its 
 architectural name, the spring being called Callirrhoe (Stat. Tkeb. xii. 62q, 
 'Callirrhoe novies errantibus undis*). It flows from a ridge of rocks crossing 
 the bed of the Ilissus, from which it was distinct; seven of these orifices aro 
 still visible, [v. Smith, Geog. Diet. Athense, 292 ; Cramer, ii. 338.] , 
 
 ^Kf7voi — 'the men of that day* it6\is. K. cf. v. 18. 10; Ariatb 
 
 iy*. 24s, 487. 
 
 Chaptee XVI. — oiv. Epanalcpsis, from ch. xiv. rij iirl iro\ir 
 
 must be taken adjectively — 'the long. protracted residence.' oi/i^o-ei— 
 
 * in the then prevailing manner of living^ in their own townships in the country, 
 the Athenians participated.' The unusual construction of a dative after 
 ftfTf7xov instead of a genitive, is variously explained by commentators; but a 
 dative after the uncompounded yueri in the sense of local union or community 
 is common enough (Jelf, § 636. ii. b, and § 642 b.). Poppo produces two 
 instances of a dat. after Koii'a?>'€ri' from Demosthenes, and the Scholiast simply 
 explains it as an antiptosis, which is most natural. Barer would supply the 
 preposition if, ' had a share in.' Abrescb. says it is an independent dative = 
 ' quod attinet ad.' Kriiger supposes an omission. TravoiKJiatif — 'most of 
 
 them having been born or bred in the country, or having settled and lived ihere^ 
 they and all their families' Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 122. ou (laSiays. 
 
 A litotes — 'with great reluctance.' ixiTavaffTaffas. An idea 
 
 exactly conveyed by the French ' demenager.' ayci\7i<p6Tfs — 
 
 ' wieder hergestellt,' K., implying that they had ' re-collected round them all their 
 ancient comforts and villas, farm arid out-buildings, household furniture and 
 decorations, farm stock,' &c. Cf. Isocr. Areop. 20. I'epo, as 
 
 Thirlwall remarks (u. s.), ' though the incorporation of the Attic townships had 
 for ages extinguished their political independence, it had not interrupted their 
 religious traditions, or efi'aeed the peculiar features of their local worship.' Bl. 
 compares Aristoph. Pax, 574. hlairav implies 'changing their home, 
 
 as well as their way of life.' 
 
 Chaptee XVII. — (a.) oik^itcis — 'had dwellings of their own to go to.' 
 The whole number of houses in Athens has been reckoned at about tea thousand, 
 Cf. Xen Hell. ii. 3. 24; Mem. iii. 6. 14; (Econ. viii. 22. Most of these 
 were small and incommodious (see Bekker's Charicles, quoted above), none 
 above one story high, constructed either of a framework of wood (|ii\io<ris) or of 
 uuburnt bricks. Even those of Themistocles, Aristides, and Cimon, were very 
 
ILHAP. 1 8.] NOTES ON THUCrOIDES. 173 
 
 ordinary buildings (Dcmosth. c. Aristocr. -p. 68g; Oiyntt. iii. v- 35. 6). Tlibir 
 hisiguificimce is shown by the small prices tliey fetelied, i. e. ihim tliree oi* 
 live minoQ to 120; fifty minas was n considerable price (Bockh, P. U. p. 66). 
 Tlie influx of a rural population (Acharnae alone furnishing probably a popula. 
 tion of 12,000, not including slaves) into a city already containing 120,000 
 persons according to Clinton, or 192,000 according to Leake, must have been' 
 most distressing. Cf. Clinton, F. ff. ii. 387, Leake, p. 618, and Bockh, p. 30, 
 Avho fixes the population of the city and harbours at 180,000 (Smith, art. 
 Athens, p. 622). rh ip^fia — * places void of building/ 'EXevcrti^iov, 
 
 T lie temple of DemSter and Persephon^, where the lesser Eleusinian mysteries 
 were celebrated (Pans. Ait. xiv.). It probably stood in an island of the 
 Ilissus, d retired spot, where foundations are still discernible (Leake, p. 115; 
 Cramer, ii. 339). rh ne\a(r-f 1x611. A spot originally inhabited 
 
 by the Pelasgians who fortified the Acropolis, and from which they were 
 expelled because they plotted against the Athenians. It was applied not only 
 to a portion of the walls, but a space of ground below. It is placed by Leake 
 and most authorities at the N.W. angle of the Acropolis, the south side being 
 called Cimonium (Smith, Athena, p. 266 ; Cramer, ii. 332, and cf . Schol.* 
 Arist. Av. 833; Herod, v. 64, ii. 51, vi. 137; Pans. i. 28. 3; Thuc. iv. 109; 
 Heysch. v. Tle\a(TytK6vy and Smith, art. Pelasgi). a p y 6 v—* unoccupied* 
 
 Grote, vi. 1731 'untrodden,' Thirlw. iii. p. 123. i^ifK^liOn — 
 
 • was blocked up with buildings' — *impletum fuit habitaturis,* Bav. Cf. Soph," 
 (Ed. C. 27 ; Reissig. 
 
 (6.) yevfadai. Sc. SoKovo'tv. K. KnmrKevdaavro — 'richteien 
 
 sich hduslieh ein' K. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 37, and see Arnold's note. 
 Tajc Tsix^"- ^^' -A-rist. JH^. 793 (Bergk), oIkovvt' h toIs viBdwaiiri koX 
 yvirapiois Koi irvpyi^iois. ^ 
 
 (c.) ex'^pi^'f — 'fasste,' K. Properly applied to the measure of content of 
 a vessel. Herod, i. 51, d fi^y ;^pi;o'€os [Kp-qT^p) . . . x'^p^wi' a.fi(pop4as e^aKotrious. 
 Xen. Anab. i. v. 6. Tjar^pov 5^ — 'at a. time considerably subse- 
 
 (ruent.' KaraffiiJ-dficvoi — ' /laving portioned out among themselves.' 
 
 ^viiiidxovs^—e.g. Thessalians, &c.; v. ii. 22. iii Toirif 
 
 Trapaa-Kevrjs. See Jelf, § 442. 6, .ind Arnold's notes on viii. 5. I, 
 
 Chaptee XVIII. — (a.) OtySriv. When the name of a place is defined as 
 helonfing to such a country governed by a preposition, the country usually has 
 the article, the place not. So i. iii, io-Tpdrevtrav t^s Qea-craKlTjs cttI ^dpiraXoy. 
 K. This was not the demus near Marathon, but a town near Elentherffi, and 
 on one of the roads from Attica into Bceotia. It belonged to the tribe Hippo- 
 tlioontis. (Herod, v. 74; Harpocrat. in v.; Sophocles ap. Strab. viii. p. 375.) 
 Its exact site is not agreed upon by topographers. Sir W. tiell identifies if 
 with Gvpto Castro. Grote (vi. p. 170, n.) supposes ArchiJamus inarched over 
 Geraneia and fell into this road in order to receive the Boeotian contingent. 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 28. Cf. Plat. Protag. § i ; Wesseling ad Diod. Sic.' 
 jy (Jq_ ippovpiif) — ' a garrisoned fort.' Archidamns probably' 
 
 thought it unsafe to have so strong a fortress on his rear or flank. 0. 
 liTtiTi KaraKdPoi. The optative of indefinite frequency. KaTaXan^dveiv is 
 »scd without the accusative in the sense of befalling. 
 
174 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IT. 
 
 (i.) iWas. Either simply ' in other ways' or better still, 'fruitleaslij, to 
 no purpose,' * in a way other than the right.' See Buttmaon, Lexilogus, and L. 
 and S. Lex. on the Homeric use of the word. ^vvayay^ is variously 
 
 explained by the commentators: i. 'In bringing the war about,' Poppo. 
 2. • While the war was a-gathering,' Dale. 3. ' In the congress held to deliterate 
 on the war,' B. The first seems the best interpretation ; it may inclnde the getting 
 together everything necessary or serviceable for the prosecution of the war, 
 such as troops, ships, stores, &c., and the words of Thucydides just below seem 
 to confirm this, ^ireiS^ Tf JweAeyeTo d (TTpaTiJr. iirtfjiovi]. The 
 
 variety of words used to express the inaction and dilatoriness of Archidamus is 
 noticeable — ^ntfxovfi, ffxoA.at(jTijr, i-Trtffx^ffts, jieWtiais, Ka04Spa. See the note in 
 Mr. Shilleto's ' Thucydides or Grote,' p. 20, on this ' restless love of change in 
 the use of words and constructions,' and i. 38. t. 
 
 (c.) Sia rdx^vs. See Jelf, § 627. i. 3. iveTx*" — 'held aloof,' 
 
 'kept juiet.' Cf. vii. 48. u., viii. 94.. b. ; Xen. Sell. I. vi. 14. 
 
 Chaptee XIX. — {a.) vatrav ISeay — 'having tried every conceivable form of 
 attack.' Cf. ad i. 109. toD depovs Kal rov cirov aKfxd^ovros — 
 
 * when the summer was at its height and the corn ripe,' T. K. A., i. e. the end of 
 May according to KrUger ; the end of June, Arnold ; the middle of June, Grote 
 and Niebuhr. Col. Leake says the harvest begins about June 10, and does not 
 end before July 20, or the beginning of August. 
 
 (b.) 'E\eu(r7va. Eleusis, though a place of considerable importance, was 
 classed among the Attic demi (Pans. Att. 38, Schol. ad Soph. (E. C. 1050), and 
 belonged to the tribe Hippothoontis. The hero eponymus had a chapel in 
 its vicinity. It had a citadel of some strength, comprised within the precincts 
 of the temple of D6m6t6r (Liv. xxxi. 25). It is now an inconsiderable village, 
 retaining its name of Lesina. The temple which had been burnt by the Per- 
 sians was rebuilt by Ictinus, the architect of the Parthenon, under the adminis- 
 tration of Pericles. The bust of the colossal statue of the goddess is now in the 
 British Museum, having been brought to England in 1802. Cramer, ii. 360, 
 sq., and the authorities there quoted. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 81. 
 0ptd(rtoy veZior took its name from the demns Thria or Thrio, ii. 21 (v. ad 
 i. 114). Cf. Herod, viii. 7. 65; Athen. vi. 66; Strab. ix. p. 395. It was about 
 three miles N.E. of Eleusis. 'Pelrpvs. These were two salt lakes 
 
 near the shore, on the right bauk of which ran the sacred road, the ancient road 
 from Eleusis to Athens. They were supposed to come from the Euripus of Chalcis, 
 and being sacred to Dfim^t^r and Persephonfe, none but priests were allowed 
 to fish in them (Paus. Att. 38; Gell ap. Cramer, ii. 356). 'The straight road 
 from Thria led directly to Athens, across the ridge of Mount .ilgaleos ; but 
 Archidamus turned off to the westward, leaving that mountain on his right 
 until he came to Kropeia, where he crossed a portion of the line of iEgaleos 
 over to AcharniB. He was here about seven miles from Athens.'— Grote, vi. 175. 
 Alyd\eav, now Scaramanga, a continuation of Corydallus, rises above the coast, 
 stretching northwards into the interior of Attica. From its summit Xerxes 
 watched the battle of Salamis (Herod, viii. 90 ; Demost. c. Timocr. p. 466). 
 Kpunreias. For the old reading KfKpoirlas, cf. Schol. ad Arist. Equit. 80. 
 Axopvis. Acharnae, the chief of the Attic demi, with » population of 
 
Chap. 21.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 175 
 
 12,000, furnished 3000 hoplites to the Athenian army. It was about sixty 
 stadia from Athens, which agrees with the situation of Menida, where extensive 
 ruins are still visible. It gave its name to one of the gates of Athens, the Pylm 
 Acharnicae. It was flourishing as well by its corn, wines and olives (the ivy, 
 too, was said to have been first discovered here. Pans. Att. 32), as by its pecu- 
 liar abundance of charcoal burning from the forests of ilex on the neighbouring 
 hills. The Aeharnians were celebrated for their sturdy valour even in the time 
 of Pindar, 'Axdpmi evdmpes, Find. i^em. ii. 25. Cf. Aristoph. Acharn. pass. 
 and (with Elmsley's note) v. 1 79 sq. : 
 
 'AxapfiKoi^ artTTTol y4poVTiS, Trplfivoi, 
 arepd/jLoyes, Mapa6(t}fo/jt.dxa-h ffip^vid^vtvot, 
 
 Cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 85, sq. Ko9ef<J/ie;'o( is. Cf. ad c. 
 
 xiii. a. 
 
 Ckk-bt-er XX.— {a.) Tv^ixri—' design,' •object: ia$o\^. The 
 
 nsual meaning of this word in Herodotus and Thucyd. is ' mountain pass ' 
 (Herod, vii. 172. $; Xen. Anab. i. i. 21, Hell. v. 4. 48; Thue. iii. 112, 
 iv. 83. 127). In a doubtful passage, viii. 31, it means apparently 'an attack.' 
 Does it mean here ' in this invasion of Attica ' ? If so, it is, Poppo observes, an 
 unusual instance of the dative of time, like the Latin adventu, discessu, &c. 
 Piirnri. Abstract for concrete, as c. 8 and 21. irepiiScTv Tfirierjuat. 
 
 See Jelf, § 687. i, where the notion is not of permitting something already 
 existing, but something which may exist, 
 
 (J.) oir^j'Tijiro;' aiir^. The more usual construction of this verb is with 
 is and iwl, with an accusative, as iv. 77. 89, vii. 1. 22. 35. It occurs again 
 with the dative, iv. 78. c, Kal tStc iropevoiieytp ai/T^ airai/T'fja-ai'Tes, P. 
 iiriT^Seios ivarpaToireScvffat. Cf. Jelf, § 677, 2, obs. I. The object of 
 the infinitive made into the subject of the verb. So Herod, ix. 7, iTrnrfSe^TaTir 
 iariv ifiiiax^ffaixBai "rh &pidinov veZiov. So Eurip. Phcen. 739; Sippol. 369; 
 Herod, vi. 102. 
 
 (0.) ffrdais — 'a division' {of feeling or counsels). Cf. iii. 2. c, iSi'a tvipn 
 ctzT& ffrdtriv, and vii. 50. So Karh ^varaffeis in the following chap. In c. xxii. 
 it has a somewhat different meaning, q. v. Cf. JDsch. P. V. 200. 
 
 Chapteb XXI. — (a.) TI\ei<rTodvaKTa. Cf. ad i. 107 and 114. 
 0piu^f. Cf. ad c. xix. and i. 1 14. /XfUVTiiievot ire. Jelf, 804. 8. 
 
 After the verbs fiefivrifiai, oida, clko^u, et similia, instead of a substantival clause 
 introduced by 8ti or as, there not unfrequently follows an adverbial clause with 
 Sre (Poet. ^,1101, rjylKa). This appears to arise from some ellipse, as tov xpivov, 
 which the very notion of memory implies (Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 8 ; Plat. Menex, 
 p. 79 D; Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1133). So sometimes in Latin, memini quum darem ; 
 vidi quum prodiret ; audivi eum quum diceret. The use of ei after such verbs 
 as Bavud^a, &c., is similar. <TTpaT$. Jelf, § 604. 2. With verba 
 
 of coming and going, that whereby the person comes or is accompanied is in 
 the dative ; generally collective nouns, as arparif, ar6)\.f, vXiiBfi, or their com- 
 plements, as trTpaTidiTais. Cf . Thuc. i. 102, Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 1 7. 
 
176 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 ni^erjiiai ri/p ifaxiipv"' '"• See Jelf, 545. 3- Cf. Thnc. i. 126, imrfrpait,. 
 fievoi t)]V <pv\aK'fjtf, 
 
 (b.) ^vtTTatreis. Lat. circuVi, coDcWiahulAt 'Jbrminff fumuli-uous assemlla(fe9,' 
 See Bloomfield's collection of similar passages by later imitators, and c. Ixxxviii., 
 altT66fjievos '6ti Kara trtpas avToits ^vyiffToifievoi i^o^ovvTo, Grote cf. Eurip. Meracl, 
 416, Androm. 1077. 
 
 (fi.) XP't'^l^o^iyo^- Cf. viii. I. HpyriTO. The reading of the 
 
 best MSS. for SpftijTo. So unusual a word could not have been admitted by 
 mistake, and the use of opy^ in the sense of ' a passionate impulse,' and 
 eiopy(7T[iis, ' without any passionate impulse,' i. 122, are quite Thucydidean, 
 T. K. A. Dr. Arnold says these words are added because different persons 
 ran to listen to different prophecies, each choosing those which encouraged hii 
 own opinions, or accorded with his own feelings, opydw occurs, though rarely, 
 in the active, K. wi/ axpoaadat. We must Supply Tj/cpowcTO 
 
 from aKpoatrOai. The verb being placed in the dependent, and not the principal 
 clause, must be supplied to the principal clause in the number and person re- 
 quired by its subject. Jelf, § 895. 3. ovK ^KaxicTTiy fxoTpay. See 
 ch. xix. sup., note on AcharnsB. avnpiOicrro. So /terewpor, chap. viii. 
 ixaKi^ov. A mixed idea of blame and reproach, B. ' Thei/ angrily reproached 
 him ;' perhaps better, ' reviled him as a coward ;' i. e. Cleon and his fellows 
 (Grote, vi. 177). ene^dyoi. Jelf, § 885, obs. 2. The oratio 
 obliqua used to mark that a statement is made, not as by the writer himself as 
 A fact, but as passing in bis oAvn or another person's mind, * quod exerciium 
 non educeret (e mente Acharnensium).' Soph. Trach. 903, Kpi^aa^ kavr^v %p6a 
 fj) Tij eiV/Sw. .fisch. P. V. 203. 
 
 CSAPTEE XXII. — (a.) ov ret tipiffra. A meiosis for kukus tppovovvras. 
 fKKK-rjffiav Te ovk i-woiei ouSe ^iWoyov, This, as minister of war, 
 Pericles had the power of doing ; cf. c. lix. ^iWoyov TroiiitTas, en 5' etrTpar-fyyti, 
 and Pint. Pericl. xxxiii. This power of convoking the ecclesia was shared with 
 tlic strategi by the prytaneis; and cf. iv. 118, and Schoman de Comitiis, c. iv. p. 
 62. But besides this power of calling a meeting, the strategos had also the' 
 (lower of preventing or postponing those regular meetings which commonly took 
 ]iliice at fixed times, i. e. four times in each prytaneia. ^\>XKoyo% is the generic 
 term, i. e. any publis meeting invested with an authorized character ; ^KKKnirla. is' 
 the specijic assembly. Cf. Grote, vi. pp. 178 and 226. K. quotes Plat. Gorg. 
 p. 456, 4v ^KKXTjci^ ^ iv ^Wcj) Tivl ^v\K6y(p. tou jutJ. See .Jelf, 
 
 § 749- «• 
 
 (i.) ppax^^"'— i^t^'Kpd. Cf. not. ad i. ^^. c,' a slight affair of cavalry.' So 
 St. John vi. 7,Yi/a e/cairTos ahriov jSpox" ti xdQri. <^pvyiois* The 
 
 site of this spot is unknown (Cramer, ii. 415). T. K. A. supposes x<>'fi'a to 
 be understood — ' the dry plains or tracts.' ippiyios = ^tipSs, Hesych. 
 T€\oj. The regular reXos was 2048 men, T. K. Arnold says, sed quisrc. 
 Qe<T(ra\o7s. On the ancient connexion between Athens and Thessaly, see 
 Wordsworth's Greece, p. 99, Thuc. i. 102, 107. Pausanias saw the graves of 
 these ThessalianB, rear Athens, on the side of the Academy (l. xxix. 5, Grote. 
 vi. 179). ivfiKoyro, 'carried off their dead.' This fact shows tbp 
 
 W]uality of the conflict. 
 
Chap. 23.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDE3. I77 
 
 (c'l. Aaptaaioi. The older Attics prefer the single <r in the spelling of 
 this and similar words. napairioi — n upirioi. These two names 
 
 are probably identical, or perhaps one ought to be expunged, the Magnesiau 
 tribe mentioned by Steph. Byz., as quoted by Bl , having no connexion with 
 them, Poppo says. Gott. would read riapaKioi, but these were a Melian race, 
 Strabo (ix. 5. 14) mentions Pyrasus, a seaport of the Thessalian ThebsB. Cf. 
 P., K., and Bl. It is mentioned by Homer, II. ii. 695, and Col. Leake thinks 
 its ruins are now to be seen near Kokkina. (Smith's Diet, of Qeog. art. 
 Pyrasus.) o-rao-ews, ' each from (i. e. delegated ly) his own f articular 
 
 political party.' That the oligarchs should have sent one is, as Kriiger says, 
 surprising, and therefore Thuoydides mentions it. Mivav. Poppo 
 
 says this is not the Menon mentioned by Xcnopbou and Plato. See his nota 
 on Xen. Anah, i. 2. 6, though there is no chronological argument against it. 
 
 Chaptee XXIII. — (a.) &pams. Applied to the movement from their 
 quarters of both land and sea troops, usually of the latter (where an ellipsis of 
 TO iarla used to be supplied) ; as applied to the former, cf. h. 1. c. 98, iii. 96, 
 IV. xi. tSjv i'fifjLuif Ttyas &\\ovs. For the names of the demi in 
 
 this district see Smith, art. Attica, p. 329. nipi/rieos. The 
 
 loftiest mountain range in Attica, branching off in an easterly direction from 
 Citheeron. These two high and in many places inaccessible mountain ranges 
 formed the impassable barrier of Attica. Fames terminates on the sea-coast 
 aboTe the promontory Bhamnus. Its modern name is Xozia. It is from 
 Parnes that Aristophanes evokes his clouds {Nuh. 323). 
 
 BpiK'titrtrov. This mountain chain is identified by Col. Leake, RodWell, and 
 other topographers, with Mount Pentelicus (Pans. i. 32. i), which was perhaps 
 its later name. It is still called Penteli or Mendeli, from the ancient demns 
 Ilei'TeXT) (Steph. Byz. s. v.). Its magnificent marble quarries are well known. 
 The whole range is known by the modern name of Turko Vonni (Gell's Ilin. 
 p. 68). This plain, ravaggd by the Lacedaemonians, is probably the celebrated 
 Diacrian table-land ; and was important, not only from its own fertility, but 
 also as being the route by which the corn from Euboea was imparted into Attica, 
 [v. Smith, Attica, p. 332; Cramer ii. p. 400 sq.] toj kKa-rhv 
 
 yavs, Cf. c. xvii. c. In c. Ixvi. of this book we find the same relative numbers : 
 1000 hoplites to 100 ships, 4fi/j.eivayTes. The invasion lasted 
 
 thirty or forty days ; and the statement of Thucydides that they stayed as long 
 as their provisions lasted, contradicts Diodorus' account that the coasting ex- 
 pedition round Peloponnesus recalled the Lacedaemonians. Diod. xii, 42^ 
 
 Strou 'for S'Uch time as they had.' Cf. Livy, xxjv, 11, 'cum triginta dieruni 
 
 coctis cibariis.' oix jTf P i<r($a\oy. In order to commit the 
 
 greater depredation, Schol. '!lpaw6y. Oropus was a town near 
 
 the se.a-coast in the vale of the Asopus, and in the debatable land which was 
 so long an object of dispute between the Athenians and Boeotians. Though 
 properly in Bceotia, as the Diacrian range of hills was the natural boundary of 
 Attica, Oropus from very early times was in the hands of the Athenians. It 
 was a place of great importance to them,, as keeping open their comnmnicatiou 
 with Euboea, which otherwise could only have, been effected by doubling 'Cape 
 Sunium, Ip ?.c, 41?, the Bceotiaus became masters of it.(Thuc. viii. 60), and 
 
 M 
 
1 78 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 ten years after removed the site of it seven stadia from the sea. Of this latter 
 town the ruins are visible at Oropo; of the ancient seaport at Scala. In 
 mythological times it was celebrated as the spot near which Amphiaraus was 
 swallowed up with his chariot and horses. HnpaixTiv. Grote 
 
 prefers the reading TpaXxiiv (vi. 189), and Poppo admits it into his text. 
 Cramer seoms also inclined to it (ii. 273). See the whole question discussed 
 in the Philol. Mus. i. 193, in connexion with the passage, Thuc. iii. 91. But 
 all the best MSS. have neipoi'K^c without variation; and Steph. Byzant., the 
 chief authority for the change, has clearly misquoted the passage ; the state, 
 too, of the MSS., especially of that part of Steph. Byz., is excessively corrupt. 
 
 Chapteb XXIV. — (o.) </)u\oK<£s. Not 'guards' tfivKaKas (as Arnold 
 renders it), hut ' istablished garrisons on the coastSt and stationed blockading or 
 guardships off the shore.' 'The Athenians made arrangements for placing 
 Attica in a permanent state of defence both by sea and land.' — Grote, vi. 185. 
 X^Aia rd\avTa . . . 4(aipfTa. 'They set apart a thousand talents out of the 
 treasure in the Acropolis as an inviolable reserve, not to be touched except on 
 the single contingency of a hostile naval force about to assail the city, with no 
 other means at hand to defend it.' — Grote, vi. 185. The sentence of capital 
 punishment was repealed, and the money appropriated to meet the imminent 
 peril of the state jn the twentieth year of the war, after the terrible news of 
 the revolt of Chios (cf. viii. 15). It is amusing to see the contradictory con- 
 clusions as to the barbarism of democratical governments drawn by Mitford 
 and Grote fr<jm this statement of Thucydides (v. Grote I. c). 
 
 (5.) liri^Tipltri). Cf. ad i. 87. Anyone might move the question (efirp), 
 but only one of the ten proedroi, i. e. the president for the day, could put the 
 qaestion to the vote, Bl. Kiyttv. Cf. ad i. 143, viii. 15, wkh 
 
 Arnold's note. rTjfrp ^ yawTiK^. So iv. 85. d. 
 
 BivaTov (rifilav. In this connexion Kriiger observes Savaros stands without 
 the article. Jelf, § 580. i. Tpujpapx""*- Sere, ' men to command 
 
 as well as to equip the triremes.' In later times it was not so ; see Smith's 
 J)ict. Antiq. s. v. 
 
 Chaptbb XXV.— (a.) iKe7 {u/i/ndxaiK — e. g. Acarnanians, Zacynthians, 
 and their countrymen from Naupactus. SXXo t€ iKaxavv — 'devastated 
 
 other places in tlie course of their circumnavigation.' Diod. specifies the 
 Argolic Acte (xii. 43; cf. Cramer iii. 34). yicddvtjv rris 
 
 AaKuviKijs. This is added to distinguish it from the Argolic Methone, between 
 Epidaurus and Troezen, which was occupied by the Athenians in the seventh 
 year of the war (iv. 45). (There were besides three other towns of the same 
 name in Macedon, Thessaly, and Eubcca.) It was, strictly speaking, in 
 ilossenia, a little to the south of the harbour of Pylos. (So Xen. Sell. vi. 2, 
 19, spealis of the Sphagian islands as being off the Laconian, i. e. the Messenian, 
 coast.) Fansanias says it took its name from the rock Mothon, which formed 
 the breakwater of its harbour {Messen. xxxv.). The Lacedsemonians cstabUshed 
 a colony of Nauplians in Methone, who had been expelled from their native 
 city by the Argives (Paus. u. s.). There is a modem Greek town called Modou, 
 with a fortress built by the Venetians, near which Sir W. Qell saw vostiges of 
 
Chap. 25.] XOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 79 
 
 a city, with a citadel and some marbles, at a place called Palaio Mothone. 
 (Gell's Itin. p. 54; Cramer, iii. 138; Smith's Diet. Geog. s. v.) 
 a.vQpiiiTwy oiiK ivSvTav — i,e. 'no regular garrison,' V. * No portion of the 
 one-third of the available military force of Sparta left at home for the defence 
 of the country,' T. K. A. In joining in this attack on Methone, the Corcyracans, 
 as Poppo observes, violated the principles of their purely defensive alliance 
 (^irifiaxfa, i. 44). This was probably the result of the embassy to Corcyra 
 alluded to in cap. vii. of this book ; the invasion of Attica by the Spartans 
 justifying a naval irruption of the allies of Athens into Peloponnesus. 
 
 (i.) SpaalSas 6 Te'WiSoi. We are here introduced for the first time to 
 the man most eminent not only among his own countrymen, but among all 
 whose names are mentioned as connected with this war. We may justly bestow on 
 him the praise of having ' had the head to devise, the tongue to persuade, and the 
 hand to execute' (not ant/ mischief, as was said of Cromwell), but every scheme 
 evincing daring enterprise, brilliant execution, and the soundest patriotism. 
 From this time until his untimely death there is no single gallant achievement 
 that was not either planned or conducted by him. He was (a rare qualification 
 with his countrymen) oiiK aSivaros clireij' (iv, 84), fx^rptos, irp^ts (iv. ic8), 
 SpafTr'^ipiQS €ts Ta irtii/To, Kara -Kavra aya96s' irXiiffrov Sfios Aa/ceSai/iopfoir 
 yiv6p.iiios, and these noble qualities were of this essential service to his country- 
 men, that they inspired a ground of confidence among those whom they wished 
 to win over that he was ? fair sample of what might be expected in every 
 Spartan commander : ^\jr/5a iyKareXtirf ffeffaiov is Kal 01 &\\oi toioDto( eiVii/ 
 (81). Such are the scattered expressions in which Thucydides, an liistprian 
 above all others chary of praise, sums up the character of this noble man. The 
 words of Diodorus are simple but expressive — veos p.'^v itv a\K^ 5€ KaX avSpeicf 
 iiaipepay, xii. 43. SiaSpafi:l>v. He forced his way through the Athenian 
 
 line while their attention was fully engaged with the fort in front of them, 
 and threw himself into (da-viitrei is) the town, and saved it (irfpienoliicre). 
 lairiTrTitv seems to be the technical military term; in Latin, ' intromittere ' 
 (Liv. xxiv. 13). [No doubt the primitive notion of TerpapLp.ivav is having ' their 
 faces turned towards' — the natural position of all persons intently occupied on 
 anything, but to translate it so literally, as SI. does, seems childish.] Kruger 
 cf. iii. 102, vepi(TTolri<raii -rh x'fpfoi'. eirpve'fli). B. quotes Westermann, 
 
 Qu<Bst. Bern. ii. 26, (who describes these public honours as ' civitatis gratiarum 
 actio erga civem qui munere aliquo in commodum reipublicae bene functus erat,') 
 and a decree preserved in Plut. Vit. i. Rhet. p. 851, itUx^ai rip Hixif iwaii/icai 
 AvKovpyoy . . . apiTrjs iiifxa xaX iiKaioaivris. In addition to these public honours 
 he was probably made cphor eponymus the next September Cf. Xen. Sell. 
 ii. t. 10. 
 
 (c.) crxi5»'Ter t?s 'HXt/os is *eidv. So above, is Ufedy-nv ttjs AanaviKris, 
 and Thuc. passim. On the omission of the article here, the regular construction, 
 [cf. c. 18. h. 1.] Bl. founds a surely unnecessary theory that *f 10 and f) *eia are dis- 
 tinct places ; the former a peninsula, the latter a city. A look at any good map 
 (e.g. Cramer's) will show tliis to be incorrect. The Athenians, be it observed, 
 were sailing northward, purposing to attack Pheia (as is *uay shows). Prom the 
 position of the town, just at the neck of the peninsula, on whichever side of the 
 peninsula Ichthys thev had landed, Thuc. words would be correct. But they de- 
 
 V S 
 
l8o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [BpoK II. 
 
 barked their troops on the south side, in what is now called the Baj of KntScoIo, 
 which may lie described as a x^pio" aKl/ievoy. When overtaken by the Storm, to 
 avoid being caught in this open roadstead, they sailed round the peninsula to the 
 true port of Pheia, which was on the north side (vii. 31). This is the creek of 
 Pontikocastro, or Pundikocestro, where some vestiges of the Hellenic walls 
 of Pheia are still found. The promontory Pheia of Strabo (viii. 343) lies still 
 farther again to the north, and is identified with the modern headland of 
 Skaphidi. Near this is a mountain torrent which flows into the sea, and is 
 probably the lardanus (on which Homer pliices Pheise, II. vii. 135), and the 
 modern Cardamo. Cf. Xen. Eell. vi. ii. 19, Hom. Od. xv. 297 (Cramer, iii. p 
 87, Leake's Morea, ap. Smith, Oeog. Diet, c, v.). ko (At; j 'H\i5oi. 
 
 ' Hollow Mis' was the name originally given to the plain of the Peneus to dis- 
 tinguish it from the mountainous district of the Acroreia ; but as this was the 
 larger and more fertile part, the name was given to the whole north territory, to- 
 distinguish it from the dependent districts of Pisatis and Triphylia. No doubt 
 the name of Elis, Fd^tt, is connected with the Latin Vallis (Smith, Diet. s. v.). 
 kvinov KaTi6fTos. K. cf. c. 84, rh irvfUfia kst^ci, vi. 18, the regular term for 
 a squall coming sweeping down ; so Luke viii. 23, icoTefljj \aiXa;f' avefiov di 
 T^p Klfiviji/f and Acts xxvii. 14, e^oXe Kar* avTrjs &vefjios TvipuviK^s. 
 Xfiii.ii(6imioi — 'making had weather of it,' as our sailors say. So Acts xxvii. 
 J Sf or<poSpus i^ X^^f^^C^f^^''^'' ^1^^^' irepieir\ eoy. * Strong winds 
 
 on a harbourless coast induced the captains to sail with most of the troops round 
 Cape Ichthys, in order to reach the harbour of Pheia on the northern side of it, 
 while the Messenian hoplites, marching by land across the promontory, attacked 
 Pheia, and carried it by assault.' — Grote, t. 181. These were the Messenians 
 of Naupactus. 
 
 (d.) a.va\afi$dvova't — 'pickup.' t} iroAA^ ^5?^ tTrparid. By 
 
 this time the main body of the Eleians bad come to the reinforcement of the 
 men of Pisatis. 
 
 Chaptee XXVI, — ire pi. For the force of itepl see not. ad i. 14. b. 'To 
 coast round the shores of the Locri Opuntii and Epicnemidii, and keep guard 
 over Euboea, whence they derived their corn, and where they had deposited 
 their cattle.* airo&dffeis — ' deseents.' t^s re iraptiQaKafffflov 
 
 Ka.\ @p6vioi'. The grammatical construction is borne out exactly by the geo- 
 graphical position of Thronium, which lies inland at some distance from the 
 coast, on the banks of the Boagrius (Hom. II. ii. 533), twenty stadia from, 
 Tape Cnemis, which gives its name to the Epicnemidii (Strab. ix, 426). The 
 town was afterwards enslayed by the Phocian general, Onomarchus. Sir W. 
 ftell identifies its site with a ruin near Longachi, where an inscription containing 
 tlie name was also discovered. (Cramer, ii. 114.) 'AXifin) 
 
 lies a few miles to the east of Cnemis, on the coast, in the territory of the 
 Locri Opuntii. Gell discovered its ruins on an insulated hill near the shore. 
 The Locri Ozolse had also a town of the same name. dfiiipous. 
 
 CT. i. 108, iii. loi. 
 
 Chapteb XXVIL— (ct.) ayiffTTia-av. Cf . n. ad c. 14. The word implie* 
 not only the expulsion of the iEgiuetans, but the occupying their island with 
 
•Chas. 28.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. l8l 
 
 eettlers of tlieir own (kKtipovxoi, iii. 50). These men are of course iiroiKoi with 
 reference to the couVitry they leave — i. e. emigrants, and eiroinoi to that in which 
 they settle as immigrants. For the Uoi;ian origin of JSgina, see Strabo, viii. 
 375; Pans. Corinth. 29. We learn from i. 105,' 108, that the Athenians had 
 taken seventy of the iEginetans' ships, forced them to surrender the rest, de- 
 molish their fortifications, and submit to taxation. They now eject the whole 
 population : but not content with this, in the eighth year of the war they made 
 a descent upon Thyrea, burnt down the city in which the Jiginetans had taken 
 Tefuge, sacked the whole place, and carrying the survivors in chains to Athens, 
 put the whole number to death in cold blood, 81^ tV irportpoj' aei irore tx^pat, 
 as Thucydides quaintly adds, iv. 57. Cf. Xen. Hell. ii. i. j. 
 
 (i.) ®vp4av is interesting as the place where the battle took place between 
 the 300 Spartans and 300 Argives, described by Herodotus, i. 82, who, w4 
 may observe, uses the plural form of the word, Oupc'ai. Cf. Ov. Fast. ii. 663. 
 The modem Astro probably represents the- ancient town, i. e. the one com- 
 menced by the .^ginetans, which the arrival of the Athenians suspended. But 
 the whole subject is of great difficulty. (See Smith, Diet. s. v. Cynuria.) This 
 district of Tbyreatis was one of the most fertile plains in Peloponnesus, ex- 
 tending about six miles in length along the coast, but never more than three 
 miles broad; being shut 'in by Mount Parnon. This plain, which belonged to 
 Argolis, is said to have been seized by the Lacedasmonians as early as the reigii 
 of Echestratns, son of Agis, circa B.C. 1000, but they were expelled by the Argives, 
 who refcvined doubtful possession of it till B.C. 547, when the battle before re- 
 ferred to was fought. When the jEginetans were settled there, the two towns 
 of Tliyrea and Anthene were given to them. It was afterwards ceded by treaty 
 to the Argives, V. 41, and Philip confinned them in the possession of it. 
 'Pausanias, vii. 12, says the border quarrels continued even down to his day. 
 th 'A07jvaia>i> Si6.<popov. Objective genitive — ' their quarrel with the Athe- 
 nians' <Tfitrii6i'. Cf. ad i. loi. fieSopla. These compound 
 adjectives, K. says, are of three terminations. Cf. iv. 56, where Thucydides 
 repeats, almost word for word, the statement here. 01 5' ^(Tirdptja-av. 
 These scattered remnants were probably those whom Lysander collected and rein- 
 stated in their ancient home after the battle of jEgos Potamoi (Xen. Sell. ii. 2. 5). 
 
 Chaptek XXVIII. — vov/jL-nvlif KOTO ircX^j'Tjy. The physical new moon 
 not coinciding with the civil one. SoxeT — 'is the received opinion.' 
 
 i ^\ios f|6\i7r6. Modern astronomical calculations refer this eclipse to the 
 3rd of August. Had it happened three months earlier, as Mr. Grote observes, 
 it might have been looked upon as an unfavourable omen, and stopped the in- 
 vasion of Attica (vi. p. 184). Eclipses, together with earthqnakes, famines, 
 Ac, were still reckoned among fortuitous natural phenomena, i. 23, and 
 Herod, i. 74, where, though the historian implies the previous calculatioa of 
 the eclipse by Thales (oSpoi' irpoSefiivos), he uses the curious phrase, tV wep-ni> 
 ^avlpris vvKTa yeveaSai : and the still more curious passage in Xen. Anab. iii. 
 4. 8, where the inhabitants of Larissa take advantage of an eclipse to escape 
 from the invading array (Xen. Sist. v. 3. 10 ; Herod, vii. 37, ix. 10; Quintil. 
 Inst. Or. i. 10. 47, ed. Gesner). aaTepav. Heiss states that these 
 
 were Venus and Mars. 
 
1 82 NOTES ON. THUCYDIDES. [Boos II. 
 
 Chapteh XXIX. — (o.) iivii<l>6Sapov rhv TliBfin, &ySpa 'APSTiplritv. 
 Herodotus (vii. 137) uses these words in exactly the same order, when speaking 
 of Nymphodorus as Laving betrayed Nicolas and Ancristus, sons of Bulls, and 
 Sperthias, to the Athenians. Cf. h. 1. c. 67. (Iliifleii), the louic genitive of niSris, 
 as the Schol. observes.) Abdera was on the south coast of Thrace, some little 
 distance east of the river Nestus. koto "Afiir/pa . . , iroTaiihv NeVrov peovra, 
 Herod, vii. 109 (perhaps in c. ii6 we may explain Si' 'AfiHiptuv ^eav jroro/iij 
 Ne'iTToj, ' flowing through the territory of the Abderites '). Hercules was its 
 mythological, Timesias of Clazomenae its historical, founder (Herod, i. 168). 
 When Harpagus was left by Cyrus to complete the subjugation of Ionia, the 
 Teians, following the example of the Phocseans, left their country and sailed in 
 a body to Abdera. Fifty years after, the Abderites had the expensive honour 
 of feeding the Persian king on bis march to Greece (Herod, vii. 120). Abdera 
 was reduced by Thrasybulus B.C. 408. Though proverbial for the stupidity of 
 its inhabitants, it produced the philosophers Democritns and Anaxarchus and 
 the sophist Protagoras : 
 
 ' cujus pmdentia monstrat 
 
 Summos posse Tiros et magna exempla daturus, 
 
 Vervecum in patria crassoque sub aere nasci.' 
 
 — Juv. X. 50. 
 Cf. Mart. X. 25. 4. 
 
 2iTa\KTis. Son of Teres, succeeded his father as king of Thrace, or more cor^ 
 rectly of the powerful tribe of the Odrysre, probably some years before the break- 
 ing out of the Peloponnesian war, as he had so far increased the already exten- 
 sive kingdom of his father, that it reached from Abdera to the mouths of the 
 Danube, and inland to the sources of the Strymon, thirteen days' journey ac- 
 cording to Diodorus, xii. go (Diod. is probably mistaken as to the date of his 
 accession). As he was on hostile terms with Perdiccas, king of Macedon, 
 (having espoused the cause of his brother Philip,) the Athenians, who were 
 also exasperated against Perdiccas for supporting the Potidasans in their revolt, 
 cultivated the friendship of Sitalces by repeated embassies, and as we see 
 below, conferred the rights of citizenship on his son Sadocus. At the close of 
 this book we have the account of the gigantic but unsuccessful expedition 
 which he undertook against Macedon (ii. 95 — loi). He afterwards fell in 
 a battle against the Triballi, B.C. 424, and was succeeded by his nephew 
 Seuthes, son of Sparadocus, who was a partisan of Perdiccas (iv. loi j cf. not. 
 ad i. 57. 59. 61. 63, Dion. xii. 34). Aristophanes alludes to these embassies in 
 his Achamians, 140 — 150, where the Scholiast says that Sadocus was also 
 known by the names Teres and Sitalces. This enrolment appears to have taken 
 place at the festival of Apaturia; hence the allusion in line 146. 
 ■Kp6iivov. Poppo cf. Wachsmuth, Qr. Ant. i. 1, p. 122 ; Thuc. ii. 85 ; iii. i. 
 70. 92 ; iv. 78 ; v. 76, &c. 
 
 (i.) 'OSpiio-ois. Herod, (iv. 92) mentions the OdrysEe as settled on the banks 
 of the Artiscus, a tributary of the Hebrus. But their territory was afterwards 
 much enlarged. Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian, Paus, iv. 33, 
 and Orpheus was their king. iirX irAfioi/ Tijs SA.Ai)s 0pi^Kr)s— K. 
 
 compares I, ix. c. koX vavriK^ ajaa itrl irXfov ruv &\\a)v io-xucos. Dale 
 translates, ' he founded the great kingdom of the Odrt/see on a larger scale than 
 
Chap. 29.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 183 
 
 the other states of Thrace.' auT6iioiiov. Cf. c. 96 (b.) where lie 
 
 specifies tlie Dii: the koX signifies /or all that, notwithstanding. 
 irpoiri)ic€i ouSec — 'has no connexion with.' So of irpoff^/coi'Tej and 01 irpotrri- 
 Kouffai, c. xxxiv. 6. Trjs aur^s Qp^xris — ' they did not come from the 
 
 same part of Thrace,' K., who compares ■K6\iiis tivos ilvai, Xen. Anab. Til. iii. 1 9 
 (Plat. .4^oZ. xxix. c; Prot. 316). Aoi;A.(«i. The more ancient name 
 
 was Dnulis (Strabo, ix. 423), afterwards changed to Daulia, which is retained to 
 tlie present day. The signification, ' thick forest/ seems to point to some such 
 derivation as 5o-ifM|. Cf. Horn. Ji. ii. 520; Liv. xxxiL 18. There was, we may 
 observe, another Daulia in Illyria, spoken of by Homer as a Fhooian town. Cf. 
 Paus. x. 4, 5. For the occupation of this district by Thracians, see Miiller's 
 Dorians, i. 9 ; Wachsmutb's Ant. Gr. Introduction ; Paus. i. 41 ; Strabo, ix. 
 From using the words ai' yuyaiKti we may infer that Thucydides was aware 
 of the variation of the legends in the story of Itys. Homer, in the well-known 
 passage in the Odyssey [v. i.] makes ASdon wife of Zethus, and daughter of 
 Fandareus. The words Aav\tits S/inis do not occur in any extant Greek 
 author of a date prior to Thucydides (Poppo), though the allusions in later 
 •writers are very common. As Grote observes, i. 265, ' Neither the archaeology 
 of Attica, nor that of its various component fractions, was much dwelt upon 
 by the ancient epic poets of Greece.' Grote quotes the passage referred to 
 above. (Horn. Od. xix. 523 ; ApoUod. iii. 148 ; .ffisch. Supp. 61 ; Soph. Elect. 
 107; Ovid, Metam. vi. 425, sq. ; Hygin. Fab. xlv.) There is prooably an allu- 
 sion to the myth in Hesiod, Op. et Di. 566 (Gaisf.) TravStoAs Spro x^^'^'l"'- I'o 
 these we may add Paus. i. 41 (who speaks of Daulis as t^s virep Xaipuyelas, and 
 adds irii\ai yap r^s vvp KaXoufiefiis 'EWdSos $dpPapoi tb iroAAi ^KTia-av), Soph. 
 Ulect. 148, and with the Schol. Sophocles and Philocles both wrote a ' Tereus.' 
 (:ffisch. Agam. 1152; Arist. Av. 100, 209, 676, with Schol. ; CatuU. Ixv. 14, 
 'Daulias absumpti fata gemens Ityli;' Ov. Heroid. xv. 154, 'Concinit Ismarium 
 Daulias ales Ityn;' Metam. v. 276, 'Daulia Threicio Phocaeaqne milite rura 
 cesserat;' Virg. Ciris, 200, 'Dauliades Puellae;' JBelog. vi. 78; Georg.iv. 15; 
 Albinovan. i. 105, 'Deflet Threicium Daulias ales Ityn;' Senec. Agamem. 671, 
 Thyest. 275.) Sia roaoirov. 'At so short a distance' from his own 
 
 country. P. cf. ii. 89, St' o\lyov; iii. 21, 51, Si' iKitraovos ; 94, 810 iroAAoC; iv. 
 115, Sti irAefffTou; vi. ii., &c. ctt* totp^Kit^ — *with a view to 
 
 mutual assistance ;' as i. 3. liciWov ^ 5io iroWHv riixepwv — 
 
 'rather than amongst the Odrysa, whose country lay at a distance of many days' 
 journey' 
 
 (d.) ixasv . . . iyiviTo. Either ^k must be supplied from the other clause 
 of the sentence, as implied in iyivt-ro, or by the change in the construction the 
 participle is put for the fiuite verb. P. Kpdros = Sutomo'. 'Pri- 
 
 musque potens rex Odrysarum fuit.' P. Ivvt^iXi'iv—' unaexpug-. 
 
 nare ; in expugnando adjuvare.' B. StJSoKov. See above, 2iTaAK7js. 
 
 ireXracTTw;'. The Thracian peltastaj were renowned. Cf. iv. 129, 6 (so ii. 
 79; iv. 28, 32; iii. 123; V. 6, 10) j Arist. Acharn. 160, KaraireATairovToi ■r't]V. 
 Ytom'v'uui '6\i]v; Lys. 563, TriKri]v aiiav &(niep i Tvpfis ; Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 2; 
 JJlmsIey ad Arist. Acharn. I. v. 
 
 (e.) ^vvf^l^aat—' reconciled,' i.e. from the notion of bringing the parties 
 together, &(iiu.y)v. Cf. i. 61. 
 
1 84 NOTES ON THUCVDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Chaptbe XXX. — (a.) iTfpl nf\oTrii'vv<rov. From Pheia the Athenian 
 fleet coasted northwards, the coast of Acarnania bein)» probably included in 
 their mission. Naupactus would be their main station to the north, of coarse. 
 SiiAioi', or 2iiA\i(>i'— as Colonel Leake and Poppo read, on the authority of tlia 
 best MSS. — is placed by Cramer on the Acarnanian coast, N. of Astacus, and a 
 little S. of Palserus, over against Leucas. He identifies it with the modern 
 ■Selavena : Zavedei representing the ancient Pala;rus. It was at Sollium that 
 Demosthenes convened the Acarnanians, prior to his attack on JStolia (iii. 95). 
 And we find the Corinthians claiming it, on the cessation of hostilities (v. 30). 
 TlaKaipevffiv. Strabo mentions this town along with Alyzia (x. p. 459). 
 'Ao-Toifoi', said to have been a colony of Cephallenia, lies on the bay nonr 
 called Dragamasti, one side of which is formed by the promontory Critbote. 
 Its ruins are to be seen near the monastery of St. Elias (Leake, North. Greece, 
 iv. 4; Cramer, ii. 19). koto Kparot — 'by assault.' 
 
 (b.) KeipaWTivta, called by Homer Same, or Samos {Odys. i. 246; II. ii. 
 634), had the T.iphians for its earliest inhabitants. The name of the island 
 first occurs in Herodotus, ix. a8. The fourfold division of the island wa» 
 probably very ancient, since an early legend derived their names from the four 
 Bons of Cephalus, the eponymus of Cephallenia. None of them became of an j 
 importance. Same and Proni are on the G. coast ; Crania and Pale on the W. 
 Cf. Strab. X. 455; Grote, vi. 182. xath 'kuapvaniav — ' gegen. 
 
 iiber,' K. See Jelf, § 629. i. 
 
 Chapteb XXXI. — (o.) irep\ ri ^tiviitapov. Cf. Diod. xii. 43, 4. 'To- 
 wards the close of September.' — Grote. ^i T^v Vieyapiha. 'A decree 
 was proposed in the Athenian ekklesia by Charinus, though perhaps not carried^ 
 to the effect that the strategi every year should swear as a portion of their oath 
 of office, that they would twice invade and ravage the Megarid.' — Grote, vi. 
 184. It appears from iv. 66, that, for several years of the war certainly, this 
 was actually done — itit^ifi^voi v-nh 'Adrivalav Ttf TroAejuotf ael fcora eros ^KaaTov 
 Sir ia&a.WiiVTiav iravffTpaTia 4s f^v x^P^^. (Cf. Duk. in loc. Plut. Vit. Pericl. 
 p. ,^06.) The distress and privations endured by the Megarians, remembered 
 even down to the days of Pausanias (i. 40, 3), were extreme; as not only their 
 I'orn and fruits and even their garden vegetables were destroyed, but by 
 blockading the port of Nisiea the Athenians prevented all importation of pro- 
 visions into the city, which was reduced to a state of famine. See the graphic 
 description in the Acharnians (685 — 781) and Fax, 482. They suffered in a 
 similar manner before the battle of Leuctra from being the allien of Sparta and 
 enemies of Athens (Demosthenes, c. Near., p. 1357). 
 
 (i.) /ityio-TOK ill. [Cf. iii. 17, a., where Thucyd. mentions the largest 
 display of the naval force of the Athenians preparatory to the blockade of 
 Mytilcne.] ' The junction of the two formed the largest Athenian force that 
 iiad ever yet been seen <o^e<Aer.' — Grote, vi. 183. aiirol. For the ex- 
 
 pressive force of the pronoun here cf. Arist. Acham. 507 : 
 
 a\\* iffp.\v avToX vvv yt ■nfpn-jntfffihfot' 
 Tovs yhp pLiToiKovs &x^pa rwv aarStv \eyai, 
 
 Tai<Txi>-ioi. Cf. iii. 17, where we leara that the pay of each hopHtc on 
 
Cba?. 34,] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. iSj' 
 
 service at Potidsea, was two drachmse a-day. In i. 57 we hear that 1000 wcrs 
 Bent (v. oh. 64), a second reinforcement of 1600 under Pliormio. Either 
 therefore their numbers were thinned by the siege, as Poppo thinlcs, or somo 
 had returned, as Kriiger says. Nfaaia ed\oi. In the eighth year 
 
 of the war, B.C. 424. Cf. iv. 69. 
 
 CuAPTEB XXXII. — 'ATtt\ivTr} (not to bo confounded with the Mace- 
 donian Atalanta, ch. 100, or with the small island of the same name off tlia 
 coast of Attica) lies off Locris, in the Opuntian gulf. A great part of these 
 Athenian fortifications was swept away by the inundation of the sea in the 
 sixtli year of the war, which did so much damage in Euboca also. Cf. iii. c. 
 89 ; cf. Diod. xii. 44. 59, who even states that this irruption of the sea made 
 Atalanta, which was before a cliersonesus, an island. It is still called Talando- 
 Nisi. (ppoiptov. ' A permanent garrison was planted, and u fortified 
 
 post erected.' — Grote, vi. 182; cf. vi. 75. ip-ftfjiTj, probably as u. xvii., 
 
 'having only scattered inhabitants.' Some of the cattle of the Athenians were 
 probably transported here. toD jit^. t. iv. XpuTar — ' pritateert.' 
 
 Chaptbb XXXIII.— (3.) KareXBfTy, xardyeiv. The technical phrases 
 for the return and restoration of exiles. Cf. ^sch. Choeph. 3 : 
 
 ^Kw yap €iy yi^v T^i'Se koX KaTepxofiai, 
 
 ixiKoipovs — ' mercenaries* P. 
 
 (6.) e{ iiJLoJ\.oytas — 'from a preconcerted plan agreed upon iy tie parties,' 
 t. €. on pretence of surrender. airpoffSoK'tirois. Here used aciiveltf, 
 
 as 93; iv. 72; vii. 29; passively, in ii. 5. 61; iii. 39. fiiaii-repoy. 
 
 Cf. iv. 31, avax<ipi''''S fifSaiorfpa; V. 73> V hiroxifl"^^ "" $laios ^v. 
 
 - Chapteb XXXIV. — (a.) r$ rarplip v6uip. Grote, vi. 41, quoting 
 Westermann, says that this custom seems to have been introduced shortly after 
 the Persian war. Pericles had pronounced the funeral oration over those who 
 fell in the Samian war. Some portions of his speech seem to have been pre- 
 served to the time of Aristotle {Rhei. i. 7. 3. 10. 3). Who the originator of 
 this practice was is doubtful. Grote thinks that no one in particular was in- 
 tended by rhy irpoaBhTa in the following chapter. Tlie Scholiast siiys Solon wa.s 
 the author of it; Weber, Cimon; Westermann, Aristides ; while other com- 
 mentators fix on rAemisioete. Ta0oj ill oiii a avTO, The indef. plural 
 —'afuneral.' Plato, Mentx. c. I, uses the active form. Cf. Isoerates, c. viii., 
 and below § c; Paus. i. 29; iv. sq. rh, hara. For the whole passage, 
 cf. Horn. JZ. xxiv. 790 sq. poTiSevrai. So 'proponere,' Tac. 
 Jinn. iii. <. ruy aToyivofieyuv — 'of the departed/ Cf. c. 51, 
 TOj o\o(pip(rfis -rav imoyiymtiivay, and 98, airfyiypfTo oxiStv tov crTparoi. 
 Herod, ii. 136, fiTjdfua ruv ftoinov atroyev^fievov Odyj/ai. irpSTptTa, 
 Poppo says that this irpSSfffts took place sometimes the day before. 
 
 tiri* 4 pel ' brings presents (or tokens of respect) ;' not to be understood here of 
 
 •iich oflcrings as the Latins expressed by 'inferite.' P. and Weber. 
 
 (6.) \dpvaKas — 'open coffins,' ' sanitapHtB.' The Scholiast says cypress 
 a>ood was chosen from its property of resisting corruption— Sio rh UtrrtitTov tlvai. 
 
1 86 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, [Book IL 
 
 Cf. Horn. 11. n. 8. j Miiller's ArcTiaology, § 301. ?s tKafros lit 
 
 ^\i\t)s. Inverse attraction of the relative by the transposition of the substan- 
 tive (Jelf, § 824; ii. 2). Tmv i.^a.vStv. Explained by the succeeding 
 words, ' those whose bodies were not found for burying ' (ivalpeirtv, cf. xxii. 6 ; 
 Plat. Menex. xiv.). For these a cenotaph was erected. For the grammatical 
 construction, see Jelf, § 518. b. {vi<EK0epci — 'joins the funeral 
 procession.' B. says this was not allowed at private funerals. 
 
 (c.) a-TJfia — * Grabstdttey * hurying-place' rov KaWitrrov vpo' 
 
 aiTTcfav, the outer Ceramicus, between the astu and the academia. Cf. Fans, 
 ii. s ; Smith's Diet. v. Athena;, p. 302. hd — 'as a general rule,' i. e. 
 
 ever since the first establishment of the custom, with the exception of those 
 who fell at Marathon {4v tiapatavt, where observe the omission of the article), 
 and the case of Tellus, mentioned by Herodotus, i. 30, who was buried at 
 Kleusis; probably in the war against Megara (see Turner's note ad loc). 
 Herodotus says also (ix. 85) that those who fell at Plataea were buried on the 
 spot. ■fiptiftivos iirh rris v6\fas — ' hy the senate.' Plato says, 
 
 MeTiex. c. i., a<l>tH6fii]P irphs rh BovKevr-fipioy, irvOdfievos ffri ij ^ovK^i fieWei alpe'tadou 
 offTis ^pii ^ttI Tois awoOayoufft' Totpas yap olirBa Hti fAfWovtrt iroiiiv, ti dy. 
 
 Gf. Jelf, § 829. 4. /xij a^vveros. Cf. c. xiv. fitra rov ^vverov /col 
 
 BwoTiij, and c. Ixv. afiifirei. Cf. ad i. u. 6g. For the difference be- 
 
 tween allaiTis and a|{u/ia, see Grote, vi. 233. n. ^ir' airoXs — 
 
 'in their praise,' ' zu Eh/ren derseUen,' K. 
 
 (d.) iir6T( ^vfiffalti avTo7s, ' So oft ihnen der Anlass dazu eintrat,' K., 
 * Whenever circumstances occurred to call forth the necessity o£ the custom j 
 as e. g. over those who fell at Sphacteria, Belium, Amphipolis, in Sicily, the 
 Hellespont, and Arginusm,' Weber, TltptKhfis. He had before 
 
 pronounced the oration over those who fell in the Samian war (Grote, vi. 
 41), on which occasion the women present crowned him with garlands, like a 
 victorious athlete. Kaipis iKdiifiavf. Cf. xviii. b., iircirc ir<f\c;«os koto- 
 
 ^(t;3oi; Dion Cass. 393, iirel re 6 Katphs iKiiifiavf, 'when the proper time for so 
 doing came.' c^naros. Here used for the actual «jt>o< in the 
 
 cemetery where they were buried, not, as above, for the whole sepul- 
 cretum. ^jrl Tr\et(rToy toi) 6fii\ov, Cf. adi. l.h, 4vl vKtlffTop 
 
 avdod-jTuy, K. 
 
 Chaptee XXXV. — (o.) The principles already laid down concerning the 
 speeches in Thucydides (cf. i. 22. a), are doubtless applicable to the present 
 one ; but this is probably more exactly reported than most of the others, for it 
 is likely thnt Thuc. heard it delivered, and the matter as well as the character 
 of the speaker would impress it deeply upon his mind. It is one of the most 
 beautiful and remarkable fragments of antiquity, and with its commentaries and 
 its translations forms quite a little literature of itself. The English reader may 
 consult the prolegomena to Poppo's larger work ; Thirlwall, vol. iii. ; Grote, vi. ; 
 Miiller, Mist. Gr. Lit. xxxiv. § 8. Lysias, as is well known, lias also an 
 irrniipioi \iyos among bis extant orations, but it is of an inferior order of merit. 
 That called * Menexeuus,' which passes under the name of Plato, is altogether 
 unworthy of him. The ' Funeral Oration ' of Demosthenes is generally acknow- 
 ledged to be spurious. Tiv -tpoirBivTa. riji v6pLif — 'him who attached. 
 
Chap. 35.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 87 
 
 to the law,' i. e. made the delivery of a speech one of the provisions whieli the 
 law enjoins. Solon is supposed to have originated the law. It is not clear who 
 made this particular addition ; Kriig. and others refer it to the era of the 
 Persian war. The form of expression seems to be borrowed from Herod, ii. 
 'S^j irpocTeeTjcai 5e en rovTCfj Ttf v6fjicp t6v5€. us Ka\\6v — as with 
 
 the idea that it is a right and proper thing ; so editors suppose that hp hiis 
 fallen out after the similar termination, hut such omissions are easily paralleled. 
 Some would destroy the avT6vf but it is obviously necessary for the euphony of 
 the sentence. i/iol 5e &v 4S(Jkei — ' to me personally (the position u 
 
 emphatic) it would have seemed enough.' I prefer taking t(i> thus to hv «7;'oi 
 with Goll., for several reasons, and especially because Thuc. did not write Soitei. 
 rpyp Kal. ' We might,' says Kriig., ' have anticipated koI ^p7i^,butKal belongs 
 to the whole clause.' This would greatly have weakened the rhetorical effect — 
 'As ly deeds they have shown themselves good men and true, hy deeds too should 
 their honours he set forth.' koX lii). 'Supply KoXbv from opKoCv,' 
 
 Kriig., hut in English we should also say ellipticiilly, ■ and not,' &c. The sense 
 of the following words is clear, whatever conclusion we come to as regards the 
 regimen of irio-reufl^i/oi. The Schol. makes it depend upon mviuveiiaiat, i. e. 
 'run a risk of being believed,' implying also the contrary idea, a risk of being 
 disbelieved. Others, connecting it with tS re koI x^^P"" "•■r-^., suppose the 
 whole phrase a sort of epexegesis to KivSvvtieirBai, i. e. ' are put in peril, that it 
 to say, of having the belief attached to them dependent upon the fact of whether a 
 man speak well or ill.' There is a third method, i. e. to repeat KivhvvevetrOai 
 twice in the sentence as Gbll. does. The koI between e5 and x«'P<"' might if 
 necessary be considered the adversative and not the connective one, as in several 
 passages in Thucyd., and with re also in one quoted by Krug. from Dion. Br. 
 an. d. Pomp. i. 7, xp^^^s erep^ XP^^V irapaTcBils KptirTav re /col x^^P"^ eipl* 
 <r/t€Tai. The prep. eV in the sense of perilled upon seems necessary, though 
 Eome MSS. omit it. Cf. with Kriig. Ip riji Kapl KipSuyivcro/jifv ; Eur. Cycl. 654, 
 and if aWoTp[ats ifiuxaTj KipSvpeiffo/ifV, Isoe. iv. 86, and ra ^/lETepu iy ev! apSpl 
 KipSvptierai, Lucian, Jup. Frag. 4. 
 
 (5.) fisTpius — ' observing the due mean.' tv ^ sc. ev t^ nirptus 
 
 (IwiXv, says Poppo. He therefore would render, wherein, or the which, if a man 
 does, he finds it difficult even to establish a conviction that h-e speaks the truth, 
 thus making 5<fKr;<m t^s aAitSfias, ' existimatio,' or 'opinio veritatis,' as iv. 18, 
 55, 87. Yet it is somewhat doubtful whether Thuc. would have used language 
 which makes the difficulty of obtaining credence look like a result of observing 
 moderation in statements. The words h $ may be taken differently — 'It is no 
 easy thing to speak suitably (without any sort of exaggeration), in a matter where 
 even one's character for veracity is established with difficulty,' i.e. t)i\s, preliminary 
 difficulty makes exact propriety of speech more hard to attain. The thought 
 seems to be : ' one can hardly get believed at all ; much more then is it difficult 
 to get a fit and proper estimate of the matter believed.' Am. quotes iii. 43, 
 T^s oil Pi^aiov SoK-iicreais rap KepSap, 'your ill-grounded impression that we are 
 bribed.' Cf. also ii. 84, iii. 45, &c. The word is of frequent use in the tragic 
 poets. trphs & jSoiiAerai — ' when compared with what his wishes are 
 
 (refers to eiipovs) and what he knows to be the case ' (refers to ^w(iSiis). 
 Kal irheopdCecreaihas reference to /ieTptus, ' so far from being moderately ex- 
 
l88 NOTES ON TnUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 'pressed are even exaggerated* 5ia tf>d6yoy — *through an enviout 
 
 feeling' stnnds somewliiit independently, as we mi^ht ourselves place it. 
 inr\p t)iv kavTov (pvatv — * that transcends his own natural powers* 
 
 (c.) T^ bTrtp$i.K\ovTi aliTau. If, with the Schol., we consider aurioi' to 
 refer to ^irafj'mi', we must translate — 'to such of them as are extravagant,' i.e. 
 6f the praises. But it is also quite possible to refer auTuv to the general con- 
 ception implied in S:ii iJKouaev — ' to the surpassing among them' — i.e. the exploits ; 
 or generalizinf; the antecedent notion still more, we may explain, with Popp., 
 & tiv eKoffToi ofTjToi Ixavhs eivai Sfiay, tr. ' that which goes beyond what each man 
 fancies himself able to do.' But that iirepBiWfiv should be intransitive, is no 
 objection to the other methods. Cf. vii. 67, ii. 45, and Isoc. xii. 36, tois lrjrepPi\- 
 Kovat Tuv lepywv i^tffuffai Tots K6yovs. Something of the same tind happens with 
 our verbs ' to pass,' and ' to surpass.' In old English, ' Well that passes.' 
 ^5tj. This word denotes that the mind pauses, and goes no farther. Tr. there- 
 fore, * straightway — at once, because they envy, without further examination, 
 disbelieve.' For the sentiment, cf. Sallust, Catil. c. 3, and Rochefoneault, Max. 
 376, 'Les esprits mediocres condamnent d'ordinaire tout ce qui passe leur 
 port^e.' iioKiiiiuBi], a strong word, the one employed to denote that 
 
 after scrutiny a person has been found fit for a public office, and youths for the 
 rights of manhood (T>em. 814, 20), tr. 'tested and approved.' See Hermann, 
 Pol. Antiq. Greece, § 123, 12. xph « = ' ^f^^ k.t.\. — 'it becomes necessary 
 that I, as well as others, in pursuance of the law, should endeavour to meet, as 
 far as possible, your several wishes and opinions.' The 5ofo meant is that of 
 the ^vveiZ^s aKpomTi^, as the fioiKTjffts is that of the etivovs. 
 
 Chapteb XXXVI. — (a.) 'Ap{o;aai . . . jrparoy — 'Thefirst thing Ishall do 
 koill be to commence from,' &c. This, Kriig. admits, may be the meaning, though 
 he observes that even if taken otherwise there is no p'eonasm, for a commence- 
 ment may embrace several topics. Cf. 11, 53 (a), and trpuToi' &pxf(r6ai, ii. 68, 
 and Monk on Sippolytus, v. 991. koI irpeiroK 8^ d^a — ' and suitable 
 
 withal.' Such is generally the force of !e following Kai. ri/v riji-liv, sc. 
 
 of first and distinguished mention. ael 01 aiirol. See note on i. 2. b. 
 
 StaSaxv ''■'"'' ^t iy^yoixivav. This may be the instrumental dative de- 
 noting the means of transmission, ' by means of a perpetual succession,' or simply 
 the dative after wap4Soirav, ' to an uninterrupted succession.' G511. remarks that 
 the words are intended to explain oi avrol, ' virtually the same, that is to say in 
 the sense of a successive body,' but this seems to me hypercritical ; who would 
 ever have supposed that they were actually the same ? 
 
 (b.) irphs oTs 4S4^avTo — ' in addition to what they had received from their 
 ancestors.' Up to the Persian war only Attica. Krug. ouk airivut. 
 
 The editors doubt whether this is to be connected with KTiiirdiifvoi or rpofr- 
 koteXiitoi'. Probably the author, in such cases, had no very determinate pur- 
 pose himself, and Poppo's remark may be correct : ' Fortasse dat& operi in 
 medio coUooata sunt, ut ad ambo verba 8pectent.' I would only say that Kriig.'« 
 objection to connect it with trpoa: because inappropriate, seems to me unreason* 
 able — * and at the cost of no slight labour have bequeathed it to us as well,' is 
 Burely very intelligible. to irAefw outtJs. This certainly appears a 
 
 contradiction to what precedes. Melhorn, as quoted by Popp., explains that no 
 
Chap. 37.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 1 89 
 
 territorial extension is intended, but tlie gradual consolidation of power by policy, 
 and the increase of internal resources. It may be so; yet Popp.'s conjecture, 
 oi't^v, is worthy of consideration, in wliich case we should take t^ irAeiai adver- 
 bially, as in (toTo yrjy to irXetw ij Kara Si\a(T<Tay, i. ij. 
 
 t" Tj7 KuBevTiiKviif ^Ai.Kia — 'the set time q/' i/fe,' i. e. physically speaking, 
 when tlie muscles are net, and the hutnan frame will henceforth receive no ad- 
 ditional growth, yet has not begun to decay. The use of nti\ia-Ta here is surely 
 inconsistent with tlie notion that it means to the full, exactly, as has been inti- 
 mated before. Cf. i. 13. u. 18. a,, for KaeetrrriKvitf. Cf. witli Popp. 'composite 
 .jctate,' Tao. Ann. vi. 46, and ' constant! £etate, qua3 media dicitur,' Cic. de Seneot. 
 c. 10. aliTapKe<rTiiTnv, used proleptically, &(rTe thai avrapKeaTaTiiy. 
 
 (c.) £i». Either simply 'ASijvoimi', or more probably riiiay TuySt, Kal raf 
 raTtpaiv. Poppo remarks, that not only does the orator avoid the old mythical 
 commonplaces about the Amazons, the Heracleidae, &c., but does not even 
 «peak of the Persians in the usual rhetorical style. TtSKe/x-oy iTriiyra, 
 
 ' an invading war, or * war of invasion,* or more strictly still perhaps, * war, bar- 
 barian or Greek, when it came upon them' I cannot see the desirableness of 
 reading tto\4iuov, as Kriig. suggests with others. Popp. quotes irpoiniiw 
 KiySwos, Lys. p. gg, and ' appropinquans terror,' Livy, xliv. 6. The use of 
 0dp0apas for ^apfiapiKhs is not very remarkable. "EAXijr for "S.WiivtKbT 
 is more so, and is only found in the poets. Cf. Eur. Iph, T. 334. But when 
 such phrases as 'EAAaSa ■^XSKTaav, SniBris oT/ioj (P. V. 2), are. found, we need 
 not suspect anything wrong. /iaxpTiyopely iy eiS6a-tv — 'to 
 
 enlarge upon the subject amongst you, mho are well acquainted with it.' ' It is not 
 exactly tha,t i/iiy is omitted,' T. K. A. If. it is not at all that i/uy is omitted, 
 the idea of iifiiy must be excluded, for as Kriig. remarks, the words are quite a 
 stereotyped formula, ' to enlarge upon topics before persons who Icnow them at 
 Kelt as ourselves.* Cf. i. 68; ii. 43; Iv. 59. Kriig. thinks Pericles could not 
 liave mentioned the matter so briefly, but Thucyd, was compelled to do so 
 because he had already treated of it, i. 73. 
 
 (d.) ^7riTi)5€ii(reais. T. K. A. interprets ^7r;T^Seu<ns, 'the source; the par- 
 ticular €TriT7]S€vfxaTa.* It is not easy to see what he means, but the termination 
 ought to have pointed out to him that the word denotes the actual process which 
 results in iiriT7]Sev/iaTa — 'from what sort of training' Cf, vii. 86. This is 
 also the Platonic use of the word. Cf. Legg. 853 B. ^\Boy iv' 
 
 auTii. This is the reading of the best MSS., to which supply 01 iraTepes nnHy. 
 It must be acknowledged that Bekker's f^xdoixey supported by some MSS. seems 
 more plausible, for surely Pericles meant to include himself and his contempo-- 
 raries. But Popp. retains ?tKBoy upon the . principle in MS. criticism, that ■ 
 tlie easier reading is not altered into the more difficult, but vice versa. Tlis • 
 nira refers to the general notion of irpdyixaTa implied in the foregoing words, ■ 
 and serves itself as an antecedent notion to /le^aAo. ejfii ... eVt ' 
 
 -^' I will proceed to.' Cf. err! rhy &\\oy \6yoy ieyai, i. 37. Let the junior student 
 notice how eVl cum accusativo only indicates primarily up to a certain point, 
 without connoting hostile intention, Cf. i. 30. a. 54. a. 
 
 , Chapteb XXXVII. — {a.) oi (tiKoiarj— 'not emulating.' Pericles here ad- 
 vances the claim of originality, tacitly contrasting tlie Atlieuian polity with tha 
 
190 NOTES ON THL'CYDIDES. ' [Book II. 
 
 Spartan, which had borrowed so much from Crete, and perhaps other Dorian 
 sources. TrapiSeiytia . . . oi/rts. On the principle of variety so fre- 
 
 quently mentioned (cf. i. 38, e.), for irapaSeiyfiaTt oSffri ; the indefinite tis is 
 used as often, when the hearer can readily supply the persons whom the 
 speaker, from motives of discretion, will not mention, is Tr\elofa^ 
 
 o1k(7i>. These words have occasioned a very elaborate controversy. Some 
 early copyists, unaware that oik€i may mean ' it administered,' altered the word 
 in the MSS. (see Bloomf.) into fjitei ; and this alteration, though not accepted 
 by the later editors, has had some infiuence in inducing them to attach the 
 Slime sense to olxt'iv, I cannot but think Arn. is right, who interprets, ' by reason 
 of the government heing administered for the henejitt not of the few, hut of the 
 many.' Popp. objects that is cannot be for ' the benefit of 1 reply that is 
 denotes the object to which a man looks in doing anything, and if in his 
 administration he looks to the many, it may be truly said to be conducted for 
 their benefit. The same meaning will hold good in the passages which he 
 quotes, is oKiyavs fiaWoy tos apx^s iroi^cojuev, viii. 53 ; is oKiyovs KatitTTi^ffap 
 ri Tuv'XiK. v. 81 — 'with a view to the interests of the few' and there is no other 
 objection to Arn.'s interpretation of which I am aware. Popp. himself, with 
 GoU., ed. 2da, makes the meaning nearly equivalent, as I have said, to what 
 would arise from 1\k(i — ' imperium non ad paucos redactum^sse' ' the government 
 devolves not upon the few, but the many.' For the passive sense of oiKil sec 
 Xen. Cyrop, viii. I, 2; Hellen. vii. i, 3; and ^ it6Kis oIki! xaxas. Plat. Sep: 
 4621). SrifioKpaTla. The Scholiast's comment is, eVeiSJ) <()oi/Aor 
 
 SoKei ^ dTj/ioKparta Kal 6p^ roits A^KUvas tre/ivvvofieyovs iirl ttj cipiffTOKparitf. I 
 think any one acquainted with the Greek notions about ' aristocracy ' will be- 
 lieve that the Schol. is right. Pericles meant to excuse the name, and to show 
 that the government really was quite as much an apia-TOKpaTia as that upon 
 which the Spartans prided themselves. Plato, or the author of the Menexenus, 
 plainly says, ^ ySip avrij Tro^ireia koI tovto ^v Kai vvv apitnoKparia, KoAet 5« 6 
 ^fv ouT^p Srj^oKparLaif, d ii &\\o ^ hv x^^PV' Isocrates, in a similar spirit, 
 speaks of 'an aristocratical democracy,' 12, 133, 153; and Krug. cf. Xen. 
 Mem. iv. 6, 12. The words itirh aperfis vport/Marat explain the nature of the 
 aristocratical element, as Pericles considered it ought to exist. ri 
 
 fSia Sia<j)opa. This is explained iu the most general terms by Goll., qua 
 hominibus privatis agenda sunt, and he is probably right. We might tr. 'all 
 causes of dispute arising among private individuals.' rh Ifo-ov, what 
 
 is called laofoiilai' in the Menexenus, and 'juris ajquabilitas ' by Cicero, 
 ' equality in the eyes of the law.' Kara 5e t^v a^iuaiv k.t,\. — 'bui 
 
 with respect to our estimate of men, as each one chances to have a reputation ia 
 any particular, he is preferred to an honourable place in the public service, not 
 because he belongs to a class or caste, bat from merit;' the words aTrh/xepovs refer 
 to the distinctions of birth, such as that assigned to the old Dorian or Heracleid 
 blood at Sparta, to which belonged the 6;uoioi or peers. Arnold denies this, 
 because the fieVomoi at Athens were no more eligible to office than the 
 KtpioMOi at Sparta. But surely the first must be regarded as external to the 
 Athenian polity; whereas the latter belonged to the Lacedsemonian, though in 
 an inferior position. It is to my mind a much greater difficulty to make, as ho 
 dots, iiri fiipovs mean ' distinctions of fortune or party ;' for in what state have 
 
■Chap. 38.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 191 
 
 not members of different parties succeeded to the administration of affairs ? 
 Cf. the English phrase 'class legislation.' On the usage of rh vKeov, see 
 i. 83. 
 
 (i.) ix"" 5' — ' if he nevertheless have it in his power, does he find himself 
 hindered,' &c. The construction changes upon the principle of variety (cf. ch. 
 37. a), and proceeds as if Karh. TT^viav had been trevris fiev &v. h^tiifiaros. 
 
 This means ' the value at which a man is rated ;' hence we may tr. ' has he been, 
 or is he ever, hindered by the obscurity of his ranlc, or social position ?' 
 iXcvBepais Sh K.T.X. ' We not only conduct public affairs in a liberal spirit, 
 but we carry the same spirit into private life, and do not exhibit those absurd 
 jealousies and irksome restrictions which characterize the Dorian states.' I 
 bad always translated, ' and in the matter of that jealousy which is sometimes felt 
 about the daily habits of life between man and man, we regard not our neighbour 
 with anger, if we find himpleasing himself , nor do we fix upon our faces looTcsof 
 ill-humour, which are annoying enough, though they inflict no actual penalty,' 
 Cf. Grote. Somewhat similar is the general view; but I perceive Kriig. 
 understands by axBriS6vas, 'spiteful and vexatious penalties,' such as those 
 ■mentioned by Xen, Sell, iii. 1 , g, iffTadtj ttiv aatrlSa ^x^ ^ ^okc'i Kri\ls elvou rots 
 aTTovSaiots tuv AaKsSaifxovlatv. Plato also suggests something of the kind, ^ 
 TLj/as afi6p(povs tSpas ^ (TTO(reis, ^ TrapaffTatreiy els lepa i-rrl ri Trjs x^P^s iffxvTa 
 {Legg. p. 885). In this case XuTrrjpcis rp ii/ti must mean ' acerbos visu,' and 
 vpoaTiScinevoi axBiiS6vai, ' inflicting penalties.' I prefer, however, the other 
 interpretation, and would with Popp. compare iii. 37, ri Kai' ri/i.4pav oSees /caj 
 aveTriPoiKevrov irphs dW^Xouy. 
 
 (c.) dyEiroxflSi — 'In a manner that is not burdensome,' i, e. vexatious. 
 Sia S4o s — 'through a principle of fear,' i.e. a wholesome moral restraint. This 
 is best illustrated by Sophocles, Ajax, 1053. hKpoiatt ' obedientia, cujus signi- 
 ficationis, alteram exemplum non novimus.' — Popp. But surely the cognate 
 words all bear the meaning of ' listening,' in the sense of ' attending to,' which 
 is all that is required here. avruv '6ffoi — 'and of them especially such 
 
 as.' KcryToi, the regular term, 'ore enao^erf.' lli,ypa<f>oi 
 
 irres. The reader will of course consult Arist. Mhet. i. 10, Koivhv \4yai v6iior 
 '6(ra &ypa^a iropi Tracty ifLoXoyfiaOai SoKf!, See Dem. TrepX Sretji, § 317; 
 Plato, Legg. 841 B; Soph. ^»%. 4505 Cic^jro Milone, § 10, de Invent. iL 
 22 W, ■£. atffx^yv^ ipepovciv — ' bring with their violation confessed 
 
 disgrace.' The words • with their violation ' must be considered as implied in 
 the whole sentence. But as ipepovirii' alaxivtiv is not reverentiam efficere in its 
 ordinary usage, Meyer would here interpret it pudorem, i. e. inf amice timorem, 
 ■which is perhaps as unusual, for aiaxivTl can scarce mean more than a ' sense 
 of shame.' 
 
 Chapteb XXXVIII. — ava.irai\as — somewhat archaic for 4»oirouVfir, re- 
 freshments, or recreations. Cf. e. 75, kot' kvairaiXas, ' in relief parties.' 
 Kriig. adds that the word is also used for 'a place of recreation;' and 
 quotes Plato, Legg. 653 l>. We may add Arist. Ran<e, 113. rp 
 
 yrtifiri. The Schol. explains ry rfivxv ^ Tp lupeVfi. In the first case it is 
 the ordinary dative — 'to the mind;' in the second it is the instrumental dative, 
 'by our wisdom,' ay Si it i fiey ye. This form of expression seems 
 
192 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES; [Book II. 
 
 covertly to refer to the reproaches cast by the severer Dorians npon this part of 
 the social life of Athens — Ag ! even hy those games of which they talk.' 
 iifTTiirioi^ — ' lasting throughout the year.' This may well have been the case, 
 if the Scholiast does not grossly exaggerate, for he says there were sacrifices on 
 every day of the year except one. Another gi'ammarian, however, has ex- 
 .plnined, avTl tov 5i' Itoi/j, otov Koff exaffTov Istos, &ovk. koI 'Apiaroipavfts ; and 
 Popp. says that the word has this force in Dion. Hal. But merely 'anniversary 
 festivals ' were common everywhere, and would not be distinctive of Athens, so 
 that the former interpretation is preferable. If the letter were correoe we 
 should at least have had, as Krug. says, iroAAa?;. vofxiQovTis. See 
 
 rotes on i. 77 ; iii. 82. Am. originally interpreted the word 'making our custom 
 consist in,' iind so connected it with a dative. But this be subsequently, I think 
 with justice, questioned. I do not place any faith in the construction with a 
 dative. The passage i. 77 has been already explained ; here I would make Bvaiais 
 the instrumental dative in combination with i-iropnriiJ.e6a, and after vo/il^oyres I 
 would supply Bvffias SteTtjiriovs, ' we have provided recreation for our spirits, ay, 
 even by games and religious festivals, in the regular observance of them.' Cf. 
 Soph. Elect. 47, fi77eAA.6 S* opKt^ vpoariBels, announce with an oath, adding one. 
 For iii. 82, cf. ad locum. In Herod, iv. 117, <l>avf vontCouirt ^KvStKrj, the 
 XpriaOai which has preceded must be repeated. See also note on iii. 59, 
 ^ilaaadai oiKTcp adxppovL \a06vTas, VQ^iCovTts must be explained as equivalent 
 to as miitio/iev. Cf. (Ed. Col. 1322 ; Homer, II, ii. 774 ; Cat. Carm. xxxix. 
 385, 'Pater Divum tcmplo .in fulgente revisens,' sc. quam revisere solebat. 
 On the matter itself, see Xen. de Sep. Athen. iii. 2, 8. Kara- 
 
 iTicivali. See n'ofeon i. ib, b. Here theAvords splendour of private establish- 
 ments would seem to imply that we should ourselves include under the term. 
 Tl rip^^is. 'Connect tliis with ko0* 7]fi4pav.' — Kriig. But see note supi'a, 
 e. 36. b. Th Avirrtphf refers, I think, to the painful character of 
 
 tlie social life of Sparta ; or it may mean the annoyances which in genenj 
 render life gloomy and disagreeable. iirei<repxfTat — 'are imported.' 
 
 T. K. A. without acknowledgment from Bloomf., who adds ' neut. for pass.' It 
 was hardly worth appropriating, for who does not see that such a version 
 destroys the rhetorical beauty of the passage, which by a verb of active 
 muaning depicts in a lively manner, 'all the commodities of the world coming in 
 up to the very doors of the citizens day by day ' ? Cf. iii. 53, ^TreKTeveyudfiivoi ; 
 Xen. de Sep. ii. 11 ; Isocrat. p. 63 j Plato, Zegg. 949. /inSir 
 
 oiK€ior4pif K.T.K. It is rather interesting to remark how in the ancient 
 authors we find statements put in the converse way to that naturally adopted 
 by ourselves. We should say our enjoyment of foreign productions is not a whit 
 less familiar and intimate than that of our own. Pericles says, our enjoyment 
 of our own is not more familiar than of that which comes from abroad. See 
 infra. Why T. K. A. should explain an enjoyment that is no less familiar, hy 
 no less peculiar, I cannot understand ; peculiarity is, I apprehend, never hinted 
 at. The meaning of olxfioTcpa may be illustrated hy the breakfast-table of ths 
 Englishman, where the products of the extreme east and west (tea and sugar) 
 are as familiar as the products of his own fields (milk and bread). 
 
 Chapibe xxxix.— (a.) twc a-oAe^i/tSv. The editors notice that ri 
 
Chap. 39.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. I93 
 
 woKeiiia is more common in Time. Here I think the former word is required 
 — ' our practice in matters relating to war.' tUv TcoX^jxiav, as has been said, might 
 be supposed to come from 01 iroXefiLot. In wliat follows the tacit reference to 
 tlie Lacedajmonian government is obvious. h /t?) Kpvtfidiv h.v K.r.\. 
 
 The editors here notice what I think holds good in many places where it is over- 
 looked, that the hv exerts a sort of double influence; in strictness it refers to 
 w<l>s\inBilTl, but it is not without a modifying effect upon Kptj(pSeti — ' which, 
 were he to see without concealment, he might derive henejit' This generally 
 holds true of cases where the participle is to be resolved by a conditional 
 clause, as here, fi)] Kpv(p6^v is equivalent to €i /ti; Kpvipddri ; the relative fi is 
 of course dependent upon iSiiv. On the ^evriXaiTia, see i. 144, and with 
 respect to the rh KpvirThv of the LacedEemonian policy, v. 68, and Miiller's 
 Dorians, ii. 124. 
 
 (6.) /j.€r4pxovTai — ^ go after,' 'make the object oj' their pursuit ' Cf. i. 124. 
 a.i/ei/j.ei'as. Cf. i. ch. 6, a. ; Enrip. -4fces<. 198. roiis IffoiraXeTs. 
 
 The general way of taking this is, * none the less on that account go to meet equal 
 dangers,' i.e. equal to any confronted by our adversaries; and this I cannot 
 but think correct. Krug., however, prefers the version of Gottleber, ' dangers 
 of a sort in which we are a match for our enemies.' His argument is, that the 
 former rendering gives no account of the ■Ka\f:7s. But surely this is to attach 
 too much importance to a mere termination. Compounds not unfrequently 
 lose in general usage the distinct notion attached to one of their component 
 parts. The word occurs again, iv. 94, and in Herod, and Plato. Mr. Grote 
 translates 'perils within the measure of our strength,' making the word contain 
 a comparison within itself, for which use of it I know no authority. 
 AaKeSaijiSvioi. To the Athenian mind the ' Lacedeemonians,' naturally 
 enough, represented the whole band of adversaries with whom they were 
 engaged. They impersonated the opposite cause, and therefore the orator speaks 
 of them as a whole, the several parts of which are denoted by Kctfl' ixiixTovi. 
 This is also Arn.'s view, and I think renders unnexiessary the substitution of 
 TViXoTTovviiaioL for AaKe8aifi6vioi, or eavrous for ^kolcttovs, one of which finds 
 favour with most editors. o u t 1 — ' we hy ourselves ;' i. e. unaided by 
 
 auxiliaries from other states, as the Spartans were. ir^pX tuv 
 
 oiK^iaiv a/iuy 0,11 fVous recalls the Homeric aixvi'e(T0anrepl TrdTpi]s. The verb 
 exerts its true middle force — to ward off a person for one's own interest, and so 
 becomes nearly equivalent in construction to /iiJx^"'*""- 
 
 (c.) 6jr! -n-oXXd — ' to many objects' (or enterprises). Kairoi. The 
 
 speaker sums up all the particulars before given at length, and draws his con- 
 clusion. ^a6u/uiif corresponds exactly to our phrase 'taking it easily,' 
 though such a rendering would not suit the dignity of the orator's style ; tr. 
 ' without painful efforts ;' it refers to av^iixivais SiairdS/tei'oi. v6fi.av is to 
 be connected with oc Speiaj; 'bravery which is the result of institutions,' i. e. 
 such as the Spartans laboriously produced by their educational training, and 
 the laws concerning military service. eBiXoixev. The best MSS. read 
 ieixoijiiv, which would state the same thing hypothetically, and more modestly. 
 But I apprehend the orator means to speak with the utmost positiveness and 
 confidence, assuming as a fact, that they were ready to encounter danger. Bl. 
 well suggests that i0eXoif.i.ev arose from the ignorance of some copyists (which 
 
194 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 opinion GoII. seems to share), who took jiifBviilif in a had sense, and therefore wonld 
 not believe that Pericles asserted it directly of himself and bis countrymen. 
 vepiylyvfTat. See i. 144, andtr. ' there results over and above,' — 'there is thit 
 balance in our favour.' irpoKd/jLVfiv — 'distress ourselves before the time 
 
 at coming annoyances' The dative is connected with the verb in a sort of in- 
 strumental construction. See iEseh. Sum. 74, koX fiAi irpSxauve, and compare 
 Agamemnon, 24^. iil inox^ovfTes. The Lacedaemonians, whose 
 
 city has been compared to a camp, might well have been described as ad 
 
 flOxOoVVTiS, 
 
 Chapter XL. — (a.) itXoKaKov/iep ykp K.r.\. Mr. Grote has, I think, 
 well given the general sense of these words — ■ we combine elegance of taste with 
 simplicity of life, and we pursue knowledge without being enervated' The 
 €WTc\6io here spoken of must have had reference to private life, for, as Kriig. 
 remarks, their public life and public monuments exhibited much lavish magni- 
 ficence. But how does this correspond with the i^iais KaraaKevais euTrpeiretni', 
 ch. 38 ? I apprehend the orator refers to their actual household expenses, 
 which were on a simple scale (cf. c. xvii. a.), not comparable to the luxury of 
 Asia, or Corinth. See what is said about Pansanias, and contrast it with the 
 words of Demosth. quoted by Arnold : iSla Si oSto) aii(j)poves ^aav . , . fio-re 
 r^v 'ApicTTeiSov, Kal r^v MiXriiiSoy, Kol tuv Kafiirpuv oiKlay et Tis &pa otSey vfiwv 
 dnoia TTOT* iffrlv, dp^ ttjs tou yeirovos ovBey (repLVorepav oiitrav (^Olynth. iii. p. 35)- 
 See, however, Mtill. Hist. Gr. Lit, p. 285. ipiKoao<f>aviJLeii must be 
 
 understood to comprise all sorts of intellectual pursuits. That these are 
 accompanied by efl'eminacy is a notion common to all rude and military 
 societies like that of Sparta. Ipyov Katpf. These words are the 
 
 predicate of TrAovTif, and iv, which is found in some MSS., is plainly an inter- 
 polation. ' Our wealth we use as an opportune means ' (or aid to action) ; then 
 follows the invariable antithesis, ' and not as a subject for ostentatious talking.' 
 The form of expression is not more harsh than is often found in Thuc. j cf. «oi 
 \6yov KoX tpyov Kaip^, ch. 43. b. The next sentence commences with t^ 
 irivorBai, because that is the main and prominent thought, antithetical to 
 trKointft. /x^ Siaipevyeiv — 'not to do our best to avoid it;' for note that 
 
 ^7) is used, not ou. Does the preposition denote a continuous and persevering 
 struggle to avoid poverty ? Cf. 60. a. evt rots auTois K.T.A. 
 
 ' Those of us who discharge public offices do not neglect domestic duties, and 
 even that portion of our citizens whose business does not permit them to engage 
 iu the administration of the state are not without a fair knowledge of politics.' 
 This seems to bo the meaning of the whole. Cf. Arn.'s somewhat diffuse para- 
 phrase. Popp. describes the latter class as 'fl^T€i et his similes.' They were 
 generally employed as hired labourers, and were excluded from all political 
 offices. But it is not clear that Pericles did not mean to distinguish between 
 those engaged in the administration, and the general body of the citizens; so 
 at least I infer from riv /UTjSei- Taii'86 ;ueTej(ocTa. irphs ipya. The 
 
 word means business or employment. Cf. (Edip. Tyran. 11 24, tpyov fiepi/ivuv 
 iroiov, ti IIlov Tlva ; hence its well-known philosophical usage in the Nicom. 
 FAhics of Arist. The Spartans proper were not permitted to engage in any 
 uiechaniciil labour, merchandise, or iigriculture. 
 
Chap. 40.] NOTES ON THUCVDIDES. I95 
 
 (5.) ovK air piy nova. Refemng, says Krug., to the stock charge of 
 woKunpayfioaivri brought agaiust the Athenians. Grote tr. ' not as harmless but 
 as useless.' Perhaps it approaches more nearly to the spirit of the words to say 
 ' not as a man who only minds his own business, hut as one good for no business ' 
 (or nothing at all). In the same spirit was conceived the famous ordinance of 
 Solon. a II to/. Some copyists, from want of understanding this, 
 
 introduced 01 ahrol. The speaker gracefully identifies himself with the mass 
 of his fellow-citizens. Kriig. narrows the meaning too much when he refers 
 merely to the orators who iax^jxiJiivoi ^itov, Dem. i. i. xpiyoiiiv ye. 
 
 The particle yt being apparently derived from the root of ylyo/iai, the verb de- 
 noting existence, is naturally emphatic, and by connexion with any word or 
 clause, attracts attention to the existence of that which it expresses. Here, 
 therefore, it insists emphatically upon the truth of Kpivo/i.ii', whatever be thought 
 of ivdvnoi^eQaj ' can judge of at any rate (or cntioize), if we cannot form the 
 original conception.' Cf. for this usage of 7e, Arist. JBth. Nic. i. 8, eV ye ti, fi 
 TAeiffTa KaTopduZi^. I do not think there is any doubt about ivQuixov^eda, and 
 would compare 6 ykp yvobs Kal ix^ (Ta(pu>s SiSti^as eV tfft^ koI ei firj ^yeOvfi-fjdri. 
 Cf. also viii. 68. We should say, * if we cannot originate, we judge of,' but with 
 respect to the inverse way in which the statement is made, see supra, ch. 39. a. 
 Toiis \6yovs. A defence against the often-repeated accusation that the 
 Athenians were <pi\6\oyoi. [See on the accent L. and S. iex.] ' Not thinking 
 discussion any damage to action, but rather that the damage consists in not 
 having been previously enlightened by discussion, before proceeding to follow out 
 in action those matters to which we must of necessity address ourselves.' 
 
 (c.) roKtJLav. Cf. the use of the word, i. 70, Kriig. ixXoyiQeaBat 
 
 may be simply to ' ej7-cogitate,' or, as usual, * to compute in full? 0. This 
 
 was formerly explained by whereas, and the accusative of the relative accounted 
 for by understanding the prep. Kard, a theory which received some support 
 from the Latin quod. Cf. Livy, xxx. 61, 'quod si possim;' Ter. Fhor. i. g^. 
 But now the editors incline to the principle of anacolouthon for explanation. 
 The whole clause I should suppose would have been arranged koI T(j5e rots 
 6.K\ois (afiadlas Bpdaos (pfpov(r7}s) ^kvov (pepei. But Kal r6Se becomes 0, and the 
 writer lets it stand, as preparatory to KoyiafjLSs, which he introduces to make 
 the antithesis more plain and 'piquant,' This is the opinion of Kriig. and 
 Poppo, and I suppose Arn. meant the same thing, for he says • the verb which 
 should have followed o is omitted, and another construction substituted in its 
 place, which is irreconcilable with the former construction.' To understand 
 ToiiyafTiov yiyverai after h seems to me singularly futile, for if that, why not 
 anything anywhere ? I am not sure whether after all I should not tr. ' in respect 
 of which matter (i. e. the effect of previous deliberation upon courage), with the 
 rest of men, it is ignorance that produces boldness, ivhile reflection brings along 
 with it hesitation;' % then would stand like -rh TriyeaOai supra, and many other 
 accusatives at the commencement of a sentence, to receive further elucidation 
 in its course. oi . . . ytyvdiaKoi/Tes Kal fj.^ airorpenSfiepoL. The 
 
 Slime persons; though ra is used in the same sentence of two different (incom- 
 patible) things. See Granville Sharp's canon, note i. 18. a. Tr. ' turn not aside 
 from (lit. out of) the danger.' itSia are 'the sweets of peace,' asSeicoi 
 
 lire ' the terrors of war,' and aZea is quite a needless conjecture. 
 
 O 2 
 
196 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 (d.) apsT'fiV. The popular explanation of i-perii, as given by Arist. Mhet. i. 
 9. 2, forms the best explanation of this : 'Aperi) Se eVri /liv Sivaiiis, ws So/cei, 
 tropiarTLK^ ayaBuv Kttl ifuAoKTi/ti), Kal Sviia/iiS eiepyeriKii TroWdv KaX fieyiKav koJ 
 vdvTui/ TTfpl Trivra. So ' goodness ' and ' bonte ' have a special meaning wherein 
 they are nearly equivalent to kindness and liberality. Cf. German giitig. We 
 find of course a more scientific definition of aper'ti, Nic. Eth. ii. See the same 
 usage ii. 51. c, where the Schol. explains aper^j, ipiXavBpawias. 
 ilvavTitip.eBa. This, says T. K. A., = we are opposed to ; but does not this lose 
 sight of the fact that a process is denoted by the termination of the verb ? tr. 
 ' we have been made fa entertain very opposite views,' sc. by education, and the 
 principles of conduct generally accepted among us. The editors need not have 
 remarked on the perfect, for it is the proper tense. $iPai6Tepos 5J 
 
 K.T.A. — '2fow the doer of the favour (note the indefinite participle) is the 
 more (ibiding friend, for the sake of heeping it stillowing, in theshape of a debt, 
 by continued kindness to the recipient,' and so nearly Pop. and Kriig. eSvotd rtvos 
 is most properly, as this version represents it, * benevolentia in aliquem i and 
 this meaning is also most suited to the argument, for the orator wants to convey 
 the impression that fivoia most truly and permanently attaches to his country- 
 men, and this be proves by showing that it is to them a necessary means of re- 
 taining the benefit to be derived from their own liberality. The whole is well 
 illustrated and explained by Arist. JTic. ^th. viii. 7 : 01 Se eoepyeVai roiis 
 €vspyerTj94i/Tas SoKovfft /xaKhov tpi\itv ^ 01 eS Tra66vTiS tovs Spd<ravTas ; then 
 comparing the parties to debtors and creditors, he adds, ourta koI tovs evepyer-ij' 
 ffafTas ^ovKeadat e7cot rohs 'ira66vras, a/s Kopnopievovs riy xdpLras, Tots Be oiiK 
 iivat i-7niJ.i\es rh avTanoiovi/ai. See Tacitus, Agric. xlii. Peile prefers, * in 
 order to keep it owing to him in the shape of good will on the part of him to whom 
 he hath given ' — considering that S»' fimias explains o(pftKoii.4iir\v. But both for 
 the sense and the Greek I prefer the former. G611. seems to understand, ' to 
 keep alive the obligation arising from his good will in the mind of him whom 
 he has obliged,' which would, I fancy, as Peile has suggested, require 5/ 
 eijvoiav, or rather Bii tV s^yoiav. Engelman's ed. also, I observe, agrees with 
 the version which I have given, ' urn durch Wohlwollen gegen den welchem er 
 sie verliehen hat, sich den schuldigen Dank zu siehern' The French version 
 has the usual vagueness, ' il la garde d son oblige comme une dette de bien- 
 veillance.' o/i;8A.iiTepo s — ' duller in his feeling.' 4 s x " P ' " — 
 
 ' by way of a free gift.' ojroSiocriDi' is only applicable on the principle of 
 zeugma, for it contains the notion of paying a debt. Cf. Sheppard's Theoph. 
 p. 176. Tris iXfvBepias Tif TTicrrf. yferaighitr.' in all the con- 
 
 fidence of liberality {i.e. with that confidence which a truly liberal man feels);' 
 but most edd. prefer to tr. 'in the confident spirit of freedom ' (i. e. the confidence 
 which freedom bestows upon those who possess it), thus introducing a political 
 allusion. Cf. i. 68. a. hSims is, 'without fear of the consequences,' and 
 
 will suit either interpretation, for we may suppose it to mean, without that 
 fear of future ingratitude and forgetfulness which characterize the recipients 
 of favours, and so deter many from being liberal ; or again, it may refer to 
 political injury resulting from measures undertaken on behalf of others. The 
 proposed alteration into iSe'iuj (mentioned by T. K. A.) seems to me singularly 
 unnecessary. 
 
Chap. 41.] NOTES ON TI-IUCYDIDES. 197 
 
 Chaptee XLI. — (a.) aweK^v. Lit. ^taking all toget'her;'* lience, * summing 
 «P in a word.' So it is used i. 70, ad fin. TralSeva-tv. Grote con- 
 
 siders that the abstract word for iraiSevrptav softens the affirmation. It is 
 doubtful whether there was any such intention. We should say ' the school 
 of Greece,' and so Zevort, 'I'eeole de la Grece.' icaB' exaffTov k.t.A. 
 
 The masculine gender, * as respects our citizens regarded as individuals,' Re- 
 mark how the writer varies his style, fura xo-plTUVf evrpaTrdKus and aUrapKes, 
 where another would have used three adverbs. The position of &i>, which 
 properly belongs to Trapexfirfloi, is not without its influence upon SokcTp. 
 Trap' rinav — ' going forth from among ns.' See note on the use of irapd, 
 i. 29. c. Kriig. certainly explains, ' owing to our training and education,' but 
 he does not say, as T. K. A. makes him, that there is a causal reference involved. 
 The use of irapct ' cum genitivo ' denotes * motion from alongside of an object,' 
 and though more may be employed, a causal notion is not necessary to the sense. 
 ^7rlirA.erirToelf5i7. The expression is rather general. eZSor, says Popp., is often 
 connected with Tp6irovj and therefore he is probably right in explaining agendi 
 ratio. Kol unites inl TrA.eio'T' elfSrj to fidKiCTa euTpaneKus, though in translating 
 it is as well, for our idiom, omitted. * The same man going forth from among 
 us CQuldy without requiring aid from otherSy address himself to the most varied 
 vicissitudes of action, with the most graceful versatility.' The use of aufia may 
 indicate that only hodily accomplishments are intended; and Kriig. seems to 
 assert as much — * au^a kann hier nicht fiiglich Person sondern nur Korper 
 heissen.' Cf. ii. 51. 2- The idea seems to be that the Athenian is 'in se totus, 
 teres, atque rotundus,' and unless intellectual versatility be elsewhere implied, 
 it would hardly be omitted here. euTpaireAios, like our simple, 
 
 and other words in perhaps all languages, passes from a good into an evil accep- 
 tation. Thus, though originally, as here and in Aristotle, it denotes a sportive 
 demeanour, it came to signify ' scurrilous.' 
 
 (6.) aKorts Kpflffcwf — 'superior to repute/ i. v. its reputation. I cannot 
 agree with Kriig. in this instance, who tr. ' superior to any of which tradition 
 tells,' a meaning which, he says, the absence of the article plainly indicates. 
 But does not a/co^, ' fame,' ' parlance,' belong to that clasj of words which, 
 under special circumstances, are used without an article ? See note i. 8. a. 
 And as -niipav is anarthrous, it is not surprising that oico5; should be so also. 
 Cf. vii. 21. kya.VQ.KTt) a IV ex^* — 'contains in itself cause of indignation i' 
 the accusative has an objective signification. Cf. t^v iTraii/vfiiav o-x"", i- 9. a. 
 Popp. also adduces KaTainjjL^iv exeiv; and ii. 61, ataB-qatv ; ii. 87, iv. 126; and 
 a similar objective usage of habeo, ' Nam causam justi semper amoris habent,' 
 TibuUus, i. 4, 10. i/ij>' olav — 'with respect to the sort of persons by 
 
 whom.' 'Cf.with Krug. vii. 75. Kari^^eM'l'"'- T. K. A. explains 
 
 ' a sense of degradation,' but this is not Greek. We must tr. 'occasion for depre-' 
 elation,' i. e. not of themselves, but of us j and hence, ' matter for self-reproach.' 
 They are forced to acknowledge us a great nation, and such as it is no disgrace 
 to be governed by. a-nfi-iiav—' accompanied ly palpable proofs,' i.e. the 
 
 facts of history and the visible monuments of power; then we might have 
 anticipated o'xjk tviv liapripav, but the principle of variety (i. 38. e.) comes in, 
 and the construction changes. See several instances in this chapter, and espe- 
 cially tUv Si ipywv, where Se unites a direct to a relative statement. The com. 
 
198 NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 bination of 8^ toi is as strong as possible, as they are the two chief particles 
 for denoting; affirmation, -ye exerts its proper force, as explained supra. The 
 general notion is that they have inscribed their glory too palpably upon Greece 
 and her history to fear oblivion by posterity. (to! ovSiv. This Kal couples 
 
 trpoaSediiemt to irapa<rx6iievoi. The plur. ^Treiri denotes poetry. Cf. i^avaohs 
 4v To7s ewcfft, i. 3. eiros is 'word* in prose only in particular combinations, 
 Kriig. rh avrlKa — ^yor the immediate momeni.* Cf. iv. 107, vi. 57. 
 
 'Offfipov iiraiveTov — sine articulo — *a Somer for a panegyrist (or, fo sing 
 their praises)' rwv Se epytav — ' whereas the truth will damage the con- 
 
 ception formed of the facts' The exaggerated estimate of a thing, when cor- 
 rected by the test of experience, is apt to depreciate its value in our notions. 
 All attempts to make out from the rhetorical usage of im6iioia, that it is in this 
 place employed for a ' magnificent conception,' I regard as founded upon a 
 wrong view of the requirements of the argument. Kaxuv t€ k o-yafltSv 
 
 — 'for good or for ill.' I do not see why Pericles might not have thus spoken, 
 even if he had not meant to confine the Kaxh. to evils wrought upon their enemies, 
 as most editors explain. Cf. ii. 45. b. Kriig. considers the expression so * naive * 
 that he conjectures the usual formula Ka\icv t€ Kayadwv. ^vyKaroiKU 
 
 travres. The metaphor seems to he taken from colonization, or perhaps the 
 consolidation of a state. Grote therefore well renders ' Aa^iK^ planted im- 
 perishable monuments.' StKatovvTes flij atpaipi6T}vai avT-fjp — 
 ' asserting their right not to be robbed of it.' It certainly is an illustration of 
 the principle, <j>t\e7 atras rh eavTov tpyov, that Mr. Grote, after having been told 
 the right one, should retain his own strange translation of these words, * vindi- 
 cating her just title to unimpaired rights.' He naively remarks that neither 
 Popp., Goll., nor Arnold notice the difficulty. They do not do so, because 
 there can be none to any one who remembers that the verbs which take a 
 double accusative in the sing, have this construction in the passive. Cf. infra, 
 44. b. At iTTo/neVwi'. Note the present part. — 'whom they are 
 leaving behind them' 
 
 Chaptee XLII. — (o.) iripX Xaov — 'for an equal stake.' Kriig. cf. Dem. 
 viii. 60, oi/x iitrip ruv Xawv viitv re Koi tois i.\\ois ^(rff & kIv^vvos. 
 /iTiSfv inapxc We have /iriSiv rather than ouSeV, because the clause is de- 
 pendent upon fiii fhai. iip' oTs. Understand the antecedent toutoii/. The 
 preposition ^irl indicates the local position of tho speaker ; hence, 4ir-aivos be- 
 cause spoken over the bodies of the dead, eulogy. Cf. 24. u. vtivntra. 
 Though originally employed for poetic praises, the word naturally passes into a 
 
 rhetorical usage, as Bl. has shown by examples, iaippoiros lit. 
 
 ' equal in the scales ;' hence, ' the Just equivalent of their deeds.' 
 
 (4.) SoKei Se /ioi Sri\ovv k.t.a. There is some little difficulty here. 
 avSphs i.peT^]l', as Popp. observes, cannot be ' alicujus horum defunctorum virtu- 
 tern ;' the genitive must therefore have an adjectival force, and the whole is 
 'fortiiudo virilis.' So in the passage quoted by Bl. from Isoc. ix. 8, x'«A67r<(» 
 iiTTiv auipis ipiT^v 8i4 K6yuv 4yKufud(iiv. We must, as Meyer has pointed out, 
 recognize a reference to two classes of persons : those whose previous life had as 
 yet given no indications of worth, and those who had long oc-en distinguished as 
 valuable citizens. Tr. therefore, 'Noio what aman's worth is, thisworth theclosinu 
 
Chap. 42.] NOTES ON IHUCYDIDES. igg 
 
 leene of these men's life appears to me to show, whether now for the first time 
 announcivg it, or coming as its final confirmation (lit. being the first to announce 
 it),' So Peile tr. * both in the case where it is the first indication, and whereit 
 is the final confirmation.' Kriig. remarks upon the euphemism contained ni 
 KaTaiTrpo'\>i\, wliich was, he says, imitated by the later writers. 
 vporiBicrQai. Popp. explains this 'fortitudinempree seferre, profiteri, exhibere 
 (or, in magna laude poni).' I am, however, inclined to think that the notion of 
 holding before as a screen is implied, meaning that their subsequent merit should 
 exclude their previous deficiencie.s from view ; or more simply still, * to put for- 
 ward in the first place,' so that their other conduct becomes a secondary matter. 
 Here, then, the word is used in a favourable sense ; the unfavourable sense i» 
 more common, as iii. 64, iirl rip iKsivwv kwk^ a;/Spuya6iai/ irpo^BeaBe, Cf. Tac. 
 Mist. V. 25, ' ilium domesticis malis exeidium gentis opposuisse.' 
 
 (c.) Tr\ovT If, the reading of the best MSS., taken instrumentally, with 
 4fjLa\aKi(T0'q. r^v ert aTr6\avcriv — ' the farther enjoyment of it' 
 
 Tei'ias i\rrlSi. Here we have the true ^'eneKc or genitive case, cf. i. 23. d.— 
 • hope engendered by poverty,' i. e. which poverty causes to spring up in the mind, 
 or, as some say, 'the poor man's hope.' See, however, Jelf, § 898. 3. 
 jrXouTiio-Eie. T. K. A. can hardly be right in tr. this 'to become rich, to grow 
 rich,' though, as usual, blindly following Kriig., who has 'reich werden.' The 
 word, I believe, implies ' being,' compounded as it is with 4to ; so we say iu 
 Englishj ' he hopes to be a rich man some day or other.' And similarly in the 
 passages quoted by Kriig., e. g. Plat. Sep. p. 421 D, ir\ouTljiros x^Tpeis is the 
 potter when a rich man. See i. 107. c. tivafiaK'hv — ' a putting off from 
 
 one's self (or shirking, if the word be not too inelegant). Cf. with Krug. 
 ava^o\as ^iroiuTo, Dem. 48, 20. auTWZ', sc. ttjs hTToKaia^tas Koi 
 
 Ti)j iXiriSos. \a$6i'Tes, here in reference to the mental grasp, or 
 
 conception. Cf. rh K-fipvyfxa . . . SiKaiov eTcoi iKtifi^afoi/, iv. 106, and note iii. 259. 
 Cf. ib. 38. d., 56. c. ti€r' avrov, sc. rov KtvS6vov. tuv Se i(f>ie<rOat, 
 
 These words are also to be taken in close connexion with /H€t' outoS, which is 
 the condition upon which the infinitives are predicated — ' not without this peril ;' 
 60 Krug. • nur mit Bestehung der Q-efahr.' This was the only condition upon 
 which they would consent to seek these objects. ^AiriSi i^ev k.t.K. 
 
 'committing to hope the uncertainty of future success,' i. e. so far as future 
 
 success, a thing never certain, was concerned, they were content to hope for the 
 Ijggf^ epT^" 56 — 'but when once engaged in action thinlcing it right to 
 
 trust none other than themselves concerning what had met them face to face ' — lit. 
 before their eyes, i. e. the dangers of the combat, ipjtf stands as an adverbial 
 dative ■ TOv'ijSv dpaifihou is antithetical to t!i Supavh toC KuropSiiinw, and af loCyres 
 <T<piiTiv ahrots -imroiBhai to i\-nlSi. 4wiTp4<j,avT(S. Meyer, on the other hand, to 
 whom Popp. assents, maljes epya Se follow imroieivai, and a(^l(Tw avTols follow 
 bpaiiivov—' trust to action in what was before their own eyes.' This has the 
 
 i^,ip€,T0ai ica.1 waeri-'. Said of the same act. Cf. Granville Sharp's canon. 
 i. 18. a.— 'to fall in repelling the enemy,' contrasted with rh ivZ6vrii adi^c 
 ffOai—'to secure safety by submission.' See Jelf, § 678. The question then 
 
200 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 arises, what are we to make of /iS Wo v fiyriad/xevoi? An Englishman might 
 be tempted to tr. ' having tho'ught more of,' i. e. preferred, or, having more fancied f 
 Tjyov/iat would then be used with /xoAAov, as ^aWov a^Lovy, and /laWov ^o{iKe(T0at. 
 This agrees with Popp., who says, • cum Tiye7ir8ai interdum sequente infinitivo 
 notionem cequum censendi habeat (ut voiii^nv iv. 86), videtur sonare posse, prce- 
 ferre, malle' This Am. calls the * sensus praegnans ' of TjyriffdfjLei/oi, and places it 
 among the instances cited by Lobeck ad Pkrt/nich. u. vi. p. 753, where rjys'icj-Bai, 
 otiff6ai, and vo/j-i^eiv, are used in the sense of thinking right. To this it is 
 objected that they are always followed by an infinitive sine articulo. Am. 
 replies by quoting ii. 53, ri Trpo(rTa\anrapup oi/SeU irpSBujios ^v. But is this 
 exactly parallel ? — * with respect to the taking much trouble, no one was zealous.' 
 However, Matthise, § 543, has collected numerous instances of the infin. with 
 article, some of which are more appropriate, though many are otherwise ex- 
 plicable. Perhaps it might lessen the difficulty to say for naWov Tiyriaifievoi 
 instead of, * thought more of' more thought of, i. e.gave more thought to, though 
 even this is scarcely consistent with the common use of ^yoC/iai. Another method 
 of explanation is to consider that the words stand elliptically for elvat iiaWov 
 rovro, that this more consisted in, &c., where by * this ' is meant rb (ripitriv ai/Tocs 
 TreiroiBevai. Kriig. tr. * theg therein more recognized (i, e. understood and accepted 
 the necessity of) defence, though accompanied with death, than self -preservation 
 purchased hy submission,' I do not exactly understand either T. K. A.'s ex- 
 planation or his translation of Kriig. Peile prefers the old reading t^ to t6, 
 which he considers confirmed by c. 43, h tm aixiveirBai, and tr. 'and accounting 
 that to consist in actually defending themselves and suffering (i. e. at every cost, 
 come what may), rather than in seeking to save themselves by giving in.' 
 rh fiey oiVxpi'' ic.r.\. — ' disgrace, indeed, to their reputation (lit. what would 
 be said of them) they fled from, but the brunt of battle with their bodies they bore, 
 and at the very briefest crisis of their fate (when the least thing might have 
 turned the scale of victory), they departed in the height of their glory rather than 
 of their fears' The tiicfip seems to me to be applied by a sort of zeugma to 
 ToS Sc'ous, for had the latter stood alone the orator would probably have used 
 another word. Si* eAax^trTou Kaipov t6xvs seems equivalent to the 
 
 'horiB momenta cita mors venit' of Horace. Meyer and Popp. doubt this, and 
 tr. ' dum fortuna brevissimam naeta erat opportunitatem,' meaning, I suppose, 
 ' xchenfortune had for a moment obtained an opportunity,' i. e. they had a chance 
 for n moment of distinguishing themselves, and did not let it slip. 
 avqWdyriffav — 'were set free from,' an euphemism, as in SeracleidtB, 965, 
 Ketvov S' airaWaxBivTos. So the Latiu decesserunt, our departed, and the Ger- 
 man sie schieden. 
 
 Chaptee XLIII. — (a.) irpo<njK(JcT£i)j. D. well tr. 'asbecame the character 
 of their country.' atripaKeffT^pav. Certainly there is force in K.'s 
 
 objection, that i(r<f. ^idvoiav cannot signify a securer life. He therefore rends 
 neut. plur. atnpaAeiTTepa. But I am sure Thuc. would have sacrificed something 
 for the antithesis which makes both adjectives predicates to Siivoiav; and, 
 after all, we say a safer policy, a safer line of action, meaning that which conduces 
 to safety. Cf. the well-known passages Soph. Ajax, 550, and Virg. xii. 435. 
 o-KoiroSi'Tos /H5) \6yif iiL6vif — ' considering not in loords alone,' or merely 
 
Chap. 43.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 201 
 
 theoretically ; it is meant that they must show a practical sense of the fact by 
 their actions. Kriig. cf. (Ed. Col. 369, \6y(i> a-Koirovcn rjjv Trd\ai yhoxjs (pdopav. 
 tpyip flea/ieKour. The opposite notion to \6yti> a-KoirovvTas. This latter, 113 
 Am. says, means regarding a thing merely from the account given of it, there- 
 fore the former will he, viewing a thing in its reality, not trusting to report, but 
 seeing it as in fact it is. The antithesis makes this preferable to the translation 
 of Peile and others — 'what she (i.e. the state) does.' elSd-ras. Cf. supra, 
 
 ch. 36. Tr. ' if a man, were to enlarge on, it would be to persons as loell ac- 
 quainted with it as himself.' SpaffTas yiyvo/j.evotfs — ' iecoming its 
 lovers;' make Athens your mistress, A strong personification, referring doubt- 
 less to certain personal relations fashionable at the time and place. roK. 
 Hayres Popp. says = ToAjiiijpof, and Krug. renders ' Tciihne,' as ToXp-av often 
 stands absolutely j of course T. K. A. follows. But these translations do not 
 show that ToXjiiivTes sine articulo is the conditionalizing participle, expressing 
 with the others the cause of iKT-fia-avro — * hy daring won.' Cf. i. 9. a. 
 yiyv^aKovr^s to Seovra, is, I think, * talcing the trouble to acquaint them- 
 selves with their duty.' See what is said i. 86.a. alcTx''v6ii.(vo i — 
 ■ with a keen sense of shame (or sense of honour),' as Kriig., who quotes oiSo|UeVa>v 
 aifdpuy TrXeoviS (t6ol -qe iretpaprai. — ZZ. V. 531. 6Tr6Te fftj>a\eit](rav. 
 Optative, because indefinite frequency. Cf. i. 70. d. epavov — 'a Joint 
 contriiution ; the regular technical term, and of course quite familiar to his 
 auditors. For information see Diet, of Antiquities ; Sermsmn, Fol. Ant. of 
 Greece, § 146 — 9; and Boeckh's F. JS. of Athens, p. 245, Eng. tr. The society 
 itself, and the money subscribers, were each called epavos^ the members ipavi. 
 ffral, and their president an eranarch. Demosthenes {cont. Mid. § 27, &c.) 
 makes much use of the same metaplior, representing the state as a sort of great 
 benefit society, to which every citizen owes a contribution. 
 
 (ft.) Koivy — ' in common with those who had not fallen,' Kr^g. 4v ^, 
 
 Some nnderstand Td(pa, but Krug. says it is the neuter, ' in the spot where.' 
 nap a T^ ivrvxi"'''!- k.t.\. — ' on every occasion, either for word or deed, which 
 from time to time may happen to present itself;' referring to spoken panegyric, 
 and commemoration by festivals, &c, Kriig. will not allow that evrvx^vri can 
 agree with Kaiplf, which Traph. with a dative would not allow, he therefore tr. 
 'in his case who happens at any time to fall into the subject.' I do not know 
 what his objection is, unless it be that irapa cum dativo indicates rest at a point, 
 or with a person. But upon the hypothesis that the occasion does occur, may 
 we not say that their glory certainly abides with it, is always to be found with 
 it? ttSo-o yij might be translated 'every land;' but it may also bo 
 
 'the whole earth.' So Lysias, ii. ij, aTraaa. UeXomSvvijtros. Kriig. 
 T9JS yvcafiTis iiaWov ^ tov epyov — 'an unwritten memorial of the heart, 
 rather than of a\? their] material monument.' So D., and this is the usual 
 translation. Kriig. however argues that Trap' kKiartf in itself implies a memorial 
 of the mind, and rod epyov is not a proper expression for a material thing. He 
 would therefore tr. ' the memory of their patriotic sentiment, rather than of the 
 fight in which tliey fell.' But surely the two would be indissolubly blended 
 together, and the names of the great Athenian battles were ever in their orators' 
 mouth. I believe tov epyou is used much in the same way as it is a few Hues 
 previously, i. e. what was actually done in the way of commemoration. The 
 
202 KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booe XL 
 
 orator does not intend to exclude such commemoration, but implies that even 
 where this was absi'ut, tlieir recollection would still dwell in tlie minds of their 
 countrymen. In justice to Krug.'s argument, it should be noticed that the 
 combats in which thuse men fell were somewhat insignificant. Engelman's 
 translation agrees witli Kriig. — mehr ihrer Qesinnung als des Kampfes selhst. 
 Cf. iEsch. cont. Ctes. 50 c. : oh yap ^ovro Ztlv ip rois yptififiaffi rtfiao'dai, aAX' ^v 
 TTJ fiv^nn Tuv ed •7Viirovd6rwv. 
 
 (c.) rh eOSaifxov and rh eij^pvxov are predicates, for the predicate talres 
 the article where it is represented to be coextensive with the subject — * happiness 
 is freedom, and freedom, courage;' — is meaning consists in, inpiopao'de 
 
 — voce media — ' neglect to your own damage.' Kriig. cf. i. 24, 4, vi. 93, 1. 
 KaKoirpayovvTss in reference to the iTri-rrovos itrKjitris of the Lacedaemonians, 
 ch. 39, 2. Kriig. * those who fare hard/ This is probably, as Bl. says, antici- 
 pative of an objection likely to be urged by the rich, who might say, like tbe 
 soldier of Lucullus, that they ought not to risk their lives in the same way as 
 those who had nothing to lose. The argument is certainly a paradox, contra- 
 dicted by experience, however ingenious on the part of the speaker. 
 ^ iyavrla ixiTa^o\4\ — *the change to the opposite is still a risk (or there is 
 still a risk of a change to the opposite).' <pp6v7jfia — 'high spirit.' See 
 
 i. 81, and cf. ii. 62. 7} fi^ra rod fiaXaKtcrOrii'at KaKoitTLS. Arn. says 
 
 KaKoxTis is miserg, wretchedness. This is scarcely exact enough ; it is really 
 * worsening/ were there such a word, i. c. that deterioration of character, or de- 
 gradation, which follows upon (lit. accompanies) the having shown cowardice. 
 Before fiira rod in some MSS. stand ii* ry, which is, I think, plainly a gloss 
 introduced from the margin. Krug,, however, retains the words, from the 
 notion that rh fiera rod ixa\aKia-6^vat may be one logical term capable of 
 declension like a substantive, and be assigns to it the meaning *ihe state that 
 follows upon proved cowardice.' But of such a phrase * desiderantur exempla.* 
 ^(ifiTj — 'vigour,' and so 'valour,' which is from valeo. Koiyfj — 'hope 
 
 common to all,' i. e. of coming safely out of battle j but 'hope for the common 
 good' gives, as Kriig. says, a Joftier thought, and is not contradictory to the 
 idiom of the language. But may not the meaning be affected by its combination 
 with ^wfj.7}s ? avaitrdTiros 'describes the speediness of the pang of death 
 
 when it comes in the heat of battle without the protracted suffering of disease.' 
 Arn. If the meaning assigned by Kriig, to koiv^ be correct, the hope of 
 benefiting their country is another element in rendering death unfelt, or pain- 
 less. Arn. quotes similar usages of the word from Dem. ; Arist. Mhet. c. 6, § 4; 
 Plutarch, Demetrius, c. 29. 
 
 Chaptee. XLIV. — {a.) 6\o<f>-upofi.ai. The fut. 6\o(pvpovfiat has been con- 
 jectured, but the present is more proper, because it relates to the actual state 
 of feeling which the orator was then expressing — ' I am not, as you see, lament' 
 ing, but shall rather,' &c. rh 5* ei/rvx^s, oi tiv tt}s evirpeTreaTaTTjs 
 
 K.r,\. Peile tr. * happiness belongs to those who shall have obtained the most 
 glorious — death, as these men have now obtained, or a^iction, as you.' This is, 
 1 think, correct, except that ri* i\i'T\}y\^ \% goodhap, not happiness, tuSatfioviai 
 and we sliould perhaps say, ' they shall be accounted to have had the most fortunate 
 lot.' The wliole, I fancy, means, ' your affliction, as their death, is the best of 
 
Chap. 44,] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 203 
 
 , the sort that can befall a man.' But Peile and others explain, Death and afflic- 
 tion are the lot of all men. Human happiness is therefore altogether comparative. 
 Hence, • they may be said to be happy, whose lot it is to have the most glorious, as 
 in the present instance these men have, death ; whilst you have affliction.' 
 ical ofs . . . fuveiueTpiJer?. This passage is of acknowledged difficulty. 'In 
 duabus rebus,' says Popp., ' hie haereas.' One is the change of construction from 
 oj hi \dxaxri to ojs |uvtfi€Tp^9T;, but this is amply accounted for on the principle 
 of variety so often mentioned (i. 38, c); the second is the force of the preposi- 
 tion 4v, when it is not stated what are the things in which they were happy. 
 It seems to have escaped Popp., that these verbs belong to a class compounded 
 with iy, which in English are expressed by putting the prep, after the verb, and 
 which stand almost independently: e.ff. Aristoph. Aves, 38, Kal train Kom^v 
 ivavoTiirai xP^J^iTa, ' open to all to spend their money in ;' Herod, ix. 65, oSre 
 4iTe\Bi}v is rh Tf/jLevos oSre ivairoSavAv ; Arist. Fax, 1156, ivaiTOTraTelv yip etrr' 
 EirjT^Seios Trdiiu; Eurip. Sacchce, ;o8, IvSvffTvxriatu. I should therefore inter- 
 pret, ^ whose life has been dealt out to them to be happy in, equally as to die in,' 
 or, inverting, • to die in, equally as to be happy in,' i. e. their death has been 
 correspondent to the happiness of their life. If you look at the happiness they 
 enjoyed in life, and at the close to which their life was brought, you will find 
 them ^juofc(7s ^ufifj.eTp7j64vTa — ' dealt out in corresponding ratio.' I subjoin other 
 explanations, which the reader may perhaps prefer, Meyer has, ' quorum vitm 
 tenor ita congruit, ut eddem re et felices essent, et obirent, i. e. qu& in re vitse 
 terminum, in ea etiam f elicitatem invenernnt ' — the close of their life was made 
 to them happiness. This I cannot think accordant with the usage of the verbs 
 in Greek. Hermann — * quibus sic est traducta vita, ut in ed pari et felicitate et 
 exitu uterentur.' To this it is objected that eS does not occur before h■r^\fv^^[aa^, 
 This objection I think remedied by the version which I have ventured to give. 
 Peile — * who have had their life equally dealt out, so as for them to be happy in 
 it to the same extent, and to die in it,' i. e. die simultaneously with their earthly 
 enjoyment. Cf. Eurip. .Hipp. 1069 ; a Cor. vii. 3. Kriig. — ' their good fortune 
 has been equally balanced (abgeschlossen) for them, so as in and with it to meet 
 their end.' T. K. A. — • the accurate measurement of life ( = space of life) 
 allows space enough for these two things, a happy existence, and death, but no 
 more.' 
 
 (J.) ireffleii', sc. toOto. Kriig. ingeniously suggests TToflei;'. Sy is 
 
 the masculine, having reference to an antecedent implied in what has gone be- 
 fore — ' with respect to persons of whom you will so often have things to put you 
 in mind.' For the sentiments here expressed, Popp. cf. Isoc. Flat. § 19; Xen. 
 Cyrop. vii. 5.82. ■jreipao'Sfievos — ' deprived of before he has had an op' 
 
 portuniiy of experiencing' Kriig. quotes Valla's version, ' quibus nunquam 
 potituri privantur ' with approbation, adding that wctpcurd/jLei'os, the reading of 
 some MSS., is inadmissible, because ' a man cannot be deprived of what he has 
 never had.' I suppose one might retort with reference to the future, it is no 
 great deprivation to lose what you are never going to have. In fact I believe 
 the aor. part, to be very suitable, as conveying the idea without any limitation 
 of time — i.e. simply 'without experience of them.' o^oipefl^. 
 
 Cf. supra, 41. b. Here some aoeus. pronoun is understood as object to the verb. 
 3^'i]Bri, oblivion, for the ground, 01 cause of oblivion. Popp. refers to iirioK^uii, 
 
204 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IL 
 
 i. 52; and a\aa-iv *J\iov {Phil. 61), though this is scarcely the same thing. 
 SiX^Bev — * beneficial in two toat/s/ T. K. A., or more accurately, ' benefit will 
 accrue from two sources.' ^vyolaci has for its subject t^kvwo-iv Toiet<x8ai, 
 
 according to Popp. and Bl. Kriig. says it has no subject at all, or at most 
 TTpayfia is to be supplied, which actually is so, Arist. Nuhes, 594. So he also 
 explains Xen. Anah. vii. 8. 4; Andocid. i. 77 ; and Dem. xliii. 66, itrepcor^ . . . 
 K,Ti &j/ Bpuffiy 'AdTivalois elvai eirl rh ^fietyou airh tov tnjfielou. 
 
 (c.) $ovK€V€(r6ai — 'contribute counsel to the state in any fair and equal 
 way' 'jrapa$akK6fj.€vot — * bringing forwa/rd^ and exposing equally to 
 
 risk/ Cf. iii. 14. On iK rod dfxolov cf. i. 143. c. irapij^'fjKaTe, 
 
 Ttapa is here transitive — * have got beyond the prime of life* and are therefore 
 not likely reKpaxrtv iroteiadai. Kepdos rjyeTtrde — * consider as so 
 
 much clear gain ' — * lu^ro apponite,* That this is a legitimate construction of 
 7]yovfiai may be readily shown, Cf. inter alia, ret fli/TjTa 5' oit vvv irpSoTov 7]yovfj.cu 
 cKidvf Eur. Med, 1224, and with Kriig. Dem, viii. 66, ir6Ketas ttKovtou iytaye 
 Tjyovfiat (Tvfifxdxovs, iria-riVy eHvotav. T(JySe, se. $iov, has its proper 
 
 use, this which is to follow. rh (piK6rtfiov, 'synonymous with evKXeiOj 
 
 honour,' Kriig., and of course following him T. K. A. But is it not rather the 
 love of honour contrasted with the love of gain, both being regarded as passions of 
 the human mind which are thought never to become extinct ? Then we have t h 
 KepSafi/eti/ opposed torh ri(j.aa6ai, the getting moneys and the getting honour, 
 T<p axp^^V refers to incapacity for active service, as may be seen &om i. 93, 
 ruv axpetOTiirojy apKitJeiv t^v <pv\aK-f}v. 
 
 Chaptee XLV. — (a.) rhv a^wj/a — ' the struggle you will have to undergo in 
 attempting to rival their renown.' rhy yctp ouk tvra k.t.K. Kriig. 
 
 quotes from Mimnermus apud Stob. 125. 12: 
 
 Seifol yap ofSpl irduns iffjxkv eyfcXee? 
 ^wj/Ti <pQovri(Tai, KaT&a.v6vTa 5' alvicat. 
 
 The Horatian sentiment will recur to the thoughts of every one : 
 
 'Virtutem incolumem {lohile it dwells with us) odimus, 
 SubLitam ex oculis quaerimus invidi.* 
 
 KO0' i-rrep^oK^y aperrj s — * in (or by) an excess of merit ;* * even supposing that 
 you reached transcendent merits would you be judged, I say not on a par with, but 
 even a little inferior to them ?' <pd6vos yap «.t.\. Is this not to be 
 
 expressed in English by saying, 'the living have envy to contend against as a 
 rival ' ? For irphs rh avTliraXov is not, I think, rightly rendered by Meyer — 
 'propter emulationem,' i. e. the living are envied on account of rivalry ; nor by 
 Popp, * ab cemulis,' making it equivalent to Trpby twv avTtTrd\u}y, by their rivals ; 
 nor by GoU. * erga fBmulos' i. e. the living have a feeling of envy towards their 
 rivals J nor as Dale, ^the living are exposed to envy in their rivalry.' Kriig. 
 merely says, * among the living, envy dominates, whether enviers or envied.* 
 It will be seen that I make nrphs rh avriiTaXov, 'for opfosiiion' i. e. to discharge 
 the function of an opponent; which sense it is I think capable of sustaining. 
 Then rh fi^ ifiirohii}!/ — ' those who are in no one's way ' {■=■ 01 ovk &vt€s, the 
 neuter being a genera] form of statement) — are opposed to ot ^avr^s ; and they 
 
Chap. 46.] KOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 20$ 
 
 are said to find no such obstacle against (irphs) which it is necessary for 
 them to struggle ; but ' thet/ are honoured with a good will winch has no one to 
 oppose it.' 
 
 (6.) i p e T 7) s — ' if I must say anything on the subject of woman's excellence' 
 1). The Scholiast, says Kriig., is ungallant enough to deny all virtues to the sex 
 except that of uuuppoavvri. oh yhp huZp^ia. % SiKaioavvri ^ (pp6vf)(ns. Meyer 
 and Bl. refer this to ' chastity ;' Arnold to ' modesty and affectionateness.' But 
 as there is no article, D. is right in referring it to nothing special (see i. 2. d.) ; 
 it simply means the sort of merit which is to be looked for from women on such 
 an occasion. That this, according to the Greek conception, was of a yery nega- 
 tive and passive character, is clear enough, even from what follows. titrai, 
 of course, has for its antecedent yvvaiKes contained in ywatmias. Cf. Jelf, S19. 
 1. 435. a. TTJs vTrapxovCTj s (^iSffeaiy /li] x^^P^^^ yevetrdai. An 
 eloquent passage occurs in one of the Oxford Prize Essays, [' Domesiio Virtues 
 of the Greeks and li.omans'~\ condemning the cold-heartedness of the orator 
 who, on such an occasion, could tell wives and mothers not to be worse than 
 they were by nature ! But this is surely the meaning most suitable for the 
 argument. When the Greeks were exhorted, as they often were, rSiv warepuv 
 firj x^'v"^ (pavrjyai, ii. 62. d., cf. i. 122. 3; vi. 92. b., nothing unworthy was 
 implied of their ancestors ; on the contrary, the words were an exhortation not to 
 fall short of their valour. So here the orator means, ' Do not deteriorate from 
 that character which Nature has given yon ; we know you to be weaker than the 
 other sex, but do not extravagantly indulge in this weakness.' ^ SiJ^a 
 — 'the praise,' i. e. which will result from such conduct. Kal ^s, sc. 
 fieyd\Tj ri S6^a — 'great, too, loill he her praise, of whom among the other sex there 
 is least talk, either for good or evil.' Cf. Jelf, 819. b. The word K\eos is a 
 'nomen ij.eaov, at non raro apud poetas,' Popp., who cf. 5((|a, o«i5os (viii. 27), 
 iKirls and i\TviC^iv, i. i. We might also cf. ' facinus,' ' famosus,' ' venenum,' and 
 many other words. For the sentiment cf. .SUscb. Agam. 611. 'The two 
 properly opposed notions would be (i) merit, demerit; (2) praise, censure. 
 But Thuc. gives us one of each pair, merit and censure = conduct that is cen- 
 sured.'— T. K. A. 
 
 Chaptee XLVI. — -(a.) ko! i/jiol — 'hy me, as has been done ly my predeees- 
 aors.' \6y!f . . .epycp. The usual antithesis, as has often been pointed 
 
 out — the first is, so far as words are concerned; the second in respect of the 
 actual commemoration hy deeds, i. e. regarding the subsequent support of tho 
 children as part of the practical recognition of the father's merits, 
 /te'x/" ^iSris^'to the age of eighteen,' says the Scholiast. From sixteen to 
 eighteen the young Athenian was educated in the Gymnasia. At eighteen the 
 youth was enrolled among the ephebi, entered into the registry of his demus, 
 and after taking the oath of a citizen, was armed in the presence of the public 
 assembly. From that time he was, in the eye of the law, of age, might marry, 
 appear before courts of law, and so forth ; but he had yet to do frontier dutj 
 as v^piTToKos, before, on attaining his twentieth year, he entered upon the full 
 exercise of his civic rights, by participating in the general assemblies of the 
 people from which fact we may understand why some have asserted that he 
 was not registered till then. Hermann, Pol. Antiq. of Greece, § 123. See, 
 
206 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 with Krug., Plat. Menex. 22, Lysias ii. 75, .ilscliin. 3, 154, Arist. Pol. 2, S, 4. 
 ffriipavov — * thet'ein proposing a prize,' sc. which consists in this maintenance 
 of cliildren. rots Ze— 'to these I say' he in &^o6.05\. Seethe 
 
 grammars, Hermann ad Soph. Fhil. 87, and infra c. 65 c, and of. Livy, iv. 35. 
 'Nihil non aggressuros homines, si magnis conatibns magna praemia propo- 
 nantur.' aivoKofpvpAfxevoi — 'having brought your lamentations to a 
 
 close,' such being sometimes the force of oiri in composition. Of. ajroK-yiiaavTai, 
 infra ch. 61, and Herod, ix. 31, us aTreK^Seutrai', 'cum lugere desierant,' where see 
 Valckn. note; and also ii. 40, lirtkv ivorinliaiiirai, 'when they have finished beat- 
 ing their own ireasts.' tv ■jrpotT-fjKeL eK acTT s, sc. oXopiipcurdai. On 
 this mode of supplying the simple from the compound verb, Kriig. refers to his 
 own grammar, § 62, 4, i. 
 
 Chapter XLVII. — (a.) wpwroy eroj. For the little that had been achieved 
 during this year towards the final object of the war, v. Grote, vi. 206. Even 
 the relief of Fotidiea had been no way advanced ; and while the expectations 
 of the Corinthians and other instigators of the war were disappointed, the 
 anticipations of Pericles and Archidamus were fully justified (i. 140, a.). 
 ^ T e A c li T a — ' was drawing to a close.' The imperf . is used because ' ad rei effectum 
 qui permanebat respicitur.' — P. ri Sio p-epri, cf. ad c. i. j Diod. 
 
 xii. 45. For tlie gramm. construction see Jelf, § 467, obs. 2, 478, a. 
 'Apx^hafjLOS, cf. ad c. a. 
 
 (b.) ri v 6 IT OS. The description of this famous pestilence occupies eight 
 chapters of book ii. — from xlvii. to liy. — which description we may divide into 
 three portions. The first (chaps, xlvii. xlviii.) describes the origin and causes 
 of the pestilence. The second (xlix. 1.) its character, symptoms, and physical 
 effects. The third (Ii. sq.) its effects on the moral character and social life 
 of the Athenians. 
 
 It may not be uninteresting to mention briefly the oecumenical plagues, 
 whose ravages have been recorded. 
 
 The first is that of Athens, here described by Thucydides, who has been 
 closely copied by Lucretius in the end of his sixth book. A similar one is 
 mentioned hy Galen as occurring in the year A.D. 167 — 70, which he calls the 
 long plague (v. inf. and Clinton in an.). 
 
 The second is that which broke out in the reign of Vibius Gallus and 
 Volusianus, A.D. 252, and is described in the letter of Dionysius quoted in 
 Eusebius, lib. vii. c. 22 (cf. Cyprian, de Mortal.), commented upon by Calvi- 
 sius, Justus Lipsius (de Constantid, ii.), and our o^vn countrymen, Brightman 
 and Mead, wlio interpret it to be the opening of the fourth seal of the Book of 
 Revelations (vi. 8). It is said to have lasted fifteen years, and five thousand 
 persons are reported to have died daily. 
 
 The third broke out in the reign of Justinian, a.d. 540, and is fully described 
 by Procopius in his Persica (lib. ii. 22, sq.). He is a close imitator of Thucy- 
 dides. It is also mentioned by Evagrius, Agathias, Gregory of Tours, and 
 Paulus Diaconus, who tells us it carried off Pope Pelagius, A.D. 580. It lasted 
 fifty-two years ; and in 583 appears to have extended its ravages to Britain, 
 lu Constantinople it carried oil' a thousand persons daily. It is curious that 
 the origin of all these three plagues is traced to Egypt or .^ilthiopia, which, .'is 
 
Chap. 47.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 207 
 
 Gibbon says (chap, xlili.), have been stigmatized in every age as the original 
 source and seminary of the plague. 
 
 The fourth commenced in the N.E. of Asia, in A.r. 1347, and in six years 
 overran the world with snch violence, that Calvisius says two thirds of the 
 population of Europe were swept away. Camden, in his Britannia, describes 
 its ravages in England in the following year, during which 50,000 persons are 
 said to have been buried in the churchyard of the Charterhouse in London 
 (Hume, ii. 448). It lasted for six years, and is known by the name of the 
 ' black death.' This is the pestilence which made its appearance in Florence 
 in 1348, and is so graphically described by Boccaccio in his Decamerone, and 
 in the historical narrative of the brothers Matteo and Giovanni Vlllani. Sis- 
 mondi {Histoire des JPrarK^ais) relates its effects In France, and its horrors in 
 England are beautifully told in the novel of Rothelan. 
 
 The next famous pestilence is that of Milan in the year 1630, of which we 
 have a vivid picture in the Promessi Sposi of Manzoni, in the Storia della 
 Colonna Infame, and in the history of the Plague by Ripamonte. The most 
 striking events connected with it are the exertions of Cardinal Borromeo, and 
 the horrid practices of the Monatti and Untori. 140,000 persons are reported 
 to have died between April and September. The last and greatest plague made 
 its appearance in London in the year 1664, and is well known to English readers 
 from the journal of Pepys and the narrative of Defoe, who, though not himself 
 an eye-witness of it, writes with all the force and truthfulness of one. The 
 total number of deaths is given as 68,000. It is, as Mr. Grote observes (vi, 
 209), ' not one of the least of the merits of Thucydides, that his notice of the 
 symptoms of this epidemic, given at so early a stage of medical science and 
 observation, is such as to instruct the medical reader of the present age, and 
 enable the malady to be understood and identified.' It has consequently been 
 the subject of frequent disquisition at home and abroad. The following treatises, 
 among others, have appeared in Germany: by Eyerel, in 18 10; Schoenck, 
 1821; Grimm, 1829; Krauss, 1831; Meurs, 1843; and Brandeis, 1845; to 
 which we may add the general treatise by Haser, 1839 ; Littre's introduction 
 to Hippocrates ; and Dr. Mead's book, De JPeste. Littre remarks that it is to 
 be regretted that Hippocrates, though an eye-witness, does not describe this 
 plague, as neither does Galen that which he witnessed in the time of M. 
 Aurelius (the Pestis Antoniniana), and which was probably a renewal of this 
 plague of Athens. Diodorus also defers the description of it till its reappear- 
 ance in the fifth year of the war (xii. c 58). Grote speaks of it as 'an 
 eruptive typhoid fever, distinct from, yet analogous to, the small pox.' Niebuhr 
 thinks it was neither the Oriental plague nor the yellow fever, but something 
 between the two, vomiting of bile being rare in Oriental plague but common 
 in yellow fever; ulcers, which are general in Oriental plague, being extremely 
 rare in yellow fever. Schoenck considers it to have been a camp fever, and 
 Meister holds the same opinion. Krauss maintains the opposite, and says that 
 the ino-uinal pestilence of Justinian was merely a degenerate form of the same. 
 It was° distinct fi-om the inguinal plague described by Procopius and Ripamonte, 
 and is believed (Littre says) to be now extinct. For three years it desolated 
 Athens, continuously during the entire second and third years of the war, after 
 which there was a marked abatement for a year and a half. It then revived, 
 
208 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 and lasted for another year (the fifth) with the same fury as at first. It carried 
 off, Thucyd. tells us (iii. 87), 300 of the 1200 hippeis, the chief men of the 
 State, 4400 hoplites, and of the poorer population a number too great for com- 
 putation, avf^eiperos api0^6s. Diodorus says they lost 4000 tr^Coi, 400 finrets, 
 and of others, freemen and slaves, 10,000 (xii. 58), but this number is, as 
 Grote says, much below the mark. AeyiJ- 
 
 fievov. There is perhaps a confusion in Thucydides' mind as to tf&ffos and 
 v6(r7iiia, both which are used indiscriminately. In the following chapter he 
 uses the neuter throughout, as though njo-rj/ia had really preceded ; and so 
 Sophocles uses huttj after v6in)ii.a, as though v6(ros had preceded {axnua Tp^s 
 T& <Tvvuvufxov~\ : 
 
 iiiv6v 7e Toviriffayfxa tov i/oa-fifjuiTos . , . 
 
 T^Ket yap aurr] 5io xp6vov. — Phil. 755 — 8. 
 
 Cf. Horn. Od. xii. 75, where ve<pe\ri and vfcpo! are similarly confounded. Or it 
 may be taken absolutely = Hhovgh it was said;* neuter part, like S4oy k.t.A. 
 ^•yKoTaer/c7)i//ai. Properly used of the descent of lightning, storms, &c., 
 therefore implying violence and rapidity (c. xlix. e.) 'A divine visitation.' It 
 is here intransitive, as in xlix. the simpler form; when ti'ansitively used it is 
 followed by a dative, or the accus. with els. See Elmsley ad Eurip. Jifed. 93 ; 
 Eurip. Hipp. 1416 ; Herod, vii. 134, viii. 65 ; ^sch. Sumen. 83 ; Procop, JPers. 
 ii. 22; To7s ^1 ovpavov 4iTi<rK-t}nTov(riv = ^veireffe, ch. xlviii. 
 Arj/j-voy, Grote remarks that about sixteen years before there bad been a 
 similar calamity in Rome, and in various parts of Italy. oli iiirroi. 
 
 Observe the transition to the oratio recta. K. compares Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 15, 
 Siffre Qavfj.a<rThv y€viffQa.nra<Tt KaX VTr^TTTevov. <pdopa oijTats — 'to 
 
 ruch a degree,' K. Cf. Xen. Anab. vil. 4, 3, ^v Se x'^"" '"ohXii xal if/dxos oSraij 
 &(rre k.t.X., and Eurip. Slpp. 999, 
 
 (0.) iarpol. P. quotes Cantacuzen. iv. 8, oifre Ixrpav i^iipxei te'x^t) 
 ouSe/ifa. Cf. Ov. Met. vii. 526, ' Pugnatum est arte medendi. Exitium 
 superabat opem ;' ib. 561, ' Inque ipsos sreva medentes Irrumpit clades;' Liv. 
 vii. 2, *Quum vis morbi nee humanis consiliis nee ope divina levaretur.* 
 flpKoav. See Buttmann's Lexilogus, pp. 162, 543 (Eng. ed.). B. quotes 
 Eurip. Ion, 952, 'Aw6\\a>v ovSei> ijpKf<re; cf. Here. Fur. 500; Soph. Fhil. 281, 
 339. ' Not that it is any derogation from the labour or application of the phy- 
 sicians to say they fell in the common calamity ; it rather is to their praise that 
 they ventured their lives so far as even to lose them in the service of man- 
 kind.' — Defoe, p. 40. Sa-tp koI liiXitTTa. See Matth. § 462 : 'Two 
 superlatives in two different propositions are compared with each other by tlie 
 words Toaoinif and 8<ry, to show that a quality exists in the highest degree in 
 one subject, in the same measure as it is possessed by another in the highest 
 degree.' Thuc. viii. 84, iatp niKuTra koI iXtieepot . . . Toiroi5T((! no! epauiTara. 
 So i. 68, 80-9) (cal fiiyiaTo, c'^kA^/ioto exoMf; Herod. \. 29; Soph. Track. 312 ; 
 CEd. Col. e^i, with Wiinder's note; Jelf, § 870, obs. i. Trpis iepo'a 
 iKereva-av. For this use of Trpis at a point at rest, cf. Soph. Track. 371, 
 rphs iJLf<rji Tpax'^icy ayapf ; (Ed. C. 12, irpiis SXo-eiriv flewj-; Thuc. iii. 81, e.; 
 viii. 98. Compare the ' suppltcationes ' of the Romans (Liv. iii. 7, x. 23, ixxi. 
 9, ixvii. 23, ixxvii. 3), the ' rogazioni ' of the Italians and the Middle Ages, 
 
Chap. 48.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 209 
 
 and tbe procession of the relics of Cardinal Borromeo, during the plague at 
 Milan, described by Eipamonte, lib. i. Boccaccio says, ' Nor was there more 
 profit from the humble supplications made to God by devout persons, not once, 
 but often, both in formal processions and in other manners.' 
 t^amiois. The MSS. vary between /invre/ois and fiavTtlais. 
 TE\euTwvT€s. Frequently used for lastly, or at last (li. c). Cf. Soph. Ant. 
 260, xkv iylyvero Tr\riyii TsXevriiaa; Xeu. Cgr. i. 6, 19 ; Plat. Sep. iv. p. 435. 
 We may tr. ' they ended iy leaving off.* So apx6fj.iyos is put for * dt first.' 
 Matth. a. G. § 5S7, 4; Jelf, § 696, obs, i. b. 
 
 Chaptek XLVIII. — (a.) i^ AlBioirias. Nubia and Sennaar. See Gibbon 
 n. a. AiyvTTTOv. ' Nam penitus veniens .ffigypti e finibus.' — Lucr. 
 
 vi. II 39. Gottl. quotes Am. Marcell. xix. 4, ' Clades ilia abusque fervent! 
 ^thiopise plagS. paulatim proserpens Atticam occupavit.' Schonek, p. 14, sq, 
 fVeTreffc = iyKario-Kii^fie. So Lucr. vi. I141, 'Incubuit tandem populo Pan- 
 dionis;' Ov. Met. vii. 522, 'Dira lues ira populis Junonis iniquse Incidit ;' 
 Liv. xxvii. 23 ; Pint. V. Pericl. p. 66, ^ KoiixHris hiirsae ipBopd. 
 iv T^ nEipniei. Niebnhr notices this fact to show the difference between 
 this epidemic and the yellow fever, which generally follows the course of rivers. 
 It began of course here first, being brought by sea, ' The place of its first out- 
 breaking in Attica indicates that the contagion came from abroad. It may 
 nevertheless have been connected, as Niebuhr believed (ii. 273), in some 
 mysterious way, with the volcanic convulsions which were unusually frequent 
 and violent about the same time, though Attica was but slightly afiected by them, 
 for the earthquakes felt at Athens are not said to have damaged any part of the 
 city ; and other regions of Greece which suffered much more from them do not 
 appear to have been visited by the pestilence.' — Thirl, iii. 135. Cf Procop. 
 Sell. Fers. ii. 22, c. ; ap^a[j.4vTi 5e dei ^k ttjs ■irapa\ias ii y6(ros rJSe oVtqi 5^ 4s 
 T^y fieffdyaiav aj/4Patye x^^pf'^y' Tji/zaro Tuy avQpdnzoiy, Bl. says the 
 
 aySpii-n-aiy is not emphatic, as though animals had been previously attacked. 
 But it was clearly the opinion of the ancients that in pestilences animals were 
 first attacked (Hom. II. i. 150; Ov. Met. vii. 536). The sheep and cattle had 
 been conveyed to Eubcea and the adjacent islands (0. xiv. ; cf. Grote, vi. 203). 
 There may therefore be some force in the word ; had the cattle been attacked 
 it would have been an aggravation of the calamity. Cf. Liv. iii. 66 ; Dion. 
 HaL A. H. X. 53. ^appiaKa 4ff^i&\'i)Koiiy es to <pp4a.Ta. 
 
 The Jews were accused of having poisoned the wells in the plague of 1348 
 (Thirlw. iii. 135). Cf. the account of the Untori in Ripamoute, lib. i. ; 
 Aretseus, p. 12, § 6 (ed. Kuhn.), Sfley ouS' direoiKis ey rcf Koip.^ rep iy 'Mi]vri<n 
 /i€Tc|eT€pouj SoKeeiy 4s rh (ppeara 4pi.$f0\7Jir6ai (pdp/iaKa; Ov. Met. vii. 532, 
 ' Constat et in fontes vitium venisse lacusque.' So when the plague broke out 
 at Naples in 1656, the Spaniards were said to have suborned persons to 
 scatter poisoned dust in the streets. Even the holy water was supposed to 
 have been poisoned at Milan (Knight, p. 77). A similar notion existed at 
 Paris upon the outbreak of the cholera for the first time in that city. The 
 credulity of the lower orders may be excused when we find that even learned 
 men behoved in the possibility of exciting pestilence by means half medical, 
 half magicid. (ppdara are ' cisterns, tanks, or reservoirs.' 
 
 P 
 
2 to NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Booe II. 
 
 air 6 8 1— i.e. in Pirseeus. The itp^?) of Callirrhoe, mentioned above, was in 
 the astu. 
 
 (&.) Aey^Tu Trepl aiirov. Either supply voffi}fj.aTOSi or tr. simply 'about 
 the matter.' Procop. Sell. Pers. ii. 22 B : Xeyirw fiev oZv &s vij ckcuttos wepl 
 aiirwv yivdiffKei, Koi aoiptaT^i roL fieTeup6\oyos' iyit 5e Sdey t€ ijp^aTO ^ v6cros 7j5e, 
 Ka\ rpo-rrci) Sij '6T<f robs a.v9pd>irovs ii4<pBetpfV ipStv %pxopiai. yiyvtiiTKit 
 
 — ' the opinion he forms— the judgment he arrives at.' 'Urtheilt.' K. 
 iSiojTTjs. In Aristotle's sense (.EM. Nic. iii. 8.8). ' T%e lay person' (K.), 'the 
 '/lon-professional man,' as opposed to the professed physician. Bl. compares 
 Plat. Fol. 433 ; Plat. Ser. Vind. Num. v. 4. Cf . Plat. Leg. 933 n, Soph. 22 1 c, 
 Phadr. 258 B, Frotag. 327 C; Proc. B. P. ii. 22, otfrc yhp iarp^ oSre ISitST-ri 
 (vp4$Ti. /uerafloA)) J. ' liespecting the causes which he deems 
 
 sufficiently powerful to have produced so great a revolutiou.' — Grote, ri. 210. 
 P. distinguishes properly between fieraiSoAJ) and ^ueTao-Toiris, and shows that 
 there is no idle repetition here. iifTafio\ii is the ' act of change/ conversio ; 
 fierdtrToffis ' the altered state of circumstances/ conversus status. The passage 
 quoted from vi. 20, quite bears out this view, Tr6\eis . . . oSre Seo/ifvas /tera/SoA^s, 
 p in Tis is ^4" f"'i{(rTairii' x^poh- The upriaratris is explained by the first 
 sentence of the following chapter — ' The change from an unusually healthfiil 
 to a pestilential state.' Demosth. Olynth. ii. 6, iroWiiv Tijy fifriffTaffif SeMriov. 
 Cf. xliii. c. )UciAi(rT* ii,v tx*** ''* TrpoaZbts ftii ayvoelv. 'Such 
 
 matters as will furnish any man who lays them to heart, with knowledge and 
 the means of calculation beforehand.' Lit. 'from having acquired some "previous 
 knowledge, not to be in a state of ignorance about the matter.' ' To record past 
 facts as a basis for rational provision in regard to the future ; the same senti- 
 ment which Thacyd. mentions (i. 22) as having animated him to the composi- 
 tion of his history, was at that time a duty so little understood, that we have 
 reason to admire not less the manner in which he performs it in practice, than 
 the distinctness with which he conceives it in theory.' — Grote. For the gram- 
 matical construction, see Jelf, § 832 — the optative with &v expressing a sup- 
 position or assumption depending on certain conditions; hence a still more 
 indefinite possibility. 
 
 Chaptee XlilX — (a.) liiXitrra 8)) ixeiifo. Cf. ad i. 13. 18. 118. 
 Si- off 01/. Hippocrates (JEpidem. i. 8) says that the same was the case during 
 the epidemic at Thasos. anKpiBn. Soc. Ii. ; is touto ireKeira, ' deter- 
 
 mined in this.' P. compares Cnntacuz. iv. 8, iraKTo els ixe'ii'o itari\riyf "rh 
 v6(Trifia; and Krauss, p. 15. irpo^iiTfus — ' ostensible cause,' & word 
 
 frequently used by Hippocrates in this sense. Aretseus, p. 43. So Procop. 
 B. P. ii. 22, arpoipiuriirTus. Boccaccio says of the plague at Florence, that 
 'there was no fever or any incidental symptom/ Septal, an unusual 
 
 word (the later Attic form is Sipfta, Arrian, An. ii. 4. 8; Menand. ap. 
 Phavorinum). Lucian, Dial. Marin, xi. B4pii.if 6 iruperrft; Tim. Lax, u. t. 
 Euhnkeii; Tibull. iv. 11. *, calor. See Lucret. vi. 1143 = 
 
 ' Prinoipio, caput incensum fervore gerebant, 
 Et dupliceia ocalos suffus& luce rubcnteis. 
 Sudabimt etinm fauces intrinsecus atro 
 
Chap. 49. j NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 211 
 
 Sanguine, et ulceribus vocis via septa coibat ; 
 Atque animi interpres mauabat lingua cvuore.' 
 
 ipuB-fifiara. Observe the plur. Cf. Lucret. u. b. ; Vlrg. Georg. ill. 505, of the 
 disease of horses : 'Turn vero ardentes oeull.' nviviia i,Towov koI 
 
 SutrcSStj T|(J>(€i — 'emitted an unnatural and foetid hreath.' P. translates 
 Stottoi/ by 'tetrum,' as Lucr. v. 1152, 'Spiritus ore foras tetrum volvebat 
 odorera.' Kriiger says, Thucydldes meant that besides being 'noisome' (B.) 
 the breath was unnatural from the extreme difficulty of respiration. So 
 Virgil u. s. ' attractus ab alto Spiritus interdum gemitu gravis.' Cf. c. li. a. 
 voWit KaX &.\\a aronlas, ijcpiet and atpUt are used indiscriminately 
 
 by Thuc. K. 
 
 (6.) Trrapn6s — 'sneezing.' Plat. /Symp. p. 183. $piiyxos — 
 
 'hoarseness.' 'Humoris in fauces influxio, quam raucitatem vocat.' — Cael. 
 Aur. vii. 2 ; Ppaxe'iv, Hesych. iixvirai, \l/o(p^trai. Foes. (Eo. p. 79. 
 Prix^'s i<rxvpoS — 'a hard cough.' This meaning Foesius gives to /35)| simply. 
 KapSlav—'the cardiac extremity of the stomach,' L. and S.; 'os ventricuU,' 
 Fees.; Lucr. vi. 11 49: 
 
 ' Inde ubi per fauces pectus complerat et ipsum 
 Morbida vis in cor mcestum coufluxerat iegris.' 
 
 (TTTipl^at. Intrans. P. airoKafldpo-cis x"^?' — ' purgings of hile.' 
 
 Grote observes (p. 211), that 'in Thucyd.'s day speculation was active re- 
 specting the causes of this plague, according to the vague and fanciful physics 
 und scanty stock of ascertained facts which was all that could then be con- 
 sulted.' These very words airoKaSapaeis xof^n^ k.t.A. seem to indicate that Thuc. 
 was familiar with the medical terminology, and was no stranger to the habits and 
 training of his contemporary Hippocrates, and the other Asclepiads of Cos. 
 See M. Littre's note, quoted by Grote. But, as has been well observed, many 
 words which have now become technical in medical science, were of ordinary 
 use in Greek conversation. Freind, Hist, of Med. pp. 416 — 20, ed. Lond. 
 iruirai — diSevvag va colour, smell, ArA taste. Krauss. TaXanruplas 
 
 refers rather to mental depression and abandonment of all hope, such as Defoe 
 describes, than to physical distress (= aBviila, c. li.), the 'anxius angor adsidue 
 comes.' Cf. Lucret. vi. 1 156. (So Krauss, p. 17.) \iiy^ Kfvl) — 'an 
 
 ineffectual retching,' 'motus ventriculi irritus,' Krauss, p. 20. So Lucr. vi. 
 1158, ' Singultusque frequens;' and Virg. Georg. iii. 506, ' Imaque longo ilia 
 singultu tendunt.' Cf. Aretaeus, p. 50. ed. Kiihn. ; Nicand. Ther. 434, ^u-y^noiffi 
 Papvp6fi€voi daiiieaffw. Af'7 f generally means ' hiccough,' and is the term used 
 for the hiccough of Aristophanes in the well-known passage of Plato's Sym- 
 posium, p. 185. 
 
 (c.) aitToii€v<p — 'to the outward touch.' So Lucret. vi. 1163, 'tepidnm 
 manibus proponere tactum.' Defoe mentions the same fact. For the con- 
 struction, see Matth. § 388. 6, and note ad i. 10. f. rh iiiaov aKomiini. So 
 c. li. (a) iropo\iir((i'Ti. ohKi.yaveepii.6v — ' not over-warm.' Krauss, p.' 
 
 22, says this '.vas a bad symptom. Procop. S..F. ii. 22, /ta! t!> fiev trufia oht 
 Ti Si^jWao-o-e rfls vporepas XP"'"^' "^'^^ Sipfihv fjv, art irvperoS imvf<r6vTos. 
 6t c X '^ apiv — ' nor pale ; but reddish, livid, Ireahing out with small pustules 
 
 P 2 
 
212 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 and ulcers: The 'exanthema typhosum' of medicine, P. Fees, explains 
 TTihiSyhi' (TTsA.iTi'H'by '<=ol<"'»d°'g™'" tendens ex rubro; qnalis sangmms 
 sub cute, ex ictu aut plagi collecti'— ' livid or leaden colour'— tI i^erixo" ^XP^' 
 TTjTOS Ko! ^L(\avias, Sch. TO ivrhs oiras fVaero. Lucr. vi. I166: 
 
 ' Intima pars hominam vero flagrabat ad ossa ; 
 Flagrabat stomacho flamma ut fornacibus intos.' 
 
 riiv irivv \strTuv luariaiv. So Lucr. vi. 1168: 
 
 ' Nil ftdeo posset cuiquam leve tenueque membria 
 Vertere in utilitatem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 558 : 
 
 ' Non stratum, non uUa pati velamina possunt.' 
 ^i,r' &\\o Ti ii yviivoL Jelf, § 895. 4. Brachylogy— ' a verb of a general 
 meaning is supplied from a following verb of special meaning ; as every par- 
 ticular verb implies the general verbal notion of action or state.' Pop. reads 
 yiiliiv6v, sub. rjiiuo. Cf. Mark xiv. 51. irepi|8£|8X7)fteVot <nvS6va iirX yv/imv, 
 the art. omitted. K. says yviivol is correct, though the reading of inferior 
 jlSg. TJSio-ra re tl,v is vSup rfivxpiv k.t.X. For the grammatical 
 
 construction of the infinitive with hv instead of the historic tenses, see Jelf, 
 § 866. i. P. says €i T]fi,i\ovvTo must be supplied. Procop. B. P. ii. 22, iis 
 iiSup T€ oTs irapaTixo' eVireo-eiv ^BeKov. Lucr. vi. 1 1 70: 
 
 ' In fluvios partim gelidos ardentia morbo 
 Membra dabant, nudum jacientes corpus in undas.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 568 : 
 
 ' Fontibus et fluviis puteisque capacibus hserent. 
 Nee prius est extincta sitis quam vita bibendo.' 
 
 Diod. xii. 58 : ol irAetffTOi rwv voffoivTuv %ppnvTov kavTovs ets to (ppeara Koi ras 
 Kp-ftvas, iTTLdvfjLDvvres ^ouTwi/ Karaypv^at tci ac^fjiara. Defoe (p. 105) says : * Some 
 broke out into the streets, perhaps naked, and would run directly down to the 
 river, and plunge themselves into water.' khI ^Spaaay — 'actually 
 
 did so.' The common use of koI in Thuc. For the ellipse after tovto, see 
 .lelf, § 895. 4. aTrav<rTti> rp Si'f'ri. Larrey mentions the same fact 
 
 in the French invasion of Syria. Observe that the adj. by standing before the 
 article becomes the predicite. ^wtx^t^foi. Cf. Matt. iv. 24, 
 
 iroiKi\ais fSffois KoX fiafrdvois ^uv^xoP'^vovs ; Luke iv. 38, (Tvvixofi-^VTf iruper^ 
 fjLfy(iK(p. 6.ypunyia. Lucr. vi. 11 79, 'lumina vorsarent expertia 
 
 somuo.' axiid^ot. The regular use of the optative. Jelf, § 843. i. 
 
 (d.) 4iiara7oi. Lucr. vi. 1195 : 
 
 ' Octavoque fere eundenti lumine solis 
 Aut etiam non4 reddebant lampade vitam.' 
 
 P. quotes \VoUnar. p. 39, and Liv. xli. 21. Stappolas iKpirov — 
 
 cither violent Aittrrhcea, as Port. Steph. Thes. and Poppo, or = Ji/^iKToi {rfpiiriTot 
 iSariiSovs, as Galen. Lucr. vi. 1198, 'uigram proluviem alvi.' 
 (e.) KaTeVKT/TTTc yap k.t.A. Lucr. vi. 1204: 
 
Chap. 50.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 213 
 
 'tameu in nervos hnio morbua et artus 
 Ibat, et in partes genitaleis corporis ipsas ; 
 Et graviter partim metuentes limina leti 
 Vivebant ; f erro privatei parte virili, 
 Et manibus sine non nullei, pedibusque manebant, 
 lu vitS. tamen, et perdebant lamina partim.' 
 
 Cf. Eyerel and Grimm, ap. Pop. of tbe pestileDCo at Venice in 1576. Galen, 
 Schonck, and Krauss also speak of the disease attacking the hands and feet. 
 is al5o7a. Parts of tbe body are frequently put without the article (K.), on 
 tbe principle of familiar usage. Cf.i.S.a.; i2.bj 16. a, &c. A4)fli7. 
 
 Lucr. vi. 1 3 1 1 : 
 
 ' Atque etiam quosdam cepere oblivia rerum 
 Cunetarum, neque se possent eognoscere ut ipsei.' 
 
 Schonck confirms this statement, and Defoe also mentions it. The forgetfulness 
 was only temporary. 
 
 Chaptee L. — Kpetffirov \6yov — 'haffling all description,' K. Cf. Xen. 
 iM^em. iii. 11. i, Kp^tacrov -ffv K6yov rh KdWos ttJs •yvifaLK6s, So Herod, ii. 35, 
 ?P70 \6yov /tefoj, and ii. 148; Soph. (Ed. T. 1374, Kpei<r(ros>' a.yx6inis. See 
 Jelf, § 783, b. The whole thought contracted into a single substantival notion, 
 put in the genitive after the comparative. Matth. § 451. 
 
 XctXeTTCDTepwy ^ Kara t))v avdpaTt^iav (ftvtrtv — ^hef tiger als die menschliche 
 I^atur ertragen kann ' — * more grievously than human nature can endure,' K., a 
 common usage of Kar6. — according to the ■proportion of. eS^Aftxre. 
 
 Sec Jelf, § 373, 1. The sutject being indefinite, is not expressed, as it may be 
 easily supplied from the context. Matt. § 549. ^vvrpiipav — tS>i> 
 
 eiafltjTwy, K. — ' that tohich is familiar to man.' Cf. Soph. PAJ^. t7i. rck 
 
 yap Spvea. So Lucret. vi. 1 2 1 5 : 
 
 'Multaque humi quom inhumata jacerent corpora supra 
 Corporibus, tamen alituum genus atque ferarum 
 Aut procul absiliebat, ut acrem exiret odorem, 
 Aut ubi gustarat languebat morte propinqua.' 
 
 Cf. Ov. Met. vii. 545 — 52; Stat. Thei. i. 624, xii. 565, 'Eminus ipsae Pabula 
 dira ferae campumque odere volucres;' Liv. xli. 21, 'Nee vulturium usquam 
 visum.' Krauss, p. 26. Boccaccio states that two pigs who turned up with 
 tlieir snouts tbe rags of a man who had died of the plague, in a short time 
 after reeled about as if from the effects of poison and presently died. During 
 the black death in England it was also observed that neither beast nor bird of 
 prey would touch the carcasses (Knight, p. 64). reKfi-fipiov S4, with- 
 
 out the yap following, is unusual. K. cf . Xen. Anab. i. 9, 29 ; Plat. Legg. p. 
 821 E. Cf Matt. § 630. ^5r(\en((iF implies, as K. says, not 
 
 only that birds died from eating the corpses, but that they were observed to 
 keep aloof (Lucr. u. s.). SWas— oKt' Sa\ws. Not = alibi, as Arnold 
 
 explains it, but = neque OOTMJMO. P. irep! toiovtov oii^iu — i. «. irfpl 
 
 ra &Ta<\>a aaifiara. Jacobs. Or we might say, neither otherwise em-ployed, nor 
 engaged ahout the dead. ol Se kvucs. Lucr. vi. 1220: 
 
214 NOTES OSr THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 ' cum primis fida canAm vis 
 SiratA viis animam ponebat in omnibus segre.' 
 
 Cf. Horn. II. i. Jo J Sil. Ital. xiv. 594 ; Virg. Georg. iii. 496. 
 ToO &TroPaivoiiTos — ' gave evidence of what t/ie result would be.' P. But is it 
 not rather — ' ofiAe thing resulting ; gave opportunity of observing the effect pro- 
 duced' 1 — i.e. Th TerpdiroSa yevaiiiifva SLotpOeipeaOatt Xen. Anab. iv. 6, 13; 
 Mell. vi. 8, '6irus ju^ (pavfphs sttj /ii}S* ataOriirii' irapexot. 
 
 ChAPTEB lil. — (a.) iropo\iir(Ji'Ti. As aiiTOiiivif, xlix. e. (Jelf, § 599, l), 
 the dative expressing 'reference to/ as irvviXivrit ffvunfUvTi eiiruy. So 
 Thuc. i. 34. a, iv Se|if iairheovTi ; Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 33. 
 aroirias — 'peculiar character' — ' Sellsamkeit,' K. So we say, out-of-the-toag 
 character. iia(t}epivTus Irepy wphs erepov ytyy6fji€yov. irphs 
 
 mpov belongs to Sia^t/xiiTcoj ; Ite'p^ is only used to give force to the antithesis. 
 iSeav. Vide ad i. J09. a. For the accusative as a means of defining the 
 verbal notion, see Jelf, § 579, 2. Krauss, p. 26, translates it by ' externam 
 tpeciem.' iTape\iirft. Cf. Xen. Anab. ii. 5, 29. K. The 
 
 preposition here retains its proper primitive force, of something accompanying, 
 ' alongside,' as it were. ^TcA.€iSTo. Cf. xlix. a. Plat. Proioy. p. 
 
 35. 4A; Thuc. iii. 104. c. So Jjtit., *desinere in aliquid.' kuI 
 
 vdvv 6fpaTrev6fievoi — * with every attention that could be paid them,' ashelovf, 
 irtiirri Stairjj depawevififva. ey ovSiy KareaTTj lafxa — 'there 
 
 was no established speci/tc' — 'Jcein einziges Arzneimittel.' So Lucret.vi. 7224: 
 
 ' Nee ratio remedt communis certa dabatnr. 
 Nam quod alts dederat vitales aeris auras 
 Hocce aliis erat exitio, letumque parabat.' 
 
 Procop, S. P. ii. 22, Kal t^ ^i/XTray elneiy ohSefita fijjxf^'h av9pt^Trtp is Tijy 
 rurriplay i^dpriTo. Compare the powerful language of Defoe : ' The contagion 
 despised all medicine, death raged in every corner : men everywhere began to 
 despair — eveiy heart failed them for fear ; people were made desperate through 
 the anguish of their souls, and the terrors of death sat in the very faces of the 
 people' (p. 180). 
 
 (b.) atirapKis. K. compares Herod, i. 32, aydpdirov ffutfia fy oiSty 
 aUrapKis Itrrt. lurjfpti — 'swept off' — ' rieb alles auf' Gottl. — 
 
 * corripiebat' ' Et velocitatem et vim morbi notat,' Bav. Cantacuz. p. 50, uses 
 Ka$ripfi. fi T« aBviiia. So Lucret. vi. 1228: 
 
 ' Illud in his rebus miserandum et magnopere nnnm 
 Jilrumnabile erut, quod, ubi se quisque videbat 
 Impllcitum morbo, raorti damnatus ut esset, 
 Deficiens animo moesto cum corde jacebat, 
 Funera rcspectans, animam et mittebat ibidem.' 
 
 Ov. Met. vii. 565 : 
 
 ' salutis 
 Spes abiit, finemqne vident in funere morbi ; 
 Indulgent animis, et nulla quid utile cure est." 
 
Chap. 51.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 215 
 
 rh iveKiriffTov ry yvtLfjtri. Cf. lis, b, TrovTa;^(f0€i/ rp yvdfvri &Tropot, 
 TpoifvTo — ^ gave themselves up,' abandoned themselves to despair. 
 ivTerxoi/. K. explains by 'that moral resistance of the will that assists 
 recovery' — 'moralischen Widerstande' Bepa-n-elas avairtfiTrKd/jL^voi 
 
 — ' catching the infection from attendance upon others ' — 'eontagione infecti' 
 Buhnken. Plat. Phad. p. 67 A. K. compares Pint. Per. xxxiv. Sxrwep 
 fioa'K'ilfjMTa avairi^irXafrQat tpdopas air* aW-f]\uv. So Liv. iii. 6, ' Ministeria in 
 vicem ac contagio ipsa vnlgabant morbos/ and xxv. 26, ' yi morbi repletos.' Cf. 
 Kuhnken's Timietts, b. v. afairAEwv, who gives many passages where hyairl/i- 
 TrKauBat and KaraTrl/ivXaaBai convey, besides filing, the collateral notion of 
 defiling; hence of infecting by contact. Cf. Avist. Nui. 1023. The Latin 
 impleri has the same sense — Liv. iv. 30, ' vulgatique contaetu in homines morbi, 
 et primo in agrestes ingruerant servitiaque. Urbs deinde impletur.' 
 Zairep to irpi^ara, Lucret. vi. 1234: 
 
 ' avidi contagia morbi . . . 
 Lanigeras tanquam pecudes et bucera secla.' 
 Jut. ii. 78 : 
 
 ' dedit banc contagio labem 
 Et dabit in plures ; sicut grex totus in agria 
 Unins scabie perit, et porrigine porci.' 
 
 Horn. Od. xL 408 ; Virg. Oeorg. iii. e,%6. 
 
 (0.) <l>e6pov = (pBopd, xlvii. b. — 'mortality' usually applied to beasts of 
 burden. Arrian, TI. xxv. I ; Procop. B. P. ii. 22. oirtJAAui'TO 
 
 ipfj/iot. Liv. xxv. 26, ' Curatio ipsa et contactus aegrorum vulgabat morbos, 
 ut aut neglect! desertique qui incidissent morerentur, aut assidentes curan- 
 tesque eadem vi morbi repletos secum traherent.' apeTijs ti 
 
 H^TairoioiiJievoi = (ptXayBpanrias. Schol. '«ttci as made any pretensions to 
 goodness.' For this use of ofperJ) see the Aristotelian classification of virtues, 
 £.het. i. 9, 2, and ch. xl. d. Arrian copies the expression. An. 11. xxvii. 6. 
 K. ' Qai humanitatem guandam prce se ferehant,' Gott. Cf. Dion. Halic. 
 Antiq. vi. 91 ; Procop. B. G. i. 8, xat liiKurra oTs Sii aperis ti /ieTairoieifffloi 
 ivv4$aive, and Lucret. vi. I24r, sq. : 
 
 • Quel fuerant autem praesto contagibus ibant 
 Atque labore, pudor quern turn cogebat obire, 
 Optimus hoe leti genus ergo quisque subibat.' 
 
 ruv i.TToyiyyo/if'a"- Cf. xxxiv. a. rfKevruPTft — 'at last.' Cf. 
 
 xlvii. c. Xen. An. iv. 5, 16. i^exa/ivoi/ — 'grew weary of lamenting the 
 
 dead.' Xen. Mell. vii. $, 19, w6i'oy p.r\ieva tnroKipiVdV ; Plut. Sol. viii.; Lucr. 
 vi. 1246, 'Lacrymis lassiluctuque redibant.' Cf. Liv. xxv. 2O. For o\oi()i5pireij, 
 the accusative of equivalent notion, see Jelf, § 549 c. fiirre Kal 
 
 KTeiyeiv—'so as to be fatal.' The fact is confirmed by modern medical 
 
 writers. P. 
 
 (d.) 67ri irAc'oi/. Cf. ad i. 9. u. 'In hoherem Grade' K. iTri\i.p.- 
 
 ^aviv—' attached: So Herod, viii. 115, ^7riAo/3i?>' Aoi^is -rhf aTpa-riv; Time, 
 iv. 27, TJ)V (pyXaKiif 6 xf'Mi"' ^T€Aa^€. Tip irapoxP^M" irepixapEi— 
 
 ' through their excessive joy at the moment.' in' SAAou coo-^uaTot— 
 
2l6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 t. e. not that they should never die ; but not be cut off by disease, but die of old 
 age. So Dio Cass, xlvii. 44, xoiipTis. Is this very slight, or vain, fond hope? 
 
 Chaptee LII. — (a.) 'i,irlftrf. Plat. Per. c. 34; Lucr. vi. 1257: 
 
 * Nee minimam partem ex agris moeroris in nrbem 
 Confluxit, languens quem contulit agricolarum 
 Copia ; conreniens ex omni morbida parte, 
 Omnia condebant loca tectaque.' 
 
 71 ^vyKOfiiSi). Cf. Liv. iii. 6, ' Auxere vim morbi, terrore populationis peeori- 
 bus agrestibusque in urbem acceptis; ea conluvio mixtorum omnis generis 
 . , . urbanos et agrestem confertum in arcta tecfca . . . augebat/ &c. 
 oiix ^tTffov Tovs iwe\66vras. A fj.eiuirts for /xaWov. Cf. i. 82, d. The 
 dejection of mind consequent on the total loss of their property would render 
 them more obnoxious to the effects of contagion. Defoe mentions (p. 20) among 
 the aggravations of the plague of London, the great immigration into the 
 metropolis in consequence of the recent restoration of the monarchy, whicli 
 brought together more than 100,000 persons, either for the purposes of business, 
 or in hopes of rewards for past services in the royal cause. 
 oiKtuv ovx vTrapxoviruv. Cf. ad c. xvii. for the number of houses of 
 Athens. The number there given corresponds with the number of heads of 
 families obtained from the calculation of the divisions of tribes for political and 
 social purposes. If each tribe contained three phratrise, each phratria thirty 
 gentes, and each gens thirty heads of families, we obtain 12 phratriae, 360 
 gentes, and 10,800 heads of families. The coincidence is observable. iv 
 
 KaKv^ais irviyripaTs — some MSS. read irpiyepais — 'in stifling cabins,* 
 Thirlwall, iii. 137, 'the stifling closeness of the temporary cabins and the 
 apartments in the towers was more generally pernicious.' Cf. Arist. -Ej. 789, 
 quoted e. xvii. &ptf ctous Gottl. shows to be applied peculiarly 
 
 to the summer season. Cf. Plut. Peric. a.; Arr. Anab. i. xvii. 6. 
 ouBcfI K6(Tii<ji. Procop. B. P. ii. 22, uses the same words. Jacobs translates 
 ' ita ut nulla haberetur ratio ordinis et disciplincB puilicce.' Cf. lib. iii. 108. c. 
 vli. 23. c. ; Polyb. iv. 71; Arr. An. i. 8. 8. Vfxpol i-ir' aW^Aou 
 
 awodtf-fiaKOVT es ^KctcTO — cf. iv. 48, ipopfirjShv inl afid^as iiriBaAdvTes ; 
 Procop. -B. P. ii. 23, tovs v^Kpoi/s ffup-riShv efieWov Stttj irapaTuxoi Kofj.i(iadai — 
 ' the dying and the dead lay mingled in masses' K. Boccaccio says, ' There 
 they were stowed, layer upon layer, like the merchandise in a ship; each layer 
 covered with a little earth.' Virg. ^ra. xi. 207 : 
 
 ' Cffitera, confussaque ingentem Cisdis acervum 
 Nee numero nee honore cremant.' 
 
 Cf. Horn. i7. vii. 336, SicpiTos T»^;8os. koI iv rais iSoir. Lucr. vi. 1261: 
 
 ' Multa siti prostrata viam per, proque voluta 
 Corpora silanos ad aquarum strata jacehant, 
 Interclusa anima uimia ab dulcedine aquarum, 
 Mnltaque per populi passim loca prompta viasque,' Ac 
 
 Til T€ leptt. Lucr. vi. il/O: 
 
Chaf. 52.1 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 21/ 
 
 ' Omnia denique sancta DeAm delubra replerat 
 Corporibus Mors exanimis, onerataque passim 
 Cuncta cadaveribus coelestflm templa manebant, 
 Hospitibus locji quas complerant asdituentes.' 
 
 (S.) i Ti y 4 V a DTai— 'what is to lecome of them.' Jelf, § 427. 35 Matt. 
 § 488. Cf. ^sch. 8. 0. Theh. 297. ej oXiympiav erpiwovro 
 
 Koi Upuy Kal 6ala>v dixolais. B. saya Uphs relates to the gods, So-ioj to the 
 republic. Cf. Luer. vi. 1274 : 
 
 ' Neo jam relligio divom neque numina magni 
 Pendebantur : enim praesens dolor exsuperabat.' 
 
 P. translates it by 'sacra et religiosa;' 'ilia enim sunt diis consecrata, ha;c 
 legibns et consuetudinibus augasta/ Schom. de Com. ii. lo. Boccaccio says, 
 • In this affliction and wretchedness of the city, the respected authority of laws 
 hoth divine and human was almost entirely fallen to decay and dissolved.' 
 
 (c.) v6ii.oi re Tra<'T€j avi/eTttpaxSTjirav. Cf. Procop. JB. P. ii. 23,7rti;'To 
 T6 \m(pi(p9r) tiJte to irepl ras Ta<pas fS/iLfia. Lncr. yi. 1276 : 
 
 ■ Neo mos ille sepulturse remanebat in urbe 
 Quo pins hie populus semper consuerat humari.' 
 
 By the universal law of the Greeks, the burial of the body by the relations ot 
 the dead was considered a religious duty. Even a stranger who found a dead 
 body was bound by law to throw earth upon it (Hor. Od. I. xxviii. 36; Quiutil. 
 Decl. 5. 6 ; .ffilian, V. S. v. 14). And children who were released from all 
 other obligations to unworthy parents, were nevertheless bound to bury them 
 by Solon's law, ^sch. c. Timarch. p. 40. The neglect of this duty is mentioned 
 as a grave charge against the moral character of a man. Smith's Diet. Aniiq. 
 B. V. Funus. Cf. Cic. de Leg. ii. 26, with Turnebe's notes, and Kirchmann de 
 Funeribus, i. cap. i ; Xen. Anai. iv. 2, 23. The Athenians always buried 
 their dead with the feet to the west (^lian, V. S. v. 14, and cf. the appeal to 
 this custom by Solon, ib. vii. ig ; Plut. Sol. 8. 9 ; Pans. i. 40. 5 ; Strab. ix. p. 
 394). o.va.iffx^vTovs O-fjKas. Reiske conj. rarfids, which K. adopts 
 
 — 'modes of burial.' fl^icos would imply the place of deposit of the dead. 
 Poppo shows that Arnold's translation of e^j/cas, ' modes of burial' is quite in- 
 admissible. Cf. Soph. Ml. 895. Why may it not mean, 'they put them into 
 places which, under other circumstances, decency would have forbidden?' 
 T. K. A. explains avaurxivTovs properly as ' the want of shame, evinced in the 
 violation of all the usual modes prescribed by custom, founded on right feeling.' 
 Defoe, p. 66 : ' The matter was not much to them, or the indecency to any one 
 else, seeing they were all dead, and to be huddled together in the common grave 
 of mankind. There was no other way of burials, for coffins were not to be had 
 for the prodigious numbers that fell.' airavn rav iiriTriSiiuv, 
 
 Lucr. vi. 1 280 : 
 
 ' Multaque vi subitS. paupertas horrida suavit,' 
 
 ' through lack of all things fit and proper for the burial,' P. ; ' i. e. wool, gar- 
 ments, honey, ointments, perfumes,' Bl. Cf. Soph. JSl. 894 : 
 
2l8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lBook TI. 
 
 veoppirovs 
 
 Dion. 10. S3; Herodian, viii. 5. 18, K. ivX itvpas aWorpias. Cf. 
 
 Procop. jB. p. ii. 22, Ka! ^s iWorplas 9^Kor ipplirrow fl KavSdi'oi'Tfs ij Pia(6iieygi. 
 Luer. vi. 1 28 1 : 
 
 ' Namqne saos consan^ineos aliena rogorum 
 Insuper instrncta ingenti clamore locabant, 
 Subdebantque faces.' 
 
 So Boccaccio : ■ The priests, with the assistance of the gravediggers, withont 
 troubling themselves about any over long or solemn offices, laid the corpse as 
 quick as possible in the first burial-place which they found unoccupied.' 
 Toij vfi<rayTas. The technical terra for ysK»y the wood for the pyre (Proc. 
 B. P. ii. 23, iurirfiaavTff ; Horn. Od. xv. 321; Herod, i. 50. 86, ii. 107; Arist. 
 Zys. 269; Lucian, de Mart. Fereg. p. 560). Tbx iauTan v€Kp6y. 
 
 The distributive singular, P., who compares the analogous use of aWiiKwr, 
 c. Ixx. 
 
 Chapter LIU. — (a.) wpurov Se fp(i K.r,\. — 'was the first commence- 
 ment of .' iKO/nfoj depends upon ifpfc, not upon ^tt! ir\eW. It has, 
 therefore, the force of opx^ ^*', as in cap. 12. b. i. 93. b, vtttjpkto oyroO, and 
 i. 6, ireVouToi. Aristophanes and Plato furnish abundant evidence that about 
 this time a great change did take place in the manners and morals of the 
 Athenians. This subject, which is one of great interest, is treated at consider- 
 able length in the preliminary discourse to Mitchell's Aristophanes. ' We are 
 not to suppose that this total demoralization was brought about, in the short 
 space of a few months, by the influence of terror and recklessness. This was 
 but the crisis of the cliange. The pestilence determined the victory of an evil 
 influence which had long been spreading. The open practice of the new doc- 
 trines of the Sophists had been repressed by laws, and by the received opinion 
 of good and evil, but now that the insecurity of life and property banished 
 thought of the future, by alike extinguishing both hope and fear, and the 
 general disorder and distress removed all check of public opinion, the doctrines 
 of the Sophists spning at once to maturity, and bore abundant fruit after their 
 kind.' — C. Knight. iriA/ia tis. The indefinite used collectively ; 
 lience, in the succeeding clause, we have the plural participle, Spavres ; cf. 
 Pflugk ad Eurip. Sere. F. 79. aireKplJirTeTo jutj ko0' ri^ov^v iroieTv. 
 Cf. xxxvii. 2 ; Ov. Met. vii. 564. i.yx^<^'''P'>'t'0'' '''^l" ii(Ta$o\-iiv — 
 ' the sudden change.' iyxi<rTpotpov properly applies to that which is sudden or 
 quick in turning ; here, perhaps, transposition, change 0/ places. Procop. S. P. 
 ii. 23, &.^(pl(rrpo<pov t^v fUTo.^oK'fjv. So J^llian, F". S. v. 1 3, ti?!* oStus ayxi<Trpo<pop 
 Ixna^oK^v toC -rpinov fi iiraiyfiv xiA- Cf. Herod, vii. 13. Taxffos rif 
 iitavpiffiis. 07roA.au(re(s koL ^SuTradefas, Sch. itraipeffi^ has the general sense, 
 * use, employment, usufruct * *&enuss ;* therefore irphs ri Ttptrvhi/ becomes 
 necessary to qualify the meaning. Herod, vii. 158. iijiriiiepa. Cf. 
 .Esch. P. V. 83. 
 
 (6.) t!> Trpoar siKaiTtaipt'iv. Jelf, § 670, I. Even when the preceding 
 
Chap. 54.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 219 
 
 verb is coustrued with a substantive or genitive, the nom. neuter of the article 
 is used, especially in tragedy, in emphatical or antithetical sentences, when the 
 infinitive is conceived as standing to the preceding verb in the relation of the 
 accusative, i. e. effect, operation, or intention, as the verbal notion may require. 
 For the use of the dative rf S6^avTi ica\f, see Jelf, § 596, i — the datims 
 commodi. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 137 n. : ' The only exceptions to the general all- 
 engrossing selfishness were some persons of extraordinary generosity, who, 
 from a sense of honour, ventured their lives to attend upon their sick friends. 
 A striking contrast to the sublime charity which has made the plagues of Milan 
 and Marseilles bright spots in the history of religion and humanity.' 
 Ti 4s ouTif — • thereunto profitable.' Karea-Tri—' loas laid doion to be,' 
 
 as T. K. A. says, that was the place it was henceforth to occupy. 
 
 (c.) diuy 8e ^6^os ^ avGpi&irun' t'6fios. See Luc. vi. 1274, quoted 
 above ad Iii. a. Note the absence of the article. ' Fear of God, or law of man, 
 there was none which restrained,' &c. So infra, 62. u. rh jiiv Kpivovm. 
 Jelf, § 708, 1. The nominative participle used absolutely, where we should 
 expect the gen. abs. Cf. Thuc. iv. 23, v. 70; Soph. Ant. 259, <pv\al iK^yx"' 
 <l>vKaica; Matt. O. G. § 562; and compare the phrase «. xlix. e, iv r^ S/xolip 
 KaQenTT-fiKet. tuv 8e a^apTi)p.a.Tuv — * no one expecting that he had 
 
 a chance of living until judicial proceedings might be instituted, by which he 
 might be called upon to pay the penalty of his crimes.' The tv qualifies both 
 the participle and infinitive. voKii Se fietC" '''h" ^Sj) Korei//!)- 
 
 (puriiivTii'. Observe that |Hc(fai from its position becomes the yredJcoie, and 
 that the aorist iiriKp^fiatrBrivai implies the punishment was suspended, ready 
 to fall in due time. ' The sentence which was already pronounced against them, 
 ready at any moment to be put into execution, was far greater than any that a 
 human tribunal could award ; and before it fell it was hut fair, upon all human 
 principles, that they should snatch some brief enjoyment of life.' 
 ffiirfffeTii =■ iyKUTacTKij^ai. So Hor. Od. III. i. 17, ' Destrictus ensis cui super 
 impia Cervice pendet.' ' In no age or place,' says Mr. Knight, ' in which the 
 Christian religion has been professed, however corrupted in principle or de- 
 praved in practice (if we, perhaps, except the account of the plague of Florence 
 by Boccaccio), do we find that that general depravity which Thucydides describes 
 has ensued in consequence of a similar calamity. This diflerence can only be 
 ascribed to the powerful efiects produced by the received belief of a future 
 existence upon the minds even of those who, under common circumstances, 
 seemed regardless of such considerations. Among the Athenians practically 
 no such belief existed ; it was the creed of their poets, it was inculcated at their 
 mysteries, but it was devoid of all authority to serve as a rule of conduct.' Cf. 
 Thirlwall, u. b. 
 
 Chaptee LIV. — (a.) TreptvetrSvres. So c. Ixv. 2, jrcpiireff(^vTe! ia^aKi]<rav, 
 used here rather in the sense of the cognate TrepnrfTaa than as in i. 43, TrepiveTrTu- 
 K(fTer, u. V. not. ^jrie'fovTo— as c. Iii. iirU(Te Se . . . fi ^vyKOfiiiii—' were 
 
 sore pressed.' {ItdcKOfTes oi "Trpetr^drepot. A sort of nominativus 
 
 pendens, as lib. i. 49, SeSiciTej ol (TTparriyoi. Abresch. explains it as an hypallage 
 for Avo/urrio-eei/Ter . . . ecpairKov, Cf. supra Kplvovjii. 
 
 (b.) iyeyiTO fiiv epis . . . n'/l- P. says the passage is important as hear- 
 
220 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 ing on the pronunciation of the Greek language. Bl. says, ' not only are the 
 Bounds similar but the ideas cognate,' Ktiihs being always followed by \aifi,6s. 
 Cf Sehol. ad Arist. Eq. 727. ^ir! tov ■!rap6vTos. Jelf, § 633, c. 
 
 The genitive expresses that from which the action springs, and iirl represents 
 tte action as vesting on the object. A(epLK6s. It was literally, as Bl. 
 
 remarks, a war of races, Dorians against louians. KaTaKd^rj. Cf. 
 
 ad xviii. I. 
 
 (c.) /jLPriiJiri . . . Tois eiS6inv = avd/ivriffis. &ve7\e, the technical 
 
 term for the oracular answer. Cf. i. 118, where Thuc. gives the oracle. Cf. 
 Plut. de Pyth. Orac. p. 586; Xen. Anab. iii. i, 6. Hudson quotes Fab. 
 Paulinus, who arranges the answer in iambic trimeters. The connexion of the 
 pestilence with Apollo is of course familiar to every one, from II. i. 
 
 {d.) '6 Ti SJioc /cal eiTeii/. At all events to an extent worth speaking 
 of, for Pans. viii. 41, testifies that it did penetrate into the Peloponnese. Cf. 
 sup. thtTTi KaX KTiiveiv. ^TTev^ifiaTo — 'it ravaged' := dirriKde, Hesych., 
 
 properly of the ravages of wild beasts, conflagrations, and similar calamities. 
 It denotes passing into a neighbour's ground, trespassing. See that remarkable 
 passage, iEsch. Agam. 466, d BriKvs Hpos i-jrivefieTaL. to iroA.u- 
 
 aySpairiraTa. See Grote, vi. 219. Perhaps Chios; hardly Lesbos, or the 
 fact would have been noticed when the revolt of that island occurs. 
 
 Chapter LV. — ereixov. For this use of the aorists, see Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 263, Appendix i. is riiv TlapaXov yriv — 'tJie 
 
 sea-coast district ' of Attica, a triangular piece of land of which the apex was 
 Sunium, and the two points the base of Brauron and the prc:nontory Zoster. 
 It was hilly and barren, but contained the rich mines of Laurium. It derives 
 its importance from the political division to which it gave rise. Cf. Herod, i. 
 59; Plut. V. Solon, xiii. So the ol TcSiaxot, Ar. Fol. v. 5. 9, from the ireSlov 
 above, 8. e. the plain immediately about Athens. Aavplou. Cf. 
 
 vi. c. 91 ; Paus. Att. i. i ; Cramer, ii. p. 375. The miners, Thirlwall says (iii. 
 134), would probably take refuge with their property in Anaphlystus. Cf. 
 Xen. Vectig. iv. 43. 5. bpcL — ' spectat or pros-pectat,' 'looks towards,' 
 
 P. says that /SAeVei is the more usual phrase, while K. says Thuc. never uses 
 ^Kewiiv in this sense, but quotes four passages where 6pav occurs. 
 tiv KaX T6re. The Kol tiSte, as the Sohol. remarks, may refer either to the 
 former or the latter part of the clause. 
 
 Chapter LVI. — (a.) 4v vavffXv Itriraywyol^ irpuTov k.t.K. — i. e, the 
 old galleys were now for the first time applied to the purpose of horse-trans- 
 ports. Cf. Tbirlw. iii. 103. In this counter-invasion, the object of Pericles may 
 partly have been to diminish the oi-owd accumulated in the city ; and perhaps 
 those who went aboard might consider it as a. chance of escape to quit an iu- 
 fectud home (Grote, vi. 219; Diod. xii. 45). 
 
 (i.) 'ETrlSavpov. Epidaurus, now Epidauro, the famous seat of the worship 
 of iEsculapius (v. Smith's Diet. Siog. s. v. iEscul.), lay on the eastern shore of 
 Argolis, nearly opposite iEgina and the harbours of Athens, from which it was 
 distant only six hours' sail. It lies on a smiiU peninsula, protected on the laud 
 side by mountains. It was at an early period a Dorian settlement (though 
 
Chap. 59.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 221 
 
 perbaps originally Ionian), and one of the most flourishing commercial cities of 
 the Peloponnese (Herod, i. 146; v. 83 j vii. 99). Besides Cos, Calydnus, and 
 Nisyrus, it colonized iEgina, which soon surpassed its mother city in com- 
 mercial importance. In the thirteenth year of the war, we also find them 
 successfully resisting an attack of the Argives (v. 53 sq.). Cf. Strabo, viii. p. 
 374; Cramer, iii. p. 270; Smith's Qeog. Did. 5. v.; Mull. JUgin. i. 
 irpoEX'^ /"?"■*• Either supply^ irpoir/3oX); or r) ireTpa, or more probably consider 
 the verb used impersonally. Cf. Iviii. b. 
 
 (o.) riiii 'AKidSa. See not. ad i. loj a. In the seventh year [iv. 45] they 
 made a similar descent on this district (Herod, vii. 137; Cramer, iii. 258). 
 Ilpoo-ias. Both the singular and plural forms of the name occur, as of 
 Platsea. The town lay on the shore, near the foot of Mount Thornax, and was 
 the farthest place of the Eleuthero-Lacones on this part of the coast. The 
 name is said to have been derived from the noise of the waves (fipd^etv). It 
 was again ravaged in the seventeenth year of the war by the Athenians and 
 Argives (vi. 105), and by the Athenians alone in the eighteenth year (vii. 18). 
 Hence Aristophanes say, 'li npainal Tpi<rd9A.iai, Fax, 242. Leake places it at 
 St. Andrew, in the Thyreatis, but it more probably stood at Tyro. Cf. Smith, 
 Geoff. Diet. a. V. ; Cramer, iii. 202. 
 
 Chaptbb LVII. — fiaTTTo/'TOS ija-6dpoPTO. eoTrroi'Tas, as Arnold observes, 
 is used for any mode of performing funeral rites, whether by burning or other, 
 wise (Herod, v. 8, Qdinovffi KaraKavtrai^Tes, ^ &Wcas yy Kpv^avr^s ; Bahr ad loc. ; 
 Gudendorp ad Suet. Dom. xv. ; Tac. Ann. ii. 73 ; Jilian, N. A. i. 22 ; Bl. ad 
 Msc\i. S. e. Th. 1023). It may therefore either imply here, perceived the 
 smoke of the funeral pyres, or saw them burying in the exterior Ceramious. 
 vXelffTov — 'a longer time than in any other invasion.' Cf. K. ad xiii. c. 
 lidKta-Ta. So Iviii. 6; v. not. ad i. 13. 
 
 Chaptek LVIII. — (a.) "k.yvav. Cf. lib. vi. 31, where he alludes to the 
 greatness of this expedition, when comparing it with the armament equipped 
 for Sicily. en iroKLopKoufidj/Tiv. Cf. i. 64. 
 
 (h.) Toiis Trporepovs. The 3000 under Callias (i. 6 1). voffrja-at 
 
 i,Tr6 — 'fell sicTc, having taken the infection from.' 
 
 Chapteb I/IX. — (a.) ijWolavro Grote translates by 'distracted' (vi. 
 Mo),.Bl. hj ' changed their sentiments,' comparing Dio Cass. p. 344. 22. So 
 Xi. and S. It might also imply their being ' deranged in mind,' as Polyb. viii. 
 39. s ; their being ' estranged in sentiment towards Pericles,' or being changed 
 for the worse, as Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 9, ' having lost their former high courage and 
 determination.' The Sch. explains it by p.iTe&\ii6T](rav. K. compares iv. 106, 
 aWoiSrepoi iyhovro ras yvuLiias. P. says the pluperfect implies, 'that their 
 sentiments had become changed, and had continued so for some time.' 
 iv alrlif elxoy- So Si' opyTJs ^x^iv. Cf. ad ii. 8. TepiireirTW/toTci. 
 
 Cf liv. a. IwyX^P^**' — *^^ ^^^'e in, to submit,' evStS6vat, Sch. 
 
 ' Nachgehen,' K., ' to come to terms by makmg eoncessioHS.' Cf. Ixvi. 
 vp4ir$eis. Cf. Diod. xii. 45. 
 
 (b.) TravTax^S^i' '/'"'"" *** ^pressure of untoward circumstances on all 
 
222 NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 sides.' Ijx-iri^ei' — 'expected,' as i. i. a. For the fact, see i. 140. a. 
 
 ^vWoyov — 'an extraordinary assemhly' whicli his position as arpaTTjyhs 
 enabled him to summon, Cf. ad xxii. c. en Se itrrpar-fiyet — 
 
 i.e. as Seidler says, had not yet been deprived of his generalship. Both 
 Plutarch and Diodorus mention his removal from this office, Thucydidcs only 
 the Jine. Grote therefore is inclined to doubt the reality of the former event. 
 He Imagines that the strategi were re-elected in Hecatombaeon ; that the 
 Peloponnesian army entered Attica about the end of March or beginning of 
 April, and remained forty days, i. e. till the first week in May. During the 
 interval that elapsed between this event and the time of his re-election, Pericles 
 convoked this assembly. When the period for his renewal of office arrived, 
 his enemies prevented his re-election ; which might in loose language he called, 
 'taking away the office of general' (vi. 226, n.). Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 142. 
 dirayayiii' K. explains by 'ablenken,' 'to divert.' Bl. translates, 'to divert 
 the irritation of their feelings, and bring them to a calmer and less dispirited 
 state of mind.' iiiridTepoi' refers to their feelings towards himself, 
 
 aiddTipov. The disheartened condition of their own minds. 
 
 Chapteb LX. — (a.) ical 7rpa>rSEX°M^>'4'- O16 might be tempted to tr. 
 * it is even as I expected ; ' but I think the editors are right in connecting koI 
 with the Ku\ before iKKXiiarlav. The dat. irpocrSexof^^vift stands as the dative 
 in such idioms as fiovKofieifois icrri, Cf. r^ irX^flet ou fiouXo/ievcfi ^v, ch. 3. b, 
 Ta TTJs ipyTJs. Rather more general than op7^, perhaps inrficaiiojw o/" o»yer. 
 fi4fi^uiiai. As this is the reading of a large majority of MSS., it is quite 
 useless to read fie/itf/ofiai with Bekker, who indeed gives the subjunctive in a 
 similar collocation, viii. 109. 
 
 (b.) opQovjxivriv. As the antithetical word is tTtpa\Koix4vriv — tripped up, 
 overthrown, the metaphor here is not from a vessel proceeding in a straight 
 course, bat from a person retaining an upright position. Cf. 2 Tim. ii. 15, 
 cum comment. opfloTo/ioCcTa. I) /cofl* '^Katnov evvpayovaay — 'than 
 
 when prosperous in the case of individual citizens.' Livy has a well-known 
 imitation, ixvi. 36 : 'Kespublica incolumis ct privatas res facile salvas praebet; 
 publica prodendo tua nequidquam serves.' Ka\u; (fnpipLtvos — 
 
 ' when it goes toell with him.' T. K. A. rather, ' when he is going onprosperouslg,' 
 like a vessel with a favouring breeze. Cf . v. 1 5 and 1 6, and Xen. (Econ. v. 
 17, fi ^pepofievTjs rns yeeopylas ^ppuvrcu KoX at &\\ai r^xvai S.vaffat, quoted by 
 Kriig. SiatroJ^erat — ' is enabled to carry out his own preservation.' CC 
 
 sup. ch. 40. u., ^iB^i^yetv. 
 
 (c.) (iir<!Te. Used as we ourselves use when for since. See Krvig. on Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 2. 2. -rks ISlas. If we do not, as Kriig. suggests, read 
 
 *5/o, tr. 'private calamities,' i. e, calamities of its private citizens. We have 
 Toi ISia Siaipopa, sup. ch. xxxvii. ; but see i. 68, -rCiv lila Sia^6pav. 
 aiivKiv. Note the active voice — 'ward off evil from her,' come to her aid. 
 The junior student must carefully distinguish from afiireirSai, 'from ourselves.' 
 Kal fiii K.r.\. — ' and not do what you are doing now, letting go your hold of,' 
 Slc, iKfilfaBe must not be altered as in some MSS. to a(^(e<r9ai; 
 
 for It is epexegeticnl to Sparc. Popp. refers to Hermann, ad Vig. p. 759 ; Xen. 
 Cgrop. i. 6. 19; Pflugk. ad Eurip. Sec. 178. ^vviyvuTf. So used 
 
Chap. 6 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 223 
 
 vii. 73 — ' 'United with me in determining,' Of. ^mZUyvtuTi infr. c. 64. a. ; ii' 
 airtas ex""6, cf. i. 18. a. 40. c. ; and Si opyfis fx^iv, v. 29. 
 
 (d.) 7j'£j'ai Tck S^ovTo — ' <o i»OH) what the interests of the state require.' 
 Popp. has collected a large number of passages where a similar statement of 
 qualifications is found. The best illustration of the whole is supplied by Arist. 
 Wiet. ii. I. 3. ^iK6T!o\ii~' patriotic' 'Some grammarians have 
 
 objected to this word, as not Attic. Duk. ad vi. 92, has shown that it is.' 
 Popp. For some most interesting remarks on the nature of ancient patriotism, 
 see Comte Franz de Champagny's Les Cisars, ii. 391. ;tpr;/iciTii?>" 
 
 Kpiiffaav — a somewhat elliptical form of speaking — 'superior to the influence 
 of bribes' The converse xPW^'rw" ^aaav occurs Arist. Plut. v. 362. 
 ^v XiT<^ iffTX Ka\ fi^ il—^' perinde ac si non' ' is in just the same position as 
 if he had never had the conception ;' on ^yedu^^^i?, cf. supra 40. b. 
 afitp6T€pa — 'both qualifications' ovk hv ofxotas. So. &trnfp €i 
 
 tpiKSiToKis fXri. oiKilas — ' convenienter,' ' e re civitatis' Popp. and 
 
 others. I think the use of the word is to be explained by what is said i. 70, 
 Tfj yvtii^Tf oiKeioTaTp 4s rh irpaffffeiv Ti fiirJp auT^y (ttjs Tr6\i(es) xpuvTat^ and 
 here, therefore, o'tKelas will mean ' as if they belonged to it, and took its in- 
 terests to heart; loyallyf dutifully' rov 3e — i. e. rov eHvov rf irtfAei, 
 which is also the subject of ytnajieuov, at least I do not see the use of introducing 
 an avTov with some editors. Similarly iruXoito is passive ; 'all would be bartered 
 for this one thing,' sc. XP'JM'^'''"''- The genitive is that of price, which is cor- 
 rectly explained, as in Latin, by the ellipse of 'pretio.' toC ye iSmetr 
 =: ' to have injured,' T. K. A. Why so ? This sort of comment seems to me 
 to introduce unnecessary confusion and uncertainty into the student's mind. 
 It means to be a wrong-doer, to stand to yon in the position of a wrong-doer. 
 See note supra on irAouT^trcit, xlii. c. 
 
 Chapteb LXI. — (a.) koI yip. The connexion is, 'I am innocent, for 
 circumstances forcecj us into war,' Kriig. a'lpeais yeyivrirat — 'when 
 
 the choice between peace and war has been offered to them.' e 1 Sf 
 
 aca^Korvii' ?iv puts the case hypothetically, with an assumption of its occur- 
 rence — * but say that it was necessary either to give way at once, and submit to 
 one's neighbours, or at the expense of peril to come successfully out of the contest ;' 
 the participles without the article as usual indicate the condition under which 
 the following verb is predicated. 6 tpvyiiv k.t.\. — 'why then in that 
 
 case the man who has shrunlcfrom the danger is more censurable than the one 
 who has stood to face it.' 
 
 (6.) 6 aliris eifii — 'the same in opinion,' sc. t^ yvip.ri, as iii. 38, where 
 the words are found. ovk 4^i(rTafiat — ' X do not withdraw from it.' 
 
 u.eTtt$dW€Te, sc. riiv yv^/iiiv, lit. transfer your opinion to the other side; 
 you (emphatic) it is who change, Kriig. cites as another instance of fifTaPdWa 
 without an expressed object, Isoc. iv. 125, toitovtov neTafiep\-l)Ka<rii/ Sirre tois 
 Tro\ir€tais iroXefiouirt. Cf. Plat. JJcp. 564 A. aKepalots. Somewhat 
 
 poetical — 'scatheless.' t^ viiercpif. Kriig., from Lobeck ad Soph. ^/'a*. 
 p. 74, remarks that 6/xeTepos generally is rendered conformable in construction 
 to the governing word : tr. 'your infirmity of purpose.' cxf'—'pain is in 
 
 possession of each man's feeling,' D. I should prefer understanding e^^i as it 
 
224 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 )ia9 been previously explained, i. e. nearly equivalent to jrape'xei. Cf. ch. 41. b, 
 and tr. 'the annoyance maTces itself felt in each man's case.' -rh 
 
 \viTovv is not 'pain' in the abstract, but that which is now paining you. 
 fLeTa$o\ris — ' a great reverse of fortune, and that too all of a sudden.' 
 raireivii. See note on o\iyiuaii.iveiv, i. 50.6, and tr, ' not hold enough to persist 
 in ;' but ijKapTepfTv also implies the notion of endurance — endure to the end. 
 We should have rather expected oTs than a, as the figure called Attic attraction 
 generally has place in such collocations. But. Popp. quotes Svy^covTai & tui 
 yvuffiV iyKaprepeii/. 
 
 (c.) rh TrXila-Ttf vapaK6y<f fujuBaij'oc — 'thai which occurs with the 
 greatest contradiction to our calculations ; the greatest unlikelihood.' So we have 
 ToO vohe/iov rhii ■napoKoyoi', i. 78. infra, 85. a. I see no occasion for Kriig.'s 
 conjecture, jr^eiffTi)). Tcjj. vphs -rots 6.K\ois. This refers to the 
 
 devastation of their lands, and their crowded condition in the city. 
 <pt.p6yT]ii,ii. a. i\r^vaL, mii ch. 62, ' enslaves a high spirit.' ovtj- 
 
 viXots — 'that are a fine match;' here, ' of correspondent character' 
 iL^iwffiv. As in i. 69, ii. 37; and cf. a^iio^itnos atpcwelt^, xxxvii. b. sup. 
 uTTopxoi'O'TJs 5<i|7)r. This gen. depends upon iWeiirei. See note on virap. 
 Xoi(T7is ^vffitcs, ch. xlv. — * that reputation which is properly his/ i. e. which 
 attaches to him as a property, and which we look for naturally in him. So t^j 
 /A^ irpoin}Kovffris is 'that to which he has no claim.' airaXyfiCavTas. 
 
 See note on a7roXo^ypa/A«i/oi, c. 46 ad fin., and tr. * having done with grief about 
 your private affairs.' otvTtXa/jL^difstrdat. Sc. XP^^*' — 'lay hold of 
 
 instead ;' i, e. address yourself instead to. The word is used in the LXX. for 
 taking the feeble by the hand. See also avTiKapL^ayovTiu, supr. ch. 8. 
 
 Chaptbe LXII. — (o.) "rhv nivov. This would formerly have been de- 
 scribed as an accus. absolute; and indeed even now in translation we are 
 compelled to say ' with regard to your labour in the war ;' yet it is best to 
 consider with Popp. and Krug. that the words are in grammatical combination 
 with ciircS^ifa inro-nTevdiJiivov, as if no such parenthetical statement as apxilra iv 
 oXs had intervened. We should say 6 v6vos tmoirTeveTai p.^ yevTjrat xoAus, as 
 well as AnoTrnveTai fi^ & tt6vos yevrirat voKvSj and therefore anrtSsi^a Thv tt6\spov 
 ovK dp6as vir(yjrT€v6fjLevoy is a legitimate way of speaking. kuI iue'tva 
 
 — ' even that to go no farther.' Cf. with this way of speaking, Virg. Eel. iii. 50, 
 
 ' Audiat hsec tantum, — vel qui venit ipse Palsemon.' 
 
 hriXdiffa 5^ KaX T(J5e k.t.X. — ' I will also put before you this fact, that you 
 possess a circumstance,' &c., T. K. A. As it is not very clear to me what 'the 
 fact of possessing a circumstance ' may be, I should prefer to make the con- 
 struction Sri\dia-a riSf imdpxov — ' I will show that this advantage attaches to 
 you.' The next words, p.iye8ovs nepi, follow rather awkwardly, but I take them 
 quite parenthetically {on the score of extent), i. c. pointing out what is implied 
 in the ti(Sc, and standing as a sort of epexegesis to it ; then is apx^y is 'for 
 dominion,' or 'for empire,' i. e. for maintaining it. Others, as T. K. A., interpret 
 fieyeBovs trepi, 'connected with the extent of your empire.' o&t' iy^. 
 
 Popp. supplies iviBu/^-liBriy, but surely Pericles did not mean to say that, great 
 statesman as he was, he hud never considered so plain and patent a fact before. 
 
Chap. 62.] NOTES ON TH'UCYDIDES'. 225 
 
 Besides the adjunct, iv Toh Trpli/ A ((701s points to something else. We must 
 therefore understand ixpv'il'-'n'') or some notion contained in it, ' have in no 
 former speech availed myself of it as a means of persuading you.' And why ? 
 ' Mecanse ike pretension which it involves is somewhat of a boastful character.^ 
 Surely these words are sufficient to show that he had had the conception in his 
 mind. See note on iveBvfi'fiBri, ch. xl. b. 
 
 (6.) ^t:pu)v — 'those parts of the world open to man's use.' So viii. 46, he 
 spealcs of rh ttjs $a\dcrar]s }iipos. There is no necessity to conjecture KriitTiv. 
 The expression is quite general, and probably one of common parlance. 
 veVeo-^e. Cf. i. 2, a. 
 
 (c.) 0atTi\ihs and %6vos stand in contrast, and are more emphatic sine 
 articulo — ' there is no one, he it Icing or he it nation' See supra, 53, c. i.Wo is 
 used as it very commonly is, in the sense of hesides. Kara xpefcn' — 
 
 *in respect of the use of/ tr. * this power is not to he found in your having the 
 use of your houses or your land, which you thinh great things to have been 
 deprived of — or Kara may denote comparison, 'is not a thing you should com- 
 pare with.' 
 
 (d.) avTmv—'for the sake of them.' Matth., § 368, and Jelf, § 488, 3. 
 *Most of these genitives of the cause or aim of the action, were formerly 
 explained by an ellipse of etewa or x^P^^' naXKov 9i ov. A good 
 
 instanne of the idiom called redundant negative. See i. 95. Popp. quotes 
 Hermann, ad Vig. p. 799; Hartung de Fart. ii. 170; Matth. § 455, 3, to 
 which we may aid Jelf, § 749, 3. But perhaps the best discussion upon the 
 subject is to be found in Buttmann's able appendix to his edition of the 
 Midias, Excursus xi. p. 149. His principle is, — 'Ratio hujus usus commod^ 
 in plerisque videatur explicari ita, ut respectu verbi negantis infinitivus iste (ov, 
 as here, it need not be an infinitive) cum negatione non sit instar objecti, scd 
 adjectus tantum ad exprimendum effectum ;' i. e. when the result is negative, 
 a negative is associated with it, even where a negation belongs to it from the 
 previous part of the sentence. So in the French idiom cited by Jelf, § 749, 
 — 'il n'ecrit pas mieux cette annee-ci qu'il ne faisait I'annee passee.' 
 KijTTioj/. It has been supposed that this refers to =. particular way of dressing 
 the hair. The French translation of Zevort has ' la panire et I'ornement.' 
 The more usual interpretation is a garden, or pleasure ground. The German 
 tr. ' ein Lustgdrtchen.' Popp. says • noti Athenis recentioribus temporibus amani 
 Epicuri hortuli, et alii.' This is true, but only of ' recentiora tempora.' On 
 the want of taste for the picturesque, and its imitation by horticulture, &c., 
 among the Athenians, see note on Krjnos, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 164; 
 Bekker's Charicles ; Kitto's Palestine, p. 26 ; Card. Wiseman's Lecture on the 
 subject. eyKaWcoTrKTiia is, says Bl., a very rare word, which I 
 
 have not observed except in the later historians (PrOcopius, &c.). Probably 
 their adoption of it arises from an imitation of the present passage. Bl. tr. 
 •gay embellishment.' Trp6s. Cf. Jelf, § 638. irpocKe- 
 
 Kr-riiiiva. So the majority of MSS. Others, however, read TrpoKeKTijpeVa. In 
 fact MSS. vary so continually between these two prepositions when found in 
 composition, that I should generally have little scruple in adopting that which 
 gave the best sense. The latter would here mean what he has been possessed of 
 before his reduction to slavery, and this Krus;. and Engelman's editions give. 
 
226 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Popp. and Bl. retain the former, and explain whatever we are possessed of in 
 addition to freedom ; but I believe the expression may imply no more than 
 acquisitions. Bekk. edits irpoatnTriiiiva, from an old Ionic perf. eKTiniai, on the 
 ground, I suppose, that copyists would not have invented such a form ; but in 
 a case where so many variations are known to occur, this looks like hyper- 
 criticism, fiii x^h""^- Cf. supra, xlv. b. Kar' 
 i.liij>6Tepa — i.e. as explained afterwards, itoTi rh Karatrx^^" t"' Stair tiff ayres 
 TrapaSiS6i/au That Kareffxov means retained their hold upon — maintained, 
 seems clear from the elements of which the word is composed, and from the 
 passages quoted by Popp. 
 
 (e.) KTaiidvov!. Note the distinction from KexTiifievovs, and tr. 'fail in 
 the attempt to acquire/ (ppov-fi/iart , . . Karaippoviifiari. Or 
 
 course the play upon the words is obvious, but I have seen no very successful 
 attempt to keep it up in translation. ' Not only with spirit, but also with a 
 spirit of contempt,' D.; ' Non-seulement avec con/ianee, mais avec dedain,' Zevort; 
 ' Nicht nur mit Selbstachtung, sondern auch mit Verachtung,' Engelman. Dis- 
 dain is, I think, the nearest English word to KaTatpp6vT]ij.a, as here nsed. 
 Dionys. Hal. reprehends the verbal jingle. Certainly it scarcely suits the 
 dignity of historical composition, but these words were supposed to be addressed 
 to an audience of very mixed character, and carry an air of authenticity with 
 them. aBxi?/"!- Krng. v/el\has 'prahlerische Keckheit.' It is not 
 
 easy to render into English, but the word contains the idea of a braggart, or 
 boastful confidence. Cf. vii. 66. yvti^ri TTianiri — * has a confidence 
 
 grounded upon judgment.' K<na<pp6i''qms. It certainly is possible 
 
 to supply ixeiyqi with the Scholiast as the antecedent to 8i ; but it is more, I 
 think, in accordance with the style of Thuc. to translate as Kriig., ' but it is 
 contempt, when a man,' &c. Cf. Jelf, § 829, 2. airh ttjs Sfioias 
 
 Tvxvs — ' where fortune is the same on one side as the other;' ' a fair stage 
 and no favour.' For OTrk see i. 91, 6, and compare ix tov S/iotov, iv. 10, 
 with iic ToC tmep^povos, which I suppose means proceeding out of a spirit 
 which disdains the foe ; having its origin in a disdainful spirit, according to the 
 true meaning of the preposition. D. has * with a high spirit.' 
 ^X^pt^T^pav wopexfTai — ^guarantees boldness (as in such cases) more secure.' 
 iKTrlSi T£ K.T.\. See this translated i. 9. a. oiri toiv u-rap. 
 
 XivTuv — 'proceeding from (i.e. grounded upon) existing resources' Popp. 
 writes, ' ri vTrapxovra esse prjesentem rerum copiam, opes prmsentes, pluribus 
 docet Gail.' I would not therefore, with D., render ^re»e«i realities. 
 Trp6voi a — 'forecast.' 
 
 CnAPTEB LXIII. — (a.) rip Tifiaiiievip ttjs ■jr6\eus — ' the honour received 
 by the state.' Cf. note on ti^ 11^ fie\iTavri, i. 14, 2, and Jelf, § 436. y. 
 uTTtp airavTes. One good JIS. has ^ inrsp Hirai/Tas, which Kriig. does not 
 disapprove, and which the German translator has adopted. Ml5e vofilffai 
 
 K.r.K, — 'nor consider the struggle to be about one matter simply, whether you are 
 to have slavery instead of freedom, but that it also respects the loss (lit. depriva- 
 tion) of empire, and peril on account of the animosities which you have incurred 
 in its exercise,' i. e, with most nations it might be a simple struggle whether 
 they were to be freemen by victory or slaves on defeat ; but to the latter you 
 
Chap. 64.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 22/ 
 
 would have two aggravations: (1) the loss of a dominant position; (2) the 
 peril which arises from the animosity engendered by it. S>v is certainly 
 
 neuter. Upon this usage of cnrexeimiiai see a good note by Wnnder, (Ed. S. 
 259; Jelf. §483.4- 
 
 (A.) TiiSe. Since this must refer to ri iK(TTTJnai t?s apxvs, it cannot be 
 governed by SeSidis. I should therefore take SeSiiis independently and connect 
 T(i5f with aifSpayaBi^eTai — ' if in his present alarm, any one is for playing the 
 good quiet man, in this way' The passages quoted by Popp. do not at all prove 
 that avSpa.yaelCc<rBai cannot take an accusative ; I interpret Kortb t6Ss ' in respect 
 of this point,' nor does it seem to me necessary to read t^Sc. Cf. iii. 40. 
 
 (c.) (iis Tvpavviia. Because Cleon, iii. 37, repeats the sentiment without 
 01s, Dobree would strike the word out here. But, as the editors observe, 
 Pericles would probably put forward the notion less coarsely than Cleon. 
 ol rotovTOi K.r.K. The sentence is somewhat elliptical, 'k6mv a-jToK^ffaav 
 belonging to both clauses. ' People of this sort (sc. 01 oi'SpayaBifcfuei'ot idSt), 
 either when living where they could influence others {i. e, when members of a 
 community like Athens), or when independent and left to their own devices 
 (as in a colony), would most speedily play mischief with the fortunes of a 
 state.' Th yap iirpayiiov k.t.K. — 'for quiet is not maintained exeept 
 
 when it has the power of action for an auxiliary (met. from the disposition of 
 military forces), nor is it in a dominant city that it is of any use, but in a sub- 
 ject one, to insure security in one's submission' (or unmolested submission). This 
 I believe to be the force of this somewhat difficult passage ; rb dnpayfiov is the 
 subject of ^v/iipepei, for we cannot, as might seein natural, make the subject to 
 be a(T(paMos SovXeveif without forcing the meaning of these words. What would 
 be a(r(l>a\(as SovKeveiv in an &,pxovaa Tr6\ts ? Gottleber quotes from Dem. uitK 
 ijSvrffdT] Trt^troTs t^v ir6\iv oi/Sels e/c iravriii Tov xp^vov Tretirat toIs i(Txvovtri fi4v, fi^ 
 SlKata 5e Trpdrrovo'i, Trpoadefiet^Tjv autpaKtos SovXevety (p. 18, 203). 
 
 Chapteb LXIV.— (a.) irapayia-Be. The preposition, as often, may exert 
 the same force as the Latin se-, away from, i. e. what is right ; hence tr. seduced. 
 Or it may mean ' be not brought over to their way of thinTcing.' Cf. i. 29. c. 
 \vv^iiyvtf>T^. Cf. ii. 60. i;. ei Kai — 'if, as has turned out to be the 
 
 case, true though it he that,' &c. Popp. considers that these words continue 
 to exert their force ou intyiyevrirai re. I am inclined, however, to think that 
 the latter is quite an independent clause; had it not been so, Kriig. contends 
 Thuo. would have written Ka(, not Te. eXjriSos. Cf. i. I. On the 
 
 whole Bloomf. well compares Tacit. Agric. 27, 'Iniquissima hsec bellorum con. 
 ditio est ; prospera omnes sibi vindicant, adversa uni imputantur.' 
 
 (i.) liipos ri. Cf. i. 74; Jelf, § 579. 4. naWoi', sc. still mor8 
 
 than had you only been exasperated by the loss of your land. 
 avayxatais — ' as a necessity, as a thing that cannot be helped.' On this particu- 
 lar usage of the adverb, see note on iii. 40 ; and on the sentiment, Soph. Fhil. 
 I2f6. eV edet ^v — ' was the ivay of this state, was habitual to it.' 
 
 Kriig. cites cV toiJt^ t^J rp6iTcp ovres, i. 8; 'and now let it not find any impedi- 
 ment in you,' i. c. let not the continuance of the good custom meet with an 
 obstacle in you. Nothing is gained that I can see by the conjectures KoKovSy 
 or KaraXvB^. 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 (e.) is oifSioi'. Tliis occurs again, iv. 63, but is, as Krug. remarks, rare. 
 It belongs to the somewhat poetic tone into which an orator naturally falls 
 when excited. vvv Trore^-' nunc tandem aliquando.' Popp. 
 
 {nrevSSitiev. The Schol. explains vTroxa\da-a>iiev, 'give way a little.' 
 KoX i\affirod<r8ai, i.e. as well as to experience the opposite. 'AH human 
 things wane as well as wax.* /carafe Xe£i|/cTai. On these so- 
 
 called paulo-post futures, see Matth. § 498; Rost, 116. 9; and Jelf, § 407. 1. 
 'E\A^v<atf. The construction passes from the participle to oVf, as sometimes 
 from the infinitive, and vice vers^ from on to the infinitive. See Popp. here, 
 »nd on i. 87; or with Kriig., we may consider that the clause follows /ii-^/ii), 
 ;is explanatory of what is implied in it, ;. e. ' the memory thai we as GreeTcs over 
 Oreelcs hat^e held the largest sway.' On the Athenian Empire, see i. 80. Bloomf. 
 from want of appreciating the true aoristic force of ijp^afiev would refer these 
 words to a period twenty-seven years before the war. But Pericles did not 
 mean to speak of the power and glories of Athens as in any way past, and, as 
 has been remarked, oven if ^p^anev were strictly here a past tense, it might 
 have been used in reference to the future KaraKeKfl'fieTai. Trp6s re 
 
 ^vfxwavTas Ka\ Kad* iKotrTous — ' agaitist all collectively or severally ;' anin- 
 stance of the disjunctive tJ Kai, two cases are supposed, and these happen to 
 differ. It is hyperbolical to say that they had ever fought the Greeks collectively, 
 though such language might well be used by an orator respecting the Pelopon- 
 uesian league. Buttmann quotes this passage in his lexicographical notice of 
 Kara (Dem. Midias, p. 185) as an instance of the fact that such phrases as 
 Kafi' fKatrrovs become almost substantival in their nature, and therefore stand in 
 clauses as nouns, and wi;h the government of nouns; e.g. 'hie, Kaff cKaiTTovs 
 pendet a pvsepositione ■!rp6s ; nam si sine ilia jungas verbo, hoc dicas "singulatim 
 ijjsi restitimus."' See the other civses there quoted, and cf. fanv oTs, and 
 similar phrases. T. K. A. in this passage misquotes Poppo's Greek, and re- 
 ferring to Buttmann without examination, informs the reader that the latter 
 considers the words to stand for Kal tovs Ka6* ^Kaffrovs. evtroptoTa.T'qv — 
 
 ' vlost thoroughly furnished with all things.' fifyla'rTjv, Popp. observes, 
 
 has reference not merely to extent and number of houses, but also to population. 
 It is well known that in Xen. Mem. iii. 6. 14, the houses of Athens are estimated 
 at 10,000. This, counting the inmates of each house, inclusive of slaves, as 12, 
 gives 120,000 inhabitants. The average number of free citizens in classical 
 times was 20,000. See Boeckb, P. .B. of Athens, i. 46 ; Clinton, Fasti Sellenici, 
 p. 387; Wachsmuth, ii. i. 2, § 32. 
 
 (d.) Kairoi. If we are to retain the usual force of this word we must, with 
 Hartung and Kriig. (not as T. K. A. says, ' with Popp.,' who argues on the 
 other side), suppose that it refers to the contrasted notion contained in i it 
 ipav K.T.K. — 'and yet while the easy-going man finds fault with all this, he, on 
 the contrary (Se), who is anxious to he up and doing (or, anxious to effect some- 
 thing), will of himself {i. e. without being urged by me) emulate it.' It must, I 
 think, be from want of duly considering this that Popp. insists upon attaching 
 the unusual meaning ' atqui,' hut now, to the word in this place. See Jelf, 
 §772.1. -rh iitaeTirBiit. Of. vi. 16. e t e p 1 is added, as 
 
 Kriig. seems to hint, for the purpose of indicating that the dominant race pre- 
 Bcrre their distinct nationality, and are not to be confounded with the van- 
 
Chap. 6$.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 229 
 
 quished, iwl fifyiarois — 'for the most exalted oljects.' Csesar's. 
 
 favourite sentiment, referred to by Am., will recur to most minds; cf. Eurip. 
 Fhcen. 524: eifirep 7ctp aiiKiiv XP^> TvpavviSos irepi KdWiffrov aSiKi7v. 
 T] \afj.Trp6TTis . . . S6^a. See note on Granville Sharp's canon. The occur- 
 rence of T6 after the first noun makes it perhaps uncertain whether this pas- 
 sage comes under the rale. One MS. omits the te, in which case certainly the 
 meaning will be, * our present splendour which, will form our future glory ;' or 
 even if the re be retained I am not sure that we may not tr. 'that which is at 
 once both our splendour at the present^ and our glory for the future* 
 
 {e.) irpoyvSvr^s. This is parallel to the expression ^ irpiifoia. avTov i) h 
 rhv T76\ifjLov (c. Ixv.), and is well rendered by Arn., 'providing in your decision 
 for your future glory ;' then is rh airiKa jii) alffxp^v is a sort of litotes — ' what 
 certainly is not disgraceful for the present.' He would insinuate, that though 
 the immediate result of such conduct may appear less brilliant, owing to the 
 suffering it entails, yet brilliant it will be, as securing certain glory for the 
 future. This seems to me better than to say, with all the editors—' rh fi^Wov 
 KaKhv ad T^y ^ireira S6^au et rh avTiKa fi^ alcxp^J^ ad T7}if napavriKa \a^7rp(jT7jTo, 
 respicit.' What sort of a \aij,irp6Tris would that be which was only ouk 
 al(rxpd ? 
 
 Chaptek LXV.— (a.) avT6v. We might have anticipated avr6v, but practi- 
 cally the Athenians may be considered the subject, and we have therefore abrtiv 
 in reference to them. irapaXv^Lv ttis opyTJs. The ace. is more 
 
 common, Kriig. Bl. says the gen. is only imitated by Dio Cassius. May it 
 not be a sort of partitive gen. ' remit somewhat of their anger '■? C(. inf. c. Ixx v. 
 d. Or may it not have avrhv understood, so that the construction will be like 
 irapaKieii' o'Tparri'tT}!, Herod, vii. 38, to remit from military service, and ov Trape- 
 \ii<rav Trjs apx?)!, Thuoyd. vii. 16, did not excuse from his command 1 Cf. the 
 same phrase, viii. 54. Spfi^ifievos — ' having less to start from.' Cf. 
 
 our phrase, a start in life, and see note on i. 144, a. oiKoSo^iois, 
 
 i. e. oUlais. Popp. But does it not imply all the buildings upon the premises, 
 just as we speak of 'farm buildings'?. Editors connect these datives witli 
 Ka\d. On Karaa-Keva'a, cf.i. 10 b, and ii. 16. Jelf, § 604. Arn. remarks 
 that though they might have removed much of their furniture, &c., they would 
 practically have lost the use of it, and that indeed the term would include the 
 colonnades round their houses which were of course destroyed by the enemy. 
 
 (b.) oil jxivTot. 7€. A second statement opposed to di'57r€Wo;'TO, the first 
 being 1819 5e ^AuTroO^/To. Popp. iQTtii.it,i(Tav xP'hl^'^<'iv—'mulctedhim 
 
 in a sum' of money.' The dative is instrumental. Cf. 0vy^ efyp-l'-xrai', iv. 65, 
 and ' pecuniEl mulctatos,' Livy, xxi. 61. According to Plutarch those who give 
 the lowest estimate say fifteen, those who give the highest say fifty talents. It 
 is not very likely that they were exacted. Diodorus speaks of eighty talents, 
 and says that he was dismissed from his office ; this is, however, quite in the 
 tone of the later exaggerations. Thucyd. would certainly have mentioned the 
 fact if it had been true. S tt € p cf 1 \ e I tt o 1 e 7^. Thucyd. repeats the 
 
 sentiment, v. 28 c. and viii. 1. iirirp^-1/i^v— 'turned all their affairs 
 
 over into his hands.' They made him supreme over the nine other (XTpar-nyoi. 
 Like First Lord of the Admiralty, says Arn. Krug. cf . 7}ysii.liiv aiiToKpdTup, Xeo. 
 
230 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Sellen. i. 4, 20, said of Aloibiades. Sv — i. e. Toirav 2. ' The gen. 
 
 governed by i/iSAuTfpoi, ^es* sensitive, like t^s yvdo^i-qs afA.^Kuyt(Tdat, u. Sj, 2/ 
 Popp. ; but, says Eriig., the two places are somethiog different, and he accord- 
 ingly conjectures trepi post casum, supplying Kara ravra before the second 
 &v. Popp. also suggests that Sv may depend upon ij\yei, o, view of the case 
 adopted by L. and S. Lex. in voce, but this construction seems to be confined 
 to poetry. rp elpiiyri, generally understood of the thirty years' truce 
 
 which followed the revolt of Euboea. 
 
 (c.) fi.€Tpi(its i^7]y€7To. Popp. quotes Aristid. ii. 126, tovt6 ia-Tiv ivavrlov 
 Tov $iaias Ka\ Tr\eopeKTiKas. This must not, I think, be understood merely of 
 personal violence and avarice. Thncyd. rather refers to the moderation of his 
 national policy, in not seeking territorial aggrandizement, &c. 
 aafaKiis — ' safe from trips and overthrows.' Cf. i. 69, ad finem, and i. 84, iv. 
 18. ^tt' iKeivov — *w»der Aim,' i. e. his administration. Cf. Herod, 
 
 iv. 114, olK4(ofi€V iiT* Tj/ieuy auTwp, and the passages quoted by Jelf, § 633; or 
 it may be in Ms timet ^s M Aapeiov iyei^sro trKeu koko rp 'EWdSi, Herod, vi. 
 98. Cf. Jelf, ibid. KareffTT). Cf. KaflnTTafie'rau i. i. a. 6 Se. Cf. 
 
 ill. 98. a. This is Se in apodosi — 'he, then, I say.' But, says Kriig., this form 
 of speech is more Ionic than Attic. It was, however, again taken up by the 
 later writers, as, for instance, Arrian ; it resembles the tois Se, to these I say, 
 sup. u. 46. -n poyvohs t)]v Svyafiip — 'having taJcen a far-sighted view 
 
 of its power' i. e. discerned beforehand what its true nature consisted in. 
 iTr€$ta — 'Ac over-lived it.' See the same expression, v. 26. 
 
 (rf.) flepaireiJoi'Tas. Bl. remarks that this use of the word is uncommon. 
 But it is, as Krjig. says, very graphic, being equivalent to the German phrase 
 * hegen und pflegen * — * to cherish and make much of.' Indeed, it might be well 
 employed of the feeling of Englishmen toward their own navy. Cf. also the 
 use of the word, i. 9, Tf8epaTrfvK6T€s rb trhfiBos, and ibid. c. 137, and iv. 67, 3. 
 Kal hp-xhv K.T.X. — 'making no attempts to acquire additional dominion whilg 
 they still had the war upon their hands, nor perilling their country upon a cast.' 
 iv T^ TToKffxip is equivalent to Ojua TtoK^iiovvres, i. 144, a.; and iroXet is the 
 instrumental dative denoting the stake with which they played. Cf. viii. 45,4, 
 a^tovffi Kal Tois ffiifiatri Ka\ Tots XP^M'**^'*' &KKovs virip T^y iKiivuv i\ev6epias 
 KtfSuyeieit', and again, toIs troifiois KivSuvevfiv, vi. 9. In Latin, periclitari aliqua 
 re. Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 25. ^^w toG iro\efiou. This seems a sort of 
 
 technical phraseology, if one might so express it, i. e. belonging to such phrases 
 as t^ai TOV TrpiyfiaTos in the Rhetoric, iii. § 14, and freqiiently in Demosthenes 
 and the Orators, ' which seemed to have nothing to do tinth the war.' Thucydides 
 alludes, as Am. says, to ii. 85, the mission of the squadron to Crete which 
 ought to have reinforced Phormion, the preliminary expeditions to Sicily, the 
 attack upon Melos, and perhaps to the expedition against Boeotia, which termi- 
 natc'd in the defeat at Delium. koto rhs ISias (piKori/ilas— 
 
 ' in prosecution of their private ambitious views.' iTro\lTeva-av 
 
 'they conducted their polity,' or as Arn. tr. 'adopted unwise measures.' 
 
 (e.) aSupdraros. Kriig. remarks that for tiSupos, aSwpoSiKiitos is moro 
 frequent in Attic Greek, Jelf, § 629. 2, 4!\.eu64pus — 'indepen- 
 
 dently,' i. e. uninfluenced by the popular clamour, Kriig ; others, as Bl. and 
 I'opp.. compare 37, and tr. ' in such a way as comported with individual liberty.' 
 
Uhap. 6s.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 23 1 
 
 iiytTO . . . ■^yc. Cf. with Kriig., Plat. Fheedrus. 94 E. Sii rb 
 
 ;tt5( KTc6/i€y OS — ' while Tie made no attempt to acquire,' such is the force of the 
 pres. part. ; cf . ch. 62 e. ; this would be unnecessary perhaps to notice had not 
 Bl. tr. 'because he had not acquired.* irphs jiSovfjv . . . irphs 
 
 opyfiv. These two stand correlatively, and must be rendered alike — the first 
 is, to please them, the second, to make them angry. For the first cf. wpin ^SovV 
 X€7eiv, Soph. Elect. 921. ex"" — 'having it in his power, hy standing 
 
 upon the reputation in which he was held, even in some respects to contradict 
 them irk a way to make them angry' i. e. he could afford to brave their anger, 
 because he knew they would relent or give in ; cf . the commencement of the 
 ch. I cannot persuade myself, with Bl., GoU., Kriig., and T. K. A.'s editor, 
 to translate ■ cum irS,,' ' with heat.' Why should Pericles have made it any 
 object to contradict them with heat and asperity ? Is such conduct consistent 
 with what we know of the calmness of his character ? The above is I see nearly 
 Arn.'s view ; it may be some slight corroboration that I had quite indepen- 
 dently arrived at the conclusion before consulting any commentator. 
 
 {f.) Kar4ir\7iff<r€i' eirl Th (po^e^ffOat — ' beat down their confidence so far 
 as to create alarm.' ' Quare Athenas ejus terrorem timuisse dicuntur,' Cic. Srut. 
 c. II. § 44, Popp. ^yiyvsro — 'it amounted to during his time,' 
 
 imperfect. iirh follows a verbal noun, as it would a passive 
 
 verb. Cf. i. 130. a. outoI fiaWov k.t.A. — ' being more on a par 
 
 themselves with one another ;' instead of auroi itphs eavrois — ' on a par among 
 themselves.' irpdvovTO K.r.K. — ' betook themselves to permitting even 
 
 public affairs to go just as suited the whims of the multitude,' Kriig. For Trphs 
 riSov^v, cf. Soph. M. 1503, Prom. V. 261. rh vpiy/xara — 
 
 'public measures.' The word is preceded by xal because Thuc. implies that 
 they moulded these, as well as their speeches, in conformity with the current 
 humour of the people; for ivSiSii'ai, cf. eVSiSi^rai riiv tt6Kiv, iv. 66. c, and 
 ouTois Ta irpdyfuiTa, v. 62. Bl. less rightly, I think, tr. ' they took to gratifying 
 ^the people, so as to give up to them the administration,' &c. 
 
 Q.) iroWa Tiiiapriieri — 'many blunders were made, and more especially 
 the blunder of the Sicilian expedition.' There is no valid objection to this way 
 of speaking, as may be seen from Popp. quotations, a/iapriiiem %pya, iii. 67 ; 
 ri i^afiapTOfiiv-n irpo|is. Plat. Protag. p. 357. e; why not then irAoDs Tiii.apri\6i\ ? 
 oh Toa-ovTov K.T.\.—'not so much an error of judgment in respect of the 
 persons against whom they went, as that those who sent them forth did not follow 
 the matter up by decreeing what was requisite for the departed armament.' An 
 English writer would have balanced the sentence by some noun answering 
 afxiprritia, but this unsymmetrical construction is introduced upon the principle 
 of variety so frequently noticed. Cf. i. 38. With toTs oixoi^.^vois, cf. t&v 
 oixofifyc", said of the Persians who had gone upon the expedition to Greece, 
 jEsch. Per. I. Some difBculty has been felt about iiriyiyydffKovTes, but I 
 believe the above to be the true meaning here from i. 132, /lii ^Triyv^; i. 70, ri 
 Inrdpxovra adC^iv koX i-KiyvS>vai. fi-nUv. The force of the prep, is less obvious in 
 other cases, iii. 57. Sia^oXi-s—' cabals,' such as are recorded by 
 
 Andocides.' Perhaps Thuc. particularly refers to the intrigues which terminated 
 in the recaU of Alcibiadea. rk wepX ri,v Tr6\iv. Kriig. considers 
 
 that allusion is made to the factions which in Olymp. xeii. i broke out in the 
 
232 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 army itself. TrpcDro!'. Not, I think certainly, 'for the first time since the 
 
 Fisistratidce,' but 'first began the internal troubles ' which subsequently reached 
 such a height. Cf. vi. 53. 
 
 (h.) a.iftaKfvres TrapaiTKfvp. Cf. vi. 10, <r(paKhTmv h.^i6xp(tf Suvafift, 
 Popp. Tpi'o err). It is not clear what three years are intended. 
 
 Arn. understands the three years which elapsed from the arrival of Cyrus in 
 Asia Minor to the surrender of Athens to Lysander, B.C. 407—4. Of this 
 Popp. says 'prorsus ferri non potest.' Kriig., in his chronological work, esti- 
 mates the time as included between the commencement of the seditions in the 
 city till the arrival of Cyrus at Sardis, i. e. from the early part of B.O. 411 to 
 the spring of B.C. 408. To this Popp. objects that if rfia. liiv (rri avrelxov 
 were meant to be opposed to Kiptf re llrrepov, these words would have been 
 written S<rTep6ii te or Se. He does not himself give any other explanation, but 
 seems to regard with favour Haack's conjecture, Sexa for rpia, which is, he 
 thinks, slightly confirmed by Isocrat. Panath. § 57. iSoo-iAews 
 
 TraiS^ Son of Darius Nothus, the son of Artaxerxes. trpocryefofieve/t 
 
 — * coming upon them in addition to all their other enemies' 
 
 (j.) iv ffipiai. Popp. well cf. iv toTs SiKaa-Tais ovk ifiol t6S* ^fftpdxri. Soph. 
 Ajax, 1 137 J but as TtepiTrlwTeip should be followed by an objective dative, cf. i. 
 43 d,, ii. 54, 59 ; he supplies avTa7s from Sicupopils, which Kriig. considers mehr 
 als hart. Kriig. also directs attention to crtplirti/ without uvtHv, reflected back 
 to the nearest subject, which is an Ionic usage, and refers to ii. 76. a. ; iv. 8. a. 
 103. c; V. 14. a. iTripia-ffevtre. This verb denotes the existence 
 
 of a superfluiti/, and indicates that the spirit which the Athenians showed in 
 their difficulties, and their protracted resistance, was so much over and above 
 what Pericles had calculated upon, and consequently a proof that his calcula- 
 tion was a sound one, and would have been verified had they not run counter 
 to his policy. o<^* &i> aurhs irpo4yvoj — 'from the resources of 
 
 which from his own perspicacity he had foreknowledge.' Arn. explains ourij by 
 his own mere ability, before experience proved it to the world.' On HeptKAet, 
 cf. Jelf, § 597. 
 
 Chaptee LXVI. — ZdKvvBov, The name of the island was derived, ac- 
 cording to Pausanias (viii. 24. 2), from Zacynthus, son of Dardanus, an 
 Arcadian chief. According to a very ancient tradition, the Zacynthians, in 
 conjunction with the Rutuli of Ardea, founded Saguntum, in Spain. [Liv. 
 xxi. 7.] It was here that Demaratus took refuge from the persecution of his 
 enemies (Herod, vi. 70). Not long before the Peloponnesian war it was reduced 
 by Tolmides, the Athenian general, and from this time became dependent on 
 Athens (Diod. Sic. xi. 84; cf. Thuc. vii. 57). Its modern name is Zante. 
 yauapxos. This office at Sparta lasted for one year. (Cf. ad c. Ixxx., where 
 we find it continued to him for another year.) Xen. Sell. ii. i, 7, ou i/ifios 
 auTOis 51s Thif aurhv yavapx^'^f. (Manso, Sparta^ ii. 382. P.) 
 ivyfX<^P'>uv. Cf. ad lix. (b.) 
 
 Chaptee LXVII. — (a.) 'Apiffreis. Cf. ad i. 60. 'Av^piffros 
 
 Ka.\ NiK(i\ooj. Aneristus, son of Sperthias, and Nicolaus, son of Suits, the 
 Spartans who volunteered to go to Susa to atone for the murder of the Persian 
 
Chap. 67-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 233 
 
 heralds. Herod, vii. 134—8. Thirlwall, iii. 163, n. 'The romantic and 
 tragical coincidence' of these persons being the sons of the envoys whose lives 
 were spared by Xerxes, ceases, Mr. Grote says, when we remember that the 
 functions of herald at Sparta were the privilege of a particular gens : every 
 herald was ex officio the son of a herald. These two, therefore, being the sons 
 of men who had been to Susa before, had probably talked a great deal about 
 it, and had derived great glory from the unaccepted offer of their lives in 
 atonement, would be the men whom the Spartans would most naturally fix 
 upon, in preference to any others, to fulfil this dangerous mission (vi. 245, 
 note). Mr. Grote also thinks that Aneristus had distinguished himself in the 
 capture of the fishermen on the coast of Peloponnesus by the Lacedemonians. 
 'ApYEios iSi(f ndAA.is. Cf. Thirlwall, iii. 163. 'PoUis had no commission 
 from his own city, but probably represented the wishes o{ a parti/ ;' Argos, as 
 a. state, being favourably disposed towards Athens. See Schol. For the 
 privateering of the Lacedaemonians, cf. Thuo. v. J15; Xen. Sell. v. i. 29. 
 lis fia(Ti\ea. Darius Nothus, Gottleber says; but Darius Nothus did not 
 come to the throne till B.o. 424. It was Artaxerxes Longimauus, whose 
 death Thuc. records in the archontate of Stratooles, iv. 50. Cf. "Wess. ad 
 Diod. Sic. xii. 64. ^ltcIKktiv. Cf ad c. xxix. ef 
 
 TTws TT^ifTeiav — cf. i. 58 — Hf possible persy-ade^* hence eif irots, with the opta- 
 tive, means to 'try to do something," like the epic elf /ce, olfite. Jelf, § 877, 
 obs. 5. 5i' iKeiifou TropevdTjvat — i. e., they applied to him for a 
 
 safe escort to the banks of the Hellespont, their main object (^irsp Hpiinvro) 
 being to get to Persia. Cf. c. vii. a. Pharnaces was satrap of Dascylitis. Cf. 
 i. 129. a. 
 
 (6.) iraparvx^vres — 'who happened to he resident at the court of Sitalces.' 
 Tr);/ ixeifov Tr6\iv rh /i4pos. Sadocus, having been admitted to the rights 
 of Athenian citizenship, would be supposed to participate in any injury done to 
 the state of which he now formed an integral part ; upon the principle that if 
 on? member suffer, all the members suffer, with it. By the exaggeration of 
 his ridicule Aristophanes testifies to the fact of an Athenomania, as Thirlwall 
 calls it (iii. 161, n.), on the part of Sitalces and his son Sadocus, the new- 
 made citizen (Acharn. 141, sq.). This seizure, therefore, of Aristeus and his 
 companions was, as Grote observes, ' a testimony of zeal in his new character 
 of Athenian citizen ;' and this interpretation is fully borne out by Aristophanes' 
 words, Koi rhy Trarep' T]VTi^6k^i ^orjdeTv rp Trdrpa^Ach. 147. It has been made 
 a question whether ri ij.e'pos means ' so far as in them lay' or whether it refers to 
 r:6xiv, and implies a partial participation by Sadocus in Athenian citizenship. 
 Popp. seems to prefer the latter, and tr. ' earn urhem qucB ipsius pro raid parte 
 esset.' So too Goll. ^ urhem qzite ipsius ex parte sit.' Haack, Arn. and Kriig. 
 adopt the former view, and certainly the ordinary usage of p.epos appears to be 
 in their favour. Arn. e. g. quotes i. 74 and 127. We may add Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 
 ■nivTuiv ip^fiovs, TrX)]i> oaov rh <jbv fi-ipos, 1509; (Ed. Col. oifc hi/ ?iv, rh ahv iiipos, 
 1368 ; and similiter Antig. 1049. Nor is the idiom confined to poetry. Plato 
 has, 0: TToiSes rh iric iiipos, '6 n Uv ruxtuo-i, tovto Trpd^oviri (Criton, § 4J). It 
 certainly does not seem that the other interpretation is so well supported by 
 usage ; or indeed by the sense, for why qualify his citizenship at a moment 
 when he was most strenuously asserting it ? 
 
234 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 (c.) irepaitiffetp — sc. lauTotis, used here intransitively ^ Trepai<i(re(T6ai, L. 
 and S. Thomas M. remarks it as a peculiarity of Thncydides. K. from Duker. 
 Cf. 'trajicere.' ^uKKafifidyei, at Bisanthe, on the Hellespont 
 
 (Herod, vii. 137). 
 
 {d.) ipipayyas. P. says that the use of the plural shows that the specific 
 fidpaSpov (Wachsm. Ant. ii. i. p. 254) is not intended. Cf. Arist. Niti. 1450; 
 Plat. Gorff. 516 E; Sch. Arist. Fl. 431; Thuc. i. 134; Paus. Mess. iv. xviii. 
 3. The SipaBpov at Sparta was called xaidSas or xfdSas. See Paus. I. v. for 
 the story of Aristomenes. Cf. Buttrn. Lex. s. v. Krjrcicirira ; Harpoeratiou s. v. 
 fidpaBpof and Spvy/ia; Arist. Plut. 431, Fischer's note. Hence the Athenian 
 executioner was called 5 inl rip bpiy^ari. to7s ainots a/xiyetrSai 
 
 — ' as a reprisal for the captured seamen slain by the Lacedaemonians ' (Grote, 
 vi. 245). Cf. ad i. 42. a. j Soph. Ant. 643, us Kal rhi/ 4xSphi' avTa^ivwvrai kokoTs. 
 In i. 30, and iii. 32, we find similar instances of the killing prisoners of war. 
 vdvras S-fj — 'all without exception.' Cf. i. i. b. 
 
 (e.) Toits /iTjSe /icfl* erepojv — lit. those neither with one nor the other; 
 *the neutrals' c. Ixii. i, Ixii. 2; vi. 45, d. Grote (vi. 243) says, * these persons 
 were probably slain as the best way of getting rid of them and thus suppressing 
 evidence — since to dismiss them, or sell them as slaves, would have given pub- 
 licity to a piratical capture, and provoked the neutral towns.' 
 
 Chaptee LXVIII. — (a.) 'hnirpaKiSiTai. Ambracia was an important city 
 on the north of the Ambraciot gulf, or lagoon, which took its name from the 
 city. Its legendary founder was Ambrax, whom the tradition represented as 
 son of Thesprotus ; but it was made a Greek city by a colony of Corinthians 
 who settled here in the time of Cypselus, about B.C. 635 ; Gorgns, a son or 
 brother of Cypselus, being the /cTio-T-^r. It soon became a nourishing city, and 
 the chief of the Corinthian colonies in these parts, furnishing seven ships in the 
 war against Xerxes [Herod, viii. 45], and twenty-seven to Corinth in their war 
 with Corcyra, B.C. 432 (Thuc. i. 46). Its territory, watered by the Arachthus, on 
 the east bank of which the city stood, extended along the coast for 1 20 stadia. 
 The valley of the Arachthus was extremely fertile, producing excellent corn 
 in abundance. As a Corinthian colony, it sided of course with the Lacedaemo- 
 nians. It became in after-times the capital of Pyrrbus, king of Epirus. See 
 Smith, Oeog. Diet. %. -v. It is now called Arta. $ap$dpav. The 
 
 earliest inhabitants of this province, according to Hecataeus of Miletus, and 
 Aristotle (as quoted by Strabo, vii. 321), were the barbarous Leleges, Curetes, 
 and Teleboae, who occupied several other parts of Greece before the Pelasgi. 
 avaaT'li<ravTiS — 'quum excivissent, ad expeditionem evocassent.' Cf . iii. 7, 
 iv. 77, 80. P. ' Aufbieten zum Feldzuge,' K. The ' solicitare' of Cses. S. &. 
 pass. ''Apyos rh *A/i<^i\ox(K<J»'. The accounts differ as to the 
 
 founder of this city, Thucyd. representing it to have been founded by Amphi- 
 lochus, son of Amphiaraiis, on his return from Troy, in consequence of the 
 discontent he felt at the state of aShirs in Argos, owing, says the Scholiast (ad 
 c, cii.), to the murder of his mother Eriphyle, by Alcmseon, son of Amphiaraiis^ 
 By others Amphilochus is called the son of Alcmaeon, and therefore grandson 
 of Amphiaraiis. Ephorus, quoted by Strabo (vii. p. 326; cf. Apollod. iii. 7 ; 
 Scymn. Cli. 454), says it was founded by Alcmseon, who called it after the 
 
Chap. 69-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 235 
 
 name of his brother, whom the legend, quoted by Thucyd. ii. 102, represented 
 as having colonized the Echinades, islands at the mouth of the Aoheloiis 
 (Cramer, ii. 10). The city lay on the river Inachus, now Ariadha, which 
 tradition represented to be identical with the river of the same name, near 
 Argos, in Peloponnese. [See the fragment of the Inachus of Sophocles, quoted 
 ill the Oxford Strabo, i. 391.] It was twenty-two miles from Arabracia (Livy, 
 xxxviii. 10; or 180 stadia, Polyb. xxii. 13). The ruins of an ancient city, the 
 walls of which were about a mile in circumference, are still visible at the 
 modern village of Neokhori (Leake's N. Greece, quoted in Smith's Diet. Geog. 
 s. V. ; Thuc. ill. 105). The expedition of Phormion here alluded to, probably 
 took place B.C. 432. * Phormio was sent to Chalcidice about October or 
 November of that year (i. 64), and the expedition against Argos probably 
 occurred between that event and the naval conflict of Corcyrseans and 
 Athenians against the Corinthians, with their allies, Ambraciots included, 
 which conflict had happened in the preceding spring.' — Grote, vi. 162, 
 ^p|aTo Trpcorov. Cf. xxxvi. (a.); itp|oAat Se irpStTOV, iv. 87; 6pfai irpuToi, 
 Xen. Ci/r. i. J. 6. 
 
 (i.) oiiK apeaxSnevos. Cf. ad i. 35, a. 'dissatisfied,' followed by the 
 dative, and lib. viii. 84, d. KaTa(rT£i(rei — 'the existing state of 
 
 things — the constitution.' 
 
 (c.) TtWtivlirBi\<jav. Lobeck's correction for k\Kr]vladri(7av without the 
 augment, p. 3S0. The language they used before was a more Pelasgic dialect ; 
 the original dialect as spoken in Argos and Southern Greece after the Trojan 
 war (to TpwiKoL; so ra MTjSiKa, cf. i. 3). But see the note on i. 3 (d.). 
 •yXoKraav. The accusative of 'equivalent notion' (Jelf, § 548, c. 579. i). 
 
 ((i.) IT poffKa\4(raLvr€s Se. a.vavTaTr6^oTov, P. Kal K. says couples 
 SiSeJaffd/ and alpovai. But cf. iii. 55, vi. 64. atpiKOfievov 5e — 
 
 * then 1 say upon the arrival of I'hormion,' hi in apodosi, fifrk 5€ 
 
 toDto — * and it was in consequence of this.' 
 
 (e.) ^x^P"" "• *-'^- H^™"!- "• 81, ^ ex^pi) is'ABiivalovs. Cf. vi. 65. 
 
 Chaptek LXIX. — dpiJ-do/xei/os — 'talcing up Ms station — making his head- 
 quarters.' Cf ad i. 64. b. ; Diod. xii. 47. iKirXiTv. See c. xciii. d. 
 Kpio-alov kSkttov. Properly, the inner sea, from the promontories of Khium 
 and Antirrhium to the Isthmus of Corinth, but see chap. Ixxxvi. 
 ap-yvpoKoyiia-i. — cf. iii. 19; iv. 50 — 'to collect the tribute (or raise money).' 
 These ships were called vavs apyvp6\oyoi. So 5acriio\oye7v, Isocr. iv. 132. 
 t!) \ria-TiK6v. 'Though the Peloponnesians were too inferior in maritime 
 force to undertake formal war at sea against Athens, their single privateers, 
 especially the Megarian privateers from the harbour of Nisaea, were active in 
 injuring her commerce.' — Grote, vi. 243. Cf Thuc. v. 115; Xen. Sell. v. i. 29. 
 *a(r-^Ai5os. A maritime town of Lycia, on the Pamphyhan Gulf. (Strabo 
 xiv. p. 667.) It was a Dorian colony (Herod, ii. 178), situated on a headland, 
 and conspicuous to those sailing from Cilicia to Rhodes. It possessed three 
 harbours, and was an independent state. [Cf. Thuc. viii. 88. 9; Polyb. xxx. 
 o.] Becoming in later times a haunt of pirates, it was attacked and taken by 
 Servilius Isauricus (Liv. xx-xvii. 23). The light sailing vessels called 'phascli' 
 were said to have been invented here ; hence the coins of the town bear an 
 
236 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 image of such a boat. It is now called Tekrova. See Smith's Geog. Diet. s. v. 
 Ti)s ixe'iBiv ifireipov — i. e. ^gypt, especially. Cf. viii. 35, P. 
 
 Chaptee LXX. — (a.) oiSep naWop airavlffratrav — 'failed in their 
 object of making the Athenians raise the siege.' Herod, vi. i^^', ix. 86. The 
 death of Aristeas also depriyed them of their last hope. air 681 — 
 
 (opposed to the former part of the sentence, which refers to what was done in 
 Peloponnese) — ' in Potidsea.' ijSri implies as usual that 'matters 
 
 had come to such a pitch.' jSpc^treois irepi avayKaias — 'with 
 
 regard to the distress for foody' i. e. what their extremity hadforced them to eat ; 
 'in Bezug auf Dinge welche die Noth zu geniessen zwang,' K. (cf. i. 61, b. 84, 
 c). Bl. explains it ' the supply of necessary food ;' hut then ^ptifiara would 
 he used, not $pa(ris. Compare hvayKo^ayia, ' the compulsory diet of the 
 athletes/ Arist. Pol. viii. 4. g, and the comic word avayK6aiTos, ' the parasite 
 who eats anything he can get.' Cf. rod auayKaiordTov S\f/ov^, i. 90, and see note 
 there. aAX^Atuj- — i.e. the dead bodies of their comrades (reciprocals and 
 
 reflexives are constantly interchanged). Cf. Herod, iii. 25, a\\ri\o(payiTi [Arist. 
 JI. A. viii. 3. 17]. Bl., forgetting the siege of Samaria, says that this is the 
 first instance on record of the eating of human flesh, viz. the expedition of 
 Cambyses into .Ethiopia. iyeiovro. Jelf, § 537. Note that the partitive 
 genitive follows. ovrio S-fi. Of. 1. 131. \iyovs 
 
 vpofftpcpovffL. Cf. iii. 109. Trpo(T<pep€t \6yoi^ Trepl airoj/Sajy rtol avaxtapTjffeios 
 AT]fjLofrd4vitt i. 57. 
 
 (b.) x^^H'^P^'^V — 'bleak, coldt inclement.' Ct. Grote's note, vi. 257. The 
 Buflerings of the Athenians may be understood from the preparations made by 
 the Lacedaemonians for their blockade of Plataea (c. Ixxviii.). Sitrx/Aia 
 
 TaAavTa. Isocr. nepl 'AvTiS. xv. 113, says the siege cost 2400 talents. 
 Diodorus says (xii. 46) that before the departure of Hagnon (v. s. Iviii.) more 
 than 1000 talents had been expended. Thucyd. (iii. 17) says each hoplite 
 received two drachmae a day; one for himself and one for his servant. The 
 assailant force had never been less than 3000 hoplites during the entire two 
 years of the siege ; and for a portion of the time considerably greater. 
 is woKiopxlav. The absence of the article makes it equivalent to xp^A""'''" 
 iroXiop/CTjTtKo, without specifying the locality. P. |ui/ ^vl itiaritp. 
 
 'Cum singulis vestimentis,' Liv. iv. 10 (of the siege of Ardea). For similar 
 instances see Paus. ix. i. 9; App. i. 400; Polyajn. vii. 48. As the women 
 always wore two garments (Herod, ii. 36), it was equivalent to allowing them 
 one suit apiece. B. 
 
 (c.) iwTiTida-ayTo. 'Were displeased at the indulgence shown, since a 
 little additional patience would have constrained the city to surrender at dis- 
 cretion (p l&ovkovTo) ; in which case the expense would have been partly made 
 good by selling the prisoners as slaves, and Athenian vengeance probably 
 gratified by putting the warriors to death.' We find, however, that Xenophon 
 was appointed to command in Chalcidice the next year (iii. 17 ; Grote, vi. 147). 
 iTToiKovs. Diod. xii. 46, fU xiAfous olxiiTopai i^mefixj/ai' (tal t^i/ te Tr6\iv kcH 
 riiv xilipav KaTfKKripoixriirav. It was to convey these settlers that the expedition 
 related c. Ixxix. was fitted out. rh Seirepov ^tos. In these phrases 
 
 Thuc. generally omits the article. 
 
Chap. 72.] NOTKS ON THUCYDIDES. 237 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) ouk 4<rePaKov. For fear of the plague, and from 
 the strong desire of the Thebans to be revenged on Platsea. KaBia-as. 
 
 Cf. vi. 66, and iv. 93, vii. 82 ; Eur. Seracl. 664. It is also used transitively 
 in Homer, Plato, and Aristophanes. The penultima is common. Cf. expiffa, 
 Buttm. Cat. s. v. 
 
 (i.) 'ApxiSafie. See Grote, vi. p. 248, for an excellent translation of the 
 speeches in this and the following chap. iK^vBepiia-as li.w6. Jelf, 
 
 8 S3^* obs. 3. ^uvdpaadai rhv kIvSwov. This verb is generally 
 
 construed with the genitive. Cf. iv. lo, v. 28 ; Eurip. Orest. •]■,'] ; iEsch. Pr. V. ' 
 652. i\fvB€p'Lif. Diod. xi. 29, mentions an a-yi>i> ih^vddpws to be' 
 
 instituted at Plataea. (Cf. Pans. ix. 2. 5.) These solemnities were to bo 
 celebrated every fifth year, the victors being rewarded with cbaplets. [dyiii/ 
 ■yviii'LKhs Srpecfiaj/iTrjs, Strab. ix. 266.] Delegates [jrpif/3ou7ioi Kal BeapolJ were 
 to assemble from all the Greek states at Platsea every year to celebrate the' 
 Eleutheria. Of. Thirlwall, ii. 253, &c. ; Paus. ix. i. 4. This annual solemnity 
 continued to be observed till the time of Plutarch (Arist. xxi. ; cf. Thucyd. iii. 
 58), and the image of Zeus Eleutherius was still standing in the time of 
 Pausanias (Harpocration, p. 145). innSiiov. Inasmuch as the 
 
 city had been held by the Persians, and the land around in the occupation of 
 the confederate army. Note the imperfect — he was for granting^ he proposed to 
 grant — as contrasted with i^oirav, iSiKatatirei'. To a-TpuT^vtrat supply 6Ta|€, ' 
 or some similar verb, P. UKaraiTs atr{i\ovs Kal Upovs &^u(r0at r^ di(p (Plut. 
 Arist. xxi.). ^7ri SovKelif. Sed tantum inl afiivrj Kai rifitapia, P. 
 
 € ( 5e ju^. Cf. u. ad c. v. 
 
 (e.) aperjjs Kal irpodv //.ias. Cf. Herod, viii. I, virh Sh etperijs re koI irpo- 
 Ovfiias IIAaTaiees ^ireipoi ttJs vavTLKrjs 46vTes ffvyeirA'fipQvp Toiui. ^h.Bt\vtAoiffi ras 
 yeas. robs ipxiovs. Diod. (xi. 29) gives the formula of the oath 
 
 taken by the confederate troops at the Isthmus before marching northwards. 
 Cf. Lycurg. u. Leocrat. p. 149 ; Plut. Milt. ; and note ad i. 71 (d.). 
 ^yxi^plovs — i. e. Juno Te\fta. Minerva 'Apela, P., from Paus. ix. 2. J ; iv. 1 
 [so Dii patrii indigetes] ; Soph. Ant. 185 (Bothe). 
 
 Chaptee LXXII. — (a.) iiroXa^iiv — 'having cut them short in their speech, 
 when they wished to add much more' Ducas. Gottl. quotes many passages. 
 
 (i.) jUTjSe //efl' iripav. Cf. Ixxii. b. Grote (vi. 250) considers that the 
 Lacedaemonians had previously sent a summons to the Platseans to remain 
 neutral. (Cf. lib. iii. 68.) rh wpirepov, but when this took place, 
 
 Thucydldes has not informed us. iirl Tro\4^(p. As cTri ZovXeit^ in c. 
 
 Ixxi, Ta5e TiiJ.7v cLp4<TKet — ' with this we will be satisfied.' So 
 
 Steph. and Huds. and Duk., but Goller, P., and K. prefer apic4(T£L. 
 
 (c.) tr<hi(TLV ovK eirirpeTTwatv — ' would not permit them to carry out their 
 neutrality.' evopKot iv-res k.t.\. ecop/coi = evcTTroi'Soi, P. The 
 
 expression is rather involved, evopieoi ought to agree with 01 ©ij/SaToi, whereas 
 it is the Flataeans who, by an oath of neutrality, would be bound to admit the 
 Thebans who might then make a fresh attempt to seize on their city. 
 apiB/i^ — 'by tale,' ems hv 6 Tr6\efios ^. Cf. Msch. Ag. 1435, ion 
 
 Uv atBri irSp 4tt' ia-xdpas ipiris AiyiaSos. eas is used with the conjunctive when a 
 present action is conceived as possibly continuing during another action, over 
 
238 NOTES ON THUCYUIDES. lBook IL 
 
 riD indefinite space of time. In this construction it always talfes iv. ' As long 
 as the war lasts, however long that may he,' Jelf, § 847. 3. 
 
 (d.) iraptt.KaTa6i\Ki)v. 'In the interim we will hold it in trust, keep it in 
 cultivation, and pay you such an allowance as shall suffice for your wants,' 
 Grote. Even Mr. Grote admits that the ofler of the Spartaus was fair and 
 tempting ; and the Athenians, had they been perfectly generous allies, might 
 well have granted their consent to the Plataeans' accepting it, for the forces of 
 Plataea counted for little as a portion of the aggregate strength of Athens, nor 
 could the Athenians possibly protect it against the superior land force of their 
 enemies. In fact, they never even tried throughout the whole course of the long 
 subsequent blockade (Grote, vi. 251). 
 
 CnAPTEB LXXIII. — (a.) 4v aTs ci/cis fjv KofjuaSfivai. Allowing them 
 A fair and reasonable time for going to Athens and returning. 
 
 (A.) iy T^ wph Tou. During ninety -three years, which the alliance had 
 lasted (iii. 68). irpbs rav ioxasy — 'th^ adjure you, hy the oaths 
 
 which your fathers swore.' i-niffKrfirrovfft. Cf. iii. 69. d. — *oi- 
 
 testantur.' 
 
 Chapteh LXXIV. — ci Sfi — 'if so it must be.' The present is used be- 
 Ciuise the Plataeans well knew what must be the immediate consequence of 
 tlieir rejection of the offer of Archidamus, not the opt., which would imply 'if 
 need should be.* ivtuaprvpia — 'obtestation,' a solenm appeal to 
 
 the gods, an unusual word. Cf. Dio Cass. 914, 51, Bl. twi' 
 
 dyx^P^""- Cf. Ixxi. d. {i/cio-To/ies iare. Either indicative 
 
 or impei-ative. * I'e are, or be ye, my witnesses.' Cf. Soph. Fhiloct. 1292; 
 Ant. 542 ; Eurip. Supp. 1 174. K. prefers the indie, sense. 
 rh ^uvdfioTOf — 'the oath of confederacy,' = tj ^vvufAOfrla, P. 'Beschwomer 
 Bund,' K. fvfxevTJ ivaywvl(ra(r6ai — ' a favourable field to fight 
 
 in.' Cf. Xen. .4nai. iv. 6, 1 2 ; Herod, vi. 102. In the sense of ' gliickbringend,' 
 as K. translates it, cf. Eurip. JPhaen. 938, and note on ivairoBrnaKeiv, iii. 104, b. 
 (vyyviiiJLOi'fS Sk (are. From the primary meaning of this word, 'fellow- 
 feeling,' and hence ' pardon,' the transition is simple to ' indulgence or favour.' 
 It is here equivalent to ' favourably hear our prayers, and grant that . . . .' 
 This seems to be more in accordance with the usual meaning of the word than 
 Mr. Grote's translation, ' be consenting parties ;' or Dr. Arnold's explanation, 
 'assent to the aggressors being punished.' K. explains it by gewahrt, ' vouch - 
 safe.' The infinitive follows as the object of the verb, marking also more clearly 
 the notion of the e^eoi (Jelf, § 664, 3). aSiKlas. Verbs of requital, 
 
 revenge, &c., take a genitive of that whence the desire of requital or revenge 
 arises (Jelf, § 500). For the attraction in the dative inrdpxovirt, in consequence 
 of the ^iiv in ^vyyi/iiiioves, where we should expect iwdpxoyras, see Jelf, § 674. 
 vpoTcpots — the praedicate, ' who were the aggressors.' K. tois 
 
 iiri<t>4pov<ri vo^il/ias. 'Those who are aiming to inflict penalty righteously,' 
 Grote. ' Qui ultionem petant, ut fas est,' P. 
 
 Chapter LXXV. — (a.) ToiraCra iiTi9eia<ras — 'having made this solemn 
 appeal to the gods,' i. e. having concluded the iirtfiupTvpta of the preceding 
 
Chap. 75.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 239 
 
 chapter. Cf. viii. c. 53, b., where, in the case of the return of Alcibiades 
 Thucydides speaks of the Eumolpidse and Ceryces as /.aprupoM^'™"' ««! 
 4ne^,aC6pT<cv. and vii. 75, in the disastrous retreat from Sicily; oi,K li,,,v 
 ^Tifle.ocrMw.' aTro\iiUi^,poi. Cf. Bloomf., ^sch. Cho. 843; Buttm. ico;. a.,. 
 8a(£(ro-6iv— «7ri9edC€iy is tlie more usual form in this sense. xaBiarv 
 
 is ir<iA6^or. Cf. ad c. i., I. a. ir^pi^araipa,r^p— -invested the city 
 
 with a palisade; Thirlw. iii. 145. The forming regular lines of circumvallatiou 
 is expressed by TrepiTeix^Ce'" (c Ixxviii.). toIs SeVSpeo-iv— j. e. 
 
 the fruit trees cut down in laying waste the land (Grote, vi. 253). |i5Aa 
 
 is the heavy timber obtained from the forests of Cithajron. Cf. iv. 6g, for the 
 same distinction. SeVSpoj, it may be observed, is the Ionic and poetic form. 
 iKoy\iav. Note the change of subject from the general to his soldiers. K. 
 xS/t" eX"""- Cf. Herod, i. 162, of Harpagus in Asia Minor, x'^'l^'^'^'^ X"» 
 irpij rk Tilx^a (■n-6p9ee. Arrian, JS. A. i. xviii. Cf. Jerem. vi. 6, ' Hew ye 
 down trees and cast a mount against Jerusalem;' so Joab, 2 Sam. xx. 15, and 
 Sennacherib, 2 Kings xix. 32. For the construction, see Jelf, § 571. 
 rinvovTfs 4k. Like the analogous phrases KaSi^eiy is, &c., 'felling the wood 
 on the mountain, and fetching it thence.' 
 
 (4.) ToD Kiflaipiiyos. The summit of Cithaeron is still crowned with 
 forests of fir ; hence its modern name of Elatea. Eurip. Fhmn. 802, 3 fofleW 
 TreTriAwy iroXvQjipiTarov v6.Tros . . . KiBaip^v, tpopfi-qhSv — 'like basket 
 
 or wattled work.' (Cf. iv. 48, of the bodies of the Corcyrfeans, where the lower 
 tier was placed lengthwise, and the others piled across them.) Thirlwall says, 
 ' It was piled up with earth and rubbish, wood and stones, and was guarded on 
 either side by a strong lattice-work of forest timber, the growth of Cithseron ' 
 (iii. 145). 'Cross palings of wood were carried on each side of it, in parallel 
 lines, at right angles to the town wall, for the purpose of keeping the loose 
 mass of materials between them together.' — Grote, p. 253. [Cf. Herod, viii. 
 71, the description of the wall at the Isthmus.] ' Kreuzweise,' K. 
 avvTCLV — ' likely to ie effective.' Cf. infra, Ixxvi. a. Kar' ^vairavXas — 
 
 ' in relief parties.' Cf. iv. 1 1, aiiairaiovTes. The first meaning is ' rest' (Soph. 
 PA^/. 878 ; cf. Herod, i. 181). 0/ ^ivayoi:= ^4vtov fnpaTiapxoi 
 
 (Xen. Mell. iv. 2, 19 ; v. 2, 7 ; De Rep. Lac. xiii. 4). The Lacedsemonians who 
 commanded the contingents of the allies. See Thirlwall, u. s. The generals 
 whom the allies sent with their troops were subordinate to these Spartan 
 i^vayoi ; though they attended the council of war as representatives of their 
 respective countries (Smith, Diet. Ant. s. v.; and cf. Thuc. v. 54). Arnold 
 compares the ' prasfecti sociorum ' in the Roman armies, twelve of whom were 
 appointed by the consuls. Lobeck remarks that the Doric dialect is retained 
 in words of a military or musical character; as, ovpaySs, xopaySs, Koxayiis {ad 
 thryn. p. 430). 
 
 (0.) ^vXivov nlxos — 'a superstructure of brick, secured in a framework 
 of timber, and shielded from fiery missiles by a curtain of raw hides and skins.' 
 — Thirlwall, iii. 145. Grote supposes it to have been supported by brickwork 
 behind, p. 254. ^i}cSeir;UOJ — ' Bindemittei; P.; ' JSmfassutig,' K. — 
 
 •acted as a binding.' Arrian, IS. A. i. 18. Sippets Kai Si<j>e4pas 
 
 — ' hides and dressed skins.' Cf. Cass. B. C. ii. 9. sq., the account of the siege 
 of Marseilles, where Csesar describes a wall verj similar in construction to the 
 
240 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 one mentioned here. Cilicia is the word used by Livy (xxxviii. 7) for these 
 skins. Caesar uses coria or centones, 1. u. Cf. Arrian, n. s. w-ho copies this 
 passage very closely. 
 
 (d.) irupcf (ipois o'kttoTs. The 'malleoli' of the Romans (Festus, p. 135, 
 ed. Miill.; Nonius, p. 556). Cf. Liv. xlii. 64, 'Faces taedamque et malleolos 
 stuppso inlitos pice parari jubet.' Cses. B. Civ. ii. ir, 'Cupas taed^ et pice 
 refertas incendunt : eas de muro in musculum devolvunt.' 
 
 Sie\6vTes ToC reixous. Any verb whose operation extends only to part of 
 the objects signified by the objective substantive, may be followed by a parti- 
 tive genitive, so ttjs yjjs fre^ov (Time. i. 30), and again Stt\iii/ reixovs, v. 2; 
 ^vyKa\t(ra.vras ruv &ir\irSiv, Xen. An. iv. i, 26. Jelf, § 533, 3. 
 ri TTpoffeTmrre rh x^^^ — 'where the mound abutted on the wall, they made 
 an aperture and conveyed away the earth, &c., inwards.' Cf. Liv. u. s. 
 
 Chaptek LXXVI. — (a.) 4v rapfro7s Ka\dfj.ov irr/X^c ^veiWovTES — 
 'rolling stiff clay in wattled reeds,' Grote. rapffoX are crates or frames of 
 basket-work. Herodotus mentions the use of these rapaoi KoKdfioiv, in the 
 building of the wall of Babylon (i. i J9, u. v. Bahr's note ; Ar. Nub. 226). 
 KaKa-iiov. Sing, for plur. as Ktpo^ou, u. iv. eVeiA\o;'T€s = impri- 
 
 mentes, infercientes, P. Siaxfo/iefov. The neuter of the participle 
 
 is used, K. says, to comprise the notion of rapffol and vtikSs, or it may refer to 
 ;^ci)/ia understood. Tovro ^ireo'xov. Cf. v. 46, 63; vii. 33, for 
 
 similar uses of the accusative instead of gen. after this verb. Jelf, § 642. 
 
 a. b. OwSvo^ov — 'a mine,* ' cuniculus.' Cf. Liv. xxxviii, 7, 
 ' Cuniculum occultum, vineis ante contecto loco, agere instituit ; et aliquamdin 
 non solum sub terrS, fodientes, sed egerentes etiam humum, fefellere hostem.' 
 Cses. B. G. iii. 21, 'Cuniculis ad aggerem aetis;' vii. 22, 'Aggerem cuniculis 
 subtrahebant.' ^vvreKfnjpdfievoL — 'calculating both the distance 
 and direction, so as to bring the mine right under the enemy's mound.' The 
 ^iv, as K. says, implies 'the result of many calculations.' uirk t)> 
 X«j"a, K. refers i-ather to opi^avns than ^vi/TeKfiTipdfxevoi, X^^^* 
 liumus aggesta, x™^" ftgger, P. ^iro-oi' avvTfiv. Their labour 
 did not accomplish as much as they knew it ought to have done from the quantity 
 of material heaped on the mound, avireiv is trans. ' toforioard the work,' ' for- 
 dern,' K. as above, ft ti SWo anvr e ip /ie Wo i, i^dpoi'TOi — 'constantly 
 settling down.* 
 
 (J.) ri KaTci rh x^/*" — ' directly in front of the mound, over against.' 
 ToC Ppaxfos Ttix""'- From the low, i.e. the original, wall. Cf. vii. 29. 
 
 b. of the wall of Mycalessus, as rh iiiya, reixos is the part they had added to 
 ■rh niya o'Moi6pfiip.a. firifoeiSts. ' They built a new portion of 
 wall in the interior, in the shape of a crescent taking its start from the old 
 town wall on each side of the mound.' — Grote, vi. 255. Most of the English 
 commentators, and Dr. Thirlwall among them, infer that it follows that the 
 walls of Platsea were straight, but surely a semicircle could be described on the 
 arc of a circle. 
 
 (c.) 4y afiipt$6\(f> — 'be exposed to a crossfire.' Cf. iv. 32, 
 naWof. 'More than when only one wall existed,' K. (tori rb 
 
 Xw^a — ' along the mound,' i. e. up the inclined plane. ^ir) /leya — 
 
Chap. TJ?_^ NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 241 
 
 'greaily, violently.' It is perhaps better to translate it thus simply, with Grote 
 than couple it with toO ^^7- <»■«. as Dr. Arnold does, who translates 'as mncli 
 as a great part of the raised wall.' The instances which he quotes from ii. 97 
 and IV. too, are not exactly parallel. We might add M ).iya hvv6.M<^s, i. 48 
 b. Tou ,.^7. oiV. had better be simply taken as the genitive of direction. 
 avUKmv. Betant explains 'sursnm attoUendo convellere,' and L. and S. 'to 
 break short ofif.' K. thinks it cannot imply more than breaking their force 
 Cf.vii. 25. d.; App. Mith. 74; Dio Cass. 66. 4. So GoU. 'avertebant, non 
 frangebant.' 5oko6s ^67,iAaj apr^o-oi/Tcs k.t.A. ' They prepared 
 
 heavy wooden beams on the wall, each attached at both ends by" long iron 
 chains to two poles projecting at right angles from the wall, by means of which 
 poles it was raised up and held aloft.'— Grote, p. 255. to/it; is 
 
 properly 'the end left after cutting;' hence • the stump of the tree,' as Horn. 
 II. i. 23s, ^jr€i5j) TrpSra to^Jiv iv ifiaai \4\otnev; 'the place from which a lock 
 of hair has been cut,' jEsch. Ch. 230; 'the square cut ends of stones,' Thuc. 
 i. 93; therefore here 'the ends of the beam.' Cf. Sch. KepaTai 
 
 are yard-arms, 'eomua antennarum,' Virg. Mn. iii. 549, Msch. Hum. 556, 
 or 'the projecting beams of a crane;' here, 'spars or poles resting on the wall, 
 and inclined at an angle to it,' L. and S. 'Sie hingen an zwei iiber die Mauer 
 gelegte, und fiber die Mauer hinausragende Balken,' K. Cf. Liv. xxiv. 34, 
 'ToUenones super murum eminentes.' iyKapaios—' transversus.' 
 
 They raised them by means of these chains in a direction oblique to the line of 
 wall. Veget. de JR. M. iv. 23, ' Laqueis captos arietes in obliquum trahunt.' 
 Liv. xxxvi. 23, ,' Laqueis eiceptoa declinabant ictus.' Cses. 5. C. vii. 22, 
 'Laqueis falces avertebant, quas cum destinaverant, tormentis introrsns re- 
 ducebant.' ov 5io xe'pis exovres — ' letting them go with a run,' 
 
 as our sailors say. airoKavXl^eiv — 'to hreah offhy the stalk or stem,' 
 
 as the head of a plant or flower. Eurip. Supp. 717. Appian imitates the 
 passage, i. 751 B. 
 
 Chaptee LXXVIL — (a.) -rh avTiTfix^c/^a — 'and the counterwork rose 
 against them,' i.e. 'the crescent wall,' B. and K. ciTri) -rav ■nafivruv 
 
 SeivSiv — 'tvith their present means of offence,' Dale; ' prcesentibus terroribus,' 
 Port. ; ' terriculamentis,' T. K. A. ; ' Schreckzwangsmittel,' P. ; ' under their 
 present circumstances of difficulty ' is Valla's interpretation, approved by Kriig., 
 who would however much prefer to strike out invZv altogether, or substitute 
 another word for it. irphs t^v ireptTeiXK^tv TrapeaKevd^ovTo. 
 
 Prepared to turn the siege into a blockade. oSa-av ov inyaKriv. 
 
 Some of the commentators propose to strike out the negative, as the present 
 state of the ruins seems to contradict the statement of Thucydides. But though 
 the circuit of the wails may be traced near the small village of Kokhla, to the 
 extent of about two miles and a half in circumference, these are probably the 
 remains of the city as restored by Philip after the battle of Chseroneia, B.C. 
 338 ; the ancient city being probably confined to the southern extremity, where 
 Col. Leake discovered the more ancient masonry, N. G. ii. 325. 
 SairivTis. We find above that the blockade of Potidtea had cost Athens 2000 
 talents. Hudson considers this an instance of hendiadys, 'an expensive 
 blockade.' (paxeAovs. The commentators seem to be nearly equally 
 
 a 
 
242 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 divided as to whether this word should be spelt with one A. or two. P. Wassa 
 inclines to the latter; Casaubon, Hesychius, Ammonius, Ducker, Oudendorp, 
 and Gottleber, to the former. In Herod, iv. 62. 67, the best MSS. have one 
 \, which the metre requires in Ear. Ci/cl. 24.2. They first laid these faggots 
 side by side (P. ad loc), letting them down from the mound into the space that 
 intervened between it and the semicircular wall. Am. explains TrapaBdWu 
 to throw beside, hence to throw up, to heap up ; but is not the notion of placing 
 objects heside each other, quite contrary to that of placing them upon one 
 another ? May it not mean ' they placed the faggots side by side along the 
 extent of the wall/ [irpiitrxmiTij is here equal to wp6axiiiiia; in c. 102, it is used 
 for the alluvial deposit of the Aeheloiis. Cf. ^sch. P. V. 849 :] and then 
 threw them as far as they could reach into other parts of the city beyond? 
 'So viel sie irgend auch von der ubrigen Stadt (d. h. Stadtmauer) bereichen 
 kounten/ K., which seems the simplest and best interpretation. 
 ^TTe'xei*'. Cf. i. 48, and iii. 107. vKtj rpKpOiiira — ' hy attrition,' 
 
 Cf. Suid. v. Spvix6s ; Lucret. i. 896 : 
 
 ' At sajpe in magnis fit montibus, inquis, ut altis 
 Arboribus vicina cacumina summa terantur 
 Inter se, validis facere id cogentibus austris. 
 Donee fulserunt flammae fiilgore coorto.' 
 
 a-n' avTov — ' therefrom,* sc. airh rov rpKpBrjvat. 4\axiff'^ov ide-rjffe, 
 
 rovTo is the subject. For this use of the privative genitive, see Jelf, § 529. 1. 
 So Xen. Anab. i. 5. 15, avrov 6\iyov Se-fjcravros KaTa\ev(r67Jvcu, 
 4Trl<popoi'. Cf. iii. 74, 6t &vifios iirfyeveTO rfi (pKoyi ^tr'npopo^. 
 SScop i^ ovpavov. Thucyd., as Grote observes, evidently discredits this 
 story of the opportune thunderstorm. (Cf. the story of Crcesus, Herod, i. 87.) 
 Xen. uses the same phrase for rain, Anab. iv. 2. 2. So Hor. Od. iii. 10. 30, 
 ' aqua coelestis.' 
 
 Chapteb LXXVIII. — ttep leTtf^'Co''- 'There now remained no other 
 resource but to build a wall of circumvalliition round Platsea, and trust to the 
 slow process of famine.' — Grote, p. 256. irepl *ApKTovpov 4-trtTo\ds, 
 
 It is not often, Grote remarks, that Thucydides gives us auy fixed marks to 
 discriminate the various periods of the year. The time mentioned here is the 
 heliacal rising of Arcturus ; i. e. the period when Arcturus rises immediately 
 before sunrise (after the forty days during which it had been invisible, as rising 
 after the sun), sometime between the 1 2th and 1 7th of September, according 
 to Grote and GoUer, or the i8th according to Ideler, i. 247. Cf. Grote n. s. j 
 Gijll. ad loc; Virg. Georg. i. 68. 204, with Forhiger's note; Columell. xi. 2. 
 63; Plin. S. N. ii. 47; xviii. 31. 74; Plaut. iSwd. Prol. 71. Hippocrates 
 also employs the appearances of certain stars to indicate time in medical cases, 
 pi'obably, as Grote says, because the Greek months, being lunar, varied in 
 different cities from the necessity of intercalation, and therefore aflbrded no 
 oue standard of time. Hudson cf. Scaliger ad 3/a»!7(«)n. ^jri- 
 
 To\a,l. Cf. Lobeck, PAryjj. p. 124. sq. ri oxP *''"'• Cf ad c. 
 
 vi. a;^pe(OTaTovy. ffironoioL [Cf. vi. 22. 44.] Not that their 
 
 duties were confined exclusively to the preparation of food. They no doubt 
 
Chap. 79.] NOTES ON THUCYDIBES. 243 
 
 acted as nurses, dressed the vvounds, and tended the sick, and performed many 
 offices for the rest, such as carrying provisions, arms, &o., to the ramparts. 
 T. K. A. compares Eurip. Hec. 366; Troad. 494; Herod, vii. 187. The usual 
 proportion was one woman to four men, but at the siege of Babylon (Herod, 
 iii. 150), we find a woman allowed to each man. In the Sicilian expedition 
 the (TiTOTroiol we may observe are males. At Rome the preparation of food was 
 confined to females. Even down to the year tr.o. 580, there were no bakers at 
 Rome, 'Ipsi pnnem faciebant Quirites, mulierumqne id opus erat,' Plin. S. JV. 
 xviii. n. Cf. Plaut. Merc. ii. 3. 62; Terent. Adelph. v. 3. 60; Peith, ^b*. 
 ITom. iv. 3. KaTeffKeucttr^T) — 'such were the permanent arrange- 
 
 ments made for the siege ' — not simply 'preparations ' [see note ad i. 10. on the 
 difference between KarairKev^ and irapaa-Kevf], Thuc. viii. 5 (a.)] ; but * such 
 means as would be taken by men anticipating a tedious stjiA protracted blockade.' 
 These Thuc. describes lib. iii. 21, 'They consisted of two walls, with sixteen 
 feet of intermediate space all covered in, so as to look like one very thick wall ; 
 there were moreover two ditches out of which the bricks for the walls had 
 been taken, one on the inside towards Plateea, and the other on the outside, 
 against any relieving force. The interior covered space served as permanent 
 quarters for the troops left on guard.' — Grote, p. 257. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX. — (a.) rf tS>v UKarai^av 4iri(rTparei(f. The ob- 
 jective or causative genitive. So ^■l}(puTna Meyttpewv, ' the decree against the 
 Megarians.' Jelf, § 464; Matth. § 367. See i. 103, c. 108, c. 
 eVrpoTeuo-ai'. The object of this expedition was partly to convoy the Athenian 
 cleruchi, who were going to settle in the land ceded by Potidaea. 
 i.Knd.(oiiTos Tov (tItov. Cf. c. xix. a. aeyofav. Cf. ad ch. 70. 
 
 Tplros avr6s. Thirlwall, iii. 159, n. The two others were Calliades and 
 Phanomachus. Plut. Nic. p. 348 ; Diod. xii. 47. 
 
 (i.) J.TrdpTiiihov, a. Chalcidic fortress, north of Olynthus, in the direction 
 of Potidsea. It is mentioned (v. 18) as one of the cities which was to be 
 neutral, under the conditions of the truce. [Cramer, i. 253.] Botti^a was the 
 name anciently given to a narrow space of countrj- lying between the rivers 
 Haliacmon and Lydias. From this district, however, the Bottiaeans were early 
 expelled by the Macedonian princes (Thuc. ii. 99), and retiring across the 
 Axius about Therme and Olynthus, formed a new settlement with the Chalci- 
 dians, another people of Thracian origin. (Herod, vii. 127; viii. 127; Thuc. 
 i. 77 ; Polyb. v. 97 ; Liv. xxvi. 25. Cf. Cramer, i. 220.) 
 
 7rpo<7X«p-*i<r6.>' iTTci-cf. Jelf, 359. 3— '""'"^'^ <^°'"^ ""^ through the co- 
 operation of a party inside the city.' is ixdxv KaeicrrayTai. 
 Cf. ad J. i. a. So €S tfiifiov, is tpvyiii' KaratrTrivai, and supra c. Ixv. c. 
 
 (c.) TeAToo-Tiij. 'These peltasts, a species of troops between heavy armed 
 and light armed, furnished with - pelta or light shield, and short spear or 
 javelin appear to have taken their rise among these Chalcidic Greeks; being 
 equipped in a manner half Greek and half Thracian: we shall find them here- 
 after much improved and turned to account by some of the ablest Greek 
 generals.'-Grote, vi. 258. Cf. Xen. Anab. v. 2. 17, ■«'here the ^i\ol and 
 ir.ATao-ra! are distinguished. KpovaiSos. The line of coast between 
 
 Thessalonica and Olynthus seems to have borne this name. Herodotus, vn. 
 
 B 2 
 
244 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book H. 
 
 123, calls it Crosssea, Kpoiriro^, and enumerates the cities it contained, one of 
 which was Gigonus, mentioned by Thucydides, i. 61, c. ; Steph. Byz. calls it 
 Kpouais, and Dionys. Halicarn. calls the inhabitants Crusaei, Kpovaalot, i. 49 
 (Cramer, i. 242 ; Smith, Diet. s. v. ; Grote, iv. 32). 
 
 {d.) Bap(r-i}ffavT€S ro7s Trpofrytyvoiievois — * encouraged hy this addition 
 to their numbers.' Note the pres. part., which implies ' as they kept coming up 
 — the new comers' avaxt^povcri — oi 'ABTjyaiot, Schol. 
 
 Ta|eis. Cf. iii. 87, iv. 4; Xen. Anab. iv. 16, iv. 4. 8. p SoKoi. So 
 
 ch, c. e, 'inii SoKo'i, iii. 16. a. 
 
 («.) erpfif/ai' Tois 'A9rivatov5. Cf. Plat. Nic. p. 348 a. 
 
 C/0 "rpoira^ov eaTTjaav. The more usual form would be CariiffavTo. The 
 active is said to be used 0? generals who erect a trophy; the middle, of an army. 
 But probably when the cases are examined they will be found to depend on the 
 distinctive uses of the active and middle voices ; the first being used where the 
 action comes directly from the agent, the second where some intermediate 
 agency, or ulterior object in reference to the subject, is implied. So the law- 
 giver is said fleij'ai yofiov ; the people who vote it are I'aid BiirBai. Cf. c. 86. c. 
 
 Chaptee LXXX. — (a.) Twc avh BaXd.trfrrjs = ruv irapcL Tijv QaXaatrav 
 olKOvvTiaVfMui.'PoTi.i G, pahibis tLv trx^vTes. Here 6v gives a 
 
 contingent force to the participle. Peile well compares forte as used by Livy, 
 ' Ne penes ipsos culpa esset cladis forte hello Gallico accepto ' (v. 36V On &!< 
 with a participle see Jelf, § 429, i, 90, ii. 39. a. ; Donaldson, New Crat. p. 325. 
 K(<paKKT\vlas. Cf. c. 30. Editors seem divided as to whether this word 
 should be spelt with one \ or two. Cf. Duker, n. ad i. 27. In Homer, Strabo, 
 Polybius, Xenophon, and Pausanias, it is generally doubled. dftoTos. 
 
 So c. Ixxxi. ouK hv %Ti (Ttplffi Tovs''E\\7ivas &iioiws Trpofff\6e7v. iKiriSa 
 
 S' eJfai. A similar collocation of moods occurs, sup. xiii. — •irpoi]y6peue — 8ti 
 — etTl — ov fjiivToi y(vono — iupiTjfriv — ylyvfffBat. Cf. Dem. de falsd Leg. § 213, 
 where Mr. Shilleto observes : ' In orationo obliquS, perinde est ir [s. gri] cum 
 optat. cum indicat. cui omiss& pnrticnla infinit. sequatur. Cf. Thuc. viii. 51.' 
 
 (i.) vavapxof ert SvTa. Cf. n. ad c. Ixvi. So c. lix. en S" iirrpaT'tiyti. 
 See Arnold's note, and Xen. Sell. i. 6, 4, where we find the Spartans com- 
 plaining that as soon as their admirals had begun to learn a little of their pro- 
 fession (SpTi ^vviivTuv TO yavTiKci) they were removed from office. I have more 
 particularly referred to this passage, as Professor Cobet of Leyden, one of the 
 most brilliant of living scholars, in some remarks with which he has favoured 
 me, expresses an opinion that it is unintelligible, and ought to be amended. 
 But surely the present participles ^uviivruv and yiyvu(TK6iiriiiv point to the 
 uicauing whicli I liave suggested. 7^epl^77el^av. Cf. 85 b. iv. 8. 
 
 AeuKoSo. Leucas, now the island of Sta. Maura, once formed part of the 
 continent, but was afterwards separated from it by a narrow cut. Livy, xxxiii. 
 1 7, says in his time it was an island, but in the Macedonian war it liad been a 
 peninsula. The cut was called Dioryctus (Plin. iv. 2 ; Polyb. v. 5). Thucydides 
 more than once describes the Peloponnesian fleet as having been conveyed 
 across the isthmus. Cf. note iii. 81, iv. 8. It was occupied by looo Corinthian 
 colonists from the settlements of Ambraoia and Anactorium. 
 'AKa/cTopUu. Anactorium was the first town in Acarnania, after Actium 
 
Chap. 8o.] B'OTES OS THUCYDIDES. 245 
 
 (which was included in its territory, i. 29), on entering the Arabracian giilf 
 from the Ionian sea. It was founded, together with Leucas and SolUum, by a 
 Corinthian colony, in the middle of the seventh century B.O., when the original 
 inhabitants were driven into the interior. These seem to have been the Taphii, 
 or Telebose, Leleges, and Curetes. It appears from Thuc. i. 55, that the 
 Corcyrseans shared in the colony, but the Corinthians obtained sole possession 
 of the settlement. It remained in their hands till B.C. 425, when they were 
 expelled by the Athenians and Acarnanians conjointly, who occupied the place. 
 Cf. iv. 49, vii. 31. Augustus transferred its inhabitants to Nicopolis, which 
 he founded on the opposite coast, and it ceased to be a town (Strabo x. p. 451). 
 Its present site must be looked for on the promontory which now bears the 
 name of C. Madonna. Smith, Diet. Q-eog. s. v. Anactorium and Actium. 
 Cramer, ii. 7. 
 
 (o.) ^op^l.ialla. For the high estimation in which Phormio was held at 
 Athens see the compliment paid to him by Aristophanes, Equit. 562, with the 
 note of the Scholiast. (Cf. Clinton ire are.) Trep\ HaiiraKTov. Cf. ad 
 
 c. Izix. et' iTTjaltf npoffrafflcf Ik tov apx'*"" ydvovs — 'on the 
 
 ground of the annual f residency (or cMeflainsMp) which they, as being of the 
 royal gens, enjoyed.' iirX assigns the reason why these two persons had the 
 command. On this force of lirl cf. Jelf, § 634, 3. c. Steph. Byzaut. would 
 read iirerntti^f, a word from Hom., and repeated by Dio Cassius. Kriig. 
 asserts that the naked dative would be objectionable, which Engelmann, who 
 inclines to the reading, will not concede. It was their year of office ; each 
 irpoo-TaTijs (cf. iii. 75, 82) being bound at the expiration of his period of office 
 to resign in favour of another member of the royal gens. GoUer compares the 
 privileges of the Alcmasonidse at Athens, Bacchiadra at Corinth, and the 
 Aleuadae and Scopadse in Thessaly. Cf Cramer, i. 93. 'The Chaones differed 
 from their neighbours in being subject to an aristocratical and not &monarchical 
 government; their annual magistrates being always chosen from a particular 
 family.' The exact limits of Chaonia were not ascertainable even in Strabo's 
 time Its seaboard line probably extended from the Acrooeraunian promontory 
 to the harbour of Buthrotum. opposite Corcyra. The Chaones were once the 
 most warlike and powerful people of Epirus (cf. Strab. vii. p. 3»4; Thuc. 1. 46; 
 
 Arist. JEq. 72, Schol.). , , t\, 
 
 (d) @€ffirpuroi. The Thesproti extended along the coast from the 
 Thyamis to the confines of the Cassopaei, and in the interior to the boundaries 
 of the territories of Dodona, which was in ancient times regarded as part of 
 Thesprotia. The Chaones, Thesproti, and Molossi. were the three chief Epirote 
 tribes noXoaaois. The Molossi, who became subsequently the 
 
 rulers of Epirus, originally inhabited only a small strip of country extending 
 from the Ambracian gulf, between the Cassopaei and Ambrac.ot^, northwards 
 as far as the Dodonli. 'Kr...~.v.s. The Atmtanes were an 
 
 lUyrian tribe bordering on the Paravaei(v. inf.). ®'""'"fl J ^f 
 
 Tharypus (called also Tharypas. or Arrhybas) was the son or grandson of 
 Admetus, the Molossian king to whom Themistocles addressed hims a» 
 r f FT^,,,. i 1361 He was a minor, had been educated at Athens, 
 rdttidKve'-b'efk first to introduce among his subjects Hell^Jc 
 civilization. [Cf. Pausanias, i. xi. i.; Justin, xvn. y, Plat. Fyrrh. ..] The 
 
246 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Molossians retained their kingly form of government, Alexander, the brother of 
 Olympias, wife of Philip of Macedon, at length extending his dominion over 
 most of the Epirot tribes. Ilapavalovs. The Paravaei were of 
 
 Thesprotian origin, and bordered on the Orestas and Atintanes, and the Mace- 
 donian district of Elymlotis. They took their name from the Aous (now 
 Voiusa), on whose banks they were situated. The Orestse lay to the south of 
 the Lyncestae. Their country was of small extent, and contained but few 
 towns. Stepli. Byz. says they were a Molossian tribe. They occupied the 
 district now known as Castoria, with its lake and the rugged mountains 
 beyond. ' This large and diverse body of Epirotic invaders (a new phenomenon 
 in Grecian history, and got together doubtless by the hope of plunder) proves 
 the extensive relations of the tribes of the interior with the city of Ambracia.' 
 — Grote, vi. 260. 'OpiaTai. The Orestae were situated apparently 
 
 to the south-east of the Lyncestae, and, like them, were originally independent 
 of the Macedonian kings, though afterwards annexed to their dominions- 
 Steph. Byz. terms them a Molossian tribe. Their country was also of small 
 extent and contained but few towns ; it was called Orestis or Orestias, and is 
 represented by the modern districts of Gramista, Anaselitza, and Kastoria. 
 [Leake*8 N. Oreece, ap. Smith, Diet, O. a. v. j Cramer, i. 197 ; Polyb. xviii. 30 ; 
 Strabo, vii. p. 326; Liv. xxvii. ^^, xxxi. 40, xxxiii. 34.] Kp6(j>a 
 
 r€>v *A.&7ivai(av. Since he was nomiually at peace with them. See c. xxix. 
 Sarepov — * too late to take any part in the affair,' 
 
 (e.) 'Apyelas — i.e. the territory of Amphilochian Argos. Palmerius, from 
 iii. 106, would read 'Aypaias. Cramer, ii. 9. Ainvaiav — 'a 
 
 frontier village territory' (Grote) at the south-east corner of the Ambracian, 
 gulf, between Anactorium and Argos, at the foot of Mount Thyamus. Thuc. 
 mentions it again, iii. 1 06. Cramer places its site at Loutraki ; Col. Leake, 
 with greater probability, at Kerbaser^, in the vicinity of which there is a 
 marsh, two miles in length, from which Limnaea probably derived its name. 
 [Cf. Polyb. V. 5 J Cramer, ii. 9, 37; Smith, s. v.] SxpoToi' — so called, 
 
 B. supposes, as being 'the camp or place of muster for the armed population 
 of Aciirnania,' their enmity with their formidable neighbours the Ambraciots 
 rendering an armed confederacy necessary. (Cramer, ii. 4.) It lay on the 
 right bank of the Achelous, about 200 stadia from its mouth, the river being 
 navigable as far as its walls. (Strab. x. p. 450.) Xenophou speaks of it as 
 the capital of the province, at the time of the expedition of Agesilaus into 
 Acarnonia. [Xen. Sell. iv. 6. 4 ] PouqueviUe says its ruins are still to be 
 seen on the site called Porta. Cramer, ii. 30, sq. jiaSluis hv 
 
 irpocrxtop^ffcij'. K. admits the correctness of the use ottui with the fut. inf.; 
 so Kiihner and Hartung. Madvig says, wherever it occurs it is an error of 
 the editions. P. quotes Thuc. v. 82, vi. 66, viii. 25, 71. Cf. Matth. § 598, 9. 
 
 Chapter LXXXI — (a.) oi/re . . . te. On the use of oKte followed by re 
 (or more rarely (to(), see Jelf, § 775, obs. B. a.; Herod, v. 49, vii. 8. 1; 
 Soph. Phil. 1321. \6yii> . . . epyip. See the remarks on this 
 
 antithesis, i. 22. a. 69. d. Here it must be admitted to be somewhat forced. 
 
 (J.) fiiaov. 'So definite in describing a position, as not to need the article,' 
 B. Cf. Xen. A.nah. i. 8, in several places. (So of time, /ieVov ruitpas, Xen. 
 
Chap. 8 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 247 
 
 Anab. iv. 4. 1, &c.) P. cf. i. 8. a. 12. b. 16. a.. 48. a. 52. b.; see iv. 31. 96. 
 So we sometimes use 'right,' 'left.' 01 utra ToiTav The 
 
 CEniadse, says Haack from the following chapter, but Bl. is most probably right 
 in saying that they only joined Cnemus after his repulse at Stratos. ' The 
 perioeei of the Leucadian peninsula,' Am., who adds, there was scarce in Greece 
 a town which bad not its perioeei. See his note. 
 
 (c.) TiTajixivoi. 'This fact shows,' Grote says, 'the great inferiority of 
 the Epirots to the Greeks, and even to the less advanced portion of the Greeks, 
 in the qualities of order, discipline, steadiness, and power of co-operation for a 
 joint purpose. Confidence of success with them is exaggerated into childish 
 rashness, so that they despise even the commonest precautions either in miircli 
 or attack, while the Greek divisions on their right and left are never so elate as 
 to omit either' (vi. 271). hih. <pv\aKTJs ep^oi/res — '"keeping con. 
 
 stantly on their guard;' lit. in a state of guard. See note, i. 17. a. 40. c. 
 42 c. iv 4wiTriSei(ji. Even for a single night the Greeks and 
 
 Komans chose the spot for their encampment with great care and precaution. 
 See Gsesar, passim, for the equivalent phrase ; e. g. -B. C. i. 6 1 , ' Nactus idoneum 
 locum ;' and he says of the Spaniards who had served under Sertorius, that 
 they had learnt ' consuetudine populi Romani loca capere, castra munire,' B. 
 Gall. iii. 23. i^toiiaevoi — S{ioi KpwSniVot, Schol.— ' they enjoyed 
 
 the high reputation of being esteemed the most warWke' &c. On the uses of 
 o|£c»(ris and aJiuMn, see i. 130, ii. 34. 64. 88, vi. 15. iir4<rxov. 
 
 There is a reading ^ireVx""'''", ' non se retineri passi sunt, se retinuerunt,' as vii. 
 33, ol SupaKoia-toi . . . iir4(TxovTo . . . Tois 'AOrivaioiS iTrix^P^'v, and Gottl. 
 adopts this reading. P. tr. ' neque morati sunt (substiterunt) ut castra oocu- 
 parent,' and says iirix^iv with the inf. means in Herod. ' deliberare, sibi pro- 
 ponere tanquam metam.' K. explains it, ' Sie hielten sich nicht ein Lager 
 aufzuschlagen.' T. K. A. 'did not turn their minds to.' 'Neither forbore so 
 far as to occupy,' Hobbes. ' They would not halt to encamp,' Grote, vi. 252. 
 Goll. takes no notice of the difficulty. Cf. Soph. Phil. 349. 539- 
 Kara \a0 f r./ is a military term. See i. ; here it means ' take up ground for a 
 camp;' ct. infra d. I apprehend the construction is rh Kci.-raAa.0ew, as ri 
 ^K-^oeW, infr. 87- a. I'if'V- For the old reading ^ciM!)- The 
 
 two words are constantly interchanged. See c. 76, where we have (.if^r,, mean- 
 ing impetus, which suits the sense here. a 4 t ^ € i-airfi Po^— 
 ' the very shout of onset.' For the orthography see n. on c. i. K. says Thnc. 
 is the only Attic writer who uses the word. He quotes Bekker, Aneod. 214. 
 465, avTO(3oe/, t^x™' ""l "M" ■rv To^fM'"?! i.\iAa.y^V- So Uv. i. 11, 'primo 
 
 ipetu et clamore;' vi. 4, ' primo clamore atqne impetu.' 
 
 (d) airHv rb epyoy yev4ff9ai—' the achievement would be their own. 
 ai-riii for ai.T<iv is fr. Bekker. l,^oi<^.-i. «. as they had intended. 
 
 So Ixxx. a., i irepiirKovs ovk4tl iao^TO 'Mvyaio^s Sf^ohs. ^poXox'Co""-' 
 
 4v4Span-'besetzen mit Hinterhaltzposten,' Kriig.-' occupy the environs with 
 ambuscades.' ' Planting ambuscades in convenient places, and suffermg the 
 Epirots to approach without suspicion near to the gates; they then suddenly 
 saUied out and attacked them, while the troops in ambuscade rose up and 
 assailed them at the same time.'-Grote, vi. ^,^ Cf. .u 112 and ,19; Herod 
 
 ^^j_ if^i^,. So'cominus,'Lat. Cf. Hom. 7i. xu. 24, xiii. 
 
 im 
 
248 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II 
 
 337; Aristoph. iy«. 45 1 ; Xen. ^noJ. iii. 4.4; St/mp. ii.13. Hence tropically 
 Plat. Euth. 294 D, iii6ffe ieVai rots ipuT'lt/juuri — 'to grapple with' L. and S. 
 
 (e.) ivfK€ivro. P. tr. 'hroTce in upon' 'fuga effas^ in eos ferrentur;' rare 
 of an army in flight, being the usual term to signify ' pursuit of a flying army.' 
 ave\dfjL$avov — ' received them into their ranlcs' Arnold tr. 'rallied thein^i.e. 
 the Chaonians ! Is a-Tropiav KaQiffrJivruv — ' reducing to distress.^ 
 
 &pfv on\ojv. A circumstance very annoying to Greek soldiers, who laid aside 
 their shields and defensive armour when they halted, T. K. A. For illustration 
 of the fact, see Xen. Anab. iii. 3. tovto ttohTv — i.e. &Tro6ev (r(p€vSovaVt 
 
 harassing heavily-armed troops by this sort of guerilla fighting. 
 
 Chapteb LXXXII. — 'Ayanoy. The Anapus flows into the Achelous on 
 the right bank, a little below Metropolis. It is called in modem maps Artos 
 [Cramer, ii. 32]. Olvtabay. Of. ci. u. 
 
 Chaptek LXXXUI.— (a.) Kpia-alov. The whole of the inner sea now 
 known as tlie Sea of Lepanto, east of the promontories of Rhium and Autii*- 
 rhiura, was called originally the Crisssean Gulf, <S Kpiaaios K6\iros. [See the 
 Homeric Hymn to Apollo, 431, Kpl(nis kiJAttos airelpuy.^ And tills continued 
 to be its designation even down to the time of Strabo, who gives this specific 
 name to this portion of the Corinthian gulf (viii. p. 335). But soon after the 
 time of Thucydides, it went more generally by the name of the Gulf of Corinth. 
 Xen. Sell. vi. 2. 9, KiAiros Kopif9MK6s; Polyb. v. 3; Liv. xxvi. 26, sinus 
 Corinthiacus, xxviii. 7, 8, sinus Corinthius. Pliny (iv. 2) coufiues the name 
 to the small gulf running up to Cirrha, now known as the Gulf of Salona. It 
 took its name from Crissa, which lay inland a little S.W. of Delphi, at the S. 
 end of a projecting spur of Parnassus (its ruins may still be seen near the 
 modern village of Chryso). Cirrha was subsequently built at the head of the 
 bay, at tlie mouth of the Pleistus, and rose into a town from being the port of 
 Crissa. Between the two lay the famous Cirrhaean or Crissean plain, bounded 
 on the N. by Parnassus, on the E. by Cirphis, and on the \V. by the moun- 
 tains of the Ozolian Locrians. The Homeric hymn quoted above, gives the 
 legendary history of the foundation of Crisa, which was ascribed to Apollo 
 himself, and hence the city is called KpTo-a jToflc'ij, Hom. II. ii. 520. In fact, 
 in the earlier writei'S Crisa is identified with Delphi, the name afterwards given 
 to the sanctuary of Pytho. The town of Cirrha is famous for the two sacred 
 wars carried on against it by the Amphictyons. (For the authorities, see Cramer, 
 ii. 155; Smith, s. v.). 6 eSei irapayefstrQai — ' which ought to have 
 
 leen at hand,' i. e. ' which was intended to co-operate with Cnerans, and to 
 prevent,' &c. Cf, h. 1. v. a. ; Ixxxiv. c. ; xcii. d.; xcv. c. Sxio — 'into 
 
 ilie interior of the countrg.* T^vayKdad-qtrav, Observe change of 
 
 number [irx^M" "'p'"* t1> o-Tjiuaii'ii/ici'oi/], i. e. the Corinthians, &c., implied in rh 
 i'avTiK6i>, So Tpolav i\6iiTes S^irox' 'Apyfiui' (TtiSAos, Jilscli. Ag. 588. 
 vipl Tas aiiTas Tjixepas T^y /j.dx7is. K, cf. Xen. Anab. vi. 2. 9; I'ol. iii, 
 
 45- 6. '•';■ S- 7- 
 
 (i.) rp eiipux^pi?. 'The Peloponnesians had not yet made actual trial 
 of Athenian maritime eificiency, at the point of excellence which it had now 
 reached; themselves retaining the old unimproved method of working ships at 
 
Chap. 83.] NOTES ON THUCrDIDES. 249 
 
 Bea, they had no practical idea of the degree to which it had been superseded 
 by Athenian training. If we revert to the battle of Salamis, we find that 
 narrowness of space was at that time accounted the best of all protections for a 
 smaller fleet against a larger. But such had been the complete change of 
 feeling, occasioned by the system of manoeuvring introduced since that period 
 in the Athenian navy, that amplitude of sea room is now not less coveted by 
 Phormio than dreaded by his enemies.' — Grote, vi. 263, 274. Cf. c. Ixxxix. e. 
 irapaTrXeopras efw toC K6\Trov — ' as they %oere coasting along so as to steal 
 if possible outside the strait.' See P. in loc. ^r^jpei — 'iept 
 
 watching' o-TpoTiwTiKcirepoc. ' The triremes were fitted out 
 
 more as transports for numerous soldiers than with any view to naval combat.' 
 — Grote, p. 263. ovK %v o'i6nevoi — ' not dreaming of the probability 
 
 of the Athenians venturing,' &c. The &v, which properly belongs to ToAjurjo-ai, 
 is attracted to the participle (Madvig, quoted by T. K. A.). 
 
 (c.) vapa Y^x (r(puv Kofii^op.^yai' — i.e. as the Schol. rightly explains 
 it, ' while the Corinthians, Sfc, were coasting along the Peloponnesian shore.' See 
 Jelf, § 710. a.: 'We sometimes find the genitive absolute where we should 
 expect the participle to agree with the subject of the verb.' Cf. Thuc. iil. 13. 
 70; Herod, i. T78; Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20, and a remarkable instance Luke xiv. 
 32. Cf . also Matth. § 561. In this case, Madvig observes, the genitive absolute 
 usually in Thucyd. precedes the principal sentence, and serves to give more 
 prominence to the participial clause as a special circumstance. Like this is 
 i. TO. 4, 5iO(8ej8T7K(iTos nept«-A.eo7;s — Tjyy€K67i avr^, for the simpler construction, 
 Sm/Se/STj/coTi n. Tiyyixdi], which illustrates Madvig's remark. See T. K. A. 
 and chap. viii. e. Sia^aXK6vTaiv, according to the general use of 
 
 the present, which is also the participle imperfect, implies 'purposing to cross,' 
 i. e. making the attempt without carrying it out (Poppo). Cf. vi. 30. 
 XaKxi^os. A look at the map will show that the Athenians had considerably 
 outstript the Lacedaemonians with a view to intercept them. From i. 108. c. 
 we learn that the Athenians had taken Chalcis after their victory at (Enophyta, 
 when Tolmidas sailed round Peloponnesus. It was being then used by the 
 Corinthians as a naval station, as well as Molycrium and SoUium. It was one 
 of the five .Jltolian towns mentioned by Homer (II. ii. 640), and lay at the foot 
 of the mountain of the same name, whence it is also called inroxaXKis. It was 
 a little to tlie east of the Evenus, now the Pidhari, and is probably represented 
 by the modern Ourio-Kestro, the mountain being called Varassova. Leake, 
 JV. GV«ece, i. no, ap. Smith, s. V. Siiivov. The Evenus rises in the 
 
 Mghest summit of Mount ffita, and runs into the sea about 1 20 stadia from 
 the promontory of Antirrhium. In winter it becomes a very considerable 
 fiver, receiving several mountain torrents, and flowing with great rapidity, and 
 bearing along great stones in its course. Hence 'Eveni rapidae undaj,' Ov. 
 Met. ix. 104. In mythology it is famous for the death of the Centaur Nessus, 
 who is said to have been killed here by Hercules for offering violence to Dejanira 
 as he carried her across the river. Col. Leake supposes its modern name to be 
 a corruption of the Kcmalc from Sipis, and that it retains a vestige of the 
 ancient people the Ophieis in whose territory the river rose. (if. Greece, ii. 
 625; Smith, D. Geog. s. v.) Cf. Soph. Trach. 557. oix iXaSov 
 
 vvKThs v<pofiJ.i(riu.fvoi. The diSBculty of completely comprehending this 
 
250 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 description is well known. In the first place the Scholiast explains v(pop^nrd/i.eyoi 
 iKaSov by ol 'ABTimioi; but Haaek, Poppo, Arnold, Goller, and indeed most 
 modern commentators, adopt the opinion expressed by Grote, that ' the natural 
 (structure of the sentence, as well as the probabilities of fact, point to ot 
 Tl€\oTrovffi<noi as the nominative case to the verb. This ia however not 
 all, for even those who agree as to the persons denoted by ifopfiKriiieyoi aro 
 at varianoe respecting the operation described by that word. The most 
 common view, bused upon Arnold's note, is well given in Engelman's German 
 tr. : ' The Peloponnesians were sailing along the coast of Peloponnesus, 
 out of the Corinthian Gulf, with the intention of crossing over to Aearnania, 
 as soon as they got past the town of Rhium. They had brought to during 
 the night in the harbour of Patrse, a circumstance which they had in vain 
 endeavoured to conceal from the Athenians \_ovk IauSop']. When then they 
 were attempting to cross from Patrse to the other side, Phormion, who had 
 been on the watch for this moment, came rapidly down upon them from 
 Chalcis, met them in mid-passage, and forced them to come to action.' Grote 
 objects that the Peloponnesians did not wish, and could not hope, to conceal 
 from Phormio the spot where they put to for the night, and make him suppose 
 they were west of Patras when they were really in the place, which is what 
 Dr. Arnold supposes. He urges too that the battle was fought in mid-cJmnuel, 
 and reri/ lilile after daybrealc, which is inconsistent with the supposition 
 that they passed the night in the harbour of Patrse. Accordingly he interprets 
 iKpopfiKrdfjLfi-ot — ^having taken up a simulated'{or imperfect) night-station' 
 I have great doubt whether this exact force can belong to inrS, but find 
 that the explanation which I had myself attempted in a projected review 
 of Arnold's first volume somewhat resembles this. ' It is impossible to sup- 
 pose that there can have been time enough for the Peloponnesian fleet to have 
 regularly entered the harbour of Patras, as Arnold suggests, and also to have 
 been in a position to fight a battle early next morning {M t^v ew) half-way 
 between the two coasts. The " dodge," if we may use the word, attempted by 
 Machaon was that so frequently practised by the " chase " in the pursuit of slavers 
 and the like. As long as daylight lasted, be continued his course parallel to 
 the enemy ; when niglit came on he tried to lay to without their seeing him 
 [iirii — c/am Atfienienses'}, in the hopes that they would sail past him. When 
 he thought Phormion far enough onward, he turned sharply at right angles to 
 his former course, steering N. instead of W. But Pborniiou had been too 
 much on the alert, and stopping while the enemy stopped, was down upon them 
 in the first light of morning before they bad time to escape. This too explains 
 the reason why the Peloponnesians had not the same chance of keeping away 
 from their enemy as they had enjoyed all the previous day. They bad 
 come into disagreeable proximity during the night. A^op/itfeirSoi may origi- 
 nally have meant *' clam appellere ad littus" because this was the only way 
 in which the first mariners did " lie to." But as navigation improved, and ships 
 were brought to, as occasion required, at sea, the term would naturally be re- 
 tained. And it is ridiculous to suppose that the Peloponnesian admiral, whose 
 object it was to reach the Acarnanian coast with all possible speed, would 
 retrace his way to tlie opposite shore, thereby doubling the distance to be 
 traversed, and the chauce of inteiruption from Phormion.' I do not know that 
 
Chap. 84.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 251 
 
 anything which I have seen has much modified the opinion here expressed. 
 We may add that the words ott!) Trjs Xa\KiSos do not necessarily mean, as 
 some apparently suppose, that the Athenians had just left the harbour of 
 Chalcis that very morning ; i.wh denotes the direction from which, as eVl the 
 direction towards which, a movement takes place, cf. sup. 80, a. On the aorist, 
 as applicable to an action not carried into effect, see remarks in the appendix 
 on Soph. Ajax, 1 125—6; 
 
 ME. ZiKaia yhp rii/S* evrvx^'iv KTflvavTO. fie ; 
 TET. KTilvavTO.; Suv6v y' eliraj, el Kol (ys eavdv. 
 
 The whole will then mean—' when their attempt to lay to in the night unJcnown to 
 the enemy did not pass undetected.' Those who make i(j>opii.icrifiei'oi refer to the 
 Athenians, might I suppose tr. ' when the fact that the Athenians had brought to 
 during the night became perceptible,' hut this is I think very questionable. 
 There is a v. 1. marg. Cam., ^cjiopfitcrdficyoi, and probably it is to this reading 
 that the Schol. refers when he supplies 01 'Mnpaioi to eAaSoi/. But for the same 
 reason this is not quite satisfactory; oh \avdav<ii means 'I do not succeed 
 in escaping detection when I make some attempt intended to be secret.' This 
 might he said of the Athenian fleet, but the furtive efforts of the others to 
 escape were evidently prominent in the writer's mind. ovtu Sij. Cf. 
 
 ad i. 131. 
 
 (d.) (TrpaTfiyol. Cf. i. 46. h. irapiffKiva^ovTo — 'lohocon^ 
 
 tributed to the equipment of thit fleet,' K. xinXov. Cf. iii. 78, 
 
 and note. /nj; SiS6ve^ SiiKwKovv. Cf. i. 49. c. 'The Athenians 
 
 rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their 
 rear, turned rapidly and got the opportunity before the ship of the adversary 
 could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak 
 part. The success of course depended on the extreme rapidity and precision of 
 the movements of the Athenian vessel.' — Grote, vi. 267 ; see the rest of the 
 note. This manoeuvre could only be executed by ships that had the superiority 
 in speed and management. Compare the account of the battle of Argiinusse, 
 -Xen. Sell. i. 6, where the balance of naval skill is on the side of the Lacedae- 
 monians, and Xenophon, speaking of the Athenian ships, says (§ 31), oStw 5" 
 iroLX^Vf^"-^ '^^^ hh Sie/cjrAoui' SiSoicj/, x*'poy 70^ etrXeov (where see Schneider's 
 valuable note). to Xema irXola — ' the small croft' — j. e. the store 
 
 vessels. Cf. vii. 40. e.; cf. Duk. ad iv. 116. b. P. 81a ^paxios = 
 
 Si' o\iyov — ' exiguo ex intervallo,' P. irapayiypS/ievoi — i. e. the crews, 
 
 Obs. the change of gender (kot^ lui-co-ic). Cf. i. no. d. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIV.— (a.) koto /ilav vavv rerayij.ei'oi- 
 line of battle a-head,' as it is technically called. Cf. Xen. Sell. i. 6, 29, 31, ol 
 Sdfuoi SfKa vavirXv M fiias rerayfieyot. Poppo cf. t. xc. d. Kara (liai/ fV! Kepus, 
 which confirms this translation. Of course Kori /uiaj" might also mean one 
 deep, V. ad xc. a. ^vfTJyav is oKiyov—' Icept forcing them to con- 
 
 tract their circle.' iv XPV "fi TrapaTrK4ovrf!—aiTh/ie7a(l>opa.!T7is 
 
 Kovpas TTJs Sxpi Tou xpwTij ■yiyj'ofieVou— Schol. ; ' striciim.' Ha'as cf. Herod. 
 vi. 11; Soph. 4^'. 797. Procopius imitates the passage, ii. B. G. 7. Gottleb. 
 TrepitTTAei Ka\ eiddei. Observe the change ot subject. 
 
252 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IL 
 
 (i.) l(p' InuT^. Tlie affair would then be, as we say, 'in his own handi,' 
 to attack when lie pleased. Cf. iii. 12; ir. 29; vii. 12; Matth. § 586. 
 ouSefo xp(Jroi'— note, not ^TjSevo; perhaps we may give the same idiomatic 
 force by saying, 'no time,' as a sort of single tense — cf. ovS'tv ariyovrrai — '«»- 
 seaworthy,' ch. xciv. See what is said on the use of oi as a particula infinitans, 
 i. I. a. 5, b. 17. a. ; and the remark of Hermann on Viger, No. 309, • oh arctis- 
 simfe conjungi cum verbo debet, ita nt hoc verbo conjunctum, nnam notionem 
 constituat, cujusmodi est, ouK 0I80, nescio.' KOiWi(m\v. Kriig. 
 
 suggests KoWia-T &v, but needlessly. Cf. the old English usage of handsome — 
 a handsome heating. 
 
 (e.) (Cartel. Query, more violently than usual? The prep, seems to 
 imply this. See ad c. xxvi. c. irpoaiimrrc, Wass cf. ^sch. 
 
 .4^.654: 
 
 yavs ykp trphs aW-ffXata-i Qp^Kiat ttvooI 
 
 ^puKOV al S^ KipoTwovfievai $l(} 
 
 X^tfxSivt, K.T.X, 
 \otSopla. Wass quotes Horace, Sat. i. v. 11 ; Eur. See, s 
 
 ill yap fivpicp ffTpareifiaTi 
 a,K6\affTos i<xA.os, youTiKi) t' avapxia 
 KpiifftTcay Trvp6s, 
 
 K^Ktvarav. Duk. quotes Schefier de Mil. nav. iv. 7. These were called by 
 the Komans ' hortatores et pausarii.' Mr. Grote has » good note on the pas- 
 sage, vi. 269, where he shows from the structure of the trireme how important 
 the functions of these ofiBcers were, the voice of the keleustes being the only 
 thing that kept the 1 70 rowers to good time in their strokes. He refers to 
 Arnold's note and Plant, Merc. iv. 2, 5, and Asin. iii. i. 15. Cf. Thuc. vii. 
 70 J Ovid, Met. iii. 618 : 
 
 ' Qui requiemque modumque 
 Voce dabat remis, animorum hortator.' 
 
 He carried in his hand a hammer or truncheon to keep time with, called ' por- 
 tisculus.' See Plant, a. s. and Rich's Diet. ». v. ivafipeiv — 
 
 ' could not get iheir oars clear of the water* Grote. 'Die Ruder bei unge- 
 stiimer Sec aufheben,' Gottl. ' Remos ad se reducere, et attollere suspenses,' 
 P. 'Referre.'K. ' Recover their oars,' h. tcai S. KvBepviiTais. 
 
 We learn from i. 143, a. the importance of this office, and the stress laid on the 
 fact of having Athenian steersmen. SittpBeipof (see Poppo), 
 
 means frequently ' spoilt,' i. 29, u. and here is simply disabled— i. e. for the 
 time; &n\ovs ^irol-qae. Died. Sic. xii. 48; so KaTuSieiv, i. 50, h. 1. 90, c. 92, b. ; 
 vii. 41, viii. 34, cf. note ad i. 29, n. Udrpas. Patrse, one of the 
 
 twelve Achaean cities (Herod, i. 145), lies on the Corinthian gulf ou one of the 
 spurs of Mount Panachaicus. Patreua the Achaean was its eponymus hero. 
 After the Macedonian wars it was one of the four cities that revived the federal 
 league. After the battle of Actium, Augustus planted a considerable colony 
 there, placing the neighbouring towns under its dominion. Pansanias, who 
 visited it, gives a long description of its buildings and statues. It retains its 
 name in the modern Patras. Au/itji', Dy me, also one of the 
 
Chai. 85.] NOTES ON THXJCYDIDES. 253 
 
 twelye Achsan cities (v. Herod, u. s.), is said to have derived its name from 
 being the most westerly of them all (airi Suir^Sy). Its ancient name, accordinf,' 
 to Strabo, was Stratus. It was one of the four cities which revived the 
 Achaean League. Pompey colonized it with a number of Cilician pirates, and 
 Augustus placed it under the authority of Patrae. Its remains are to be seea 
 near the modern town of Karavostasi (Leake, Morea, ii. 160). 
 f s ahKiiv Tp4vfireai K. explains by ' se mettre en defense,' and cf. Horn. II. 
 XV. 564; Herod, ix. 70; Thuo. iii. 108, a. He says k\K^ is not used by otlier 
 Attic writers in this sense of resistance. It is, in fact, vigorous fighting ; and 
 so, to betake themselves to vigorous fighting, in such circumstances, means, to 
 make resolute defence. 
 
 {d.) aiieX6fi.fVQi, — ' took prisoners, and transferred to their own ships.' 
 vaCv ai/aBdiTTes. Cf. SchefiF. de Mil. nav. iv. 2; Suds. Herod, viii. 121; 
 Procop. JB. (?. iv. 22, Gottl. RvWiiv-nv. Cyllene was the sea- 
 
 port of Elis, from which it was distant about 120 stadia, and is mentioned in 
 very early times in connexion with the legendary history of the Peloponnese. 
 The Corcyraeans burnt it because it had supplied ships to the Corinthians 
 (Thuc. i. 30). It was the principal port on this part of the Peloponnesus 
 (Thuc. vi. 89; Diod. xix. 66, 87; Polyb. v. 3; Liv. xxvii. 32). Leake assigns 
 its position to the modern Glarentza, but there appears reason to doubt the 
 identity (Smith, 5. v.). ai ^(ceieec i/ijes. Cf. i. 61, c; for the fact 
 
 see Izxx. c, Leucas was the rendezvous for the fleet, 
 
 Ohaptbb LXXXV. — (a.) ^v/iPovKovs. Apparently here mentioned for 
 the first time in the Peloponnesian war. Ten were sent to Agis after his 
 failure at Argos (v. 63). Astyochus was accompanied by eleven (viii. 39). 
 Grote vi. 272, * Commissioners, to assist by their advice and exertions.' 
 P. compares Hermann, Gr. Ant. § 45, 4; Thuc. iv. 79, v. 63; and Schweigh, 
 ad App. iii. p. 305, for a similar custom among the Romans. 
 Tili0Kp6,T-rii/ — for his fate, see xcii. b. KaToff/ceuafeo-eai. Cf. 
 
 Ixxviii. c. ; iv. 73; and Poppo's note. i-r' oKiyav — ^'by an in- 
 
 ferior number of ships.' So conversely, ttA^Sos is used for superiority in num- 
 bers. Cf. i. [06, 2, 125. TTpmrov — i. e. in this war. Schol. 
 vapaXoyos. Cf. ad i. 78, a. and ii. 61, c; 66, a.; 91, c. ; vii. 28; tr. the 
 unreasonableness ; the contradiction to all rational calculation was great. 
 
 (b.) acTiTiSecTes. Cf. iii. 56. u. on its use with a genitive. P. Eurip. 
 Iph. Taur. 358, ■r'l]v ipSiS' ASAiv avTiBiiaa. t^s iKel. eV ttoWov. 
 
 For the fact, see i. 142, g. 81' oKlyov. Cf. i. 77, f.; 124, b. 
 
 (c.) Kofl' Ti/xipay ad. Cf. iv. 66, a. of! kutci. itos ckocttoi'. Soph. Fhil. 
 j8o, with Wunder's note. t^ KoM'C">"ri— Nicias. 
 
 (d.) ropTvftos. Gortyn (afterwards more usually called Gortyna, and not 
 to be confounded with Gortys in Arcadia) was, next to Cnossus, the most im- 
 portant city in Crete. It was anciently called Larissa, and was therefore in all 
 probabihty a Pelasgic town. fCf. Cramer, iii. 384. We find also a Gortynia 
 in Macedonia, Thnc. ii. 100, probably also Pelasgic] In early times it was 
 leagued with Cnossus, and the two cities together held the rest of Crete 
 in subjection. Afterwards, dissensions having arisen between them, they were 
 engaged in continual hostilities. [Strabo, a. 478, wlio reckons the circuit 
 
254 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 of the city at fifty stadia.] It stood on the river Lethsens, ahont nine miles 
 from the sea, where it had two harbours, Lebena and Metallnm. Mr. Pashley 
 fixes its site at the modern Hagius Dheka, where the ten saints of Gortyna are 
 said to have suffered martyrdom in the persecution of Decius. See Pashley's 
 Crete, i. 295. irp6^(vos. Cf. ad c. 29. a. and iii. 70. d., where for 
 
 the difference between ' proxenus ' and ' epiproxenus,' see Arnold's note. 
 KuSairfai'. One of the most ancient and important cities of Crete. It pro- 
 bably existed very long before the time of Polycrates, and was only enlarged 
 and adorned by the Samian colonists, and not founded, as Herodotus supposed, 
 iii. 44, 59. A considerable portion of its citizens were Jiginetan colonists 
 (Olymp. Ixv. 2) ; hence their especial hatred for Athens. See Mailer's ^gine- 
 iica, p. 113. It was 1000 stadia, according to the Schol., or 800 according to 
 Strabo (x. p. 479) from Gortyna, lying on the sea looking towards Laconia. 
 Mr. Pashley identifies it with the modem Khani^ (i. 15). The quince was 
 indigenous to this district, and took its name from it. [Plin. xv. 11; cf. 
 Smith, Qeog. Diet. s. v.; Miill. Dor. i. p. 30.] HoXix^iTais. The 
 
 territory of Polichne bordered on Cydonia. The site of the town has not been 
 ascertained (Smith, in v.; Herod, vii. 170). iith afffiaiv. The 
 
 causal use of the preposition, see Jelf, § 639, i. 2, b. &ir\oia is used for any- 
 thing that stops navigation, either adverse winds, or the absence of wind ; but, 
 as Poppo observes, it is more likely that the former meaning is the correct one, 
 as vessels propelled by oars would not be detained by a calm (viii. 99), Engel- 
 man in his translation remarks on {mh airXolas, * Wenn die Praposition acht ist, 
 kann SirA.oin nur die in der Uebersetzung ausgedriickte Bedeutung, Windstille 
 haben;' but see ^sch. Ag. 188, where the context shows that foul winds are 
 meant, -Kvoai airh ^rpvfiSvos no\ovffai; so Eurip. Iph. A. 88; Herod, ii. 119. 
 There is no reason therefore to believe with Krug. that 6ir' avf^av is a gloss ; 
 the better plan is with some inferior MSS. to strike out the second uttcJ, and 
 thus make oir\o(os a sort of epexegesis to uir" ivffiuf. 
 
 Chapter LXXXVI. — (a.) irapeffKevacrfi^voL &s ^ttI vav^axtav. Not 
 as before, c. 78, 8, <rTpaTio)TiK<i>Tepov wapeffKevafffievoi. Tlavop^ov rhp 
 
 'Axai'iciii'. [To distinguish it from Panormus in Sicily (vi. 2), and Panormus 
 in Milesia (viii. 24).] It lay fifteen stadia to the east of the promontory of 
 Rhium. The bay is now called Tekieh, from a tekieh or tomb [6^71] of a 
 Turkish saint which formerly stood upon it (Smith, a. v.). TrapiirXevat 
 
 0^ Kol b t&opjufwc—'coasted along from Naupactus' (i. e. of course in a con- 
 trary direction to the Lacedaemonians) to Molycrium, so as to get outside the 
 strait into broad water. 
 
 (i.) "Plov. The towns on both sides of the strait bore this name. To dis- 
 tinguish them, the south town was called rh 'AxaXxSv (now the castle of the 
 Morea) ; the north town 'Piov Tb MoKvKptxhv or 'Avrlppiov (now the castle of 
 Rumili). These two promontories formed the entrance to the Corinthian gulf. 
 The distance between them is variously stated. Thucyd. makes it seven stadia 
 (ii. 86) ; Strabo, five (pp. 335, 6) ; Pliny about a Roman mile (iv. 6). But both 
 Dodwell and Leake make it a mile and a half (Smith, Diet. s. v. Aohaia ; 
 Dodwell, p. 171 ; Leake's Jforeo.ii. 148). irpo(r66)3o7j9^K6i. 
 
 Cf. ad i. 134, d. P. el Soy — ac. ipiuffafiivovt. P. 
 
Chap. 87.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2SS 
 
 (0.) irphs 4Kfli/a)v — ' in favour of the Lcioedizmoniam.' Trpbs or ir-po-ri is, 
 according to Dr. Donaldson, only a lengthened foi;m of irapd, containing in 
 Itself tlie notion of onward— adversus ; 01 irpbr firirphs = a matre versus me 
 cognati—' moWon towards that which is before the subject.'— iV. Crat. p. 302. 
 Prom this he deduces the various usages of -rptij, though without special men. 
 tion of the present one. Jelf appears to classify this usage among those which 
 denote ' properties belonging to the subject from which the action is supposed 
 to arise,' § 638. Matthise, § 590, a. places it after the case of neuters, re- 
 presented as produced by something— /Sio;/ /SiSj-ih irphs avBotiwoiv. In other 
 cases also, as elrai irpiis tipos, stare ab aliquo, cf. Herod, i. 124. It is, I think, 
 most simple to explain the usage from such a phrase as & Behs irpis fifiuv fimv, 
 iv. 92 ; that which stands by our side, and acts from that position, being sup- 
 posed to malce in our favour, 
 
 (d.) T^jK vaufLuxiav TroiTJa-ai. Observe the difference between the active 
 and middle voices : ' Activum de dncibus ponitur, qui auctores sunt nt pugna 
 fiat.' Cf. iv. 91, V. 59, 80. P. Compare the phrases fS/ioy fieii'ai and BeuBai, 
 TpoTratov (TTrja-at and <n7i<ru(TBai (v. ad c. 79, f.). a-irb Tur 
 
 'ABrji/altcv, Cf. ad i. no. b. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXVII — (a.) &pa. See note on i. 75. «.., and the article 
 referred to in the Classical Museum, and tr. * if, as it seems/ ohx^ 
 
 $iKa(ay k.t,\. — * does not afford {or hring with it) any just ground of inference, 
 that it should alarm you,' i. e. gives you no reason for drawing such a conclusion 
 as would alarm you. reKfMipa-iv Kriig. calls the object-accusative, and rh iK(pO' 
 Pfja-at, the resnltative accusative. His interpretation does not differ from the 
 above. Reiske's notion that rh iKcpo^T^ffaL is the immediate object, and SiKuiajf 
 T€Kfi. the predicative accusative, though mentioned by the editors, is not, I 
 think, to be approved. He would tr. * has not the fact of its having alarmed 
 yov, as a just ground of inference* Jelf, § 670, remarks that the article would 
 naturally be attached to the substantive infinitive, when especial emphasis was 
 to be laid upon the notion which it expresses, and as this infinitive always 
 stands to the preceding verb in the relation of the accusative, this article 
 is always the neuter, -ri. On ix^i for irapix^i, cf. ii. 47, ayavdKTTia-iv ex^t, i. 9, 
 i; 47. b., iv. 126. 4s vavfj.axi(^v ^aWov. Cf. Tac. Mist, ii. 40, 
 
 'Non ut ad pugnam, sed ut ad bellandum profecti,' Popp. 
 
 ?<r<f)7)Xei' — 'tripped us up (or laid us ly the heels),' i,e, was the cause of our 
 failure. 
 
 {h.) TTJs yvdiix-ns rh ij.ii Karii Kpdros viKT}Bev. There is considerable 
 variety of opinion about this passage. Arn. tr. ' nor ought our spirits, which, 
 so far from having been fairly beaten, have that within them which still bids de- 
 fiance to the enemy, to lose their edge from the result of chance.' This is right in 
 the main, but yvdio) is not eufios or spirit (an usage of which I find no example), 
 it should rather be 'ixiill,' in the sense of a resolved purpose, cf. i. 32. Such is 
 its frequent force in the P, V, ; see e.g, yfii/J-v (rrofiiaiv &Tep evBivtov, v. 295. 
 The whole then will mean, that part of our resolution which has not been van. 
 quished in an overmastering way, but still retains within a defiance for the foe, 
 should not be cowed by what is the result of nothing but accident (or by the result 
 of mere accident at any rate), for such is the efi'ect of y^, and the phrase diff'era 
 
256 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IX. 
 
 much from the Schol. explanation, rfi hiroBiari ^vii<^op^, quoted by most of the 
 editors. We have ttii yvd/iris rh ^Jj k.t.X. instead of ri /i^ Kari xpiros viK-ri- 
 iiTcra yv^iiri, because the orator would not be so unreasonable as to ascribe no 
 moral effect to defeat; he insinuates that while any part of the old heroic 
 resolve is still left, it ought to hold out against the caprice of fortune. 
 ix"" Tivit avTiXoy/ox I think expresses the state of one who is not entirely 
 silenced by his adversary, but has stiU a word to give him in reply. Cf. i. 31. 
 d. and v. 76, yevofLevTjs ttoWtjs ayrtXoyiaSf and viii. 53, voXh^v avrtXoylav Kal 
 {TxeTAmffjutJc, where the word plainly implies a violent dispute between two 
 parties. It is possible that Popp.'s meaning, ' JSiechtfertigungsgrunde' counier- 
 plea, or argument in excuse, justification, may be correct. Kriig.'s interpreta- 
 tion would differ from the above in making ri fi)} vtKti&lv ttjs yvw^iy)s the 
 accusative coming after afifiXyveadai, and following the analogy of a^^Kiveirdai 
 T^v yvc^fiTjy, and similar phrases. In this case the ^/xos, which is the subject 
 of aiifi\ivea$ai, is again supplied without change before vofilaai. 
 ivSdx^<^&o.L, See i. 124. 140, and iv. 18. t. tows avrovs is made 
 
 by Arn. the predicate, the brave should always be the brave, the same persons, 
 and we may quote in confirmation 6 aiirSs flfii ry yvdi^ri, iii. 38, and v. 75, as 
 well as (Ed. Tyr. 557, auT6s clfit rif /3ouAci//iaTi. But it is also possible to 
 make rohs avToiis the subject, 'tis right to hold that those who remain unchanged 
 in purpose are brave men rightly so called (or as Krug. has it gebuhrenderweise, 
 i.e. as is seemly they should), and not to thinTc that they can while still retaining 
 courage (or claiming to be brave men) by putting forward inexperience as an 
 excuse with any show of reason show the white feather in any respect. The 
 adverbs El/ctfrois and op&Si'i seem to be contrasted, and are used in a somewhat 
 peculiar manner. Cf. note upon tpiXitai ov iroXe^ius, iii. 65. The metaphor 
 contained In vpoPaWoiievovs is 'shielding themselves behind inexperience 
 as a pretext.' 
 
 (c.) fiyfi/njv here seems to be the faculty of recollection. Kriig. qnotea 
 Ii€fit/iia9a} ayaOhs elyai, "X-en. Anab. iii. 2. ^g. livfv fvi^vx^as. This 
 
 is a sort of fallacy not uncommon in practice, though not noticed in the rheto- 
 rical treatises, where the speaker covertly Implies the incompatibility of two 
 qualities, and argues from the presence of one the absence of the other. See 
 for illustration Macaulay's remarks upon Montagu and Harley, Hist. vol. iv. 
 ixirKiiaaei — 'frightens out.' Cf. rb KvTri]phv iinrKi\<rafi, ii. 38, and Aristotle's 
 iKKpol/tt T^v 4i/4pyeiav. trpbs (liv ri 4fnriip6T€pov k,t.\. — * against 
 
 their superiority in practice, place your superiority in courage.' 
 Tvx^Ty. With no expressed participle. Cf. i. 32. b. 
 
 ((£.) nepiyiyvsTai — 'there results as a balance in your favour,' i.e. &?b&T 
 the calculations just recommended, as the verb is used ii. 39. The meaning 
 arises from the force of Ttepi, ' over and above,' i. 2. b. See a somewhat remark- 
 able combination of the prep, with et/xl, vi. 55, iroWQ t^ nepiivri, and again viii, 
 46, 4k TreptivTos, ca;-abundanti. ir\^6os — 'superior numbers.' Cf. 
 
 supra i. 106. b. 125, and infra 89. a. to iroAXa, adverbially, as 
 
 i. 13. a. So Napoleon said. Providence generally favours the strong 
 battalions. aiirit TaiiTa k.t.K. — ' the fact that these very mishaps 
 
 have befallen us will teach us better for the future.' In accordance, as Arn. 
 says, with the proverb irad-fipiaTa juad^fiara. 
 
Chap. 89.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 257 
 
 (e.) rh KaB' loured/ — ' so far as concerns himself,' Kvug.iMtev' in lis own 
 particular department (or duii/).' x^P""- I have pointed out in a note 
 
 upon ^sch. Agam. 11 (Terminalia ii.) that this is the technical military word 
 for 'station: Cf. iv. 126. e. i. 28, iii. 22, vii. 49, viii. 71 ; Xen. Anal. iv. 8. 15. 
 iiv . . . ^ov\i)e^. On fill, &% distinguished from ei, see note i. 120. c, and on 
 Kai, to be rendered by an emphasis on the auxiliary verb, see i. 15. b. 
 Tifi.'fiiroi'Tai. We have the regular passive form, TiiiriB-iia-ovTai, vi. 80, but on 
 these middle for passive forms, see i. 68. c. 81. b. The instrumental dative in 
 this case makes it more difficult to give the middle sense — 'shall win honour 
 for themselves hy means of the rewa/rds,' &e. 
 
 Chapteb LXXXVIII.— (a.) t!> irKridos. Cf. supra, 87. d. 
 ^uyKTrifievoi. Haack rightly remarks that this is equivalent to Kara ^vcrrd- 
 o-€ij yiyvifitvoi, sup. 27. 2, 'forming into groups among themselves.' 
 iv T^ trafiwi.. There is doubtless, as Kriig. notices, a sort of reference to 
 irpi^Tcpoy — ' under the existing circumstances: e!\.e-y€. Note the im- 
 
 perfect of continuous action — he kept telling them (or, it loas his wont to tell them), 
 Kriig. says i>s may be simply attached to f\eye, and the words irpoirapfffKeia^e 
 Tttj yyd/ias considered as a Sia fiiaov. But it is in reality attached to both 
 verbs, for the plain reason that irpoiropeff/tciiafe is a sort of epexegesis to iXe-yi, 
 It was by what he said to them that he prepared them to adopt the notion. Tr. 
 prepossessed their minds with a notion, avTo7s . . . a,vTo7s. The 
 
 repetition is awkward, but the first airoTs is the dative, as in the common usage. 
 Quid mihi Celsus agit — 'for them,' i. e, which they might meet with. See remarks 
 on Ixxxix. c. 
 
 (d.) ox^ov . . . ujTOXwpeiy. One of the cases where a neuter verb passes 
 into an active one, because it expresses some action commonly described by an 
 active verb; as it has an active sense it takes an active construction. So 
 imi^eKB6yTiS rouTovs, iii. 34, and iv. 28, i^avexiipa tci elpnfj.eya — was for baching 
 oat of what he had said. Cf. in Latin ' egredi urbem,' and similar phrases. 
 Popp. refers to Pflagk ad Eur. Sec. 812. See Jelf, § 548. ob. The word 
 ixi^os is used with somewhat of contempt. Remark the absence of the article 
 with 'ABrivaToi and IleAoirowTicriaiv, conveying as it does the reason of the fact 
 implied in the verb. ivSiLvriaiv . . ,'rov BapafXv, This is not, I 
 
 think, as Dale and some others have understood it, to put them in mini of the 
 confidence they once felt, but it is simply, as Kriig. has it, an exhortation to con- 
 fidence, as iv. 17. b., im6iJivriai.v toO KaKas $oii\ii<Taa-Bat, So too lufivfiffKea-Bai 
 is by no means always recordari, but sometimes merely mentionem facere, 
 i. 10, &\\uv lisyiBovs iripi oiiK Iixi/t]<tBt\, i. 37, ii. 45. b. iii. 90. It is, however, 
 easy to see how one idea runs into the other. 
 
 Chaptbe LXXXIX.— (o.) Th ir\Ti6os. Cf. Ixxxvii. d. Tnat the inter- 
 pretation there given is correct seems clear from the fact, that the contrary 
 notion is here expressed by ovk avh rov ia-ov—'not on an equal scale: This, 
 at least, I believe to be the meaning of the words, from such phrases as nii iwh 
 ivTiiraKov irapaaxivTis, i. 91; and a-nh rov iaav, i. 77, 99, 136, MS. where see 
 note; iii. 10, 11, awh rov "iaov d/uXovvTss, and many others, as orb tuv i/ioiwy, 
 
 S 
 
258 NOTES ON THUOYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 viii. 89. Kriigj., however, inclines to the interpretation, ' with inferior means 
 for j}reparation' 
 
 (J.) eireiTO ^ iiiXiffTa k.t.A. I should be inclined to tr. this contro- 
 verted passage — ' and then with regard to the point upon which they principally 
 place their reliance in coming forward to the combat^ as though it were a peculiar 
 prerogative of theirs to he brave men, they feel confident for no other reason than 
 on account of their general success, which they owe to their experience in land 
 service, and they fancy it will do the same for them at sea.' The relative ^ has 
 for its antecedent either toGto simply (Arn., Kriig.), or we may assign it to the 
 class of cases mentioned by Madvig, Gr. Or. : ' A preceding relative sentence, 
 with a relative in the neuter, occasionally assigns merely the action, opinion, or 
 utterance, upon occasion of which something is remarked in the principal sen- 
 tence, and signifies with regard to.' In this case, the clause in apposition is 
 ws -TrpoiTTJKov iJvai. The verbs oiovrai and Bapaovatv are, despite what Arn. says, 
 simply connected by the conjunction. As for the subject of iroi-iiixeiv, it seems 
 to me in vain to dispute whether it be t^v i/Mweipiav k.t.X. or the ri ai/hpeTov 
 implied in the toCto, which is antecedent to ^, for both are possible, and neither 
 can be disproved. The last, as nearer, looks more probable. rh Se 
 
 , . . TTepteCTa i — * but this in all Justice,* i. e. rh avT6 — that is to say, the suc- 
 cess, rh Karopdovv, implied in Karop6ovvris — •* will, as things are, turn out (come 
 round) to be ours.' This appears simple and unobjectionable. But other editors, 
 as GoU. and Arn., refer rh Z\ to tnaniovris irpocrcpxovrat, and make it <Ae 
 confidence of victory trepUa-rai — will be as balance in our favour. Cf. Trepi- 
 ytyverai, supra, ch. 87 d. Their principal argument is, that we have 4k rov 
 Sticaiov, and not ix rov eMros. But to say, that the expectation of what is pro- 
 bable is a 'just expectation,' is surely natural in all languages. Cf. Ixxvii. a- 
 SiKalav r^v r^K/iapain. Popp., on i. 5 1, b. has collected a great number of similar 
 adverbial phrases — iK rov tpavepov, iK rov dfioiov, &c. eiirep — 'if we 
 
 grant for the sake of argument.' iv iKflvif — 'in that other case;' 
 
 i. e. by land. t^ Z\ K.r.X. — 'but in what we either of us possess 
 
 superior experience, therein we possess superior courage.' If tJ be read before 
 i/j.weip6Tepoi, it may either be a mere qualification, at all, or it may mean more 
 experience in any matter, whatever it be. 
 
 (c.) Sua. r^v a^eripav SS^av — 'for their own glory's sake,' i.e. upon 
 purely selfish principles, without regard to the interest of the allies — ' Sio hie 
 valet '€veKa, ut iv. 102, v. 53,' Popp. See Jelf, § 627. ovk &v irore 
 
 iT^X^hvav K.r.\.—i. e. if not subjected to some compulsion of the kind. 
 iraph iro\v. Cf. i. 29 c. TrLiTr6Tepov — ' one for which there is 
 
 foreground.' ovk ttv iiyovi'Tat — by hyperbaton for ^7oC>Tai &» 
 
 ovBttTTaaBai. The usage is to be explained upon the same principle as the 
 double iv. When anything contingent is to be stated, the Greeks prepare the 
 hearer for it at once by bringing forward, even out of its place, or at the risk of 
 repetition, the particle used to denote such contingency. See e. g. infra iciv. a. 
 Am. compares the German practice of placing the auxiliary verb at the com- 
 nienceiiiont, and reserving the principal verb for the close of the sentence. 
 roil TTapa rroKi. These words might certainly stand for a noun, like ri 
 TapavrUa, iii. 4. b. ; Tij! trap' iKiriSa, iv. 62. Most editors, however, supply 
 veviKT^Kivai from the preceding irpovtviK-nKhsu—' worthy of the very signal victory 
 
CiTAp. 89.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 259 
 
 toJiich yov. have gained ;' and this seems confirmed by i. 29, Mxricrav irapit, wo\i, 
 and ^o-o-rjflfVTej iraph iroKv just above, to which the article may refer. On irapk 
 see i. 29 c. ; 41 c. 
 
 (d.) avriTraXoi. 'Dubitatur utrum hsBO vox hie significefc, pares virihus 
 an adversarios pugnam committentes.' Popp. But says Kriig. avrhaKot 
 never signifies enemies, in Thuc. ; and surely this is true. The collocation 
 shows the word to be contrasted with ^k iroWif vwoSeeirTepaiv, and therefore to 
 mean fairly matched in point of resources ; tr. ' now it is when fairly matched in 
 externals that men in the generality of eases {as the Lacedaemonians now) go forth 
 against the foe, relying more on might than policy ; hut those who on very un- 
 equal terms, yet entirely of their own free will, do the same thing, these, I say, 
 dare to meet the foe, because the assurance in their own minds is something very 
 powerful indeed (i. e, they must have some very powerful assurance in their own 
 minds) to give them courage to meet the foe.' In most of the cases where you 
 find men in battle trusting to strength and courage, rather than calculation, 
 they are at least upon equal terms with the foe; where, therefore, you find 
 them doing the same thing upon very unequal terms, you may he sure they 
 are supported by a superabundance of vigour and resolution. This is one of 
 those passages which is easily slurred over, but proves difiicult upon exami- 
 nation. The above is, I think, the right interpretation. Of course after ol S" 
 we must supply iirepxinemi. iriavvoi — the word recurs, v. 14. 
 
 Dionysius reckons it among the yXarriiSri of Thuc. Kriig. remarks that it is 
 not found elsewhere in Gr. prose, but in Arist. 2fub. 949. rqi ovk 
 
 e'lKdr I — ' that which is contrary to all reasonable expectation,' ' improbability.' 
 We may tr. ' are more afraid of us owing to the very unreasonableness of our 
 conduct, than if we had met them with the proportionate preparation (or com- 
 mensurate preparations) calculated according to reason.' The article -ry is used 
 because the writer means the sort of preparation commonly found in such cases. 
 This is, I think, a fair answer to Kriig.'s objection founded on the need of 
 its absence. He himself tr. our calculable force, the force which they can 
 calculate, but surely of Kara. K6yov thus used ' desiderantur exempla.' Por the 
 sentiment, cf. vi. 34. 
 
 (e.) TtoWa 56 Kal—' and farther again.' ^ 5 77, as frequently, 
 
 •ere now,' cf. 77, c; and with Kriig. iroXKa. ^5?) arpar 617^^0. Sra t);i/ TOiavTijv 
 apTrayhi' 'oTiiXeTO, Plat. jBep. p. 469- eveff^v. Haase, according to a style 
 
 of criticism more popular formerly than at present, altered this word to eirTaLcrev, 
 because he did not find the verb iri'Trrtu so used in Thucyd. But we have rijv 
 fj.eyiKriv Swo/xif t^s 7r((A.€as ireirTiuKi/ioc, vii. 77; and there is no reason in the 
 nature of things, so far as I can see, why a similar metaphor should be in- 
 applicable here. Indeed, as Krug. remarks, the connexion of the mh with 
 ?7rTaHr€v would form a greater difficulty. The argument is implied rather than 
 expressed, and somewhat resembles that noticed above, Ixxxvii. c. ' Though the 
 Peloponnesian force is greatly superior, we may still hope to defeat it, for 
 greatly superior forces have frequently succumbed to inferior ones from m- 
 experience or want of spirit. These qualities don't attach to us, but we can t 
 presume so much for them.' e«i. .?.a,. This phrase, it is well 
 
 known expresses a sort of reservation upon the simple ,ko,v-' willingly if L 
 can help it.' I agree with Arn. in thinking it a relic of that early stage of 
 
26o NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II, 
 
 language, when expletive clauses were as common as they now are fn the con^ 
 versation of the vulgar. These garnish their discourse with many such 
 unnecessary words and phrases, if so he, to he sure, and the like, without much care 
 for their grammatical coherence. The dvai here resemhles the former of the 
 above expletives in meaning, the latter in absence of construction. Jelf, § 667, 
 explains eicii/ eTyai = kKiiv ohaiav, ' according to his real nature,' i. c really. 
 Madvig, § 15T, says, 'The infinitive eTi/ot stands in a restrictive sense with the 
 adjective kKtiiv in negative sentences — to be willing, i. e. at least willingly ; rarely 
 in affirmative sentences, and that willingly.' This I consider nearer the truth. 
 Rost's explanation, § 183, 5, does not materially differ; he classes it with such 
 eases as the parenthetical as eliriiv, dis euoI So/teiy ; remarking that such in- 
 finitives are usually preceded by as or iirov, but that they may be omitted. 
 See also i. 21. b. and Herm. Opusc. 1. 227. 
 
 (f.) ififioK'tif. The impact with the efi$o\ou, i. e. the rostrum or leak of 
 the ship (vii. 34, 36). K.rug. quotes ^sch. PerstB, 407, ififfoKius xoAtoffTci/toir 
 iro(oj'Toi. vp6<To\lnv. Bekker reads 7rp({oiJ(iv, perhaps rightly, says 
 
 Kriig. Cf. iv. 29. d. It has been already remarked how hopeless is the con- 
 fusion of these prepositions in MSS. iK troWov — 'from a distance' 
 i. c. the space necessary to give impetus to the charge (iv. 34. a.; 100. b.). 
 iv 5€ovTt — 'when in need/ 'when in a position that required it.* I do not 
 think that it is, as Popp. states, exactly equivalent to Se6vTa^. So in the 
 passage quoted by Kriig. from Dem. iv. 10 — Tovruy oitSevl initrore 4y Seovri 
 KeKxprii^Bi — ' on an occasion requiring it.' Siix-rrXoi. See i. 49. b. 
 ava<rTpo<pal — 'wheeling bach again,' i. e.when the enemy's line had been broken 
 by the SUKTrKovs. If the line was but a short distance from the shore, like the 
 French fleet at Aboukir, this would be impossible for want of room in which to 
 turn after passing through the hostile ships. I do not think Am. is right in 
 confounding ivaffrpofii with the apixpova-is, which was backing water after 
 having struck an-enemy with the en&oKov, in order to repeat the blow. This 
 would be possible if the enemy were ever so near the shore, because the attack- 
 ing ship would have the same space to back in, as it had to advance. tV 
 vp6voia.v — ' the provision,' tr. ' I will make the necessary provision.' 
 Ka6i(rTa<r6at — ' constitute itself a regular land fight.' 
 
 (g.) iropi Tois vavai — ' contrary to the sense and the grammar,' Kriig. 
 It is, however, retained by Popp. The objection is, I suppose, that irapi, 
 ' cum dativo ' denotes rest near a person, or personified object. See Madvig, 
 § 75, '< who however only says usually with persons. Jelf, § 646, e. remarks 
 that this constructio prsegnans, i. e. of motion terminating in rest, is rare with 
 TTaph and the dative, but quotes Xen. Anal. ii. J, 27, leVoi TrapaTitT<ra<j)4pvet, to 
 go and stay with Tissaphemes. If irapi, stands here I would tr. 'go and wait 
 quietly by your ships.' After rais in five good MSS. re is found : it is expli- 
 cable upon the principles expounded, i. 9, a. i. e. itapa, vauirl ^4poyrfs is a sort of 
 cumulative clause, repeating the idea contained in cBtoktoi. Popp. tr. ' ordinem 
 servantes et apud navem remanentes.' ■irapayyfK\6ii.iva. Is there 
 
 not a special force in the present participle — ' the words of command as they are 
 given ' / o^etas, like i. 70, b^eus inivoTJa'ai, and iii. 82, rb 4fiir\TiKTa)S o^i, 
 
 denoting quickness, or sharpness of apprehension. 5i' o\lyov, equivalent 
 
 to /njj Ik ttoWov, supra (f.), and the same phrase, iii. 21, where it is, at a short 
 
Chap. 90.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 26 1 
 
 interval, cf. vii. 36, 71. i<f>op^i<T^as. The word, as Arn. shows, is 
 
 properly employed of aUocJeade, as iii. 33, vi. 48, &c., but this it is said implies 
 the close observation of the blockading squadron. Phormion might well describe 
 the watch he had been keeping over the Peloponnesiau fleet in these terms, and 
 therefore the regular meaning of i<t>6piin<7is is applicable here. I do not think 
 Krug. is right in rendering with Heilmann, 'Anlauf,' the onset; or • der Standori 
 der Feinde,' tie post from which the enemy is observing us. In fact, as Arn. 
 Bays, the word may apply to both parties— ' wa<e«»^ each other as we are at a 
 short distance.' % is n. So Bekker and the other editors, from a 
 
 conjecture of Stephens. The MSS. had So-te, for which some give Ss re, bat 
 inappropriately here. ^v^^ipn is. 'As iv. 26, 3; with an imper- 
 
 sonal dat. i. 123, a. 4s Sa-ov to?s vty ^v/iipfpei, which is unusual. Cf. also Xen.. 
 Mell. vi. 2, 19, Sirtp fiKic-ra els nixv ^viKpepn. The Ka\ which some good MSS: 
 insert before ^u/xfepei is unendurable.' — Kriig. 
 
 _ (A.) 6 ayciy— 'the struggle,' contaiDing viithia itself the idea of the issue of 
 the struggle, tr. 'great is that for which yon have now to fight, i. e. either the 
 breaking up of all the hopes which the Feloponnesians found upon their fleet, or 
 the bringing more home to the Athenians their fea/rs respecting the sea.' 
 Thv tpifiov, because it refers to what would then be a definite source of peril 
 and apprehension. aS, either 'again,' with reference to what has 
 
 been said, § b. Popp. ; or ' o« the other hand,' i. e. ' though you have a great 
 struggle before you' (Kriig.). 6/io7ai — 'equal to what they were 
 
 iefore.' Cf. i. 35, ovx ifiola rj aWorpiacris, and ii. 80, iii. 40, c. 
 464\ov(riv — literally, do not choose to ie,tT.'are not readily;' there is a 
 similar Homeric usage — /j.i/j.veiv ouk e6i\eiTKov ivavrlov, II, xxi. 366, and some- 
 what similarly — to SevSpa oiSep fi i64\ei SiSd<rK€ip, Plat. Phced. 230 D. Cf. the 
 more common analogous use of (piKia, 
 
 ChaPTEE XC. — (a.) irapeKcXcuETo — ' cohortatus est,' Cses. Cf. Xen. Anab. 
 iv. 2, II. 4it\ r€<r<rdpa>y — 'four abreast.' Of course, if M /iias 
 
 rerayiievoi means 'in siugle line,' as Poppo observes (or, as it is called tech- 
 nically, ' in line of battle ahead'), iirl nirff. must mean four abreast. 4t\ fnas 
 is equivalent to the opBios \6xos of land warfare. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. u. a., and 
 Miiller's Dor. ii. 246 (Eng. ed.). 'Matth. (Gh: § 584) quotes this passage of 
 Thue. to show that eVl reo-ir. meimsfour deep ; but it is to be recollected that a 
 column /o«r abreast, when turned into line, becomes /owr deep.' Grote, vi. 
 27; n.j Thirlw. iii. 155. ejrl TJjv lauTcDi' yrjv. See this passage 
 
 discussed. Appendix i. Se^i^ Kept^ Tiyovfieyifi — ' the right squadron 
 
 tinder Timocrates led the van.' The circumstantial or modal dative. Jelf, 
 § 603 — 4, 699; cf. Matth. § 405. iirX 5' ai-'i^ — query, in it— in 
 
 the right wing. Spa — 'if, as they had every reason to suppose, 
 
 Phormio should suspect Naupactus to be the object of the attack.' 
 
 (4.) TrXeovra iTr'nrXovv. The expression appears so strange that Kriig. 
 would adopt Dobree's conjecture irKiovTes; others quote 'tanti belli impetus 
 navigavit,' Cic. de em;). C». Pomp. § 34. We mast tr.' in mid course.' €(a 
 
 Tou eavTuv Kepas. To illustrate this by an analogy from land-fighting, 
 compare Xenophon's account _ of the two lines at Cunaxa, Anab. i. 8, 13, 
 roa-oir<ji yhp TT\r}eei irepiriv PainKeiis iiare jxitrov ri eauroO ex"'' to" Kipm 
 
262 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 ivciivvfxoy 6|ft) ?iv. Observe that ff(^wv and eavruy refer to the same subject as 
 viii. 76, P. 
 
 (c.) ip'fificfi 6vTt =: avOptairatv ouk iv6vTUVt ch, XZT. — 'undefended' as the 
 Messenians were marching along shore. Kara fiiav iirl Kipws. 
 
 The complete phrase; Karo iniav alone might mean one deep (cf. vi. 32); both 
 together mean ' in single file.' Cf. HerOd. vi. 12; Liv. xxxvii. 29, 23. 
 irpis rp 7p — ' close off shore ' fieTUTrriSSv — ^ adversisfrontibus' 
 
 P.; 'yttnc^wyron^ifiw*/ GoU. ; ri /tcTWTro Tropctxo*' TOiy ^coi/T^OiS, Schol. P. cf. 
 Liv. xxxvii. 23, ' In frontem directas habebant naves, et in frontem dirigebant.' 
 H3,c convci'sione uuum ilium irrixov quern cttI xipas irAeo^/res efficiebant, niuta- 
 verunt in unum ^vy6v. P. cf. Miill. Eumen. The word is itself an SttoJ Xey. 
 iu Thucyd. ; but we have rb eo-ai /ieTftiirof, tte inner front of the wall, iii. 21. 
 Thuc. V. 10. 
 
 {d.) 5is 6?x* Taxovs. Jelf, § 528. iirKrrpo'p'fiv — 'the 
 
 sudden tacking round,' as we should say. It is used for any rapid evolution 
 or manojuvre in war; see Soph. (Ed. Col. 1045, Reisig. eupux'"?''"' 
 
 — not ' open sea/ but comparatively open, mid-channel. i^iuaav, 
 
 Duker says, is the technical phrase for driving an enemy's ship on shore. Cf . 
 vii. 36, 52; viii. 104 — 5. Si4<f)eeipav — 'disabled,' cf. i. 49 — 50. 
 
 v-jro(pevyov(ras — *as they were endeavouring to escape.' avaSovixevoi 
 
 — ' lashing them and towing them astern.' Cf. Xen. Sell. v. i, 21 ; and i. 50, 
 ovx ^T^KOi/ avaSoifiiVOi. avro7s afSpaffi. Matth. § 405 ; Jelf, 
 
 § 604, I, iv. 14, I. ^TTiff^aivovTss — cf. iv. 14, b. Kal i-mcr^aU 
 
 vovTes is T^r ddxairaav ^vv Tois 3irA.ois avBetXKov avr t\ap.^av6/jiei^0L ruv yeojv— • 
 ' wading, heavy armed as they were, into the sea, and having hoarded the ships, 
 they fought from the decks, and recovered the ships while in the very act (ijSri) 
 of being carried off.' 
 
 Chapiee XCI. — (o.) tpBavovaiv. 'ABriyaToi, sc. Observe the change of 
 subject. ^{rxoytroi avrlirpupot Kar^ rh 'hiroWiiivLov — 'forming, 
 
 close in shore, in line of battle off the temple of Apollo, with their prows facing 
 the enemy.' Cf. iv. 8, 14, vii. 34, 36, 40, viii. 53; Herod, viii. 11; Diod. xii. 
 61; Wess. K. aiivvov^fvoi. Observe the change of gender. We 
 
 have iftrxouirai just before. It is a (TX^/*** t^p^s t6 a"rjp.atv6fj.€votf — the crews being 
 implied in the ships. So below, we have Koeeiiroi followed by $ovK6ii.emi. 
 
 (b.) inaiwvi^oy o/xa TT\4ovTes — ' chanted the peean as they sailed along.' 
 On the V. L. itrai(iitfi^op and iiraiiivL^oy, see note ad i. 50, and Wessel. ad Uiod. 
 xiii. p. 554. iroKii npi — '/iw ahead of the rest.' 
 
 ipfiovcra nfreapos — 'lying at anchor in the open roadstead.' Cf. i. 48 a.; 
 vii. 71, Schol. <pSa(ra(ra. Some MSS. have ical neptTrKeicraira (cancelled 
 
 or marked as doubtful by Bek., Popp., and GoU.), performing the evolution 
 called ireplirXovs, the whole being equivalent to <pBda^a<ra Sirre trepiirXiva-at. 
 
 (0.) vapa \6yoii. Cf . Ixxxv. b. KaSe7aai ras /ct^iroj — 
 
 ' demissis remis,' Liv. xxxvi. 44, 'holding water,' as we say. iTreaTrtaav 
 
 ToC ttXov — 'stopped their way.' Cf. Matth. § 353, 5; Jelf, § 517. 
 a.^vfi.(j>opoy — 'rem perniciosam,' cf. i. 32; literally 'inutilem,' by ixdaais. 
 lilomf. quotes an early instance from Hes. Op. et JDies, /ua\' aiTvii(pop6s ian 
 <pvT0i(rty. The Latins use 'inutilis' in the same manner. See Heusing. ad 
 
Chap. 93.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 263 
 
 Cic. de Off. iii. 13, quoted by P. ; and so axp'^ios, Horn. II. ii. 269 ; cf . Stallb. 
 ad Plat. Pist. 334 a. aXvamKis, Polyb. iii. 116 ; Hebr. xiii. 17. 
 irpbs T^i/ a>'T£|<ipfii)(rii' — 'propter inmrsionem quam liostis ex hrevi spatio 
 in ipsas erat facturus' Port. <ani\6fix.i\aw has no connexion in signif. witb 
 i^6pja\<!i% in 0. Ixxxix., which implies talcing a position from which they could 
 watch one another, from dpfiea. This is from dp/ida. [So we have in the next 
 sentence ^ir' avrovs tbpfnjtrav.'] ' Considering what a short distance the Athenians 
 were from them, so that they could make an instantaneous charge upon them' 
 4^ 6\lyov. Cf. Ixxxix. Si' oxlyov, Xen. Anab. i. 10. 10, Kr. ^cax*" — 
 
 'shallows,' Arrian, E. A. i. 18 ; ' In brevia et syrtes urget,' Virg. JSn. i. iii ; 
 liucan ix. 338; Tac. Ann. i. 70, iv. 33. SiKsiKav, here intransitive, 
 
 • ran aground.' In iv. 26 e. it is used transitively, and so iTroKiWav, 26. P. & K. 
 
 Chapteb XCII. — (o.) awh ei/iis KeAeiJirnoToi. 'The Athenians were 
 beyond measure elated by the incident, so that a single word from Phormio 
 sufficed to put them in active forward motion.' — Grote, vi. 283 ; cf. xc. c. j o7r6 
 arjiielov if 6s, Soph. AJ. 704, Loheck. 
 
 (6.) Sta<l>9etpaVT€s o yeS^o-oi/TO. Cf. xc. d. % irepl rjjy 
 
 6\Ko5o KOT€'Su. An elliptical, but very Intelligible, expression — 'which mat 
 sunk hy the manoBUvring [TrepfirAous] of the Athenian ship round the merchant- 
 man' e^eircfrev — ' delatus est, vel proprie a mari ejectus est.' ^KirinTeiy 
 is commonly used in the sense of being cast on shore (so inipepia-eai, of frag- 
 ments of wreck, i. 54), both in Thucyd. and Xenophon. Cf. vii. 74, viii. 34. 
 P. = ef e^XJJfli) ; f^V^X^V, K- 
 
 (c.) effTvcay See v. Another elliptical form — 'erected their trophy at the 
 spot from which they had put to sea.' Cf with Bl. vi. 68, 4^ ^s Kpare'Lv Set. 
 vavdyia. The younger student may observe the difference between vauecyia 
 and youayia — the former meaning a shipwreck, the Utter fragments of wreck. 
 avilKovTo — 'recovered,' \it. picked up; cf. i. S4- Cf. Xen. Hell. i. vii. 4, in 
 the famous passage describing the battle of Arginusae, iiSri o'vk aveiXovTo Toiis 
 vavdyovs. TpoTra'iov Trfs Tpoirijs &s k.t.K. — sub. Twv vcCi'. Steph, 
 
 ap. Pop.; cf. vii. 54; Lobeck ad Soph. Aj. 254. hviSeaav. Cf 
 
 Ixxxiv. c; i.e. to Poseidon, whose temple stood there; cf. Strab. viii. p. 333. 
 The promontory seems to have been called Drepanum f rom its shape. Gottl. 
 
 (d.) wTrii fiicra— 'at nightfall {OT under cover of night).' oTs tSei. 
 
 K. says the dat. is naturally used here : the ships with which they were to 
 have co-operated; cf. 83. a. and i. 116, &c. P. supplies abrois, and says this 
 is an isolated instance of eSei with a dative. Cf. Matth. ^391. 
 
 Chapteb XCIII.—SioXDffai— transitive— 'before Cnemus and Brasidaa 
 allowed the combined fleet to disperse.' Diod. xii. 49- ^ x ^ ' /" " " "— 
 
 October. Thirlw. SiSa^avrav—' at the suggestion.' 
 
 dTOireipSo-ai. Cf. vii. 43, airoireipSffai toS TrapaTHX^aiMTOs, and i. 61. d. P. ; 
 also iv. 13s, iLntire'ipaaev I, BpairlUs TloTiUias. a<f>iKaKTas, cf. 
 
 xiii f &ic\v<rTOS. See below, xciv. c. rWiriKpaTeiv. 
 
 ' Sttch was the confessed superiority of the Athenians at sea, that while they 
 guarded amply the coast of Attica against privateers, they never imagined tlie 
 possibUity of an attack upon their own main harbour.'— Grote, vi. 286. 
 
264 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 rh ivnpiffiov — 'sitting cloth' Grote, who thus follows the Schol., who ex- 
 plains it as ri Kuas S iiriKiiBTjvTai ot ipitTffovnSj Zih. rb ix)) trvvrpifieffOai avrSav 
 Tor rrvyis, a very intelligible explanation to any boating man. They had 
 doubtless a second object, viz. to provide against the loss of force in the stroke 
 which takes place when the oarsman sits upon a slippery surface. See the 
 Appendix to Am. Thucyd. by Dr. Bishop. The jokes, however, in Aristophanes 
 upon the subject, seem to indicate that the skin of the Athenian seamen was 
 rather more sensitive than the worthy doctor imagines. Of. Ar. Banie, 223. Bl. 
 quotes Plut. Them, iv., ®efii(TTOK\TJs els v-nyipeffiov Koi k^tttiv trvvetmiXe rhv tS>v 
 'A6iivalav Srinov ; and Isocrat. p. 688. Thirlwall (iii. 157) supposes that the 
 sailors made these imripiaia, seat covers, also available for sleeping on at night. 
 [Cf. Virg. Qeorg. iii. 313, 'Usum in castrorum ct miseris velamina nautis.'] 
 It is used for a saddle-cloth or riding-pad, Diod. xx. 4. -rpovairTipa 
 
 — ' the loop nhereby the oar was fastened to the oar-hole in the side, and thus 
 prevented from slipping,' Grote, u. s. He says that, especially with the oars 
 of the Thrauitae, some thong must have been required to prevent the oar from 
 slipping downwards, whether the fulcrum of the oar was formed by a thole or 
 notch on the gunwale, or by a perforation in the ship's side — ' lorum quo 
 remus ad scalmum (s. paxillum) alligatur.' Cf. Bl. ad Msch. Pert. 382. Leake 
 {Att. p. 139) describes a similar thong used in the modem Greek galleys. P. 
 ' Ruderring.' Thirlwall (u. s.) calls it the thong for fastening the oar to the peg 
 of the rowlocJc. Homer calls them -rponoi ; Od. iv. 782, iiprifavro S' iperull 
 rpoirois iv Sfpp.arivoiaip (a line repeated viii. .153). They appear to have been 
 also called ffrpocjiol, corrupted in Latin into ' struppus.' [Mr. Eich (s. v.) gives 
 a drawing of the manner of fastening the oars in a Mediterranean galley of the 
 sixteenth century, and quotes Vitruv. a. 3, 6, and Liv. ap. Isidor. Orig. xix. 4, 
 9]; V. Schol. ad Arist. ^cA. 523. iirel oUt' atrh tov irpotpavovs 
 
 K.T.A. — ' nam nee aperte eos ausuros esse (adnavigare) quiete («. e. se rem non 
 prohibentibus), neque si in animum inducerent, se non prcBsensuros, P, [But it 
 is also very probable that Knff riavxiaf may mean 'quietly' in the sense of 
 deliberately, in cool hlood.'] For inth toC irp, cf. i. 35. d. ; for Kafl" iitrvxlav, in 
 the sense of quiete, see i. 83, iv. 22, 117, vii. 40, 73 — 4, ^"1. 27. On the use of 
 /iii hv in a conditional proposition, see Jelf, 810, i, 814; Matth. § 520 — 3; on 
 ToK/iriffM after iwet, Jelf, 889. The infinitives seem to depend upon some 
 verb signifying ' expectation,' to be supplied from irpoaSoKta. Bekker corrects 
 ovSi , . . oiSi (apparently with reason, though without MSS. authority) into 
 oijT€ . , . otfre. Kal ix'^P^^^* '^^^ '^^ its usual meaning of carrying 
 
 into effect a preconceived plan. (So xlix. Koi iipaaav, they actually did it.) 
 KoX retains this sense in the form ei Kai, Kal 5?) with the p.p. &o. K, cf. iv. 8, 
 vii. 60, viii. 1, 3, 27; cf. Jelf, 761 — 3- Xeyerai implies (as elsewhere 
 
 in Thucyd.) that it was not his opinion that this was the real cause of their 
 abandoning their original intention. rb aKpaiTiiptov—i.e.BoiSopov, 
 
 as we learn from the next chap. This was the western promontory of Salamis, 
 only three miles distant from Nisaea. The fortress which stood on the peninsula 
 bore the same name. (It is sometimes written BovSwpoi', Steph. Byz. s. v.) Cf. 
 iii. 51; Diod. xii. 49; Strab. xi. 446. (puKaxii. Cf. ch. 69. 'A 
 
 squadron maintaining a strict blockade to prevent all imports and exports' (iii) 
 i(Tn\iiv fjLTjd' 4Kir\eip jwr^SeV), 
 
Jhap. 95.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 265 
 
 Chapteb XCIV.— (a.) ^j rh^ 'Aei)vai—'io convey the intelligence to 
 Athens.' tppvKrol ir o\e /no i— '.war-beacons,' to distinguish tlieni 
 
 from those used in peace. Cf. iii. 22, 80. Prom the long note of the Scholiast 
 it appears that they resembled those used in the middle ages, Bgured in most 
 works on heraldry. The peace signal was borne quietly [fipt^ovyres'], Schol. 
 The war signal was shaken iKivovyrn'], in token of alarm. Dird. xii. 49, 4, 
 expresses it by the word irupo-eiie.;/. Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. 8, 15 ; Eurip. M. 694 ; 
 Polyb. X. 43. The classical passage in illustration is of course the commence- 
 ment of the Agamemnon of iEschylus. Cf. Herod, vii. 182, ix. 3. So 
 <ppvKTmpia, Soph. Tr. 379; Arist. Av. Ii6i; and the passive form .ppvKTu- 
 peiffSai, Thuc. ili. 80. Hitov ouk. See Jelf, 823, obs. I. 
 
 oiiK i.v &vf/ios. Dale tr. 'It was not a wind which would have prevented 
 them.' There is a sort of irony implied. Tr. therefore • always supposing of 
 course that the wind had not prevented them.' See note on \4yeTti.i, ch. xciii. 
 K. Engelman has ' der Wind wurde sie nicht gehindert hahen.' 
 
 (J.) lo-Ti jap 8 Ti—'to a certain extent.' The reading now adopted for 
 the old €<rTi -yap gre, from Abresch's emendation. arty ovaai—' not 
 
 being water-tight.' ' Quse aquarum vim ferre non poterant/ P. Cf iEsch. S. c. 
 Th. 204 (with Blomfield's note), 793; Supp. 135, S\o a-Tiyay; Eur. Fr. Inc. 
 9; Iph. A. ass ; Flat. Sep. 621 A.. ir^iol—' onfoot.' The objections 
 
 of Popp. and Kriig., who would read tt^Q, are quite nullified by nt^ohs Tropevo- 
 l^evovs, vii. 75, 7. Said also of sailors proceeding by land. Cf. Crif. iii. B; 
 Plut. Philop. 14. (U a A. A. OP — 'more diligently,' as often in Thuc. 
 
 Ai/xtVay K\^<rei Kal t^ SWjj iirtfieKela — 'harbour-shutting, and other 
 kind of precaution.' For the indefinite plur. \inivoiv cf . ad i. 93, b. ; iv. 8, c. ; 
 Diod. u. s., T^tv 5€ Tliipaiu K\ei6poLS Kal fpv\aKaLS iKavaTs 5ia\a^6vr€s (custodiis 
 opportunis locis coUocatis) axipaaav. Hesych. in Ze'a. exei 8e 6 Tlapai^vs 
 Ai/ieVas rpeij KXeiiTTois. Gottl. See Leake, Athen. p. 338, sq. P. ' The 
 lesson was salutary to the Athenians; from henceforward PeirsBens was 
 furnished with a chain across the mouth, and a regular guard down to the end 
 cf the war. Forty years afterwards, however, we shall find it just as negli- 
 gently watched, and surprised with much more boldness and dexterity by the 
 Lacedaemonian captain, Teleutlas.' — Grote, vi. 288. Cf. Xen. Sell. v. i, 19. 
 
 Chaptee XCV. — (a) The following episode (xcv. — ci.) is of great value. 
 Thucydides, himself descended from a Thracian ancestor, living, at the time he 
 wrote his history, in Thrace, and having considerable possessions and large 
 influence in the country, would have ample means of acquiring full information 
 on the subject which he treats. [Cf. Thuc. iv. 104; Herod, v. 16; Marcellin. 
 in vit.; Grote, vi. 293, n.] With regard to Macedonia, on the other hand, both 
 Miiller (Dor. i. 454, E. T.) and Gatterer consider the accounts of Herodotus to 
 be more accurate than those of Thucydides (Gatt. diss, de Herodoti et Thucyd. 
 Thracii,, quoted by Mull.). For the Thracians generally see Herod, v. 3, 9, 
 vii. no, viii. 116, ix. iig; Thuc. ii. 100, vii. 29, 30; Xen. Anab. vii. 2, 38, 
 and the seventh book generally ; Grote, iv. 28. x^'l^^""^- Thirhvall 
 
 places this expedition in October; Dod,vvelI {Ann. Thuc) in October, or Mmmak- 
 terion; Grote in November or December. (Observe that Clinton identifies 
 McemaJcterion with November, Diss, on Attic months, ii. 326.) The Athenians 
 
266 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 complained of the dilatorlness of Sitalkes, who ought to have commenced his 
 invasion at a better season for military operations, but, as Grote observes, the 
 number of independent chiefs over whom he had not even nominal control, 
 rendered this very difficult, if not impossible. SiTtJA/CTjs. Cf. 
 
 ad xxix. 'OSpvcrris. The Odrysse seem to have belonged to that 
 
 Northern swarm of barbarians who invaded Thrace after the Trojan war, and 
 their name is often found interwoven with the ancient myths. Thus the 
 Thracian singer Thamyris is said to have been an Odrysian (Pans. iv. ;J3, 4), 
 and Orpheus is represented as their king. In Herod, iv. 92 (sec Bahr's note), 
 we find them on both sides the Artiscus (now Arda) ; and the Hebrus itself is 
 said to have had its sources in their country. Their name first occurs in the 
 account of the Scythian expedition of Darius Hystaspis. While the south parts 
 of Thrace were overrun by the Persians, the Odrysians, protected by their 
 mountains, retained their independence. Teres was hence enabled to incorporate 
 many Thracian tribes with his subjects, and to extend his kingdom to the 
 Euxine, in spite of a signal defeat which he sustained in that quarter from the 
 Thyni. [Xen. Anab. vii. 2, 22,] In subsequent times they were completely 
 subjugated by Philip of Macedon. (Cramer, i. 286, sq. ; Smith's Did. Geog. 
 s. v.) Suo uTTOcrxeireis. The accusative absolute — (rxv/J^a "aS" 
 
 i\oi' Kttl lifpot. ' We sometimes find an accusative without any verb on which 
 it directly depends, followed by two other accusatives of its parts, each with 
 its proper verb, on the joint notion of which it depends.' Cf. Soph. Ant, 
 21 J Jelf, § 581. 4; Matth., § 288; tr. 'of iioo promises^ wishing to exact the 
 fulfilment of one, and himself to fulfil the other.' Engel. tr. neatly gives the 
 sense : ' Von zwei Versprechungen, die eine eimufordern, die andere selbst zu 
 erf alien.' Bl. cf. Hebrews vi. 18. 
 
 (6.) ouTij! uiro(rx<i^e»'oy. Tr. 'having made him certain promises' what 
 the nature of these promises was Thuc. has not told us. 5iaA\o|€i6y. 
 
 Cf. xxix. He had done so. ^iKnritov. Perdiccas ought to 
 
 have given a certain portion of his kingdom to Philip and to Derdas. [Cf. 
 Miiller's Dor. i. 468; Thuc. i. 57, n., vi. 7.] From Thuoydides' words (ii. 2. u. 
 is T^v ^t\lTnrov irpSrepof oiffav ^pxnv) Poppo thinks he had actually been put 
 in possession and reigned, but had been expelled by Perdiccas. He was now 
 probably dead, as Sitalces purposes to restore, not him, but his son Amyntas. 
 KaTa7a7ot seems also to confirm this view. ^Tri ^aa-tXeia. Matt., 
 
 § 586, 'with a view to placing him upon the throne.' ouk €7r6T€A.ei 
 
 — 'was not for fulfilling .' The imperf. implies that he 'showed no disposition 
 or intention to fulfil his promise.' 
 
 (c.) "Aynaii/a. Most of the modern German editors read this word with an 
 aspirate. This was the founder of Amphipolis, B.C. 437. [Cf. iv. 102, i. 57, 
 ii. 58. For Amphipolis, see Clinton, F. H. ii. 261.] Cf. Schol. ; Cramer, i. 
 291; Thuc. i. 100; Arist. Eth. N. v. 7; Paus. Att. 29; Plin. S. N. iv. 10; 
 Acts xvii. I. eSfi. Cf. Ixxxiii. a. The delay of Sitalkes prevented 
 
 their sending them 
 
 CnAPTEE XCVI. — (a.) hviaTiiffiv. Cf. Ixviii. a. 'ex sedibus evocat.' 
 ipfjoinevos has here its primary meaning, 'setting out from;' not the usual 
 one in Thucydides, ' taking up his head-quarters at.' See note, i. 54. b. 
 
Chap. 96.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 26/ 
 
 Mm"- Cf. ch. xk. 6. Mr. Grote (chap. xxv. note) remarks that we learn 
 trom the researches of modern travellers and geologists that the ideas of the 
 direction and ramifications of this great range entertained up to the present 
 time are very erroneous. It was considered to be a great belt extending from 
 the Adriatic to the Euxine, running nearly parallel with the coast of the iEgean, 
 and with spurs branching off in a southerly direction, forming the watershed 
 of the Hebrus, with its tributaries Artiscus, Agrianea, Contadesdus, Teams, 
 &c., the Nestus and Strymon. The ancients considered it as the highest range 
 with which they were acquainted, though Polybius thought the elevation less 
 than that of the Alps (xxxiv. 10, 15). It was said that from its summit could be 
 seen at once the Euxine, Adriatic, the Danube, and Alps, and to see this view, 
 Philip, last king of Macedon, made the journey described by Livy (xl. 23). 
 Pliny, iv. 10, estimated its height at 6000 paces. Modern travellers consider 
 the Great Balkan to be 3000 feet high. Haemus proper, like the modern 
 Balkan, extends from Mount Scomius to the Euxine. It is also known by the 
 name of Emineh Dagh (Horn. II. xiv. 227 ; Herod, iv. 49; Theoc. Id. vii. 76; 
 Strab. vii. p. 313; Virg. Oeorff. i. 491, ii. 489; Ov. Met. vi. 87; Cramer i. 
 318 j Smith, Diet. Qeog., s. v.). ea\oi<ra-ris ^s rhv Eli^eipov 
 
 irSvToy. Popp. says this is added because E£;|. tt. was also used for 'the 
 countries bordering on the Euxine.' Cf. Xen. Anab. v. i, i. fiexpa 4-n-l 
 flaAoTTov tJjj' iv T^ Eli^eiya ttiJvt^. inrepPdvTi. The dat. of reference, 
 
 rather curiously employed. See Jelf, § 599, i j Thuc. i. 24. a., ii. 49. c. ; 
 Herod, i. 14, 51, iii. 90, vi. 53, &e. iJ.ipri—yivT), idvuv Sti\ov6ti, 
 
 Schol. Hence Poppo would rather read ydv-r] or cSvt;. K. sees no need of 
 change, and cf. Acts ii. 10. "Itrrpov vorafiov. For the account 
 
 of the Thracian rivers see Herod, iv. 48, 9, 5 1 — 8. KaTifKriro. See 
 
 i. 120. b. P. 
 
 (S.) re'rai — 01 aSavaTi^ovres (Herod, iv. gs). The Getse lay between the 
 Hsemua and the Danube, occupying the modern Bulgaria and part of Servia. 
 Like their Scythian neighbours on the other side of the river, they were equipped 
 with bow and arrow, on horseback. They were reckoned by the ancients 
 among the Thracian group of nations, a notion which is supported by Sohafarik, 
 who has written on Sclavonian antiquities. The theory which identified them 
 with the Goths of Scandinavia has been exploded. After the days of Philip of 
 Macedon they extended over the countries now known as Wallachia and Mol- 
 davia, and became known to the Romans under the formidable name of Dacians. 
 Mannert even thinks they stretched as far as Transylvania and Hungary. See 
 the valuable note of Bahr, on Herod, u. s. (Smith's Did. Oeog, s. v. Dacia.) 
 ^juiii7i>;vai — 'cultu similes' V. Cf. iii. 95. tuv opeivuv . . . 
 
 avToyS/iwp. In ci. we read of the autonomous inhabitants of the plain. 
 A7oi. Cf. vii. 27, where we read of 1300 of this race (toD Amitov jipovs) who 
 arrived too late to take part in the expedition of Demosthenes against Sicily. 
 (Xen. Cyr. vi. i, 10; Lips, ad Tac. Ann. iv. 46.) Ovid, speaking of these 
 regions, says [^Trist. v. 7, 19], 
 
 ' Dextera non segnis fixo dare vulnera cultro. 
 Quern vinctum lateri barbarus omnis habet.' 
 
 (e.) 'AypiSyor KaX Aaiaiovs. The Pseonian Agrianes (Herod, v. 16) 
 
268 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 were a considerable tribe in point of territory and population. Strabo says 
 that the Strymon had its source in their country. Tliey were therefore probably 
 located near the foot of that part of Haemus known to the ancients as Scomius 
 and Bhodope. They were not molested by the Persians when the great removal 
 of the Pseonians took place under Darius (Herod, u. s.). In the time of 
 Alexander the Great they were under the rule of their native princes, and did 
 him good service in repressing the incursions of the Triballi, who lay on their 
 north frontier (Arr. E. A. i. 5). They formed excellent light-armed troops, 
 and are frequently mentioned in the campaigns of Alexander (Diod. Sic. xvii. ; 
 Q. Curt. i. 12, 14, ii. '12, 10; Polyb. ii. 65, v. 79; Cramer, i. 274, who says 
 that this is the only passage where the name of the Laeaei occurs). They were 
 probably to the east of the Strymon. (Smith, Diet. Oeog. s. v.) 
 ^^PX' Tpaaiav. It seems certain from the context that the Graaeans were 
 the subjects of Sitalces, and accordingly inixp^ cannot mean, as usually, 'up to 
 a certain point of time or place objectively.' From this passage therefore, and 
 some others, I am induced to believe that it sometimes has the force of co- 
 extensive ivitk, i. e. with that which the succeeding genitive specifies. Here 
 then it implies his empire went just so far as the Graaans went, and no farther. 
 So in i. 71, c. (where see note), /ne'xc roHSe is, just so far as this goes, and no 
 farther. Cf. i. 51, 90, c, and especially ^e^pi toC SiKaiov, iii. 82. Would not 
 this interpretation entirely simplify that difficult passage, Rom. v. 13 ? — &XP^ 
 y6fiou a^apria ^v ^v K6ff^tfi is tr. ' until the law sin was in the world,' though 
 the apostle's argument is, — there is no sin without law : there is sin wherever 
 there is law ; a meaning exactly given by &XP^ i^ the above sense — * sin was 
 coextensive with law,' both nouns being anarthrous. I would suggest a similar 
 interpretation for another well-known passage, which has puzzled all the com- 
 mentators, and is altered as corrupt by Hermann and others (Ar. Poet. § 1 2) : -^ iiiv 
 oZy ^■jToiroiia Trj rpayii>Si(f A*^XP' f^ifov ^irpov fxera K6yov filfiiia'ts fli^at ffirovdaluy 
 i]Ko\o667](rev, tr. * The epos has gone along with fragedi/ only in this one point of 
 being the imitation of exalted characters in metrical language.' This interpreta- 
 tion is, I think, confirmed by another passage in the same treatise, ael /ifv 6 
 piet^wv, fji-exp^ Tov (tvvStjXos elvai, KaWluv ^ari, where fJ-^XP^ ^^ clearly inclusive. 
 Tr. ' the longer a plot be, the better it is, provided it be at the same time clear ' — 
 ^expt Tov avyitiKos e7roi = coincident with clearness. ^Kofilov. P. 
 
 reads :SK6fi0pou (and so Hesych.). Scopius in Pliny, M. N. iv. 10; Scombrns, 
 Arist. Meteor, i. 13. Cramer, i. 273, considers Scomius to be the Ehodope of 
 Herodotus, both being, in fact, summits of the same great central chain. 
 ov i>pl(iTO — ' apud quos populos.' P. ^87). ' Having crossed 
 
 the boundary, yon are at once in the territory of the autonomous Pseonians.' 
 ijSri usually marks the point of time ; here the limit of space. In fact, the two 
 are mixed together. The primary notion is retained in the verb apt(€TO. K. 
 compares v. 67, vii. 4, viii. loi ; and so Eurip. Sippol. i. 200, vpis Tr6vrov ^Stj 
 K€ifj.4in} 2apQ3ViK6y. 
 
 (d.) TpiffaWois. The Triballi, as we have seen above, lay to the N. of 
 the Agrianes. They bordered also on the Paeonians, and reached to the 
 Danube, ' extending, as far as can be determined, from the plain of Kossovo 
 in modern Servia, northwards towards the Danube.' — Grote, xii. 31. At the 
 time of Alexander's accession, they were by far the most numerous and power- 
 
Oeap. 97.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDE3. 269 
 
 ful people of Th.'ace. Alexander began liis reign by invading their territory, 
 and having defeated them, pursued them across the Danube, and made them 
 sue for peace. They had previously defeated and wounded his father, Philip 
 (Grote, xi. 639). It was while fighting against the Triballi that Sitalces was 
 afterwards killed. Cf. Bahr, n. ad Herod, iv. 49; Arist. Aves, 1528, 1626. 
 '0<rKiov. Gatterer (in his treatise quoted above) considers that the propel 
 name of this river is "Hitkios, or "Ecr/fios (retained in the modern Ischar or 
 Isker river, near the Danube), and Mannert follows his view. The edd. of 
 Herod, spell it 2«iis and KTos or Ki6s. In Strab. xiii. p. 590, we find ^Kat6s, 
 Plin. S. N. iii. 29, Oilscus. Hudson reads 'Otr/ciou, and so Poppo, Kriiger, 
 and GoUer. Herod, represents it as rising in Mount Ehodope, amongst the 
 Pseonians, and dividing Haemus in half (iv. 49). Cf . Cramer, i. 273, who spells 
 it Escius. Neo-tos Kal 6 "E^pos, Both these rivers are men- 
 
 tioned as taking their rise in Mount Scomius or Rhodope. In the time of 
 Philip, the Nestus was the boundary of Thrace and Macedonia, and continued 
 to be so under the Koman government. It is spelt both Nestus and Nessus. 
 In the middle ages it was corrupted into Mestus, and is still called Mesto, 
 or Carasoti (Black river) by the Turks (Cram. i. p. 308; cf. Herod, vii. 109, 
 126; PBn. iv. II J Liv. xlv. 29). The Hebrus, now Maritza, is the principal 
 river of Thrace; rising in the junction of Scomius and Ehodope, it receives 
 many tributaries (v. Herod, iv. 89, 92), and falls into the Mge&n near ^nue, 
 forming an estuary called by Herod, (vii. 58) Stentoris (Cramer, i. 316; 
 SmitVs Diet, Q-eog. s. v.). iprj^ov, Cf. Herod, i. 117, ipTJfiov oZpos. 
 
 The epithet implies that species of wildness and desolation which arises from 
 the absence of human habitations. Bl. cf. the Latin secretus, and supposes 
 that Milton used a Latinism when writing by the secret top of Horeb, &c. 
 
 Chapieb XCVII. — (a.) 'A;3S^pwy. Cf. chap. 29. a. itrX 
 
 BiXaatrav KaBijKovaa — ' taking the line of sea-coast' = rfurapi SaAacr. Herod, 
 ii. 6. auTi) irfpitrKovs iarlv fj 7^. irefiiVXous may be used 
 
 adjectively or substantively. The Schol. takes the former view, and so Abresch. 
 K. inclines to the latter, and cf. Herod, ii. 29, rh x^p'^o" toCti! iim iirl Tiitepas 
 Tia(xepas TT\6os. (We find the adj. irp((7r\ooj, vi. 44.) Kara wpi/j.yav. 
 
 Cf. Soph. Fhil 1451. ia-Tvrai— stand, i.e. be permanently fixed in 
 
 that quarter during the voyage, if there be no foul winds. vv^ STpoy- 
 
 •yvKri. Merchantmen continued their route during the night, the men-of-war's 
 men generally landed and slept on shore, cf. ch. ^i. a. n.; Herod, iv. 86. 
 (i^wvos. (bUTaXfis, Kal Kovipos, koX ji-rfiiv eX"" '''^ i/aroSiCov, Sch. Cf. Herod. 
 i. 74. 103, ii. 34, iv. loi [where the day's journey is computed at 200 stades], 
 vi. 49, 97 ; Xen. Anab. iv. ii. 7, iii. 20. iS^—'itinere terrestri,' P. 
 
 Jelf, § 603. i. di/iio-ai = Te\erabove. The idea implied is that 
 
 of accomplishing with despatch. Cf. Dionys. Ferieg. 985, 
 
 T6<r(Tov JtrfuSev liiv iaov e$Sofi,ov ^p-ap SSeiiras 
 ifdifios Kol Kpatxphs aiiijp aviffetfv dSiT-Qs. 
 
 ipoffriiav—'hrought in.' The first aorist is very rare, P. cf. Lobeck, Phryn. 
 287. We find the first aor. midd. in Hom, II. vui. 545, iK w6\tos 5' «{avT« 
 06as Kal i<pia firjKa. . SeiOov. iv. loi. This Seuthes must not b«. 
 
2/0 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 confounded with the Thraoian king at the time of the return of the Ten Thou- 
 Bandj Xen, Andb. vii, 2. I7> "i- 7- rsTpaKoffiav TaKavratv. Diod. 
 
 [xii. jo], with his usual amplification, fixes the revenue of Sitalces at more 
 than 1000 talents. fiA\itrra S6yafiis — *ihe sum total.' Cf. v. io. c. 
 
 h xpwcbs Kal &p'yvpos sir} — * so viel davon {jov <p6pov) Ooldund Silber war/ 
 P. efi; the opt. of indefinite frequency, ' quod de quotannis redeuntibus pecaniia 
 sermo est,' Haack (Madv. App. § 234; Matth. § 528 ; Jolf, § 831. 4. a.). Kriig. 
 and Bemhardy, Synt. p. 406, give the meaning of uncertainty, may perhaps 
 comein. Others read jjct. {xpavrd. re Kal Keta. fi^oj/rii, as P. 
 
 observes, are properly woven fabrics of any sort of texture ; but here, when 
 opposed to Acid, they must mean embroidered or brocaded stuffs — he therefore 
 tr. • Textilia acu picta et levia.' The barbarian chiefs, as Mr. Grote remarks, 
 learnt at length to appreciate the woven fabrics, the polished and carved me- 
 tallic work, the tempered weapons, and the pottery which issued fi-om Grecian 
 artisans. He compares them to the \i<pdup.a9* /epo, and to the x^P^^P^^ rcKT6vu>p 
 5aiSo\a, ofiered as presents to the Delphian God, Eurip. Ion, 1141; Pindar, 
 Pyth,. V. 46 ; Grote, iv. 8, n. ' The Circassians of the present day weave mats 
 of very great beauty, which find a ready market in Turkey and Russia.' — 
 Clarke's Travels, quoted by Grote, ib. p. 9. For the actual custom of offering 
 these presents, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 27; Grote, vi. p. 292. n. For XcTo, cf. 
 L. and S. s. v. Alra, and Hom. II. viii. 441. Grote [ix. 196, n] pompares the 
 splendid * regia textilia,' and abundance of gold and silver vessels captured, 
 together with Perseus, last king of Macedonia, by the Koman general, Paulus 
 .ffimilius (Liv. xlv. 33 — $; Xen. Anab. vi. I. 2). KaracrKevti. 
 
 Cf. ii. 14. ' Gerathe mancherlei Art die zur hauslichen Einrichtnng dienen,' 
 K. -rrapaSwatTTGiiova't. M-ajiy tr. * qui apud re^em valebant,' 
 
 comparing i. 138, yiyverai Trap' ai/r^ /xeyas. But there seems reason in Aru.'s 
 objection that this is to confound Svva(m6iiv and 5uva(T6ai ; ' reguU infra regem 
 positi' G.'6&. Cf. Seuthes, c. loi. ' ISehenherrschen' "Krv.^. ' Seinen Vasallen,' 
 Engel. tr. For the fact, see Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 1 6. K. compares Soph. ap. 
 Stob. 10. 25, tpiKapyvpov t^\v Trav t^ ^ap$dpaiv yevos. 
 
 (i.) KaTcffT^travTo Tovyavriov . . . Tl€p(ruv. This contrast between 
 the Thrncians and the Persians is illustrated by what Xenophon says respect- 
 ing the habits of the younger Cyrus, Anab. i. 9. 22. Cf. Cyrop. viii. 14, xxxi. 
 2 ; Grote vi. 292. haiifiavuv. P. prefers translating by ' sumere.' 
 
 Thirlwall thinks the remark of Thucydides more singular than the custom of 
 the Thracians. Bl. considers that among the Thracians, contrary to the practice 
 in Persia, these gifts were exacted with the utmost avarice and rapacity, and 
 that Thucydides is here speaking sarcastically, and with an intent to reproach 
 the Thracian nobility. The remark is consequently not bo strange. 
 ^Trl irXeov. r^ v6ii.<t fiaWov tCiv &KKUV @p(fKSiy ol 'OSpiaai ixP^"''^"' Schol. 
 ' Though the custom existed among other Thracians also, the Odrysae practised 
 it more extensively.' Hare — with indicative, actual result in a given 
 
 case, see i. 119. a. 
 
 (c.) 'loviou k6\itov. Cf i. 24. The name probably dates from a very 
 early period, when the lonians still inhabited the shores of the Corinthian gulf, 
 and that part of Peloponnese, known subsequently as Achaia. The name is 
 iirst used by /Eschylus {From. V, 840), no trace of the name being found in 
 
Chap. 98.] KOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2/1 
 
 Homer. Herod, and Thucyd. use the term as synonymous with the Adriatic, 
 but in the latter it always applies to the narrow gulf or inlet at the entrance of 
 the Adriatic (vi. 30. 44, vii. 33). It was considered to commence from the 
 Acrocerauuian promontory on the coast of Epiras, and the lapygian promontory 
 on that of Italy (Cramer, i. j). See the whole question as to its extension 
 discussed in Smith's Bid. Oeog. s. v. Seurtpa. P. translates 
 
 ' longe semmdum ab imperio Scytharum,' i. e. secundum quidem ^ Scythico, sed 
 tamen longe eo inferius. So in Virgil, «longo sed proximus intervallo.' "Were 
 it not thus emphatic, we should have simply Sevripa. Tijs tuv 'ZkvBSiv. Bloomf. 
 thinks otherwise, but brings forward no argument of weight. Engel. tr. also 
 has ' hei weitern in zweiter Linie gegen das der Seytken.' eiSai/iOvia 
 
 includes all the external adjuncts of national prosperity : to-TiK iv ndari euSai- 
 ixotiiri, Herod, v. 4, and cf. Xen. de Rep. Lac. i. 22. tbutj; Se aSiivora 
 
 i^iaoiaSat. Herod, v. 3, ei 5e utt' kvhs &pxoiTO fj (ppopioi Karii ravri, Sjuax'i"' 
 T* &i/ etijy Kal TToWcji tcpdrtcTToy irdvruv i6if€a>v Kara. yycifX7]v t^v ifx-^tt. *The 
 natural state of the Thracian tribes— in the judgment of Herodotus permanent 
 and incorrigible — was that of disunion and incapacity of political association j 
 were such association possible, he says, they would be strong enough to van- 
 quish every other nation, though Thucydides considers them as far inferior to 
 the Scythians. The Odrysian dominion had probably not reached, at the period 
 when Herod, made his inquiries, the same development which Thucydides de- 
 scribes in the third year of the Peloponnesian War, and which imparted to these 
 tribes an union partial indeed and temporary, but such as they never reached 
 either before or afterwards.' — Grote, vi. 290. oux 3ti. Jelf, 
 
 762. 3. e*' irphs ev. Cf. Herod, iv. 50, liSup ye ev irphs %v avji- 
 
 BaXKiiv. The expression is here used to exclude comparison with Persia, which 
 contained many separate subordinate nationalities, ov firjv oiide — 
 
 ' nor yet again' as in Xen. passim, Vig. vii. 8, Hoogev. de Fartic. p. 486. ' Not 
 that either I mean to say they are on a pwr with the rest of the world in all other 
 points of good counsel and sagacity' &c. ohx Itfioiovyrai — as a meiosis for 'arc 
 superior to,' is intolerable both in respect of the Greek and the sense. 
 
 Chaptee XCVIII. — (3.) iTOijua — 'when things were ready.' Cf. ch. 3. c, 
 iird 5e as e/c tUv Swaruv tTol/ia' ^r, cf. i. 88. a. Spas. For the 
 
 use of this verb, as applied to land forces, see i. i;. ii. 3. c, 10. a., 56. a., &c. 
 KaKeSoylav. The name applied to the country occupied by the tribes dwelling 
 northward of Thessaly and Mount Olympus, eastward of the chain by which 
 Pindus is continued, and westward of the river Axius. Though it afterwards 
 received greater extensions, the original country known by this name was but 
 small, and its population peculiar. The eponymous ancestor of mythological 
 times was Macednus, son of Lycaon, ancestor of the Arcadians, or Macedon, 
 son of .Solus. Herodotus identifies the Macedonians with the Doric race iu a 
 passage which MiiUer has examined at some length [i. 56; Mvih Dor. i. 3, 
 &c.]. These are merely attempts to form a genealogical connexion between this 
 semi-barbarous people and the rest of the Hellenic race. Prom the resemblance 
 of some of their customs to the Illyrians (cf. Strab. rii. p. 327), and on other 
 grounds, MxiUer, by the process of exhaustion, arrives at the conclusion that 
 they were of Illyrian descent. Mr. Grote and the writer of the article in 
 
272 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Smith's Geog. Diet, maintain the contrary (iv. 14. n.); Mannert agrees 
 with Miiller. It is clear, as Miiller shows, that though their language differed 
 from the Illyrian (v. Poljb. xxviii. 8) and from the Greek, it contained many 
 forms commonly called iEolic, together with Arcadian and Thessalian words, 
 and many which, though not found in Greek, have been preserved in the 
 cognate Latin. The race pre-eminently known as the Macedonian, had their 
 original centre at ^gse or Edesea, the modern Vodhena, and finally absorbed 
 the other sectional races, as the Eleimiotee, Lyncestse, OrestiE, &c. (Grote, iv. 
 16.) 'The Macedonians of the seventh and sixth centuries B.C. were an 
 aggregate only of rude inland tribes, subdivided into distinct petty principali- 
 ties, and separated from the Greeks by a wider ethnical difference even than 
 the Epirots, to whom they were analogous in character and civilization ; they 
 had some few towns, but were chiefly village residents (Thuc. ii. 100, iv. 
 1 24). The original seats of the Macedonians were in the regions east of the 
 chain of Skardus, north of the chain called the Cambunian Mountains, which 
 connects Olympus with Pindus, and which forms the north-west boundary of 
 Thessaly, but they did not reach so far eastward as the Thermaic Gulf, appa- 
 rently not farther eastward than Mount Bermius, or about the longitude of 
 Edessa and Berrhoia. They thus covered the upper portions of the course of 
 the rivers Haliakmon and Erigon, before the junction of the latter with the 
 Axius, while the upper course of the Axius, higher than this point of junction, 
 appears to have belonged to Pseonia, though the boundaries of Macedonia and 
 Paionia cannot be distinctly marked out at any time.' — Grote, iv. 11. Mace- 
 donia, in its proper sense, did not touch upon the sea, and must be distinguished 
 into upper and lower ; the former inhabited by people about the west range of 
 mountains extending from the north as far as Pindus ; the latter aboat the rivers 
 which flow into the Axius, only extending, however, as far as Pella. From this 
 district the Macedonians extended themselves, partially driving hack the original 
 inhabitants, just as we find in later times the armed hordes of the Sclavonians 
 driving the descendants of these people itito the Chalcidic peninsula, or the low 
 grounds near the sea. The subdivisioue of Macedonia will be noticed as they 
 occur in the following chapters. The Cambunian mountains, which form the 
 great south boundary of the country, are the watershed of various rivers, whose 
 wide alluvial basins formed the homes, as they modified the character, of the 
 several tribes who peopled their banks. From them flow northwards the Aous, 
 now Toiussa (see Wordsworth's Greece, p. 9), whence the PaniuEei took their 
 name (Cramer, i. 9), and Haliacmon (now Inje kara). To the south, the 
 Aoheloiis, now Aspropotamo (see chap. 102. b.), Penens (Salempria), and 
 Arachthus {Arta). The west spur of the Cambunians forms the Pindus chain, 
 and the east terminates in Olympus [cf. Wordsworth's Greece, p. 4]. The 
 other rivers of Macedon are the JSstrieus (now Vistritzd), flowing by Edessa 
 and Pella, along the banks of which ran the Via Egnatia, leading from Epidamnus 
 through Thessalonica and Amphipolis, to the Euxine [v. Cramer, i. 80, 280 ; 
 for the pass, through which the Via Egnatia, and the modern road from Durazzo 
 to Betolia led into Macedon, see Grote, iv. 3. n.], the Axius, now the Vardar 
 [a corruption from the Bardares of Tzetzes and Anna Comnena, hence the 
 Vardariot cohorts of the Imperial guard (Smith's Diet. Geog. p. 236; MiilL 
 Dor. i. 451)], with its great tributary the Erigon, now Kutchuk, The country 
 
Chap. 98.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 2/3 
 
 therefore contains three wide alluvial basins, of great extent and fertility, viz., 
 those of the Axius, the Erigon, and the upper Haliacmon, which form a great 
 contrast as to their capacity for cultivation with the plains and valleys on the 
 Albanian or west side of Greece. These are represented respectively by the 
 modern districts of Tettovo, Bitolia, and Orevena. On the rivers of Macedon, 
 see Cousinery, quoted by Bahr (Herod, v. iii. p. 826). Ou.the present state of 
 our knowledge of the geography of these regions, see Grote's long note at the 
 beginning of his twenty-fifth chapter, and the quotations throughout the chapter 
 from the travels of Col. Leake, Boue, Grisebach, and Pouqueville. 
 KepK/j/Tji, now Tchengel 2) agh, is the watershed of the streams which flow 
 into the Cercinitis palus (now Lake Takinos) above Amphipolis, through which 
 flows also the Strymon (Thuc. v. 7 ; Arrian. Mxp. Alex. i. ; Cramer, i. 289 ; 
 "VValpole ap. Cramer, i. 295). 'Xivrav, The Sinti lived on the banks 
 
 of the Strymon, north of the Siropseones. Strabo says they once occupied the 
 island of Lemnos, thus identifying them with the Sinties of Homer {II. i. 
 593) — ivSa |Ue SiVtiej S^'5pes Jii|)a/) KOjiiaavTO mirdvTa. Cf. Odgs. viii. 294 ; 
 Strabo, lEpit. vii. 331, v. 457, xii. 549. Livy places them on the right bank of 
 the Strymon (xlv. 29). Their chief town was Heraclea, fifty miles from 
 Philippi. Cf. Gatterer, quoted by Cramer, i. 305 ; Liv. xlii. 51, xlv. 29; Plin. 
 iv. 10; MiiUer's ilor. i. 470. nai6i'ai>. The Paeonians once 
 
 occupied the greatest part of Macedonia, and even a considerable portion of 
 Thrace, extending along the coast of the iEgean as far as the Euxine. It was 
 probably the general name of the whole of Northern Macedonia, from the 
 source of the Erigonus to the Strymon. ' We are not to suppose that the whole 
 territory between Axius and Strymon was continuously peopled by them : con- 
 tinuous population is not the character of the ancient world. The Pseonians in 
 their north-west tribes bordered upon the Macedonian Pelagonia ; in their north 
 tribes upon the lUyrian Dardani and Autariatae : in their east, south, and 
 south-east tribes, upon the Thracians and Pierians, i. e. upon the second seats 
 occupied by the expelled Pierians under Mount Pangseas.'— Grote, iv. 20. 
 Homer mentions them among the allies of Priam, and places them on the banks 
 of the Axius (II. ii. 849). Herodotus says they were a colony of the Teucri 
 who came from Troy (v. 13, where see Biihr's note). Livy also says that the 
 Dardani of Illyria once exercised dominion over the whole of Macedonian 
 Pffionia. Hence Nlebuhr supposes them to be of Pelasgian race (Rom. Hist. i. 
 S3) They were divided into several tribes, each probably governed by a 
 separate chief (Herod, iv. 12, v. 98, vii. 20). i^lilaloyas. The 
 
 date and circumstances of this expedition are unknown. 
 
 (i) MaiSovs. N.E. of the Sinti. This tribe is not mentioned by Herodotus ; 
 but they are perhaps to be identified with the Thracian tribe near the Ister, 
 whom he calls the Sigynn^, who, as he understood, referred the- 0"g;" *<> ^^' 
 Medes of Asia: the probability being that they were the Ma^d. of Thrace. 
 Strabo calls them Maedo-Bithyni. (Herod, v. 9; Strab. vii. p. 293. 3'6; H^-^- 
 iv. II ; Lir. xxvi. 23, xl. 22, xliv. 26; Cramer, i. 306.) „„,^f T; 
 
 is probably the spot now called Doiran (Cramer, 1.276; MuU. 7)o.^p 460). 
 a l^onian town on the frontier of Macedonia, at the foot of Mt Cercine, . 
 branch of the great central chain of Rhodope, perhaps identical with the 
 Orbelos of Herodotus (v. 16). Cramer identifies the Lake of Doiran with Lake 
 
274 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Praslas, of which Herodotus gives such a curious account in the passage quoted 
 above. See Gatterer's note, quoted in Cramer, u. s. Cf. Herod, vii. 113. 
 aneyiyvfTO — ^ his army suffered no diminutUm' did not fall away. ' Ver* 
 ringerung' K. Cf. xxxiv. a, li. u. Here the expression, though somewhat 
 strange, is introduced for the sake of the verbal antithesis — ' Tceinen Abgang, 
 v/ohl aber viel Zugang,' Eng. tr, i<j)' apirayiiv. The dat. is more 
 
 usually found (after eVl) in this meaning, v. Matth. § 585, 6. Perhaps after 
 verbs of motion, when the substantive denotes the action which is the end of 
 our going, the accusative would be more correct, as Uvai ^ttI uSwp, Herod, iii. 
 14. Uvai M Oiipav, i. 37. So-re k.t.A. On the fact, cf. Ar. Ach, 
 
 148, '6(T0V rb xp^iia. Trapv6Troiv Trpoffepxerai, tt.T.A. veyTeKalSena 
 
 ^vptd5wv. Cf. Diod. xii. 50. 
 
 (c.) yiioxo'po<^<ip')', as the Dii. Cf. chap. 96, b. <po$fptiTaTos. 
 
 Cf. ad chap. 3, c. 
 
 Chaptee XCIX. — (a.) ^wriBpoi^ovTo iv rp Ao^-lipip. As K. observes, 
 the prep, es after a verb of collecting or assembling, bears reference to the place 
 of assembly ; iv to the fact of the completion of the union (i. 6, c. 23, d. 5 1, b.). 
 OTrmj i(7fia\oviTtv. On the future indie, after Sircos following verbs of 
 caring, providing, considering, &c., see Matth. § 623. 2. It is in fact ^ 3t^ 
 Tp6trqi. So Thuc. vi. 11, (rKoTrely ircp rpiirtp ri (T^€Tepoif anpeires eS 6-{](rovrai. 
 Cf. Soph. -BZ. 1296; Phil. 54; Ajax, 557, with Wander's note; Xen. Anab. 
 i. I. 4, vii. 3, &c. The idiom arises metaphysically from the tendency to vivid 
 narration and objective representation which characterizes the language, another 
 development of which is found in the usage of ws, Iva, &c. cum indicativo. 
 The grammarians have not as yet sufficiently noticed the bearing of this ob- 
 jective tendency upon the idioms of the language. Kari Kopv<p-ni' — • 
 ' keeping along the height.' With the genitive it would be down the height. 
 Cf. Kark TQiv Kprtfivwi', vii. 44. 6 TltpSiKtcas. Perdiccas I. 
 was the son and successor of Alexander I., called the Philhellene. For his 
 previous history in connexion with this war see i. 57, 59, 61, 63; ii. 29, 80; 
 Diod. xii. 34. In B.C. 424, we shall find him instigating Brasidas to invade 
 Macedon and Thrace (cf. iv. 79), but subsequently making peace with Athens 
 (iv. fin.), then socretly joining the league against her, but again forming an 
 alliance with Athens : siding, in fact, with either of the belligerent parties as 
 suited his interest for the time being (v. 80, 3 ; vi. 7 ; vii. 9). Clinton fixes his 
 death in the avchonship of Pisander, B.C. 413 ; 01. xciii. 3. The date of his 
 accession is doubtful, as very different periods are allotted to his reign by 
 ancient writers (Clinton, F. S. ii. 223. Cf. Tab. in an. 414. 2). 
 \\iyK'r)<Tial. One of the four subdivisions of Upper Macedonia, Lyncestis 
 comprehended the modern district of Filurina, and all the south part of the 
 basin of the Erigon. Tlie district went by the names of Lyncestis and Lyncus. 
 In Livy, however, the latter appellative stands for a city on the Bevus. It lay 
 to the south of the Pelagones, and between them and the Eordaei. It was once 
 an independent kingdom, and probably became an appanage of Macedon by 
 m.irriage. [Cf. Tliuc. iv. 83, 124; Strabo, vii. p. 326; Liv. xxxi. 33, ixvi. 25, 
 ixxii. 9.] As the Temenida) claimed their descent from Argos, and the kings 
 of the Epirotic Molossi pretended to a descent from the heroic .ffiacid race of 
 
Chap. 99-] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 275' 
 
 Greece, so the princes of Lynous claimed the Bacchiadje of Corinth for their 
 ancestors. One of these, AvrhibsBus, was on the throne when Brasidas invaded 
 Lyncus (Cramer, i. 193; Grote, iv. ij, 22). 'EXijuiwrai. Elimeia, 
 
 another of these subdivisions, comprehended the modern districts of Qrevena, 
 Verija, and Tjersemha. It lay to the east of Stymphalia, and was originally 
 an independent state like Lyncus, hut was afterwards conquered by the 
 Macedonian kings, to whom it became a very important acquisition, from the 
 fact that the passes to Epirus and Thessaly led through this province. From 
 the latter it was separated by the Cambunian mountains. We read in Xeno- 
 phon of a Derdas, prince of Elimeia, probably a son of the Derdas mentioned 
 here. Cf . Thuc. i. 56 ; Xen. Sell. v. i, 28 ; Liv. xlii. 23 ; Cramer, i. 200 ; 
 Miill. Dona»w, i. 458. &\Ka iSvr\ — «. j. the Orestse. P. 
 
 ica0* avT6. — 'separate and independent Tcingdoms' 
 
 (i.) 'A\6jci>'5poj, son of Amyutas I., and tenth king of Maeedon (v. 
 Clinton, ii. 221), succeeded his father probably soon after the subjugation of 
 Thrace by Megabazus (e.g. 507), and was still living B.C. 463, when Ciraon 
 recovered Thasos. He probably lived on till B.C. 454. He is known in history 
 for his murder of the Persian envoys, his good services to the Greeks, though 
 nominally in the train of Xerxes, and his proving his Greek descent when he 
 presented himself as a competitor at the Olympic games. [Herod, v. 17 — 22, 
 vii. 137, viii. 136 — 40, ix. 44 ; cf . Justin, vii. 2.] He no doubt added very con- 
 siderably to the dominions of his predecessors, advancing his frontiers along the 
 sea coast, and to the interior. But ' to suppose that Alexander, son of Amyntas, 
 made all these conquests, is an error which is even refuted by the words of 
 Thacyd.; although it is very possible that this prince, who began his reign 
 about B.C. 488, at the time of the Persian power, and was the brother-in-law 
 of a Persian general, added considerably to the territory which he had inherited. 
 Consequently the story that Xerxes gave Alexander all the country between 
 Mounts Olympus and Hsemus (Justin, vii. 4) is not entirely fabulous. Daring 
 the interval between the Persian and Peloponnesian wars, the territory of 
 Maeedon was not much enlarged.'— Miill. Dor. i. 464. 
 
 (c.) TniievlSai. On the Argive origin of the royal gens of Macedonia, see 
 Bahr ad Herod, v. 22, who quotes the following authorities : Isocr. FMlip. 
 pp. 88. 103, 4; Pans. vii. 8. 5; Thuc. ii. 99, v. 80; Socrat. Epist. xxviU.; 
 Max. Tyr. xx. 8; Liv. xxvii. 30, to which we may add Miill. Dorians, i. 172, 
 463 (cf. Herod, vii. 173, viii. 137. 8, ix. 44)- ' The origin of the Macedonian 
 family, or Argeadse, from Argos, appears to have been universally recognized 
 by Grecian inquirers.'— Grote, iv. 21. i^aai\^v<rap~' established 
 
 their sovereignty over,' K. Ui.pUv. Pieria lying to the east and 
 
 south-east of Eordsea and Elimeia, was one of the most interestmg parts ot 
 Macedonia, both as being the traditionary birth-place of Orpheus, and first seat 
 of the Muses, and on account of the important historical events of which it 
 subsequently became the theatre. It forms the slope of the range of mountains 
 of which Olympus is the highest peak, and i» separated from Magnesia by the 
 Peneus It coincides with the modern district of Katerina. [Cf. Herod, vii. 
 ,,t The name was known to Homer, II. xiv. 226, where Hera passes from 
 Olvmpus through Pieria and iEmathia to Thrace.] It was watered by the 
 Hnlmcmon, and contained the famous towns of Pydna and Methone, and the 
 
2/6 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 poetical localities of Libethrus and Pimplea. (Cramer, i. 204 — 220.) ' Between 
 the Thermaic gulf and the eastern counterforts of Olympus and Berraius, there 
 exists a narrow slip of plain land, or low hill, which reaches from the mouth of 
 the Peneius to the head of the Thermaic gulf; it there widens into the spacious 
 and fertile plain of Salonichi, comprising the mouths of the Haliacmon, the 
 Axius, and the Echeidonis : the river IJndias, which flows from Edessa into the 
 marshes surrounding Pella, and which in antiquity joined the Haliacmon near 
 its mouth, has now altered its course so as to join the Axius. This narrow 
 strip between the mouths of the Peneius and the Haliacmon was the original 
 ubode of the Pierian Thracians, who dwelt close to the foot of Olympus, and 
 among whom the worship of the Muses seems to have been a primitive charac- 
 teristic : Grecian poetry teems with local allusions and epithets which appear 
 traceable to this early fact.' — Grote, iv. 17. Udyyatov. Pangaeum 
 
 (now called Pundhar Dagh, or Castagnetz,) is a spur of Rhodope and Haemus, 
 branching off in a south-east direction, lying between the Strymon and the 
 Nestus, and forming a boundary line between Macedon and Thrace, and hence 
 assigned indiscriminately to either. It was famous for its gold and silver 
 mines, which were worked by the Pieres, Odomanti and Satrse; v. Herod, vii. 
 112, hence called xp"<'''i/3i<jAo>' XcVos by Euripides (Rhes. 919). Of these metals 
 no traces are said to be found in modern times. See Bahr ad Herod, v. 16, 
 and the authorities quoted. They are said to have first attracted the attention 
 of the Thasians (Diod. Sic. xvi.). Pangaeum is often mentioned by the poets 
 (Pind. Fyth. iv. 319; iEsch. Pers. 500; Earip. Rhes. n. s. and 972; Virg. 
 Qeorg.'iv. 462 ; Lucan, Ph. i. 680). Philippi stood at its foot (Cramer, i. 301, 
 2). ^dypTira. See Cramer, i. p. 297, who quotes Strab. lEpit. vii. 
 
 p. 331 ; Scylax, Perip. 99 ; Steph. Byz. s. v. Herodotus also, vii. 112, speaks 
 of it as one of the two fortresses of the Pieres. KiKiros — 
 
 ' Thalgrund,' K., applied to any sinuous tract of land; v. L. and S.; Xenophon, 
 Hist. vi. 5, 17, iKaSi (rTpoToire5ei/<ri£/t€j/oj eij -rhv iTrurBev K6KTrovrris Mavrivmris, 
 fjLd\a (Tvyeyyvs, Kol kiikKu 6pTj tx°^'^°- I^l* ^&s, I perceive, this reference, and 
 also one to Plin. Sist. N. iii. 16, ' Padus gremio montis Vesuli profluens.' 
 
 {d.) 'Afiov, now Vardar. See sup. c. 98, n. on Macedonia; Hom. II. ii. 
 849 ; Liv. xxxix. 54. trrev-l) v — ' a narrow strip of land, Scotticfe, 
 
 a strath,' Bl.; frequently found in composition, as Stratheden, Strathmore, 
 Strathfieldsay. 'HBaJcizs. The Edonians lay beyond the river 
 
 Axius, at the lower part of its course. They were a large and powerful tribe : 
 hence their name is constantly used by the poets as synonymous with Thrace 
 generally. 'Eop5(as. Eordsea was one of the four subdivisions 
 
 of Upper Macedonia before alluded to, and comprehended the modern districts 
 of Budja, Sarighiul, and Osfrovo. It was contiguous to Elimeia ; north of the 
 Bermius, east of Lyucus, west of Edessa, in fact, the basin of the Ludias, now 
 Cara Asmac ; v. Miiller's Dorians, i. 459 ; Cramer, 1. 201 ; Smith, Geog. Diet. 
 p. 236. Cf. Herod, vii. iSj (Bahr's note); Thuc. iv. 128; Polyb. xviii. 6; 
 iAv. xxxi. 39. Ptolemy was a native of Eordsea, according to Arrian, H. A. vi. 
 28. fipaxv = f.iKp6i>. Cf. i. 14, not. #ii(rKay. Miill. 
 
 Dor. i. 458. Between Strymon and Axius. See Grote, iv. 23. 
 'AKfiairlas. Almopia or Almonia was an ancient settlement of the Minyans 
 (Mull. Dor. i. 458, 469 ; Plin. S. N. iv. 1 7) on the confines of Macedonia and 
 
Chap. IOO.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 277 
 
 Thessaly, apparently not far from Pieria: whether they were of Macedonian 
 race is difficult to say (Grote, iv. 14, 23). Cramer places Almopia near the 
 sources of the Erigonus, on the borders of lUyria, i. e. rather to the north-west 
 of the locality assigned them by MuUer (Cram. i. 272). Tpniravias 
 
 is said to be the Attic, Kpn<TTui/Las the Ionic orthography, P. Herod, places it 
 near the sources of the Echeidorus. Kruse says it is called now Christonia 
 (Hellas, i. 435, ap. Pop.). Cf. Herod, i. 57 (Bahr's note), v. 3, vii. 124, 7, 
 '''"•"^- ^laaKTlav. Bisaltia includes the maritime district 
 
 west of the Strymon, and the land to the interior (Mull. Dor. i. 454). Thuoyd. 
 however makes Mygdonia reach as far as the Strymon. Herod, makes the 
 Persians enter Bisaltia immediately after crossing the Strymon, viii. 115. Cf. 
 viii. 116. Grote, iv. 18, 28. 
 
 Chaptee C. — {a.) iTTiivTos — the genitive absolute implying cause. Cf. 
 ch. 8; Jelf, § 710,6. 'Apx^^aos. Archelaus succeeded his 
 
 father, B.C. 413; he reigned fourteen years, and was assassinated, B.C. 399, 
 in the archonship of Laches (Diod. xiv. 35, 7). Plato calls him spurious, and 
 an usurper, and says he was a son of a slave of Alcetas, named Simiche (Oorg. 
 p. 471 A; Clinton, ii. 223 ; Miill. Dor. i. 483). erefie. The 
 
 proper word for road-making; v. Wesseling ad Herod, iv. 136. -rk 
 
 i.X\a 5i€K(icr^r|ire. Bl. says there is an ellipse of tV X'"P'"'> referring to 
 ch. 15, TO T€ SWa Si6K(J(r/A7;(re tt;^' x^P^^i '^°-^f k.t.A.. iKTii>. Cf. 
 
 Clinton's dissertation on the kings of Macedonia, vol. ii. p. 220. Herod, viii. 
 139, gives the line of Macedonian kings. The three first usually given are 
 considered by Clinton to be merely mythical. The predecessors of Archelaus 
 will therefore be Perdiccas I., Argseus, Philippus I., Aeropus, Alcetas, 
 Amyntas I., Alexander I., Perdiccas II. (Miill. Dor. i. 463 ; Grote, iv. 23). 
 
 (6.) EiSo/ievTiv. Miiller, from the Itineraries, places Idomene fifty-three 
 miles from Therma. [_Dor. i. 474.] It was on the borders of Pseonia, on the 
 road leading from Stobi to Thessalouica. In some modern maps we see a spot 
 marked Idomini in this locality (Cramer, i. 230). ropTwlai/ 
 
 is placed by Ptolemy in iEmathia, south of Idomene; he writes the name 
 Gordenia (Cramer, i. 230; Miill. u. s.). 'ATa\iiiTTiy. From a 
 
 passage in Steph. Byz. Dr. Arnold proposes to read Allante, cf. Plin. iv. 10, 35, 
 but Miiller, Sprnner, and Cramer all read Atalanta. Evpanrhv 
 
 is placed by Pliny on the Axius. IS. N. iv. 10.] Nothinj; further is known 
 of its history, than that it appears in a list of towns in the seventh century 
 (Cramer, i. 231). 
 
 (0.) neA\7)s. Pella, one of the most ancient and celebrated cities of Mace- 
 donia, stood at the distance of 120 stadia from the mouth of the Ludias, to 
 which point the river was navigable. It was on the borders of Bottiaja and 
 -Dmathia; Herodotus assigning it to the former (vii. 123), Ptolemy to the 
 latter (p. 82). Philip considerably enlarged and embellished it, as being his 
 native city (cf. Dem. de Cor. 83), and here Alexauder also was born (hence 
 'Pellaius juvenis,' Juv. x. 169; Lucan, iii. 233). Its situation is exactly 
 described by Livy, xliv. 46, xlv. 29 [probably from Polybius, xxix. 3]. It was 
 afterwards colonized by Julius Csesar. Its ruins are still visible near the 
 modern Falatisa. Euripides probably resided here imder the patronage of 
 
278 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 Archelaus, and the scenery in its neighbourhood is supposed to have suggested 
 some passages in his Baccliee (Cramer, i. 2*3). ' Though in later times the 
 residence of the kings was transferred to marshy Pella in the maritime plain 
 beneath, yet Edessa was always retained as the regal burying-place, and as the 
 hearth to which the religious continuity of the nation (so much reverenced in 
 ancient times) was attached/ — Grote, iv. t6. Kvppov. A place 
 
 of no great importance, except from its being sometimes confounded with the 
 Cyrrhus in Syria. The town of Paleeo&astro, about sixteen miles north-west of 
 Pella, very probably represents the site of Cyrrhus (Leake, N. <?., quoted in 
 Smith, Diet. Geog. s. v. and Cramer, vol. i. 229 ; Mull. Dor. i. 458, n.). 
 iwri SoKoZ. Cf. chap. Ixxix. f. K. says the words must be taken with 
 iat^aWov — 'wherever it seemed fit.' iiT40aWov — a rare word for 
 
 a charge of cavalry, K. inh v\'tiBous. The sentence is very much 
 
 involved. P. seems inclined to refer it to the Thracians, as though it were, 
 'encumbered by their own numbers.' K. would strike out avrobs and read 
 Ka64(FTa(rap. I believe it is an elliptical way of speaking — ' brought themselves 
 into great peril when they did fight, and therefore soon left it off.* On 
 
 repi KKriiixey 01 c{.C!BS,£. Ciii. 30, ' ne duobus circumcluderetur eiercitibus.' 
 
 Chapter CI. — (a.) \6yovs ^troie'iTO = \6yovs rpotre^epe, i. 57 — ' agebat* 
 P.; 'began to negotiate;' ' unterhandelte,' K. ov Traprjaav tbij 
 
 vavaiv. Cf. xcv. L-. and Grote quoted there. airiaTovvm fiii, 
 
 K.T.X. Here we have an illustration of the redundant negative, which may be 
 expressed in somewhat vulgar English — ' heing doubtful that he would riot come.' 
 Tcix'fipf's—^ rare word in Attic Greek. K. cf. Thuc. iv. 15 ; Herod, i. 162 ; 
 Xen. Sell, v. 3, 2. Tr. * having made them take refuge in their fortifications.' 
 Cf. our expression of 'putting persons in a state of siege.' XIoKoroi, 
 
 *.T.\, These obscure tribes of Pseonian and Thracian origin must be placed 
 near the Strymon ; but their exact locality cannot be determined. The Odo- 
 manti were contiguous to, and apparently intermixed with, the Edones, Ptolemy 
 identifying Edonis with Odomantice. ' They were probably settled upon the 
 whole of the great mountain Orbelus, extending along the north-east of the 
 lower Strymonic plain, from about Meleniko and Demarissar to Zikhna in- 
 clusive, where they bordered on Pangseus, the gold and silver mines of which 
 they worked with the Pieres and Satrse.' — Smith, Diet. G. s. v. Herodotus 
 Bays they were Pteonians, and were not conquered by the Persians, v. 6. Thuc. 
 (v. 6) speaks of Polles, their independent prince. Drabescus (Thuc. iv. 102) 
 was probably one of their towns. The Pancei are also called Edonians by 
 Steph. Byz., who places them near Amphipolis. The Derssei are also men- 
 tioned by Herodotus [Herod, vii. no, cf. v. 11, with Bahr's notes on both 
 passiiges]. The Droi some think to be the same as the Derssei (Cramer, i. 303, 
 eq.). [Mr. Grote places them in the plains north-east of the Strymon, near 
 Mount PangsBus, and not far from Amphipolis, vi. 295.] 
 
 (5.) irapetrxe K6yov — ' prcebuit occasionem rumoris,' Huds. ; 'gave rise to 
 talk — afforded matter of discussion,' Dale. Bl. quotes an example, Xen. Cgrop. 
 vi. I, 21. We might tr. 'gave occasion to a rumour which even reached to 
 {M) those who were enemies of the Athenians' |U^ — 'as to whether 
 
 it might not be possible that,' &c. Cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 13. 
 
Chap. 102.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDfiS. 279 
 
 Kari, rh ^v/ifiaxiKdv — in accordance with the terms of the alliance existing 
 between them. Cf. xxii. c. ^irexwy K. translates by '»ier- 
 
 schummend,' P. by 'occtipatam fenere.' The Scholiast explains it by ^tti- 
 Kii/ievos. But this sense of the word, though common in Homer and Herod., 
 is never, P. says, found in Thucydides. We have it as ' halting there, Xen. 
 C^rop. iv. 2, 6; V. 4, 38. Of. Acts xix. 22. hut^. So Xen. 
 
 JLnab, i. 7, 20, rh dh iro\\/ avr^ avaTeTapayfievvv ^TropeiSeTo. It is the dative 
 of the object more remotely affected by the action of the verb. The want of 
 provision affected him through the army. It is equivalent to the construction 
 where the want would be expressed as the subject of some verb having riii> 
 iTTpaTeiav for its direct, and oirij! for its remote object. Therefore I believe 
 Arn.'s translation to he a good one, though Bl. disputes it — ' lohen he found 
 that the armi/ had no provisions.' SiropSaKou. Cf. Herod, iv. 
 
 80. Poppo prefers this reading to 2irapS6Kov or 2vapaS6Kov. 
 TrpoffiroieTTai — ' wins over to his views.' Cf. chap. 85, d. TpidKovra 
 
 ras iracras Tjixepas. See Jelf, § 454. Cf. Thuc. iii. 66, p^e? at iratrai deKa; 
 Herod, vii. 4, jSatrtXetStroj'Ta to. TravTa erea e| re Kal rpi'fjKovTa. So omnino in 
 Latin, e. ff. Cses. S. G. iv. 38, ' Eaa duo omnino civitates obsides miserunt.' 
 ' Macedonia then (i. e. at this time) contained the elements of 2 great power 
 afterwards developed by Archelaus and Philip, though one scattered and 
 feeble.'— Thirlwall. 
 
 Chaptee eil. — (a.) 01 S% iv JJavwixTtf. The narrative is resumed from 
 ch. xcii. 'Aa-rdKov. Cf. ad oh. 30, a., where we learn that the 
 
 Athenians expelled their tyrant Euarchus. aiTO$ai'Tes 4s. P. 
 
 couples the es with ia-Tpdrsva-av, and this punctuation is adopted by Goll., Am., 
 Blomf . TiTpaKoaiots. These, P. thinks, were the classiarii from 
 
 the forty triremes, ten iirifiaTaX to each being the usual complement. 
 •%Tpirov. See n. to Ixxx. e. Viop6vTay. A small town lying, 
 
 it is supposed, between Metropolis and old iEnia. Its probable remains were 
 seen by Colonel Leake on a hill about a mile from Prddhromo. 
 ov SoKoSi'Ta.s Pefiaiovs—'duhicejidei.' Cf. v. 43, e. Duk. 
 Kivvra. He had probably been expelled by the opposite party (Cramer, ii. 
 ^3 ; Grote, vi. 285). 
 
 (i.) Oil' ids as. The siege of this place was the great object of the expedi- 
 tion; as this great and powerful town had from time immemorial (ae£ irore) 
 sided against the rest of Acarnania and Athens. Cf. ch. 82, i. 1 1 1, c. 
 'AveA^os- The largest and most celebrated of Grecian rivers, equally famous 
 in mythical and historical times. It takes its rise in Mount Pindus, near a vil- 
 ]a°-e now called Khaliki, probably a corruption of Chalcis [v. Dion. Ferieg. 496]. 
 After flowing through the mountainous district of the Dolopians and Agraans, 
 it entered the plain of Acarnania and .ffitolia near Stratus, and discharged 
 itself into the Ionian sea near (Eniad*. Its waters are of a whitish yellow or 
 cream colour, hence its epithet in Hesiod (Theog. 340), 'Ax^^-fiy r' hpyvpoSivnv 
 (copied by Dionys. Perieg. 4.33), and its modern name of Aspropotamo, or 
 •White Kiver.' Homer only mentions it once, but calls it the king of rivers. 
 [II xxi. 194.] Dr. Wordsworth says, 'That the Acheloiis should have been 
 generally considered in Greece as the symbol and synonym of water is probably 
 
280 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book II. 
 
 to be ascribed to its superiority in magnitude to the other streams of the 
 Greek continent ' [ Greece, p. 1 2]. Cf . Virg. Georg. i. 9, ' Poculaque inventis 
 Achelolia miscuit uvis.' (So our own poet Lovelace says, ' When flowing cups 
 pass quickly round. With no assuaging Thames.') For the classical passages in 
 illustration of this symbolic use, see Macrob, Saturn, v. 18, and Elmsley ad 
 Eurip. Bacch. 519. In mythology, Achelous, as a river god, received especial 
 honours j be is also celebrated for his rivalry with Hercules for the possession 
 of Deianira; the horn wrenched off from the ' Tauriformis ' god by Hercules, 
 being metamorphosed into the Cornucopia. Cf , ApoUod. ii. 7 ; Soph. Track. 
 9, 507; Diod. Sic. iv. 35; Pans. iii. 18, 9; Or. Met. ix. i, 90, &c. ; Sen. Sera. 
 CEt. 300. ^vadiy fiev. 'The only way of removing the diflaculty is to 
 
 supply fieuv from the preceding, and to take Aftedtv with Am. as standing for 
 Sj-co, svperne, high up the river, as we find it, iv. 108. We may tr. with GoU. ; 
 *' superne quidem Stratum urhem, ubi vera in mare influit, (Eniadas prtster' 
 Jiuens." ' — Bl. irepiXiiivd^wv — 'surrounding with water, so as to 
 
 insulate the city.' Strabo mentions three marshy lakes in this neighbourhood. 
 The question as to whether these are alluded to by Thucyd. here is discussed 
 by Colonel Leake, N. Greece, iii. 593. Cf. Arrian, Anal. vi. 14, 5. Bl. cf. the 
 description of Venice, Livy, x. 2. 
 
 (c.) 'E^ii'iiSoji'. These islands are said to have derived their name from 
 the echinus, or sea-urchin, in consequence of their sharp and prickly outlines. 
 Homer (II. ii. 625) calls them 'Exivai, and speaks of them as inhabited, and 
 sending a contingent of forty ships to the Greek force against Troy, under a 
 distinguished warrior named Meges. Later writers mention them as rugged 
 and desolate. The chief of them was Dulichium (Hom. Od. i. 245, ix. 24, xiv. 
 397, &c. ; Strabo, x. 456), which some writers identify with Dolicha; the latter 
 appears, however, to be too small to answer the description of Homer, while 
 its position does not tally with that of the island mapped out in the passages 
 foregoing. Dodwell supposes it to have been submerged by a violent convulsion 
 of nature, and says some Greek sailors told him of an island seven miles long, 
 which was submerged by the ocean. Herodotus [ii. 10] alludes to the fact of 
 the Echinades being gradually united to the mainland (Fans. viii. 24, 11; Ov. 
 Met. viii. 588). But both of these writers were ignorant of the fact, known to 
 modern writers on physical geography, that, after a certain point, this junction 
 of the islands off the mouth of a river to the mainland ceases, the superfluous 
 alluvial deposit being swept away (as at the mouths of the Nile and Danube) 
 by the irresistible force of the deep sea. Pliny (iv. 12, 19) enumerates nine of 
 the Echinades, other writers, as Ovid, mention only four. Strabo calls them 
 ' very numerous.' oiiSiv oTre'xopirai. C(. ovSiva ■xp6vov, sm^tsl, 
 
 Ixxxiv. a. npoffxoT ae( — 'is constantly making alluvial deposit.' 
 
 fia-l tS>v vi]auv cd TiweipuvTai — 'and some of the islands have been united 
 with the mainland ' (lit. continentalized, made into continent). Cf Herod, ii. 10, 
 Kol ovK '/iKia-ra 'AxfA.^)ou, %s fieam 5i' 'Aitapi'ai'Jrjs Kal ^Jiels h eiXaaaav twx 
 'Zx^yi^o'v vhaav ras riiiitreas ^Stj ijireipoi/ veTrolriKs. The verb has been employed 
 by the imitiitors of Thucydides, vide Bl. Whirls is Ka\ irairas, 
 
 K.T.A.. — 'there is every reason for believing that this may be the case with all, 
 after no rery great lapse of time.' On this use of iK-irls cf i. i, a. 
 Trj! Trpoa-x<i><reas k.t.\. See Jelf, § 8qS, 3. Tip fij) a-KeSiir. 
 
Chap. 103.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 28 1 
 
 yvcrBai ^ivSiirnoi yiyvovrai — ' mutually serve to connect the alluvium, in 
 consequence of its not being dispersed,' K. and D. P. prefers the reading t i ini], 
 but Madvig observes, where the infinitive thus used expresses the consequence 
 and not the cause, it should properly follow the verb. Cf. Ixxv. c. ; ^ii'Sea-fios 
 5* ^j* a&ToTs T^ ^v\a, ' the woodwork served as a frame to hold the bricks 
 together,' I believe myself that the collocation shows tijs Trpoffxiiceus to he 
 the latter of two nouns, whereof r^-iiii-inceSdvvva'Oai, is {i. e. stands for) the 
 former ; and that the dative is simply an instrumental one. Tr. ' are, from the 
 non-dispersion of the alluvial deposit, hound together as in a chain.' 
 TrapaWd^ — ' ohliquelg,' in a sort of quincunx order — • .", *.• ' schrdge gegen 
 einander,' K. (cf. Lobeck ad Soph. AJ. 1087) — whereas Karci atolx"'" '^ '■! 
 parallel lines — I : ; t : 8t€ S}; aXaadai ahrhv — 'when, as the 
 
 legend goes' &c. For this use of St; see supra. Cf. Arist. Lysist. 523. The 
 verb refers to actual wandering, not, I think, as some have suggested, to mental 
 hallucination, though the latter meaning may be supported (Soph. Aj. 23). 
 S(in6,Ta>v. For the best comment on this phrase see the opening of ^sch. 
 Eumenides. Cf. Thuc. vii. 80. iiretirSvTa — ' obscure significantem.' 
 
 %ri.s, not ^, is used, because no particular spot is specified, 'a country such 
 that.' For this peculiar force of So-tis, in introducing the especial attribute 
 of the object, its real property, or differentia, see Jelf, § 816. b. For npXp Uv 
 Bee Jelf, § 848. So Madvig ; irply Uv is only used in this way after a negative 
 expressed or implied. /i^irai — not o8jrw, the command itself, which 
 
 would be of course expressed by ftV"; being here tacitly quoted. Cf. Soph. 
 Fhil. 1409, 
 
 ju^-jTW ye irplv %v Tav rifierepuv 
 
 ahjs ^vQiov, TraT Hoiavros. 
 
 /ie/iio(r^e'</T)S — 'rendered unclean.for Mm to be in.' Simra — 
 
 ' a place sufficient to support life.' For this sense of StoiTo, nearly equivalent 
 to our 'home,' see Arist. Eth. Nic. i. 6; Thuc. ii. 16. A. cf. Philost. See 
 Herod. 562, SJaira T<f ad/j-aTi inrnSda. Compare the use of rpoip^ in Soph. 
 (Ed. Col. 362; Phil. 32, &c. iSwda-reva-e— 'founded a dominion.' 
 
 ivwvviJ.ia. KouprJTij was its ancient name according to the Scholiast. Cf. 
 Strabo, x. ^ 8 and 3. Key6,>.eva, i. e. Thucyd. does not vouch for 
 
 the story. See what is said supra, xxiii. and cf. Herod, vii. 152, iyii Sh ofeiKu 
 Kiyiiv Th heyS/iem, Treideaeai ye /ih" ov Travrd-niunv o<pei\a. 
 
 Chapteb cm.— av^p Ilvt aySp6s. The first instance of such an ex- 
 change, says Bl. ; the first recorded instance, K. P. cf. v. 3, where a similar 
 exchange is mentioned. He observes also that iKivUpovs implies that the 
 slaves were sold. 
 
282 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 BOOK III. 
 
 Chapteb I. — (a.) cLjia T^ anif i,Kna^ovTi — sc. in June B.C. 428, 
 Olymp. 88, 1 . The period comprises the ripening of the corn, i. e. at Athens — 
 the end of May and the beginning of July. GoU. fixes the period a month later, 
 but he is undoubtedly wrong. See Vomel's Dissertation, Frankfort, 1 846. 
 
 (6.) 8jrp TraptlKoi— 'wherever opportunity offered.' Arn. rather, 'might 
 chajice to offer/ for such is the indefinite force of the opt. Arn. quotes ei juot 
 irapelxotj Soph. Phil. 1048. Cf. iv. 36, and oTtrnep ttv 5 dehs irapeiKr], Plat. 
 Theaetet. 1 50 D, cited by Kriig. 
 
 (c.) rh fj.il KaKovpyeiv zn Si(TTe fi)j KaKovpye7v, or tov /i^ KaKovpyeiv, or 
 as an accus. after eipyetv, which is constructed with two accusatives, Arist, 
 Vesp. 333, Kriig. The explanation of the Schol., ' ellipsis toS 5ia,' is futile. 
 Cf. Matth. § 534. 
 
 (d.) Tuv 'iir\a>v. First the 'arras' of the soldiers; then the spot where 
 they were piled ; hence 'jy an easy transition, as here, the encampment. Cf. 
 ii. 2, i. II I, and iii. 64. 
 
 Chapter II. — (a.) Aristotle {Polities, v. 2, 3), in illustration of the posi- 
 tion that national evils frequently arise from the quarrels of individual citizens, 
 quotes the case of this revolt, which was he says produced by the indignation 
 of one Doxander against the Athenian government for refusing to sanction the 
 marriage of his sons with two orphan heiresses. The fact, as Grote says, may 
 be quite true, but with Thucydides before us we can hardly call it the cause of 
 the war. $ov\i)S4yTes — sc. oi Ae<r$wi, understood from A4ir$os. 
 
 Cf. infra, ch. v. a, on the revolt of Lesbos. See Niebuhr, Vortrage iib. alt. 
 Oesch. ii. 68. 
 
 (i.) Kol Tairfiv rijv a.ir6iXTa(riv. The Kol has occasioned trouble, as the 
 Scholiast says, oiix wfca! &\Xi\y ircwoiriiJievuv tnrScrTaatv. The language is some- 
 what inverted, but the meaning plainly is : ' The first attempt failed, and even 
 this one was made against their will.' On the facts see Grote vi. 303 — 4. 
 xSo-ii/ — so. by building a x""/*" across the mouth. See the notes on the har- 
 bour of Pylos. W. 
 
 (c.) & ftfTairefnr6/ievoi ^trav — 'had sent for/ D. But this is an in- 
 correct rendering of the present, or rather imperfect, participle — ' were engaged 
 in sending for/ cL i. ^S. Karh trriiffiv — ' domestic sedition / ' SHr^ 
 
 gerzwistes halber/ Kriig., connected with ixtjvvtoI yiyvovrai. firjvvTai — 
 
 'informers/ emphatic; not simply inform. 
 
 (d.) ^vvoiKlCoufft — 'are attempting to centralize/ They attempted what 
 Theseus effected in Attica (cf. ii. 15) and the Thebans tried to effect in BoBotia; 
 i. e. to make the independent ttiSaij into municipal Srj>ioi subordinate to their 
 own fiyeixofia. So Am., but G61I. and Popp. understand it rather of the actual 
 gathering of the population within the walls of one metropolitan city for 
 purposes of defence. They compare the case of Olynthus (i. 58). So too 
 
Chap. 3.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 283 
 
 ThirlwaU : ' The population of Mytilene was receiving continual additions from 
 the smaller towns under her influence, from which by persuasion or force she 
 transplanted the inhabitants within her own walls.' 
 
 (e.) MuT.X^KTjv. Therefore Mytilene, not Mitylene. The former is the 
 orthography found on coins and in some of the best Greek MSS. But the latter 
 IS of such frequent occurrence in MSS. of the Latin writers, that it has been 
 generally adopted. Even Mr. Grote writes Mitylene. See Duker's note, ili. 25, 
 quoted by Ar. 
 
 (/.) BoiaiTwi/ iuyyfvUv. Because Penthilus, son of Orestes, after his 
 expulsion from Peloponnesus by the Heracleids, led a colony of Boeotians to 
 Lesbos. 'The Boeotians,' says Am., 'like most of the people of the northern 
 parts of Greece, considered themselves to belong to the iEolic race— a name 
 and race of the highest antiquity, as iEolus was said to be the eldest son of 
 Helen.' The Lesbians were always acknowledged as ^olians. Hence the 
 Lesbian Sappho is '.fflolia puella' with Horace (Od. iv. 9. iz), and her lyric 
 strains, which he was proud to copy, '.Solium carmen' (Od. iv. 3. 12). C£ 
 Thac. vii. 57, and viii. 100. 4TT€iyovrai, an uncommon use of the 
 
 word, but cf. iv. 56, viii. 9. Pop. tr. 'Imrrying in,' i.e. urgently bringing in. 
 
 ChAPTEE in. — (a.) Upri KaBia-ranivov—'just commenced;' 'Tiad so 
 recently broTcen out,' D. But would not this require a past participle ? Render 
 — 'just come into full effect,' or 'operation,' 'fairly afoot,' and cf. i. 1. 
 
 (J.) Trpoa-troKeiJ.(icra(reai A. warns us to distinguish from vporriroXt- 
 fLOKTai. The first medio sensu is, ' to hring wpon themselves a war with Lesios 
 in addition to that in which they were already engaged ;' the second, ' to Iring 
 upon another state a war with Lesios in addition to that in which it was already 
 
 (o.) /leiCov iiepos — 'assigning more than right, i.e. too much weight to the 
 wish, that it might not he true,'oT,to the not wishing it to be true, makingthe wish 
 the father to the thought, as Shakspeare has it. So also oXxrif irXeov yelp.avres, 
 slviii. and vefjtovres tQ <pQ6vif irXs'tov fxepos, Eur. Supp. 241. The a\r}67} refers 
 to Tct KaTTjyopovfjLei/a contained in KaTTjyoplas. Bl. quotes imitations from Philo 
 Jnd. and Dio Cassius which leave no doubt as to their conception of the meaning. 
 
 (d.) MoAiieyToj. See note on iv. 'Nomen nihil aliud significat, nisi 
 Apollinem axpaTov, nam Dii axpaloi multi aunt in nummis Mytilenseorum,* G. 
 who follows Miiller in his Dorians. It was probably this Dorian word that 
 the Latins confused with ' Maleventum.' Hence the singular euphemism of 
 re-christcning it ' JBeneventum.' Could it, notwithstanding the difference in 
 quantity, be connected with Latin m^la, a jaw ? 
 
 (e.) Ka\ fiv ixey ^vjifi^ f) vfTpa — sc. Ka\S>s civ exav. Where the apodosis 
 to one of the alternatives is too obvious for misconstruction, or too disagreeable 
 for mention, it is sometimes suppressed, as here. Some editors call this 
 aposiopesis. Perhaps it is better to confine this to the last-mentioned class, 
 like the famous 'Quos ego— sed pra3stat,' olJSn. i. 135, and Herod, viii. 62, ab 
 ei fievUiS ai/Toi koX ixevuv erreai avi}p aya66s' ei 5e ^7) k.t.A. To the former 
 belong the foUowiug well-known instances : 
 
 el (HEi/ Siiirovcn yepas fi^ydOvfioi 'Axawl [icoAais €|ei] . . . 
 €* Se K€ (U^ Si^wcrtv K.r.K, — Zl, i. 137. 
 
284 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 As also Plato de Hep. 575 "d: ovk odv 4ay fjLfi/ sk6vt€S v-n-e'iicaffiv [/caXwy ^X^O' 
 iav Se fi^ iTTiTpenri Tj ttSms. And again, Protag. 325 D : koX Ihv iikv kKiav 
 'jriid7}TaL [fcoXws ex^O* ^^ ^^ H-h ^cirep |iJaoi/ evBivouaty. Kriig. cf. 17. 13. 3. 
 More on the subject may be seen by consulting the editors on Arist. Plutus, 
 466. eiVerv depends on a verb supplied fr. eVTjyycAflr;. 
 
 i^f.) ras 5eKa TpiTjpeis. As this is not a case of 'previous mention/ 
 GoU. says, ' aliquis quaerat cur addatur artlculus.' It seems to me plain enough, 
 though not exactly explicable by 'illse decern naves, quse forte apud Atheniensea 
 erant/ Does it not rather imply the known and necessary Lesbian contingent 
 — the ordinary Lesbian quota to the fleet ? inoi-fia-avro. We had 
 
 a similar usage, ii. 83, ivrhs voiovi/Tai ; cf. also viii. i, is aatfaKfiav Trou7(rOcii, 
 and infra vi. a, or perhaps i. 87, b. 
 
 (g.) ttX^ xP't"^!^^'"'^- Many understand ' o yatiowraiZe voyage.' See i. 
 137, b. and Kriig.'s note on Xen. Anab. v. 9. 33. Am. considers it as simply 
 contrasted with &S6s, as in vi. 97, oifre ttKovVj qHtc 68hi^ oTrex^i- 
 
 (A.) TO T6 aXAa. Arnold takes these words per se — 'in other things ;' he 
 should have said 'all the other things ;' and then constructs, i(pv\aa-trov irtpj ri 
 ^uir^KeffTa tuv Teix&v (ppa^oi/xevoL (aura). I confess that I should in this case 
 have preferred i^vKaaaovTo (though later writers I believe employ ipv\6,TTai 
 sine objecto). Peile objects to iipixaaaov without an accusative of the object, and 
 constructs, ra re &\Aa, tSiv tux^v koL Kl^^vwv irepi, Tct ^/tiTeXetrra ippa^dfievot 
 4(piKa<r(rov. He thus makes t& &\\a agree with 7iiure\fcrTa Ipya, and both 
 governed by iipiXaaaov, while tmv K.r.\. is governed by irepi post casum. ' They 
 both did not go out (to the temple), ont^ the other half-finished works in which they 
 were engaged about their walls and harbours^ they protected with barricades ;' 
 or ' as for the rest, i. e. as respected their walls and harbours, they barricaded the 
 unfinished portions.' This use of tripi seems somewhat unusual ; the difficulty 
 not being that it follows its case, but that it follows a noun with something to 
 be supplied from a verb, so. ttis (pv\d^ews. Bat even if this interpretation be 
 right, I should still, from its position and frequent occurrence in similar col- 
 locations, make to &\\a = 'with respect to the other matters.' Otherwise d £xXo; 
 must have the same force as &\\os in the common idiom, where it signifies 
 « besides,' and I scarcely think it can. Giill. makes the expression identical with 
 fd re &\\a i<p^\aff<rov, irepi Tct ^/iiTeAeffTo rwv Tdxuv koX \tfi.evuv tfipa^dfievoi, 
 and this is well enough, if, supposing Thucydides to have meant this, we can 
 understand why in simple narrative he should have so contorted and mis- 
 placed his words. It is not to be paralleled by similar inversions occurring in 
 speeches, or in the expression of abstruse intellectual conceptions. However, 
 as Pop. and Kriig. assent to this, the reader may adopt it. We have, as they 
 say, ^pa^d/iivoi without an objective case in viii. 35. 
 
 Chapter IV. — (a.) ol 'h.6i)vatoi — is itlspuv. Pop. Frol. vol. i. 107, 
 compares iii. 5, olirp€(r$eis ws oiiSkv ^Kdoy 'jrpd^avTes, and v. 28, vii. 32. 
 ^ir(6iK«7, cf. ToO ^TTietKoCs, i. 76, and iirietKes rh nap& rhp yeypafiix^vov v6iiop 
 Sixawv, Ar. Rh. i. 13, and infra xl. c> ■ 
 
 (b.) Tuv Siafia\\6vTuv. We might have expected the past participle. 
 But the participle with the article becomes so thoroughly a noun substantive 
 that it drops the temporal element of its sense, so to speak, and follows the same 
 
Chap. 5.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 285 
 
 law. Am. translates ' tlie informers' This is a matter of some Importance, 
 and lias not received as prominent notice from scholars as it should have done. 
 Compare toTj eVoyo^eVoij, ii. 2 ; 01 ■KpoSiB6vT(s, ii. 5. See also oi Zia<peiyovTes, 
 iii. 40, and a remarkable case Soph. Meet. 334, (Edif. Tyr. 1247, ^ t(- 
 KTouffa, 'the mother' Of. rois '^iiyovta^, i. 24. d. ; 01 InrepffaliioyTes, xxiii. a.; 
 St. Matt. ii. 20. 
 
 (c.) \ae<i>'T€s Ti Twy 'ABrivatuv vavTi«.6v. 'These arrivals and de- 
 spatches were carried on without the knowledge of the Athenian admir.il; 
 chiefly in consequence of the peculiar site of the town, which had been originally 
 placed upon a little islet, divided from Lesbos by a narrow channel or euripus, 
 and had subsequently been extended across into the main island, like Syracuse 
 and so many other Grecian settlements. It had consequently two harbours, 
 one north, the other south of the town. Klelppides was anchored off the 
 former, but the latter remained unguarded.' — Grote, vi. 306. 
 
 (d.) Ty MaKei}. Certainly not Strabo's Malea, or Cape Zeitoun, as that 
 was seven miles away — a distance which would make provisioning the seamen 
 impracticable. The article, moreover (as P. remarks), implies that it is the 
 locality indicated in the word Ma\6iVTo?, and this was only e^a ttjs Tr(i\€as, a 
 spot to which the citizens went in procession — TravSjifisl. I believe it to have 
 been the N.E. headland forming one side of the harbour. The term MoA.e'a, 
 like the Celtic ben, or dun, the Saxon head, and many others, seems to have 
 been a descriptive word converted into a local appellation, and so applicable to 
 many places of the same kind, e. g. there was another at S. pt. of Peloponnesus. 
 _ The word 'gate' in our own language is applied similarly to all sorts of places, 
 sometimes close to each other. Both Am. and Thirlwall adopt the same solution. 
 
 (e.) ov yap inlarevoy, Arn. makes toIs depend on iTrlarevov, and con- 
 siders (ScTTs) irpox™?^"'^"' ^ s*"^' of e'pexegesia—' trust to the answer from Athens, 
 that it would have a prosperous issue.' But it was about the issue of their 
 application, and not that of the reply, that they were dubious. I should render 
 
 ' they felt no confidence in the answer that was to come from Athens, that they 
 
 should succeed in respect of it.' Compare iirX (Ueifo)/ (= irpo) X'^P'h'ravTos of a 
 person, iv. 117. Peile makes irpox'^p^'rei'' impersonal (as ii. 56, oii laenToi 
 TTDoex'"/"!'''^' 7^)' ^'^'^ ■"'"'^ *^^ dative after it — ' they felt no confidence that 
 there would be afavourable iisue to whatdepended upon the Athenians ;' and com- 
 pares airh twv Aeafiiaii', iii. 6. (Pop. renders — ' non confidebant legatis Athenas 
 missis ab Atheniensibus aliquid processurum,' and compares ijSri ijic6i/Tav avrois 
 ruv anh ®p(}K-ns iiera. Bpacri'Soi; e^eXeivTum ffTpaTiaTui' for T)K6iiTaiv aiiTois airh 
 epixris Twv'h 0p?'K7)j' fi. B. e{. iTTpar. But this is a very common ellipse, whereas 
 Poppo's rois vapa. 'M-rivairis — airi Toi;' ' Keriva'mv—Trapa. referring to legate, and 
 airh to TTpayixa-ra, as GoU remarks, is very different.) Sia roi! 
 
 v(\6.yovs. See iii. 33. 69, iv. 8. -raXatirdpas—' at great pains.' 
 
 Chaptee \.—{a.) oEtoi— sc. 01 U-nBvixvaioi, ut supra, ii. a. 
 
 a.) iK n^KoTTovviiaov. Peile considers this as a condensed mode of 
 expression for ^ou\6p.ivot ixerh ttjs Ik neKomvpiiirov TrapacKevrjs, Kal fxer' S\A.i)s, 
 e,' npo<ry4yoiT6 t:, Ki^Svyei.L^ ; and so Popp. and Goll. Kriig. would strike out 
 M6Ti and make the gen. depend on ti. l^oSoy i^4y ni'a.—' did indeed 
 
 tnahe a hind of sortie.' 
 
286 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Chapteb. VI.— (o.) la^xvpi" — any strong 01 vigorous measure. Again iv. 
 27. b. and viii. 9. irEpiopfiiffiifievou I do not see why the absence 
 
 of the preposition h or iwl should greatly disquiet Am., whose interpretation 
 * bringing round their ships to a new station on the south of the town, seems right 
 in the main. Perhaps we might give the middle more accurately by saying — 
 ' having come rounds and brought themselves to an anchor south of the town* 
 rh nphs v6tov. 'South' may as well stand independently as t!i TroKai, tJ 
 irapavTUa, or other phrases of the sort. (Compare too wepuip/jLovi/, n\iiv ri irpij 
 rh TTe\ayos, iv. 23; rh nphs Ne/ie'as, V. 59.) Goll. connects rh vpis vhov with 
 ^Te(x '"■"''• But what becomes of the ciroumTallation if both campa were on 
 the south ? 
 
 (6.) Tois i<l>6pii.ovs — 'their hlociaders,' cf. iv. 27. 32. See note on iii. 
 76, and on itroiovvTO sup. iii. 
 
 (c.) vaiaraBiiov TrAodai' Kol ayopas. An extension of zeugma. As 
 Goll. remarks, the idea of au ayopa was quite inseparable from a naval station. 
 On all occasions where a fleet was collected there was a market held in some 
 neighbouring spot for the supply of provisions, and the two words seem united 
 by a closer bond than (as Arn. has it) the common generic notion of ' a place 
 for anything.' Krvig. (as I had myself) conjectures ayopa, which is perhaps 
 correct, the transcriber having slipt into a second genitive. 
 
 Chapteb VII. — (a.) Kark riv 'AxeK^on — 'on the side of the Acheloils,' 
 Arn. Rather perhaps, ' over against,' or nautically speaking, ' off the mouth 
 of the Acheloiis.' That this is the meaning seems plain from such phrases as • 
 Kara rb vnEp^xov, and Kara rohs MetTffrjj'/ous, iii. 107. Peile has 'sailing up,' 
 but surely KarcL would rather mean ' down stream.' See particularly i. 46, rf 
 (tari KcpKvpay rjrf tp:/!, where it is impossible to mistake the meaning — 'that 
 portion of the mainland which lag over against Corcyra.' Similarly we must 
 interpret Kara rhv 'hKftriirnv 'Korafi6v, iv. 25. 
 
 (5.) Ti fiipos — ' some part,' Ji.; v^^^ev, ' a considerable number.' Cf. i. 
 ouTdSei' — 'from the spot,' i.e. the inhabitants of the district. Cf. ii. 25. c 
 iv. 129. aTToirXciSffarTcs — ' after they had left the coast ' Cf . i. 
 
 137. b. 
 
 Chaptee VIII. — (a.) ?iv Z'k 'OAu^jTias K.T.X. The Olympiad in which 
 Dorieus for the second time 'was victor' was the 88th = B.C. 428. So v. 49. 
 Aa}pi(is — son of Diagoras. SeeMiiller's Dor. ii. 142. iviKa again 
 
 is used as a self-containing predicate. 
 
 (6.) flirov Toii£5c. 'We should have expected (in this speech) a confident 
 sense of righteons and well-grounded though perilous effort, and a plausible 
 collection of wrongs and oppressions alleged against the common enemy. In- 
 stead of which the speech is apologetic and embarrassed ; the speaker not only 
 does not idlege any extortion or severe dealing from Athens towards tha 
 Mitylcneans, but even admits the fact that they had been treated by her with 
 marked honour.' — Grote, vi. 309. The speaker however does allege grounds 
 for a confident expectation of the loss of independence, and liberty, and con- 
 sequently of ' severe dealing ' to follow in its own good time. And this to some 
 persons might seem enough, at any rate to the auditors it did. 
 
Chap. IO.] NOTES ON THL'CYDIDES. 28/ 
 
 Chapter IX. — (a.) rb fiev KaBearSs. So also tnpieffr'bs for •rrepiea'Tt&s, 
 ' The neuter keeps a unchanged, as it originated by contraction from a6s, 
 Thucyd. iii. 9, iv. 10, with the v. 1-. eo-Tiis. The best MSS. however have o not 
 CO, which Beklter has adopted universally in Plato and Thuoydides.' — MatthisB, 
 § 198. 3. f. So also Buttmann in his Complete Ghrammar (quoted by A.) notices 
 the inconsistency, but says that the Attic probably followed ' der scheinbaren 
 Analogie.' X^'P""* — 'deteriorated.' Of. note on x*'?""''. ii- 4S> "id 
 
 iv. 114. Bl. quotes: ' TrausfugiB nomen, execrabile veteribus sociis, novis 
 suspectum,' Livy, xxvii. 17. a^luiris — 'opinion, a rare sense.' — Bl. 
 
 But unfortunately it does not mean opinion; it is 'this way of gauging their 
 value' of estimating their worth, which is not a rare sense. 
 
 (J.) 61 Tvxoie" . . . SiaKptvoifTo. Feile notices these optative forms, 
 and contrasts them with ei iSvyfidriffav at the close of the next chapter. Thei 
 first form puts a purely hypothetical case — in this instance one confessedly not 
 realized (f> t)iuv koX 'Afliji/afois ovk ^v) ; the second puts the case as a matter of 
 fact, and implies the possibility of its realization. "We may add that the same 
 thing takes place in Latin when si cum indicativo is contrasted with si cum 
 suijunctivo. Nor is the fact that d Se a(p' i^fiav ijp^avro is used in cap. xi. of 
 a case which did not occur, any exception to this rule, for here the writer puts 
 the case positively, as a possibility, and demanding of the reader for the 
 moment to assume that it was so, proceeds to state what would have followed. 
 Had the optative been employed all would have remained in the regions of 
 pure hypothesis. See note upon i. 1 20. c. and ct iivviidricrav — * if ever they were 
 able,' X. ad finem, said of a case which the speaker particularly desires his 
 hearer to contemplate. 
 
 (0.) 7^(^/17) Kol evvoi<{. The first I apprehend refers to the purpose, in- 
 tentions, or policy of the parties ; the second to the ' state of feeling,' or the 
 ' entente cordiale ' between them ; tr. ' agree in designs and good intentions.' 
 T!-p6tpa(Tis iwifiK-fi s — 'fair excuse or pretext.' Cf . iv. 
 
 Chaptee X.— (a.) ^ct' aperTJs SoKoiffns — not, 'the seeming of virtue,' 
 but ' on opinion of each other's probity' as we use the word when we say 
 • Ihave no opinion of such a man,' and Sfioi6TpoiToi = 'congeniality of senti- 
 ment.' rpiJiros, way, has a moral import. See Theophrastus. 
 Tip StaWdffo-oyTi— 'diversity of policy or sentiment.' The expression is a 
 peculiar one, and has I think a correspondingly peculiar force. The writer 
 does not mean a ' passive variety,' such as subsists between inanimate objects, 
 bat such as is found between persons all pulling different ways— tte active 
 development of difference. ti'Ko\in6vTa>v—' when you disap- 
 
 peared, or deserted.' Of. Herod, vii. 121. iiroAoi'ira— 'remained to 
 
 be done' 
 
 (J.) {iJ^ftaxoi. We may make this word govern both Mnvaiois and 
 •EAAi)iri in order to preserve the antithesis ; or we may again supply 'ABTjvatois, 
 and consider that we have » dative, toIj "EWvirty, instead of tZv 'EW^vay 
 because the dative is stronger, and carries with it the notion, ' for the profit or 
 benefit of the Greeks.' Krug. makes 'ABrfyafoiJ dative after KaraSovXiiffti. 
 ga in vi. 76, and therefore °EAA.7)ffi» dat. after ^KivBipiiirei. 
 
 (c.) ivayofiiyovs. Arnold obelizes this, and with G. prefers iTreiyo/jtvov^ 
 
288 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [^ooz 111. 
 
 proposed by Ross and Bekker. Now we have the word ivayo/iei'aii' i. 3, where 
 it denotes ' bringing in an auxiliary from abroad,' and therefore if it is to stand 
 here I should render — 'making the enslaving of the Greeks auxiliary or sub- 
 sidiary to their own power,* This comes pretty near to Pop., * suscipientes, sibi 
 assumentes.' Krijg. I find quotes *'Ai5a fi6vov (pev^iv ovk ^trd^eTat, Soph. Antlg, 
 361, and avBaipiTov avrots iTrdyoyrat 8ov\eiaVf which confirm the view I had 
 independently taken. 
 
 (d.) Sici ■jro\v\lni(i>la v — ' on account of the much voting,' i.e. so many having 
 to vote. This is explained by i. 141, or from diversity of counsels. 
 Kaff %v yev6/ievoi, ' having coalesced, or formed a coalition.' So infra, Kafl* 
 tv 'yev6fj.evoy. 
 
 (e.) avTinoiJioi S^ ovres — ' as they professed, independent,' 
 iivvi)Br)iTay, See supra, ix. 
 
 Chaptee XI. — {a.) $i^ai6Tepoi. The tiro may observe that here j3e'/3oios 
 seems to classify itself with S^Aos, ^ixaios, and <pavep6s. These adjectives agree 
 with the subject of the sentence, where another would stand in the nom. neuter, 
 followed by an accusative of the subject before an infin. mood, e. g. S9i\6s iariv 
 &ya6bs &v, not STJKdv itrrtif avrhv dya6hv eTvai. We may often imitate the 
 idiom in English, as here : ' they would have given us better security against 
 a change of policy and conduct.' 
 
 (b.) Kal Tvphs rh ir\i7ov iidri elxov k.t.K. This clause is coupled with fiiro- 
 Xeipiovs Se ex^^"^^^ '^'^"^ Tr\eiovs by Kal, and both contain the reasons for xo^e^*^ 
 Tepop elKiras ?jH6A\oi' oifffiv — 'as they had the majority of t?ie federation in a 
 state of submission, and as our power alone, as contrasted with that greater 
 part already in subservience, was still holding out on equal terms against them.' 
 It is quite true, as Arn. objects, that this clause, Kal irphs /c.t.\. ought to precede 
 the finite verb efjLfWov ; but this additional consideration brought in as an 
 afterthought is precisely in character with the general run of public speaking 
 (where some new reason strikes a man as he proceeds), and is quite in the style 
 of Thucydides. So nearly also Peile, who says against Arn. that wphs here does 
 not indicate comparison but contrast. Both ideas however alike arise from the 
 local force of the prep, indicating that one thing is placed beside another ; and 
 in this situation their points of resemblance and difierence both become more 
 apparent. dvriira\oy — 'equally balanced,' and so, ' reciprocal fear.' 
 
 viifiv — 'is to berelied on or affords a gua/rantee.' 
 
 (0.) T9! /ii); Ttpoixfv. The MSS. vary between rb \i\i and t^ ^^. The 
 former Matthise explains : * the man of unjust designs is prevented from ac- 
 quiring that superiority offeree which is necessary for successful aggression.' 
 Popp., thinking T(j; required by the sense, interprets : 'the man of unjust designs 
 is deterred from aggressions by finding himself with no superiority of force to 
 prosecute them.' So too Krug., and it is the most natural translation. 
 
 (d.) yydiixris fiaWov i<l>6Stp ^ Iffxvos — 'the encroachments of policy 
 rather than those of open force,' is rijv apx'h" — '<■'"' respect to or 
 
 in regard of their dominion.' to irpriy/xaTo refei-s to the hege- 
 
 monia. '6(tov — only just so far as, 
 
 (f.) a/ia fiiv yap ixaprvpltp k,t.\. — 'they availed themselves of us as a 
 standing proof , that those at any rate who possessed an equal right of voting 
 
Chap. 12.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 289 
 
 [whatever the others might do] would not join them against their own wills [i. e. 
 while they had the right of veto and power of refusal] in expeditions, if tlir 
 assailed party were not to a certain extent in the wrong.' This I believe to be:i 
 correct and literal interpretation ; that of Arnold is certainly not literal. I do 
 not exactly understand his charge of ' confusion,' nor his saying that — ' nor 
 should we join them at all ' is to be supplied after Skoi/tos— an idea which lie 
 seems to have taken from Poppo. Still less is it desirable to read, as many 
 have suggested, ^K(i>/Tos. In this I am confirmed by Peile, whose version is 
 nearly to the same effect, and who asserts that there is no confusion in the 
 passage, hut merely a condensation, such as is found Antig. 2 and 7, or in 
 Thuc. i. 40, or indeed in the next chapter — ti eSfi rifms ix toO ifjioioy in' 
 eKeimts dmi ; where Am. complains of no confusion. To the fi ;H a ^ e r responds 
 ill tQ out^ S€, which is to be interpreted as koI iv t$ aurip in xiii. — 'while 
 at the very same time.' tcc Kpar itrra — a way of expressing Tifias 
 
 Toiis KparliTTovs more generally, because it was the spealier's object to show 
 that this was the general principle of the Athenian policy. 
 
 (g.) TTipiriprnjiivov — ' stripped from around them, Wee the foliage from a 
 tree.' Arn. cf. ii. 13, Tviptaip^rhv eJvai airav. See Isaiah xxx. 1 y. 
 TO Tf^euTaio KindyTis — ' leaving us to tte last.' The article thus standing 
 with the predicate is suspicious. Kriig. conjectures raSe. But perhaps the 
 article is explicable upon the principle that the one left, after all the rest have 
 been subtracted, becomes something definite, the remainder, and so receives the 
 article. Something of the same kind takes place with fractional numbers, 
 TO Sia fiipri — two thirds. avTui'. '.Not the possessive genitive, 
 
 but that of the subject : el irdfres avTol Iffx^v elx"^.' — Kriig. 
 trphs '6ti XPh ffTTivai — ' a point d' appui — pied a terre.' 
 napeix^ f^V • * • Trapdaxv — subj. and not opt. mood, because the conse- 
 quence would be continued down to the time of speaking — ' cause, and he still 
 causing, apprehension.' Compare i. 31, ?i\dov koI avrol . . . oVais pLjj rb 'ATriKhi/ 
 irpo(Tyev6fiei'oi' i/j.'jr6Stoy y^fqTai. Cf. xxii. 
 
 (A.) irepieyiyvoiisBa — sc. avTovofioi octes, ' remained free ;' or, survived 
 the peril. 
 
 Chapter XII. — (a.) Tis oiy aSrri r; (piXia iyiyvero k.t.\. Thearticle 
 is so awkwardly removed from iritrTT) that Dindorf conjectures and Poppo 
 approves of ij. Goller objects that it is useless to ask the question, when in 
 the very terms of the question the answer is conveyed. This is a singular 
 argument, as if the Lesbians thought mrrii was really the answer; or as if a 
 man might not ask— 'what sort of faithful friendship do you call this V mean- 
 ing to imply that it was none at all. His own reading however with a note 
 of interrogation after iyiyvcra does not seem objectionable, for I think we 
 might render— 'o/wAoi soH then did this {airn, friendship they talk about) 
 friendship of theirs (fi (piXia) turn out to be ?' 
 
 (S.) vapa. yvdifJ-riv—' wobei es uns nicht recht von Serzen geht.' — G. And 
 so Kriig. after Heil.— ' anders als es uns urns Sertz war.' But the prominent 
 part of the idea expressed by yvdifi-ii is not so much heartiness or sincerity, as 
 ' contrary to our own better judgment; which assured us of the real insecurity of 
 onr bond of union. utteSex'^MeSo- Popp. would read aireSfXii^eea. 
 
 V 
 
290 SOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 and H^ase Inriipx^l'-^^''' ' ^^^ '' '^ ^*^y '■'' ^^^ what the word means— we received 
 one another, i. e. continued our intercourse, said of fugitives, supra, iii. See 
 V. 83 ; vi. 22. 34. So Bl. not inaptly cites Livy xxx. 14 : ' benigno vultu 
 excipere aliquera ;' and Cicero j?ro Mil. nd fin.; * terram beatain quae hunc 
 viruni excipiet.' 
 
 (c.) H T€ roTs &\Kois K.T.\. Arn. says : 'Grammar there is none in the 
 sentence j' but proposes to explain it as ii. 40: & toTs &\\ois afjtadia fj.€tf Bpdffos, 
 \oyiiT/xhs Se 6kvov <fi4pei — 'that which in the case of others takes this shape, 
 namely that faith is secured iy love, that in our case taJces a different form, 
 namely that faith is secured iy fear.' GoU. simply explains 8 re ' und wohin- 
 gegen,' and whereas. Cf. note on ii. 40. Where all is uncertain any suggestion 
 may be tolerated. Might 3 be taken as the accusative after ;3c/3aiat, and 
 ■jt'kttis as its epexegesis ? — • and that which among all other men friendly feeling 
 for the most part secures, good faith, Imean, this in our case it was ourfea/r that 
 furnished in a trustworthy form, and itwasfrom apprehension rather than from 
 friendship that we were retained in the position of allies.' D. has — ' we were 
 constrained to be allies' not noticing the force of the participle with the sub- 
 stantive verb. Krag.'s explanation is : The full sentence would be 3 te rots 
 &\\ois fx6.Ki(Tra iijvoia Troiit, Trlffriv $e$atoT, but iroteT as not essential is omitted, 
 and the epexegetlcal clause is confused with the antecedent one. Poppo makes 
 wiffTty iSe/SaioTa form of expression almost equivalent to a single word, 'faithfully 
 confirms,' and considers that it governs 3. To this I should prefer taking 
 ■niiTTiv idmost adverbially, nari ir. — 'in the matter of good faith.' 
 
 (rf.) et yap Surorol ^^ev in rov Xtrov . . . eir' sKeivois elvat, or 
 as G. reads leVoi. A much controverted passage. Heilmann conjectured 
 avTeirifjii\TJ(rai Ti, ^Set . . . cJuai, and explains — ' Waren wir in den Umstanden 
 gewesen, dass wir mit gleichem Vortheil unsere Massregeln und Anstalten 
 gegen sie nehmen koiinten ; so batten wir in der That bei alien jetzt 
 erwahuten Bedenklicbkeiten unser Betragen nach ihrigen einricbten miissen.' 
 Jiut how (as indeed Goll. inquires) can 'bei alien Jetzt erwahnten Sedenklich- 
 Jceilen ' be contained in ^/c rov Snolov ? Besides- eV ixeivois ehat is in some way 
 or other ' to be dependent upon them,' and not, ' to frame our conduct upon the 
 model of theirs.' Hermann reads b.vriixf\\T\(jai ti, eStt itnas ik tov dpLoiuv eV 
 iKflvoiS etvai; and explains ^tt' ^fceirois ^Jvai as equivalent to rh 4n' Ik. etvai — 'if 
 we had possessed the power of framing measures against them, we ought to have 
 framed such measures as a set-off, so far as they would let us.' He would I 
 suppose support himself by kKlii« eli/ai, but the absence of the article is more 
 than suspicious. Popp. follows a second suggestion of Hermann's, and omit- 
 ting ^irl reads iK rov 6p.oiov (iK^ivots) iJi/at — 'if it was equally in our power to plot 
 against them, and delay the execution of our plots, we ought to put ourselves on 
 an equality with them in our acts.' This, though ingenious, is to cut the knot, 
 and not to untie it. GoU. too, with some show of reason, contends that ^k tov 
 6fj.oiou ehai cannot be * similes in agendo esse, nihil significant nisi, in gl-eichen 
 Umstanden sein. Agendi notionem auctori inferciens obtrusit.' G.'s own 
 method is to read livai, and retain the interrogative rl — ' Why if our poioer 
 were equal (^k tov Sfiolov) should we assail them ? Why should we be the first to 
 attack, if we possessed the poioer to defend ourselves on equal terms ? ' Some 
 again explain 4k toD djioiov — ' after having been in a position of equality,' like 
 Ik iJ.iv eifl)vns wo\ep.eIv, k.t.A. i. 120, and Tv(p\hs 4k S€Sook6tos, (Ed. Tyr. 454. 
 
Chap. 1 3.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 29 1 
 
 But then the direct and very Thucydidean correspondence of the clause with 
 €K rod iaov preceding is lost. Finally Arn. makes ix rod 6/iotov = Siiolas — 'in 
 UTce manner as we now are,' which is too unnatural to require confutation. His 
 objection about imh and 4ir\ is answered below. I confess that all these methods 
 seem to me unsatisfactory, and that I adhere to the common-sense explanation 
 of the Scholiast, el ykp Iff 01 avro7s vir-fipxafxev , . . t* eSei ri/xas iiv' iKiivoLS rax^V- 
 vat 71 iwaKovfiv avro7s , — 'if we really stood upon this equality with them [i.e. .11 
 the power of counterplotting, and deferring the execution of our plots — if we 
 could afford, like them, to wait], why did we not assert it; and what need was 
 there for us, being upon an equal footing [i. e. if we were as you say upon an 
 equal footing], to he at their beck and call?' Against this GoU. brings three 
 arguments. (1) That this is not the real question (i.e. num Mytilenaei in 
 potestate Atbeniensium esse debuerint ?). (2) They could not call themselves 
 X<Toi if they were vtt' ^Ad-r^paicuv reray^evoi. (3) iirl nvt elvai is not the same 
 as u7r<( rivi (Ifai. ■ To these I reply : (i) It is the question, for the Mytilenajans 
 are showing that circumstances proved them not to have been in that state of 
 <pi\la and Tnarii ^Asufle^ifa which the Athenians pretended, and that therefore as 
 the weaker party they were justified iv r^ TrpoaTToarTjvat, Cf. supra. (2) On 
 the contrary they are showing that the hypothesis of their being ix tuB Xirov 
 is false. (3) True; but the very difference between the prepositions is what 
 might be anticipated, iirh would have denoted the usual position of subjects 
 in which they did not profess to be; eV! denotes that state of modified 
 dependence in which they were, and which I have endeavoured in the transla- 
 tion to express. Krug. reads, ei jap K.r.X. o.vTLfjL€\\ii(Tai ri, eSet ^^nar ek to5 
 ijioiou ^tt' e/cei'vous leVai, meaning, I suppose — 'if we had been so far on a footing 
 of equality as to be enabled to make counterplots and preparations, we ought 
 on this equal footing to have assailed them.' rSiv 4s Tifias Seij-iiv — 
 
 ' the delay in putting into execution their violent measures against us.' 
 
 Chapter XIII. — (a.) n-pocfaaeis — ' alleged causes' alrlas — 
 
 • grounds of complaint.' ^j/o/x/fo/ief aTroiTr-l}(r((r0ai K.r.\.— 'we thought 
 
 to effect (or we held that we should be about to make) a twofold withdrawal, one 
 from the Oreehs in general, so as not to co-operate with the Athenians in injuring 
 them, a second from the Athenians, so as not ourselves to be destroyed by them, 
 but rather to do it first ' (sc. destroy them). The conceit, and it is a poor one, 
 though acceptable to the Greek taste, depends upon the two meanings of 
 airoo-T^ireo-eai, the first denoting simple absence, the second revolt. For (i) 
 Arn. cites iv. 118, ovSevls a.iroarij<!avr(u Ua Uv SiKoict Xiynn; for (2) we 
 need not seek far anywhere in Thucyd. (e. g. xxxix. a.-^6<Tra(ns rHv piaiiv ri 
 7ro(rx<ivTuv iariv). G611. says, eVoMiX"!"^"- sc. h^w &7ro(rT^(reffeai. But Peile 
 notices the similarity of the English idiom as given above, and to prove the 
 impossibility of supplying S,w (as in the orators) quotes xxiv. : voi^iQavris 
 ^Kurra a^as rairv" airovs {nroTonrja-ai rpdrriireai—' expecting, what was the 
 fact, that they [the Peloponnesians] least suspected that they [the Platajans] had 
 taken that road.' He adds iv. 9, ^«(rxcJ<ra<r9ai aurois vyf-iro 7rpo9u,i<)(re(reai— 
 . he calculated upon his having tempted them to venture for it.' The truth is, 
 that here, as in the vyv<rdl^^Po' of ii. 4^, these verbs have a sort of 'sensus 
 prsegnaps;' they imply an affirmative rather than a negative issue. 
 
292 NOTES OX THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 (i.) ij,ii ^iiv Ko/cMj iroieTi/. This apparent tmesis is so rare that some 
 MSS. exhibit ^wKaKas, and all editors hesitate about it. Tmesis it can scarcely 
 be considered, for, as Bloomfield has remarked, the expression kokus ^viinroiftu 
 would by no means be equivalent. The three words ^vvKaKasTvoiiiv seem to 
 me to be used as u, single verb, since there was no exact antithetical one to 
 ^vinKevdfi,ovv at hand, and yet the anxiety of the Mytilenajans to make a point 
 was too great to be restrained by ordinary grammatical considerations. Kriig. 
 too says ' ^vyKHKasTroiuv ware eigentlich in einem Worte zu schreiben, gleicb dem 
 ovT6uiroieu/, ai/TEUTredrcTai,' and refers to his grammar, § 42. 5. Or we may con- 
 sider, with GoU., t,iiii as an adverb, which opens out the question concerning the 
 adverbial usage of prepositions. Matthiee holds that in the early stage of the 
 language ' the prepositions really served as adverbs, which were put either im- 
 mediately before or after the verbs. At a later period, however, particularly 
 in Attic, the composition became more firmly established, and the prepositions 
 were considered part of the verb,' § 594. i. Similarly Jelf, § 640, ' In Homer 
 the prepositions are used both in their primary force as local adverbs, and in 
 their secondary force as prepositions.' This, however, happened more rarely in 
 Attic poetry, and scarcely ever in Attic prose. Jelf produces a few instances of 
 the adverbial irpiis, e. g. Demosth. 835. 68 : SiKatoi 5' ^ar* i\ie7i' . . . rj/ias . . . arepo- 
 tieyovSf Koi Trpbs inrh tovtoji/ {i$pi^ofi€vovSf and ib. 491. 112. See Iviii. infra, 
 vpis Se Kal 7^*'. 
 
 (0.) ifBiparai . . . TCT<ix<"'ai. On these forms, relics of the old Ionic 
 in the Attic dialect, cf. Matth. § 204. 6. They seem, to have passed out of 
 use by the time of the orators. irepiovtyiav — 'reserve^' 
 
 cf. i. rh Sei-repoy — 'second time' in the same season; the first 
 
 was recorded in i. afiiporcpav — 'its both.' Lacedaemonians and 
 
 Mytilenaeans. St* ^c . . . w^eKeiTai — 'through the instrumentality of 
 
 tohich Attica is advantaged.' Cf. note, i. 83 (and Si i)v l<rxioii(p, xxxix.). 
 SiLv6T(pa K.T.K. — 'worse than those who were in slavery hef ore our revolt.' 
 This is explained by what Cleon says, xxxix. : xi")' '^ MuTiXTjvafous KaX viKai 
 fiTiSkp SiaipepovTas ruv iWav itp' Tjfivy Teri/ji^arBat k.t.\. eix^"^^ — 'ye have 
 
 hitherto had.' See i. loi, 114. 4\€v6€povvTes <paiv7](r0e — 'appear 
 
 in the character of liberators' ri Kpdros — ' the upper hand (01 the 
 
 superiority in the war) secured to you.' 
 
 Chapter XIV. — (a.) is i/tas — 'hopes which look to you, whose object you 
 are.' The phrase i\Trl^eiy els riva is, according to Pop., often found in later 
 writers. iaa Kal i/cErai — ' all are as suppliants,' ' we and suppliants 
 
 are equal things.' The explanation (as Arn. remarks) of the Latin phrases, 
 ' aeque ac,' ' simul ac,' is similar. See vii. 71. 
 
 (fi.) rbv KiySvt/oy Trapa$aKKotjL4yovs. We need not object to this, be- 
 cause no physical object follows the verb, any more than we should object to 
 such expressions as 'run the risk,' or 'hazard of the die,' or avapplwTfLy 
 KivSvvoy, iv. 85. Cf. with Kriig. iyd <roi TrapaPdWo^iai ep-fivovs, Eurip. Iph. 
 in T. 1094. is toy {altogether our own) as opposed to koi v 7^ i^ (equally 
 
 belonging to alt). 
 
 ("•) yiyyea-Oe Se — 'approve yourselves men, such as Greece has u, claim 
 upon you to be, and our apprehensions would fain have you.' 
 
Crap. 17.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 293 
 
 Chaptek XV.— (a.) ^ o-flo A <)v— governed by ij 7roirj(r({/ieyoi, and therefore 
 no anaoolouthon, though, as Am. remarks, probably more from accident than 
 the fixed forethought of the writer. €> p a f ./ ,■ 6 1- o <— ' lade go.' This 
 
 syntax recurs, vi. 58, vii. 73. 
 
 (i.) Tois Si'/o liepfffiv. Eef. to note, ii. lo. 
 
 (c.) iAK oil, from •i\Kw~' levers,' or 'rollers,' a sort of wooden cyhnder. 
 This feat, which was not unusual, implies more mechanical skill than we could 
 have anticipated. See iii. 81, iv. 8, viii. 7. Pop. informs us (from Strabo, 
 380), that the spot where this was done bore the name of AIo\kos, and that 
 Livy, xlii. 16, describes the process as ' traducere per isthmum.' And so Horace, 
 ' Trahuntque siccas machinas carinas,' Od. i. 4. 2. They probably started from 
 the Corinthian port Lechfeum. Kap-n-od. Sine articulo. As in 
 
 other cases of familiar mention (i. 8). Of. ' Harvest home.' 
 appoio-Ti'ij — 'lazy disinclination.' Cf. with Pop. vii. 47, viii. 33, and with Bl. 
 &ppai(rTos, Xen. (Econ. iv, 13. 
 
 Cfaptee XVI. — (a.) KaTayvaxxiv. There is no necessity to resort to the 
 metaphorical meaning of a judicial condemnation, as that itself rather arises from 
 the primary sense of the word as used here — ' a looTcing down upon a thing in our 
 judgment of if,' ' despicere.' Hence it is^' the despicable (seusu activo) opinion 
 formed of their weakness' or, ' the undervaluing of their strength.' This seems 
 a more correct view of Korh in composition than what A. says, ' to think at,' or 
 as we say, ' to think of a person.' We may cf. iii. 45, vii. Ji, and Kctra^povetv, 
 viii. 8, KaracppoffiaapTes 'Ad-qvaiaii/ aSui^afj-laj/. 
 
 (&.) aiiToi. The armament, therefore, would consist of the third class^ or 
 f6U7rTai, and the fourth, or the eijrei. The Solonian classes were : 
 
 1. TrevTaKociofi^Si^vot, possessed of 500 medimni per ann. in corn, wine, or oil. 
 
 2. irnreTs, possessed of 300 medimni — capable of maintaining a war-horse. 
 
 3. ^€vyiTai, possessed of 200 medimni — capable of maintaining m. pair of 
 
 mules or oxen. 
 
 4. BriTis, all possessed of less than this sum. 
 
 Arn. calculates the medimnus at one bushel and a half, English measure, and 
 the price of corn 2 drachm£e per medimnus. See Bockh, JEcon. Athens, ii. 259, 
 E. T. Grote states the medimnus to be equal to about i| of the imperial 
 bushel; therefore 500 medimni = 700 bushels — 87^ quarters. 
 
 (c.) rhv wapiXoyov. Here apparently a substantive, as in i. 78, vi. 85 — 
 ' the contradiction to their expectations (or calculations) to be great. ' Seeing 
 a thing which was a great surprise to them,' Peile. S Tropo. Popp. refers 
 
 this to TO br\Qivra. — 'the charges (or injunctions) of the Mgtilenceans were dif' 
 ficult of execution.' Kriig. considers this interpretation ' strange,' and would 
 translate generally 'difficulties,' as ii. 3. Bead Grote, iii. 155—161. 
 TrepioiK^Sa— where their periceoi Wvei—' their frontier territory.' 
 
 Chapteb XVII. — iv Tois TrA-EicTTai. See note on i. 6. The remainder is 
 difficult — iyivonTO avTo7s. Sjua ivspyol KaA\€i seems to mean — 
 
 ' at the same time on active service in handsome trim.' ' Fatendum est bio dis- 
 plicere additum /caAAfi,' says Pop. Perhaps so, but the word is used with 
 that sort of fondness and pride common to nautical nations on such a topic. 
 
294 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book til. 
 
 GoU. makes a stronger connexion between ivfpyoi and xiAKft — 'effective from 
 good condition,' and Arn. (ed. ii.) approves of it. Bat tliis seems to me very 
 weak and tautological, nor could their xdWos be rightly called the cause of their 
 efficiency. Kiiig. suspects an error or lacuna in the text. Peile (ed. ii.) 
 renders — 'and at this time when the lOo ships were afloat they had for display 
 (or to show) one of the most numerous fleets that they ever had on service at the 
 same time.' Arnold's and GoU.'s version — 'in a state of effectiveness from their 
 good condition' — he rightly says, would require t^ xaWet. He considers 
 KaWei the dativus consilii — 'for show,' ' to make a show with.' r'fif 
 
 Tf yap 'ATTiKiiv K.r.K. The question is, do these words refer to the present 
 occasion — rhv \p6vov rovrov, or to apxofJ-^yov rov iroXefjiov ? Dale makes the 
 reference to the first. Pop. to the latter, because Thucyd. says nepl noriSatav 
 not TTepl Ae(r$ov, and he refers for t^v 'Attiktiv ^cpiKaffaoy to ii. 24, for trepl U. 
 eVepai eKaT6v, ii. 17, for Trep! UoriSamy, i. 57. 61. Arn. explains the apparent 
 inconsistency about the reserve of one hundred triremes (ii. 13. 24) by suppos- 
 ing that these were not laid up till late in the summer. There could not have 
 been 100 irepl Tiir 'ArTUciiv when the Piraseus was so nearly surprised. 
 uwaiid\a>cre. The preposition exerts its force as clam — 'secretly expended.' 
 Cf. Aristoph. SiSpaxi'^oi r.t.K. This is a locus classicns for Bockh 
 
 and others who have treated of the Athenian finance. See v. 47, viii. 29. 45. 
 5itiro\i6pK7iiTav — ' served througliout the whole siege' — e^eii/af eojs oAtitrcwv 
 T^s ir(i\Eais, Sch. -rhv ahrhv iit(rB6v. Bl. observes that this means, the 
 
 sailors and soldiers serving on board the fleet had a drachma per day, as being 
 without servants^ so vi. 31, SpaxfJ-^y ttjs T]fji4pas tijj vavrri fKaiTT^. Some editors 
 have drawn a distinction between sipepov pnuBSv, said in reference to the payers, 
 and icj>4povTo p.urd6v, said in reference to the recipients. But ^cpeaBai lua&by is 
 not found in Thucydides ; and for the active see Xen. Anai. i. 3. 21. 
 
 Chapteb XVIII. — (a.) 01 Ivlxovpoi. Those mentioned v. and vi. 
 ■trpohxf^p^i. Cf. i. 74. 
 
 (6.) ^KjSoTjfle/as — 'a sortie,' cf. i. 105. rauTo . . . KpaTOvvTas. 
 
 A similar case of a masculine participle in epexegesis to a neuter pronoun is 
 given by Kriig. from Soph. Fhiloc, 1355, irSs . . . | tout' ^{oi'oirx^o'ejfle, -rotatv 
 'Arpews [ ^jue ^vv6vTa Trattrtv ; 
 
 (c.) auTcpETai. See note on i. 10 and vi. 91, united in one predicate with 
 w\fi'(Tayres. 
 
 (d.) tyKaT<fKoS6nTiTai. This perfect following the pres. hist, seemed 
 to Poppo (ed. i. ) * intolerable * — an opinion apparently shared in by most 
 other editors. Arn. at first proposed to interpret it of the completion 
 of the towers, meaning, I suppose, * ivere flnished off,' as we say, but this 
 he has given up. I had myself thought reference might be parenthetically 
 made, not to the Athenian operations, but to some outworks of the town 
 already existing, or perhaps perfected by the Athenians before they connected 
 them by a wall. This was the way at least in which CiEsar surrounded 
 Pompey at Dyrrhaehium, as may be seen by the passage to which Arn. refers : 
 * Erant circum castra Pompeii permulti edlti atque asperi colles j hos primum 
 prtEsidiis tenuit castellaque ibi eommuniit,' &c. — Helium Civ. iii. 37. Pop, 
 (ed. ii.) seems to sanction the perfect, if I understand his somewhat obscure 
 
Ohap. 21.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 
 
 29s 
 
 note : ' Sententia est, ilia castella in locis natura jam munitis (et eA de causi 
 ad ilia recipienda idoneis) operi coutiauo quo urbs ciroumdaretur iuEedificata 
 esse— sicut turres apud Plataeas.' The h compounded with the verb refers 
 as Pop. and Kriig. say to the connexion of the fpoipia. with the airAoCi/ Ttlxos 
 —' built into the wall.' 
 
 Chaptee XIX. — (a.) Kal alirol i(rei'eyic6i/Tes. On the icripopk or 
 'voluntary contribution' of the citizens, as distinct from the (f>6pos or tribute 
 of the allies, consult the Diet, of Antiquities. Pop. thinks it uncertain 
 whether the ea-tpopa was now first instituted, or an icrcpoph of 200 talents 
 now demanded for the first time, airol is I think simply contrasted with ol 
 JwaX"') and does not refer to any previous contribution on their part. Krug. 
 is of opinion from xvii. that r6r€ -n-puTov may well refer only to the 
 present war. Ava-ixXia. Probably the Lysicles included by Aris- 
 
 tophanes in his list of post-PericIean demagogues {Eq. 132). He married 
 Aspasia after the death of Pericles. There is a very favourable account of him 
 in Mr. Lewes's Fericles and Aspasia. See too Plutarch, V. Penel. 24. Grote. 
 
 (J.) 'Kvai'iTav. Cf. iv. 75 and vili. 19. 
 
 Chapter XX. — €(r7]yt]iTafj.4vov, a sort of technical term, having ini- 
 tiated. See Xen. His. i. 6. 8. Kriig. cf. ^liri]yoiivTo ir6pov xprHJ-^Toiv, Polyb. xi. 
 25.8. Cf. also ^yoCfTo, inf. xxii. 4cTTpariiyii — equivalent to trrpa- 
 
 T-r]yhs ^v. is SiaKOcriovs. Pop. refers to Matthite, § 578, 
 
 who interprets is as ' about.' But surely Arn. is right in saying ' wp fo ' is the 
 meaning of is in this and all the other passages collected by Matth. 
 ^vve^€Tp-f](raifTO — mid. voice — ' computed.' Kriig. well compares ffviifieTpTjad- 
 fievoi T^j* Siprjv T^s 7j/j.4p-qSf Herod, iv. 158. ra7s iTrt^oAaT^ — ^layers' 
 
 Bl. cites an interesting parallel from Livy : ' Unus ex Romanis ex pro- 
 pinquo raurum contemplatus, numerando lapides, sestimandoque ipse secuin, 
 quid in fronte paterent singuli, altitudinem muri, quantum proxime conjectura 
 poterat, permensus' (xxv. 23), with which cf. Polybius, vii. 10. 5. 
 i^a\7i\ifi^fVov — a\€i(p€Lv, rh /copict ■x_pitiVj Eustath.; 'whitewashed' Bl.; 
 'thoroughly (e^) whitewashed' Arn. is % iffoiKovTo — 'for the 
 
 purpose thai they wished,' A. I prefer Pop. version — ' woraufsie hinwollten ' — 
 * so much of the wall as they wanted to see' Ka.Sopoip.ivov (tqvtov) is h rov 
 Tflxovs ifiovKovTo. ^vpL/j.erpria-ii' €\a/3o>'. This coincides nearly 
 
 with the English idiom 'to ta/ce the measure,' and the German 'ein Mass 
 nehmen,' but Poppo calls attention to its unusual occurrence in Greek, and 
 quotes Plut. Mmil. Paul. 15, pi.eB6Sai Kal 81' bpyai/tar elKrifimi SoKe7TT]y p.irpi)ini>. 
 
 Chaeteb XXI. — {a.) rfi o}KoSop.-li(rei. Arn. quotes with apparent ap- 
 probation, 'Pro olKoSofiia agnoscit Pollux, vii. 117,' Wass. But surely the 
 ■word is true to the meaning always attached to supposed derivatives from 
 the 2nd person of the perf . pass., ' its building,' i. e. its mode of construction. 
 Cf. last note. Sio toi/s TrepijStiXouj. The usual method (see a 
 
 similar description, Livy v. 4) but xviii. sup. states, TrepiTetx'C"'"^' MiniX-fiuriv 
 iv kukKo! aivK^ Tfixf'. 'Vide Causabon. ad Polyb. i8r, apud quem multa 
 Bunt quibus Thuoydidea Plataearum circumvallationis descriptio pulchre 
 
296 .NOTES ON THUCyOIDES. I^Booe III. 
 
 iilnstratur.' — Duker. oi/cij^aTo stands in the predicate — '/or 
 
 dwellincf -places assigned severally to the sentries,' Am. has asked, *Can it be 
 good Greek to say ri ^6Ta|u tovtq olicfifiaTa ^KoS6fj.7]To?' and decides in the 
 negative, after translating it, * this interval had been built upon to make 
 quarters.' But on the same principle which makes a verb between two nomi- 
 natives agree in number with the latter, we may argue that it also does so in 
 sense, and accordingly tfHoS6uriTO has a closer affinity to oiKitfuiTa than to t^ 
 ^eTa|u TovTo, Or we might translate — * this intermediate space had been built up 
 so as to become separate barrack rooms, and these were connected one with the 
 other,' oiK-f^fjiara in this case stands as the epexegesis of rh fiera^b tovtq, and I 
 see that Poppo now (in his last edition) has ' appositio quae sequitnr similis est 
 lis de quibus explicat Matthias, Gh-. Gh-. § 428. S-' Kriig. would refer {wex^ 
 not to t4 o'lK'liiiaTa, but to the walls themselves which these intermediate 
 oi/f^jLiora connected. 
 
 (b.) dia Se'/ca iTTci\^euf — ' at intervals of ten turrets {or pinnacles, battle^ 
 ments),' i. e. there were ten turrets between two of the greater towers. So Pop., 
 ' male, ad decimam quamque pinnam/ VaU, Port, Vig. p. 587, 'post dena-s 
 primas, interjectis denis pinnis.' irapoSov ii^ eJvai, The walls of the 
 
 ■rrvpyoi were built so close up to the two external walls that there was no room 
 to pass between them (i. e. outside of the 7rup7oj), but those who went along 
 the wall, passed through the towers. Cf. ai SioSoi Tav Tripytav, xxiii. 
 
 (c.) x^^f^^^ voTip6s. Arn. points out that the same thing is described 
 in xxii. by the words x^'M^P*''^ uSart KaX ave/up — 'wintry (i. e. stormy) weather 
 icitk rain,' Cf. x^t/i^v iv. 6, and x^^H-^^^^ Svtos — * a storm raging,' next chap. 
 
 Chaptee xxii. — (a.) \fi6<l>ip is governed by ai'TiiroToyotli'Tos. 
 rhv apKTTephv Tr^Sa 116 vov, Arn. understands this to mean that the right 
 foot was bared, to prevent slipping in the mud, and quotes Sir W. Scott — 
 
 ' Each better knee was bared to aid 
 The warrior in the escalade ;' 
 
 but the knee is not the foot, and scaling a wall is a very different matter from 
 walking in the mud. Grote (vi. 319) contends that the bare foot is very likely 
 to slip in the mud, and that such slipping might be prevented by sandals or 
 covering particularly adapted to that purpose. So we tie flannel round our feet 
 when walking on glaciers. He also urges with Wasse that the warrior who is 
 to use his right arm requires to have his left foot firmly planted. Perhaps 
 Arn. might have replied that the present was an affair of walking or running 
 and not ot fighting, and that ijl6vov discountenances Grote's idea. However 
 with respect to this passage I believe BI. to be in the right. ' As a further 
 proof of their lightness of equipment they were shod on one foot only, the left, 
 for security against the mire, while the right was left bare and unshod for 
 lightness.' That such was sometimes the case with the Greek soldiery he 
 proves from Eurip. Meleagr. Frag. 14 — 
 
 ol 5« &€(Triou 
 K6poi ri \athv tx^^^ avdp0v\ot iro5(fy, 
 rhv S' 4tf TTfSlXois ws 4Ka.(ppi^ov y6vv 
 
Chap. 22.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 297 
 
 The Latin writers furnish instances of leaving either foot bare. Thus the 
 Sanimtes (Livy ix. 40) had 'sinistrum crus oerea tectum.' But the legionaries 
 of PrjBneste — 
 
 ' Tegmen habent capiti : vestigia nuda sinistri 
 Instituere pedis, crudus tegit altera pero.' — ^n. vii. 690. 
 The passage from Arist. Zosi Poetics, if genuine (Macrob. Saturnal. v. iS), is 
 much to the point : Sel 7^^ oT/zoi Thv rtyoiiievov (the right foot) ^x*'" i'^'^fpi", 
 a\\' all Thv fn/iemfTa (the left foot). 
 
 (h.) ave^aivov—ayeffri. I have elsewhere discussed the distinction be- 
 tween the aorist and imperfect at length (Appendix II.). A.'s note, written 
 without the intention of supporting ant/ theory, is exactly in accordance with 
 that which I have endeavoured to maintain. ' The imperfect represents,' he 
 says, 'the party in the act of mounting the wall ; the aorist records the fact that 
 their commander was the first man to mount it.' 0/ ivdneyoi ej— 
 
 ' those who followed, that is to say, six.' See with Kriig. Xen. Anal. i. 2.3. 
 Kepa/ifSo— '^Ae tiling of the roof Bi. cf Mn. ix. 558, 'altaque certat pren- 
 dere teeta manu.' t}> lavi v—' the cause of the alarm.' 
 
 (e.) iSopv^oSi/To . . . nevovTfs — ' they caught the alarm, it is true, and 
 were ready to act in their several stations,' Arn. Karh xtipav. Cf. iiarii 
 
 X^pcLV iyeyovTo, next chap. 
 
 (d.) ot TpiaK6a-ioi. The article is objected to because there has been no 
 ' previous mention.' But surely the oh ireraKTo limits, defines, and points out 
 the individuals sufiiciently to justify the use of the definite article. Arn. well 
 compares viii. 15, ras fxetf okt^ ^S-q irefureiy, at airoAiiroStroi t^v tpvKaK-^v . . , 
 i.iiaKiX''P'hKe(Tav — wliere the latter clause performs the same defining ofiice for 
 the Tcts OKT^ vavs. 
 
 (c.) fppvKTol iro\4fjLioi — ' tvar beacons ;'' beacons to indicate the presence 
 of an enemy.' From this place, and Ixxx., Arnold (against the Schol. and 
 Polybius X. 40) infers the existence of considerable proficiency in the art of 
 signalling, for the beacons must have indicated something more than the 
 presence of an enemy (e. g. the nature and direction of his movements), or the 
 counter-lights of the besieged would have been useless. See what has been 
 said ii. 94. 
 
 (f.) irapavlffx^^ • • • '^"^f^s a<ra<pri toc trTj/ieta ^ . . , KaX fii] jSotj- 
 Bo7ev. Arn. considers that the subjunct. indicates the immediate, the optative 
 the secondary and more remote consequen.te of the action contained in the 
 principal verb. Peile objects — * it might witli more justice have been said that 
 the subjunctive represents the certain, the optative the possible, efiect of what 
 the Plataeans did.' But the truth is, that both come round to the same thing, 
 an immediate consequence being regarded naturally as more certain, a remote 
 one more in the light of a probability. The subject of the change of moods hag 
 certainly been well 'ventilated' of late years: by Matthia, § 518. 3; Arnold, 
 ad h. locum; Pflugk ad Eurip. Sec. 11 20; Hermann on Viger, p. 350 j 
 Tate on Dawe's Canons, Classical Museum, no. vi. ; Jelf, Ch: Or. § 809; 
 Blalcesley on Herodotus, lib. i. c. 9. Nevertheless as mere references are often 
 futile, I will submit ' oculis fidelibus,' for the benefit of the younger student, 
 some of the most remarkable instances of the idiom: Thucyd. vii. 17, vais at 
 KoplyBiot iirKiipouii, Unas naviiaLxiai re ct?roireipa(rcii(ri [the direct and imrae- 
 
29S NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 diate result, in their own power], xal tcis iA/tcCBos airm ^ixaov 01 ' hBTfvaioi 
 KwK^otev analpeiv [a secondary and contingent result — in their hopes]. Eurip. 
 Sec. II30 — ■ 
 
 ^Settra fji^ trol iro\4fiios \£i(\>di\s & irats 
 Tpolav adptiltrri Kal ^vvoiKitr-p irdKiu 
 
 [a direct consequence, and therefore regarded as very probable], 
 
 ytfoyrts S' 'Axoiol ^wvra UpiaiJuSuy Ttva 
 ^pvyuiv is aXav aiBis atponv ffr6\ov 
 
 [a result contingent upon the first, and therefore less certain]. 
 Similar is Herod, viii. 76 : rwi/Se i'iveK^v avriyov rks vijas, tva 5^ TotiTiv "EWTjfft 
 ixrfie (pvyiiiv i^fi [a result depending upon themselves which they could secure], 
 oaV aTro\apLtpd€VTis iv ttJ SaAa^uiz/i Zoliv ritriv K.r.X. [a result contingent upon 
 the fii'st, for which they hoped]. Compare id. ix. 51 : 'Iva /cai BSan Ixwiri 
 XPTi(T6aij KoX 01 tTTTrces tripeas fiij frtvolaro [the first being a result which 
 they could count on much more securely than the second]. On the same 
 principle is to be explained id. i. 53, iiretpajrav ra XP'^^'^'^P^^ ** cTpaTeuTjToi 
 iirl Xleptras [the first thing to be done, and in his own power], Kal €? Tiva 
 arparhv Avipav irporrfleoiTo (pi\ov [a second thing, contingent upon the first, and 
 depending on the will of others]. Compare with this the long passage from 
 Xen. Cyrop. ii. 4. 10 quoted Jelf s Qr. Or. § 839. 4. b. Poppo has two refer- 
 ences in the Latin language — 
 
 ' Maia genitum demittit ab alto, 
 
 Ut terrce atque uosm pateant Carthaginis arces 
 
 Hospitio Teucris, ne fati nescia Dido 
 
 Finibus arceret.' — ^n. i. 298 ; 
 
 and Plautus, Miles Olor. ii. i. 52: 'Dedi tabellas meroatori, qui ad ilium 
 deferat . . . ut is veniret.' See the commentators, &c. quoted by Forbigeron the 
 former passage. On the circumstances see Grote, vi. 320. I have written a 
 long note, because despite the ' magni nominis umbra ' of Hermann, I cannot 
 accept as a full account of the matter his remark on Viger (p. 350) : ' Ob- 
 servandum optativum prajsentibus jungere antiquos et diligentes scriptores ubi 
 finem indicant hunc esse, non ut quid fiat sed ut quid possit fieri.' See note 
 supra, xi. di'TiAo/SoicTO — Wt.got hold of, therefore, ' secured their 
 
 safety.' Cf. iv. 128, vii. 60. 
 
 ChaPTEE XXIII. — (a.) 01 Si iTrep^alfOVT^s . . . {nreps$atvoy, 'This 
 is another instance of the subject being first stated universally, and then 
 divided into its several parts, and of the nominative case being used to express 
 both the whole subjects.' See Pop. Proleg. i. 107. Am. tr. — • the scaling party,' 
 because it includes those who had not yet mounted. Cf. supra, iv. 
 Zi6hovs — ' doorways in the toiver,' like a college gateway. 
 
 {b.) &tiu6eii. Because some had clambered up to the top of the towers. 
 Kir wdev— from the basement story of the towers. Krug. connects dirh rStv 
 iriipytiiif with elpyov — ^ihey kept off the enemy, as they pressed forward, from 
 the towers, by discharging volleys at them from above and below.' t^s 
 
 rdippov — ' the outer ditch.' ku\vt^s ylyvoLTo — 'prove an impediment.' 
 
Chap. 25.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDKS. 299 
 
 Somewhat stronger than KaiKioi, but cf. with Pop. i. 35, viii. 86, and finwr^s 
 7(7i'€Tai, i. 132. tA yv/j.v a— 'their unprotected side.' 
 
 XaXeTTMs Kn! Plata! — ' mith difficulty and hard pressed ly the foe.' Cf. ii. 33. 
 oTos a7r7)\(i4Tou ^ Sopeju — ' such as usually is found when the wind is east 
 instead of north.' Sohol. Arn. who follows liim, makes an ellipse of fiuWov 
 before ^ as in the line i/j.ol irixpis reBi/riKev, ij xelmis yAvKvs {Ajax, 966), and I 
 suppose connects the second /uaA.Xoi' with uSaTtuSijj — 'rather watery.' The 
 expression Is certainly awkward. It appears from the Constantinople Scholiasts 
 and others that the north wind brought snow and frost, the east wind soft 
 weather and thaw. Therefore why is the ice described as uSariiSris under two 
 opposite conditions of atmosphere ? A. gets rid of the difficulty as above ; 
 but GoU. objects, iriKphs like some other adjectives stands as a comparative, 
 and is no support to this passage. Dobree strikes out ^ ^apiov as a gloss. 
 Poppo suggests that iiaXKov has been transposed, or iS5aT!<iS7js introiluoed as a 
 gloss, but acquiesces in A.'s interpretation. GoU. retains the reading of the 
 text, supposing an iSaTc^Sij! frost probable with either wind. This is re- 
 jected by Arn. , but I think he misunderstands the argument. ' Under what 
 wind,' he says, ' could it [the frost] take place, if it could neither be with an 
 east wind nor a north ? ' We might I suppose reply, under no wind at all. 
 Frost takes most effect when there is no agitation of the atmosphere ; these two 
 winds, north and east, are specified because, as the most prevalent, they most 
 frequently converted the frost into a slushy state. I therefore believe that 
 Thucyd. intended a comparison between frost in a calm atmosphere and 
 frost with these winds, not between such frosts as severally accompany them. 
 Kriig. agrees with Arn. virovinpo^ivi} — ' partially besnowed (or 
 
 accompanied by partial snow). 
 
 (c.) % fi6\is K.r.X. — *& may be governed by ^irepaiaOrifrav, as the case is 
 sometimes accommodated to the finite verb rather than to the proximate parti- 
 ciple. Cf. iv. 24, vi. 87. But uTrepfxt'" also occasionally takes an accusative.' 
 — Pop. See Lid. and S. 
 
 Chaptek XXIV. — (a.) rh tou 'AvSpoKparovs rip^ov. Near the foun- 
 tain of Gargaphia, as we learn from Herod, ix. 35. He was one of the Platasan 
 tutelary heroes, such as were invoked by Archidamus, ii. 74, and is mentioned 
 as such by Plutarch, Aristides, 325. Wass. 
 
 (5.) T^v irphs KtBaipava. The student who would investigate the topo- 
 graphy of the places mentioned here, must refer to Sir W. Gell's map and 
 memoir appended to A.'s third volume. 
 
 (e.) \a$6fi.evoi. tuv bpSiv — 'having taken to the hills' (as our idiom is). 
 The middle force is the same as that of afriKa/illavSiJ.evos in xxii. Erythraa 
 and Hysiffi were not Plataean towns, but as the Schol. says Sri/ioi Boiarms. 
 KOTO X"'?'"' ij^vovTO — 'return to their quarters' See xxii. 
 
 {d.) ia-irivSovTo. Note the imperfect force. See note on i. 134. Not 
 often, as here, followed by an accus., but cf. cix. and cx\Y.—a.vax<ipntriv 
 o-7reV5E<reo'. toTs piKpoli—'for the dead,' dat. of object. 
 
 Chapter XXV.— (a.) SaAaiflos A AaKeSaifj.6vios. 'The use of the 
 article here gives I suppose ,. certain distinction to the individual namei ind 
 
300 NOTES ON THDCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 implies that he was, or ought to be known, in and for himself.' — Ai-n. 
 Refer to 'KyncrtTTriSaD rhv AaxedatiiSvioy, f. $2, viii. 35. Pop. Kriig. objects 
 to it. 
 
 (b.) x^piSpa;/ — 'the dry bed of a toatercourse,' which here must have been 
 of considerable depth, as it was large enough to interrupt the Athenian wall of 
 circumvallation. So Am., but it is probable from the word vwfp&aT'bii that the 
 works were not entirely interrupted; the difficulty of the ground, it is likely, 
 produced some defect in the constmction of which Sala;tbus availed him- 
 self. Oi reffffap6.K0VTa — cf. xvi. •7;^oj' r^v yvwti7\v — 'turned 
 their thoughts (or rather entertained any such notion as surrender).' Bl. cf. v. 
 44; Xen. Andb. ii. 5. 29. 
 
 Chapteb XXVI.— (a.) t4s is MutiA'^kiji' — 'destined for Mytilene.' I 
 agree with Kriig. that the construction is anriffTeiKav 'AXxiiav exovra tols .... 
 vavSf irpoaTd^afTes — * having appointed him to this command (or imposed this 
 duty upon him),' cf. vi. 93, vii. 19, viii. 23. The other ed. are not clear upon 
 the point. At any rate Stephens's conjecture ipxovra is needless. 
 Sio Kal rfacrapoLKOvTa. They were described as forty only (xvi. xxv.). 
 Am. supposes that the additional two formed the Spartan contingent, which 
 in such cases was always small j Pop. that in the former instances the historian 
 spoke only in round numbei's. veurtpov ^ti — ' still under aye.* 
 
 Pop. compares vtdrepos is ri &px€ii^t vi. 12. See i. 107. On Pleistoanax see 
 ii. 21, v. 16. 
 
 (i.) [koI] el Ti iBf$Ka(rT-liKei. The Kol seems universally condemned. 
 Poppo and GoU. deny that in this collocation it can stand for adeo or efiam, and 
 that therefore we must not render. — 'even to the very shoots which had sprung 
 up since the last inroad.' GoU. declares that the words would have this meaning 
 without Kai, which indeed is true, though scarcely conclusive that they cannot 
 have it with xai. Arn. suggests an explanation which Pop. characterizes as 
 'wonderful.' If, he says, the Athenians had planted their land again, there 
 would be (i) the new crops, (2) anything that had sprung up of itself, such as 
 shoots of cut-down trees, (3) the places previously untouched, all of which the 
 Pelop. might now ravage. He acknowledges, however, that in this case he 
 would have preferred /to! eif ti koI i&. Haack supposes that rk Trp6Tfpov 
 Ter/j.rip.et'a is intended to be divided into and more fully explained by the 
 two clauses, Kal it ti ^/3tj8. . . . koL '6aa k.t.X. But this Pop. and G. observe 
 is negatived by the presence of re after ra, ra re irpdrepov k.t.K. Pop. ob- 
 serves that this word, as well as PePKaffvai, /SedXairc^^^Ti/CE (in Demosth.), 
 $f$\a<rTnKivai (Hellenic Frag. 2) and i$(P\a(rTl]Kei (Lucian. Tar. H. i. 31), 
 all refute the remark of Buttmann in his larger Grammar that the perf. pass. 
 fieffXaiifiai is the only instance of reduplication before p\. 
 
 (c.) iwi^fiKBoi'. Pop. objects to this, and would read ^7r^\flo>', ' adierttnt,' 
 but surely 4ire^ri\Soi> is right — ' toent regularly through the district.' The 
 Schol. explains iTreSpa/ion. 
 
 Chapteb XXVII. — iirAfffi— not simply ' arms,' ii\it' mahes them hoplites,' 
 thereby also raising their social status. icoTck ^vK\6yovs yiyvi- 
 
 liivoi. See note on ii. 21, Kara ^v(rr(i(rei^ yiy. 
 
Chap. 30.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 301 
 
 Chafter XXVIII. — (a.) 01 4v to"!! ■Kpiyjj.aatv — 'those in the administra- 
 tion of affairs.' Cf. Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. joi, eItoi air^ aniJiitov 
 TO. Trp6<rava rSv 4i> tois Trpdyficuriv, and Ixxii. KivSvyfia-ovTis 
 
 must be referred back to yvoyTes. Krug. 
 
 (o.) irpeaffslav St. As Aflji^/atois ftti/ had preceded, we should have ex- 
 pected MuTiA.7)vo(o«5 5e', but the intervening words Kai ri/v . . . Sfx^a-Bai mroiis 
 change the collocation. Pop. 
 
 ^ (c.) 3/iws — sc. notwithstanding the pledges of Paches. Pop. quotes as 
 similar instances of ' breviloquentia,' i. 105, ii. ji, iii. 49, iv. 96. We may 
 compare the use of ' tamen ' in Latin, ' Retraham herclji opinor, ad me idem 
 illud fugitivum argeutum tamen.' — Ter. Seaut. iv, 2. 11. 
 
 (a.) So-T€ njj aSiK^irai. On ffia-re signifying 'upon condition of,' see 
 Matthias, § 629; Jelf, § 863; and Demosthenes, 68. 11, ii'ov airoTs ray 
 Xamaiv &pxety 'Z\\-iiyu>y &<!r' outoi/j iwaKoi^iy fiainheT, 'when it was in their 
 power to rule over the Greeks upon the condition that they would themselves 
 submit to the King of Persia ;' also infra, xxxv. 
 
 Chaptee XXIX. — (o.) Tohs ix TTJj 7r6?\.eas 'ABTiyaiovs. Haacli sup- 
 poses these to be, either some Athenians accidentally present in Delos, or those 
 in the thirty ships mentioned in xvi. as employed upon the coast of Pelo- 
 ponnesus. 
 
 (6.) 'iKtipcp Kal MvK6ycp — inverting the order in which they would he 
 reached. But it is not worth while either to transpose or to read Xldp(p for 
 'iKapip, for, as Pop. shows, the ancient historians were not very precise in such 
 matters, e.g. eueii t^j 4>a(r^)XiSos Kal Kaiyov, viii. 88, and 'Tarentino Brun- 
 disinoque fcedere,' Tac. Ann. i. 10. 
 
 (c.) "'Eff.^aroy — ri) anv'by rb /i6Ta|i' 'Kiov Kal 'EpvOpas. 
 
 (d.) T^ MvTt\-fiV7} eaAwKuf^E — ' seven days had elapsed from the capture 
 of Mytilene.' On this not uncommon idiom cf. Matthise, § 388, and Jelf. 
 
 (e.) ^K ray TrapSyrwy — 'as they best could under the circumstances,' a 
 very common phraseology (iv. 17, v. 87, vii. 62). 
 
 CpAPTEB XXX. — (a.) 'A\KlBa .... Trdpea-fiev — '0 Aloidas, and as 
 many of us Peloponnesians as are here present.' The grammarians have in- 
 vented the term Koivaxris to express this combination of the first and second 
 persons. 
 
 (i.) iKiria-Tovs corresponds to what in vulgar slang is called blown upon 
 — ' before our presence comes to be Tcnown.' Pop. compares iv. 70, viii. 42, and e|- 
 dyyeAToi yeviadai, viii. 14. Sxrirep ^x^f^" i^ *<> ^'^ taken, of course, 
 
 with Tr\i7y — 'just as we are, without stopping to maTce any alteration,' therefore 
 'directly; 'at once.' See Hermann ad Fhiloct. 808. In i. 134, So-Trep elxcv 
 is used more in its primary sense, but see viii. 41, 42, and Xen. An. iv. j. 19. 
 avSpav y^uffrl ix^'"^""- I'ormerly Pop. considered this passage to prove 
 that the word ayhp may be used without the article to designate a definite 
 individual. Without seeing GoU.'s remarks, I demurred, because I believed 
 the whole to mean— '/or in all probability we shall find the want of pre- 
 caution great, as is the ease with men when they have just got possession of a 
 town;' cf. just below, i>s K(Kpa.rrjK6rwv—' as is the case with victors.' To the like 
 
302 NOTES ON THUCVDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 effect GoU. — ' magnam in eustodiis negligentiam inveniemus, qualis est hominum,' 
 &c. Pop. has probably changed his opinion, as he says nothing about it in his 
 small edition. Krug. makes avSpav the gen. after rh iupi\aicTov — ' the careless- 
 ness of menwhen the^ have Just got possession.' ii(i\t<rTa. od(ra. 
 Kriig. conjectures airovcra, because the Peloponnesians were notoriously defec- 
 tive in this arm of the service. But a\Kii is ' aid,' 'succour,' and the words of 
 the speaker have only reference to the special occasion, rvyxdvn oiaa.. 
 
 (e.) t!) Kaivhv [rh Keviiii'] Tov iTo\eiJLOu. The MSS. vary between the 
 two readings, with a slight preponderance in favour of the former, rh xaiyhv is 
 ' the unexpected,' and therefore what in military speech would be called ' a sur- 
 prise.' Pop. compares 'snbita belli,' Liv. vi. 32, and 'quod in bello novum 
 vel inexpectatuni accidit,' Tacit. Mist. v. 13. Tr. therefore — 'this is a case of 
 mhat people mean hy the unexpected accidents of war.' On the other hand, rb 
 Kivhv refers to the empty, baseless, or groundless alarms, panics, which some- 
 times occur in armies. See Xenoph. Anab. ii. 2. 20 : Xlpo'iovtrris rris vvkt6s, 
 To7s "EWriffL <p6^os ^iJ.Tri7rTet, Kal 66pv$os Kal Souttos •tiv, olov e'iKhs <p6^ov 4/j.ne- 
 aSvTos yiyveaSai. The generals assuage the alarm by pretending that an ass 
 had got loose among the baggage. In the Peninsula this did occur to the rifle 
 brigade, and some of the camp followers ran without stopping for miles, and 
 then protested that they did not quit the regiment until it was cut up to a 
 man (see Captain Kinoaid's Narrative). GoU., with his usual overwrought 
 subtlety, argues against rh Kiviv, because a panic is not a panic until it has 
 happened, and then it cannot be helped ! as if all such expedients as that re- 
 corded by Xenophon were impossible ; or as if organization and discipline did 
 not prevent panics from being caused among well-trained troops by circum- 
 stances which would have produced them among others. 
 
 (d.') % ft Tis (TTparriySs — sc. ri /toi>'(f>' — ' which [i. e. and this^ if a general 
 guard against it in himself, and when he sees it in his CTiemy, talces occasion to 
 attacTc, he will be most successful in his profession.' This way of speaking is, I 
 think, intelligible enough, and need not have occasioned difficulties. Cf. with 
 Kriig. ii. 60. 
 
 Chapter XXXI. — ^AirfSa 5* ilvai . . . ZatnivTi yiyvTjrai. This is 
 perhaps the most difficult passage in Thucydides. It is no sinecure for a con- 
 scientious editor to make himself master of the very many pages in different 
 languages which have been written upon it. This I have endeavoured to do, 
 but without any commensurate result in the shape of positive conclusions. 
 One may, however, learn a good deal negatively from the numerous questions 
 which have been raised, e. g. that ((poppiav differs radically from i(popiifiv, and 
 cannot here be considered as anything else than irruere, its more proper 
 me.ining in the middle voice; that aurots by the laws of the language can only 
 refer to the Athenians, and (r<pl<nv to the speakers ; that ijv cannot be equiva- 
 lent, as some would have it, to Iva, but if it could be so used at all in prose, 
 must be accompanied by iroij or Kal; that the proper meaning of Sairdpri /iot 
 yiyifirai is, ' it becomes a source of expense to me,' and not it becomes a means of 
 meeting expenses, whatever may be found in Harpocration of contrary im- 
 port; and that the apodosis to a sentence cannot be introduced by te, as 
 
Chap. 31.] NOTES l.'N THUCYDIDES. • 303 
 
 would be the ease if welaeiv re oU(r6ai were — ' then they thought they would be 
 able to persuade,' as A. at first thought. With respect to interpretations : (i) 
 Am. now gives up the passage, (a) Bloomfield and Haack suppose an aposio- 
 pesis (like that after ^v /ikv ivfi$y 7\ Trf7pa, iii.) to follow ytyv-riTai, and 
 introduce the word ' well.' But this may be dismissed at once without going 
 further, as the passage fulfils none of the conditions of an aposiopesis. See supra, 
 iii. Poppo (3) reads, a.no(TT-^<Tua'iv, (^ATTiSa S' ^Ivar ovSeAyap aKoufflui aiplx^t^f'h) 
 Kiu T^i/ irp6auSoif Taiirrii/ fxiylaTriv oZcrav ^AdTjyaiaji* 7)1/ v(pi\w(n, koX a/xa ^v 
 f(l3oou.w(TLv auTois o'tpiai Sa-wdvq yiyvTjTai ; and renders — ^ that ihey should in- 
 duce Ionia to revolt {and there were great hopes of it, for iheh — i. e. their own 
 and the Pelop. — coming had been disagreeable to no one in those parts), and that 
 they should withdraw [i. e. I suppose, ' tJiat they should see if it be not possible 
 to withdraw '~\ from the Athenians this their greatest source of revenue, and at 
 the same time expense should fall upon the Athenians (auro7s) when they as- 
 sailed them {i<popix.S:tnii, particip. from i<popiidui).' This rests upon the possi- 
 bility of considering that ^v — to see if a thing can be done, may be equivalent 
 to Iva. — that it be done. Two passages are quoted in confirmation from Aris- 
 tophanes ; one of which [Mance, 175) has another better reading; and the 
 second {Acharn. 1044) — Xff avTiBoKH tr', ^1/ irois Koixiaoifxai ri ^6e — has irais 
 subjoined, and may be explained by an ellipse of <rice'fi(iixe6a, or something 
 of the sort. This Pop. himself sees, and therefore we need not insist on 
 this view. It is of course open to us to read 'Im as Dobree conjectured. (4) 
 Schomann takes the same view, with the additional advantage of going quite 
 wrong upon the pronouns aurois and trcpicn. (s) Goller reads as above, except 
 that he strikes out <r(jiia-i, seeing no other possible remedy. He then renders 
 as before to aiprxfloi, and proceeds (placing a stop at vtpeKaa-i)—' if they could 
 withdraw this greatest source of revenue from the Athenians, and if at the same 
 time while the Athenians were bloclcading them, they [the Athenians] shouldfind 
 the expense upon their own shoulders.' He attaches this force to airoTs ipsis, 
 considering that the lonians meant to iusinuate that they now ' paid the piper.' 
 (6) It was originally suggested by Hermann, and has since been maintained by 
 Gerhard, as also by Haase {Lucubrationes Thucyd. p, 6), that the passage 
 should stand, iWiU 5' flvai, oiSevl yap axovaicos atpTx^'^', k"'^ -^V Trp6(roSov . . . 
 fiv i,popfi.oiaiv avToTs SaTrciv,, ir^iVi yiynrai. Tlie whole in this case exhibits two 
 separate reasons for the iK-ris; the first in the fact that the lonians had wel- 
 corned them ; the second in that which would be the fact, if the great source of 
 Athenian revenue could be drawn away, and the Athenians put to expense. 
 Tlie singular change in the way of stating the two clauses is supposed to be 
 paralleled by v. .^o, ^tim^-to t^v te i(T^yn<nv tov ■^a.vT6s, Kai ei 'Apydois |u/i- 
 ftayoi ^o-oyrai, and iv. 85, eavfxdCa S4, rp te iiroicK^trei /lov rZv -nvhUv, kuX ei ,i1) 
 kaiivo^s ii.^-i" a^'W«- But (Poppo argues) if Thucydides had meant this, he 
 surely would have written, as in the above examples, oCSe;./ Tiya.p... kuI k.t.K. 
 Neither does this explanation remove the difficulties concernmg <T^i,n. And 
 thirdly the occupation of a single city could not be described as the cutting off 
 r9,s ^po.6iov ra.ir^s ^^yt<rrvs oii<rvs. (?) It is scarcely necessary to record 
 Schneider's version-' damit sie lonien zum Abfall bewogen dazu aber Hofl- 
 nung sei. denn Niemanden sei ihre Ankunft unwillkommen) und diese Em- 
 
304 • NOTES OK THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 kiinfte, die grOssten der Athener, ihnen entzogen, zugleich aber selbst, zogen sie 
 gegen jene, den Kostenaufwand batten.' This it will be observed ignores the 
 Ijv before iKpiKanri — * cause Ionia to revolt and abstract the greatest source' &c., 
 and makes Sairduii ^ means of expenditure ; — 'and at the same timet should 
 they attack the others, to get the means of carrying on the war.' (8) Dr. 
 Peile has favoured me with a version, which I subjoin in his own words : no! 
 T^v np6(7ohov Tairijv ^^yiffTTiV oZffav *Adi}paiuv fjv y^eAcuo't, koX a/jLa, ^v i<popfj.w(ri 
 frtpiaiVf axiTois Sa'rrdvT]!' yiyviffdal, ireiffeiy re oKeaQat KOL Tlia<TOv&VT]v Stiffre |u^iro- 
 \Ejuei^. Such is I believe the best reading of this perplexing passage, on the 
 authority of two Parisian and one Parmese MS,, only placing the comma after 
 <r<piiTty rather than after iipopiiSiai. The clue which unravels the whole 
 sentence is to be found I think in the construction of oSirai', which (as in 
 the case of the words i^ "iToXfos koI SixEXfas, ii. 7) in reference to what pre- 
 cedes ought to have been elvai, whereas it is oZffav, as if t^i/ irpdffodov had 
 been the accusative after {np^Kuffi. Translate — ' and that this [Ionia] ^vas an 
 important source of revenue of the Athenians for them to cut off if they can 
 [literally, that this will be cut off, if they shall succeed in cutting it off, being 
 an important income of the Athenians; as if it had been in\)atpiQ^a^adai 
 oZaav K.T.A.] ; and at the same time [a further collateral advantage], if they 
 [the Athenians] blockade them [the Peloponnesians] they would themselves be 
 incurring expense all the time [such is the force of yiyvtaBai the pres.] ; and in 
 that case [the coast of Asia being attacked] he thought they might prevail upon 
 Fissuthnes also to help them in the war.' Compare a sentence of similar form 
 and meaning iv. 3 : ol 5€ troWas stpaaav ^Ivai &Kpas ^p^juous rijs UeKonovifiiffov, 
 ^v $o'u\i]Tai KaTa\afjt$df(i}y T^y iri^iy Sairapat' — * btit they said that there were 
 many undefended promontoi'ies of the JPeloponnese for him to occupy [KoTa\a/i- 
 fidfeiv, or &s /caraAa/A/Sai/??] if he wishes by occupying them to put the state to 
 charges.' I will only add that this appears to me at least as plausible as any 
 of the others. Kriig. supposes <T<l>l<n may be referred to the Athenians, but is 
 rightly so doubtful about it as to enclose the word in brackets. Might not all 
 the difficulty have arisen from an accidental transposition of airois and acpitri ? — 
 i.e. 'if when the Athenians were blockading them [Lac], the expense mightfall on 
 themselves [Ath.].' This supposes us to read ipopfiouffif, the -fi.iiirii' having 
 arisen from a careless assimilation to ^c ii<p4\iiiin. rh TrXeio-Tov 
 
 TT)S yiiil>it.i\s — ' his principal purpose.' Cf. iv. 34,toD Bapaiiv rb irKstiTTOv. 
 TTis yiiiTt\-fiv7]s inTTep-fjKfi — 'had come too late for Mytilene,'i,e.fov its 
 rescue. Cf. with Kriig. iarepeiv ttjs TrarplSos, Xen, Ag, xi. i. 
 
 CnAPTEE XXXII. — (a.) Mvai'i'^<ri)> — originally a small rocky peninsula 
 (tijiroi), much infested by mice (fivts). There is a description of it Livy xxxvii. 
 27. (cari ttAoCi' — sine articulo. Cf. i. 8. tmv i^ 
 
 'Ayaiiij/ — i. e. the exiles residing there, who were hostile to the existing state 
 of things at home, and to the Athenians. Cf. iii. 19 and iv. 75. 
 ei SifipOfipcy — 'expectes forsitan ti Siatt>6fipot aut ei Siatpddpet.' — Pop. The 
 first would be—' should he destroy,' a pure hypothesis. The second — ■ if he be 
 now destroying,' conveying an idea of the incompleteness of the action, el 
 St4(p9eipfv, the aorist and indicative, is right both in mood and tense — 'if, as is 
 thr. case, he has destroyed)' indicative, because said of a fact, not a supposition ; 
 
Chap. •34.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 305 
 
 aorist, because the speaker wishes to point more to the fact having occurred 
 than to define the time of its oocurreuce. Kriig. simply says, The past tense, 
 because el is almost equivalent to ewtl. 
 
 (c.) ^ATr(Sa — '!iad no expectation, even the slightest.' On this use of ^^.ttIs 
 see note i. ., and vii. 61. ^^ • ■ ■ ■!TapaPa\e7v. On this, sometimes 
 
 called the redundant negative, cf. i. 16. I agree with Krug. in thinking that 
 the napk in composition with the verb conveys some notion of risk, as c. g. 
 where it is coupled with KLvSweio), ToAu^troi TrapaKiv5uvfv(Tai, xxxvi. 
 
 Chapter XXXIII. — (a.) <pvyiii> iiroifTro — 'made a flight of it,' i. e. his 
 retreat was so precipitate as to amount to a flight. 
 
 (6.) Ilap. Kal 2a\. These two galleys, the swiftest and best appointed in 
 the Athenian fleet, are occasionally described as ' sacred,' from being employed 
 upon saci'ed missions to Delos, and elsewhere. Their other duties were to carry 
 despatches and prisoners, to collect tribute, and to serve as admiral's vessels in 
 action. See Diet. Antiq. The Saliminia was sometimes called Delia, and 
 sometimes Theoris. Of. iii. 77, vi. 53, 61, viii. 73. 74. 
 
 (c.) Trep! K\dpov. Popp. convinced by the arguments of A. and others, 
 now withdraws his conjecture "iKopop, admitting that Claras is a well-known 
 place in Ionia, between Myonnesus and Ephesus, and therefore lying in the 
 route of Alcidas. 
 
 (d.) Sia Tov ve\dyovs — ' through the open sea,' n. grent feAt for nSLYigSitors 
 of that era, who, from want of the compass, almost always skirted the coast. 
 Cf. infra, Ixix. 
 
 (e.) oTeixfirTou. See Herod, vi. 32. After their unsuccessful revolt 
 against Persia, the Ionian cities had been stript of their fortifications. These 
 were subsequently rebuilt by the Athenians, viii. 14. 84. 
 
 (f.) Kal SiSfi.e. o'liTus — 'even though only en route,' or, as Kriig. — 'even 
 though the unprotected state of Ionia invited attack.' ana 
 
 -rpoa-TrltrToi'Tes — 'while touching at them.' Peile quotes from Luci an okouoi'ti 
 lieTa^v TTJs direiA^s. We may add, even still more appropriately, the same word 
 with a participle: /ierajo eiaiv ; Kal -ris aSff upelXeTo; — Ar. Mance, 1177. 
 o u T 07 7 € \ 1 — 'the announcers of their own approach, the first to announce their 
 own approach.' 
 
 (g.) e(paiveTO k.t.A. — sc. classis hostium, or Alcidas, their admiral— 
 ' appeared capable of being caught,' lit. come within catching. But, as this fleet 
 has not lately been mentioned. Pop. prefers to consider i(l>. as impersonal, and 
 compares vi. 6o. Tlie rest means—' he considered it as so much gained [lucro 
 apposuit] when he did not light upon them, out at sea, thai they had not been 
 caught near any harbour, lohere they toould have been compelled to construct a 
 camp, and- so impose upon his oton fleet the necessity of guarding and blockading 
 them': On i-pop. cf. ii. 89, iii. 31- '^^^ '^^ ^^^^"^ aTpaT6ir(Sov is more thaa 
 suspicious. 
 
 Chaptee XXXIV.— (a.) KoKo(pavla>v. On Colophon, situated on a hill, 
 see Diet, of Ancient Qeog. Notium, as the name imports, 'south,' or 'New 
 Colophon,' on the low ground, was about two miles from the old town, which 
 .IV further inland ; it was, in fact, the port of the former. Bl. compares Lcith 
 '■' X 
 
3o6 
 
 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 and Edinburgh. See Grate, vi. 332. Kara, (rriaiv ISlav — vulg. 
 
 ' along of a private dispute,' — domestic sedition. When the Colophonian aristo- 
 crats called in the Persians, the opposite party settled at Notium. These sigain 
 split up into two factions ((rTo(ri<i(roi'T6j), of which the more oligarchical obtained 
 Persian aid, and so succeeded in expelling the democracy. They also hired 
 Arcadian mercenaries and barbarians, and fortified themselves in a citadel, or 
 Siarefx'"'^'' — ^ place walled off from the rest of the town. See Xen. Sell. 
 i. 24. Bl. compares Livy xxi. 11,' Vallo urbem ab arce intersepire.' Cf. Sio- 
 (fpay^oTi, i. 133. 
 
 (b.) 01 KciTa(f)vy6i/T€s Kal KaroiK-iifTavTts. The same persons, ac- 
 cording to Granville Sharp's canon. iiroX'nivov — became citizens, * con- 
 stituted themselves part of the community ' i. e. they and the reactionary party in 
 Notium now called themselves 'the Colophonians.' {nrt^iK66vris 
 Toirovs — 'having withdrawn from before these.' Kriig. says an unusual con- 
 struction, as vwoxupfTv Sx^""' "• ^8, is something different. 
 
 (c.) S Se TrpotrxaK. This should, if the construction were regular, have 
 been followed by iis ^{ij^flej/. But, as Kriig. observes, for the sake of the anti- 
 thesis we have an anacolouthon, which is by no means harsh, as ' Paches ' 
 continues the principal subject. o-tSf Kal u^ia — ' safe and sound,' 
 
 * sospes et immunis.' On &im, cf, supra, xxvii. (pv\aKij aSctrficii — 
 
 * custodia libera.' Duk. Lipsius ad Tac. ^w». vi. 2. Kararof eij€i. 
 
 ' Of this species of fraud, founded upon literal performance and real violation 
 uf an agreement, there are various examples in Greek history, but nowhere do 
 we read of a more flagitious combination of deceit and cruelty than the behaviour 
 of Paches at Notium. How it was noticed at Athens we do not know, but we 
 may remark, not without surprise, that Thuc. recounts it plainly and calmly, 
 without a single word of comment.' — Grote, vi. 331. o'lKiaras. Not 
 
 'coloni,' as we see from the termination. This would be olxiiTopes. Pop. 
 rightly explains, 'Conditores, duces colonias, quos Athenienses Colophoniis ut 
 colonis suis praefecerunt.' Cf. i. 24, iii. 92. Kara roi/s k.t.K. Upon 
 
 the usual principles of connexion between a mother city and its colony; on 
 which see Diet, of Antiq. 
 
 Chaptee XXXVI. — (a.) Ta t€ &\\a. ' Expectaveris forsitan 6,XKa Te,' 
 Pop., who, however, explains — • as well as all the other proposals he is known to 
 have made.' The article is employed as in the usual formula, for the sake of 
 a more distinct and antithetical emphasis on an-a|eii/ TleXo-n. 
 
 (b.) eSoJei" ouTois . . . i-KiKaiKovvTts. One of the usual anacoloutha. 
 iinKa.\ovvTiS follows as if i'^'iicpi^ot/ or i^ovKevixavro had preceded. 
 
 (c.) TT)!/ T€ S^Arjv. The t€ stands here because Thuc. was about to add 
 Kol T^ Tos n. vavs ToK^rifTai k.t.K., but inadvertently substituted another form 
 of expression. Pop. apx'^M"''" — ' in the position of subjects' 'Non 
 
 duhium enim est, quin Thucyd. ad ea respiciat, qua? Mytilensei supra x. dicunt, 
 sibi . . . libertatem relictam, sed plerisque ceteris soeiis servitutem impositam 
 esse.' — Duk. 
 
 {d.) iTpoa-^vvi8d\fTo (Am., Bekker, GoU., and most MSS.), irpoir|u«. 
 0d\ovTo (Pop. ed. ii.), npa<r^viif\a0ovro (Bloomf., with some MSS. and most 
 editors). That there is some difficulty in selecting may be inferred from the 
 
Chai. 36.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 307 
 
 fact that Pop. has changed his mind four times about the reading. Arn gives 
 the sense of the passage correctly. ' The Peloponnesian fleet having dared to 
 adventure over to Ionia, to help the Mytilenseans, not a little contributed to their 
 violence.' This opens out two questions— (i) Can ^u/i^aWfa-Bat in this sense 
 govern a genitive ? (2) Is the singular verb admissible after 01 i/TJes ? The 
 first seems determined in the affirmative by the instances produced by Matthiae, 
 § 326, and Kiihner, § 520. A.'s principal instance, ^vixBdWeraL Se TroAAii 
 TouSe Seliiaros, Eurip. Med. 279, Pflugk, ad loc, disputes, considering the gen. 
 to depend upon iroWd. Goll., however, makes the genitive in the present 
 passage to depend upon ixix^a-roy, which is possible, though scarcely probable. 
 The answer to the second is somewhat uncertain. Arn. says, 'the nom. fern, 
 plur. is used as a single term, " Quod naves ansae essent," equivalent to tJi tui 
 vam T0\iJi7Jaai.' With this G. seems to agree, and adds that the whole may ha 
 quite as well regarded as an instance of itphs rh (ri]ii,aiii6it.suov as of ' schema 
 Pindaricum.' Pop. objects that no really parallel cases have been produced, 
 and that the ' schema Pindaricum ' is not to be thought of in Thucydides ; and 
 therefore reads (ed. ii.) irpoalvvt^iKovTo, as the word from which the other 
 variations were most likely to arise. This is perhaps best, for, even granting 
 that ' the ships ' might resolve themselves into the equivalent conception ' the 
 fleet,' we should have to account for the fact that similar condensations are not 
 found much more frequently, inasmuch as the opportunity for them must have 
 been perpetually afforded. On the idiom, ai vries To\ti'i)crairai irporT^vve^dKovTo^ 
 cf. i. 36. Bloomf. supports iipocr^WiKaPoPTO by iv. 47, vii. 70. Kriig. reads as 
 he does, translating — ^tooh •part in, co-operated therewith to this end,' 
 ou yap airh jSpax^^as Siayoias — 'Jrom no brief consideration ' (i, e. upon a 
 deep-laid plan). 
 
 (e.) ir4ii.tr ova IV — sc. on the evening of the same dayj cf. irpoeixe ^fiepa icai 
 vvKr\ /iaAiffra, xlix. 
 
 (^f\ fi.era.vnLd Tis — 'a qualified repentance — a feeling akin to repentance.' 
 avaKoytafi6s — 'upon reconsidering — thinking the matter over again.' The pre- 
 position exerts its common force of bach. Koyia-fihs is, of course, 'computation,' 
 • calculation,' cf. viii. 84. p. 4ya, Pop. observes, is not ' severe,' or ' cruel,' 
 
 according to Bl. view, but, ' of grave importance.' Krug. says the word is used 
 because the decree affected so many persons. On fitiWov fj ov cf. i. 16, ii. 62. 
 
 (g.) irapeiTKiiaaav. Pop. interprets • bearbeiten,' i.e. the word implies 
 some labour and eSovt—' viorkedupon,' 'managed to induce.' Cf. iv. 132, viii. 52. 
 10VS iv TcKsi. The prytanes or the ten strategi; the former convoked as- 
 semblies in peace, the latter under extraordinary circumstances and in war. 
 See Thuc. iv. 118, ii. 59, and Schom. De Com. p. 61. Arn. A question arises 
 as to the legality of any such second convocation. Schomann, from the expressions 
 of Nicias, vi. 14, decides in the negative. A. thinks that if it had been illegal 
 Cleon'3 knguage would have been much more violent. Surely he would have 
 put the case more strongly, and threatened a yparfh irapavopav. 'His wish,' 
 says Arn ' seems rather to be to confound ^prirpirrfmra and vip.oi together, and 
 to excite Igainst the repeal of one of the former the same strong feeling which 
 was entertained in Greece against any alteration in the latter. For the distmc- 
 tion between vdpLoL, or the constitutional laws of the state, and .|/>,0(<rfiaTa, or 
 decrees of the people on particular questions, cf. Arist. Fol. iv. 4.' ' By so 
 
 X 2 
 
308 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 doing they committed an illegality, and exposed themselves to the chance af 
 impeachment. ... I agree with Schomann on this point, in spite of the doubts 
 of Dr. Arnold.'— Grote, vi. 342. is rh &\Xa l3iai6TaTos. As Mr. 
 
 Grrote's views extend to an almost entire vindication of Cleon's character, the 
 student will do well to peruse his ingenious pleading, vol. vi. pp. .H,34— .^9- Witli 
 respect to the decree itself, he says, ' such a sentence was in principle nothing 
 more than a very rigorous application of the received laws of war,' p. 340. 
 
 Chaftbe XXXVII.— (ffl.) TToWdKis K.T.\. — 'on many occasions ere now I 
 'have,for my part, found out with respect to a democracy, that it is incompetent 
 to govern others' lit. ' that it is an impossible thing for it to govern others' 
 This is, I think, the simplest metliod of taking the words. Popp. prefers to 
 construct 3ti aiivaTdv iir-rw SrnioKpartai' Spx*'" erepan/, and so also GoU. But 
 the above version is quite in accordance with the genius of the Greek language 
 — 'found out the character of a democracy.' Ci. olti ae, %s fl. fiera- 
 
 lie\eia — 'change of feeling,' he will not admit it as yet to be a fieravaia. 
 aSe 4 s— 'having no fear of others.' aveTri$ov\evTov — 'giving them 
 
 no cause for any' 
 
 (i.) KaX 3ti k.t.X. — ' and do not consider that in whatever instance you malce 
 a false step froniheing over-persuaded by their words, or in whatever instance you 
 give way to compassion, it is with danger to yourselves that you show weakness, 
 and not with any likelihood of securing gratitude from your allies, failing as you 
 do to reflect that it is asadespotism you hold your sovereignty and over \in respect 
 of~\ those [sc. |uj[i;[taxous] engaged in plots against you, and submitting un- 
 willingly to your rule.' The ou is connected with ^yeitrfle, not iTrncivSiivois. Of 
 tiie tliree meanings of xap'S (0 1^"*^ sentiment wliich induces to bestow a favour, 
 (2) the favour itself, (3) the sentiment inspired by the favour — 'gratitude'— I 
 have taken the last. A. seems to take the second. GoU. calls attention to tlie 
 diiference between koI ovk and ou5e. The same indeed exists between ' et non ' 
 and ' neque' as also between ' and not ' and ' not even' The difference here 
 would be [koX ovk k.t.K.) — * with danger to yourselves, and not {as you seem to 
 imagine) with a good effect upon your allies' setting the two notions in direct 
 antithesis ; {pvZ\ k.t.A.) — ' tvith danger to yourselves, and not even with good 
 eff'ect upon your allies.' ot ovk i^ Stv k.t.\. This ot is absent 
 
 from all MSS. of repute, or all but one; but as no editor has suggested how it 
 is possible to do without it, we can only cuiijecture that it has been accidentally 
 omitted before ovk and the other monosyllables. 
 
 (c.) 7r<i\ir Kpeiffirwv ia-ri — 'a state is better.' Krng. says equivalent to 
 ' it is better that a state should be.' afiadla is not simply * ignorance,' but 
 
 rather * the ignorance of simplicity,' 'want of due fidOTja-ts (i. e. intellectual culture 
 and polish).' See i. 84. (pavKdre pot does not, of course, implv any moral 
 
 worthlessness, but means * inferior people,* ' common or plain people,' as we say. 
 Cf. iii. 83. On aKoXaffia — * absence of principle,' the state which no ictfAatns 
 or chastisement can improve, see Aristotle {Elh. Nic. vii.), in whose moral 
 system it is an important technical term, denoting the lowest moral status — 
 ' abandoned vice.' trphs Toits ^vvercaTepovs — ' when compared ivith 
 
 their superiors in intellect.' Compare on the whole sentiment i, 84, and Arist. 
 Ehet. i. 16. Tuv Te ael Afyo/j.ei'tisv — ' and to out-do [Peile outbid'] 
 
Chap. 38.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 3O9 
 
 whatever is said or proposed for the public good,' — Arn. He ought to have 
 added from aei — 'on each occasion as it is brought forward.' 
 
 (d.) ass iv 6,\\ois K.T.A.. — 'as not being li/cely to have other matters of 
 greater importance in which to exhibit their wisdom.' On this iis cf. Matt. § 568. 
 On the force exerted hy &v upon participles, see note Ixxxii. 
 
 (e.) ^1 kavTiiv. The preposition denotes, according to its true and proper 
 sense, material cause — ' the ability which proceeds from themselves {of which they 
 are themselves the source).' More emphatic than the simple genitive. Cf. ii.ii6, ii. 
 39. fi^fL^affdat — to find fault with^ to criticize. Krug. remarks that the 
 
 infin. follows aZwart^npot in that it is an adjective, not in that it is a compara- 
 tive, and does not approve of Pop. % So-re yiiija\ia(rBai, to which he denies that 
 Eur. Ale. 879 is parallel. Kpirct! Se Hfres — ' but being impartial judges 
 
 rather than contending disputants, they are generally speahing successful.' 
 UTrb Tov tffov — ' ex (Equo (i.Q, tzqui).' Pop. cf. i. 77. Setv^JrTjTiis 'eZeuer- 
 
 ness' generally, without reference to principle — 'sharpness,' and is especially 
 employed to denote oratorical ability. Cf. viii. 8. Aristot. discusses it, Hih. 
 Nic, ^vvea-ts, from ^bi> and 'Irjfii, denotes the capacity to go along with 
 
 a speaker in his arguments — ' quick comprehension.' iraph, S6^av. Arn. 
 
 prefers the version of Portus — * aliter quam sentimus' — contrary to our convic- 
 tions, to that of other commentators — ' adversus quam ipse populus scivit' — 
 contrary to the decree passed by the people. This he and Goll. ohserve would 
 require TJjf S6^av. But have they not both lost sight of the fact, that it may 
 be that the absence of the article makes the whole into a general principle, in- 
 cluding indeed this special case, but asserting the speaker's argument much 
 more strongly ? — ' contrary to a decree once ratified.' 
 
 Chapter XXXVIIL— (a.) a airds. Cf. ii. 61, and (Edip. Tyr. 557, 
 a\n6s eifii Tip $ov\eifi.aTi. ifXTroiTiirdi'Tasv implies intervening delay, 
 
 i. e. between the sentence and its execution. nphs twv TjSiKij/tdToiy— 
 
 • makes for the interest of .' See ii. 80. 6 ykp Tradiiy-'for hewhohas 
 
 suffered the injury follows up the doer of it with his wrath more blunted [the 
 edge is taken from his anger], hut where requital comes as close as possible upon 
 the receipt of injury, it exacts its retribution, being made as nearly as may be 
 an equivalent.' This I think a fair and self-explaining version of the pas- 
 sage, which is only awkward because avTi-raKo:/ is referred to a^iifoireai rather 
 than riiv rifj-upiav. There is no reason why huaXaixBivn— takes up, assumes it, 
 should not have this force, and Krug's conjecture avTi\aiJ.^ivii js needless. 
 
 (b.) ras Si rifterepas ^u/xcpopas to7s ^vixii.6.xoiS ^Xi^as KaBitrra- 
 ^4 VOLS This can only mean-'tta< our calamities result in [lit. constitute 
 themselves-] damage to our confederates.' Cf. ii. 89. rhi' va„f.axia.v ■,rs(op.a.xiau 
 KMaraaeai—'the naval action would constitute itself a regular land fight. 
 Now this might be a very good argument beforehand to prove that the Mytile- 
 nsans were not likely to revolt, inasmuch as they would thereby eventually 
 damao-e themselves, but when the fact of the revolt was patent, how could it be 
 used Is an excuse for it? We should expect that an advocate would put the 
 case conversely, ' that the calamities of our confederates are sure to result m 
 damage to ourselves' (ergo, for our own sakes it is better not to destroy the 
 MvtMenseans.) Is it possible that Thucydides only meant to say this, and has 
 
3IO NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book IIL 
 
 said it very awkwardly, or are we to give up the passage in its present 
 state? ToTs ^viifidx"'^ fixipas — 'damage done to our adversaries,' as an 
 anarthrous subject, would be most awkward with riv S", &c., even were 
 wo to translate — ' damages, <^c., are the things that constitute what are our 
 real misfortunes.' Goll. says the calamities of Athens were necessarily 
 advantages to her confederates when they had become enemies (qui hostes 
 facti sunt), and that the absurdity consists in attempting to show that they 
 were p\i$cLi, and not advantages. But, in the first place, what would be 
 the bearing of such an argument ? and, secondly, how can we possibly 
 be justified in inserting qui hostes facti sunt? To insert oii after {u;x<^opas, 
 with several editors, does not clear up the difficulty. The Athenians looked to 
 their own interest in the matter, not to that of their confederates. It would 
 liave been quite unmeaning to make this latter the point in question, and 
 to urge (with Cleon's supposed adversary) that the calamities of Athens would he 
 Bure to damage it. D. following Arn. translates, 'and that our mUfortunes are 
 losses to our allies.' If this have any meaning it can only be found by sup- 
 posing the clause to imply as much as the famous shake of Lord Burleigh's 
 head, i. e. * consequently our remaining allies do not require this severe ex- 
 ample, because they are sufficiently bound to us already by community of 
 interest' — an inference disproved by this very revolt. Besides, D. does not 
 see that he is translating juec Se as if it were Kai. Kriig. for ras 5' ^^ercpas 
 ^v^icpopas reads Ta 5' iffi^rfpa ^^fj.(popa — our advantages, our interests, which 
 gets rid of the difficulty by inverting the sense. 
 
 (c.) rh Trdw Sokovv k.t.\. Ar. understands this to mean — 'that we 
 Jcnow nothing of what we think we know best,' and similarly Kriig. — ' das vollig 
 Anerhannte.' Others refer it to the decree — 'that most certainly determined 
 upon.' The objection that this would require rb Sdjoy is not tenable, for Cleon 
 on purpose represents the determination as still actually existing in the minds 
 of the Athenians. Or we may consider it to fall under the class of cases 
 mentioned, to which add a very remarkable one, Matth. ii. 20, reOvfiKaai yap 
 01 ^rjTovfTes T^i/ ^lfvxhf toiJ wai^tou. rh euirpe-ires expresses the 
 
 abstract notion — * elaborated speciousness of speech.' 
 
 (d.) dywvodeTovi'Tes. Cf.iEsch.c-. Ctesiph. 50, iJ7roXa)8€T6 rolvvv vfias 
 aiirovs elyai ayuyodfTas noKirtKris aper^y, and Kriig. on Xen. Anab. iii. i. 21. 
 SinTal. Cf.BeaTois, this ch. ad fin. This is explained wellby Arist. Shet.i. 3. 3, 
 avayKTi rhv axpoaT^v ^ Btaiphv ehai tj Kpiriiv, They attended upon and es- 
 timated serious debates, as theatrical spectators do, i. e. more in reference to 
 their literary ability than to their real merits; and facts they were content to 
 learn from hearsay, when they ought personally to have investigated their 
 truth — 'estimating [i.e. affirmatively] the practicability of things proposed to be 
 done from what clever speakers say about them, and in respect of what has been 
 done already not regarding the " accomplished fad " as more credible upon the 
 evidence of your eyes, than what you have heard from those who in words have 
 made a clever attack — sc. on some political opponent, or it may be — have in 
 debate assigned a specious value to them (i.e. put a fair gloss upon them).' To 
 ui/zei an antithetical aKpoaaei is implied in aKovffdtv. &pi(TTOi — 'the 
 
 best people in the world to be cheated.' SiSoKinaafitvov, sc. \6yov 
 
 — 'well tried and approved.' fuveircireoi — 'go along with.' 
 
Chap. 39.] NOTES ON THUCVDIDES. 3II 
 
 SovXoi K.T.A.—' slaves of ever;/ paradox for the time leing.' To the. passages, 
 more commonly quoted concernmg this feature in the Athenian character, we 
 may add (from Hloonif.) Aristoph. Hcclez. 581—88. 
 Je.) $ov\6fi.€vo5 K.T.A. Arn. observes that all this sentence depends upon 
 oiTiol ^(TT6 — ' it is your fault, because each man among you severally, as the great 
 object of Ms ambition, wishes to be an orator, and failing this,' &c. TOiaSra is 
 referred to an antecedent implied in eiirer^, though Krug. saya to Ktottk, as the 
 main idea in the sentence. to is t. Xtj.— 'those who are in such 
 
 sense orators' o^iois . . . vpoeTyaivea-ai — 'to be sharp enough to 
 
 anticipate by commendation any good proposal while the speaker is uttering it.' 
 For fVaii/eVoi of. iv. 65, and v. 37. Trpidvixoi—' eager to show 
 
 that yon catch beforehand what is alleged, and slow enough to foresee its probable 
 results' TO XcySixtva Arn. translates, I do not see why — • theoretical truth.' 
 Pop. strikes oTit ilvai before irpiieuftoi, judging it to be altogether inadmissible. 
 Kriig. places it in brackets. GoU. understands to KeySfieva thzii — 'said to be 
 the case;' hut the collocation of the words negatives this. If It is to stand, we 
 must I suppose explain u/xsTs alrioi iare $ov\6fiei'oi eli/ai irpoSv/jioi irpovoria-ai. 
 f7)Toi;;'T€S K.T.A. — ' looking for anything, so to speak, rather than the realities 
 of life around us.' (ppavovvre s — ' taking thought.' 2 </> 1 ir t a ^. 
 
 See Sheppard's Theophrastus, i. 40, Appendix I. The vSchol. here has ot rep- 
 irovTes \6yc^ ^^Topey. ^ou\evofieyois — 'men in deliberation concerning 
 
 high interests of state.' 
 
 Chapteb XXXIX. — (a.) /xdXiara Si) filav ■k6\iv — 'for u. single city.' 
 The idiom, like the Latin 'justissimus unus,' is common enough 'ad singularem 
 laudem prajdicandam.' Cf. i. 74, viii. 68; Herod, vi. 127. Where 'vituperium' 
 is in question, it seems much more rare, and indeed so far as I can remember, 
 it is unknown in Latin. Cf. fiia ye trSKei, viii. 40, 68. vrfirov oXtivgs 
 
 eX""'''^^- Remark the mixture between the general proposition and the par- 
 ticular application of it, o'lripes belonging to the first — 'in the case of any 
 persons occupying an island, as these do.' 
 
 (S.) iy ^ — 'wherein,' ' qua parte ;' or, sub. XP^'"f — 'while.' Cf i. 122. 
 Ti &\\o. For this not unusual phraseology cf Iviii., iv. 85, v. 98, vi. 80. 
 
 (c.) 4Trave<rT7]iray . . . awearTicrav. Dindorf (in Steph. Thesaur.) 
 makes 4iraya(rTacns 'the rebellion of those who have been regularly subjected;* 
 awSa-Taats 'the defection of allies.' But as the Mytilenaians were avT6voiioi. 
 oiKovPTis this passage at any rate negatives the universality of the rule. Pop. The 
 German language retains the play upon the words much better than our own — 
 'sie haben eher einen Anfall als Abfall gemacht' — 'they have risen up against 
 us, rather than revolted from us ' H-^" 7^- No opposing expressed 
 
 clause is introduced by Si, but the implied antithesis is obvious. 
 
 (d.) fiera riav iro\. ffrdvres — 'having taken their stand along with our 
 bitterest enemies.' Pop. compares vii. 57. 61, and the Latin ' stare cum aliguo.' 
 jiaKpirepa. The Sch. explains ;i6iC<"'o. rather beyond the reach of their power, 
 than iKiffaa,, falling short of it. Cf. iv. 41, iirl f^aKpSrepov in the same sense. 
 
 (e.) etaiBe. The subject is €U7rpaJ(ct. fiaXitrra xal Si' e\axi<rTov. 
 
 The ixaXiara must not be joined with airpocrUKnTos, as has been done by some, 
 e. g. Pop- — ' t° whom most especially, and most suddenly unexpected, prosperity 
 
312 NOTES OSr THUCYDIDES. [Book. III. 
 
 has 'befallen! Kriig. makes fidMa-ra independent — ' im hohen Grade' — prosperity 
 in a high degree. Si" iKax^c'rov — after the shortest interval, so. of expectation, 
 cf. ii. 42. Karh. \6yov — 'success in accordance with ordinary calculation.' 
 irapi. S6^av — ' contrary to expectation.' Kal KaKOTrpayiav k.tA. — 
 
 ' and they more easily, so to speak, repel the assaults of adversity, than con- 
 tinuously [ifninterruptedly, SiA] maintain prosperity.' 
 
 (/.) Kal &KKUS — 'in other cases besides this;' i. e. it is a matter of general 
 experience. flau/idfeii' — 'to treat with respect.' 
 
 (^.) Thv liiTO. tSiv uKiyav Kivivvov — 'thinking the risk incurred with 
 the oligarchs to be the safer of the two.' kiVSui/oj is of course risk before it 
 comes to signify danger, as may be seen by the phrases Trapa$dKKeiv kIvSwov, 
 &c., and the perpetual use of KivSvveiu in Plato. Trd\tv iv rij Tr<iAei 
 
 refers to the state of things supposed by the hypothesis of the speaker — * again 
 restoredrto their country,' i. e. even if the oligarchs had expelled them. 
 ^paxfit}, vide supra, a-rroK€Ktv8vv€vireTaL — ' tJie risk will have to 
 
 be run in the case against each separate state.' Kriig. cf . twv tiKwv ri Ktv- 
 SweveraL t^ irdXei, Dem. xviii. 278. 
 
 Chaptee XL. — (a.) TTpoBilvai — aliter, ■KpotrBelvai. 'I have adopted the 
 reading irpoBelfat because " to hold out a hope " seems a more natural expression 
 than "to give a hope.'" — Arn.; to which Poppo assents, ed. ii. This is true; 
 still it may be said Trpotrduvai is not * to give a hope,' but ' to give an additional 
 hope,' and Clcon may mean that the Athenians ought not to increase the 
 natural disposition among their allies to act even upon the slightest chance of 
 success, by the additional encouragement which the acquittal of the Myti- 
 lenaeans would give. Koytp irKTriiv. Bl., upon the strength of a 
 
 passage in Plato {Leg. vii. 824), makes this equivalent to Ady^j Tri(Tvvi]v, ' elo~ 
 queniid fretam' with which Arn. and Pop. agree. This does not seera satis- 
 factory, as there is no instance of its being so employed by Thucyd. The 
 passage may be rendered — 'to be made credible by plausibility of speech, into 
 which you could be persuaded by argument reliable, or purchasable by money.' 
 Peile has, 'persuadable by argument, or purchasable by money.' Kriig., after 
 Heilm., makes Triar^v agree with ^vyyvu>/j.T}v, and explains it by TropiffTqv, 
 i<l>iKT^v, but this he himself calls ' etwas hart,' and the collocation is I think 
 decisive against it. Bl. quotes rofouAic^ X^jhoti tthttovs, Fersce, 55, as decisive, 
 but surely troops may be trusted by their leaders for their good qualities, as 
 well as trusted by themselves. 
 
 (b.) 6s |u77>'(4/ir|j' afiapTf'ii' k.t.A. Poppo considers this equivalent to 
 rov afiaprelv, and for the omission of the article refers to the cases quoted by 
 ]\Iatthia3, § 542. Arn. understands the words afiapruv avdpairtjfus as an explana- 
 tion of iuyyviofinv. But is not the latter tho feeling in the mind of the offended 
 party (ri Si ^vyyviip-i) yvajiT) iari Kpinxij to5 ^irieixous opBii, Arist. Nic. JSth. 
 vi. 8} J the former the act of the offenders '? How then can one be an epexegesis 
 of the other ? He seems to have been led away by the Scholiast's ^vyyvdiins 
 
 &^iov, but this is. his explanation of tho adjective ^vyyvaifioi/. I would trans 
 
 ' that they will receive consideration from us, as having [that they have^ erred 
 from human infirmity.' ^iyyvap.ov — 'matter for consideration,' 
 
 i. e. allowance, \\iyyvuni\s Sf loy, says the Scholiast. 
 
Chap. 40.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 313 
 
 (c.) Sia^oxo^ai. The prep, seems to exert the same force as in tiairdCea-eai 
 (xxxix.) — throvghout, therefore thorouglili/, obstinately/. Compai-e Sucrx''pK'"- 
 find with Pop. Pflugk ad Eur. Ale. 694. /xeTayvupai tci TvpoSeSo- 
 
 •y/ic'vo. 'The notion seems to me rather the technical one of unvoting what they 
 had resolved upon, than the general one of repenting,' Arn., who supports this 
 view at some length, and so also Pop. But if we translate — 'change your 
 mind about what you have already decreed' this, as they were met in a delibe- 
 rative assemhly, will of necessity imply ' Mn«o&^.' olKTlf . . . 
 €Tri€iK6(a. Arn. explains the former as the feeling of compassion; the latter 
 as the habit of mind — 'general mildness of temper.' 'Eirief/ceio, the reader will 
 remember, is the habit of equity or fairness, in contradistinction to strict justice 
 (Arist. Mhic. Nicom. v. 10). This perhaps therefore, though he does not notice 
 it, afibrds some ground for Mr. Grote's remark (vi. 345) that ' eirifiKeia here 
 rather means the disposition to stop short of your full rights, a spirit of fair- 
 ness and adjustment, an abatement on your part likely to he requited by abate- 
 ment on the part of your adversary.' Cf. Thucyd. i. 76, iv. 19, v. 86, viii. 93. 
 eA eos — 'compassion is rightly shown to those ivho are lilce-mindedf and not to 
 those who will show no compassion in return, and even of necessity stand in the 
 position of enemies' ayStva — * room for display/ Peile, or perhaps 
 — * matter of rivalry.' 
 
 (d.) iK Tov €v etn-etj/ — 'from their fine speaking will receive fine treatment 
 in return' (sc. bribes). wphs roijs d/xoiovs — 'to those who are, what 
 
 they alicays were, and, after all done for them, remain not a whit less your 
 enemies than before.' So we might tr., but Kriig. and most others condemn the 
 words. uiroXeiTTo) contains the idea of leaving behind. Cf. Ixxxiv. 
 XapiitaBt A. renders — 'you will not confer a favour on them.' This can 
 hardly be said under the circumstances; the verb has a slightly different force 
 here — 'you will not oblige them ;' i. e. ' will not do anything to them which they 
 will regard as a favour.' So the Soh. — o!>x 'i^ovinv jiixiv x^P'"- 
 
 (e.) SiKaLii<r((x6e. There is I think no difficulty about the general sense — 
 'you are sitting here professedly to pass sentence upon the Mytilenmans ; ifyoii 
 do not taTce care it will be a sentence against yourselves that you pass.' Instead 
 of conjecturing Smauiaere as Elmsley {Medea, 93), the mid. voice seems to 
 me more appropriate — 'you will find that while sitting in judgment for your 
 own interest, it will be yourselves who receive sentence.' vfias airous stands as it 
 were objectively, indicating ' the defendants,' and is not tautological, with the 
 subjective notion 0/ «eZ/ contained in the middle verb. Peile has, 'you will 
 rather furnish arguments [jpleas'] against yourselves,' and compares tUv S,. 
 Kawy, xliv. But if this explanation be not satisfactory, we may accept Popp. 
 who quotes an instance of the reflexive pronoun with the mid. verb, i. 32, 
 cripas airols fie^aLiiaaffBai. Kriig. after quoting Elms, ad Bur. Med. 93, 
 SiKai'us KaB' i/j-Hf avTHf a7ro5£i|6Te 2ti rvpamiiciiis apx^r^, and Valla's version, 
 condemnabitis, says that no such sense or construction of the word is found in 
 Thuc, and therefore suspects that the passage is greatly corrupt.^ Bl. follows 
 Pop. and quotes Ar. Hthics, v. 9, and Ilerod. iii. 29. ^ ov xpeii/ . . . 
 
 ou -Kpoaritcop— the absolute usage. yrpoaijtcoi' and rh eiViy are equivalents, 
 that which is seemly. Imraietreai the force of the present is, at once to begin 
 giving up. Matthise, § 564, Kriig. Gr. § 569. i.ySpayaei(f(reai. 
 
314 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Cf. ii. 63. fii a\'y7}T6TepoL — * less sensilive, less quicJc in your feelings.' 
 
 ol Bta<lifi>yovT€s—' the escaping parti/.' Goll. vainly conjectures Sia<{ivy6vres. 
 Cf. iv. trpovirdp^avras — sc. on the principle 'odisse quem laesevis/ 
 
 4ire^€pXovTai — 'hunt them down.' 5i6WvvTat. If with Am, 
 
 we consider this the middle voice, it may of course be legitimately ren- 
 dered, ' compass their destruction ;^ nor can any satisfactory reason be given, 
 * a priori ' why SioWv/xi should not have f middle voice. Cf. ^ufairoKeadai in 
 some MSS. vi. 12; and on the other hand all usage is against it, and the 
 instances quoted may be otherwise explained. Hermann has therefore trans- 
 lated the words passive voce with u^opei/tej/oi — ' dispereunt si suspicantur' — *it 
 kills them to live in suspicion of danger.' This must strike every one as very 
 awkward. There remains but a choice between difficulties. I scarcely think 
 Kriig.^s solution, to strike out the koX and read Zio\\vvTo.y referring to what 
 follows, will be accepted. 
 
 {f.) 6 yap fj.^ ^vv avdyKy ri iraO^v k.t.K. This is somewhat difficult. 
 I consider the argument to be, 'They would have treated you with severity, be- 
 cause they would have known that your indignation would be great, and your 
 revenge commensurate.* These words contain the reason why the Mytilenseans 
 must have inferred that the anger of Athens would be excessive. * For he who 
 has been in any matter unnecessarily [i. e. wantonly and without provocation — as 
 Athens would be, Mytilene not being /orcec^ into revolt] ill-treated^ if he escapes, 
 is more exasperated than an enemy upon equal terms. Do not, therefore, become 
 traitors to your oion interests, hut putting yourselves in your feeling as near as 
 possible to the stateyou would have been in as sufferers, and recollecting how you 
 would have preferred before allthings to get them into your power, now pay hack 
 unto themyour debt, icithout any weak compassionfor their plight at the present 
 moment, and without forget Hng the danger that once hung over your heads' 
 ^hv avdynr} is explained in the words of the version, x^ejrujTepos. Arn. 
 translates, • more dangerous,' but it means ' more angry and implacable/ x^^^~ 
 irous \4yofj.ev rohs e^' oTs Tf /i^ SeT x**^^"'**^*''*'''^''^* '^^^ fiaWov ^ Se?, koI irKeluj 
 XP^^oy, Kal fi^ StaWaTTOfievovs fii'eu Ttjuwpias ^ KoKatretas. — Arist. Fth. Nic. iv. 5. 
 Cf. the common phrases, x"-^^"""^^ (pcpeiv and 6 xa^frafj/aj^. For iyyvrara 
 rfj yv^fij) cf. Sti ^yy^rara rovTov diavorjOcvra^y i. 143 ; and for yfvSfjLevoi 
 Kriig. aptly quotes iEsch. iii. 153, yivea-Oe 5t) fioi fiiKphv xpovoi/ rr} StavoCq, fx^ 4v 
 T^ diKatTTTjpiif}. Before Kal &5 Trph Trai'Tiy is supplied from y^v6fj.etfot yvc^fiv 
 some participle like diauoT}94vres, or, as Poppo suggests, yevSfi^voi Se is to be 
 repeated, and &s is to be taken as quia — * since you toould have valued/ &c. 
 Trphs rh iraphv avriKa. The above version is, I see, supported by Pop. Dale 
 is, I think, wrong in taking avrlKa with the verb as a simple adjunct — 'indulge 
 ing in weakness at the present moment/ — for is Trpis sufficiently considered ? 
 Schneider conjectures irapavriKa ; Kriig. erases •jrap6v. 
 
 (g.) ^TjfiiuaSfxepou. ^r\}iia}$-i\(rofiai {bring the penalty of death upon himself) 
 occurs iii. 9. 12, vide L. and S. The participle is either put because a-a<l>h 
 {•trapdSeiyiMa) KaraarijtTaTe is equivalent to STjXciffare (Duk. and Pop.), or is in 
 apposition to Trap., e.g. /carao'T^traTe irapdBeiy/xa, KarafXT'ija'are hs hv d^;o'T^Tai 
 ^T}fxia>(r6fj.eyov (Goll.). a/j.e\-f)(ravT€s — * to the neglect of your enemies/ 
 
 Kriig. quotes Xen. Anab. v. 1. 15, afiek-ffaas rov (rvK\a^s7ir irAota airoSpds 
 
Chap. 42.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 315 
 
 Chaptee XLI. — EuKpttTous. Very little is known of this Euorites. 
 Some identify him with the (rrvmreioTrtiKiis of Ar. Sq. 129. 
 
 Chaptek XLII. — (a.) oiJre Tot;j irpoflevTas k.t.A. The stndent will 
 readily perceive how each clause is exactly referred to something in the pre- 
 ceding speech. The correspondences are pointed out by GoU., and must be 
 studied for the due comprehension of the argument. Siayifutfi-Tiv, Note 
 
 the force of the preposition. tclxos ti khI opyfiv — ' I hold thai 
 
 the two things most adverse to good counsel are precipitanct/ and passion, of 
 which the former is ever the companion of ignorance, while the latter is always 
 associated with a shallow judgment and coarse [unchastcned or ^tndlsdpllned'] 
 mind,' Pop. asserts that it is impossible to ascertain to which rii (j.\v and Th 
 Se respectively refers If the above version be correct we may urge that pre- 
 cipitate action is associated with ivoia (ignorance ov folly), upon the principle 
 that ^ fools rush in where angels fear to tread.' And ugain that aTraiSeuffia (see 
 remarks on hfi.a6ia) designates that want of moral and intellectual training 
 which always leaves a man brutal, and liable to the passionate impulses of a 
 brutal nature. 
 
 (S.) iSm Ti avT^ Si.a<pep(t — 'it makes some difference to himself in 
 private' — he has some private and personal interest in wishing it to be so. 
 
 (0.) oiiK Uv riyflTo.i. The ti.i/ of course goes with the infinitive, and so 
 indeed does ovk — 'he thinlcs he has no chance of spealcing well.' Cf. ii. 89. 
 SiafiaKdiv. Bl. well points out that this refers to the great feature in Cleon's 
 character for which he is censured by Aristophanes : iraU -rhu iravoyiffov koX 
 Zia?,oK(i>Ta.r6v Tiva, JSguit. 247. x"^"^'^'^"'^'" — '^^^ hardest upon us.' 
 
 Cf. supra, xxxviii. 
 
 (d.) Eiri xpV""'' TpofKaT. Eiri5. — 'who besides lay to a man's charge 
 oratorical display with an eye to bribes.' The construction is like the Latin, 
 exprobrare aliquld alicui. Pop. compares aSiK^a KarTiyopelro auToS, i. 89. On 
 cViSeiKTiK'f), ' the oratory of display,' see of course Rhetoric, i. For i-rrX de- 
 noting the object of an action, cf. Matth. 585. ^, Jelf, § 634. 3. 
 fi ^ii> yap ci.iJ.a6ia v—'for did they lay mere want of Tcnowledge to his charge, 
 tJie man wU failed to carry his point would in that case quit the assembly, with 
 the reputation of want of sense, rather than want of principle [lit.>rf dealing-], 
 wanting In ability rather than zoantlng In honesty,' i. e. with the reputation of a 
 fool rather than that of a knave. For the double comparative see i. 21. The 
 i.v though coupled with 6.n.x^p^i, is not without its force upon 8<i|as. 'But 
 when a charge of unjust dealing is brought against a man, both if he gains hu 
 point he becomes an object of suspicion, and If he falls, together rolth Ms stupidity 
 heUlh<,\ito\,e-]aknaveaswell.' .pi&v-'"Mmidation. jovs 
 
 ^oioirovs-sc. who make these calumnious insinuations. •reiffflel^o-a.' 
 
 — sc. 0:' 7ro\rTc<i, from iz6\i!, cf supra. 
 
 (e) a.h ToO i^ov . . . ,pal.ea6ai. Certainly not as Am.-' triumphing 
 in eloquence ;' but, ' to approve himself the better adviser upon fair and equal 
 terms' i e. taking no unfair advantage by insinuation or otherwise of his rivals. 
 In what follows there is no difficulty if we remember ih<, first hXXa ^S^ means-- 
 . but neither in the other to detract from what already belongs to him ; the second, 
 
3l6 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 * not even,' i. e. * not only, I will not say punish, hut not even treat with disrespect' 
 Ov)(_ Strws for oi/x Sttojs ov (cf. i. 35) beems to be employed on the same prin- 
 ciple as non modo for non mode non. The second negative in the first sentence 
 is omitted, if both sentences have the same verb, and if the verb is contuined 
 in the second sentence. See Zumpt, I/at, Gr. § 724. Mr. Long considers 
 that * the confusion about this matter arises from translating *' non modo '' noi 
 only, whereas it means not so much as, that is, as the following word denotes.' 
 Therefore *non modo intrari, sed ne perspici quidem posset^ {into which there 
 was not so much as a possibility of entering, nay not even of seeing through). 
 — Long's Ccesar, ii. 17. He would therefore render this passage, 'not so much 
 as punish^ nay not even treat with disrespect.* Cf. Kriig.'s Gr, Gr. § 67. 14. 
 rhv fi^ Tvx^vra yrciJur^s. Not 'the man who fails to carry his measure, 
 but * the naan whose measure has failed to fulfil its design ' — ' not happy in his 
 advice/ iropo yvwfirjv . . . Kal irphs x°-P^^ — ' against his judgment 
 
 . . . and to curry favour ' '6 re ix^ iirnvx^v — 'and the man who failed 
 
 of success would not, in the attempt to ingratiate hirnself somewhat with the 
 people as well as his rival [auT(is], enter upon an eager struggle [grasp at] to 
 bring them over to his side.' We must with opeyoiro repeat the T^Kiffra &i/. 
 Kriig. thinks that x^-P'-C^f^^^^^ '''* ^ either most probably a gloss, or a mere 
 epexegesis. 
 
 ChapteE XLIIL — (a.) KepZovz fiey . . . ra fi^Kriffra 5e o^qjs. 
 Pop. remarks that his countrymen would have put the statement inversL'ly. 
 So too should we — *what is indeed the hest advice; but given from a dishonest 
 motive* ipdovfia-avTes. Kriig. rightly remarks that <f>dov€7v 
 
 Kc'pSows is a natural expression enough, but <pdove7v SoKTjffews is singular, and so 
 conjectures KT^trewy, * To grudge a man the reputation,' is confused with ' to 
 feel a grudge against him for having the reputation' inrh t ov 
 
 €vd€os — * in a straightforward way.' Cf. i. 34. ^l/eva-d/jLevop . . . 
 
 TTiffTdv. A sort of oxymoron — 'render himself credible by telling lies.' The 
 whole, in a modern writer, would be exactly inverted. 
 
 (fi.) ■rrepit/olas. irepl denotes ' superabundance,* or * supererogation,' See 
 note on irepiovaia, i. \z. Here then we must understand ' over -sharpness,' 
 Sir Walter Raleigb has over-wiseness. Bloomf. ' This is the only state which, on 
 account of these extravagant and far fetched notions of its being so over-clever, it 
 is impossible,' &c. — Am. There seems some awkwardness in this, arising from 
 the absence of Tavrrji^. Can the whole mean — ' and one's countn/ alone [or 
 country alone of all things^, owing to these excessive suspicions, one is unable to 
 benefit without previously cajoling * ? i.e. the only thing one cannot benefit fairly 
 is * Fatherland,' whereas one would suppose that it would be the easiest and 
 luost natural thing to benefit. Since writing this I see Kriig. has ' einen Staat 
 allein,' — ' a state is the only thing one cannot,' (Sec., i. e. in contradistinction to 
 private individuals. Trep/voio denotes the excess of an active miud, which not 
 only sees all that is really to be seen in a subject, but fancies something more. 
 a^avws — 'in a way that does not meet the eye.' — Peile. 
 
 (c.) iv Tijj TotySe a^iovvTi (vulgo), a^iovp ri (Popp.). It is usual to 
 explain this like iv r^ ju^ /xeXerwcTt, i. 142 ; iv r^ BiaWdca-ovTi Trjs yvth^xT]-;, iii. 
 
Chap. 44.] NOTRS ON THUCYDIDES. 317 
 
 TO. In this case we must translate—' in such a state of your sentiments' or, 
 ' while you estimate things in this way.' But Haase, Luculrat. Thucyd., p. 37, 
 argues that the e.>:pression is incorrect; first, hecausewhen the participle neuter 
 with the article is used as a substantive, we never find, as here, an adjective, or 
 adjectival word {r^ toiwSe), coupled with it ; secondly, because Thucyd. uses 
 the expression ei/ tm roiijjSe per se with the same force, e. g. ii. 36, v. 88, iii. 8 1 
 (this might, I think, be questioned). He therefore reads a^iom-n, and Pop. 
 coincides. They would, I suppose, translate—' but it is desirable, when regard is 
 being had to otir highest interests, and in so grave a matter, that toe should con- 
 sider it our duty to speak with someivhat longer forecast, than you whose judg- 
 ment is so summary, more especially as the advice which we give is responsible, 
 while you to whom, it is addressed are subject to no responsibility at all.' 
 Kriig., too, and Donaldson, read aJioSv ti, hut the ti is, he says, to he connected 
 with \€7aj, and not, as above, with irepairepw. 
 
 {d.) wphs opyiit' fiVTtva TiixiTe k.t.A.. Hermann, Haack, Popp., and 
 Kriig. supply Ctiij.iovvtis, i.e. irpis opyiji/ Tii/Tira tux'Jtc (fijiuioCi/Tej) Cvi'-'i'/Te — 
 ' you punish in accordance with the passionate feeling in which you happen to be 
 when punishing.' Aru., Bekker, and Goll. supply a-cpaKevTes, i. e. ir(pa>\-eyT€s 
 etrriv ore irphs opy^v ifiifTti/a tv^^tjt^ [^(TcpaKei/res^ — 'meeting with disaster in 
 accordance with the passions which may happen to have brought it about.' 
 Bloomf. joins Trp^s opy^v . . . ^TjjUioCTe, and supplies Trapa/t'eo'ii' torjUTLva from the 
 former sentence — ' whatever counsel it may be in which you may happen to have 
 been disappointed, you punish,' &c. To me this seems, as to Arn., an unnatural 
 severance of i^vriua from bpyfiv. Is it possible that this is one of the rare cases 
 where Tuyx""" standsyer se without a participle ? C(. Soph, Ajax,(); Elect. 313; 
 Eur. Hipp. 929, and Kvpii (or the almost certain emendation mpeiTi), Soph. JElect. 
 1424. If so translate — 'but now sometimes when you meet with a reverse, you 
 puyiish in accordance with the temper in which you happen to be, the single 
 opinion,' &c., i. e. Demus takes bis reverses lightly when in a good humour, but 
 when in a bad one he is severe. Arn., it is true, objects against Poppo's inter- 
 pj-etation that ' it is not the speaker's object to represent the punishment vary- 
 ing according to the ebb and flow of the people's resentment, but to describe 
 the resentment and the consequent punishment as certain and severe.' I 
 cannot think so ; the existing debate and the case of Peric'es are proof to the 
 contrary. I do not believe that he wishes to make the Athenians as bad as 
 that : he merely insinuates that tliere is no security for public men against 
 sudden and arbitrary popular resentments originating in disappointment ; ' et 
 il a raison.' 
 
 ' How many traitors to their God and King 
 Escaped the fate that was reserved for Byng.' 
 
 irpls hpyiv, says Bl., it is scarcely necessary to add, signifies ' pra; ira.' Scarcely, 
 indeed, for the preposition has its proper sense— i« reference to, estimated in 
 comparison «)«A— just as it is infra, xliv., ^phs rh" vvv i^^ripav ipyi,v, whera 
 he most strangely tr.— ' on account of your,' &c. 
 
 Chapter XLIV.- (o.) iji' te yap kTO<pi)<'a k.t.K. -Two difficulties,' says 
 Arn. ' present themselves— the omission of the apodosis, and use of i^c with tha 
 
3l8 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 optative mood.' The former he thinks easily removahle, and in his note 
 practically asserts the same principle as that maintained in the note, iii. 3. 
 This is, I believe, correct, but there is still another reason in favour of such an 
 omission of the apodosis here. The speaker goes to work very delicately ; he 
 purposely avoids all plain and direct assertion of his object, as calculated to 
 offend. Therefore he gladly leaves, what he means to recommend — the expe- 
 diency of excusing the Mytilenojans — as an inference rather than a statement. 
 * If I prove them ever so guilty ^ I shall not on that account straightway («al) re- 
 commend you to put them to death if it he not expedient^ nor again if per- 
 adventure, they may have a slight excuse [shall I say anything about excusing 
 them], if it he not clearly esfahlished {(paivoiro) that it is for the good of the 
 country.' The second point is one which involves much. Are we to adopt 
 and lay down a rule framed upon a careful, but blind induction, without any 
 reference to the principle which the rule exemplifies ? or are we to admit a priori 
 considerations to a large share in the ground upon which we construct our 
 rules ? The former method is unphilosophieal, the latter unsatisfactory 
 because so liable to perversion. But as the national tendency is the other way, 
 one is inclined to believe that English scholars should rather cultivate the 
 latter. Until, therefore, some satisfactory reason be given (which is perhaps 
 possible) why ftv never can be coupled with an optative, nor ti with a subjunc- 
 tive, it is perhaps right to permit explanations of the apparent anomaly. I 
 quote then with pleasure Peile's comment upon this passage : ' The change 
 in this clause from the subjunctive which should properly have followed ■nv, to 
 the optative, I attribute to the art of the speaker, who for the first time ven- 
 turing to hint that the Mytilenseans may not be so bad as Cleon has represented 
 them, pui-posely makes it a more remote and improbable contingency than the 
 supposition of their guilt.* Cf. i. 120, fiv /j.^ dfiivajtrt . . . et to koltw TrpoolvTo, 
 and ii. 44, iii. 46. This it must, however, be admitted does not answer the 
 question why is it not, fiv airotpiivu ... €1 ittv ? Hermann and Bekkcr seem to 
 decide as Peile, Pop., Am., Golh, the other way. It ought to be mentioned 
 that Dr. Donaldson has suggested (following a hint from Dobree) fiv %x<"''^^ 
 Ti ^uYyvd/iris (sc. d7ro(/>^i'ii) avTobs), ihv [let that pass — ■' what of that ']. See 
 Arist. Nvb. 176. So Kriig. thv — sei es. euv and Cv" have also ingeniously been 
 conjectured for elei/, and also ^Aee?*'. My own belief is that we owe ^v to the 
 ignorance or carelessness of some copyist who, having written it in the pre- 
 vious clause, thought proper to repeat it here, not noticing or not caring for 
 the transition to the optative, which Peile explains rightly enough. 
 itrxvpl^tTai — insists upon j makes a strong point of a word of which Thuc. 
 seems fond. Cf. iv. 23, v. 26, &c. Trpofieicri — sine articulo, if we 
 
 hold forth. 
 
 (h.) SiKai6Tfpos — 'containing a greater show of justice when looked at in 
 reference to your present anger against the Mytilenceans' i. e. if that he the 
 standard to which you refer, and hy which you measure it. tuv 
 
 SiKalan/ — 'pleas of Justice,' ' points that may be urged.' See Theophrastus, 
 Char. Tlep) Mefnifiifioiplas (xxi. ed. Shep.) : Kol 5(«j)i/ cuc^tros, Ka\ \aPi>y wiaas 
 T^y ^ittpovs, 4yKa\uP t^J ypdyj/avTi rhv \6yov, us troWa irapaXeKonroTL juv 
 SiKaiuv. Compare StKaui^utra, i. 41, and & cxopitf Slxaia, c. 54. iwus 
 
 Xf>y]<riti-o'i e^oixriv — ' iow they shall best serve our purpose.' 
 
Chap. 45.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 319 
 
 Chapteb XLV. — {a.) Karayvohs eavrov — Shaving passed sentence against 
 his own prospects of success in his plot, or passed sentence against himself of 
 failure in his plot [\\t. having condemned himself thai he loill not succeed'].' So 
 also KonyiiaiKdTav, vii. 51 ; and Kriig. quotes Xen. Cgr. vii. i. 36. 
 tJo'o'w k.tA. — 'having in its own imagination its preparation inadequate, either 
 native or furnished hy foreign alliance.' Cf. ii. 35. b. The form of ex.pression 
 is as itsual varied from ^vfjLfxaxtn'h'^. Trecpvicairi — 'they have it hy 
 
 nature, both men and states, to commit offences.' — Hobbes. 
 
 (6.) ^TTel bii^e\Ti\v6a<rl ye — 'since 'men have gone through all possible 
 penalties [or the whole catalogue of punishments'], heaping one upon the other [or, 
 adding to them, i. e. increasing their severity], to see if possibly by any means,' 
 &c. Cf. Ixxxii. Goll. renders irpocTiSfVTfS ' injungentes,' which is not so 
 forcible here. Trapafiaivo/ieyav has sometimes been coupled with 
 
 aSiKtifitiTwv repeated. See note on irapa^alveTai tovto. Gdll. supplies ^rifiiuy. 
 Pop. considers that the general notion of v6fi.!iiv, to be gathered from what pre- 
 cedes, is to be supplied. Or the word might have a middle force — ' when men 
 become transgressors.' es rhv ddvarov avfiKovai — ' reach up at last 
 
 to death,,' met. from reaching a climax. xal rovro Trapa;8aJi/eTai. 
 
 This seems to be a loose way of speaking, like that noticed in iiapa^aivofi^vuv, 
 where the penalty is made to include the rule to the violation of which it is 
 affixed. There is no necessity with Kriiger to read k&v tovtiji. 
 
 (0.) avdyxT) is the dative of the instrument as are S^pei and opy^ — 'poverty 
 from the pressure of necessity affording the necessary daring [cf. 'My poverty 
 but not my will consents '], and power giving birth to a grasping spirit, from 
 arrogance and pride ; and all the other circumstances or conditions of life, from 
 the temper of mankind, as each {^vvtvxIi) is under the dominant influence of 
 some irresistible [lit. incurable] passion.' i^ovcia—iv. ixa, ovaia, 
 
 cf. TTuptovaia — 'power grounded on the possession of resources.' Cf. vi. 31, 
 i^ovaias iiriUi^ts. t p a s—' concupiscence,' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 600. 
 
 ili.yavaiv—' lead men on,' Bl. Cf tpais tis ^' iliy^i, Eur. Ale. 1080. 
 ivTiopiav. Kriig. after Heil. tr. 'Vorschub, i. e. assistance, but it is rather ' the 
 facilities which fortune is sure to afford,' ' the chapter of accidents,' as we say. 
 ^ ehvopia T^s Tiixis in fact represents the source of the famous Mr. Micawber's 
 
 dependence. 
 
 (d.) i-xoSeeCTepav. Kriig. supposes that a comparison with the resources 
 of the enemy is intended. I should rather suppose that an inferiority to those 
 which their calmer judgment would consider necessary is implied. 
 ^t1 -rr^fov n abriv. This is the reading of the bestMSS. Arnold (though 
 he prints Ubrbv^) renders, ' carries his imaginations .wmewhat too far concern- 
 ina them ' Of this Pop. approves, comparing the expressions, ^ttI p.iya ^xios 
 ii 07 ^,r! 7ro\b rrjs S6^vs iv. 12. Goll.'s explanation is, ' aliquid earam rerum 
 riibertatis, et in alios imperii] in majus animo concipit, sc. mnjorem hbertatem, 
 mains in alios imperium nescio quod animo concipit.' iUi.a^,v. 
 
 SofdC,. is to 'form 5,<|a,,'-' imaginative schemes;' 'to dream of as we say 
 If «6t!.^ be read, translate with Pei\e-' among the. crowd each tndivAal 
 without reflection is apt to think too highly of himself,' or his own chances, 
 at any rate ^.ra ^ivro^v refers to the confidence derived from numbers- 
 
320 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 nniversi audent, quod eiuguli reformidarent. But airav is, I have little 
 doubt, Thucydidean. 
 
 (e.) aSuvarov Kal ttoWtis evTjdeia^ — *it is impossible and a mark of 
 great, simplicity in him who supposes/ Cf. ix. 44, and iv. 18. 
 
 Chaptee XLVI. — (a.) ^xfyyif- 7ua is ' the hollow of the hand:' Hence 
 iY/vau — ' to give security by placing a thing in the hand,' and iyyvri — ' the 
 security given.' ixfyyvo! therefore means 'having' or 'affording security,' 
 ' to he relied on.' Cf. ' spondee.' ' We should not therefore from confidence in 
 the punishment of death, as if it afforded any security/ &e. Cf. viii. 68, 
 tpipeyyvcinaros. aveKiriffrov . . . (Siy ovk ^trrat fierayvavai 
 
 is equivalent to au^KTriirTov iroiTj(rai rh fierayvvvai — * not to mahe repentance 
 and expiation of their fault a matter of despair ;' not to establish in them a 
 sentiment of despair, as though, &c. The principle is that of building a bridge 
 for a flying enemy. Kal goes with aTroa-ratra — 'even supposing it to 
 
 have revolted.' 
 
 (b.) airoSovvai — 'to reimburse us for the expenses of th^ war,' 'to indem- 
 nify.' On this particular force of airh in composition, see the long notes in 
 Sheppard's Theophrastus, pp. 176, 112. 
 
 (e.) irapatTKevaffaaSai . . . irapar eve'iadai. I cannot account for the 
 union of tenses except upon the principle maintained in a tract upon the aorist. 
 App. II. Similar cases occur, iv. 28. 52, v. 49, vi. 24, viii. 46. Am. adds, in 
 accordance with the theory there advocated, *In the latter the notion of future 
 time is essential, whereas in the former the time is unimportant, and it is 
 simply the occurrence of the thing which the writer wishes to signify.' Pop. 
 believes that TrapaTive7(r6a.i means 'suffer itself to be, will he, put to the raclc/ 
 'very hard pressed,' because its subject really is irifAiv, not woXiopKiap. 
 Remark that re may follow TroKiopKia because no real opposition to the idea in- 
 troduced by fifv is intended, but only an extension or amplification of it. Cf. i. 
 rh aiiTu iuvaTai. Cf. note, i. 141. 
 
 [d.) $\dirT€<T8ai. Arn. makes this the mid. voice — ' hurt yourselves by 
 resisting ;' but if we consider the real meaning of the word ^Kd-n-ru, which is, 
 to put an obstacle in a man's way, we see that here and elsewhere it is passive. 
 See observations on iEsch. Ag. in Terminalia, No. 21. ivTa^, sine 
 
 articulo — 'from being too strict judges.' Cf. with Arn. i. 71, afiuyS/ievoi. 
 ^aWov ¥1 — * so much as it is to looJc and see.' 
 
 (e.) is xPVf-^''''"' Xiyov — 'on the score of money.' — Arn. This seems 
 correct. But as \6yos and ' ratio ' are so nearly the same, it appears unnecessary 
 to explain the phrase as he and Pop. are at pains to do, hy 'if we come to 
 tali: about money.' The Sch. has awaplB^iricnv. Bl. has many examples from 
 later writers, but he tr.— ' solvent in respect ofthepayment of money.' XoyiaT^s 
 is 'a calculator,' 'a teacher of arithmetic' (vide L. and S. Lex.), not 'a 
 talker.' tpyav ttis liriixiXeias. The usual sort of antithesis, 
 
 meaning here — practical precautions against revolt. Cf. tpyav ipv\a.Krj, Ixxxi. 
 TtpoKaTaXaiifidvfiv. See i. 57- Lid. & S. (Lex.) give several Thucydidean 
 loci. in' 4\dxi(rTov — ' extend the blame over as small a surf ace [of tha 
 
 population] as possible.' 
 
Chap. 48.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 32I 
 
 Chaptek XLVII. — (a.) Sei SI koI ei TiSixricrai' /lij wpoffiroisTtrSai. 
 Pop. argues, if 6 Stj/ioj tiJc 7ro\ea?>' is the subject of TiSiic-naav, and tlie notion be 
 general, we should require a future sense, and /ta! iav aSLK^irtoo-i. But if it be 
 d Srifios Tuv MvriK-qvaiav, inasmuch as the orator has just denied that they were 
 guilty, we should expect eSti, not Set This, it seems to me, is to tie down the 
 speaker rather too closely to his words. Cf. SLKalass o6j ni) SeT Sitt<t>ei7pai, where, 
 at any rate, we might have expected xp^j. Or is ei iiSiHriirav to be rendered—' if 
 we are to assume that they have wronged us,' ' assuming that they have wronged 
 U.S ' ? just as cTttep (i^ 69. b) moans ' if, as is the case,' but is sometimes employed 
 in stating h position, not really correct, but necessarily assumed as the basis of 
 an eKey^is — 'if, as we are for the present to assume.' Cf. Ivi. Kriig. does not 
 hesitate to read iSu. it,j) Trpa<rTToii7<reai.—'noi to take it up' 
 
 sc. as a ground of quarrel. Arn. refers to Theophrastus Trep! Elpaveias. See 
 Sheppard's note on the passage, from which it appears that m^ ■7rpoa-!roii7creat, 
 like ov (prifii, may mean — ' to make as if it were not the case,' ' to pretend not.' 
 But from the epigram there quoted — 
 
 €i KoiSopoT Tiy, eap 6 KoiZopoifievos 
 fi}] npoffnot^rat, XoiSopeTrat Koidopwv — 
 
 it seems that the word meant primarily, ' to make,' or ' take to oneself, take it 
 as applying to oneself;' an interpretation which will hold good here, and I believe 
 in all cases, and explain the offending S6^ii in Theophrastus, which all the 
 editors have given up. The connexion between not ' talking up ' a matter of 
 offence and not ' noticing ' it, is near enough to have produced the confusion. 
 KaBi^if. efij is formed from the second person sing, of the perfect pass, of 
 iX"' ^^^ follows the an,alogy of such words, i. e. it means ' a way of having,' or 
 ' holding' in this place, maintenance. Kriig. says it is peculiar to Thucyd., and 
 refers to Lobeck, Fhrynichus, p. 351. Just so the old English 'haviour' (now 
 behaviour) is formed from the verb 'to have.' 'Nor the dejected haviour of 
 the visage.' — Hamlet. eKTrjj, the noun from the third person, we have in com- 
 pounds, e. g. irA.eoveKTTjs. 
 
 {b.) aZiKT]9rivai.. Cf.i. I20,d. 5i/ca/»s — ' on strict grounds of 
 
 justice,' the 'summum jus,' which often iis 'summa injuria.' xaX rh 
 
 K\4a>yos — ' Cleon's point, the identity of justice and expediency in our revenge, 
 is found to be incapable of subsisting in it at one and the same time.' There is a 
 slight impropriety in the use of a/io, as if he had forgotten that he had spoken 
 of the identification of the two things, instead of the two things separately. 
 iv avTcf — sc. tif ri/ioiptTa-eai, to be supplied from Tifiaiplas. Pop. and Goll. 
 Peile aptly compares ta-xioniv r^Sf following, and referring to Trjs vpo<r6Sov, 
 ilvi. Dobree, t^ out^. Kriig., Talirf, but needlessly. 
 
 ChAPTEE XLVIII.— (a.) jvSvTes . . . iretdeffee. Poppo, with Eost 
 (Gr. Ch-. 129. 4. c), objects to the old rendering of these words— '2««)» inteU 
 lexeritis,' &c. The meaning of yp6pTi5 here is, what it always \s—'whenyov, 
 have found out; implying a conclusion the result of some previous information 
 or instruction. 
 
 (b.) irpbs roils ipayrlovs. I do not see much in Poppo's remark, 'sed 
 
322 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Athenienses tunc non adversus hostes (Peloponnesios) sed super adversariis 
 (Mytileneis') consultabant.' The Bentiment is general, though, as usual, 
 inclusive of the case in question. There seems a sort of antithesis between 
 ^ov\evea6ai irphs (to deliberate looking to^ and therefore not yet in contact with^ an 
 enemy) and ^iriiitv /ter^ ipywv [actually and in very deed assailing him). * The 
 man who deliberates wisely, looking to his enemies, is in a stronger position than 
 he who recklessly with violent acts assails them' The argument is directed against 
 the notion that strength is evidenced by action only, and not by words. Kriig. 
 would insert the article after ¥i. 
 
 Chaptbe XLIX. — (o.) Siiws, i.e. notwithstanding what might have been 
 inferred from xxxvi., that they (viz. the people) had repented, and ii large 
 majority were in favour of the repeal. The omission of the article before 
 avTiTrdXaii proves, as Popp. rightly remarks, that it is to he taken in close con- 
 nexion with the predicate ^T/fleifTwy — ' were delivered in most palpable opposition 
 to each other.' Arn. says, ' so in the debate in the Koman senate on the punish- 
 ment of the accomplices of Catiline, the motions of Caesar and Cato were 
 juaA.i(rTo avTi-KaKat [what authority is there for this word ?] ; and although D. 
 Silanus and several other persons had proposed motions nearly to the same 
 effect as Cato's, yet Cato's was adopted by the aristocratical party as expressing 
 most strongly and decidedly what they wished. See Cic. ad Attic, xii. 21.' 
 ayx^^fJi-aKoi. The Sch. explains ^771;^ Ifff-at Kal ffx^Shv TTapa.nXi}aiou Thueyd. 
 repeats the word iv. 134, vii. 71. It seems to be a relic of the old poetic lan- 
 guage, which fell into disuse after Thucydides. 
 
 (fe.) '6Trws fi)i tpdacrdtrTis ttjs -TrpoTepas, Bekk., Kriig., Arn.; rrjs kTepas, 
 Popp. ; BeuTcpos vulgo, which GoU. adopts, but says, * non sanum est, nisi 
 dictum eodera sensu quo erepas.' Though the authority is so preponderant 
 against devTepas, it certainly had struck me that by suspending the sentence at 
 tfl), the whole might be considered equivalent to Siras ^ Sevrepa vavs (p&daiura /lii 
 ivprj [or fvpuiri, sc. ol yavraty understood in vavs^ Sie(p9ap^4f7iv T^y TriXif — * that 
 the second ship might not {having got beforehand) Jind the city destroyed.' This 
 had, I found, struck Dale also, who explains — ' that by the previous arrival of 
 the second.they might avoid finding the city ruined,' and quotes two cases of 
 iu); similarly used in ii. 3. But long before either of us, Peile wrote: 'The 
 truth is fi^ is not here to be taken in connexion with iirus in the common sense 
 of lest, but is to be carried over (fiBaa-dinis t^s Seurepaj — which words declare, as 
 it were in passing, the manner in which what follows was to be prevented — to 
 eSpairi Sif<peapfi(i'Tiv—that they may not (the second galley having outstripped 
 the first) find the city already destroyed.' 
 
 (0.) irpoe'ixi Vi^fpf Kol vuktI p.d\i(rra. It is obvious that here, 
 where Thucydides is expatiating on the greatness of the feat, /iaAio-ro is not to 
 be rendered 'at most,' but rather 'at least.' See note on i. 118, in accordance 
 with which it would mean — 'aw nearly as may be.' airouSi) rod 
 
 ■7!\o V — ' zealous prosecution of the voyage.' 
 
 {d.) olytji . . . iretpvpaiiiva. It is probable that the wine was an addi- 
 tion to the common fM^a, a cake of meal and oil used for the rations of the 
 rowers. /iSfa- SA0ito Tre<pvpttiJ.4ya i/'SaTi Kol i\alai, Hesych. Cf. Arist. Fac. i, 
 ■^9.- 55" Flutus irai. naro p.ipos — 'turn and turn about.' 
 
Chap. 50.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 323 
 
 aK\6KOTov. Pelle renders 'cross,' '■untoward,' ' unHndlt/,' 'against the 
 grain.' iaov avey. cf. i. 2. a. ^TriicoTaycTai. Pop, 
 
 doubts whether this means ' insuper appellator' or 'postea appellatur.' There 
 seems little practical difference : (cuTaytTcu (comes to her moorings) ivi {close 
 on the heels of the first). Cf. viii. 28. a. 4iriKa7(iyoiiTai. 
 
 (e.) irapk roa-ovTov ^\9e KifSivov. This phrase (which recurs vii. 2) 
 has called forth a good deal of remark, for .the usual way of rendering it would 
 he — * so little short of danger did Mytilene come,' which is absurd, as it was 
 within an ace of destruction, but actually in danger, and not short of it at all. 
 Are wo, then, as Am. suggests, to consider nivSmos like our 'danger,' an 
 equivocal word sometimes implying ' the thing of which there is a danger ' ? 
 But (i) desiderantur exempla; and (2) he has shown that danger 'from its 
 derivation (damnum, damniarium, danneggiare) always has a bad sense, whereas 
 KivZvvos and KivZvviiw have not.' Bloomfield supposes there is some confusion 
 between ^s rocovrov kiv^vvov and Trap^ Toffovrov oiiK aTrctjAero — but this is telling 
 us what Thucydides might have written, not explaining what he did write. 
 Peile tries to escape the difBculty by searching for a similar equivoque in Eng- 
 lish. ' Thus far did all Mitylene {ti-ev opposed to Tout &XKovs) go danger-ward.' 
 He compares Dem. c. Mid. § 18, piKav irapa tovt' oli/xeifoy — ' but for this,' i. e. 
 short of this- .^sch. c, Ctes. sub finem, irap' ovSev ^\dov airoKre^vaL — * came next 
 to nothing short of putting to death.' The old version, apparently approved by 
 Pop., is perhaps the safest — ' in iantum periculum Mytilene venit,' which may 
 be explained, 'up to such a pitch of danger did Mytilene come, and stand 
 therein,' or so much risk did Mytilene run, Ttapa denoting ' motion up to the 
 side of a thing.' See i. 29, ad finem. See Grote's remarks upon these two 
 speeches. Without detracting from their general fairness and ability, it is, I 
 think, impossible not to feel that they are coloured by a feeling towards Cleon, 
 not unlike that between advocate and client. 
 
 Chapter L. (a.) yvCttfiri K\iwvos~the proposal of Cleon; on Cleon's 
 
 motion, as we should say. 
 
 (i.) KXrjpoiix""' • • • aT€ir£ju>|/ov. I do not think it necessary to sup- 
 pose that these KXrjpoOxoi went into permanent personal occupation of their allot- 
 ments. See the accounts of the other revolts, viii. 22, 23, and Xen. i. 6, ii. 2. 
 It seems unlikely that so large a number of citizens should have been exempted 
 from the onerous local duties at Athens. Nor, as Bockh urges, could there 
 have been many Athenian kleruchs in Lesbos at the time of the Sicilian expe- 
 dition, for Thuoyd. mentions the Athenian settlers at other places, sc. Histiaja 
 and ^o-ina, as forming part of the expedition, but says nothing of these. Grote 
 subioinl (note, vi. 352), 'We might push this argument further, and apply the 
 same inference to an earlier period, the eighth year of the war (iv. 75), when 
 the Mitylenaans were so active in their aggressions upon Antandrus, and the 
 other towns originally Mitylensan possessions on the mainland.' Cf . Clinton, 
 F. S 389 Probably they received rent as absentee landlords. On the 
 KLvpo'vxi-^. see Diet, of Antig., which has all the necessary infoi-mation from 
 py^l^li Talo/iE'""- See note i. 99. c. voXicr/iara. 
 
 Pop. refers to iv. 52. On the fate of Paches, see Grote vl 553. 
 
 T 2 
 
324 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. lBook III. 
 
 Chapter LI. — (a.) Mivdan r'^v vri<rov. It was a peninsula in Strabo's 
 time, and the map by the surveying officers, given in Arn.'s edition, shows that 
 it is now completely united to the mainland. Similar aggregations of al- 
 luvial soil have taken place on the coasts of Greece, e. g. at the mouth of the 
 Acheloiis, at the Leucadian peninsula, at Thermopyte, and most probably at 
 Sphacteria and the Gulf of Pylos. 
 
 (6.) rovs Tls\owovyq(Tiovs . . . ovcas fJL^ TTOtuvrai. Am. makes this 
 an anacolouthon, the latter clause standing for the infinitive which was to follow 
 according to the original conception of the sentence; ^ovKetrdai ought to have 
 an infinitive, but Poppo says it follows the analogy of many other verbs, which 
 sometimes substitute Sirws k.t.X., and in this case more readily, because it is 
 so far off in the sentence that the mind slides into some cognate notion such aj 
 irpovdviJ.i7ro. Kriig. supplies <^uA.oK7)j' ex^'^' ahrSOei* is — thereon 
 
 the spot, or rather from the spot, i. e. Minoa. Ka.vBdi'ovTis — 
 
 'undetected.' BovS6pov. Budorum, a promontory and town of 
 
 Salamis over against Minoa, called in ii. 94, t^s ^aXa/uvos rh a.KpcoTriptoi' to 
 nphs Vl^yapa bpSjv. 
 
 (e.) i\tjjv K.T.X. All this must be admitted to be very obscure. Strange 
 to say, Arn., our great resource, does not make anything clear by his note. He 
 quotes GoU., ' oTri Niirafas, " on the side of Niscea," is opposed to t)) Ik tijs 
 r)Tretpov,' which, considering that Nisaea Itself was on the mainland, at least 
 requires explanation. Minoa was an island shutting in on the S. a semicircular 
 roadstead, with of course entrances E. and W. at its two extremities. NisiEa, 
 the port of Megara, abutted on this roadstead, bearing NNE. of Minoa. 
 Megara lay a mile further inland, N. or NNW. of Minoa. Now it seems the 
 entrance on the E. or Athenian side between the island and mainland was 
 narrowed and blockaded by two moles terminating in towers, one from the Island, 
 the other from the mainland near Nisaja, so constructed, we may infer, as to 
 command the passage and afford means of communication from one shore to 
 the other. Pop. asks. How do you know that this was on the E. and not the 
 W. of the island ? We answer, because the English ofiicers have observed 
 vestiges of works there. Of the other side we hear nothing, and must con- 
 clude that some natural obstructions, probably want of water (if we may judge 
 by the appearance of the ground and modern soundings), prevented on this side 
 ingress into the roadstead. Nicias with engines from shipboard first attacked 
 these two towers on the projecting moles, and thus cleared the entrance into 
 the harbour, and then iirETefx'Ce k.t.\. Now GoU. makes these words mean 
 (and I suppose A. agrees with him, for he says nothing) that he went to the 
 other end or W. of the island, and there blocked up a bridge from the main- 
 land by which succours from Nissea were occasionally thrown into the fort in 
 the island. But an inspection of the ground will show that such a bridge over 
 an arm of the sea would be a feat quite beyond the engineers of Megara ; and 
 secondly, if succours were thrown into Minoa from Nisaja, is it not more likely 
 they came by the moles and a drawbridge, which were quite near them, than 
 that they went round to the other side of the bay and built a hflge bridge for 
 the purpose ? May we therefore translate — ' he proceeded to build a wall of 
 defence, on the side of the mainland also, just at the point where, along a cause- 
 viay through a marsh, there was access for succours into the island V i.e. he cut 
 
Chap. 53.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 325 
 
 off w <ie mainland the communication between tlie mole from the mainland 
 and Nisaja, which communication consisted of a causeway or bridge over some 
 marshy ground. The reader will excuse the length of a note which deals with 
 a difficult point, as yet unexplained. rb U t?i ^^.(po«-on the 
 
 side of (1. e. loolting from) the mainland. Cf. i. 64. a. 
 
 Chapter LII.— (a.) TroKiopKeTtrBai, equivalent to (moiiiv^iv t^p TroKiopxiav. 
 
 . ch. 109. elpriiiivov K.T.K. Pop. cf. V.' 17. 2, on the history. 
 
 \eyovT a— -to make the proposal,' i. e. to see whether they would consent to 
 the proposal. ^i PoiKovTm. Arn. says that the indicative arises 
 
 from a blending of the dramatic and narrative together, that is to say, the 
 mood and tense employed by the speaker are coupled to the third person of 
 narrative composition. He also supposes that the apodosis is suppressed after 
 0oi\mTai, quoting iv. 37, iKitpv^di, re ei fioiXoiVTO rh SirAa irapaSovpai xal atpas 
 auTobs 'AB-nvalois Serre ^avKiZcrai 'oti hv imimis SoK^. But, as Peile remarks, 
 'this very passage points out the construction of the'last clause to be S<rT€ roiis 
 Te aS'maus k.t.\. We might indeed have expected fio-Te Tois fiev aSiKovs k.t.K., 
 but the clause begins as if rois re fiii o^.eVoi were to follow.' All the in- 
 finitives are governed by ^oiXovTcu, and rois Aaice5aii/.oviovs is the subject of 
 KO\d^eiy. 
 
 (b.) rovs Te aS'iKovs. Pop. considers that this te connects xp^o'^f^'" and 
 KoXaCeiy, and supplies SiKatrrhs before the latter verb from the preceding 
 SiKaa-rais. This, tliough somewhat harsh, is not I think more so than many 
 other things in Thucyd. re is used because the idea implied in KoA.afeij' is 
 a mere epexegesis of tlie general notion SiKa<rrais xP^o'^t^"'. both being included 
 in that ef 'trial' — 'for judges to try them and be merciful therein.' In this 
 way the future is not required, which seems necessary to Kriig., who makes r c 
 contradictory to Sc, referring to his own Gr. § 69, 16. 
 
 (c.) Tif aaBeviffrdrtf — 'in the last degree of feebleness.' Bl. quotes 
 imitations from later writers. dniKaKetrdfievot. The junior 
 
 student should notice the force cf the middle voice — caused them to be summoned, 
 ei ri AaKeSat/iovious K.r.\. The ri is repeated because the Lacedgemonians 
 meant to put the question as strongly as possible : ' whether they had in any 
 point done any service' Arn. So in the second Punic war after the capture of 
 Capua the Romans aslied — ' Ecquis Campanorum bene meritus de republic^ 
 Homan^ esset ? ' Pop. ol 5' eKeyov airr^udfjietfoi — 'but they 
 
 replied by ashing, &c., and appointing,' i. e. * their reply consisted in having 
 asked,' Peile. 
 
 (d.) TTpord^avres (T(pSiv avrwv 'Affr ii^a.x<^v — 'having appointed 
 Astymachus to be their spokesman.' 
 
 Chaptee LIII. — (a.) TV A'^>' TrapdSo(Tiv x.r.K. This speech merits the 
 praise which has been so generally bestowed upon it. Even Dionysius says — 
 ras iv rats eirra $i0Ao^s (pepoiJ-eyas riiv nXaradan SrifiriyopUy riBaijiaKa Trap' 
 ouSeu ovrus erepov, uis rh fii] ^t^aaaviffBai ^utjSc Kar€'jrtr€Trj5fV(TBai, a.\7]Be7 Se rtpi 
 Kal (pva-iK^ KeKo<riJ.rj(r8ai xP'^i'""''- ''" '''^ 7'^P ^''Bv/i-fi/^ara irdBous earl fiiord, koX 
 % Ki^is ovK a.Tro<Trp4cj>ov(ra ras aKods- ?( re crvi'Seiris eveir-fis, Kal ra ffxhiMra rSiv 
 irpay/iaTaitf tdia. ovk iv &KAais. Dobree conjectures fii- SWoir, 
 
326 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 but it is unnecessary, such repetitions of tlie prep, being quite legitimate. 
 (Pop. quotes vi. 82, and Bernbard's &ynt. p. 211.) Some difiBeulty is felt about 
 the three participles in the nom. masc. Pop.'s explanation is best. He makes 
 Ss^ti/i€>'oi equivalent to ^tte! ^SsfojiieSa, and prints without a comma at ijiXv 
 — ' and, (when me had now accepted your proposal) thinking not to be 
 placed in the hands of any other judges than yourselves, as indeed we are not, 
 that so,' &c. ; repeat the ovk iv iXKoa after i(!)j.iv. iv is, says Kriig., the 
 proper preposition for this sense. We may cite T:tfma6!ii)i.fv iv \i\uv, Ixvii. 
 ip€p€(Tdai — carry off for ourselves. hfjupoTipuv — sc. 'justice and 
 
 a fair trial, in accordance with the established customs of Greece.' 
 /i^ ruiapT^Haiiev, with the mAiaative, lest we have Zorf, indicating the strength 
 of the apprehension, Jelf. 
 
 (S.) liii oil Koivol awo$rJTe — 'lest ye do not turn out fair (impartial) 
 Judges^ Koivis, a man who is as much on one side as the other. See Theopbrastus 
 Tlepi 'Ap^aKsias. Kal TrapaKKijOeU irphs SiaiTai' fi^ fi6vov ^ irdpe<rTt fiovKeirdai 
 apefTKetv, aAAa Kal T^ aj/TiS^Ky, 'Iva Koivhs eltfai Sort], Cf. * aequus.' 
 
 (c.) TTpoKaT7]yoplas iirep^TTi^a — no hill of indictment. Here 
 
 we have both the genitive and accusative absolute without any perceptible dis- 
 tinction in meaning. Elmsley's rule therefore (Berac. 693) that the gen. 
 denotes the existence of a fact, the accusative absolute some one's impression 
 about it, is not of universal application, trpo- is pleonastic. See i. 23. d. 
 Peile. Pop. supposes that as ySpax" 6v is frequently used impersonally (Matth. 
 564; Rost, 131. 4), it retained the same case when connected, as happened 
 here, with a noun — ^just as we find 5o|o>' toCto, and the like. 
 
 {d.) elirSfras t( KLvSvveve.y — * having said something to run the risk,' 
 i. e. not to run the risk before we have said something (without having said) in 
 our favour. Similar is the expression (i. 20) ^ovK6iiivoi Spiaavris ti zeal mv 
 Suvivaai, where see note. 
 
 (e.) & /ail ^ridels \6yos, equivalent by a very common idiom to ri /ij) 
 ^rjdTJvai K6yov. Cf. i. 100. * The fact of its having been omitted to be spoken 
 might afford ground for setf~accusation, that, viz., had it been uttered, it would 
 have saved us.' S^Si^ev . . . TrpoKarayvSvTes — * we apprehend, 
 
 not so mucli- lest, having beforehand passed judgment against our merits that 
 they are inferior to your own, ye make it (i. e. the fact) a ground of complaint ; 
 but rather lest, while you are gratifying others (i. e.for the gratification of), we 
 should be brought to a trial already decided against us.' So we must translate 
 the passage if (pepovns x^P^^ ^® incapable of standing with the subject o^Kadtarta- 
 fie6a. I confess that, although Arn., Pop., and Goll. dissent, I cannot consider 
 it proves that (p4povTes x°-P^v may not mean, as we say, ' being made the vehicles 
 of a favour.' If the orator bad merely meant to say x'"P'C<iME>'<"> te would not 
 have gone out of his way to select an unusual expi-ession. The fact that it is 
 uncommon seems to imply that the ordinary meaning is not intended, other- 
 wise \vc have to account for the violent disruption of the nominative (pepovres 
 from its natural adjunct KoBiiTTfi^eda, and this at best can only be done awk- 
 wardly.* * The words &\Kois xiipiv ipepovre^ aro inserted, like fp6aa-d(r7]s ttJs 
 Sevrepas in c. 49, apart from the rest of the sentence, as a mere epexegesis of 
 the ij.il, i. a. here, of the manner in which the thing apprehended was likely 
 to hnp[)un.' — Peile. 
 
Chap. 55.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 327 
 
 Chapter LIV.-(a.) & fxoi^f" SUctia. See note, xliv. vphsrhSid- 
 
 <popa—'our claims of justice against the animosity of the Thehans and towards 
 you.' — Am. He does not quote any similar cases. Pop. refers to i. 38. But 
 neither in that sentence — oBre Tph^ tovs S\Xous, oSts e's r}fia,s ToiotSe ua-lv — is 
 there any such contrast of the prepositions ; nor in the ^s rh irpdy/xaTa—Trpis 
 Toi/s \6yov5 found iu the opening sentence of the third Olynthiac. Besides, ra 
 Sia(f>opa does not mean 'the animosity of the Thehans,' but ' our points of dif- 
 ference with the Thebans,' • our quarrel,' &c. I do not therefore think that 
 Arn.'s distinction is tenable. But from another passage of Demosthenes, p. 1 1 3. 
 11. (Brenii), cis ^aiKeas ws irphs (TvfL^idxovs eTropev^TOf we may, perhaps, conclude 
 that irphs denotes a more particular and immediate reference, and this agrees 
 with the present instance. 
 
 (i.) :pt\avs St vofil^ovTas — for ei Se :j>l\ovs Ti/ias yo/iifeT€. Another 
 instance of the desire to vary the form of statement in the second clause, 
 e.Ktending even to anacolouthon. ^vviwiee/j.si'o i — 'joining you in the 
 
 attack against.' 
 
 (c.) iiSvoi BoiuTwv. This is an oratorical statement natural under the 
 circumstances. We learn from Herod, viii. 50 that the Thespians did so also. 
 And Pop. quotes Pausan. ix. 32. 4, an assertion to the same effect concerning 
 the Haliartians. 
 
 (d.) Trepiea-TTi — ' when very great alarm encompassed Sparia.' Poppo quotes 
 Kivdvvos Ka\ <p6$os 7rept€(rTTj r^v TriKiy, Dem. De Cor. § 195, and Tacitus, Hist. 
 iv. 79, ' circumsteterat eivilem metus;' add wepieKTTTjKei, viii. i. 
 airarrTai'Tcov, According to Pop. the gen. of the objecij after (p6lSos, 'about 
 the Helots when they revolted and established themselves in Ithome.' There 
 seems, however, no objection to making airoinavTaii the gen. absolute, 'upon 
 occasion of the revolt' &c. ; and Peile judges this more proper, owing to the 
 absence of the article before ip6&os. See i. loi. There are said to have been 
 three Messenian wars. The first from E.o. 743 to the capture of Ithome, B.C. 
 724. The second from B.C. 685 to the taking of Ira, B.C. 671. The third (that 
 mentioned here) from B.C. 465, 01. 78. 4, to B.C. 455. Diodorus places the 
 earthquake Olymp. 77. 4. 
 
 (e.) 7iij.S>v airav. Am. rightly notices the emphasis. ' Our own citizens,' 
 so. not allies and •contingents such as you are iu the habit of sending. Cf. ii. 
 39. !»■• 34- 
 
 Chaptbe LV.— (a.) iKirp^riinepov, cf. i. ^S—' nothing out of the way,' 
 ' nothing remarTcable or extraordinary,' ' unseemly.' On the fact cf. Herod, vi. 
 108. aTTuKvitn — shrunlcbach. 
 
 (b.) &\\ais re Kal ots eS TvaBtiv Tis k.t.\. This formula seems to be 
 one of those found in most languages, where a man takes his own particular 
 case, and throwing it into general language, endeavours so to gain for it the 
 sanction of some general principle which it is supposed to imply. So the 
 French use 'on,' the Germans -man,' and we ourselves 'a man,' or 'one.' It 
 is true that a German author (Muersch. de rebus Flatt^ens. pp. 67—69) has 
 taken three pages to say this, but I do not think after all he has said any more. 
 
 'Pr_ ' and to give them up now became dUhonourable, especially in the case of 
 
 persons whom a man, after receiving kind treatment, and at his own entreaty 
 
328 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 too, has called in to T>e allies, and received from them the rights of citizenship.' 
 D.'s version fails to express this. ri irapayfeKK6iJ.iva — present 
 
 participle — * orders as they were given.' 
 
 (c.) T!o\iTfias fieri^a^fv. Some confusion has arisen among historical 
 writers from the fact that the Platseans were twice admitted to rights of citi- 
 zenship at Athens. The first occasion was that here mentioned, when they 
 received la-mo\iT(la., This included, according to Am., the right of inter- 
 marriage, as well as that of purchasing and inheriting land in Attica, but not 
 that of voting, or eligibility to ofiices of state. He compares the modified 
 rights of citizenship enjoyed by the Cserites, and the other peoples, those of 
 Antium e.g. and Velitrse, connected with early Rome, on which see Nieb. 
 ii. 41. But after the cruel capture of their city the Plataeans were admitted to 
 a more intimate civil relationship — that is to say, they were considered eligible 
 to all offices except the arcbonship, and certain family hereditary priesthoods. 
 There was, however, a restriction as to residence. See the words of the decree, 
 Demosthenes Kara U^alpas — sc, /i^ eleVrw — /i^ e{ipofi4vai Trapa rov B^nov tov 
 'ABrivaiav. 
 
 (d.) ^Iijyeio-Oe — properly, 'to lead the way in order that others may 
 follow i' hence its various meanings — as *prseire verbis,' to instruct by giving 
 out words to be repeated. See Liddell and Scott. Here then it may be in the 
 primarj^ sense, * set the example and expect us to follow the lead, or the secon- 
 dary, 'school us to do.' Yet perhaps it is best after all to refer it to the 
 Tiyeiiovla of Sparta, &c. — ' which you in your character of hegemones cause your 
 allies to do.' Cf. i. 74. 
 
 Chaptee LVI. — (a.) ri reXfvra'iov . . . SC awep. Pop., holding the 
 plural to be inadmissible, would read Strtp. GoU. compares fj iv oh after 6.KK0 
 Ti, xxxviii. But the phrase S.\\o ti may be considered as inclusive of a plural 
 notion, t!) rtX. is the accusative after ^ivKne. 
 
 (J.) IfpofiTivlcf, not certainly equivalent to yov/irinia, the regular monthly 
 festival, for, as Pop. remarks, TeKevravTos tov ij,nv6s, ii. 3, is said of daybreak 
 on the day after the Theban inroad. Therefore Upofiifvia seems to have been 
 a generic term, including vovixrjvla and every other ' holyday ' in the month. 
 Pop. refers to Buttmanu's excellent glossary to the Meidias, who explains 
 eoprri — 'ipsum soUnne,' 'a festival;' ieponrivla — 'dies solennis' 'the day of a 
 festival.' Am. quotes Schol. Pind. Nem. iii. 4: Upop-Ttviai. al iv r^ jurjrl 
 lepal ri/xepai. KaTa\aiiPivovT a 5 — pres. particip. — ' while in the 
 
 act of occupying.' 
 
 (c.) 61 yap Tij! aiiriKa xpff^f-V iliav re koJ ^Kfivuv r$ vo\ffiltj!. 
 ' The re is not out of its proper place, as Arnold seems to think, here or in i. 49. 
 Nay, had it been as he supposes, t^ re aurina xpio'^Mf "i""'' ical iKiivmv iroKefiiw, 
 we must have had the article repeated before €K.iivav, and the meaning would 
 have been very different — " both by your present advantage, and ly their hos- 
 tility " (cf. 64. sub fin. t!ij' rj^. t€ k.t.\.). ^yhe^eas the use of tc koI here is 
 to connect both xpifV*' ^M"" and ^Ktivwv ■noK^ixiif with Tcf aiirlica, and we may 
 translate, "for if you mean to form your notions of (or, as we familiarly use 
 the word, " take ") juslice by what is at this moment at once your interest, and 
 their unkindly feeling toioards us." Strictly speaking the arrangement should 
 
Chap. 56.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 329 
 
 have been t^ avTlxa ifiuv re xpil^^f-f "ol iicelvav iroKfjiitf, but there was a 
 reason for placing in immediate connexion i^uj' . . . ixeivav, the two parties 
 whose object was the same, though in one case from motives of expediency, 
 in the other of revenge.' — Peile. This seems correct with regard to the non- 
 transposition of T6. Yet it is hard to understand how the interests of one 
 party and tlie hostility of tlie other could he spoken of as the same thing, how- 
 ever much they tended to the same object. . The peculiar position of re appears 
 to indicate only that t^ irapavriKa belongs to both 'your immediate interest,' 
 and ' their immediate hostility ' — sc. both motives for the moment being more 
 urgent than they would afterwards be. Pop. objects to talcing \^\|/e<rfl6 as the 
 analogy of the English verb ' to take ' points out, and seems to think the diffi- 
 culty insoluble. But are we not justified by such expressions as eV opip 
 \aPe!v, ' to define,' iv riirtf Ka^ilv, ' to sJcetch,' and the like ? See Aristot. 
 passim, and Theophrastas, cap. i., or tr. 'form your conception of justice.' 
 Others compare ii. 42, iii. 38. Kriig. reads iroK^txius — in a hostile way, like 
 enemies, which is certainly simple, and good. Cf. SiKaias infra. 
 
 (d.) €1 &pa. TiiJ.dpTTiTat — 'if as U seems you are to assume that we did 
 wrong.' Cf. xlvii. 
 
 (e.) at (U^ Ta |i|(i((>opa . . . auTois — al. avrois. Am., Pop., and GoU. 
 seem to decide upon the first — ' intriguing in safety (cf. i. 56) what was expe- 
 dient for themselves with reference to the invasion.' Peile prefers the latter, 
 making avTo7f refer to -ry Espfou Supd/iet — ' those who did not, in security them- 
 selves, negotiate underhand what was conducive to them (the Persians) /or their 
 invasion.' a.cr<pa\4a is equivalent to Si' o<r(^a\e(as, and we may see from it 
 how adverbs were originally the datives of nouns. Cf. iii. 82. Krug. unites 
 airrois with irpao-irocTes rather than with ^vii<popa, making irphs tV e</)oSoc — 
 with a view to the barbaric invasion. 
 
 (/.) TifirjSeVTes is Tci irpaJTo. They received the ctpiffTeTo according to 
 the statement of Plutarch {in Vitd Aristid.), which there seems some reason for 
 doubting, as from the account of Herodotus we should infer that this honour 
 was paid to the Spartans. Grote, v. 254. iiy\ roU avTots—for 
 
 the very same conduct, 
 
 (g.) /cal rb (,viJL<pipov iJ.il SXAo Ti yo/j-lcrat. Arn. translates— ' aud we 
 should hold it as our real interest to retain an ever-enduring sense of the services 
 of brave and faithful allies, while toe take care of whatever our immediate 
 advantage may seem to call for.' This is elegant, as Arn.'s versions always 
 are. Yet it appears doubly defective, (i) in ignoring the skilful manner in 
 which the language slides into that of general principles, and^ (2) in a 
 faulty rendering of the well-known collocation, ^e^aiov tV x«P"'> wl"'-''! 
 is of course, not 'an enduring sense,' but one's sense enduring. Peile 
 translates the whole-' and yet men ought to be seen uniformly holding the same 
 opinion of the same principles of conduct, and to consider their own interest to 
 be no other than (the interest of) their brave allies, viz. so long as these have the 
 arateful acJcnowledgment of their good conduct always warranted unto them, 
 at the same time that that which on any occasion may be our immediate interest is 
 secured.' He therefore understands ri ^viJ.^ipov again before to,v |u^f.ax<.n 
 This looks improbable; is it not gen. after rots ayaBo7s?-not to think that 
 expediency or good policy consists in any thing else than in this, when viz. men 
 
330 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Booz III. 
 
 retain fJieir gratitude to the good among their allies as something permanent, 
 while at the same time in any case our own immediate interest {vfJ.iv, identifying 
 themselves by a common expedient with those whom they advise) is secured, 
 Donaldson adopts the conjecture of Dobree : Kttv rh irapavTiKa irov fj.^ utpeXifiov 
 KaBia-TrjTai — ' even though expediency be for the moment against it.' This is 
 very plausible, but I cannot help thinking that the speaker in this case would 
 hardly have used so strong an expression as KaB^rrfiTat, i. e. they would hardly 
 have admitted that a case of expediency had been actually established against 
 them. The language is vague on purpose, because, as Peile properly remarks, 
 they dared not, for fear of givirg offence, openly assert that the Lacedaemonians 
 had been guilty in this respect. They accordingly put the proposition in as 
 general terms as possible. Heilmann's conjecture exoviri (dat. plur.) is neat and 
 ingenious but unnecessary ; so also is ot &;/ suggested by Kriig. for 3toc. 
 
 Chapter LVII. — (a.) ov ycLp a(pav7j KptveTre k.t.a. Dr. Donaldson 
 has selected this passage as an illustration of his tertiary predicates (ffr. Gh", 
 § 493). anpanfj and ^e^tttwi' are, he says, tertiary predicates; and he translates 
 - — * this judgment which you will give, will not be unknown ; for you the Judges 
 are praised, and we the parties are free from reproach. The whole matter has 
 been elsewhere discussed. I can only observe here that the above version 
 seems to me to ignore the force of ou5e and to detach iiratvovfievoi from its 
 place, being as it is an adjunct of the subject, and not a predicate. Translate — • 
 'for it is not in a comer that you will decide this trial, but as men of reputation 
 concerning us who are neither on our parts despicable (i. e. insignijicant)J See 
 notes i. 36, a., 49. d. iiraivovfievoi — not a simple assertion, ye 
 
 are praised, but 'men of repute,* as distinct from af^oi/eTs. Kotvo7s 
 
 — sc. at Olympia and Delphi. 
 
 (J.) AaKeSaifioylovs—QriPalovs k.t.X. ' The names of nations are some- 
 times used in Greek without the article, when they are intended to convey the 
 notion of some well-known points in the national character.' — Arn. But it is 
 giving a false impression to confine this to the names of nations. It is pai-t of 
 a general idiom, the absence of the article in Greek producing the same effect 
 as the introduction of the indefinite article a in English — i. e. some reason for 
 what follows, or some particular condition of its predication, is thereby sug- 
 gested. To this idiom may be referred the varying use of the participle with and 
 without the article. Thus, Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 1175, nKovaa (sine articulo) tA'^. 
 fLav ; is equivalent to — 'what! a mother her own child ! ' 'RenAev, ' It will seem 
 a hard thing for Lacedajmonians (who are bound by such sacred obligations to 
 defend it) to sack Flatcea; and that . . .you should blot out their names for 
 Thebans ' (who were such well-known traitors to the cause). Compare ws M 
 AoLKeSat/ioviovs, iv. 34 ; Kal Toirif irphs 'ABjivalovs, iv. ; 5 ; and infra, Trepi(ti(riiiBa 
 
 K.T.\, 
 
 (c.) AirmWii/iefla — 'were in a fair way to he destroyed,' sensu imperfecto. 
 Arn. quotes iv $ {ra^etTTara flxov 'laivlav 01 iroKefAtoi, viii. 86. Add also iv. 3, 
 Tiw^lyovTo is KepKupav — 'were for hastening to Corcyra.' The speakers refer to 
 the period after the battles of Thermopyla; and Artemisium when their town 
 was burnt, and they with the Thespians took refuge in Peloponnesus (Herodotus 
 viii. 50). 
 
Chap. 58.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 33 1 
 
 (d.) BavdTov KplveaSai — 'put upon trial for our lives.' The gen. occurs 
 after judicial verbs of prosecution and sentencing: aiVioa-floi, Sim/cti;/, eirelieW, 
 einiy^iv, ypa(j>ecreai, &o. Cf. Kpii/ftrBai i(rej3e(aj, Xen. Cyc. i. 27; Jelf, § 501; 
 Matth. § 370; Host, log. 4. e. Just as, in Latin, crimen is understood, and so 
 produces a genitive after sucli verbs, we may here understand Cr])i.la. 
 TTspieditrfieffa 4k vavrav nAaTairjs — 'thrust aside ly all— all round — 
 Platmans though we be.' Kriig. cf. Arist. Fol. v. 5. 10, yiyvovnu iTTcJireis iit tov 
 Trepiui6i7(r$ai irepovs vtp' kr4pa)V ruv if ry oAi'yap;^i(f avTU>v. ar Lfi^priToi 
 
 — 'with none to come to our rescue,' uSui) iXirls — 'unica spes,' 
 
 Livy, xxi. ii> 
 
 Chapter LVIII. — (a.) ©eol ^vmiax'^o] are — ' the gods mho superintended 
 the league.' tJjx Sapeb,v k.t.X. These words contain (as Arn. 
 
 indicates) an evident reference to SeSi/jiev ^5) &\\ois X'^P'" 'pepcres — 'ash: hack 
 of them the gift they have asTcedfrom you, our lives' lit. not to kill those (= such 
 men as) it becomes you not. Peile well points out the difiference between this 
 aud ots oi) Trpeirei — 'us whom it becomes you not to kill.' See i. 40. Kriig. 
 prints this interpretation with a note of admiration, as if to ridicule it ; thougli 
 I confess I cannot see the absurdity, and it is quite in Thuc.'s manner. Kriiger, 
 with the Scholiast, makes auTairaiTTJaai follow o^ioO/iec — we claim from 
 you, as a return for our merits, that they should not,' &c. ccicftpopa 
 
 X^P'" — 'fair and honourable gratitude,' sc. from us, because you have acted 
 justly ; opposed to altrxp^^ X^P^^ — * disgraceful and dishonourable gratitude,' sc. 
 from the Thebans, for complying with their base request. Kaxiav is 'a 
 
 character for baseness,' as in l.ti. Kriig. notes similar uses of Svaat^aav (Soph. 
 Ant. 924), KiWos (Eur. Bel. 1097), ^tfev/ta (Eur. Med. 218). Cf. i. 33. a. 
 
 (i.) Kal irpovoovvTes — ' et nobis prospicienfes ; Kal ei quod post fia-re par- 
 ticulam positum est, respondet.' — Pop. 
 
 (c.) airoPAi'fiaTe yccp es iraTepav k.t.\. The verb here employed ex- 
 presses a particular and admiring attention, as it implies turning the eyes from 
 (airh) all other objects in order to fix them upon the one given. Cf. eVfluMp, as 
 aTro^Ke-Kovaiv eft (re ol &vepamt (Theophrast. Ch. ii.), and the instances collected 
 by Sheppard ad loc. 
 
 (rf.) 4ireiiiia(Ti. The word is poetic, says Krug. It'appears that Plutarch 
 (nt. Arist.) when speaking of these annual offerings makes no mention of 
 vestments. Bl. therefore conjectures kimiixaiTi. 'Perhaps in Plutarch's time 
 poverty had induced the Platajans to drop this part of the ceremony' (Thirl- 
 wall, ii. 393). Arn. believes 'that clothing was offered in the same supersti- 
 tious feeling which prompted offerings of meat and drink; as if the dead were 
 cold in their disembodied state, and still required those reliefs to the necessities 
 of human nature which they had needed when alive. Cf. that wild story, 
 Herod v 92' There were two separate festivals: (i) The 'EAeuSepio, on the 
 4th of Boedromion (the day of the battle), celebrated every fifth year. 
 (2) The annual commemoration on the i6th of Mi«makterion. See Grote, v. 
 
 2-6 
 
 \e.) ^i/xf^axoi Sh ifiaixnoiS— 'allies, to tJieir old comrades in arms.' 
 
 rotairois.se. <pi\iais—B. species of nphs rh aw'^wSp.ii'oi/. 
 
 (/■.) Traph To7s aieiwais—' among those who lifted their hand against 
 
332 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 their own kindred' — such is the peculiar meaning of those compounds of alirds. 
 Cf. ouToSciiKToj, airixTovos, ^sch. Sep, v. Thebas, 735 ; avT6xeip, Soph. Antig. 
 1175; atpSeVrrjs, .SIsch. -B«m. 212.' — Pelle. Cf. Lobeck, Fhryn. p. 120. Pop. 
 
 {g,) arlfiovs ytpuv — i. e. &vev ri^iTJs — without the honour of the privileges. 
 Kriig. quotes &rifj.os rifiTJs rivos, Plate, Leg, 774 B ; and rov (rv/x$ov\€v€iVf Dem. 
 XV. 33. All the grammars notice the idiom. irphs Si — ' and besides.' 
 
 See xiii. b. iptifiovre. Some have supposed this to be a future tense. 
 
 See Matthias, Or. Gr. § 181. 2, and Buttmann in his larger Gr. Gfr. But the 
 present is occasionally united with the future, as in ii. 44, iv. 10. Pop. 
 
 (A.) Bvaias ras irarpious. These are the sacrifices that have just been 
 mentioned. Pop. points out that we must translate — ' take from those whofounded 
 them, the sacrifices,' 4c. ; not, as Port, has it, ' remove the sacred heredita/ry rites, 
 Sfc. of the founders,' because it is not forbidden in respect of these particular 
 founders, but as an enormity under any circumstances; and besides we should 
 have had atpaip-ijtreirde . . , r&v ilirafi4vwv Ka\ Kriaavrtov. These words do not, 
 I think, imply anything different, nor do they, as Bloomfield supposes, refer, 
 one to Upk and the other to Bvulas. Pop. justly remarks that the first being 
 an old-fttshioned word, the second is added to explain it, and give weight to 
 the expression. Somewhat similarly we have * acknowledge and confess,* * sins 
 and wickednesses,' &c. in our Liturgy. There is authority for eira^evuy, which 
 Kriig. thinks right, and iir(rafi4ya}v. See Buttmaun, Gr. Gr. in voce. 
 
 Chaptee LIX. — (a.) oXicTif (ni<(ipovi \a^6i'TttS — cf. oi/zei AaBeri', xxxviii. 
 Pop., as might be expected (cf. Ivi. b.), explains this — tpftaaffdai otxTif, 
 \a^6i/Tas (^oLvriv, sc. oIktov) — * spare us in pity, having taken it upon us.' It is 
 not quite clear, however, that it may not mean Kafiivras (rifjias) — 'having 
 estimated our case with a wise commiseration ,-' or it may be — * having taken us 
 to your friendship,' &c. Before (peia-aadat understand ^ffTi Se ttjs S6^t]s. 
 
 (b.) atrTddfiTjToy (cf. Ar. Aves, 170) is literally, ' incapable of being weighed 
 and estimated in the scales' — ' beyond the power of calculation.' rh ttjs 
 
 ^vp.<l>opas is only a more general and abstract way of saying ri ^vfi<popi, as 
 Am. renders — ' the nature of misfortune.' Arn. compares t!i ttis ypiiinis, ii. 
 87 ; Ta TT\s ifioXoyias, iv. 54. Add rb t^s tvxv^i iv. 18, vii, 61 ; and rb twi'Sc 
 in Soph, Sleet. 1203, • 
 
 ^yii {ppaffai/x &y, et rh twvS' eiiyovv trdpa, 
 
 (0.) ii/iets re, is irpiirov . . . iiapaioBrivai. The arrangement of these 
 words has excited great controversy. Hermann boldly strikes out yiyv6ijLf6a. 
 Poppo (ed. maj.) says the construction is airov/uEfia ^)) -yeycVflai . . . ^ijBe 
 ■napaSoBrivai, and that all the intervening clauses ought to have been expressed 
 by participles, but that by an anacolouthon we have ■yi7Ki|U€fla for yLyi/Sfufmi and 
 ^TTiKaKoifieSa for iTnxaKoi/j.ei'oi. Itt his small edition he is content to say : ' Tria 
 verba finita o(Tou/nf9a, kdrai yiy>'6fifda et iTriKoXoiinea inter se cohserere, et 
 ambo participia iiriffotiim/oi et vpo(pip6fiet'oi et inter se et cum illo alroiiJ.(6a 
 copulanda esse.' GoU. explains : alrov^LeSa ujuSy Trei<rai rdSe — aiToifie6a ipias /i<) 
 aixvn)LOViiV—iiciTai ylyvo)i.f9a xaX iiTiKa\ovfif6a /iii yiviffBcu, fn)8^ iropaSoe^cai. 
 Of this Arn. approves. It may be presumptuous to suggest anything against 
 such authority, but is it not possible to explain the whole simply by asyndeton ? 
 
Chap. 6o.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 333 
 
 a figure eminently natural in the agitated language of men pleading for their 
 lives. Thus : place a colon .ifter riSe and translate — ' we entreat you, invoicing 
 (lit. crying aloud to) the gods worshipped at the same altar, and those common to 
 all Greece, to allow us to persuade you in this matter ; pleading the oaths which 
 your forefathers swore never to forget, we put ourselves in the position of sup- 
 pliants to i/ou hy their tombs, and invoice the memory of those who sleep there, 
 that we may never he reduced beneath the power of Thebans, nor that we who were 
 their best friends should be delivered over to the mercy of their and our bitterest 
 enemies.' The only possible objection is that ajj-vniiovitv ought to refer to the 
 existing Lacedajmonians ; but surely the heroes of Plataea may reasonably be 
 represented as swearing for themselves and their descendants. There is no 
 reason to quarrel with Ke/t/irjcoTas — a poetic word is used ou purpose; and in 
 the version given I have tried to convey the plaintive and semi-poetical tone of 
 the speaker. 
 
 (d.) fleois Tous ifjioPaiiious, 'Gods who were worshipped at one and 
 the same altar, from a supposed congeniality in their nature, or from a relation- 
 ship subsisting between them. Here then it seems to imply those greater gods 
 Jupiter, Juno, Minerva, Apollo — who being all supposed to be of the same 
 race, might be made jointly the objects of prayer and sacrifice, while the local 
 gods and heroes of particular countries, and still more the gods of other nations, 
 could not be admitted to such an union with them.' — Arn. See also his ex- 
 cellent remarks, Pref. to vol. iii.; and of. .^Esch. Supplices, 222, irdyrav 5' 
 oj/attTwi' TMi'Se Kawofiaiiiav. Goll. understands i-t of gods to whom all Greece 
 might sacrifice in common, e. g. Olympian Jupiter, Pythian Apollo, &c. Poppo 
 calls them ' contubernales,' from Cic. ad Attic, xiii. 28. 
 
 (e.) uer' a!na>v irpa^avTes. 'Verba yuer' ah-rav videntur vel delenda 
 esse, vel mutanda in /car avrav (so. &i;;8a(«y).'— Goll. Most persons will I 
 think regard this as a specimen of Gbller's not unusual hypercriticism. He 
 objects : ' Chronology forbids us to believe that the speakers could have acted 
 with the victors of Platasa.' As though the whole force of the rhetoric did not 
 consist in identifying all the parties with their ancestors, and in asserting that 
 great doctrine of national morality, the uninterrupted continuity of the national 
 
 life. „ ., 
 
 (/.) \6-yav t€X6ut5v— the epexegesis of 'itrsp avayKawy. Pop. considers 
 the construction equivalent to that of X-fiyeu' or iraiieo-eai \6yov, and aptly quotes 
 Biov T^KiVTuy, ' to come to the end of life' (Xen. Cyrop. vm. 7). So Thne. iii. 
 104 iTi\^ira ToC i^aivov. See Matthise, 355; Jelft § 5H- 'the genitive 
 after verbs implying an antecedent notion of something going on which has 
 stopped' Taurffiecoi— 'as our last word.' 
 
 (a) 'tS al,rxi<rrv hXiBpv, A'f'*- Cf. Livy xxi. 41, 'ultimo supplicio 
 humanonim, fame.' Pop. I see quotes this, adding Liv. xxvii. 44; Sallast 
 (Frag iii 1 1), ' fame, miserrima omnium morte ;' and Horn. {Od. xn. 342), X.m*- 
 5- oUTi<Trov e^vh^v. ^vrois-'ofour own accord, without compulsion.' 
 
 iK^ve.poivTas (sine B.rticv\o)-' while ye appear as liberators.' 
 
 Chaptee LX.— n-pij Tic \6yov. It is not easy to see whether -npls is 
 to be connected with 5.(,ra^Tcs or hZHat, nor does Poppo determine. For the 
 close of the speech see Isoc. nxaraCiichs \6y05, p. 308. § 62. 
 
334 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Chaptbe LXI. — (a.) rohs \6yovs — sc. which we have demanded. 
 ahrol — 'they,' here much the same in sense as oSrot /cal avToi — 'these them- 
 selves also;' fJTiafiiepav is the gen. plur. neut. governed by 
 airo\oylav — ' beside the question, and on points concerning which not even was 
 any llame hinted' So at least Pop., Am., and Kriig. PeUe prefers the gen. 
 absolute — ' and moreover when they were not so much as accused.' 
 TroKK))V -r^v airoXoyia p — •' made their defence a protracted one,' or ' spun out 
 their defence.' 
 
 (J.) avTeiTTi'iv — ' to maJce a counter-statement.' eXtyxov 
 
 iroi^fra<T6aL — 'to make a refutation.' s\eyxos is the test by which a thing is 
 proved to be false. The fanciful derivation eXeln eyxos, ' to take up a spear ' (as 
 in the trial by combat), is probably false, but it conveys well the meaning of 
 the word, and impresses it on the mind. vphs /ifv rd, instead of 
 
 Trphs Ta ficp, because ra ^eV, Td Se, would have been understood to mean, 
 ' some,' Qxid. ' others,' 7} to6tuv B6^a — * these things which they 
 
 have boasted of Peile. 
 
 (c.) S(TTepov T7)S iWris Boiarlas. For an explanation of this see i. 12. 
 This 'mixed population' is said by Strabo (cf. 321) to have consisted of Hy- 
 antians, Thracians, and Pelasgians. The iAA.a x^pfo were probably situated 
 between the roots of Cithaeron and the Euripus (Muerseh. de Sep. Flat. p. 27). 
 
 (d.) TiyefioveifffSai i(p' Tjfi&v. The Tiye/iovla seems to have been a 
 tolerably well-understood political relation, though it is not easy to determine 
 its exact nature. It probably fluctuated according to circumstances, and cer- 
 tainly was not at first despotic, for we find BcEotarchs with equal powers chosen 
 from several cities, and without any preference to Thebes (Thne. iv. 91. 92). 
 But such a precedence, as Am. remarks, when supported by real superiority, 
 soon becomes positive supremacy. He cites Xen. Hellenic, v. i. 32. 33. So 
 also Grote : ' Substantially the affairs of the Confederation will be found in the 
 hands of Thebes, managed in the interests of Theban ascendency, which appears 
 to have been sustained by no other feeling, except respect for superior force 
 and bravery.' — Mist. ii. 394.. 
 
 (e.) •jrapafiaivovres t^ irdrpia. This was a federation among the greater 
 cities, to which the smaller were attached in a species of union, and modified 
 dependence. There were annual magistrates called Bceotarchs, who at the 
 battle of Delium were eleven in number, but we have no means of ascertaining 
 whether the number ever varied, or the mode of their election. Besides these, 
 there were (at least during the Pelopounesian war) four different senates, regu- 
 larly consulted by the Bceotarchs on matters of importance. And finally there 
 was the great Pan-Boiotian festival and confederate council periodically held 
 at Koronein. See Grote (to whom the matter of this note is due), ii. 393. 
 
 Chaptee LXII. — (a.) SkJti oiiS' 'ABrivaluvs — sc. /iriSlffat ipaiiiv, if w« 
 may not read 'AflijmToi. rp ouTp ISii^ — sc. tcj! out(jj rpiirif (Pop.) 
 
 — ' on the same type, or form of conduct,' i. e. making their policy assume the 
 same form — casting it in precisely the same mould. See i. 149. 
 iv olff flfSet — sc. rpivif iroXirt/os, 'in quo statu' (Pop.) — 'under what form 
 of polity,' in what seat of political position. 
 
 (6.) kot' hXiyapx^av i<r6iiofiop. The term tVifvo/iDi relates to the 
 
Chap. 63.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 335 
 
 equality of all citizens with one another, as far as related to their private dis- 
 putes and private injuries ; whereas under that worse form of oligarchy, which 
 ■was called Svva(rTeia, those who were possessed of political power were also 
 above the law in all private matters, and could oppress their fellow-citizens at 
 their pleasure. Pop. believes that the words refer to an aristocracy of race, the 
 membei's of which were ?ctoi and S/xotoi, or ' peers,' among themselves. 
 
 (c.) iyyvTo-Tu rvpdvvov. Bloomf. remarks that ripavvos means a 
 tyranny, just as Srjixos means a democracy. Pop. quotes Tac. Ann. vi. 42, 
 ' Paucorum dominatio regise libidini propior est.' But we may say — ' came 
 very near to a desfot^^ for came very near to having a despot, 
 ohi-yay avSpSiv. See Herod, ix. I J. 86. ouk avTOKparap k.t.K. 
 
 — ' it tvas not the state collectively, being master of its own actions, that did it.' 
 /iil liera ydfiaii — ' when in a state of anarchy. 
 
 (d.) Tous vSiMovs €KaPe. The period referred to is the time immediately 
 following the battle of OJnophyta. Seei. io8. Pop. ec Koprnvei?— cf. i. 113. 
 
 Chaptee LXIII. — (a.) afiwTcpoi. When an author is subjected to such 
 a strict anatomy of style and matter as Thucydides has been, it is not surprising 
 to find occasional difficulties as to his language raised by higher criticism. 
 Under ordinary circumstances few people would stumble over this word, or 
 hesitate to believe that it refers to the accusations brought in the last speech 
 against the Thebans ; of which, and of the punishment which they imply, they 
 now assert their adversaries to be more deserving than themselves. Yet one 
 editor (Valla) interprets, 'ye are more worthy of punishment' (sc. than of com- 
 miseration or pardon) ; and Pop. suggests a^uiTaToi. The stumbling-block of 
 both is the foregoing statement of the Thebans (Ixii.), ou5' &^ioj/ aiiry ofeiSifrai 
 S>v fiii liirci vitiatv fj/i-apTev. But o|i(iT€poi implies no admission of guilt upon 
 the part of the Thebans. Kriig. merely remarks upon the harshness of Valla's 
 interpretation without suggestiug another. 
 
 (i.) Tp ruiereptf Tijiupif. The pronoun for the genitive of the object — 
 'for our punishment,' i. e.for the saJce of punishing us. Cf. <rp, Trirep, Trpo/xridiif 
 (Soph. (Edip. Col. 333), 'with foresight for thee;' ai v/itTepcu iKtriSes, Thuc. i. 
 69 (Arn.), and rh Ti/ieTepov Sios, i. 77. There does not seem any authority for 
 making Tifiapia nyhs = aid or assistance rendered against a person. 
 
 (c.) 4irdye<TdaL. The common reading is i5jra76(reai, which w« adopted by 
 Pop. He now follows Arn. in reading eVtt7€(reoi as more apt to denote what is 
 meant, and as more generally employed by Thucydides. iirdpxop 
 yf ip.7v, i.e. rh /ht; ^weTneWi. Krug. cf. i. 124- a. Trpoa-fiyeffSf 
 'were driven to anything.' See, with Krug., vi. 54. c. 
 
 (d.) KaraxpoSovyai. ' Karh addito intendendi quiedam vis videtur con- 
 tineri.'— Pop. Kara appears to have its force of downright derived from its idea 
 of motion downwards— /ram head to foot. A real though not obvious parallel 
 is found in ^n. ii. 290, 'ruit alto a culmine Troja.' oTs ^vvwfi6^aTe. 
 
 See i. 71, and ii. 72. 
 
 (e.) Kairoi t^s S/ioias X'^P'^"''- 'The stress of this obscurely expressed 
 eentence, which is weU explained by Ai-nold, is upon ris d,j.olas ; and ^i, 
 i,yTiBiS6vat,as its position seems to indicate, must be connected both with 
 what follows and what precedes. It is surprising, however, that we have not 
 
336 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book LII. 
 
 fiaWot tj ou here, where the negative is so much needed, as in ii. 62, and iii. 
 36. Translate — and yet the not returning homogeneous acts of Jcindness (i. e. 
 such as can be returned under the same circumstances under which they were 
 received) is disgraceful rather than (the not returning) such as became due 
 indeed, in the first instance, without any infringement of justice, hut are in a way 
 to he so discharged as to lead us to injustice, Cf. St. Paul, Eomans x. 10, 
 HapSiq. yap irKTreveTai els ZiKatoavvrjv (yriixari 5e tifioKoyiiTai els awrripiav ; and 
 Uiv. sub finem, 4^n>^eyxSii ^s rh aAjiBes.' — Peile. On the force of the present 
 participle aTroStSo/ievas as above given, cf. supra, and add ol aTroWviaevoi, 
 Tohs (TtiiCofiivovs, in the New Testament, and Jilsch. Ag, 803, BpoLtros anovirtov 
 avhpiat 6vi)ffKovcri KOfiiQev — 'to men in a way to perish.' Arn. compares 
 Cic. de Officiis, i. 15, 'Non reddere beneficium (/iii wtiSiSiJi/oi x""?'") ™o 
 bono non licet (alcrxP^")' modo id facere possit sine injuria (rar Siaolas 
 Xap'Taj).' But if it can only be returned 'cum injuria' (e's aSiKiav airoSt- 
 dopihas), then the not returning it (^t; avTiSiS6i>ai) is allowable in a good man 
 (oiiK altrxpi")- The argument runs, ' Granted it is disgi'aceful not to return a 
 favour; but it is more disgracefiil not to return such favours as can be re- 
 turned upon equal terms, — such, that is to say, as ye owed to the Greeks at 
 large, — than not to return those which can only be repaid with unjust results, 
 such, that is to say, as ye may be supposed to owe to Athens.' As often happens, 
 the Greeks inverted the way in which we should put an argument or statement ; 
 tor we should probably have said, ' It is less unbecoming to shrink from re- 
 turning favours, when such return would produce a wrong, than to fail in 
 returning those which we can fairly repay.' Or it may be possible that no 
 allusion is intended to the general benefits which the whole confedei'ation 
 bestowed upon Plataea ; and the meaning implied is, ' what men have to guard 
 against is the not returning homogeneous favours ; they need not guard against 
 returning such as,' &c. E«al ingratitude consists in faihng to return the first, 
 not in refusing the second. Kriig. I perceive does not take this view, but 
 asserts that the words can only have a meaning which in their present form 
 cannot be got out of them, i. e. according to his version — ' 2fot to return a like 
 gratitude (i. e. like the favour received) is less unbecoming than to return that 
 which indeed became due with justice, but if repaid must contribute to unjust 
 dealings.' 
 
 Chapieb LXIV. — (a.) ipn'is Si. 5r) has been conjectured, and not un- 
 reasonably. But Pop. explains this as Se in apodosi, supplying S^Aoj- ^Troi^o-are 
 ov fj.7]5iiTapres. Peile says — • Supply ouk 4ix7]5i(Tar€, not however from firiBi- 
 aauTes, but from the o\ik ipiiiSta-av which is of necessity to be supplied after 
 Srt 01*5* 'Adrivalot — * whereas you did not' Medise from a desire to do as the 
 Athenians did, and therefore only [it is implied] to oppose the Medes.' 
 
 (h.) & <()' M c. Kiibner, when speaking of the attraction of relative and ante- 
 cedent, says on this passage : ' The attraction is seldom brought about by the 
 repetition of " preposition with the relative as in Thuo. iii. 64. Either a-nh 
 rovTui' should have been omitted, or d<^* S>v been merely a; as the sense is — > 
 ' to draw profit from those things in which they have been brave.' He comparej 
 Demosth. p. 95. 23 ; Herod, iii. 31. But may it not be a mere rhetorical 
 repetition ? — ' but now ye claim, from circumstances wherein by reason of other 
 
Chap. 65.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 337 
 
 men ye showed hravery, from these (ye claim) to receive a ienefit for yourselves.' 
 This, too, agrees better with both the passages quoted. 
 
 (0.) Toiirois ^vvayuvi^faBi — 'go on with the alliance as you have thought 
 fit to begin it— go through the struggle with them.' ' The force of the present 
 imperative is pergite eorum esse socii — ^ermanete in horum partibus.'~Fo^. 
 Off' aurrjs — * in consideration thereof .' 
 
 (d.) Kal &\\ovs TIP is. Reference cannot be made to the Thessalian 
 expedition of the Athenians (Thuc. i. iii), or the battle of Coronea (i. 113), in 
 which Meursius not unreasonably supposes that the Platseans took part, for 
 neither the Thessalians nor the Boeotian exiles were ever allies of the Plataeans. 
 Nor again can we with any propriety refer the words to the case of the Phoclans 
 and Opuntian Locrians, for they undoubtedly fought in the Persian ranks at the 
 battle of Platsea (Herod, ix. 31). It is better to understand the words of the 
 Eubceans, for they formed part of the army of Pausanias (Herod, ix. 18), and most 
 probably the Plataaans were summoned by Pericles to take part in the expedi- 
 tion against them, which was said to have been made o-rpoTi^ 'M-qvaiuv (1,114) 
 Perhaps also the Naxians are meant (i. 98), who, though not expressly men- 
 tioned by Herodotus, probably fought on the side of the Greeks at Platan 
 (Thirlwall, ch. xvi. p. 345). It is less likely that the Thebans should have 
 referred to the Thasians, Samians, or Byzantians, who could not be described 
 as allies of Plataea in the Persian war. Poppo. 
 
 (e.) ovK eSe'xeo'fle. Pop. thinks that the imperfect is used because the 
 transaction was a prolonged one, and heralds were sent backwards and forwards 
 several times ; or perhaps it is, ' were not for accepting,' showed no symptoms of 
 acceptingj and never have accepted. 
 
 (f.) Ttpoidia9e — ' ostentatiously made a pretext of your virtues for their 
 destruction' (cf. with Kriig. ireVflos fi-eya. ■apotdiixavTO, Her. vi. 21). On M 
 denoting the purpose or tendency of an act (= with a view to the harm of), see 
 Jelf, § 634, 3. oh ■KpoaiiKOVTo. k.t.K. — ' the good traits which ye 
 
 then exhibited ye have now shown not to be your own [your real attributes, cf . 
 67. b.], but what your nature was ever aiming at, has been tested, and brought 
 out in the process unto truth (or, your real character and designs have been 
 tested, and the truth brought out about them).' is used thus seems to denote the 
 result accomplished by the process described in the preceding verb ; so in the 
 common phrase reXivrav Is ti. Cf. Ixiii. €is aSixtav. 
 
 (a.) &S1K0V 6Shv ISfToiv — 'ye have gone along with the Athenians as 
 they walked in the ways of injustice.' Pop. refers to Matth. § 409; Eost, 
 104. 3. a. Cf. Arist. Aves 43, Tiii-Se -rhv ffiSov fiaSiCofiev = 'gang tJiis gait.' 
 
 Chaptee LXV.— (a.) tepoiJ.-ni'iaLs. 'It would seem by the plural form of 
 the word that the festival during which the Thebans entered, whatever it was, 
 was one of several days' duration.'— Am. The plural is, I believe, to be 
 accounted for upon a principle which I have elsewhere illustrated. The Greeks 
 employed what may be caUed an indefinite plural when they wished to express 
 an idea in an abstract and general manner without limitation to any individual 
 instance or special circumstance. In English we often effect the same thing by 
 the use of the indefinite article ' a' or ' an.' A few examples are necessary to 
 make the matter clear, f^ecrat yinra (Herod, viii. 76, Xen. Anab. i. 7. i) 
 
338 NOTES ON THUCYDIDliO. [Book III. 
 
 means ' midnight,' when nights in general are at the middle, not the middle of 
 any particular night. Again, Kotrat means 'bedtime' — the general time of 
 retiring to rest, not the customary hour of any specified individual. Cf. koItus 
 {'a night's lodging') /iaTciuv, Eurip. jPhmn. 416; 06 yap oTSa SecrTr6Tas {'a 
 master') KeKTit/icpos, Sec. 397 j irepl ri\lov Tpoirds, Thuc. vii. 16; 'mediis 
 caloribus,' Liv. ii. J. Similarly i.ii\\av Savarav (JEdip. Tyr. 496), ' an ohsctire 
 murder/ is much stronger in the collocation than * his obscure murder' Some- 
 times such a rendering is even necessary to the sense : e. g. Te/cca in t4kvii>v 
 TcKoi ((Edip. Tyr. 1250), ' children from a child;' and vvn<plos iK\-liBi\v uv 
 iipvv &W0 (ibid. 13S9), ' a parent's bridegroom.' On the same principle we must 
 explain — 
 
 KiTTeSei'laTe 
 irarepas, iSfX^oiSs, TraTSas, aJfj.* i^r^v\iov, 
 vitupas, yvvoiKaSf fiTjTepas re k.t.A.. — (Ed. Tyr. 1405. 
 Cf. ib. 1498. Examples might easily be selected from any Greek play, but I 
 have preferred to take a single instance in order to show their frequency. 
 iepoixtiviats will therefore mean — ' at a time of festival.' GoUer seems to have 
 taken a similar view, for he speaks of nsing the plural 'ubi indolem et naturam 
 rerum, vel personarum (den Character und nicht das Individuelle) indicare 
 volunt, licet singulas res et persouas in mente haheut.' He therefore translates 
 here — ' an einem Tage, der als Monats-Festtag heilig war ' — ' on a day, sacred 
 as a monthly holyday.' See moreover Hermann on Tiger, p. 739. Jelf seems 
 to have an idea of this in his observations, § 355. i. 
 
 (6.) Tiiifts airol — 'we of our own motion,' sc. without invitation from a 
 section of yourselves. aSiKovfiev — ' we are guilty,' verb without 
 
 object, TrAefw 'iTapa$a\\6^evoi — ' plura periclitati' — 'sie 
 
 setzten mehr ein,' setting more upon the hazard cf the die, with a greater 
 interest at stake. Cf. i. 91 ; ii. 44; iii. 19. ^lAfus, oii voKifjiius. 
 
 <ptKias seems to equal So-re (pi\ovi fhai — 'for friends, not for enemies.' This 
 idiom belongs to that class in which the adverb appears to be resolvable into an 
 adjective to be attached to the predicate, some consequence of the action 
 described being indicated. This form of expression is noticed by Scbolefield 
 (on Cfioeph. 794, App.), who renders nai viv i\ev6eplu$, Kafiirpus t' ISeTv as 
 equivalent to Strre thai i\eiBfpoi' /cal \afnrp6i'. This Peile adopts, and applies 
 the same principle to Agamemnon, 770, Ktipr' atrofjioiffus ?i(T&a y^ypap-ixevos — i. e. 
 fiffre Ka.pT' aTr6fxov(rov ehai; and again, ib. 1572, ^vvS'iKais rideis. Compare 
 jul? ^otSfws aiiT^ na\ii' oUtrtis rrjs avaxotp'fia'eus, Thuc. iv. 10; irdvras imdtnws 
 aTro5ex<^i'*f*'o*» ^^^ TrdyTa vri-nrus i\a.fj.^avi, vi. 53 j and xo^^^iy ol 'Afliji'atoi 
 4\diifiayov. Now as these forms in -as are really datives plural in -ois, the 
 idiom, as Peile remarks {C/ioeph. 794), may be explained by the fact that the 
 dative denotes the ' virtual tendency ' of an action ; and upon this principle he 
 explains that difficult passage eiippoav SfSeyficvn (^sch. Earn. 602). There 
 we may regard etlippoffiy as such a dative in the transition state toward an 
 adverb, and consequently = Stcre tS^pova elvai — * so as to be hind,' i. e. * kindly.' 
 In the same way, airlorrus ^KveviKi^Kira (i. 21) is not, * having won their way 
 incredibly,' but 'so as to become incredible.' /htjkc'ti jxaWov y^viaSai, 
 
 sc. x«'p<'"s. The estimate of ' good ' and ' bad ' was naturally formed by the 
 standard of party and political predilections. Compare such expressions as 
 
Chap. 66.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 339 
 
 ul firieiKcis, 01 iiTiTriSetoi, iv. 78, v. 64, vii. 40, viii. 1 7 ; aKo^aaia of democracies, 
 VI. 89. 'ApurroKparitt itself is a case in point. See an interesting paper on 
 ihis expression by Stanley, Classical Museum, no. xiii. ; and cf. note i. 24. e. 
 
 (c.) <ratppoi>i(iTa\ Svres k.t.A.. The question here raised is, whether tuv 
 cttifi^Tuv be the genitive after ata^povurToH or governed by aWoTpiovvrss. Am, 
 believes that another substantive corresponding to ffa>ippovi(rToX, e. g. such as 
 i^opiBTai, was meant to follow, but as the latter word did not exist, iiai>,iTuv is 
 left without any regular construction at all. Peile regards it as a sort of 
 zeugma — 'being correctors of your political principles, and as curators of your 
 persons,' Goll. and Pop. regard auixiruv as the genitive after aWorpiovvTiS, 
 and translate — * ah urbe cives non dbalienantes,' i. e. ' not depriving the state of 
 the henejit of your persons ' {personal services). This too is the idea expressed in 
 crdfuiTcL, i. 141. It is true we should have rather anticipated Tct (rSfLUTa Trjs 
 iroAews, but Goll. aptly illustrates the expression by koI &\\ou kavrhif ovK 
 aTTotrrfpav (i. 40) for &\\o>' kavTov. The aafpoi/urral were curators of youth in 
 the Gymnasia, and some editors have thought that reference is here made to 
 them ; but Schomann (Antiq. Juv. p. 337, quoted by Pop.) is of opinion that this 
 office was of later date. Kriig. quotes, for the more full illustration of autppo- 
 i/HTToi', Plat. Mep. 471 A: ev^cvus (Tuippoviova'tv, ovk 4irl Sou\ei(f Ko\dCoi'Tes, ovh* 
 €«■' 6\edp:p, (rw<ppovi(r7al oeres oil iTO\e^iot (cf. vi. 87. 4, viii. 48. 6). Arn. well 
 expresses the general sense of the closing words, olKetoui/res k.t.A. — 'bring- 
 ing ^our city home to a natural union with men of your own blood and race, and 
 making you enemies to no man, but on terms of truce with all alike.' Peile 
 renders, ' domesticating into the family connexion.' The {u77e<'eio refers of 
 course to the Boeotian lederatiou. 
 
 Chapter LXVI.— (a.) eJ &p<i koI IZokovji^v ti — ' even if haply we v eve 
 thought to have done anything unfair in not entering.' See infra, elf tis Spa 
 KoX iyevfTo. aveirieiKsa-r epov — ' unfair.' ficTi—' with 
 
 the consent of ra ijiev Sfiola. o!ik i.vT(n,iSoT i itiilv—'ye 
 
 did not in turn act the same part toward us as we acted toward you,'— thea 
 follows a variation in the tense of the infinitives— ^^j re yeaTipi<rat epytp, 
 \6yois T6 irdadv. Arn. considers that the change should be accounted for 
 as in xlvi. vapacrKfvdaiweai—irapaTeyi'tireai, the first verb expressing a thing to 
 be done immediately and- at once, and the second something that was to be 
 later in point of time, and longer in the continuance of the action. Pop. objects 
 that here we have no 'verbum putandi' (as in xlvi.), the presence of which he 
 seems to consider necessary; he is therefore inclined to read Triirai with one 
 MS. of no great authority. But the change seems explicable upon the principle 
 maintained concerning the aorist (Appendix II.). vtuTepUai denotes the 
 general condition of doing nothiug violent against the existing state of things ; 
 ■Kiiaitv refers to a particular and special attempt which they were to make if 
 opportunity permitted. This idea, quite indepeudeutly formed, is supported by 
 H rmann's version : ' Nichts Thatliches gu unternehmen, sondern dureh Vor- 
 . ii„j,een uns zum Abzuge bewegen zu wollen' — not to undertake anything 
 ■ 7 t but by representations to try to induce us to withdraw. Peile takes a 
 • M view and well points out that by the assault of the Piataans they were 
 ^'""wted f^om actually attempting to persuade (Treleem) them, and therefore 
 
340 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 the pres. infinitive would be improper; and this holds good more especially of 
 the aorist infin. Trf7irai, The objection would not apply to veuTeplaai, for the 
 Thebans profess never to have attempted violence. See is ovZha ovSlv iyett- 
 TipiQov, ii. 3. ' Sirre ^leAfleic (Peile goes on to say) is applicable only to the 
 case of the Platseans, not to the conduct which is here proposed as their model.' 
 ois may, says Kriig., he governed by aK-yovfiev, for such phrases as ahyeip 
 irpa^tv, trdOos k.t.\, occur. 
 
 (i.) (tal TavTa. This can hardly be regarded as an instance of the common 
 phrase ' and that too,' as the collocation is not suitable. We must rather regard 
 it with Pop. as the accusative after the participle, and TpiTs SiBixias as an 
 cpexegesis of it. Kriig. says, koI toSto, und zwar, beginning as if Trpilavres 
 belonged only to (tpyairBe, whereas it is also attracted to (puTE, and connects 
 what follows. This sort of connexion is not uncommon : for instance, Herod, 
 vii. 144, where we ought to place a comma before Sre, as it is also connected 
 with what goes before. Hermann in his Sophocles has collected other instances. 
 Cf. i. 16. ovK, ijp — 'not so, if.' The force of these collocations, 
 
 where ov strongly negatives what goes before, is best expressed by placing a 
 comma after it. More may be seen upon the subject in Pop. note, and also 
 Pflugk. Eurip. Sec. 399. 
 
 Chaptbb LXVII. — (a.) ^irel^Xflojuci' — 'we have gone into these parti, 
 culars.' rfTi^topijfievoi. To carry out the construction we must 
 
 of course supply elSa/iev, yet this word is, strictly speaking, inapplicable to the 
 sense, for they wished the Lacedsemonians to be convinced of the justice of 
 their vengeance ; they themselves were of course convinced of it already. We 
 must therefore either read ^/ios . . . TeTtij.QjpijfjL4vovs, or suppose that by a care- 
 less brachylogy Thucydides left the nominative to convey the same idea. 
 Snr\airias fr)/u(as. Am. would supply €Zrai or in^ipeiv, but this is un- 
 necessary, for itiiilas can as well mean the material, or cause of punishment, 
 as the actual punishment itself, eim t£ juoi (rtinia (Pop. remarks) is — ' aliquid 
 mihi poense est.' 
 
 (ft.) ovK iK irpo<r'qK6vrwv, like ^| ov -rrpoffriKivTaiv, ii. 65. Here ix, as 
 is usual, denotes the antecedent conditions out of which anything arises ; and 
 since these are regarded as its material cause (e. g. premises of conclusion), we 
 may class phrases of this sort as illustrations of the fact that ix denotes the 
 material, 8m the efficient, and eVcKa the final cause. G611. renders ' Nicht ihrem 
 Character und Wesen gemass ' — ' not conformably to their nature and character.' 
 Cf. ov irpoaiiKQvra, Ixi v. Tr. — * not in accordance with what properly attaches to 
 them' (and which accordingly we have a right to look for at their hands). 
 Hence rb irpocrnKov is a man's duty. Peile compares ^/c tuv iStuy \a\f7, St. 
 John viii. 44. koI olxlai ipTJjxoi — to be taken parenthetically, 
 
 as in English, 'and their houses desolate !' 
 
 (c.) airpeirfs ti — 'unseemly in respect of their deserts,' i.e. undeserved. 
 iirlxttpToi — 'objects of exultation,' or 'to be exulted over.' -TraprjvS- 
 
 ^7) IT a v. Pop. has shown that this is the correct form in preference to irap€v6- 
 ^7)ffo» exhibited by one MS. and defended by Dindorf. 
 
 (rf.) oiiK avTatroZ6y7€S r^v Xff^y Tt/j-toplay — ' the commensurate punish- 
 ment' (sc. &yofi.oy). How are we to account for the past tense here instead of 
 
Chap. 67.] NOTES ON THLiCYDIDES. 34I 
 
 the present or future ? Bloomfi eld tliinks that it is used by anticipation, as 
 though, I suppose, the meaning were — ' will not have paid an equivalent penalty 
 even when they are condemned' — taking it for granted that they will be. This 
 13 plausible ; but should we not have expected hv with this sense attaching to 
 the words ? Arnold supposes the tense to refer to the surrender of the Platseans : 
 ' In, surrendering themselves up to justice they have offered a most inadequate 
 satisfaction.' But in the first place the Thebans would never speak of the mere 
 surrender, not followed up by condemnation, as any satisfaction at all; and, 
 secondly, ctTroSiSdfai Tifiapiav is not 'to offer satisfaction,' but to 'pay the 
 penalty.' As therefore no other has been suggested, we must accept Bloom.'s 
 explanation. Or are we to consider the aorist participle as truly aoristic, i. e. 
 indefinite, and merely pointing out the great patent fact that they were paying 
 no real equivalent, without indicating anything specially about the time ? See 
 Appendix II. Kriig. has, I see, another interpretation, and upon reflection I 
 believe it to be right, i. e. ^ durch ihr iisheriges Schichsal ' — ha\)e not, in the fate 
 that has as yet (i. c. vw) befallen them, sufficiently expiated. The patent mis- 
 fortunes of the Plataeans might have been pleaded as some expiation for their 
 errors, but these, the Thebans urge, are not enough. 
 
 (e.) ivvoiia yap ■KeiaovTai, Strange difficulties have been raised about 
 these words. GoU. goes so far as to suggest that they are a mere parenthesis, 
 reading t^iv iativ rifiupiav, (^vvojxa yap,) TniaovTai k.t.K. But is not the stress to 
 be laid upon TTtv larip, and are not these words the explanation ? — ' the punishment 
 will not he a fair equivalent, for our citizens perished in open violation of law, 
 but these men will suffer in strict conformity with law.' 
 
 (f.) TrepiaffSwiiev. It is unnecessary to point out the intentional and 
 scornful reference to the language of the Platajans in this and several other 
 expressions in the speech. With ev vfuv cf. ii^ &\Kois, liii. 
 
 (g.) x6yav robs ayiivas. This refers of course to the rhetorical contests 
 just about being brought into vogue by the Sophists. The force of the article 
 is ' do not let this trial which you have established he a mere rhetorical exhibi- 
 tion' (i.e. without any practical result). \6yoi i-n-ecri Ko<TiJ.i]6iiiT(s 
 
 ' orations got up with rhetorical ornament'— &ae language and tropes, &c. 
 
 aiJiap Tavofiivav — 'when in the wrong — wrongly done.' So Tiiiapriier] 6 Tr\ovs, 
 ii. 65. 
 
 (h.) a.\\' ^p ol Tjyeix6ves k.t.\. This sentence Arn. says is a curious 
 instance of grammatical confusion. It must necessarily be so, for the speakers 
 as usual try to amalgamate their own particular case with a general rule or 
 principle, and in expressing half one and half the other their language becomes 
 intricate and ungrammatical. Thus V <"' vy^l^ii'^s iroiiio-wTai, li(rTr(p ifi-fh viv 
 Troiua-Oe becomes fiP ot fiye/xSves, Sunrep vvv i/j.e'is irofl)irri(ree. ' Should all 
 leaders, as ye now '—then we might anticipate, are doing,— ^Mt the hypothesis 
 is suddenly transferred to the second person— ' «AoMZ(i you now make,' &c. The 
 , sense may in general terms be expressed— 'S«i should all leaders act, as we would 
 " now have you act, bring matters to a head, and pronounce decision with reference 
 to all collectively,' &c. Ki<pcL\ai<i(TavT^s. This word is so uni- 
 
 versally applied to language and not to facts or things, and the reference to -rh 
 ^TrepiilTTi.ua ri &paxh so obvious, that it is strange to find Goiler devoting a long 
 and elaborate note to the suggestion of other interpretations. Tr.— ' having briefly 
 
342 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 summed up, or irought the whole affair into the compass of a short question ' 
 addressed to all alike. iir' aSlnois Ipyois — ' over unjust acts,' 
 
 i. e. io veil unjust acts. 
 
 Chaptee LXTIII. — (a.) toioDto Se. The Si refers us back to xliii. b. 
 ol 5e AaK€datfi6ytoi SiKaffral . . . airayoyrei oLneKT etvov. These 
 words present more than the ordinary amount of intricai^y and confusion caused 
 by crowding too much within the compass of a single sentence. Grote re- 
 marks, ' To construe the passage as it now stands is very difficult, if not 
 impossible' (vi. 359, note). Arn. originally said, 'All that is wanted to com- 
 plete the grammar is to repeat irpoeixovro twice over — 'dre ^arfpov vpoeixovro 
 & . . . wpoctxovTo — as in viii. 27.' But if anything is to be repeated, the 
 words Siiri t6i> re SA\oi' xp6iiov ii^lovv, Ka\ seem to show that it is ii^lavv, 
 and not irpodxovTO, which ought to be supplied in the next clause. And Am.'s 
 version is so unsatisfactory even to himself, that in the second edition he aban- 
 dons it, considering the passage corrupt ; which conchision he forms from the 
 fact that Tp eainwv SiKala fiovK^ffei is not Greek of the tim4^ of ILucydides* 
 i. e. I suppose he means in the sense which he gives, ' in consequence of their 
 just request being refused.' He accordingly would era-^e these words, as well as 
 Sis before ^Se|o>To, and change 8t€ into 8ti. Peile has come to the same con- 
 clusion as that above given, i. e. of repeating ii\iov» rather than npofixovro, and 
 translates — 'inasmuch as, both on every former occasion they used, as they said, to 
 entreat them to remain quiet according to the ancient treaty concluded by Pau- 
 sanias after the [second] Persian War, and particularly when afterwards, on a 
 recent occasion, [they entreated them] to be neutral according to those proposals 
 which they made to them before the siege [circumvallation pj — inasmuch, I say, as 
 they did not accept them, thinking that they [the Lacedaemonians], by their own 
 righteous intention being out of alliance now, had been ill used by them [the 
 Platseans], again leading on one side,' &c. It does not seem easy to obtain a 
 more satisfactory account of the passage, riv 6.\Kov xp^'c must mean 'all 
 the other time' — i.e. beside that in immediate question, as for instance when 
 they were engaged against the ^ginetans ; — itol ore iaTepov refers to the last 
 occasion of offence in the existing war; — Sr)6iv of course implies that the state- 
 ment is that of the speaker not guaranteed by the author, kot' ^Kciva, accord- 
 ing to Peile, are the terms of Archidamus* proclamation : & irpoflxovTo (kcI 
 (<rTf /mjSe IKS' iripav, ii. 72). There does not seem any positive objection, if 
 preferred, to understand it — 'those terms' — i.e. the same as mentioned before, 
 viz. the treaty of Pausanias. fKffnovSoi is well explained by Arn. i ' they were 
 placed in a mere state of nature with regard to them, and then nothing hin- 
 dered tbcm from putting them to death, just as they would barbarians, or as 
 they were in the habit of treating their Greek enemies, as appears from ii. 67, 
 iii. 32.' Ptile understands iKtrnovSot k.t.K. to mean— ' all that they got by their 
 righteous intention was to be placed out of the pale of truce.' But the opposite 
 idea appeai-s more proper in connexion with the context and ^Stj— sc. 'that 
 they were thereupon released from the obligations of the truce.' Yet this seems 
 
 to require another rendering for rf; iavrSiv /SouA^irsi. Bloomfield translates 
 
 • with perfectly just intentions of their own,' — but, as Pop. observes, this force 
 iloes not exist in a simple dative. Poppo, however, suggests nothing else. 
 
Chap. 68.] NOTES ON TH0CYDIDES. 343 
 
 Might we regard the words as a sort of instrumental dative with -hyoinevoi p— 
 'from (= owing to) their own honesty of purpose or desire,' i. e. the consciousness 
 of their own honesty of purpose in the proposal was the ground upon which they 
 considered themselves released from the obligations of the truce. On the 
 question concerning this use of fioixtjais, see ii. 35 ad fin. — r^y (KiaTou $ov- 
 X^o-eas— where the meaning is not materially different ; Burip. Androm. 703, 
 61 r6Kii.a irpo<ry4voiTo Pov\ri(rls 9" ifia.; Iph. in Taur. 1019; and Sere, Fur. 
 1305. Kriig. interprets fiov\i\<Tsi — 'in Folge des Verlangens der Neutralitat'— 
 in consequence of their desire for the neutrality, which the Platseans would not 
 observe. 
 
 (b.) ei/iavrhv fi4v Tiva — 'something liJce a year.' tis has this qualifying 
 effect after numerals, as after other words. Meyap4cov. See 
 
 iv. 66. ir<p4Tepa tppoi/ovvrej — ' thought with them ;' cf. t4 
 
 AaK^Zailxovibiv <ppQve7]/, v. 84 and vi. 51. 
 
 (c.) ipicoS6ti7ia-av . . . Karayiiyiov. This appears to have been a large 
 cai'avansary resembling those found in the East. The size is accounted for 
 by the number of persons who came to worship the Platsean Juno. The xKl^at 
 Bloom, supposes were meant for the use of these persons during their stay. 
 Arn. thinks, with more probability, that they were employed by the guests at 
 the sacrificial feasts. Pop. compares the 'lecti a;rati,' or 'triclinia serata' of 
 the Latins (Li v. xxxix. 6, 7), where Crevier has, 'lectos aeratos' — 'Intellige 
 lectos in quibus epnlaturi disoumberent, ut patet ex Plin. S. N. xxxiv. 3.' The 
 oiicTiiJ.aTct are 'chambers' — here probably small 'cells' or sleeping apart- 
 ments. iravTaxV — ' measured all ways,' i. c. 200 ft. square. Kriig. 
 of. Xen. Anal. iii. i. 2. ivwOev Kol KaraOey — 'looking at them from 
 above or below ' — therefore coming to much the same thing as &va> xal koltih. 
 Arnold supposes that the temple was built by the Thebans to propitiate the 
 Platfflan goddess, whose natural worshippers they had just exterminated; and 
 compares the case of Camillus, who invited Juno Veientina to Rome after 
 destroying Veil. On 'Hpalcp cf. Herod, ix. 52; Pint. Arist. 18; Pausa- 
 
 nias, ix. i. 
 
 (d.) iv T^ relx^' k.t.A. These words are generally supposed to refer to 
 the metallic clamps used in constructing the wall. But Pop. argues, that though 
 ffiSvpos was used for this purpose (i. 93, iv. 69, vi. 88), we have no proof that 
 xa\Kh5 ever was. Again, the word iirniXa means supellectiles (' movables," fur- 
 niture,' as we say), and therefore would not be properly applied to part of the 
 permanent fabric of a wall. Finally, the writer speaks of opoifo! and evptiixa-ra, 
 and then ri &K\a t ?iv k.t.A., which shows that these words cannot refer to ri 
 TeiYoi. I suppose he means that as the article ret is used, to; i.\\a means 
 something of the same kind as what has been mentioned, otherwise it would 
 have been i.K\a. He therefore accepts Heilmann's explanation that iv rip 
 Tflvii means ' intra momia,' i. e. within the wall of the city. So Kriig. To all 
 this GoU. will not assent, alleging that iv rip reix" cannot be supported in the 
 above sense. It might be replied that such phrases as ififiaTiieiv TrarplSos 
 (CEdip. M. 825) seem to indicate that such a force may exist in the preposition. 
 Neither is it inconsistent with the account given of it, Jelf, § 622— 'the notion 
 Bf being in, enclosed within, contained by a spot;' nor with the analysis of it 
 hy Donaldson, N. Cratylus. 
 
344 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 (e.) trxfSii^ Se ti koJ -rh ^ifiiray. The expression <rxfS6v ti, 'pretty 
 nearly,' occurs again, v. 66, and vii. a- Here it may mean — 'it was pretty 
 nearly the case throughout this whole business' Peile, on the contrary, trans- 
 lates — 'pretty nearly, or rather, altogether,' comparing for this disjunctive use of 
 Kai, i. 143, TotavTo. Koi TrapairK'fja'ia ; and ii. 3, vvktu koI avrh rh ireplopdpof. 
 Pop. has ' propemodum autem, atque adeo omnino.' We may add as an illus- 
 tration of the corrective Kal, Dem. de F. L.102: air6\a\e KaX yiyov^v curOerlis — 
 'has been ruined, or I should rather say — become enfeebled;' and Philipp. iii. 
 121 : aTT&\wKe KaX yevSffriKiv rj 'EWds. 
 
 (/.) T(pl TlKaTaLuv — ' quod attinet ad Plataenses,' Vof. Kather — 'in all 
 they did about the FlatcBa-ns.' airoTeTpafifidvoi — 'alienated,' 'so 
 
 little disposed to listen to,' — metaphor from the act of turning aside from a 
 person, and refusing to regard him. Similarly the Latins used aversari. 
 
 (g.) €Tei rpiTif Kal ipeyriKoffT^ — B.C. 519. The dates are given diffe- 
 rently by a year in different writers, because as Platsea was taken in the summer, 
 it is not certain whether the exact time is to be found at the close of the first 
 or commencement of the second year of Olynip. 83. The further fortunes of 
 the town are recounted by Duker. After lying in ruins for forty years it was 
 rebuilt at the peace of Antalcidas in the third (fourth according to Clinton) 
 year of Olymp. 98, B.C. 375. It was again destroyed by the Thebans just 
 before the battle of Leuctra (Olymp. 102. 2), and restored by Philip after the 
 battle of Chaeronea, Olymp. no. 3. This is the account of Pausanias. Pint. 
 (Arist.) ascribes its restoration to Alexander after he became master of Asia. 
 
 Chaptee LXIX. — ai TeaaapuKovra vrifs. See xxix. ix 
 
 tSiv 'ABrivataiv. Am. compares this not unfrequent use of ^k with the old 
 English of — 'followed after of the Athenians.' Schdmann, on Isteus, 349, ex- 
 plains — * of some belonging io the Athenian quota' Kriig. refers to his own Or, 
 52. 5. 2. The squadron of Paches is meant (xxxiii,). Si^Sexa 
 
 vaval. See Ixxv. The fikv follows SiuSexa, and the Sf follows irpty, because, 
 fay Pop. and Kriig., this is the rhetorical antithesis ; in the syntax TrapSnTui/ and 
 Sttus Trpo(t>Sicrii)at are opposed. 
 
 Chapteb LXX. — (a.) 01 alxii'i>^''Toi. See i. 54. 55. 4k 
 
 Tuf vavpLaxtt^V' See i. 55. vfpl 'EirlBafivov — 'intheneigh- 
 
 bourhood of Epidamnus,' i. e. at Sybota, 
 
 (i.) hKraKQuitjov Ta\dvTuv itriyyvTifievoi — 'ransomed ostensibly for 
 the sum of 800 talents for which their npS^evoi became sureties.' As two minaa 
 were the usual ransom of a Peloponuesian soldier taken in battle (Herod, vi. 
 79), this sum, amounting to more than three talents per man, has seemed to 
 many so monstrous that they suppose an error in the numerals, and read 80 for 
 800. Am. argues that some of the richest merchants in Greece, as these Cor- 
 cyroeans were, might well afford to pay even so heavy a ransom as this. He 
 also quotes from Bockh instances, where a talent was paid for a single indivi- 
 dual of no great wealth (^sch. de fal. Leg. 274), and nine talents for one 
 of Philip's ambassadors (Dem. 159, Reiske). Perhaps it has not been enough 
 observed that this transaction was a fictitious one, and that the sum named was 
 large precisely because no one expected the money to be paid. See i. 44. 
 
Chap. 70.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 345 
 
 (c.) Ka\ iiv yiip Ueiflfas. This is more in the style of Herodotus. Cf. 
 with Arn. i. 8. Clio. kuX is conueeted with the apodosis, ykp with the paren- 
 thetical clause; cf. K\A.o yhp = sed enim. See cvii. and i. 31. b. 
 <piKoi Siair^p Kahirpdrepov. 'The resolution now adopted abandoned the 
 present to go back to the past, and to a past which could not be restored.' — 
 Cirote, vi. 364. aTro(j>vytiv — ' escaped judicial sentence,' — Cfo£ 
 
 off, as we say, i. e. acquitted, as b<t>\6vTav, infra, is ' condemned.' 
 
 (d.) 46eKoTrp6^evos. The proxeni were, as is well known, persons who 
 discharged the duties of modern ' consuls ' or ' residents,' and resembled them, 
 except in the fact that they were natives of the state where they lived, not of 
 that whose interests they protected. Their principal duties were to look after 
 the lives and properties of citizens belonging to the state of which they were 
 proxeni, to receive ambassadors and introduce them, and in short to exercise a 
 general superintendence over the interests of their clients. They seem to have 
 had their names inscribed upon a tablet which was publicly exposed to view 
 {aviypaiTTov eis x"^'""/"')) ^nd to have received from the state which they re- 
 presented a right to the produce of certain lands so long as they continued in 
 office. They also seem to have been publicly appointed by the state which 
 they represented, and a Trpo^evla was sometimes transmitted from father to son. 
 These facts appear in the inscriptions collected by Bockh, and quoted by 
 Goller ad locum. An ede\oTrp6^€vos was obviously one who took these duties 
 upon himself without any public appointment. It is not, however, agreed 
 whether an iBtXoTrpd^eros was one unrecognized by the state which he repre- 
 sented (as Kiihner says) or one undertaking such duties without recognition 
 from his own state (according to Bockh's view). There were also iSidfeyoi who 
 performed the same good offices as individuals for individuals. These probably 
 were the representatives of the Sopi^evoi of earlier times (ii. 29). 
 
 (e.) ^tiffKav reiMveiv x"?""""^* There has been considerable con- 
 troversy upon the nature of these ' stakes,' and that of the trespass committed. 
 Bloomfield seems to suppose that they were procured and employed nearly in 
 their natural state, and ridicules the idea of their requiring anything hke 
 manufacture. Goll., on the contrary, professes to speak from personal know- 
 ledge, and asserts that in France and Germany vine-stakes are made out of 
 oak timber, and prepared with some pains. Nothing, he says, distressed the 
 French peasantry in Champagne more deeply in the invasion of 18 14 than the 
 destruction of these vine-stakes by the soldiers of the allied armies, who used 
 them for firewood. It would appear upon this view of the case that the tres- 
 passers must have cut down timber trees in the sacred re/xims. Arnold 
 reasonably conjectures that the Corcyraan nobles had occupied and used the 
 sacred ground as the Koman patricians had the Ager Publious, and had 
 acquired from long tenure the notion that it was at their own disposition. 
 Hence their incapacity to make any defence when suddenly accused of sacrilege. 
 It is Grote's opinion that the present -riiivuv indicates they were habitually 
 making use of the trees for the purpose. He illustrates the whole of the 
 oration of Lysias (vii.) against Nicomachus. Here we have certain olive-trees, 
 so far protected by law that not even the proprietors could cut them down. 
 The speaker defends himself against the charge of having grubbed up one luid 
 Bold the wood. There were visitors, appointed by public commission, to 
 
346 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 inspect tbe state of the trees. (rrariip. The stater was probably 
 
 the silver stater (4 drachraas), and not tbe gold one (20 drachmae), as owing to 
 the rarity of gold, when the golden one was meant, it was generally so specified. 
 Great surprise has been expressed by Heilmann and others how a number of 
 stakes sufficiently great could have been cut, that the fine upon them even at a 
 stater apiece could have reduced such opulent merchants to penury. Probably 
 the practice had been continued for several years, and the number cut during 
 the whole period determined on the average of the last two or three. 
 
 (J^ o'pK6vTuv K.T.X. — 'when they had heen judicially condemned to fay 
 the fine.' Some MSS. read o^iiKivTosv, which, according to a distinction 
 rightly taken by the grammarians, would simply mean, ' as they owed the 
 money.' 
 
 (jff.) ra^d/jLevoi. Daker quotes from Budaeus, TCTay^eratj raZs KaTojSoAats, 
 which is equivalent to the modern phra'se — 'by instalments.' He compares iii. 
 50, i. 99, and 101, though these do not seem much to the point. rip 
 
 i/6fitp xP'h^"^'^^^^ — ' to put the lato in force.' Wehave i-o means of ascertaining 
 the measures pursued against non-solvent debtors at Corcyra, but judging from 
 the analogy of other states they must have bceu severe. Cf. Diet. Antiq. 
 T^ v6ii<f i^elpyovTo. Some have supplied t?i ffovX^s, but this has little to 
 recommend it. G611. follows the Scholiast, i^iTrnrrou T^r ^ouA^trews auTwf, 
 i. e. their wish to pay the fine by instalments. But perhaps it is better to take 
 it with Arn. : ' the severity of the law shut them out from all hopes of saving 
 themselves except by violence.' Pop. also has, ' cum lege coercereniar, adstricti 
 essentf cogereiitur, ita certe Herod, vii. 96. 139, ix. iii.* 0ov\7is — 
 
 sine articulo. See i. 8. a. 
 
 Chapter LXXI. — (a.) cTiroc. Repeat this verb before 5ex«<r9oi, and (by 
 zeugma) in a slightly different sense — 'made a proposition.' fitf vr;?. 
 
 So the Lacedaemonians, ii. 7. ii<rvxa.(ovras. Bloomf. refers this 
 
 to ^ijSeTf'pous, because similar precautions are now taken with respect to 
 foreign vessels in neutral ports ; but Poppo compares ii. 7, ri t' SXAa rtavxiCoy- 
 Taj, Kol 'ABttpalovs Sfx"!'^'""" /"? "it and rightly argues that Titrvxa^oiiras 
 refers 'ad Tobs 8ex»M«'>''"'5 non ad rois Sfx^f'^roi.' rh Sk w\eoy — 
 
 just as we should say in English, ' anything more than this.' 
 
 (J.) ivii4<pfpe. It is questioned whether ciplaiv auToti or to7s 'AOrivalois 
 be meant. Pop. prefers the former. Perhaps in translating we ought to 
 retain the antiquity of the original—' to prove the expediency of what had been 
 done.' Toils cKeT KaTaTre(l>evy6Tas. ' Aut ^(cei valet ^icerire (of. 
 
 Doederl. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1015) aut conferendum exemplum iv. 14, rats Si 
 Aoiiraij if Tp yfi KaTaTT((l>euyvlais iveffa)\J\.ov.' — Pop. The use of ixet seems to 
 indicate that they had 'fled for refuge there and had got it' (i. c. as Arn. 
 renders, ' had talcen refuge there '"), meaning something more than ^kcio-c. 
 itrKTTpotpii is, as Arn. says, equivalent to the modem words, 'reaction,' 
 ' counter-revolution.' It is a metaphor from the movement of troops in wheel- 
 ing right round — ' volte-face.' 
 
 Chapteb LXXII. — 01 ^xo'Ttj Ttl wpiyiiara. See xxviii. 
 {uAXt7f!s iSpiSri — 'collected and entrenched itself — or it may be merely. 
 
Chap. 76.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 347 
 
 ' took up a position.' elxov. Kemark the change of number from 
 
 Kartuj>eiyu. Pop. compares iv. 57. irpSs. Kemark that the dat. 
 
 with Ttphs is ' li/ing close beside,' and with aocus. ' looking towards.' 
 
 Chaptee LXXIII. — iTrliiovpot. • Dubitatur, sint ne auxiliares an mer- 
 cenarii.' Cf. ii. 33. 70, ili. 18. 
 
 Chapteb LXXIV. — (a.) AiaKtiroiffti^ Tjfiepas — ' After the interval of a 
 day.' Bloom, compares hiaKfn6vrwv rpiwv iruv. al re yvvatK^s. 
 
 In the tumult of street fighting the women seem generally to have taken 
 refnge upon the flat housetops, and not uufrequently to have collected missiles, 
 and participated in the conflict. Such was the case with the Platajan women 
 in the combat recorded ii. 4, and thus by the hand of « woman perished both 
 Pyrrhus and Abimelech. 
 
 (i.) 5e(AT)(/ h^iav — 'the late afternoon approaching toward evening, as 
 ZelKi) Trpuia is the early afternoon when the sun has passed the meridian. 
 See Buttmann's Lexilogus, in SeiXrj and Sei'eXos.' — Arn. 
 
 (c.) ^vvoiKias. Houses where a large number of the poor families lodged 
 together. They are described by ^sch. contra Timarch. 137 : '6tTov iiiuQuiadpLivoi 
 lilav oKKTifftv 5leA(j/i€fO( exovffi ffuvoilciaf KaKovfiev Unou Sh cTs iifotKcl, oiKiau. 
 Such were the ' insulae ' at Eome. Existing instances may be seen among 
 Scotch houses built in flats ; or perhaps the nearest resemblance is to be found 
 in the dwellings of the French workmen at Lyons and some other manufac- 
 turing towns. Pop. quotes Cas. ad Athen. vii. i. 
 
 (d.) iTrl(j>opos is avr-liv—sa. Tijv TroMy. This would not perhaps be worth 
 noticing had not Dale, following a Scholiast, apparently taken it the other way, 
 which is unmeaniug — any word would have been iiri(popos 4s r^i^ <pKoyd. 
 iirf^afiiyeTO — ' secretly got out to sea.' 
 
 Chapter LXXV. — NiK6(TTparos. This apparently judicious officer fell 
 nt Mantinea. See v. 61. 74. Aia(rK6p(»p. Bekker and Arn. after 
 
 Lobeck ad Phrynichum, p. 235. Phryniohus has, jihiffas olv tous iriv ti? 5 
 Xeyovras. Pop. however prefers Aioa-Koipwv, which certainly is the reading 
 of the great majority of the MSS. both here and elsewhere. rp t 
 
 fii) lu^irAtii' air I IT T I !f— 'the distrust which induced them to re/use sailing 
 along with the Athenians.' On the apparently redundant ^J; see note ii. 49, 
 ^ hoopla ToC iih riavx^C^'v. -rh 'HpaTo.'. MuU. de rebus Core. 
 
 (■p. 5, note 7) thinks that this temple was near the harbour of Alcinous. 
 Bloomf. and GoU. from Ixxxi. believe that it was at the Hyllaic harbour. 
 They fled thither because the fane was more sacred than that of Castor and 
 Pollux, and therefore the asylum was more likely to be respected. The small 
 island, according to most authorities, must have been Ptychia; the others are 
 not Urge enough to contain 400 persons. ytyyovTai—'come to 
 
 be,' 'grow to the number of.' ■r^" yijffo;'— Ptychia. Manso, ii. 
 
 84. Krug. SisTre/ivero. The subject is ra ^irir^Seio. 
 
 Chapteb LXXVI.— 6(^op,no( o3<ro(. Only in this place is ^(pop/ios used 
 as an adjective; as a substantive, iii. 6, iv. 27 32- ^"P- compares ircpfirAous, 
 
348 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III.. 
 
 which also is both in Thucydides. He explains, eV opfup olaai, iv Ki/X\^«) 
 ipiJ.ov<Tai. Goll- agrees with this — ' die im Sa/en von Cyllene lagen nach der 
 Fahrt aus lonien ;' and Bloomf. also — 'having kept in port there since their 
 voyagejrom Ionia* It is however quite possible that Am. may be correct in 
 his notion that the words mean — 'forming a fleet to cruise off Corcyra* 
 Translate at any rate — 'forming a llockading squadron ;' something like the 
 English fleets off the mouth of French and Spanish ports during the Peninsular 
 war. T^j iiwelpov, Cf. i. Jo. c, and i. 47. a. 
 
 Chaptee LXXVII. — ris i«l irKiipovyLfvas. Younger students will un- 
 derstand that this must mean — ' each as it was manned,' i. c. ' as fast as they 
 could be got ready.' 
 
 Chaptbb LXXVIII. — xaB' airois. This may mean, as Am. says — 'were 
 in a had condition of themselves,' i. e. their own confusion had defeated them 
 before they met the enemy. So also Poppo. Haase contends that it means 
 ' the Corcyrseans alone,' as distinguished from the Athenians. He assumes 
 that TaXaiirupfTirSai must be — ' to ie hard pressed bg the enemy.' This verb, 
 howerer, signifies to te distressed, to he hard put to it, a state which might 
 quite as well arise from their own disorder as from an hostile attack. Peile, on 
 the other hand, quotes some passages which support Haase's view : /cafl" ^/loi 
 S* o^ttor' iKp'fi^ii /xdxVt Soph. Ajax, 775 ; Kivrb. rh i-jrepexov rwv evavrioiv, Thuc. 
 iii. 107; rb Kar' Evpv\oxov , . . ol Kara rh Se^ihv K^pas, ib. 108. Kriig. con- 
 siders that any other interpretation than 'fiir sich,' i. e. themselves as distin- 
 guished from the Athenians, would be erroneous. Probably his view is the 
 true one. aSpiiai; some refer to the Athenians, some to the 
 
 Peloponnesians. The latter are apparently right, as the word generally indi- 
 cates a certain degree of crowding, more applicable to the assailed than to the 
 assailants ; and ouS^ seems to imply that rh fiiaov must refer to the same fleet. 
 Kara Kepas — 'on the wing, ov flAinh,' according to Portus, Poppo, and Goll. 
 Others suggest, in single column. The more proper expression for this is M 
 Kfpas. Pop. admits that the other is found (Xen. Cyrop. i. 6. 43) j still, as he 
 points out, the words are evidently opposed to Kori n^aov not to adpiats, for 
 aSpiais could never have been used to express the opposite measure, sc 
 /i€Twir7j5(ii' — j'unctis frontihits — in line. ra^a^^vatv avrrvv. The 
 
 Peloponnesians. Cf. ii. 83. d. irepic'irXeov. The Athenians, as 
 
 before, ii. 84. Cf. vii. 36. trpv^vav Kpovofi^voi. See i. 50. 
 
 ^Te\cuTo is riKlov Siaiy — 'finished after having lasted up to sunset,' See 
 note i. 51. c. 
 
 Chapter LXXIX. — a<^lcriv—&a.t. incommodi. Kriig., who refers to his ed. 
 of Anab. i. 3. 16. ovShv fxaWov — 'not a whit the more,' sc. on 
 
 account of their success. See ii. 70. BpacriSov. See iii, 6q. 
 
 ' Hos viros nauarchis i(To\frli(povs non fuisse hinc discimus.' — Pop. 
 AevKi/ivriy. Cf. i. 30. 
 
 Chapteb LXXX. — Toij dWois — the remainder of the aristocratical party, 
 not iu the Hera;um. ii/ias— sc. notwithstanding the confusion 
 
Chap. 8 1.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 349 
 
 caused by the appearance of the enemy; or, notwithstanding their hopes of 
 coming to an accommodation. niaov ifnipas. 'Itabenedici 
 
 deraonstrant Thom. Mag. p. 609, et Lobeck ad FhrynicTi. p. 53/ Pop., who 
 also quotes 'medium diei,' Liv. iif>pvKTap'l\Br]<ra.v — 'were an- 
 
 nounced by fire signals' It has been observed that not only the approach of 
 the enemy, lut the direction also and number were indicated. See note on 
 iii. 2. It is best with GoU. to connect iippvKTapiiei]<rav with a7r!> AsvuaZos, for 
 had the Athenian fleet already left Leucas it would have been too close upon 
 the others to admit of their escaping. Those who would pursue the sub- 
 ject will find a large number of authorities quoted in GoU.'s note upon this 
 passage. 
 
 Chaptbb LXXXI. — vTTefeviyK6vTei. See XV. note. Leucas was origi- 
 nally a peninsula; a canal was subsequently dug through the isthmus connecting 
 it with the mainland by the Corinthians (Strab. 452). This canal was however 
 filled up by accumulations of sand caused by the prevalent gales (Plin. Sist. 
 Nat. iv. I. 5). It was in this state during the Peloponnesian war, and indeed 
 continued to be so up to the period when Philip was at war with the Eomans. 
 In Livy's time it was again an island (xxxiii. 17), and at present is connected 
 with the continent only by a very narrow and shallow channel (Dodwell, p. 67), 
 See Poppo's note, from which this has been gathered, and iii. 94. 
 roiis yiiaiT7]viovs. Cf. Ixxv. atrex^P'flf^o.v. Grote, vi. 375. 
 
 iv ocrij! TTfpifKo/iiCovTo. The vessels were in the port mentioned Ixxii. 
 near the forum — i. e. the aristocratical quarter, for as we saw in Ixxiv. the 
 vtipLov was there. They were accordingly brought designedly round the small 
 peninsula, upon which the ruins of the ancient town are still visible, to the 
 Hyllaic harbour, which was the head-quarters of the democratical party. It 
 has been made a question whether the oligarchs were slaughtered on board 
 boats of their own, while attempting to escape, or on shore, as Grote supposes. 
 Poppo would infer the former from Ixxxv., which seems to imply that about 
 five hundred of the oligarchical party got across to the mainland in this way. 
 It is not however quite certain to what Ixxxv. refers, and Thncydides would 
 •carcely have left so much to be supplied by implication to his narrative. To 
 Goller's objection, ' why should the slaughter have been confined to the time 
 iv S<Ttp wspiSKopilCorTO at vfies?' I should answer, air 4 ktcipov does not imply that 
 it was. It is to be tr. as the imperfect often is— they proceeded to slaughter, 
 they set about the slaughter, which was continued upon the arrival of the ships 
 in the HyUaic harbour. i -Eipv^iiuv. Grote, vi. 376. 
 
 atriXP^"'"'- The reading of two MSS. The others have oirexiipijfrcu'. Now no 
 one has made any sense of this ; it is better therefore to adopt the tbrmer, more 
 espeeiaUy as the imperfect is the tense required (cf. supra). This reading has the 
 support of the grammarian Zonaras (quoted by GolL), who writes OTrexpSfTo. 
 eovKvUSns Ai'Ti ToD av/ipovv. We have a-r^xP'd'''""^'' aid ^"^XP-lxrayro as con- 
 iectures, but they are not necessary. Hermann conjectures i.ir^x'ipi'rap. 
 S<6>96ipa^ . . . aw^Aour. It is now admitted that Matthias's explanation 
 (S 486), aWf)\ovs for laurois, is incorrect. ' They destroyed one another' is not, 
 the same thing as, 'they destroyed themselves.' Compare Tac. Ann. iii. 46: 
 ' IlUe sua manu, reliqui mutuis ictibus occidere.' outoB sV r^ hpv~ 
 
350 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 ' on the spot, in the grounds of the temple itself.' The last words are added by 
 way of explanation. Pop. compares avT66fV iK t^j Koi\i\s "HAiSos. 
 avr)Kovvro. Kriig. cf. iv. 48. b. The expression he considers poetic. 
 Toir Thv Srjiiov KaTa\iov<r iv. The presence of the article tois renders this 
 phraseology very questionable. Goll. says — ' the;/ accused only those who were 
 enemies of the commons, hut using that pretext they slew others also from private 
 animosity;' thus resolving the participle into ' denjenigen, welcJie die Volk- 
 herrschaft sturxen wollen.' It is not however quite clear that this agrees with 
 the facts. Pop. seems to approve Bauer's version — 'upon those who unshed 
 to subvert the commons they brought their charge openly, but others,' &c. This 
 is open to the same objection, and makes iircipepoii mean too much. Krug. 
 explains the whole (after Matt. § 268) as equivalent to alri^p.ivoi avrovs 
 aiTiKi\ovv Tovs rhv STJfioy KaTaKvoyras, saying that to?9 k.t.A. is in apposition to 
 an aiiTots understood; and he quotes airoKT^ivnv 4^6uv tovs rhv irtfiov KaraKiovras, 
 viii. 86, and several other passages to the same effect: e.g. Herod. vii. 177, 
 TttUTij atpi ^So^e SfKeaBai rhv iiriSyra inl r^v 'EWi^Sa. It would almost seem as 
 though 01 KoToXiIoi'Tej -rhv Sfjiiov had become a sort of cant phrase, to denote a 
 defined class of persons, and was so used without changing the form of expres- 
 sion, when the ordinary laws of syntax required it, so that the whole would 
 mean — * as for accusation, when they brought any at all, it was that they were 
 " Reactionists"; that they came under the category qfoi KaraKvovres r'bv i^^iovi 
 but many were slain whom they did not trouble themselves to accuse at all, from 
 private animosity.' But after all, when we reflect how easily tois might have 
 been substituted for as, it is difficult to refrain from reading iis KaTdkiovaiv 
 K.r.\. 6irb Twc Ka^SifTotv — BC. ave6avov. Debtors were called of 
 
 ^apSvTes, because they had received the money ; and the money lent, Arn. 
 points out, was called to XrjcpflfWo (Dem. cont. Timarch. 1186). irSo-a iSe'o. 
 Cf. i. 109. Bauer quotes Tacitus, Mist. iii. 28 : ' omnis imago mortium.' Goll. 
 makes oviev in ov equivalent to nav and the antecedent to oTov. Is it not 
 better to suppose a sort of irregularity in the words, and translate — ' and, as 
 is wont to be the case in such a conjuncture, there was nothing that did not 
 happen, and even morse ' (lit. and going beyond, sc. what does generally occur in 
 such conjunctures) ? ica! In irepaiTdpa — 'and that in an 
 
 aggravated form.' Cf. Juvenal, xiv. 53 ; Aris. thes. 705. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXII. — (o.) ouTujy u/jltj iTTicris. Dobree has conjectured 
 ^ ffTcio'is. The absence of the article, if we consider the Corcyraean sedition to 
 be meant, must jar upon most ears, and the final 7) in iifiii may well have 
 caused its omission. But it may perhaps be equivalent to our abstract use of 
 the word — ' to such cruel lengths did sedition proceed.' Cf. Dem. de Cor. 449, 
 § 387 : M^ ^^V <"* KaX!"' «'?'')'''?> where Shilleto remarks : ' Abstract words in 
 Greek admit or retain the article.' irpovx'ipv'^^'' — cf. /iiey" '"poifiri, 
 
 i. 23. a. Siafpopuv . . , ^TriyeirdaL. There is no satisfactory 
 
 authority for making the substantive Suupopai signify ' interest,' but it occurs 
 twenty-two times (Arn.) in Thuc, signifying ' quarrel.' Nor is there any 
 reason why it may not in this sense as a verbal substantive govern iirdyfadai. 
 It contains, sayS' Kriig., ' die Idee eines Gegenstrebens,' i. e. it implies action 
 directed against an opponent, and so may rightly be followed by the infinitive. 
 
Chap. 82.J NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 35 1 
 
 as if a verb had gone before. ' There ieing quarrels, as ihe place and occasion 
 might he, on the part of the democracy to bring in the Athenians, and on the 
 part of the oligarchs the Laeedamonians.' ovk tiv ix^"''''"' — ' "^^d 
 
 in time of peace they would have had no pretext' — the participle is employed 
 with a sort of attraction to what goes before where we might have anticipated 
 the final verb. On fei/ with the participle see Jelf, § 429, whose principle is — 
 ' hv is joined with the infinitive or participle when the construction changes to 
 them from the finite verb if it would have been used in the construction with 
 the finite verb.' Matthias, it is well known (§ 598. b.), asserts that ' 6» with' 
 infinitives and participles gives to these moods the same signification that the 
 indicative or optative or conjunctive with tiv would have in the resolution by 
 means of the finite verb.' To this view many scholars object. Mr. G. Kennedy 
 (Jiemarks upon Mr. Mitchell's Aristophanes, p. 29), after refusing his assent to 
 Matthias's doctrine, continues — ' I lay it down as a principle that &>> in the best 
 Attic writers, when construed with the verb in conditional propositions, strictly 
 belongs in all cases to that clause which the logicians call the consequent' An 
 example will explain his meaning. Matthias says, and rightly, that x^p'* ''^s 
 iripKrrdtnis hv alo'xvi'Tjs =^ ^ irepieffTTj &v; but he goes on to say that in koI rh 
 •Rtivv aKpt$es tcv ^vyKpadev fid\i(TT' hp iaxv^iv, the &r ^vynpaJQiv is equivalent to 
 €1 ^vyKpaSeiri. Now if his former resolution of the word with Sv be right, the 
 latter, common sense shows, cannot be right also. I suppose therefore Mr. 
 K. would have classified this ease among the repetitions of hv explained by 
 Jelf, § 432. He also supports himself by Kuhner's authority, who, citing 
 (Edip. Tyr. 446, writes : ' Hier gehort das %v nicht znm Particip ; denn das 
 Particip auch ohne &c druekt sehr haufig das Verhaltniss der Bedingung aus ' 
 (' fee in this place does not belong to the participle, for the participle of itself 
 without Uv quite sufliciently expresses the condition '). Applying the principle 
 here, we find the words equivalent to tX Se ^j- elpfiv-ri ^aav (antecedent), ovk Uv 
 ilx"" (consequent). 
 
 (I.) iTol/j,uv. Some editors have conjectured iT6Xna>v, but the word is used 
 in its proper sense — ' ready,' 'prepared,' as we employ it when we speak of 
 not 'being prepared to go so far,' and the like (cf. i. 28. e, 85. b, 135 c, 145). 
 'jroK^Hovfji^vuv (cf. i. 'j,TrKo>iiiwr4p(av &vrb>v) by a similar attraction to that 
 above noticed — ' when engaged in war.' If we understand with Am. the ex- 
 pression to be equivalent to iroXiiJLOv iirdpxoi'ros, then ^v/^fiaxlas agrees with 
 inrapxoicns to be supplied from it. This, if permissible, is certainly more 
 simple than to make it the gen. after iiraymydi, as Poppo does. Kriig. seems 
 to make |u/if*ax(«r depend on Kaxiia-fi and irpoffTroi^o-ei — 'for the damage of 
 their adversaries as derivable from an alliance, and their own advantage arising 
 from the same source (dat. of object; Kriig. cf. vi. 33. b.), the means of intro- 
 ducing foreign aid were readily procured.' Perhaps the word ^aSlas means 
 ' lightly,' i. e. ' recklessly.' Upon the whole this seems to me the best inter- 
 pretation, but I had at one time thought of placing a longer stop at ttoAciUou^eVioc 
 Se understanding &>■ ix""'^" ■i!p6<tia<rLV, and then considering lu^iuax^^^ ^^ t'ls 
 ace. plural following (Tropi^ovTO — ' and alliances for both parties alike (to the 
 damage of their opponents, and their own profit to be obtained from the same 
 source), their calUngs-in of foreign aid offered ready means of procuring to 
 persons desirous of disturbing the existing state of things.' ii.a\\ov 
 
352 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 is quoted by G611. as equivalent to x<>-^f''^<^'''epa and in itself a predicate. But 
 we may with Pop. supply yiycif^exo. iil>t(rTai'Tai. 'Hoeinsiare, 
 
 imminere explicatur in Steph. Thesaur. iii. 2579; accedere ad homines et ea de 
 causi evenire^ ad sententiam aptiua vult esse Bloomf. comparans (Ed. S. 777, 
 xpfj/ /ioi Ti5;^7] TottiS' ^TreVrr;.' — Pop. Trans. — * as the changes of circumstance 
 severallif present themselves, come upon -us.' aKovtrlovs SLvdyKas. Dionys. 
 Hal. explains tliis by aBov\iiTovs avdyaas. I understand it — ' because they do 
 not fall into straits [without being able to help themselves] ; whereas war, hy 
 abstracting [cutting away from under us] the facilities of daily maintenance, is 
 a stern teacher, and assimilates the tempers of most men to the circumstances in 
 which they are placed.' On opyhs cf.i. 130. 
 
 (c.) rh i<pv<rTepi(ovTd ttou. It is questioned whether these words 
 mean at iipvtrTepl^ovcaL v6\ets, or rek vffrtpov ytyv6fi^va. Kriig. cf. Dem, 19, 
 320, ^iTTafffafe ra tSiv 0eTTa\Qv. Poppo's note is, ' lUud [the first] praeter alios 
 probavit Cautac. iii. 28, p. 178, qui iirraaia^ow oZv inquit at Tr6KGis, Kol ol 
 iiffTepiCovTes TTov irio'Tet T&v trpoyeyevrniei/oji/ iroW^y ^ireSeiKVUvTO inrsp^oK'fiy, 
 Sed utinam aut ipse aut alius demonstrasset iiriipepeiv impffoX^v esse 
 itrthilKWdOai {nr€p^oK-i}v, iroiu(r6at inrfp^o\i)v.* Might not the doubt be solved 
 by a literal rendering of €irt(f>ipeiv — ' to bring on,' i. e. in the sense of bringing on 
 the crisis, and the like ? Tr. — ' those who were somewhat late in receiving intelli- 
 gence of what had previously occurred (wi<mi, i. 5. b.) carried to a great pitch 
 of exaggeration their efforts at novelty in their machinations (" newness of con- 
 ceits," Hobbes), as well by over-subtlety in contriving aggressions as by the 
 strangeness of their ways of retaliation.' If we take the i<pvcrTepi(ovTa in the 
 second sense, it will be, ' those things (se. (rrdaeis) which happened qfterioards, 
 owing to what was reported of the previous ones, carried out to great extent the 
 exaggeration,' &c., i.e. were the cause of carrying out; or brought on the maxi- 
 mum of novelty in schemes, &c. iroXv is equivalent to Karh iro\v, 
 gays Krug., as in noKv viKav. irepiTexv-fiiTfi. Cf. iii. 43. 2. with 
 Ar. San. 958. Kriig. t^v elQ}6v7av a^lwiriv . , . SiKaitiffft. 
 The termination (cris) guides us to the right meaning .in both these words — 
 'men changed the ordinary acceptation of words [i. e. process of estimating 
 words] in their reference to action, (a practice) by the way in which they thought 
 proper to look at them ; or, in their way of looking at them men changed th4t 
 accepted signification of words in respect of actions.' TiJA^a k.t.X. 
 The rhetorical and antithetical character of what follows has been censured 
 by Dionys. Hal. I shall only notice such terms as are peculiar in their force 
 or usage. (piKdraiposhas evident reference to the iTaipeioi or 
 political clubs, which, like those of modern Paris, at various times obtained 
 vast political influence. Tr. — ' reckless daring came to be regarded as a manly 
 esprit de corps.' (raxppov. Cf. with Kriig. Plat. Sep. 560 r, aoKppoairriv 
 avavSpiav KaKovvT4s r^ Kal Trpoir7j\aKl(ovTes ^K^dWovffL. rh vphs 
 fiirai' ^vv€r6v — * a wise caution in everything as useless inactions or, the man 
 who considered about everything, as good for nothing.' We know the obloquy 
 heaped upon ' moderates,' ' trimmers,' and the policy of laisser faire. 
 Th iiiirhiiKTus h^li — ' a furious suddenness was reputed a point of valour.' — 
 Hobbes. i/j.Trh'liKTus (Sch. uai'icuSus) and its cognate words imply a sudden 
 visitation of frenzy. Cf. the English phrase, ' smitten with madness,' 
 
CHAr. 82.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 353 
 
 foipa, though rather unusual, is supported oy such phrases as lunf' 'AippoSiras 
 (JEsch. Supp. 1024), and iv V«'pf 7^P l^olp' hrp6aKoiro$ 0poTaii> {JBum. 103, where 
 translate, ' the condition of manhood '), and may therefore be rendered, here, 
 manhood, manliness. 
 
 (d.) aa-ipiiXeia Se rh iir i$ov\eia-a<r0ai k.t.\. Arn. and Poppo 4(r(/)a- 
 \ei<f. They adopt this reading from the Scholiast's explanation. Si' a(r^d\eiav, 
 and accordingly take the dative case adverbially — ' safelt/ to concert measures 
 against an enemy was accounted hut a decent pretence for declining the contest 
 with him altogether' (of. iii. 56, ra ^i/irpopci. itripaKel^ irpiffaovrts). The objec- 
 tion to this is, that the use of OTroTpoW; in this sense is not supported by 
 examples. Lidd. and Scott give as a special meaning for the passage slightly 
 otherwise ; * airorpoTTTj . . . ii. desertion of one's party, ratting.' In a very 
 long and elaborate note Mr. Grote supports the active meaning of i.TroTpair'fj 
 (which no one would dispute), and reads ao-cf aAeia 5c rb iTn$avKevcra(r9ai, avoTpo- 
 •Krjs irpicpatris eb\oyos — ' secret conspiracy against an enemy was held to be safe 
 •precaution, a specious pretence of preventing him from doing the like,' thus 
 making the three last words a sort of epexegesis to aa<^iKii.a. This does not 
 look like the antithetical writing in the rest of the chapter. GoU. has a notion 
 that Ti> ^Tri;8ou\€iJ(ra(r0ot is * quod attinet ad iteratam deliberationem ' — ' hin und 
 her iiierlegen' (i. e. 'to consider a thing over, first on one side and then on the 
 other'), and anoTpoiT^ he also interprets ' detrectatio,' His meaning there- 
 fore is — 'security which consists in careful consideration was held to he a 
 specious pretence for shirking.' Without denying the possibility of this being 
 the meaning of ri iinPovKevaauBai, one familiar with the use of the word in 
 Thucydides will regard it as improbable. Poppo observes that there is no 
 satisfactory authority for such an accusative as rh ini^ovKevtraiTQai after a. 
 noun, as a<T(j>d\eia, and that it would in this case have been tov iin^. I am not 
 certain that such a construction as arrtpaKeia (nar^) iin^ovKivaaadai — * caution 
 in respect of taking second thought about the matter' — would be impossible, could 
 we assign this force to iirl in connexion with 0ov\evoiiai. Similar usages can 
 easily be produced, but does 4Tn$ov\eioiiai in Thucydides ever mean anything 
 except ' to form designs against a person ' ? Kriig. seems to think so, for he 
 gives, 'mit Vorsicht Uber einen Gegenstand sich bedenken,' — ' to reflect with care- 
 ful forecast upon a subject.' 
 
 («.) i xaXfTTalvav — 'the harsh and vehement man.' Pop. has, ' Sitzkopf,' 
 hot-headed. Understand an 'impiger, iraoundus, inexorabilis, acer.' 
 Tvx^v—'if he succeeded' (cf. ital. ruxiifres l^ip, iii. 39). airuv 
 
 to be explained from the general sense of the preceding words. 
 
 troipi'as Sia\uT-(ji — ' a breaker-wp of political fellowship' — we should say, 
 ' a hreaker-up of his party.' iKT7eTr\-nyii.4vos—' cowed iy (lit. 
 
 dismayed at) his opponents' 4iriK€\fi<ra5 — 'hewho has worked upon, 
 
 or, egged on, the man who had no idea of joining in the strife' (or supply KaK^v 
 Ti Spav). Ti ^vyye lies — 'relationship came to he a less intimate 
 
 bond of union than party, because the latter was more ready for unhesitating 
 daring.' aTrpo<pacrlffTws expresses the recklessness of partisanship 
 
 which in times of political excitement hesitates at nothing to serve its party. 
 See viii. 48 on this subject. oi yhp /ierh. tuv Kdftepuv y6fia,y 
 
 ,—'for it is not for the sake of any advantage which could coexist with the present 
 
 A a 
 
354 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 laws that such associations are formeGt, hut rather against established lam 
 from a spirit of grasping ambition (or, as Peile tr. — -for such combinations do 
 not go so far only as legitimate advantage goes).' /col rtis — 'mutual 
 
 faith was Tcept, fledges derived their power not from any consideration of the 
 laws of Ood, hut from a common participation in crime.' ri re o ir i 
 
 T uv ivavrluv k.t.\. — ' and the fair proposals of their adversaries men listened 
 to with a careful watching of their actions, if they were the stronger party, and 
 not juith frankness and simplicity.' — Arn. Pop. also refers ei TrpoSx"'^" to "^f"" 
 ivavTlovs, and certainly this seema most natural. Others, however, as Dobree, 
 refer them to rous 4ySexoH'^'">vs, comparing epyqi ^vKaaaoii.iVi\ (vi. 40) with 
 ifrfuv (pvXaKfi — ' precaution shown in action.' Peile tr. — ' and fair proposals on 
 the part of their adversaries men received with a watchful eye to their actions [to 
 see] whether they [the adversaries] were the stronger party, and not with 
 generosity,' or, as Hobbes says, ' ingenuously.' On ottiJ, ' coming from,' of. supra, 
 xxxvi. 
 
 (/.) kcl\ SpKoi K.T.K. — ' and oaths, if ever perchance oaths were contracted, 
 being proffered merely to meet a difficulty for the moment hy either one side or 
 the other, held good while the parties had no resource from any other quarter.' 
 I really do not see why Arn. and Poppo should insist that 5i5ii^evoi cannot 
 have its proper meaning here, but must be understood as ' oaths taken.' One 
 party finding itself in difficulty was ready enough to proffer oaths of friendship 
 or fidelity, but when, like the Mytilenaeans, it saw a chance of foreign aid 
 {&WoBiv Zvvap.tv), it then {^v rqj Traparvx^vTi) revenged itself with 
 more pleasure {i^diov irifiup^TTo) than if the whole transaction had been 
 open and undisguised (t) awh toC irpoipavovs). 6 ^Batras tapffTJfftti 
 
 — ' the first to acquire confidence in himself (i. e. his own power). 
 6.(ppa,KT0v is not, as Dionys. Hal. would have it, equivalent to a(pi\aKTOv ; the 
 latter is unguarded, off his guard ; the former, * without means of defence.' 
 T^f ttiffrtv is, *the confidence' supposed to exist between the parties, and which 
 it was considered a very clever thing to have maintained while meditating 
 treachery. iKoyi^^ro k.t.\. — ' and both the security obtained was 
 
 put down to the account as profit [lucro apponebatur], and also the fact that by 
 hamng surpassed the adversary in stratagem they had %oon a prize for superior 
 ability as well' (irpis, cf. i. 22). There were thus two items in the account of 
 their success: (i) The security with which it was effected; (2) The acquisi- 
 tion of a second advantage— so. a reputation for superior acuteness. 
 ^aov . . . KiK^fivrai — ' m^n in general, when dishonest, more easily gain 
 credit for ability than, when simple, they gain credit for honesty.' — Arn.; and 
 Kriig. couples 6vrts with KiKXrivrai — * called to he,' and says : .' Die participial- 
 Construction findet eich oft noch auffalleuder,' and proceeds to quote several 
 instances, none of which contain anything like KiKKimai, in which word the 
 whole strangeness of the phrase consists. Indeed, this explanation is said 
 (Engelmann's tr.) only to be calculated for those who understand nothing about 
 Greek. Yet is there no alternative between this and Arnold's 'gain credit for ' ? 
 We may perhaps translate — ' though being knaves all the time, are more pleased 
 to be called clever (or clever though knaves) than good-natured simpletons,' 
 Itaov KCKXiiJ/Tat = * luhentius audlunt ' in this method of construing, and 61/rcs =1 
 ' beiaj all the time (or therewith).' So Jacobi (quoted by GoU.) — 'die meistea 
 
Chap. 82.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 355 
 
 MenscTien loolUen lieberfur hose und Hug, alsfiir einfdltlg und rechischaffen 
 gelten.' GoU. has — 'faeilius did patiuntur callidos dum improhi sunt, quam 
 simplices dum probi.' Kriig. well supports this meaning offi^op by Xen. Si/mp 
 IV. 14 : TTovalnv tiv paov ixeivip if) avaTravotfiriv. Compare on KiKKriinai, Butt- 
 mann. Or. Or. § 113, not. 12 ; and Thuc. ii. 37, v. 9. 4px^ V 
 
 5m K.T.\. — 'power sought through rapacity and ambition ' (i. e. rapacious and 
 ambitions means; or perhaps Sia with accusative more rightly expresses the 
 motive — ' power which is sought aithe instigation of ambition'). Ik 
 
 5" aiiT&v — 'and arising out of (ix = tlie material cause) these (so. irXeovi^lav xal 
 ^i\oTifiiay), also, the spirit of party zeal came upon men once emharhed in rivalry 
 and contention' He means the spirit excited by party as such, independently 
 of the motives inducing men to enter into it ; a spirit which exists among those 
 who are either ignorant of, or have forgotten, the principles for which they 
 professedly contend. Arnold cites the ease of the Circus factions in Constanti- 
 nople, and the Shanavests and Caravats in Ireland. An amusing illustration 
 may be found in the ' English ' and ' French ' factions in the island of Corsica, 
 on which see Xfn Siver en Corse, par M. C. Reynaud (JRev. des Deux Mondes). 
 Washington Irving's account of ' Long Pipes and Short Pipes ' is referred to by 
 GoIL, who quotes : ' Not that the original cause of difference still existed, but 
 it has ever been the fate of party names and party rancour to remain long after 
 the principles which gave rise to them have been forgotten.' Bloomf., supply- 
 ing ^v and Twi', seems to be quite misled as to tlie meaning. 
 
 ((7.) ^6t' oi^SfiaTos K.T.\. — ' either party with its own specious name' (cf. 
 'honestis nominibus,' Sail. Cat. 38). la-ovofilas ttoXitik^s Arn. 
 
 rightly explains to mean, ' that equal law which justly deserves to be called poli- 
 tical society ;' ttoA.itikj) implying the relation of citizen to citizen, as opposed to 
 5€(nroTiK7) and TvpavviKif. The phrase recalls the French revolutionary formula, 
 'Liberie, figalite, Fraternite.' apia-ToKparias adippovos 
 
 — ' attaching higher value to the moderation of an aristocracy.' 
 rit. fi.ev Koivi — 'professedly devoting themselves to serve the public interest, 
 in reality they made it the prize of the contest.' iTTflriitriv t€ 
 
 (sc. ri Seiv6TaTii) — 'they formed the most audacious schemes, and put 
 them into execution too.' This is the punctuation of Arn. and Pop., who 
 object to Bekker's punctuation after fieiCovs, because they are not satisfied 
 that Eirclpeirii!' rtiimplas can be, ' tliey prosecuted their revenge,' like painas 
 persequi in Latin ; at least they say, ' desiderantur exempla.' Peile compares 
 ixSrifiovs arpaTflas ovk it,^e<rav, i. 16; and ^r9u^€?Tai yap ouSfls i/ioio Koi epy(f 
 ^■^(^^pXiTat. Matthiae (§ 409. 4. a) explains, ' they went out after (i. e. in the 
 way of, or in the prosecution of) their vengeance to still greater lengths.' Liddell 
 and Scott translate in the same way—' carry out greater vengeance.' Upon the 
 whole I prefer to place the stop at ixiiCovs, for ^ireft'eo-a^ re by itself would I 
 think be harsh, or at least not after the manner of Thucydides ; and with the 
 other interpretation we are compelled to make 6T<f\A")<^'»' ^^ Sei^rfrara = ' formed 
 most daring projects,' a sense which the words do not contain. Tr.-' they loth 
 dared deeds of the most terrible character, and prosecuted their vengeance (lit. 
 went out upon their revenges) to a greater degree ' (sc. than ever heretofore). 
 Or ff-eiCovs may have reference to rh Sei^iiTaTo, and be a natural hyperbole— 
 ■ to still more extravagant lengths' (i.e. their violence in aU matters was terrible, 
 
 A a 2 
 
356 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 but most terrible of all in their vengeance). So I see Donaldson has punctuated 
 in his latest text. In that case, reading irpoariBipres, from Dionysius and a 
 few MSS., translate — ' inflicting them not so that they should he limited by 
 justice and the interests of the State (lit. maTcing them coincident, or coextensive 
 with justice, cf. ii. 96), hut determining them hywhat at any time or place (act, 
 irou) caused pleasure to one party or other, whichever it might he.' Pelle thinks 
 that TrpoTiBtvres may be retained, because Herodotus (i. 32) uses it as nearly 
 equivalent to dpl^ovres — is e/SSo/i^Koi'To erea odpov ttjs C^tjs avdpdytrtp TrporiBrifit. 
 But surely here the introduction of the word oipov makes all the difference. If 
 irpoTifleWet can mean anything, I apprehend it must he setting forth — holding 
 out, as it were, in terrorem. But I have little doubt about the propriety of 
 reading vpoariQevres, fisra i|/^(/>ou . . . ^ x^^P^- Compare the 
 
 same variation in phraseology above — jnera toiv Keip-fvaiv vS/iup a><pe\las . . . 
 aAAa •jr\€ove^ia, and in ii. 39 — pt^dv/xia . . . Kai fi^ nerk v6p.atv avSpeias. Feile 
 translates — ' and either hy help of an unjust vote of condemnation, or hy that of 
 the strong a/rm in endeavouring to gain the ascendency, were they ready to gratify 
 their present eagerness of contention.' ipi\0P€iKlav is the contentious 
 
 rivalry of men engaged in the struggles of party or ambifion. 
 inTTiiiirKivai — 'satiate to the full' ^feed fat the ancient grudge. 
 ei(re$€lif . . . iv6ix.i^ov. Arn. and others make voiai^w govern the dative 
 both here and in ii. 38. See alsoi. 77. d. Kriig. somewhat freely translates 
 — * religious feeling was at a discount; a clever colouring put uponhaieful actions 
 was held in better esteem.' I had always considered that it would he more 
 correct to supply an infinitive, as for instance Smirpa^aaBai. Thus, too, Peile, 
 and the old translation of Portus — 'itaque nevtri guicquam transigere con- 
 sueverant, hdbita ratione religionis ' — * so that neither side made account to have 
 anything done (or thought to do anything) the sooner hy the religion of an oath.' 
 iirL(i>66vai is obviously opposed to eif<r€$eta, and may be rendered with Am.- — 
 * to effect anything in an odious and guilty manner ;' or it is possible that it 
 may mean — *in a manner so as to bring envy upon them.' ra fi4aa 
 
 Ta>v iroKirwv — ' those citizens who joined neither party,' Axu, Pop. says the 
 Latins call such citizens ' medii.' See 01 Sih fieaov, viii. 75. 
 fl <p66vif — ' or grudging that they should come safely out of it.' Kriig. quotes 
 Eur. Iph. in T. 352 : 
 
 01 5i;(rTu;i^€(S 7op Tolaiv evTvx^cTTepois 
 
 avTol Ka\us irpd^avres oil tppovovffiv eZ. 
 
 Chapteb LXXXIII. — (o.) wairo iSea — 'every conceivable form.' Cf. supra, 
 i. 109. KaKorpoTrias — ' evil ways {or courses) .' Ka\ 
 
 n-h etriBfs k.t.\. Either — 'simplicity, of which nobility of nature makes a 
 very large portion ;' or — * simplicity, of which a nohle nature partakes most 
 largely, was laughed down and altogether banished from the sight of m^n, while 
 a state of mutual antagonism and distruslfulpreparationvery widely prevailed.' 
 Ti yevvatov. Kriig. cf . t!) euycj'c's, Eur. Bipp. 1390, and Soph. CBdip. Tyr. 
 1642. Ti aj'TiTSTeixfl'"— note the past tense — ' to have been put 
 
 in a state of guard against one another.' 6 SiaXiffav — ' the one 
 
 who is to reconcile.' Cf. .ffisch. From. Tine. 27, i Xuipiiaav y&p ov weipvKe ttoi. 
 
Chap. 84.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES, 357 
 
 Kpefo-o-ous Se ovres. The Sehol. explains Kpel<Tcrovs = ^fwovres—' more in- 
 clined.' This certainly is very sbrange, and questionahle. But in spite of Arn 's 
 positive assertion that these words cannot be translated without violating the 
 genius of the Greek language, neither sense nor construction is violated in 
 referring /cpeiVo-ous to the words immediately preceding— '/or there was neither 
 profession so valid, nor oath so awful, as could bring men to terms, but being 
 universally, upon a settled calculation which tended to despair, above all sicuriti/ 
 (i. e. inclined to look down upon security as only satisfactory to simpletons), 
 they rather looked out to avoid the possibility of accident, than felt themselves 
 enabled to indulge confidence.' There is perhaps a subaudition of irony — ' men 
 were superior to the influence of promises and oaths ; and the more they re- 
 flected, the more they were inclined to accept no security against injury, except 
 what was a positive immunity from it;' such, for instance, as would be effected 
 by destroying the source of apprehension. ^s rb ii.v4xirLffrov — 
 
 * reflection put them so far beyond the influence of these things as to induce them 
 to despair,' because they saw them so universally violated. This (connecting 
 Kpdacous with Xoyuriiifj seems to have been in the main the meaning of Dobree, 
 but he is unfortunate in his translation of Kpeicaovs — * steeled against.' En- 
 gelmann's translation has the ingenious rendering — ' sicherer fuhlten durch 
 kalte Berechnung' — felt themselves more secure in cold calculation (sc. than in 
 oath or promise), likewise taking Kpeiacov^ Koyifffi^ in close connexion, and 
 supplying ^ \6yip t) ipictf. 
 
 (b.) ai (pavXirepoi yviipL-i\v — 'those intellectually inferior' {ci.m.i'i, c) : 
 such is necessarily the course of most revolutions. Arnold compares the over- 
 throw of the Girondists by the Jacobins, and the Presbyterians by the Inde- 
 pendents. Modern experience might, perhaps, add to the list. 
 Ttti ykp SeSiei/at k.t.K. — 'for, from apprehension about their own deficiency 
 and the ability of their opponents, lest they should be worsted by them in toords, 
 and be anticipated in some plot by the versatility of their intellectual powers, they 
 went at once boldly to work ; while the other pa/rty, thinking with a proud con- 
 tempt that they would be sure to be aware of anything beforehand, and that 
 there was no need for them to take by force what they could compass by policy, 
 being left without defence (or, ojf their guard), were the more easily destroyed.' 
 Ktrn vpoaia-detreai Peile well translates— ' tta« they will even be aware,' and 
 compares ti k&v &iif Trpoaax^nvai, inf xcv.; i. 20; and iv. 73, nv Sk k^v -rvx^iv 
 avToiis 'AflTjTOi'ous /lii ^ovKtiBhras ayaviC^recu. The word Tro\vTp6irov contains 
 a shade of meaning 'in malam partem,' implying knavery. See the Rymn to 
 Mercury, 13, 439, and woWrpoma in Herod, ii. lii. This is post-Homeric, 
 for roKiTpoTTC in the Odyssey can scarcely connote anything evU. See i. 1. 
 
 Chaptee LXXXIV. — The genuineness of this chapter, it is notorious, is 
 generally denied. Am., who in his first edition wrote an appendix in its 
 favour retracts his previous opinion in the second, deferring to the judgment 
 of the' Constantinopolitan Scholiasts. Poppo inclines to the same side, and 
 prints the chapter within brackets. GoU. feels no doubt at all, and urges all 
 sorts of objections reasonable and unreasonable against everythmg m the text. 
 Bloomfield. on the other part, seems disposed to accept the chapter nearly as it 
 
358 NOTES OS THUCTDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Btands. The arguments against it may be divided into external and internal. 
 
 The external are : 
 
 (i) The Scholiast of the Augsburg MS. (P) expressly declares tb ui^eXurfiiva 
 ouSej/i Ttov ^TiyriTuv 6So|e &ouKvdiSov elvat. We may add that Am. 
 attaches great value to the judgment of these Scholiasts in critical 
 matters, and contends, reasonably enough, that there were no personal 
 or party grounds to influence their decision in a question of tliis sort. 
 (2) Dion. Hal., after quoting at length and commenting upon Ixxxii, and 
 Ixxxiii., takes no notice of Ixxxiv., and as his main object seems to have 
 been to find fault, had this chapter existed in his copy, he would 
 scarcely have omitted so favourable an opportunity for criticism. 
 
 Tlie internal reasons as given by Arnold (it is hopeless to enter upon 
 Goller's) are : 
 
 (i) There is nothing to which ail Tw I' can properly be referred. [But toi e^o 
 in the preceding chapter is not so very far removed, and there are 
 many cases where the pronoun is used without any immediate ante- 
 cedent — see iirl n\€OV Ti avTwv iSo^a^ev^ xlv. ; •irpo0ov\ei(ra5 Hirus 
 firj^iv avTuv 5e^(rei, Ixxxiii. ; and •navTuiv avrwv airiov apxh • . - 
 4k S* ai/Twp Kai is rh ipiKoveiKelv, ib. It will be remembered that a 
 similar difficulty has been felt about connecting ainopBov ainats with 
 Te'x"'"" KiiA;cavTor, a few lines preceding it (Agam. 243), and that Wel- 
 kuer retains the words.] 
 
 (2) If the sentiment be general, the tense of Spdffaay seems wrong. [This 
 
 I cannot understand, for what tense so proper as the indefinite or 
 aorist, to express an indefinite or general fact ?] 
 
 (3) ipdae tav does not agree with ytyvtotrKOi^i'. [Yet how often does 
 
 Am. himself point out occasions where the aorist is coupled with other 
 tenses.] 
 
 (4) apx^fJ^^yot vnh rwy irapaiTx^vToiv ought to be apxB^tfr^s luirh rwv 
 
 irapex^^"^^"- [This is true, but somewhat hypercritical ; apx^fxevoi I 
 take, as in cases already noticed, for ' those in a state of suhjectioti' 
 ' subjects,' just as rj riKTovaa is the mother. It is the common case of 
 the part, present and article, losing the connotation of time, and 
 becoming equivalent to a noun. Cf. touf tpeiyovras — ' the exiles,' i. 24. 
 d. ; apx^i^ffoi — tjTriiKooi, ciii.; and instances in iv. b. Kriig. tr. 
 7ropa(TX(i»'Twi/ T ifiiiipiav-^' welehe die Mache provocirt hatten' of which 
 he may well say, * beispiellos ist der Ausdruck.*] 
 
 (5) Traflo us is used in a sense perfectly unlike its meaning everywhere else 
 
 in Thucydides. [Certainly it is if we persist in translating it ' passion- 
 ately ' (Arn.) or ' leidenschafllich ' (Pop.) ; but why may it not mean 
 * in a state of suffering * ? — sc. that superinduced by poverty.] 
 
 (6) oirai5€u(ri^ is open to a similar objection. [Scarcely so if the 
 
 remarks made xlii. b. are correct. An undisciplined and coarse mind 
 is necessarily brutal in the development of its passions. Besides, we 
 have (as Bloomfield points out) in Eurip. Archel. tt6kk' icrriy opyrjs 
 4^ oTraiSeuTou KaKti (Stob. Serm. xx. 12, ed. Meineke), and various imi- 
 tations in Josephus. See Liddell and Scott in yoce.] 
 
Chap. 84.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 359 
 
 (7) iy ^ liii is used for tl fxii, which ought not to be. [Iv ^ /lii is in itself 
 a perfectly intelligible expression, and not contrary to analogy (cf. viii. 
 86, h $), neither need we consider it as put for anything but itself. 
 ^if $ fnii seems more definite and precise than el jiii, just as 'ire a case 
 where such a thing does not exist/ is clearer than ' unless it exists/'] 
 On the argument from external evidence they alone can decide who have 
 carefully studied the Greek Scholiasts and judiciously estimated their worth. 
 'Bat the sentence which they pronounce is surely one upon which modern 
 scholars, aided by a far more exact and elaborate study of the text, are quali- 
 fied to pass an opinion : a<ra<pfj yap (says one Scholiast) Kal r^ tutt^ ttjs 
 ep/jL7iveias Kal Tois Siavo-fitiaai ttoKiiv i/j.<paiyovTa rhv vea)T€pio'tJ'6v, Now, these 
 charges are not, at least to the best of my judgment, conclusively made out. 
 At any rate, criticism of a similar character, if applied to other portions of our 
 author's writings with the same rigour, might shake our faith in more than one 
 generally accepted passage.' It is not clear that an ordinary English commen- 
 tator would be more competent to pronounce upon the genuineness of a passage 
 in Shakspeare, though a fellow-countryman, than some of the German critics 
 who have translated Shakspeare, and studied him as a classic. I confess 
 therefore that Arn.'s ' argumentum ad verecundiam ' does not in my estimation 
 altogether decide the question. Besides, Arn. forgets that it proves too much, 
 for on the same grounds we ought to reject book viii., which these same Scho- 
 liasts repudiate. Perhaps we may render the whole somewhat in this way — ' It 
 was^ to return (5e), in Corcyra then that the greater part of these audacious deeds 
 were first essayed; — as well, I mean, all such as men, ruled with insolence rather 
 than moderation hy the persons who have now afforded them an opportunity for 
 vengeance, may be conceived of as doing when retaliating their wrongs (or when 
 they have become the retaliating party) — as those, which men, in their eagerness 
 to get rid of their habitual poverty, and particularly in their strong desire, 
 while under the suffering it entails, to make themselves masters of their neigh- 
 bour's property, would contrary to all justice decree [e. g. the confiscations of 
 the Athenian dicasts] ; and such things again as those who are assailants, not 
 from covetousness so much as upon terms of equality, have been found savagely 
 and relentlessly to follow out, because transported beyond bounds by the brutality 
 of an undisciplined temper. And when at times like these the social life of the 
 state was disorganized, and human nature had got the upper hand of the laws, 
 wont as it is to go wrong even despite of existing laws, it showed with a sort oj 
 exultation that it is without mastery of its passions, superior to all considerations 
 of right [cf. Ixxxiii. ad init.], and hostile to everything above it ; for men would 
 ■not have set vengeance above piety, nor profit before justice in a case where envy 
 did not exert a pernicious power [i. e. had it not been for the pernicious influence 
 of envy, piety and justice would have not succumbed to avarice and revenge]. 
 And men, in prosecuting revenge against others, think proper rather to abrogate 
 beforehand than [koI M, lit. and not; cf. Latin, et non] uphold for themselves 
 (should one perchance in the day of danger require the aid of any of them) those 
 common laws of humanity about such matters, from the operation of which all 
 people have in store a hope that they too, should they meet with reverses, will have 
 a chance of preservation.' 'Three principal causes are given,' says Arn. 'of 
 the crimes committed in civil disturbances : (1) The desire of vengeance for 
 
360 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 oppression and insolence in the ruling party. (2) The thirst for plunder 
 which urges the needy to covet the property of the rich. (3) The mere 
 bitterness of party spirit which men contract by being habitually opposed to 
 one another.' 
 
 (a.) SpiiTdav. 'Hasremus in optative,' Pop. The version given of it 
 above seems to agree with the general notion of the mood as used to express 
 a. possible conception, &y. See Jelf, § 411, § 418. a. So Host: • Der Optativ an 
 und fttr sich ohne iv, die Vorstellung als freien Akt des Geistes und ausser allei 
 Beziehung zu dem Gebiete des Wirklichen hinstellt ' — ' The optative simply and 
 per se sets forth the conception as the pure act of the mind, independent of all 
 relation to the sphere of reality.' From an examination of the instances 
 collected by grammarians, the naked optative would seem to express a notion 
 or conception about an act, i. e. what we are to conceive persons as doing, rather 
 than the direct statement of what they do. See JSsch. Agwm. 1049 (Dind.), 
 TT^iBoC 6.V, fl ireifloi** anet6oiTis S* ifrais — * ^ou will have done wellby obeying [the 
 mild imperative], if one can imagine you obeying, but in all probability you 
 would disobey ;' ibid. 1394; Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 936, a(r;^(iAXois 5' 'taws — 'one 
 may conjecture you will probably be annoyed ;' Elect. 800, otir' i/jLov KaTo^ius 
 Trpd^€ias — 'your acting so could not be conceived as worthy eitTier of me, or,^ &c.; 
 ibid. o</>' Se ^xo*M* — 'from the small stores you may conceive me to have pos- 
 sessed.' Similarly may be explained jEscb. Sap. 737 ; Eurip. Iph. A. 418, &c. 
 
 (i.) ua! Kpariiaaffa. This variation after a genitive absolute is not un- 
 common, and quite in accordance with the practice of Greek writers. See 
 notes on i. 61, and Matthiae, § 578. b. 
 
 (c.) fi.il viroXeiireaBat. Translated above as middle voice — 'for their 
 own future benefit.' 'Non relinquere illas leges, de quo transitive hujus medil 
 usu cf. Ell. ad Arr. v. 20. 2, et supra i. 140.' — Poppo. 
 
 Chaptbb LXXXV. — (o.) Tais wptSrais — ' <le earliest ones' upon the 
 supposition that others followed. Goll., who denies the genuineness of the 
 last chapter so emphatically, interprets the words toTs •KptiiTais ruv '^W4\vwv. 
 But there is an evident reference to the cruelties recorded iv. 46. 
 Siea(ii67]<rav — ' in small boats to the mainland.' See Ixxxi, ttjs 
 
 ■n4pav olKelas yrjs — ' tlieir own territory on the mainland opposite,' Arn. 
 Bloomf. shows that several islands, such as Lesbos, Samos, Chios, Rhodes, 
 and Thasos, possessed similar strips of land on the opposite continent. 
 
 (6.) iKiiX^ov. This is the reading of the best MSS., though the middle 
 voice is more usual, and one or two exhibit iKiit^ovTo, which Bekker and Arn. 
 adopt. Poppo, on the authority of iv. 41, i\ii'i^ov riin AaKufi/c^f, and some 
 analogous cases (cf. i. 13), supports iX'ii'i^ov, iirpdcrtreTo. Note the 
 
 imperfect tense — ' was in process of being ej^ected.' &Wo ri — the 
 
 usnal ellipse of irpa^ai or something similar (cf. iii. 39). ' Eodem modo Latini, 
 quid allud, quam ? ' — Duker. Translate — ' that they may be reduced to de- 
 spair of being able to effect anything else than obtaining mastery of the 
 land.' opos ri}v 'laTtayjjv. The idiom is similar to *urbs 
 
 Koma,' 'flumen Rhodanus,' and the like. There seems to be some doubt about 
 the locality, which is again mentioned iv. 46. See Bloomfleld's note. 
 
Chap. 88.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 36 1 
 
 Chaptbe LXXXVI. — (a.) ov /neVroi ^vvtvoKc/iriirav. Am. remarks 
 that from this it is clear that the Sicilians had not as yet oheyed the order of 
 the Lacedaemonians (ii. 7) to contribute a quota of ships. XoXkiSikoi. 
 
 bee vi. 3, 75,82. Kara rh ^vyyeves. Both were colonies 
 
 from Chalcis. Cf. vi. 44, with vi. 3. Pop. ir e fitji avT e s. This 
 
 was the embassy at the head of which was the famous sophist Gorgias (Thirl- 
 wall, iii. 22, 232). It is singular that Thucydides does not mention his visit. 
 See Plat. Sipp. MaJ. 282 B; Diod. xii. 53; Pans. vi. 17. 5. He says 'the 
 allies of the Leontines' rather than 'the Leontines and their allies,' hecanse 
 the argument of an old alliance, already subsisting, could only, so far as we 
 know, be nsed by the Ehegians, and not by the Leontines themselves. A 
 fragment of a treaty of alliance between Athens and Rhegium exists in one of 
 the Elgin marbles, and may be seen in BOckh, Corp. Inscript. i. 74. Kriig., 
 however, interprets — 'the Leontine League,' including the Leontines, and so 
 does Bloomf . 
 
 (i.) Pov\6iJi.fyoi Se fi^Tc. He commences as though about to write 
 vpSiTiLpdv Te TroieTcrdai, and proceeds as if he had written rh Se d\?j0er oUts 
 Povhoiiii/oi. Pop. KaraffTavrts — ' when tTiey had established 
 
 themselves in Mhegium ' (i. 49). 
 
 Chaptee LXXXVII. — (a.) t!> TraxTairao-iy. A singular instance of the 
 article with this adverb, says Poppo, who yet supports it by rb Trapiiirav k.t.A. 
 Krug. wishes for another example. Siaxaix'h — ' « mutual suspen- 
 
 sion (or holding lach) of arms' See avaKuxh, '■ 4°- ^^ '^'"'' rd^ftcv. 
 
 He means those whose names were contained iv t$ KaraKoytc — the list of 
 persons liable to serve as hoplites (vii. 43, vi. 20). They belonged to the 
 leugltEe, the epibatae came from the thetes. 
 
 (i.) So-re 'ABr\vci.iav ye. The MSS. greatly fluctuate between the 
 genitive and accusative; with the genitive trauslate— 'to that of the Athenians 
 at any rate [whatever may have been the case with others] there was nothing 
 that more damaged the power.' But with ' KBijualovs translate—' the Athenians 
 in respect of their power.' Some MSS. have tovtov after fiaWov, which is most 
 probably a gloss. 
 
 fe) ol TToWol TiJTe ireicr/j.oi. Bloomf. considered the article as intole- 
 rable. Its meaning is however easy to understand— ' <Ae numerous earthquakes 
 of that day ' (i. e. of that period, which whs famous for its earthquakes). Arnold 
 compares such expressions as— 'this was the period of the famous great frost' 
 (i.e. the year 1746). So we have t^ voXXh irveinaT' icrjC e" AuA(5j, Soph. 
 Meet. t64—'the well-known succession of storms which detained the Greeks at 
 , J. , T^ 'Botur'iif — to distinguish it from that in Arcadia. 
 
 'Ttl Boeotian town is twice masculine in Thucydides, here and iv. 76; once 
 feminine, i. 1 13. The Arcadian is masculine, v. 61.'— Engelmann's tr. 
 
 Chapter LXXXTIIL— KviSfw^ &noiKoi. 'Sic et Strabo, Pausanias 
 atque alil^ Adeundus est de his Cluverins, Sicil. Antiq. ii. 14. 395.'- 
 „ . ^TooyyvKv" contains the germ of the modern name 
 
 StromboU. S,/cEA£y Kal Meo-o-Tjyiwi' 7?v. ' Messenii enim nou 
 
363 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Booz III. 
 
 erat pars Siculorum sed SiKeXitoTHv ; Siculi enim barbari erant, non totius 
 Sicilise, sed paHis septentrionalis et mediterraneEe incolse. Vide vi. 2, iii. 
 115.'— Poppo. 
 
 Chapter LXXXIX. — (a.) "Ay tSos to5 'Apx'^iftov. Archidamus, who 
 was last mentioned in the first chapter of this book, died (according to Clinton) 
 about the year 427 B.C. Cleomenes is mentioned in xxvi. as leader of the 
 Lacedajmonian army, in the capacity of guardian to Pausanias, from which 
 Kriig. {Sist. Stud. p. 151) conjectures that Archidamus was sick, not dead at 
 the time, otherwise the army would as now have been entrusted to Agis, 
 aiTfrpdiroVTO TraKty. Cf. vi. 95. 
 
 (6.) Twi/ (Teitr/xwv Kar exii'TMV — ' when the earthquakes prevailed.' For 
 KOTe'x" see i. 10; iwecrxof, i. 23. Arn. rightly places a comma after Karex^"- 
 Tuv, because the earthquakes were not confined to Eubcea. They were re- 
 garded as an evil omen, and induced the Lacedaemonians to appoint fresh 
 generals (viii. 6), and to send out a smaller""fleet (viii. 11). The same phe- 
 nomena also disturbed the Athenians and Corinthians (iv. 45 — 50; vi. 95). Pop. 
 
 (c.) iiraveXdovaa—lit. 'going hack, like an animal that rears.' So Poppo, 
 after Haacke's conjecture, approved though not inserted in the text by Arnold. 
 The word is indeed employed by the Scholiast on the passage, which seems to 
 imply that he found it in his copy. But ajr€\eoC<ro may very possibly have 
 been the original word, when its corruption would be accounted for by the 
 neighbouring iwrjXBf. The MSS. have iTre\9ov<ra, which is not intelligible, 
 particularly in connexion with iirTJKde. Bloomf. i^e\$ov(ra, which is not so 
 good. Translate — ' having recoiled from what was then the coast came up again 
 in rolling waves, and overspread a considerable portion of the town ; and in part 
 it formed an inundation there, hut partly also it receded, so that what once was 
 land is now sea.' The last words are, I conceive, a correct tr. of the Greek, 
 and show that it is unnecessary to read, as Pop. and Kriig. would have us do, 
 itnXv rt TTpirepov. tov tppovpiov irapilKe — ' swept away part 
 
 of the fort.' For the building of the fort, see ii. 32 ; genitive after irapa, Jelf j 
 and see Elmsley on Trapaipwv (ppovfj/jLaros (Herac. v. 908). 
 
 (d.) TleTrapiiBqi. ' Hanc iusulam, qiiam olim cum recentiore Piperi aut 
 Pelagisi comparabant, Xihidpofilav {'KKtoSpofiiav, AiBponiav) esse suspicatur 
 Leake . . . Scopelon, Field. (It. Orcec. ii. 22.) . . . Pcparethum ct Scopelon 
 manifesto distinguit Ptol. iii. 13. 47.' — Pop. iTravaxt^pv^^^ — 
 
 ' a reflux.' The word contains the notion that the waves curled upwards in 
 their retrograde motion. (Cf. supra ^7rave\6ovcra.) 
 
 (e.) oiroo-TeAXEiv is by some editors supposed to be intransitive, and to 
 have for its subject 9ciAao-irttv, because trriWeiv is found intransitively in 
 Sophocles. But this, as Pop. observes, is unnecessary. Translate — ' iAe earth- 
 quake where it is most violent, in this spot drives hack the sea,' &c. Kriig. paints 
 out that the infinitive is epexegetical to an flvai understood after fo/jti^ai. But he 
 prints, I suppose from inadvertence, airoa-TiKXei in his text. 
 ^taidnpov * may here be adverbial, but also an adjective, as &.iropdiT€pos 7] X^i/ziSr 
 V. no, and Suff^a^oKuTaros 7j AoKpis, iii. loi — the only passages of the sort 
 known to me in Attic prose. Oidy a seeming parallel is furnished by v. 71.' — 
 Kriig. 
 
Chap. 91.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 363 
 
 Chaptee XC. — [a.) i.\Aai. It is not clear who are meant. Poppo con- 
 jectures the Locriaus. He would road i.KXa., as contrasted with & Se Sfia (cf. 
 TO SaAh (vveiro\eiiei, i. 65). I should imagine that Thuc. means to refer to the 
 petty wiirfare always going on among the Sicilian tribes. auri- 
 
 vo\4nioi. Not elsewhere known in Attic prose. Kriig. It is, however, 
 employed, probably as an imitation, by Dion. Hal. Ant. vi. 8. 
 
 (i.) MuXas. The modern Milazzo. Sio ipvXal. It was con- 
 
 trary to the Greek practice to mix together in military service the members of 
 different tribes. Cf. Duker ad vi. 98. Poppo. We may tr. ' regiments.' 
 
 (c.) TreTroiTi/UfVai. ' Vix quisquam hodie in Grajcis Uteris adeo hospes 
 est ut nesciat verba media et passiva, paucissimis exceptis, eandem prorsus 
 TTopoitei^ei/ou formam habere. dpyaaTat e.g. utrumque significat,/ecji et factum 
 est.' So long ago wrote Elms, ad Heraolid. v. 601 ; and he points out twelve 
 instances of the truth of his assertion with respect to etp-yaiTTaL. Few persons 
 will require to be told that modern views have greatly modified the conception 
 formerly entertained of the Greek passive and middle voices. They are now 
 regarded as possessing one common element, i. e. both represent the subject as 
 recipient of something. In the middle voice the subject produces the eflfeet 
 upon itself by its own agency. In the passive voice the subject receives the 
 effect from without. While the force of the middle therefore is reflexive, that 
 of the passive is purely receptive. Very little consideration will show how 
 often these ideas run into each other, and become confused. Hence very much 
 of the difficulty which has been occasioned by the use of passive for middle, and 
 middle for passive forms. To take an example : ^rj/j.ioidija'ofjLaL — 'punishment 
 will come upon me' (from an external source), and Cij^icii{TQfj.at — ' J shall bring 
 punishment upon mi/self.' Both words might be used of the same act, under 
 precisely the same circumstances. Some grammarians go so far as to assert 
 that there are but two truly passive forms in the Greek language, i. e. the future 
 and aorist. This throws the perfect out of the purely receptive into the reflex- 
 ive class, and consequently such usages of TreiroiTifiivai as the present are at 
 once accounted for. With respect to elpyd^Ofiat and eXpyaCfj-ai the same explana- 
 tion may be given. And so too we may explain some cases where the middle tense 
 is said to stand anomalously for the passive — e. g. ou AtjitiJ/ici'Oj' (Soph. JElect. 
 1249) may mean — * will never hury itself in oblivion.' See Jelf on the verb. 
 
 (d.) Th &\Aa irio-Ta seems to mean 'all the other usual pledges.' So Pop.j 
 
 but Arn. 'everything else in a state of security,' or, as he explains — 'satisfying 
 
 the Athenians on all other points' ' Generally speaking,' he adds, ' irap4x^tt> is 
 to present or offer really, Trape'xecreoi, to present, or offer to notice, to exhibit. 
 See Ammonius de Differentia Vocabulorum, in voce irapixn-v.' Cf. irapix^a-eai, 
 and cxii. With respect to writing rSAAa or toi &\\a Arn. appears to be right 
 in saying that the former is substantival — all else, the rest ; the latter adjectival. 
 He adopts the same principle in writing Ka\o\ KayaOoi, but fierh iroWuv Kal 
 hyoBav fyij.fi.&xav iriffTcJ, says Krlig., belongs to the predicate, as e'xupii, i. 32, or 
 the article would have been repeated. 
 
 Chapteb XCI. — TO is Mt)A./ous. The subject is continued v. 84. 
 tvTas cTjo-itiiTas— and consequently, the Athenians would suppose, subject to 
 their maritime empire (v. 97. 99). """ iOiKovras uiraKoien' 
 
364 NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 — ^because they bad been colonists f rom Lacedsemon (v. 84)- 4! rh 
 
 K.T.\. — explained by tbe similar phrase is rir 'ATTi/car (rnaySas iaehSetv. 
 Pop. Tijs iripav yrts. Tbe r] vepaiii TTJs Boimt/tjj x'^PV of 
 
 Herod, viii. 44. Goll. supposes that the district Oropus opposite to Euboea 
 was so frequently called ri/v irijiav yriv that tbe words came to be used almost 
 like a proper name. See ii. 23. But Cramer reads Ilepai/c^s. 
 '\t!t:ovIkov. 'This Hipponicus was the father-in-law of Alcibiades, and one 
 of tbe richest individuals in Greece. His father Callias was tbe ambassador 
 who is said to have procured the assent of tbe Persian king to that memorable 
 treaty by which tbe king's ships of war were forbidden to sail to tbe westward 
 of the Cyanean islands.' — Andoc. co»i. ^2o. 117. ot^ (rrj/ieiou. 
 
 See note on ii. 90. SirAa — sc. of those killed in the action. 
 
 AoxplSos. Opuntlan Locris is meant. 
 
 ClIAPTBK XCII. — (o.) ttTri ToiSirSe yv^/iris — 'from some such purpose 
 as this,' i. e. the motive is rightly spoken of as tbe source of tbe motion — that 
 from which it proceeds. MtjAi^j rpfa yiiepi). This Mattbiae explains 
 
 as equivalent to Vir\\Uijav rav ^v^irivTuv elffl (or iarl) rpla fi^pv- * Tu sic in- 
 terpretare — Melienses sunt tres partes (i. e. cortstant ex trihus partibus)/ — Pop. 
 Arnold enters upon the question whether or no these names in their origin 
 referred to three classes of persons politically as well as locally separate from 
 each other, or not. It will be remembered that there is a similar question 
 raised concerning the three tribes of Athens — tbe Eupatridse, the Parali, and 
 the Hyperacrii. The subject is too extensive for a note; but refer to Tbirlwall, 
 ii. 4—15, where all the best sources of information are indicated. If tbe two 
 classifications are analogous, we must compare, (i) tbe Hiereusians, or priest- 
 nobles, with tbe Eupatridse ; (2) tbe Parali of one with the Parali of tbe other, 
 in each case a mixed population growing up round the original Eupatrids, and 
 forming the germ of the future Srifios ; (3) the Tracbinii — the inhabitants of 
 the rough or broken country — with tbe Hyperacrii, the primitive inhabitants, 
 gradually forced into the bill-country by the more civilized settlers, who 
 naturally selected the plains and more fertile districts. Arnold, however, 
 justly SMys, that whatever may have been the origin of these names, we must 
 not suppose that they retained their primitive meaning in the time of Thncy- 
 dides. Like tbe Eoman tribes in the time of the Commonwealth, they expressed 
 little more than mere local divisions. fjLf\\ii<rai>Te5 — 'having had 
 
 the intention.' irpoffdeTvat. As in viii. 50. — Pop. 
 
 TTKTTol — 'not to he trusted' (i. e. to leave them their independence). 
 Atapiris. Cf. i. T07. riap Olraiav. These are mentioned again 
 
 viii. 3, and by Xenopbon, Hell. i. 'i. 18, in his account of the affairs of Heraclea. 
 They occupied part of the district of Mount (Eta, between the TraeLjii and 
 Epicnemidii. Dodw. quoted by Poppo. 
 
 (6.) ■napaffKiva.ffQriva.L &,v — ' classem parari posse ' (Pop.) — 'might he pro- 
 cured ' (since ship-timber abounded there, although very scarce in the Pelopon- 
 nese. See Dodwell's Journey, quoted by Goll.). Note that 7rapairic6uai7e7Ji»ai is 
 an aorist infinitive participating in a future sense. @p^Ki\s k.t.A. — 
 
 'suitably situated for the passage to Thrace' For this genitive cf. note, Shep- 
 pard's Theopbrastus, p. 77. Bloomf. remarks that they had evidently already 
 
Chap. 93.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 365 
 
 conceived the design with respect to this district which they suhsequently put 
 into execution (of. iv. 78). 4^^po.To. Cf. with Kriig. i. 25. 
 
 K€\eio^T<,s_Bc.ToD06<,S(cf.viii. 6). Kriig. a'w^xovtra 
 
 06p/io7rvA.Sv.^ Arn. has a long note to show that the account here given is 
 correct. The sites of the towns mentioned cannot be ascertained, owing to the 
 alteration in the course of the Sperchius, and the alluvial deposits which have 
 changed the coast line. ' But the remains of Heraclea, with its citadel on a hill, 
 and traces of the city lower down, according to the description of Livy, xxxvi. 
 22, on the north bank of the Asopus, and about four miles from Thermopylaj 
 (Dodwell, Class. Tour, ii. 73), still correspond with the account of Thucydides.' 
 When Strabo says that the port of Heraclea was forty stadia from the town, he 
 means, what Thucyd. here points out, that the arsenal and dockyard were at 
 TliermopylEB. The ' sea twenty stades off' was the nearest point of the Sinus 
 Maliacus in a straight line from the ridge of CEta, where the town was built. 
 evtpiiKaKra, Cf. i, 7, and ev<pv\aKT6Tepa avrois iylyyero (viii. 55). 
 
 Chaptee XCIII. — (a.) ^vvoiKi^oiifvqs — unusual for oi/tifo/u€i'?)s or kti^o- 
 f-ivf]!, Pop. Bloomf. compares Eur. Hec. 11 15. But probably allusion is made, 
 as Kriig. says, to the population collected from different quarters (see note on 
 ii. 15. b.). The verb Is of frequent occurrence (i. 10. 2, ii. 16, vi. i, and 5), 
 and generally implies diverse parties. i-wX rri Ei^ota the Schol. 
 
 explains — Kara ttjs Eu/3oios. It seems to mean — ' as a point from which to 
 operate against Euiaea.' Compare the use of the preposition in striT ilxi<riia. 
 and its cognate words. Trphs rh Ki/vaiov. 'Cf. Strabo, 444. 46, 
 
 ubi prope Oreum, et Thermopylis contrarium esse dicitur ; hodie Ai6a5a (Leak. 
 Grcsc. ii. 67).' 
 
 (6.) air toy Si ^v. Matthiae, § 309, says that Thucydides meant to have 
 continued his sentence oXtlov ^v , , . ol @e(r(ra\ol (po$ou/j.€Vot, koI (pdeipovres Kal 
 iroKf/ioOvTes, but from the distance of the principal verbs from their nominative 
 he was led to consider the last part of the sentence as an independent proposi- 
 tion, and accordingly altered the construction to efSf^pov and firoXefiovv. Thus 
 the words atriov 5e 9iv become like T€K/u.-f]piov S4, ff'^fielov Se, and the like, except 
 that oi @e(rira\o\ yhp could not follow, because properly 01 @i(T<raXo\ should be 
 the subject of aXnov ^v. The passages which Kriig. quotes are apposite : alTion 
 5e TOvTuVf Trapea-KevaKafftv vjxas (Dem. 8. 32, and 18. 108); also atrLoy 5' ?iVf 
 oSt€ eKuvoi &pxiif ^TeiaravrOf oijre ol apx^fiepot rh aK6\ov9ov aTre-rrK'fjpovv (Arist. 
 i. p. 204). This explanation does not, however, account for the awkward 
 particle re which follows 0e<r(roAo£. Poppo explains it by anacolouthon, and 
 says that it answers for ov /icptoi ifiiaa-Ta. Or, he says, ital Sv may stand for 
 (fol iii/Tivav (i. e. Ka\ TrduTes, Si/), a conjecture which he thinks confirmed by rrj 
 T0VTQ3V (i. e. Aivtdfuf koI Ao\6Trcav Koi M-f]\Uu)V Kal ©etro'oXai;/), v. 51. Those who 
 have studied Peile's long and learned appendix upon re, affixed to his edition of 
 the Agamemnon, may perhaps be of opinion that we have here an instance of 
 what he means. His leading idea is, that t€ communicates nothing fresh to the 
 mind (in such oases), and brings forward nothing with which the mind has not 
 been already made familiar— the details of a picture, for instance, already 
 •mente repostnm.' Hence lie translates by such phrases »s—to wit, namely, 
 tnd so on (see note on i. 133). Here I suppose we must render—' the Thessa- 
 
366 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Hans that is to sai/.* iv Bvyifxet tuv xa'pfwi' — 'havingthese 
 
 regions in their poioer' — rather a peculiar usage o^ Siva/iis, but cf. Saai ^aav 
 ixrhs TTis kavrav Swiiiias, ii. 7. Perhaps — ' being in force in those regions.' 
 Siv ^irl rfj yp— the Scholiast, and after him Am., explain the eVl as contain- 
 ing the notion ofdetriment— ' those, to the damage of whose land it was being 
 founded.' Its transition to this sense may be understood from xcii. : M rp 
 Eiffola vavTtKhv TrapaffKeuoo-flijcoi &v — a change of meaning insufficiently noticed 
 in the lexicons. L. and S. have : ' the dative is used where hostility is implied, 
 whether, over against, opposite (11. ii. 472), or moving against, attaching {II. i. 
 383), and later, even in prose.' l^erpixa'^'^'' — 'wore out' (vii. 
 
 48). Traru TToWois. According to Diodorus (xii. 59), 4000 
 
 Peloponnesians and 6000 other Greeks. ' Scymnus (v. 597) fivpiavs oiniiTopas 
 a Lacedsemoniis missos esse dicit.' — Blooraf. itrriv & ov kix\So^ 
 
 i^'qyoinivoi. See note on ft ^-qyitcrdf, Iv, irp6iroiKoi. The 
 
 ^nianes, Dolopes, Thessalians (v. 51). 
 
 Chaptee XCIV.— (a.) 4v rp M^X^. Cf. xci. 'EXXo/ie'y^ 
 
 TTJs A^vKaSlas. 'A small place, still retaining its name.' — Dodwell, It is 
 worth observing with a view to the right estimate of their value, that nearly 
 all the MSS. retain the impossible reading 'ApxaSia!. eireira 
 
 S(TTfpov. The first word points to the order of events, the second to that of 
 time. Kriig. AevicdSa — -here the town. ttjs efa 
 
 yvs. This must have been situated somewhere in Acamania. Leucadia was 
 originally a peninsula. See Ixxxi. a. and the map of Leucadia (Santa Maura) 
 in Arnold's edition. airorefx^C*"' — ' ujall off* (sc. from the 
 
 mainland), the same thing is afterwards expressed by irepiTeix'ff"' (cxv. ; see 
 note, i. 64. a.). 
 
 (i.) Nai;irt£/cT^ te. Here, as in the preceding chapter, we have an awk- 
 ward Tc. If we take it in the way there indicated, translate — ' being, that is to 
 say, enemies of Naupaetus.' Pop. says there is an anacolouthon, and koL iip 
 KpaT'l]irj) proceeds as if re had not come before, as occasionally happens after 
 genitives absolute (iv. 3, vii. 8). Bloomf. conjectures NouTri£KTi)j ye. 
 Kttl ^v KpaT-fitTT]. The Kol connects oicri with vpoffiroL'fiffeiv (Kriig.) which 
 latter is governed by some word understood in ayairelBeraL. 
 
 (c.) rh riTreipaiTiith)' Pop. and Am. print without 11 capital letter, con- 
 sidering the term a mere adjective — had it been a proper name rh Taxnri would 
 not have been added, yet evidently in the time of Thucydides it was becoming 
 80. In cxiv. infra, 'Hirflpov must be incorrect, though most MSS. have it with 
 the capital letter. Poppo adds that the remoter Epirots were not meant (for 
 tliey at this period had no connexion with Grecian affairs), but the Ambraciots, 
 Leucadians, and CEniadte, who were allies of the Lacedaemonians. 
 tth 17 Wo V — 'and these separated by wide intervals' Cf. with Kriig. ii. 29, 
 ffKevri \fit\fi. Editors refer to Polyb. iv. 8. 10, and Pausanias x. 22. 4. 
 dyi/McTTciTaToi — 'unintelligible,' a sense scarcely to be found elsewhere, says 
 Krug. 
 
 Chaptee XCV.— (a.) Metrtnjvlaiv. Objective gen. — ' moved bg the wish to 
 do the Messenians a favour.' See Grote,vii.4o6. t)|>' 'A9?j»a(ti;i' 
 
Chap. 97.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 367 
 
 iel iroTe (pkAlav. There is some vagueness about the expressiou, which is 
 perhaps accounted for by the fact that in ii. 9 we find the Athenians included 
 in the Lacedaemonian confederacy. Poppo suggests that they were forced into 
 it by fear of the Boeotians ; and yet that they were not entirely surrounded by 
 the Peloponnesian party is proved by the neighbourhood of the Ozolian 
 Jjocrians. ^vtrrpaT €ue li/ ^ kUv ^ia 7rpo(rox0T]vot — 'would 
 
 join the expedition, or might ^en he brought into it hy compulsion.' Cf. Kkv 
 irpoaiir9e'(r9ai, Ixxxii. fipov o%v — the particle brings up the sense 
 
 from ireitrflefs, supra. r^v ov-iripiT^lx^o'iv — ' the non-circum' 
 
 vallation.' See the note on r^i/ twv y^^vputv ov-Sid\if7LV, i. 137. 
 
 (S.) TpiaKoa-iois. Therefore 300 in 30 ships (cf. xci.). So we see from 
 ii. 92. 102, there were 400 in 40 ships (cf. iv. 76 — loi). Each trireme there- 
 fore had a complement of ten. In Herod, vi. 15, forty are given to a single 
 vessel. But this, Arnold remarks, was at an earlier period of Greek naval 
 tactics, when battles at sea were decided by main force, and not by ma- 
 noeuvring. At Salamis each trireme carried eighteen (Plut. Themist.). The 
 great improvement introduced by the Athenians was to decrease the number of 
 epibatse, and augment the crew properly so called. Thirlwall suggests that 
 many of the choicest Athenian troops volunteered, owing to the personal influ- 
 ence of Demosthenes. Hence the statement xcviii. infra, oSroi ^eXriaroi 5^ 
 ifSpes K.T.K. Ordinarily thetes alone served as epibatse. The classes (01 e'/c 
 Kara>\.6you) were only called upon in cases of emergency (cf. viii. 24, elx"" 5^ 
 ^TTi^ikra^ rwv dirhiTiai/ ^k KaTa\6yov avayKoffToOs, and Grote, vi. 407). 
 irei/TeicaiSeKa. Only thirteen, in iii. 79. Kriig. OiveSvos. 
 
 The port of CEneum is mentioned by Steph. Byzant. It was two days from 
 Potidania (cf. next chapter). Sfi6<rKevoi — rf avTfj aKiV^ xp'^l"'^'""^ 
 
 ityovv ^i\f. — Schol. ("-aXV s- In old English their hattle means 
 
 their order of battle. So here — 'mat/ of fighting.' 
 
 Chaptee XCVI. — KvKLaaiisvos — ' quum pernoctasset' Pop. 
 'HffioSos. Por the circumstances of Hesiod's death the editors refer to Plu- 
 tarch's tract De convivio septem sapientum. See Smith's Biog. Diet. 
 \eyeTai k.t.A.. — 'is saidto have been Tcilled by the people of the country' — i.e. 
 by Amphiphanes and Ganyctor, sons of Phegeus, in revenge for an alleged insult 
 offered by Hesiod to their sister. Arn. oBte ire rh vparov. 
 
 We here have oBre in reference to e ir e 1 5 ^ t e — ' neither when first he formed 
 the scheme, and when (or, loth at first it did not, and afterwards),' &c. 
 vphs rhf MTiKiaKhv K6\T^ov—'in the direction of the Sinus Meliacm.' 
 Arnold says this is not to be understood to mean that any .iltolian tribes ex- 
 tended to the shore of the Malian gulf. 
 
 Chaptee XCVII. — (a.) t^v iv iroa-tv — sc. Kii/xfiv — 'as it lay at his feet ' 
 a. e. each village as he happened to come upon it). Dale compares ndura nvi 
 r's,v\ll6.y<^v rhv iv 7ro<rl yiv6fievov, Herod, iii. 79. rfi rixy i\-^i<ra, 
 
 _an instrumental dative—' his good luck was the cause (or occasion) of hit 
 hope ' Cf. Thuc. iv. 85, BavpidCa Tp airoKXefrrei p.ov tZv TrvMiv. So Krug.— 
 • wegen des Qluclces.' Pop. refers to Matthise, § 399- c <(" ^ ■=> " 
 
 i,KovriarS,v— 'light-armed troops who used the javelin.' There were other 
 
368 NOTES ON THUCIDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 tfiiXol ttiere (see xcviii.). Pop. ' I take \jii\o) as an adjective (cf. Xen. Sell. ii. 4. 
 12, irEXTO0o'/)oi Te /cal i//i\ol aKOVTurral, and Thue. vii. 78).' — Kriig. 
 
 (J.) ^ir! AiyiT^ou . . . ^jrl t> AiylTiov. These instances appear ex- 
 actly to reverse the rale, (i) that M with the gen. = in the direction of, and (2) 
 with the accusative =: against. But, (i) motion in the direction of a thing may 
 of course be as truly predicated of an enemy as a friend, and the hostile intent 
 IS expressed by aipei /cari Kpiros; (2) the second instance must be classified 
 among the cases where M seems to be employed as an equivalent of fls : e. g. 
 T7}S inl T^v 'Attlk^i^ &Bov Kal ttjs els TleXonSyvqaov Kvpiov yiyove. Cf. Jelf, 
 § 649. This preposition is usually coupled with fionQuv, as ificyfidtjaav ^tt' avrois, 
 i. 107. Of iSgitium 'nulla apud veteres memoria' (Duker). icoTa 
 
 Kparos — 'so far as they could scale the wall.' Pop. connects the word with 
 iitidiv, which the collocation will not allow. Kriig. The 7op seems to refer to 
 iiTLiiv, containing a reason for the expression — 'going up against it.' 
 Xwpfw is suspected by Kriig., who considers that iriiXit or x""?'"" ^<t>' v^v^av 
 Xio/jfui' is an unparalleled expression. This is somewhat hypercritical. 
 viraytDyai — explained by the Scholiast ^ apoxajp^ffcis. The vvh perhaps im- 
 plies that an attempt was made to elude observation. See iv. 127, uir^7€ rh 
 (rTpaTeu/ia, where Pop. tr. — ' pedetentim reducehat ;' but it is not easy to see 
 how in this case it would be practicable. 
 
 (e.) 4v o\s afjL^oTepois, 'Sail. Cat. 5: "Inopia rei familiaris et con- 
 Ecientia scelerum, guffi titraque his artibus auxerat." Similiter ait<p6Tepa aiira 
 post duo feminina, vi. 72. Cf. Interp. Liv. xliv. 36.' — Poppo. Jelf, § 391. 2. 
 
 Chaptbk xcviii. — (a.) 0/ TofcJTo . Either, Am. says, Cephallenian or 
 Messenian auxiliaries, or the rowers from the ships, equipped for this particular 
 service. Pop. has no doubt but that the latter are meant. rit /SeAij 
 
 avro'is — avrl rod 01 ro^orai aiirwv, Schol. ; which shows that the Scholiasts 
 had not always the best appreciation of the delicacies of their native language. 
 Arn.'s interpretation is doubtless right : airois describes the circumstance in its 
 relation to the Athenians — 'so long as iheg found that the archers had their 
 arrows.' Poppo adds: 'Dativi pronominis airhs ita positi plurima exempla 
 apud Thue. reperiuntur.' 01 Si avre'ixoi'. Cf. i. 1 1 and ii. 6; for 5t in apodosi 
 — ' iheg, I say, held out.' apeffr^Wovro — ' reprimehantur,' Poppo; 
 
 ' zurilclcgetriehen,' Engelmann's translation ; ' were kept in check.' The imper- 
 fect denotes the continuous act of forcing them back. Kriig. refers to vi. 70, 
 and his own Anabasis, v. 4. 23. Kal atiTol — 'the Athenians them- 
 
 selves ;' 01 dvKirat, Sch. Ka\ ^nl iro\i5. Bekker would expunge 
 
 the Kal. Kriig. (ad Diont/s.) compares such expressions as ko! fniXa, Kal irii'v. 
 Accordingly, Am. and Pop. retain it in the text. The former translates — ' even 
 for a long time ' (i. e. for as much as a considerable time). 
 
 (ft.) Kara •n6Sas. The Scholiast explains, trucTfJ^wy — i.e. illico, straight- 
 way, on the spot, directly on the track. Others suppose it to mean by speed of 
 foot. Poppo, comparing koto n6Sas rh iijij/vxov iv t^ iL(r<pa\e7 6^f7s ivSelKi'vvTat 
 (iv. 126), rightly decides in favour of the former. iroSdKeis. The 
 
 well-known Homeric epithet, and therefore somewhat poetic here. But Kriig. 
 refers us to Plat. Sep. 467 K; Xen. Mem. iii. 11, 8, and De re lEquest. iii. 12. 
 anaprdvoyTas. Pres. participle — 'while in the act of missing their way.' 
 
Chap. IOI.] NOTES ON THUCTDIDES. 369 
 
 T^ji/ u'ATjy. Though there is no 'previous mention,' the article denotes 'the 
 brushwood which from the description given of the locality (xapiiSpa) may be 
 supposed to have been there.' iraa-a ISea.. See i. 109, iii. 81. 
 
 Ka\ 7]\LKia T) avT'tj. 'Vide an legendum koX 7j\iKla oiJtij ^e\T«rT0i k.t.\. 
 TlMicia ut supra, Ixvii. i]\iKlav 7iii.Sn/ Sie^Bap/iffriv.' — Dobree. To me it appears 
 the Latin usage of idem — e. g. plurimi, iidemque florentissima Juventute — 
 ' it the same time the flower of the youth.' D. has, less rightly, I think — 
 ' SL '.y, and all in, the flower of their youth.' Some read ^ ahrh without any 
 stopi ih Engelmann thinks avoids ' ein hartes Asyndeton.' toIs 
 
 TTiirpu Vois <t>o^oi/fj.eyo s. See note on t^j ovk clkSti ni(f>6Qr}VTait ii. 89; 
 and Tp , e\7ri(ros, xovii. Kriig. cf. Enrip. ^»droOT. 919, IwiJKO' Tap/Seis tois 
 
 5e5pafJ.e^/(^ jiv, 
 
 Chapteb XCIX. — 7rEpi7r(J\ioK. A station of wepliroXoi — a guard-house, 
 probably fortified (cf. i. 142). On the weplwoKoi cf. iv. 67, vi. 45, vii. 48, and 
 Diet, of Antiq. 
 
 Chaptee C. — ■n-po':r4ix.ifiayTss ■irp6Tepov — SO. before the Athenian expedi- 
 tion against Jitolia. On the grounds of the quarrel cf. xciv. 'One object of 
 the expedition of Demosthenes was to free the most faithful of the alUes of 
 Athens from the attacks of an enemy who was even at that very time applying 
 to the Peloponnesians for their aid in order to effect its destruction.' — Arn. 
 ivajayiiv. Grote, vi. 409. 27rof)TidTTj j. The word is intro- 
 
 duced to show that the Trachinian expedition had had its own (subordinate) 
 commander. Kriig. ^vvr]Ko\oveovv. Arn. conjectures from 
 
 aiiThs rpl-Tos e^ijprj/ifVos Spxf "' ""Tct Aiiov (iv. 38), that generally there were two 
 officers appointed to succeed to the command, one after another, upon the death 
 of their superior (iii. 93, iv. 132, v. 12). In this case of course ui SirapTiSrai 
 (with the article) will be correct — 'the usual Spartan commissioners.' Poppo 
 seems to consider it as a case parallel to SaAaiSos & \aKeSaiii6vios, iii. 25. 
 
 Chapter CI. (a.) 'A/^^iiro-^j. Notorious for the circumstances of the 
 
 fourth Sacred "War. The chief, if not the only city of the Locrians, who lived 
 Kara KiifLus. Bloomf. The reader must refer to the Dictionary of Ancient 
 Geography for an account of the small tribes here mentioned; at least such 
 account as can be given of them. It is sufficient, as Am. says, to know that 
 they all belonged to the Locrians. The Phocians (supra, xcv.) were zealously 
 disposed towards the Athenians, though enumerated ii. 9 as part of the Lace- 
 daemonian confederacy. i^pZTov. A usage hardly to be supported 
 by any real parallelism. Therefore Popp. and Krug. rightly conjecture TpwToi. 
 (J.) uiv oiv. Poppo rightly notices the somewhat unusual collocation of 
 these words. They of course are generaUy immo—nay rather. Here they are 
 like p.\v Si).' A similar use of the words occurs, as he points out, iv. 104; and 
 Xen ^»aJ. iv. 7. ■^. 5uff.<r^oAc4ToTos. Cf. iii. 89. Kriig. 
 XaXalovs. Poppo quotes Plin. S. if. iv. 7 : 'Portus Chalaion, . quo vii. m. 
 pass introrsns liberom oppidum Delphi.' 'O^raUi. These are 
 not to be confounded with Olpa, or Olpso, the fort belonging to the Amphilochian 
 , :„„„ f„„^ Pr,nnn. iyoua ixovaav — so ivoiia. tovto fX<""^'^ iv. 70 
 
370 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 Chaptee CII. — Kal oi AItuKoI. Connect these words with oi jueri 
 Evpv\6xov, on account of wliat precedes. Kriig. MoKvKpeiov. 
 
 Cf. ii. 8. fiiTo. -rh ix rris Airahlas — ' after what had befallen 
 
 him from ^tolia.'—Ara. Poppo quotes rhv /iexo rk ix l,iKe\ias ir6\eiJ.oi>, iv. 
 8i; tV ^'* T^^ SiKcAfas tuv 'ABTjvaluv KaKOwpaylaVf yiii. 2; t^v ix Hv^ou 
 ^vfi^opiv, vi. 89. 4irl tuv yeuv. Those of which we hear supra, 
 
 xciv. Tuv aiivpofievai' — 'the defenders.' I cannot consent to the 
 
 conjecture of Krug. — afiwovfievav. 4s rrfv AloKiha. It has been 
 
 doubted whether this is a former name of Calydon, or of the district where 
 Calydon and Pleurou were situated. Arnold prefers the latter ; or rather the 
 true meaning is — ' the district once called JEolis mas now called by the names of 
 the two principal towns in it, Calydon and Fleuron.' Hesychius has r] KaXvilur 
 AloXh ^Kahfiro; but Xen. Hell. iv. 6. 1, KaKvSava if rh wa\aihi' Aira\la flx. 
 In the last passage Pop. reads Aio\U, and the conjecture is generally accepted. 
 This, according to Engelmann's tr., makes very probable the notion of 0. Miiller 
 (N. Greece) that originally Calydon was the seat of the iEolians, Pleuron of 
 the Curetes. When the latter were driven out by the first, Pleuron also was 
 considered as belonging to ^olis. Subsequently, when the dependence of the 
 one town upon the other ceased, the common name was naturally discontinued. 
 ixarpaTivaaixivois Trep! rb 'Apyos. This may be a pregnant construc- 
 tion, equivalent, as Pop. observes, to iKtnpanvffaix^vois koX y^vofiej/ois vepl rh 
 'Apyos. Cf. els BvddvTioi' 4TrL<rTd\/iaTa, Theophr. irfpl 'Apicrxelas (Sheppard's 
 Theophr. p. 78). Or, as Poppo suggests, iripl might be connected with ^miBiiv. 
 
 Chaptee CIII. — Ktna. xpdros — ' by main force.' apx^f.foi 
 
 — vvfiKooi &vres tuv 'ZvpaKotriojv, vi. 88. "IvriJcrav. The Inessset 
 
 are the same as those called Jitnenses by Cicero in his Verrine Orations. It 
 was upon Mount ^tna, and is placed by Strabo eighty stadia from Catana and 
 Tr\Ti<riov tS>v KevTopiirwi>. Wass. Hiero it seems first planted a colony of 
 5000 Syracusans and others at Catana, changing the name of the town to 
 i£tna. But subsequently the native tribes recovered the city, restored its 
 ancient name, and expelled the colonists. The latter took possession of Inessa, 
 a town in the interior, about ten miles distant, and in memory of Hiero bestowed 
 upon it the name of the city from which they had been driven. rh 
 
 'S,iKf\LKhv iriKtiT^a — 'the Sicel town (or chief stronghold).' — Arn. 
 irpoaefiaKKov. A true imperfect, denoting an uncompleted action, or rather 
 an action not terminating in any result. Jelf, § 398. The verb is generally 
 constructed with a dative — rip reixei — without ^ir(. 'A6i)vaiii>y 
 
 is governed by vaTepois (Schol. apud Kriig.) — 'who retreated later than the 
 Atlienians.' 4k tou T€ixi(^f'O.TQs — i. e. the Acropolis. 
 
 KaiKivov. The locality of this river is not clearly made out. Some have 
 identified it with the Alex, hut this is mentioned xcix., and Pop. argues that 
 Thucydid. would not have assigned two names to a single stream. 
 
 Chaptee CIV. — (a.) Kortt XP'C'A'^'' '^. Arnold has a long note, which 
 would now be scarcely needed, to prove that S^ is sometimes used like S^0cr, 
 not to express the writer's opinion, but that of the persons introduced. Trans- 
 late — ' in accordance, as was professed, with an oracle.' This interpretation 
 
Chap. 104.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 37 1 
 
 Poppo does not consider certain in this case. See kot^ Si) rhv iraKaihy v6ijlov, 
 i. 24. ' Perhaps it was thought prudent to counteract an opinion which the 
 Delphic oracle may have rendered common among the Greeks, that Apollo 
 sided with the Peloponnesians.' — Thirlw. iii. ch. 22. 
 
 (J.) UaaiaTparos. See the account given in Herod, i. 64, Tijv vnaov 
 A^\ov KaBiipas, Kafl^pas Se SSe ic.t.A.. With respect to the principle upon which tlie 
 practice was founded, see note, Sheppard's Theophrastus, p. 224. 
 Sffoi' 4<peupaTo TTJs vi\(Tou. Arn. compares Herod, i. 64, iir' '6trov eiro^is 
 Tou ipou eTxf . Poppo refers to Thucyd. vii. 37, xaS' '6aov irphs tV ^if-iv outoO 
 
 (e.) eriKai OCT a I. This is an instance of the attraction of the antecedent 
 into the ease of the relative, like the well-known 'urbem quam statno, vestra 
 est.' The term ■ inverse attraction ' has been invented to express the idiom. 
 Cf. Homer, II. xiv. 371, 
 
 ocTTrfSes '6<7(rat ipiffrai 4v\ arparQ ^5e n4yi(TTat, 
 
 Jelf, § 824. i. I. Eost adds: 'This sort of attraction only occurs where the 
 word to which the relative belongs comes immediately before it : e.g. tjjj' oialav 
 ^v KarehLne t^ vWi uv irKiiovos a^ia i<n\v ^ TeTTcipwy Ka\ Zitca raXapTtcv/ — Soliul- 
 gram. § 177. 5. 
 
 (d.) ivairoSvliirKeiv — ' io die in.' This usage of eV is common. Cf. Arist. 
 AxeSf 38, Koi Tract Koiv^v ^va-noTlffai xp'flf^o-'J'ti—' to spend money in ;' Pac, 1156, 
 ivaTTOiraTitv yap effr' eiriT^Seios irctcu — * to walh about in ;' and note ii. 74. Poppo 
 seems to consider that 'antecedens dictum pro consequente,' as BaTtTtiv is 
 substituted by Diodorus and Strabo. But that death itself was regarded as 
 pollution to those in the neighbourhood seems clear from the passage of Theo- 
 phrastus (irepl AeiinSaLfioylas) referred to above; from the language of Apollo 
 with regard to Alcestis, and from Eurip. IpTi. in Taur. 380. See the Alcest. 22, 
 iyii Sf fj,7] fiiafffid fx €v S6fji.ots KiXO' ivriKTtiV. Theophr.Zoc.et/. 
 
 i\lyov a-rrdx^i- Pour stades, according to Strabo, X. 486. Kriig. 
 TrevreTTjplS a — * the quinquennial festival' i. e. the festival was celebrated after 
 the liipse offour years. See Clinton, F. S. 337. 3. to A^Aio. 
 
 On the Delian festival, see Pint. JRc. iii. 4 ; Diet. ofAntiq.; Thirlwall, iii. 217; 
 Grote, vi. 427. The last observes, 'At this period the Athenians were excladed 
 both from the Olympic and Pythian games, which probably made the revival of 
 the Delian festival more gi-atifying to them.' to 'Ei^e'crio. See 
 
 Diet, of Antiq. The commentators refer to Dion. Hal. Ani. iv. 25. 
 
 (e.) iditipovv — 'appeared as spectators.' This seems to be one of that 
 class of verbs compounded of a noun and the substantive verb €ai, of which 
 BovKo\4a>, PoTiBioi, oiyox^V Tpolerea, and others are examples. (See Sheppard's 
 Theophrastus, p. 58.) Its formation thus = Bfoiphs ea, and accordingly we find 
 it constructed with els, Lucian, Timon, 50 (quoted by Poppo) ; and Ar. Vespa:, 
 I1S8: iyi> Se reef^pvita Trtimr' ovSafiov | irX^c is ndpon — ' J never went as 
 eiapis except to Faros! Stephens, Thes., renders — ' ludos spectatum veniunt.' 
 fiovcriK6s. Because Poll. iii. 142 says the Attics prefer ay&vas liowiKrjs to 
 iy uovaiKovs, Kriig. would read the former here. anTtyov—'duee- 
 
 ' B b 2 
 
372 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III- 
 
 bant;' ' siefukrien auf.' — Pop. Our own expression, 'led up the dance' ex- 
 plains the word and its usage. Kriig. refers to Callim. Symn. Del. 279. 
 iK Ttpooiiiiov,' We learn from Wolfa Frolegomena that hymns of this sort 
 were only intended as introductions to longer and more elaborate compositions 
 This is the reason why they are called irpooliua. The Scholiast, as quoted bj 
 Arn., gives an unusual derivation of the word : ri to5 ■npooijj.iov ivop.a, ovk HWo 
 tj rhy eiraivov Stt\oi' irph yip TWf fft/iuv Kal twv d^Siv oi iraKawl Tobs iTraivovs pBoj*. 
 Were the Scholiasts more trustworthy and less imaginative, this statement 
 would doubtless affect the explanation above given. Duker rightly adds a 
 caution that we are not to accept all the so-called Homeric Hymns as genuine, 
 from the recognition of this particular one by Thucydides. 
 
 (/.) aWoTE— Am., Pop., Goll. a\\' ifre occurs in more MSS., and is 
 adopted by Bekker and Kriig. dXXo ati is read in the common editions of the 
 Homeric Hymns. But from this we are not likely to derive much aid, for 
 Thucydides of course copied from a source not available to us, who have the 
 text of Homer only as it came forth from the hands of the Alexandrian gram- 
 niarians. One may perhaps venture to render — ' other whiles.' 
 4T€\evTa Tov iiraivov — 'made an end of his encomium' (sc. of the Deliah' 
 chorus). See \6you TeKevrav, ante lix. This does not of course imply that 
 the words terminated the composition. Poppo remarks accordingly that 
 Ruhnken's argument drawn from this passage to prove the existence of two 
 Homeric Hymns to Apollo in the age of Thucyd. altogether falls to the ground. 
 Ta\aTreipios — probably the same as raXahupo! — 'toilsome,' 'painstaking,' 
 implying the labour which arises from long and careful investigation. The 
 expression, a painful student, though quaint, is still intelligible. 
 iTiKixripiuffev — 'showed hy certain proof .' See note, i. 3. 
 Iii6' Upuy ftrefi-jrov — 'sent the choral hands of dancers with sacrifices.' 
 'UpiXa, simply the animals killed; Uph everything required for sacrifice, such 
 as, perhaps, the tripod (Herod, iv. 1 79) and all the other vessels.' — Am. On 
 the exceeding care bestowed upon the training and equipment of the Delian 
 chorus see Xen. Mem. iii. 3. 12. KaX to. TrXeTo'To — 'as well as most 
 
 other things ' (sc. of those appertaining to the chorus). ' &X\a in sententia latet, 
 quemadmodum in dicendi genere, i. 116.' — Pop. SAXoi is however expressed 
 there. 
 
 Chapteb CV. — (o.) ZffTTfp tiirotrxif-foi — 'as, having promised, they 
 detained ' (i. e. as they promised when they detained) — implying, as is usual 
 with the participle sine articulo, that the promise was the cause or condition of 
 the detention. See for the promise sup. cii. 
 
 (i.) 'OAiros. This is one of the places for which both a singular and plu- 
 ral form exist. Cf. nxiraia and n\oTaici(, ii. 7, and Pop. note. ' Nur ein In- 
 stitnt zur Schlichtung von Handeln mit den nordlichen Nnchbarn.' — Wachsm. 
 Sell. Alt. i. 16. ' The seat of national justice.' — Thirlwall. 
 
 (c.) Koivip SiKaffTTipiQi. Whether common to the Acarnanians alone or to 
 them with the Amphilochians is not apparent. Various interpretations have 
 been given. Kruse {^Hellas) understands a common convention between the 
 Acarnanians and Amphilochians ; and this view is favoured by the testimony of 
 Stephanus Byz. (voce "OAiroi) and the situation of the place. Poppo however is of 
 
Chap. io6.] XOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 373 
 
 opinion that had this been the meaning of Thueydides he would have written 
 ■o-if>(o-ii' aiiToTs /col To?i 'Afi.ti>i\6xoLs, This savours of dogmatism, and is scarcely 
 sufficient ground for rejecting the testimony of a writer who had probably greater 
 opportunities of ascertaining the truth than we have. BloomBeld thinks it 
 identical with the rh Koiv'bv ruv 'Axapi/ai'toi' mentioned by Xenoph. Sell. iv. 6. 4. 
 The Acarnanians were separated into several federal divisions, which some- 
 times acted in concert, and sometimes not. See ii. 9, iv. 49, iv. 1J. 'OAirai 
 then may have been the locality of their federal council. Yet, as Poppo ob- 
 serves, it is hardly probable that this would have been located in the Argive 
 territory. Wachsmuth, as we have already seen, supposes it to have been a 
 place selected for conference, and for the adjustment of differences between the 
 Acarnanians and their northern neighbours. 
 
 (d.) 4TTiea\acrcrlas. Leake explains this from its vicinity to the lake or 
 marsh now called Ancyrd ; but Urquhart is of opinion that any city situated 
 in the vicinity of the Ambracian gulf might be called i-in6a\a<rcrta, or ' mari- 
 tima.' Pop. 
 
 (e.) Trjs 'A^<fi\oxias k.t.X. Am. calls attention to the collocation, which 
 is that usually adopted in Greek, when a place, and the country in which it is 
 situated, are mentioned together. He contrasts the English idiom which repeats 
 the same preposition — • in A.mj}hilochia in the place called Wells.' But we 
 might compare ' in Betblehem of Judaea,' though this, it is true, is derived 
 from a Greek source. It coincides with the other idiom noticed by A. 
 where the town is the prominent subject, and the name of the territory is 
 added for the purpose of more accurate description : e. g. iv Tavdypa t^s 
 BoiairiaSt i. 108 ; is TlAaTaiav tt}s Boiwrios, ii. 2 ; is yL^Sttiviiv tt)s Aokwj'ik^j, 
 ii. 25. 
 
 (/.)' Kprtvai. This must have been a, spot at the foot of the limestone 
 hills, where the water gushed up from streams which in all probability acted 
 as a subteiTanean drain to the lake visible from the hill of Argos. We know 
 that it lay east of Argos, and on the high road between Acarnania and 
 Ambracia. The geographical matters connected with these chapters are too 
 vaguely known to be commented upon with certainty. We have already a 
 memoir upon the district by Lieut. Wolfe, E.N. {Journal of Oeograph. 80c. 
 iii. pt. I. 77), but this is confined to the sea-board. The route of the Pelopon- 
 nesiau army is traced with accuracy enough for ordinary purposes by Arn. 
 See his note. 'hpLffToriX-ns. From the researches of Pop. and 
 
 Itescher, who refers to Xen. Bell. ii. 2. 17, Plato, Farm. 127 D, it appears that 
 this man was subsequently one of the Thirty Tyrants. is tV 
 
 iv6Kiii—'to their city,' i.e. to Ambracia. v l^dxi—' i^ i<^ffi^ '^«* 
 
 would he.' 
 
 Chaptee CVI.— (a.) rohs iv "OXiraii k.t.\. The right rendering of 
 these words depends upon the well-known force of 5}™ (cf Person ad Eurip. 
 Eeo i) which, being derived from a perfect, has the sense of ' completed 
 action ' Ind was rightly translated by the Latins adsum^' that the Amhraciots 
 now in Olp<B were arrived;' or, as we should say— 'as soon as they heard of 
 the arrival of the Amhraciots now in OlpcB.' It is strange that Pop., after 
 givino- the correct translation for finovras-' venisse/should quote Duker: 
 
374 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 ' Interpres — Amhracioias, qui apud Olpas erani, venire. Sed non apparet eos 
 ab Olpis diseessisse, nam et mox dicit /col irpocreiu^ai' [oi UeXoTofvliaioi] -rols h 
 "OAirais 'A-fiirpaKiciTats/ and then addj * et ^Ketf est venisse^ adesse ;' as if the 
 matter admitted of doubt. o Jflu — ' in turn,' i. e. next, 
 
 jrap' fo-xaTK — 'skirting along the frontier' (at. viii. 95, eV ^o-xaTo). 
 
 (4.) Ai/ivatas. Poppo has a long note, the substance of which is that Miiller's 
 map is wrong in placing Agrsea between the Acarnanian Limnaea and the Argive 
 territory, in such a way that it should reach the sea. For the united Acarnanians 
 and Amphilochians would never have permitted themselves to have been cut off 
 from the sea, and consequently from Athenian succour, by such a narrow slip 
 of ground. Besides, the Agrasi, being allies of the other party, would in that 
 case have ofifered some opposition to the Acarnanians when moving up to aid 
 the Amphilochians. The nearest road from Limnsea probably led through the 
 Argive territory ; but Euryloehus preferred a longer and safer route to Argos, 
 in order to avoid the Acarnanians who were waiting for him at Crense. That 
 the Agrffian territory lay towards Olpso is clear from iii. 1 1 1 . 
 oyttCTi 'AKUpi/avlas — 'which is no longer Acarnania, hut friendly to them' 
 (sc. the Acarnanians). \a^6p^evoi. Cf. note, xxiv. supra. 
 
 0vdii.ov 6povs. 'Spartanoros (so. Sparto-vuni) nunc esse, cui continens sit 
 Macrinoros docent Kruse, p. 302, et Leake, iv. 251.' — Poppo. a,ypo7Kov — 
 
 ' uncultivated,' used somewhat in the sense of Hyp^os, wild. 
 
 Chaptee CVII. — yiijTp6wo\iv. This appears to have been part of the hill 
 of Olpse, but why so called it does not appear. * A name,' says Thirlwall, ' per- 
 haps connected with the ancient importance of Olpae.' Arn. conjectures that 
 the spot was chosen by the Acarnanians as the scene of their national court 
 ((toific Smacrriipiov), from some tradition representing it as the earliest settle- 
 ment of their race. Bloomf. identifies it with the southern peak of the hiU 
 now called Mnrovuni. Peile quotes, ' Mons Idaeus, ubi et gentis cunabula 
 nostr0B.'^.<^ra. iii. 103. Ta7s e^KOfft. Cf. cv. A77M0- 
 
 aBivTfv -Befri. The MSS. vary, with a preponderance towards the last. But 
 as the former is always found elsewhere, Kriiger substitutes it here. The 
 truth is that both forms were current. Thucydides would probably be con- 
 sistent in his orthography, but a transcriber to whose ear both forms were 
 familiar would naturally glide from one into the other. X''P'*Sp''- 
 
 The dry bed of one of the numerous mountain torrents running into the 
 sea. Kal fiei^ov ydp. The Herodotean use of 7ap — expressing the 
 
 reason for what follows (Ixx.). irepiecrxf — 'overlapped (or out- 
 
 Jianked).' Cf. v. 71. Kara ri uirsp exov ruv ivavTiup — 
 
 'over against that portion of the enemy which overlapped their own line.' So 
 in the next chapter, rh Ka8' kavTois. ohiyuv. The sixty men- 
 
 tioned at the beginning of the chapter, rfi 5€ SaXo ... is e/co- 
 
 o-Toi . . . iirilx""- ^^^- compares i. 48, rb 5^ SaAo ainoX iire^x""' "id 
 Herod, ix. 31, iwe^xo" ol ttepiroi roiis TeyeiiTas, from which it appears that 
 the word is almost a technical one for occupying a position in the line — ' the 
 Acarnanians came next and filled up the rest of the line.' 5is enaffTot means — 
 ' in their several tribes,' which like the Scotch clans always fought in separate 
 bodies. Cf. i. 3. For avajxll, cf. with Kriig., Herod, vii. 41. 
 
Chap, m.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 
 
 375 
 
 Chaptbe CVIII.— Tip K 4 fa.— 'with their [left] wing.' is a\KT)v 
 
 vtroixitvai — ' wait to make any resistance,' like h x«''p«s uTOfLetvai, v. 72. 
 t4 Kar' Evpi\oxov. This use of the preposition should be contrasted with 
 that in the last chapter—' that part of the army by Euryloehus,' ' the division 
 of Eurylochus.' Compare Soph. Ajax, 775, Kaff rjfias otnor' ixp^^et l^ixv- 
 ri ToAii ToD spyov i^T\\Bov—' went through with (i. i^. executed) the best 
 part of the business.' There is no necessity to read eVel^Afloc with Bloomf . 
 Cf. i. 70, a i^iKBasatv. Kriig. however follows Bl., though, as he admits, 
 against MS. authority. airiSla^av. Bloomf. (ed. i.) wished to 
 
 read iirMaalav, but Pop. has rightly remarked that the preposition implies— 
 'from the place of combat.' Haase was wrong in asserting that Thucyd. did 
 not use the word, for aTioSui>(,ivTwp tous iKti is found in all MSS. in vi. 
 102. irpoffwinroi'Te s — 'tumbling in confusion^' to be distin- 
 
 guished from eiVTriirToi/Tes, said of a military force ttroioirey itself into a. town 
 for purposes of defence. €Te\evTa 'das 6\j/e. Lobeck ad Pir^M. p. 47 
 
 explains this — -rrapdrsii/ei' ecas o\fi4, Kal oiff ireAevTa. It is a species of brachy- 
 logy easily paralleled (i. 71, /ne'x/>' ToOSe iipiaBa) — 'was protracted to a late hour 
 and then ceased '— (i. e. was late before it ceased) ; Peile — 'ended at evening.' 
 Several MSS. however read is oif/i, which is somewhat confirmed byi. Si.iii. 78. 
 
 Cfaptek CIX. — t/Ievehdios. Cf. sup. chap. 100. iroA.iop- 
 
 K^ireTai — ' sTiall stand a siege' (lii.). v^Kpohs sine articulo — 
 
 'recovery of dead' (i. 57). Ati/iixrdeinis . . . (rwevSoprai. 
 
 Because the ^va-TptiTTjyoL are implied in the form of the expression. Kriig. aptly 
 cites Xen. Sell. i. 1. 10, *A\w(j8ia5rjs iK ^dpSeuv ij.eTa Mavrtdeov 'iinruiv ^inrop-t}' 
 (TavTis aneSpaaav. a^to\oy^raTOt — 'persons of consideration.' 
 
 ipt\u<rai. Explained by the Scholiast, t/ztAoi/s tuv frv/j.p.dxwy TTOiijaaL — 'tostrip 
 them of their allies' (i.e. to isolate them). rhi/ ijki(r0o<p6poi> Sx^on. 
 
 As these are mentioned beside the Mantinfeans, it is plain that they were not 
 Mantinaeans. Some suppose them to have been auxiliaries collected by the 
 Lacedasmouians out of Peloponnesus. Poppo thinks they may have been 
 Peloponuesians other than Lacedasmouians or Mantinaeans, considering that the 
 antithesis is not so much between Vls\oirofifr](rio:v and fjLiiTdo(p6pov as between 
 a^io\oy(iTaroi and ox^ov. Bloomfield's opinion is, that as no mention has been 
 made of any mercenaries accompanying Euryloehus, ch. loa, these were some 
 forces got together by the Ambraciots, most probably Bpirots. 
 Sia^aKeiv is rovs "EWTivas — 'bring them into odium with the Qreelcs 
 (or in the eyes of the Greeks).' So m^ i^ '^"^s avii.iJ.axovs SiaflATjSoiin;/, iv. 22. 
 TrpovpytaiTepou — 'made their own interest an object of more importance.' 
 irpoiipyov is irph epyov—the object proposed in any action. thffirep 
 
 yTTTipx^v — ^' *^' ^^ "^"^ vTTapx^vTav — 'as far as the means to do so were in their 
 power.' ire$oi\evoy. Kriig. truly remarks that ^iri indicates 
 
 the treachery practised against their confederates. 
 
 Chaptek ex. — Siyye^^lay. See sup. cv. piepos ri—' a con- 
 
 siderable portion ' (i. 23). 
 
 Chapter CXI. — ■!rp6ct>aa-it'. Adverbi.il usage of the accusative. Compare 
 such phrases as rnvTa. rpoirov and the instances collected by Matthias, § 425. 
 
376 JfOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 It may be classed under the cases of an acensative with elul, Sec., ' denoting the 
 existence of some quality in some particular place or relation' (Jelf, § 579. 
 3), as may be seen from the instance there quoted : 
 
 Tl6,TpoK\ov irpiipaffLV, a^uv 6* avruv K-t}Se* €Kd(rT7],^IL six. 302. 
 
 Kriig. quotes v. 80, but there we have ■irp6(pacrtv Trofli<ras ; and vi. 33, which 
 seems a really parallel case, for there we have Trp6<pauiv /j.€v standing absolutely, 
 as opposed to rh Se a^Tjfle's. Duk. ef. Enrip. Iph. in A. 362, and Dem. 18. 77. 
 Kaxa-via 11.61/, The Kaxava Bloomf. believes to have been the wild cabbage 
 mentioned by Gell. {Morea, p. 19 1), and still a common article of food in 
 Greece. He compares iv aypioifri toIs Kaxavois ovtos Tpa(psis, Arist. Thesmoph. 
 457. KttT* ohiyovs — ^ a few at a time * Scoi fiev . . . 
 
 ^vvf\B6vTes — ' com plura sunt in qnibus hie offendimns.' — Pop. In the first 
 place the particle ;uec would seem to distinguish the party who have just been 
 described as leaving in a body, from some others, whereas no others are sub- 
 sequently mentioned. This is true ; yet it may be questioned whether there is 
 not an implied reference to those left behind — • as Ttiany indeed (or, that is to 
 say) as left together/ for the rest (either such as remained, or such as left sepa- 
 rately) were not engaged in the transaction described. In the second place he 
 contends that ovtois has no meaning. It seems obvious to suggest that it refers 
 to iTrl Kaxa-viffiJ.6v — * in this way that I have described the others going.' But 
 Poppo contends that this would have been In' airh iKeivo; a much more 
 natural expression certaiuly, but must Thucydides necessarily have adopted it ? 
 We might perhaps compare iEsch. Ag. 695, dydXaKTov oBtus, where Klunsen 
 translates — ' ita leonem quidam nutrivit;' and adds, oBtws similitudinem iuducit, 
 ut 0I0S vers. 388. Pop. conjectures ivns to be connected with ervyxo-vov, as 
 ^vve^e\66i/Tes with Spiir}<rai>, and urges that Thucyd. never couples the imp. 
 ^T^iyxavov with an aorist participle. On what principles one is to prove this 
 negative is not clear. Peile simply translates — * to have come with them in this 
 ivay.' It is perhaps worth remarking that oOraJs, like the Homeric outws, is 
 sometimes used to express carelessly, without studied design. See Buttmann's 
 able note on Dem. u. 3Iidiam, § 21 B: ii/ avvovaia tivI koI SiaTpi$-p oStus IBia 
 ■ — ' in a private party as one may say, and no more.' Cf. St. John iv. 6, ixaBe- 
 ^€To oStws inl TTj vTiyy. FoT (icTot fi^v Krug. conjectures ^(ronrep. He considers 
 ovTus obscure, but would explain — * die sowie es eben der Fall war gesammeW 
 (* who had so got together into a body '), referring to cv. eOeoif 
 
 Spifiif — 'ran at speed.' See Kriig. Xen. Anab. i. 8. 11. It seems to have 
 been a technical military phrase — 'went at the double quick.' So again iv. 67 
 and 112. From such phrases the tiro will perceive how the dative in so many 
 eases merged into an adverb. iiriKaraKaBf'ii' — 'catch them up.' 
 
 7/ff(fvTtff6 Tts. * Tts est hie nostrum mancher' — Poppo. ris is used of a 
 )ierson with some degree of uncertainty and vagueness — some one person, or it 
 might be two. Am. is right in comparing Herod, iii. 140, ai/a/StjSr) Ke 5' ^ tij 
 ^ ohhiis — 'not more than one or two ;' and Xen. Anab. i. 8. 20, ra^evdrji'al rts 
 iKiytTo. Peile adds to these, for plural force of tu, Xvniiaoiiiii riv', Sn AeXu- 
 TT^juefffl' Utto, Eur. Ion, 1315, and Homer, Odys. xi. 502. Compare the Latin 
 uou-nemo ; as, • Non istum ut non-neminem proviucia corrupit,' Cic. contra 
 
Chap. 112.] NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. 377 
 
 Verrem, ii. 2. 16; and 'Video de istis, qui se popularos Imberi volunt, abesse 
 non-nemineui,' Cic. in Cat. iv. 5. Madvig remarks : ' By non-nemo, one or. 
 two, some few defined bat not named persons are always indicated,' § 493. 0. 
 But after all I confess I do not see why the ordinary sense of the word is not 
 probable. The enormity of the action was quite enough to make it remarkable 
 in a single individual, and the regular construction with a singular participle 
 makes it doubtful whether more than one person be meant. This has 1 see also 
 sti'uck Kriig., who says — ' tij manoher zu iibersetzen, wird vaiiliras kaura 
 gestatten.' SiaKotriovs fj-ep rtcas — ' some two hundred.' 
 
 'A-ypaiSa. Poppo prefers 'A7parfSa,as the cognate term n\oTailj occurs ii. 71. 
 3. Lob. (ad JPhrj/n. p. 41) and Kriig. take the opposite view. 
 
 Chaptee CXII. — (a.) 'ISofxevTiv. The exact locality of the 5i5o \6il>a has 
 not yet been well ascertained. See Arnold's note. Either the pass which led 
 from the ridge of Macrinoros into a large valley or plain (seen in the surveys), 
 which extended to the shore, or the entrance to the hills from the plain of 
 Arta, called Palea Kulia, may be meant by effjSoA.^. Thv 8e 
 
 e^atriTw . . . Trpoava^dvTes. Kriiger conjectures is Se rhv or is rbv Ss, as 
 he does not believe that the preposition would be omitted in good Attic prose. 
 On the other hand Plato's authority has been produced against him — avaBdyres 
 & 5?) avTOts ox^jUara icrriv (PhcedOt I13 d). airh effirepas. On the 
 
 usage of the preposition see MatthiiB, § 573, and Jelf, § 620, who quotes 
 Suiryov 'e\ovro, airh S^Ittvov Soip^irtroi/To [II. viii. 53), and a-nh deiiri/ov. Her. vi. 
 129. In these instances airh signifies departure from a 'point in respect of time, 
 as elsewhere in respect of place. So we have airb irpdjTou Sttvov, vii. 43. Kriig. 
 refers to his own Anab. vi. j. 23. ipSpa. ' Paulo post, vvkt}is en 
 
 oSffrjs; et iv. no, pvKrhs en Kai nepi opSpov.' — Poppo. This confirms the state- 
 ment of Phrynichus (p. 275, ed. Lobeck) that SpOpos is the period just preceding 
 the dawn, when a lantern might still be used. Kriig. cf. iv. no, and Plat. 
 Protag. 310 A: ttjj irapeXOoiaits vvKrhs Tavrttai, in PaBeos 6p6pov. 
 6T1 ip TaTs etryats. Cf. iv. 32. Kriig. 
 
 (6.) TrpoHra^e Kol eKs'Xeuf. The imperfect, says Arn., is used where the 
 sense would seem to require the aorist. But his explanation is in exact accord- 
 ance with the theory which has been all along maintained in reference to the 
 aorist, and it is accordingly quoted in his own words, ' That these tenses are 
 often varied in a narration is well known, the aorist simply stating the fact, the 
 imperfect converting it, if I may so speak, into a picture, by representing it as 
 still going on, and not altogether past.' See the note on iii. 22. 
 AupiSa ■yKaCffay Uvras. A.ra. com^&res livnva yXSuraav 'ie(ra.v olUeXaajol 
 (Herod, i. 57). The phrase is much varied by Aristophanes. Its Latin analogue 
 is vocem mittere. irlariv -napexoi^evoxis—' maTcing themfeel confidence.' 
 Arn.; 'fiduciam injicientes,' Poppo; 'calling up a feeling of security,' Peile ; 
 'Vertrauen erregend,' Kriig. Ka6opa,i:.epovs ttj iii)/ei. 
 
 Portus translates— ' 2«o(2 eorum fades cerni non posset,' to which Poppo assents. 
 
 So too Peile 'their faces could not he distinguished.' Others interpret — 
 
 'Jith their eyes,' as in the phrases ip6ii<f eeiv, cxi.; and Xciyc^ elTreTv, i. 22; 
 'K.ra.g.—' ihrer Erscheinmg nach: UUv. Cf. 1. 
 
 109, iii. 81. "/"> ''"'' ^pyo" '■ji |">'Tuxi'?. Arnold 
 
378 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 has — 'whilst the action, leas taking -place' But the word seems to imply 
 that the event was v. sort of accident. Cf. t\ ^vvrvxla ttjs Tnjurepat xpf^os, 
 i. 33. et Set — * if needs must he.' titrh t&v fiap^dptav. 
 
 The Amhraciots affected to regard the Amphilochians as barbarians, because 
 they were in reality a mixed race, mostly of Pelasgian extraction. See ii. 68. 
 Cf. Granville Sharp's canon, and note on i. 18. 
 
 Chapiee OXIII. — This chapter affords an admirable praxis upon the Greek 
 pronouns, but offers no difficulty to a reader fairly acquainted with their usage. 
 'Aypatovs. Cf. ii. 102, iii. 106, III, 114. ttjs irpi-rris nixvs- 
 
 Cf. supra, cvii., cviii. lueri <T<pwt>. This refers to the herald and 
 
 those by whom he was sent. Poppo remarks that the plural ffip^ls is often 
 used where one person only is mentioned but more are meant (iv. 28, v. 58). 
 'i^on^vats. See cv. and note on ii. 7. /xaAicTa — 'somewhere 
 
 about two hundred.' It would be quite unnatural in this place to interpret ' two 
 hundred fullt/.' (paivirai — ' are clearly seen to he,' 'plainly are.' 
 
 See note on i. x. eXinp ye — 'yes certainly, if , as we must suppose, 
 
 you were the persons who fought yesterday in Idomene' eitrep here again denoting 
 an assumed hypothesis. irpditjv — * nudius tertius ;' 'the day before 
 
 yesterday.' Kal fiev-S^ rodrois — ' and yet these undoubtedly are 
 
 the men we fought with yesterday.' Pop. refers to Heindorf. Frofag. 4. ' Parti- 
 culsB Kol fiiv Sii ut ssepe simillimae Kal ^V cUm asseveratione adversandi vim at 
 vero habent. Non usitatoe sunt /ca! fiiv Sti, quas restitui vult Bloomf.' — Poppo. 
 ipiBfi.6y. Kriig. cites Eur. Seraclid. 669, iroWoi^ apiB/xiiv &\\ov ouk I^* 
 (ppdcat. 4^f\e7v — as in iv. 69 and v. 43. 'The reason was per- 
 
 haps operative, but not the only one. It would have made them afraid of 
 Athenian co-operation at Lenkas. The displeasure arising from the former re- 
 fusal of Demosthenes had never been appeased, and they were glad to mortify 
 him in a similar manner.' — Grote. Perhaps the recollection of Phormio's arbi- 
 trary proceedings put them on their guard. Thirlwall. 
 
 Chaptee CXIV. — rplrov liepos. 'Dem. had 300. The Athenians must 
 have had at least six times as many, i. e. 1800. But this was only a third part, 
 and many stragglers were slain beside. Therefore the slain were about 6000.' 
 —Grote. irKeovTa kd\u — ' in navigatione,' Voppo; ' during the 
 
 voyage,' 'at sea.' ^Ippefl-rja'ar agrees with the latter nominative, 
 
 viz. that placed in apposition. Poppo quotes Tae. Ann. xiii. 37, ' Insechi, gens 
 hand alias socia Romanis, avia Arraenise incursavit.' Of this Kriig. says* * bier 
 doch hart.' But why especially so ? The word originally implying selection, 
 it comes to signify dedication of spoils to the Gods, as being in that case 
 selected. Duker quotes Thomas Magister in voce 4(e7\e — ^eTKe t$ SeTvi 
 yepas, Ka\ i(iipe. ^ KaSoSos. This, the technical term for return 
 
 from exile (Herod, i. 60), is used because Demosthenes by his voluntary ex- 
 planation had placed himself in an exile's position. 4(rncia-avT0 
 — because, as Pop. remarks, they had no ships to take them home. 
 fieTav4irTn(ray here as elsewhere (i. i. 12, ii. 16) denotes change of locality 
 and habitation. Had the writer been anxious to define the precise relations of 
 time in these movements he must have used the pluperfect ; but as he merelv 
 
Chap. Ii6.] NOTES ON THUOYDIDES. 379 
 
 dwelt upon ihefact, the aorist was the natural tense. Am. justly compares &v 
 KOTttSiio-Eiai', i. 50. Ttaph %aXvvBlov. This is Hermann's now universally 
 
 received correction for 'SaXiv9iov, which after tois iis %aKivBiov Kara<pvyovatii is 
 inadjnissihle. Am. translates — 'to which place [i.e. CEniadse] they also had 
 removed from Salynthius.' His explanation is that their return to their own 
 country was cut off by the Acamanians and Amphilochians, and that they had 
 accordingly accompanied the Peloponnesians to (Eniadae. Poppo connects ^| 
 OlviaSav otherwise — 'faedere faoto ex CEniadis, qui a Salynthio discesserant, 
 abeundi [in Peloponnesiam et Acamaniam] potestatem dederunt.' Grote alone 
 would retain irapk 'XaXivBwv, believing that OiViiiSaii< is not here the name of the 
 place but of the inhabitants : ■ As the word is already in the patronymic form it 
 would be difficult to deduce from it a new nomen gentile.' He tr. — ' safe retreat 
 was granted to AmbraTciots and Peloponnesians from the (Eniada, who also [as 
 well as Ambrakiots and Peloponnesians] went up to the territory of Salyn* 
 thius.' ^irl ToitrSe — ' on these conditions' MatthiiE, § 479. a. ; 
 
 Jelf, 836. J. c. Sio Tr)S ijiretpov. Most MSS. have "Hirftpon 
 
 though the Corinthians in passing over to Ambracia could not possibly cross 
 Epirus. See sup. xciv. 
 
 Chaptee CXV. — rSiv Si/ceXiDi'. A necessary correction for SiKeA.ionSi', the 
 reading of the MSS. The Greek settlers were called SikcAiStoi ; the 2ik6\oi, 
 according to Thucydides vi. 2, were a barbarous tribe, or rather congeries of 
 tribes, inhabiting the central portion of the island (vi. 88). This agrees (as 
 Bloomf. observes) with what is subsequently said about making an invasion 
 from the upper part of the country. Besides, as the 2iK€AiwTai were divided 
 between the Syracusans and Athenians, one party of them would scarcely have 
 been described as 01 ^ikcAiStoi. But the 2iKe\ol were at that time allies of 
 Athens (iii. 103, iv. 25). Perhaps the best resume of Sicilian affairs is that 
 given by Thirlwall in iii. 22. It is necessary to a full understanding of the 
 narrative of Thucydides, and should be mastered by the student. See also 
 Grote, vii. ch. 57. IlvedSiepop — possibly the man mentioned as 
 
 archon when the war began (H. 2). €irl ras vavs—'who had leen 
 
 sent to command the fleet.' Adxv s-recalled for peculation. See 
 
 Aristoph. Fesp. 240. Bloomf. 2o<|>oKA.€a— afterwards one of the 
 
 Thirty Tyrants, according to conjecture. elpyiiievot—' as being 
 
 excluded from the KSe of the sea by but a few ships, they were engaged in pre- 
 paring a fleet with the intention of not putting up with it.' Pop. cf. Ixxxviii. 
 
 Chapteb CXVI.— irepl ahrh t!) cap toCto. ' Ufpl «Vcffi, sub, qnum jam 
 appropinquaret hoc ver.'-Pop. i P " "?-' rivus ignis,' Plin. S. N. 
 
 106 231; 'der Fuerstrom,'—'the Sruption.' Thucyd. means the flood of 
 lava. -Kriig. refers to Heind. Plat. Fhced. 139. The root is i,4a,. Then ^uj,s 
 ?« = iue'w, °perf- epP'^'!'"'- The article indicates the notoriety of the pheno- 
 ^g^oji ' ri irpi^Tcpoc adverbially — ' on the previous occasion.' 
 
 ■.r^vrriHoarS tr^i . . . I^^rh rh ^pSr.poy ^d/xa. 'According to the 
 computation 'of Thucydides the previous eruption occurred 01. Ixxvi. 2, i.e. 
 B C. 47S, sixteen years before the victory of Hiero, commemorated by Pmdar m 
 the' first Pythian, when he refers to Etna and its eruptions.'— Goller. ' Ac- 
 
380 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES. [Book III. 
 
 cording to the Parian marble the eruption of Etna took place 01. Ixxv. 2, i. e. 
 B.C. 479. This Bockh and Kriiger consider to have been the rb Trpdrepov 
 jxvijLa. meant by Thucydidea. The former supposes that either Thucydides 
 spoke loosely in round numbers, or that the eruption lasted for several years. 
 The latter supposes that e' (the numerical symbol for 5) has been lost before 
 the word €T€i. Or the eruption mentioned in the Parian marble may be the 
 third of Thucydides, since it is clear from the expression •jrp6repov that Thucy- 
 dides knew of no eruption between the two which he mentions.' — Poppo. 
 rplj jf-yf vrj<r 8 ai. The third eruption here mentioned is not to be identified 
 with that which, as we learn from Diodorus (xiv. 59} and Orosius (ii. 18), oc- 
 curred 01. xcvi. I, i.e. 396. QouKvSldrjs ^vveypa^ey, Cf. i. i, 
 20 — 23; V. 20. 
 
APPENDIX I. 
 
 Ok Book II. t. 90 — ^irl t^v cavruf yrjy. 
 
 The controversy whicK this passage has excited would fill a moderate volume. 
 Mr. Grote alone has devoted to it ten octavo pages of very small print. Under 
 these circumstances, I can merely give what appears to be the most plausible 
 interpretation, and reply to the objections which have been urged against it. 
 I should tr. — 'the Feloponnesians getting under weigh at dayhreah, directed their 
 course in a column four abreast upon their own coast, inward, in the direction 
 of the gulf, with the right wing leading, in which order also they had been lying 
 at their moorings.* Mr. Grote, on the other hand, interprets in\ t^ kavrwp yriv 
 as the Athenians' own land, meaning thereby the northern shore of the gulf, 
 in the neighbourhood of Naupactus. No one, I imagine, would naturally adopt 
 this view. It is only tolerable if the objections against the other be fatal. Let 
 us examine them. 
 
 (i) 'Though the Scholiast explains iirX by irapi, it is impossible for it to 
 have any such meaning. With an accusative ctti must mean against, with 
 hostile intent, and this meaning is inconsistent with the above interpretation.' 
 I have already intimated my belief that hostile intent is a secondary not a 
 primary meaning of M with the accusative [i. 30, a. 54, a]. The primary 
 meaning is ' motion on to a fixed point.' The secondary notion flows from this, 
 and is connected with the actual meeting or confronting that which is hostile 
 to us ; the actual coming into contact with opposition. That iTrl followed by 
 an accusative does not of necessity connote ' hostile purpose/ may be seen by 
 many examples furnished by the lexicons and grammars. In the present case 
 we need not go far for an instance very much to the point. Prom ii. 86 
 we learn irapeVAeuire S^ Kol i iopniuv i-irl rh 'Plov t!) W.aXvKpm6v . . . 
 iv Se rovTO fiif Tb 'Piov <pl\iov Tois 'Adrivaiois. I do not therefore at all ac- 
 cept the necessity for any such meaning as ' hostile purpose.' The preposition 
 I believe has its original meaning, and I compare to it our own military 
 usage of the preposition ' upon,' which does not mean ' on the top of anything,' 
 as a foreigner might suppose, but in the direction of— e.g. 'the advanced guard 
 will move upon Quatre-Bras.' It is here employed rather than Trapi, because 
 the coast, as the map shows, makes a sweep upward to the north. Conse- 
 quently the fleet in advancing eirw rov ic6Kmv, would naturally seem to ha 
 advancing upon it, rather than parallel to it ; just as Phormion, ii. 86, ad- 
 vanced wpon the promontory of Bhium. There was also more occasion to 
 employ the accusative, as the genitive was wanted to express the general direc- 
 tion, the ultimate object of their course Ija toO kSKttov. 
 
382 APPENDIX I. 
 
 Arnold has weakened his own case greatly by referring to eVi cum dativo. 
 He does not, however, by any means say what Mr. Grote puts into his month ; 
 neither does he ' assign to M with an accusative a sense which he himself 
 admits it only has with a dative.' On the contrary, he claims for iirl with an 
 accusative a ' mixed notion,' of which M with a dative forms part. On the 
 other hand, he shows no clear pei-ception of the distinction between 'motion 
 upon a point ' [the accusative] and ' rest at a point ' [the dative]. 
 
 (2) 'Arnold explains ri/v eaurav ylif by Sicyon and Corinth, because some 
 of the ships came from these places. They are too distant ; the explanation is 
 far-fetched and improbable ; besides it is true of only part of the Peloponnesian 
 fleet.' Here again Arn. damages his own case. Surely a Peloponnesian fleet 
 might consider Peloponnesus as t) lauTwc yrj without descending into particu- 
 lars. At any rate, it was quite as much so as the northern coast could be rj 
 faurav 71) to the Athenians. Things are not described in ordinary narrative as 
 in a catalogue or inventory. In ch. 39 we have the whole Peloponnesian 
 party described as 01 Aaxfiaiiiovioi, because, as I have there said, ' the Lace- 
 demonians ' stood for, and symbolized to the Athenian mind, the aggregate of 
 their adversaries. So we speak of the French invasion of Bnssia, though it 
 was largely participated in by Germans and Italians. A somewhat similar 
 way of speaking is quite excusable here. 
 
 (3) ' If the Peloponnesian coast had been " hugged " by the enemy's fleet, 
 Phormion could have had no cause for alarm concerning Naupactns.' Why 
 not ? Phormion was outside of the straits, Nanpactus within them. Suppose 
 him to have remained outside, and the Peloponnesian fleet to have continued 
 their course to Panormus, what was to hinder them from making a sudden 
 dash across before he could double the promontory of Antirrhium and come to 
 tlie rescue ? Besides, a glance at the map will show that a fleet sailing from 
 Rliium, vpon the Achsean coast, i. e. towards Drepanum, would steer nearly 
 NXE. One or two more points of nortliing would put their heads in a direct 
 line for Naupactus. Phormion might well then suppose (co/t/o-as) that they 
 would probably make for that place. Had they been making straight for 
 Kaupactus, it wonld, despite of what Mr. Grote says, have been a case of 
 ' seeing,' not ' believing.' If a French flotilla were seen to quit Boulogne and 
 'move upon,' 'make for' (7r\cri' e'lrl). Cape Grisnez, I conceive that an English 
 fleet stationed opposite them might well be alarmed for the safety of Dover, 
 and would not be justified in remaining at anchor. This would be particularly 
 the case if the enemy's fleet consisted of screw steamers, to which the ancient 
 triremes may be considered in some respect analogous on account of their 
 power of rowing against the wind. 
 
 Those are I believe the most important objections which can be urged 
 against the interpretation of the passage which I have given. On the other 
 hand, the meaning advocated by Mr. Grote is so incompatible with the ordinary 
 nsage of cavTuii' that he has endeavoured to fortify it by a very large collection 
 of what he appears to consider similar instances. I cannot agree that the large 
 majority arc at all similar. With all proper deference, I must say that Mr. Grote 
 seems to have mistaken the real point at issue. It is not whether the reflexiv* 
 lavTUf may not be referred to more than one sort of antecedent, but whether 
 it is ever foimd where the antecedent would properly demand the demonstrativ* 
 
APPENDIX 1. 383 
 
 pronoun instead. In the present case, Mr. Grote himself would readily sub- 
 stitute ouToJ)' or iiceii/uv; in most of the cases cited by him it would be utterly 
 impossible to do so — e.g. iv. 97, elf iroi rU riva XSoi ix^P^" eouToB; ji. 95, 
 HfpSiKKas auTy viroax^t^^i'os, ei 'Aflijcalois 8ia\hd^eL€f ^avriv; Xen. Anab. iv. 7i 
 13, Aiyeias . . . tStic rtya Seovra ws fii^ovra ^avT6v, itrtKa/x^dy^Tai us aiirbv ttwA.i5- 
 crwc : Jfem. iv. 3. 14, 6 ^\ios ouk ^TriTpeVei toTs avBpanrois kavrhv aKpt^us bpav, &c. 
 In these cases if Mr. Grote alters the reflexive pronoun into the demonstrative, 
 he will obtain either no meaning at all, or one directly contrary to what the 
 author intended. But here, upon his hypothesis of the author's intention, 
 according to his own showing, a similar alteration would give the meaning with 
 certainty and clearness. In short, we want to know whether we can have the 
 reflexive pronoun in cases where we should have anticipated the demonstrative. 
 Nothing is proved in favour of the affirmative by producing cases where it is 
 impossible to expect the demonstrative at all. 
 
 One class of instances adduced by Mr. Grote it is perhaps desirable to notice, 
 because they involve a principle important to the younger scholar, which is not 
 very prominently brought forward in grammars and commentaries. Mr. Grote 
 justifies his loose way of taking kavjiav here, by the fact that eourou and ^Keivov 
 are sometimes found in the same sentence, in reference to the same person. 
 This is true j but a very cursory examination of Mr. Grote's passages will show 
 that they do not prove much in favour of his conclusion. The first is ii. 1 3, 
 HfpiKKTJs uiroTOTT^ffas, 'drt 'Apx^Sa^os oury ^4i/os &f er/ryxot^^y f^h iroK\dKiSt^ 
 ttvrhs iSltf ^ov\6tJ.evos x^^pK^f^^^ "^oi/s aypobs avTOu 'irapa\itTr] «al fi^ SridtiaTif fj 
 Kal AttKcSdifioviwi' K^Ksvudvrav ^irX Sia$oK^ t^ eavrov yevqTat toDto, Sxnrfp 
 Kal Ta &yrj i\avveiy irpoe^irov eVeKa iKelvovy irp(ytjy6pev€ K.r.K. But here all 
 is quite regular. Any one acquainted with the genius of the language, will per- 
 ceive that the introduction of the word irpouirov completely changes the point 
 of view from which the person is regarded, and with it the pronoun by which 
 he is designated. S irn-oTovfia-as must have the reflexive, because both refer to 
 the same person ; 01 vpoairdvTes on the contrary would naturally speak of him 
 fts iKe7vos, 
 
 Ao-ain iv. 99, Ol 5e BoiwtoI aneKpivavrOi el fifv ^v rp Bowria eltrlv [^ot *A07;- 
 ratoi], ctiri(Jj/Tas efc t^s eauTcS;' OTroipe'peo'flai r^ fftperepa' et Se iv rrj eKeivaiv, 
 aiiTovs yiyv^iTKfiv rh iroiTjTe'oj'. In this most interesting passage [see commen- 
 tary ad locum], the whole thing turns upon the fact that the dispute about 
 locality is described strictly from the Boiotian point of view. The Boeotian 
 herald had orders to say if Delium was theirs (eavTuv) the Athenians might 
 depart on certain terms ; if it belonged to the other farty {iKdvav), they of 
 course could do as they chose with their own. 
 
 In Xen. Kell. i. i. 27, iavTav refers to the generals as regarded by them- 
 selves, and iKi'waiv to the same generals, as regarded by those who had to elect 
 them. The pronouns could not be interchanged without violating the sense, 
 and neither this, nor either of the two previous passages, afford the least 
 countenance to such a misapplication of the reflexive pronoun, as Mr. Grote's 
 translation of the present one appears to me to exhibit. 
 
APPENDIX n. 
 
 On the Geeek Aobist. 
 
 I WOUID propose to arrive at the meaning of the Aorist, as a tense of the 
 Greek Verb, by the process of exhaustion. 
 
 We can only comprehend the true mutual relation of the tenses, or fimes, 
 expressed by the verb, by regarding them from one fixed point of view. 
 
 Such a central stand-point in time, as the individual himself is in space, is 
 found in the presents 
 
 All other tenses or times must take up their position on one side of this or 
 the other. 
 
 First then of those behind it : — 
 
 (i) One denotes an action simply past in reference to this point — the past 
 in reference to the present. This is the proper perfect. 
 
 (2) Another denotes an action ^a^i in a complex or twofold way: i.e. past 
 in reference to some point of time, which is itself past in reference to the 
 present — the past in reference to the past. This is the pluperfect. 
 
 (3) Another denotes an action in a state of passing, and arrested at some 
 given point, which point is either the present, or past; perhaps, strictly speak- 
 ing, always the last. This is the imperfect. 
 
 We have next to consider those times which lie at the other side of the 
 present. 
 
 (i) One denotes an action future in respect of the present, without standing 
 in determinate relation to any other point of time — future in reference to tha 
 present. The future, commonly so called. 
 
 (2) Another denotes an action future in respect of the present, but past in 
 reference to some determinate point which is itself future in respect of the 
 present — the future in reference to the present, but past in reference to future 
 time. The second fitture, or future perfect. 
 
 This is an exhaustive analysis of the notion of time, or tense, as employed m 
 the description of action. 
 
 Or, again, to take another method of analysis : — 
 
 Every action is either complete or incomplete. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in present time = Perfect ['I have . . .'], or present. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in past time ~ Pluperfect or imperfect. 
 
 Complete or incomplete in future time = Future perfect or future. 
 
 Here then we have a complete apparatus of tense or time for describing any 
 action in its tempoial relation to any other action, and when such is our obji-ct 
 
APPENDIX II. 385 
 
 we employ one of the above forms, among which, it is to be noted, the aorist 
 finds no place. 
 
 But we may also merely mean to declare the occurrence of an action without 
 any object of the sort. Most languages employ for that purpose one of the same 
 tenses as would have been employed had the expression of a temporal relation 
 been required. The Greeks, who were, I believe, ' far more accurate speakers 
 and thinkers than ourselves,' seeing that a tense properly connoting a special 
 temporal relation ought not to be used where none such is implied, adopted a 
 narrative tense, to serve simply as such, without any connotation of the rela- 
 tions of time at all. This tense was the aorist, or indefinite, indeterminate 
 tense ; and they made use of it when they merely wanted to say that something 
 had happened, without stopping to give any special information concerning the 
 relation in time of this something to anything else; when, in short, the fact 
 was prominent in their mind, and the time of the fact altogether subordinate. 
 
 To this usage belong the great mass of aorists which encounter us in narrative. 
 It is needless to give examples ; though some few have been pointed out in the 
 foregoing notes. 
 
 But there are several particular usages of the aorist which so strongly 
 illustrate the principle, that it may be instructive to refer very briefly to 
 them. 
 
 First, then, we have that common and acknowledged use of the aorist, wherein 
 it is said to resemble the imperfect, and is predicated of anything ' wont to 
 happen,' e. g. eP\mf/e S6^a, Eur. Med.; yhpf Th <ppove7v iSiSa^av, Antig.; ai 8e 
 ftvplai ir6\eis, | K&y eS Tis olicfi, fi^las KaSi^piaav, (Ed. Col. 1 535 ; fieifous 8' Sras 
 iTov op-fi<r6\i I Saifiay, oIkois airiSaxiV, Med. 130; eirauire, ibid. 245; 4Koiix.i(re, 
 Ajax, 674. Instances, indeed, are quite innumerable. Now to consider these 
 identical with the notion of habitual or continued action described by the imper- 
 fect, seems to me altogether fallacious and unphilosophical. They describe what 
 has happened, is happening, and will happen again. To limit the action or event 
 to any particular time would destroy the whole force of the expression. No 
 special time is connoted, and therefore we have the true aorist, or indetermi- 
 nate tense. The Latins conveyed the same force more clumsily by the perfect : 
 'mollimt aversos Penates,' ' deduxit corpore febres,' Horace; 'illius immensae 
 raperunt horrea menses,' Virgil, Georg. i. 49> wl^ere Forbiger observes, ' signi- 
 fieatione aoristi Grseci pro " rumpere solent," quod ita expliees. Jam aliquoties 
 ruperunt, ideoque eSdem rerum conditione redeunte, etiam nunc rumpunt, et 
 posthac rumpent.' 
 
 In close connexion with this we have another usage of the aorist, which is 
 said to be nearly equivalent to the present. This occurs where the connotation 
 of pure past time is clearly inappropriate, and where the action described by 
 the aorist is generalized so as to take in the notion of the present. Thus Dr. 
 Peile explains eKo^a, Choeph. 410, ' I am in the predicament of one that before 
 now has beaten — and hence, a leater, or one that beats' We may compare 
 eirrnfo ev)i6v, (Ed. Col. 1466, 'I am in a state of terror;' cirj^so-o, Ajax, 536; 
 Meet. 1322 ; Alcest. 1047 ; eT€u|a, S. u. T. 835 ; eifpijo, Ajax, 674, and Trach. 
 Eost, § 151, notices this class of cases as one expressed in all other 
 1 nffuages by the present, and, rightly I think, translates them thus : 4y4Kacra, 
 . :„i, ,r,iiaa lachen :' vuwia, ' ich muss seufzen,' &c. 
 
386 APPENDIX II 
 
 From this indefinite acceptation of the tense, refusing, as it were, to connote 
 any exact temporal relation, we find grammarians and commentators telling us 
 that it stands first for one tense, then for another, as e. g. for the pluperfect 
 (Buttmann, Large Or. Gr). Of this no further proof is requisite than an 
 examination of that carefully edited and popular school-book, Xenophon's 
 Anabasis, by Macmichael (Grammar School Classics, 1851). There we find, 
 without advancing beyond lib. i. the aorist said to be put for the future [1. 2. 2], 
 for the pluperfect [i. 4. 5], for the perfect [i. 6. 6], indift'erently with the 
 imperfect [i. 9. 19]. Now, it is impossible to conceive that the Greeks can 
 have interchanged their tenses in this wild way. What we should say is, that, 
 in any of the above cases, had the writer wished accurately to connote the time 
 of the fact, and not simply to mention it, he might have used the future, or the 
 perfect, &c., instead of the aorist. It is from the wide circumference of meaning 
 which this indeterminate sense of the aorist embraces, that it seems to trespass 
 upon the province of the other tenses. Nay, it does so even with regard to the 
 future, which is a source of no small difiiculty and vexation to those commenta- 
 tors who persist in fixing upon it a definite connotation of past time. Such, for 
 instance, is its employment after verbs of promising, with an obviously future 
 Ibrce, e. g. viroffx^fi^pos outoTs /i^ np6(r6fv Trainratrdai, TrpXv avrobs KaTaydyoi olffcaSe, 
 Xen. A.nah. i. 2. 2. koI Trepl fiiv Tovrav i/iretrx^'^^ M^* ^ov\€v(ra(r0ai, ibid, ii. 
 3. 20. ovK oZv xph '^ov Bavdrov rp Cv/^^f TTttTTevfTavTas x^*poi' fiov\^itraa6ai, 
 Thuc. iii. 46, said of the still pendent decision. tiKhs 5e elvai noWoits ottoXt;- 
 <l)6TJifai €|w, vi. 49, of a probable case, upon which G611. remarks : ' Aoristus pro 
 future post uk6s, ^\irls et similia frequens est.' i] fjLrjTTip vvv ^ev oTerai rvx^vra 
 u€ Ttov SiKaiiup Trap* vfuy inroSf^atTBat [Reiske, e couject. vToSe^iffdai] Kal rijp 
 i.Se\<l>i]v iKSJiirnv, Dem. p. 842. 21. Here we have of two future events, the 
 p.orist and future infinitives in conjunction. In a similar manner, 
 
 fttrfp ydp Te Kai ai/riK* 'OXtSjuirios ovK IriKeffaev, 
 fK T( Kal o^e TeXei, avy re fiiydKai aireTiffac, 
 
 II. iv. 160, we have both tenses together, and as the fact denoted by the last 
 depends upon the first, it is absurd to say that it is more certain. And in the 
 other moods, we may remark the same connexion with the future, e. g. ^ireiSo*' 
 itnrvri<Ta,ufv, Anab. iv. 6. 17, is said of a problematical event. I believe that a 
 similar absence of temporal connotation is found sometimes with respect to the 
 aor. part.: e.g.ruv ^vfnro\efi7jadi'Tui' npoUxovTfs, Th\ic. i. 18, must, in its 
 collocation, be nearly equivalent to ^vp.fidxt»f. From this it follows, not that 
 the aorist can be indifferently substituted for any other tense, but that it may 
 stand for any tense, where the notion of the time connoted by that tense is 
 absent from the writer's thoughts. No tense limiting action to time would 
 S'dem so proper as the aorist iti^aaa of John xvii. 4, or ol-pt}^ iZivrt^ Koi Tttanv- 
 croi'Tes, XX. 2q. 
 
 From the absence of all connotation of time properly so called, comes that 
 very curious use of the aorist, to express, so to speak, acts not defined as 
 happening at any time at all. These could not properly be described by any 
 tense specifying an actual time of occurrence, and it strongly supports our 
 theory of the aorist to find that the aorist alone is employed for the purpose. 
 
APPENDIX II. 3S7 
 
 We find it accordingly in the description of unfulfilled purposes, and intended, 
 though incomplete, actions. See e. g. Soph. Aj. 1 1 26—7 : 
 
 MEN. SlKata ycip t6i'S* fiirvx^'tv kt etvavrd fa; 
 TETK. KTeli/avrai Seii/6v y' eTwas, ei koI ^fis Bavdiv. 
 
 Here the aorist has the sense of ' was my slayer' i. e. in intention, though not 
 in fact. The usage perfectly agrees with our theory of the aorist. That of the 
 great Hermann does not seem very intelligible : ' Prassens prohibitum esse 
 facere, aoristus fecisse sed sine effectu significat.' How to kill a aian without 
 affecting his death, seems rather a difficulty. Elmsley [SeraelidcB, 1000] 
 dogmatically asserts — 'Aoristus ejusque partieipium banc significationem 
 respuunt.' But cf. eKTcivd a' Svra, addressed to a living person, 7ob, 1291, 
 KTelnatra, Andromeda, 811, K\4^as, (Ed. Col. ioc8, said of an action attempted, 
 but never carried into execution. In Xen. Anab. ii. 6. 4, we find 4Bai'aT<i9ri ssai 
 of a person still alive, in fact, only sentenced to death; and Herod, vii. 10. 2, 
 supplies us with a very curious instance, ovk Sip afifoTfpri iripi. ix'^PV^i said 
 of what is future and hypothetical. 
 
 The general conclusion, therefore, at which we arrive is, that the aorist is 
 properly a narrative tense, not connoting any one particular determinate notion 
 of time, and that accordingly it is employed of actions or events occurring 
 under all sorts of relations of time. Hence the attempt to assign to it any 
 special temporal connotation tends to confound it with other tenses, and obscure 
 the true metaphysical conception of its nature. This is, I think, the fault of 
 Buttmann's theory, so generally accepted, that the aorist signifies momentary 
 action. It is very trne that, generally, the aorist is used to describe momentary 
 actions. But this must be so from the nature of the case, where the act is not 
 determined either in its occurrence or progress by defining its temporal relation 
 to other actions. Momenta/ry, in the sense of lasting for a moment, cannot be 
 assigned to the aorist as its essential signification. Many actions described by 
 the aorist last for a long time, and many actions lasting only for a moment are 
 described by the other tenses. Want of space forbids the enumeration of passages 
 which I bad selected in illustration. It is enough to quote Buttmann's own 
 translator, who cites II. i. 437 — 8, where the acts described by the aorist are of 
 as long duration as those described by the imperfect. Cf. note on 7rpot;To|e koX 
 ixeAeve, Thuc. iii. 112. Similarly, I do not think it right to assign, with Jelf, 
 and Mr. Shilleto (De Falsa Zegatione, p. 181), to the aorist, as its distinctive 
 sense, a meaning which is admitted to be proper to the perfect, i. e. to have 
 completed an action. The latter thus translates Thuc. vi. 23, iKirXeiu . . . ix- 
 ir\ev<raL, 'to commence the voyage, to have finished the voyage.' What then is 
 iKTreirKevKipai? Why should not the first mean 'now to be sailing,' and the 
 second speak merely in general terms, ' to sail ? ' Indeed, in the second passage 
 quoted by Mr. Shilleto, he seems to adopt a similar principle of explanation, 
 e. g. viii. 46, where he translates 4\evBcpovp, ' to liberate,' 4\€v6epSia-ai, ' not to 
 apply the principle in liberating.' It is to be wished that Mr. Shilleto would 
 turn his attention to the subject, as he is of all persons best qualified to eluci- 
 date it. There are many subordinate questions which would be benefited by 
 such an investigation. I do not, for instance, think the common rnles about /i-^ 
 with the imperative pres. and aor. subjunctive, quite satisfactory. Can it bf 
 
388 APPENDIX II. 
 
 proved that the first is always general, and the latter particular 1 It may be 
 particular, when followed by some particular objective ease, but is it so univer- 
 sally ? What, then, are we to make of Soph. Elect. 383 — 4 ? — 
 
 irphs ravra (ppd^ov, Kai fie fi-i^ voff tffrepov 
 Tradovaa fiifx^Tj. 
 
 Is not ix.)> kXcVte rather 'don't he stealing luym' Hibernice, 'don't he after 
 stealing;' i;nd fi.^ K\4\firis, 'don't steal,' and 'don't steal some particular thing,' 
 when that particular thing is mentioned ? 
 
 By way of conclusion, I would remark that we may answer the old stock 
 question [Elmsley ad Med. 78] very easily on the above principles. 
 
 irplv Sennie7v — ' hefore I am supping,' i. e. before I go to supper. 
 
 irplv SeSetiTj/ijKevai — • hefore I have done supper,' 1. e. before supper is over, 
 
 Trply SfLin'rjaal — perfectly general. Before supper time. 
 
 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA, Lib. I. 
 
 Chapteb 
 
 I. (a.) quce unquam gesta sunt. The ref. is Bloomfield's. But the 
 parallelism is removed if we tr. * which have ever been waged.' 
 VI. (a.) if ToTs irpuToi may perhaps stand as a nominative, the whole 
 three words having coalesced into one from habit, and being 
 so declined ; cf. iffrly 8t€ and similar phrases. 
 (d.) yet one Schol. has airiop aur^J rijs ^tt rjs iyiviTO. It is not 
 easy to see how. 
 XIII. (e.) after Bl. read ' take itotc with 5^ and tr. ' always, as I suppose 
 for certain, had a mart.' 
 XXXII. (S.) ad fin., ' cf. by all means, Dem. de Cor. p. 377, eis tV iTriouaar 
 irvXalav k.t.X.' 
 XXXIV. (J.) ad fin., ' or perhaps we may refer Stofifvois to the speakers, — 
 " so that you may not in a matter of deceit be led astray hy them, 
 and in a matter of open request refuse us assistance." ' 
 XLII. (c.) ad fin., ' rh does ndt, of conrse, appertain to the infinitive, but 
 ri TrXiov is the object of ex^ '"•' 
 L. (o.) ad fin., ' perhaps, after all, the term is intentionally technical 
 — performing the operation of the Sie'/crAous upon the dispersed 
 ships ; — charging them over and over again.' 
 LXIX. (c.) ad fiu.,/or 'supra a,' leg. 'supra b.' 
 XCVII. (i.) after 'importance,' add, 'see Appendix II.' 
 CVII. (J.) after Ku\iaftv, transpose ' and ffitWov, &c.' to the end of the 
 note on ^/icWoy, 
 
 GILBBET iND BITINGTON, IIMITID, ST. JOHN'S SQTJA2E, LONDON.